º * -º-º: - º - fººtºº § ºw.” w º: - *- * * * - * * *, * * * * *. * * *- : - - ſº, ºs *ºtº º Aº - ... * * *, * * * º ... "... sº: -- r - * …º.º. * º tº ... • * * * * * -º º º º: : Nº.ºº, i --R :: -- w : ** * * : * * , ~ *.*.* ** * * *…* º • : rººt. &exº~~ º [- * * *, *. - *.*.*.*.* *...** * * **** ** - - º: -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *, * > * ~~~ - - - - - º- -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- ºr La -º --> .* * * *.*.* " . - º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: sº-º-; * - - - w - - -: º * , as 's- ". . . wrº wºrºw ººº-º-, * * * - ** *-*. º ~ º --- ſºrºrº gº * assº - º "… - * * - - *** **, * : * > . * : "...º. - º: Tºº-sº º * * : * , rºº Eº w - C ... " * --> - - - --- - º - - - * *- .** - - - *: - Fº sº ...: - 3:::::::::::: Jº *:::::::- -* * * * * *.*.*.*.*.*.*. º §: tº º **** ſº is *-*. -*ts" ---> *...*&#.s.º.º. tº # 5 ºr ºº º sº =ºr --~s lººse--~~~~~~~~~er- ***** ***** *, *.*- * º-º-º-º-º-º: sº ***** *- Eº º ****** ºx. … .º.º.º.º.º.º.º.º. º, "º, seºwº, “...º. r. ºº:::::::::::::::::::::: *...* * * * *º. * * * ******* ******* * * * º - *::= ... * * - 3 * * º --> * * * ~~ w - - - - - - -- r - - d - - - Fºº-º-º- - ſº- ºr . * - º - - º-º-º- - - º * : * ~ * - º w - - * Exº~ * * * * * * * **** ... • ** * * * * . . . * * d - w * * ---, -, … a 's- ". . . . . . . . . .” -r--ºr, sº-º-º-ºs- º -- - - - - - : ... • Tºº-ºººººº-ºº-ººrºººººº-ºº: - - - - º *...*.*.*.*.*.*, sº sº-º-º-º-º: S.A.s.º.º.ºrº-5-ºrt-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: :* - ºr ººz *** Asºº’eº eºs ººº- ******* * * ºr º:--> * > *º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *- : * **** **, r*** * > F-º- C- - a- º-º-º-º-º-º: 2- º: - ** - -------- sº-vº-º: º: cº-ºº: 5- tº 2-ºxº º-> º-º- * -º-º-º- * rººts: º ******** -º-> wº www. º - º -*: * º *** * *... ºrs." wº-ºº-sº sº -º-º-º-º-º: - -------------~~~~- -º-º-º-º-º: Es - =~ * * ~ **** * : *.*.* - - ----------------~~~~ :--- º - - sº sº. =º º --- * º * - - ºn - a- :::::::::::::::::: *...*** w - *.*.*.*.* - - --- * sº * * * * - º º º s-ºr-º- ºr ºxº º-3 ºr-º-º: * * - " '****, *.* - - º º º º º sº ºº::..º.º.º.º.º.L. * *, *.* * -º- º * - - tºº::::::::: * : ****** *** * sº * **** - - - …º.º.º.º.º. ºr..…º.º.º. - - *-ºs-era cº-wºº sº-sº - Tºº -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - sº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: Sºº-º-º-º: :*:…º.º.º.º.º. ºre-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - Cazºº - ºr- -º-º-º-º: ** **.*.*.*.*.*. º tºº lºººººº. *º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- - - - F. º Hººsº ſº ***.*.*.*.*.*.*.*. - º - wºe.rº -º-º-º: - •º-ººººº- º --- **** *-***** -º-º- *-º-º: - - º *~~~~~~ * * : * ~ *…*************. -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *.*.* ºcº * *******rºsºft sººts ºº:: º º sº ºr * * * *.*.* : * - º “…sº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- º Sº ºs-Sºº. sº º º - - º =º-º-º-º-º- Fº rº º 3. .*.*.*.*-*** -ºs. arº, º . . dº Fººt - Fºº º ſº-º: w "~ ** --~~~~ *-* -- a-- ºr sº ºr ear = < * - ºr--- ~...~ *-ºs-ºw. ------ºxº w .*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.* tº cº-º-º-º: ºm * = ... *, * * ~ *** * * * * * * * * ****** -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: sºsºsº *** **** ... • , - . * * * *-*. ºr º- zºº -º-º-º-º-º-º: º -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-e -º-º: à-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- ****, *, *.*.*.*.*.*.*. -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: -º-º-º-º: **** *.*.*. zºº-º-º-º-º-º- - -ºº-ere: -º - E- -º-º-º-º-º-------> * * - - “... ." - º -º-º-º-º-º- - * ***. ºw - - º º - º º - wº-ºº: - - º º-ººrººf ºvº-ºº: ******* * - -º-º-º-º-º-º-º- ºr-º-º-ºesºe: - --~~~~~~~~~~~~~<º-º-º-º-º: º - º º- ºver-sº-º-º-º-º: sº-ºº-ºº: zº- ********** * ***. ~ - - sº *** ****** º ***sºvº.º. - - - - sº-º-º-º: º *"...wº º' tº º.ºsº, trººrººs. w - d sº º: º sº º - - - - - ***** º: - 8. - -º-º-º- º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - §º.º. - - - *****.*.*.*.*.5 ºz. . º.º. - ºr ºf :*** **, ºr º º --~~ fºr ººzºº. - ~~~~ E--- -----> - ºw: º: - - - re-º-º-º-º- ſº- - - - - - - º-º-º-º-º-º: - C- - - - - - * * * * - - - Sºº- - - - º º Sºº-º-º-º-º- - ºx. º: ºgº wº Tºº-wº -º-º-º-º-º: zºº º-º-º-º-º: *º-w.º.º.º.º. sº sº-wºº.º- - * ºr.--º-º: Bº º º-º-º-º: c. * - *º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ~ - ... ººº-º-º-º: ººº-º-º-º- - *.*.*.*.*-* ~ *- *…*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*-ºs sº-º-º-º: ºº: ºre ººººººº- - - -º-º-º-º-º *s-º'- . E-g - *sº : º ; : -º-º-º-º-º- ~ **** Nºw', ‘ ºr “”. º *wº sº-sº ºwes-a sº-ººººº. *Sºº-ºº: º - - - º - -a sº- * - - - - * tº: tº º -* A . " ** gº -º-º: Eº -º-º: - - Rºº-ºº- º -** * * sº ex º' - - *...*.*.*.***** *~~~~~~~~~ ** ºrs sº-----------> º- a -a-...- … ºw was sº a 3- º-º-º-º: -º-º-ºrº -ºº-ºº: ************ * * sº- - '*.*.*.*, *.*, *.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*…* ****** ºr *** * º - - - ºº::= ºrººººººººº-ººººº-ºº: º - ºre-º-º-º-º-es ºre-fºr-º-º-º- * º Sºº-ºº-ººrºº Q- - - sºººººººº-º-º-ºw-eºs “... • *-ºs-ºs - - --~~~\º - º - - * ~~~~~~~ **ºtºss-º-º-º-º-º-º: cº-º-º-º-º- - - - - - ==º-º-º-º-º-º: º ***w-wºw,"* * : ſº --- - - - - - g a. -sº - kºº. C- - *~~~ - - - -- - - - - Nº.3:…º. Nº. E- - º:...sº *** ***ē- - - - - " * - 4 * - § º ºsº. ºº ºr-º-º: - º Seºwº - tº ºz. º-Aºssº.” *~ºf º ºzsº *-i-º-º-º-º-º- . 3. > -º-º-º: R-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ". .*.* * * * * *******º ºr * - º - . º - º *º- Mºº "A - - Rººs *** * ºr --~~~-º-º-º: **** º - - w * 7 ; : - º - - :*: ººº-º-º-º-º-º- -** *-ā-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: 5. *w º º nº *: - **** -- º ; & - * - **.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.* - …t - º U G sº - - ºf wº X-º-º-º- - * - ºrºtº-º-º-, *.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*-------><º-º-º-º: -. - ..º. " - - sº - º <º = . . . . . . º “r-ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: secº-cºs - *.*.*.*.* º sº- sº --- - - sº - - - cº-º ºr: º wºººº-ººººººººº. º :::::::::::::::::, ; ; - wº :::::::::::::: rº, ſº Rºx- º lºº - - - - º - ſº tºº ºº: - - - t - - - *...* : *. - - -- - º - ºw * º - --- sº: º ~. - º - wº-ºº: º *wº º ~. * - *º-ºº-º-º-º-º-º: ** - - º-º-º-º-º: º -" 3:º *...…. - **** sº ******* ***.*.*.*.*.*. - º lº* Sºś º º Šºšº: - *º-ººrººº-ºº: ºft gº º ºº: º - t - t- º Rººs sº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: Seº- §:::::::$º: * * ***** * ſº rººts. .* -a tº º -º-º-º-º: -º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ºº::::::::::: º sº-º-º-º-º: - *::::::::::::: **ºtº- Sºº-ºº-º-º-º: - -º-º-º-º: . - ~ - #::::::::::: flººrºººººººººº-ºº:::::::::::::::::: ºº:: . . . . . . - " . - - º: ºšº: ºº:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::º C - . . . w - - * * . . . . . . º.º. ~ *- : " " … . . - - - º Lºw *** **** * * * * Sº tº ºº::…º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - ... : - º - - - º º - c - sº Fº>2: . - º ºº:: - º º - - - - - sº &: sº º, a -º-º-º-e ºs-º-º-º-º-º: * - [-. - - **** * - -- * º - --- §: & §: tº Tº - ºw. r. --- - - Seº º - - º º º - 㺠º ºš §:::::::::: §: tº cº-º-º-º: º º - - E: sº-º-º: º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ~~ Esº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- rº-ºº: - - - ºr-º-º-º-º: - º - w - º - º º -º-º: - - sº - º ºº:: rº. º. - s - - º º º- - Jº : Sºº- - - - :::::::::: - ºzº : sº-º-º-º: *: tº:::::::::: -º- --- * Sº - º ºgº.º. º- E-º-º: º:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: **º-tº-º-º-º: *** ********* **** - sº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: º sº.º.º.º.º. , * * * , º.º. ººº- ºr *:: *-*. º º: º º ************ * * * *****-******* º ºº:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: §: º S㺠* º: ºreºcºrºsºs - º- - Sºx. º ºs- - - -- º - - º, 5- ºr - - S: - $º. º 'º º ºt-ºu º sº - w - §::::::::::: E - §:::::::::::::: ES: - º º º º º. º Tºº" § sº §: º - ºrº - &ºsº - º: Fasº. §3: -1. ºneswºre ºf ººººººº-º-º: * - ººm-' " sº wº - -º-º-º-º-º: ---. - º º: swº :::::::::::: ºf: º - * *** º º º: * - --- º º *, *sº - ES:::::::::::: ºº::::::::::::::ºsº.º.º.º.º. - º º s::::::::::::: . §: §§ º::::::::::::::::::::::: º º º-º-º-º-º-º-º: --Frº sº: * ::ss.x: º Eºº:: º: - - - ºº:::" sº - #::::::::: º ºzº º sº - - -- ******** . . . . * *=rººd º Jº - º tº S º ºs-s ºr.--~~~~ tº º 5-º-º: lºsſ, ºº - *:::: sº - º º º º º ºº: w - º :* --- º E. ſº ºº::gº: ºsº.º.º.º.º.º.º. Bºº º º tºº-ºº: º 2. :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: Pºº-ºº:::... º: Rºsº sº-ce-a-ºº: ::::::::::::: sº cº-º-º-º-º-º:C: lººlºs - - §:***rīstºs-tº- º:º-ºº: *.*. Sºº E::::::::::::::: *::::::::: º : Fº Sººº wº ºº:: - ºrse-ºs-ºs.º.º. º Wºº ºxº º - - sº-sº s: - - - -º-º-º *- 24. - - ºr. - - ~. § º - šº º §: f. § - * - - - - &x. º - - º ---, - - - - º : - wº-w - Fº zºº - - --- - trºº º º º sº - ::::::::::::::::: º-rºº-º-º-º-º-ººrº - s - *::::::::::: - É & º º: rº-pº; `-º-º-º: :::::::::::::::::::::::: *A*- } $3:3::::::$ºš §3. §§§ §§§º §§ §: º ---> & £ºc º: ºlº - -- - - §§§: ºf ::::::::::::::::::: tº: - *** - - - ſº - - - ::::::::: - - v. ; ::::::::::::::: - - §§ - - - º --- §§§§ § º - * - º -F5 sº f|WIWRTH : MOMAllMRY ||3 $4t 13, tal. Museum u-L-3 Enºca- THE NEW WORLD THE r NEW WORLD PROBLEMS IN POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY * Ay - Isaiah Bowman, Ph.D. Director of the American Geographical Society of eVew 3rk. ILLMISTRATED WITH 275 MAPS AWD //77H 65 EWGRAVINGS FROM AHOTOGRAPHS º ſº ºw º ºf sº a a • A 2 */A ra f tº sº gº a Fº º:::::T : ... * :... - • ** - - º º - -H+. º - -I. ..." - º º E3. †--> : E: º ...- Rº rºs - |ſº S Fº-Fºr-Fºº ºl : Nºs. - - - ſ Jú(A Şe º †Nºvý - - | | MS rº º, sº ". . . | | ! ºniº | * | Sºuth ºf twº A 5 º > - - - - §[HW. ... :8 - * :-:-- ſº a º ; : - S ". : - - : t - S - :- - - B º .- - - - - º * - - - º º -* *- : * - * : : R º 2. º y * º º º d [. º º º | 27 & Yonkers-on-Hudson, New York WORLD BOOK COMPANY I 92 I worlD Book CoMPANY THE HOUSE OF APPLIED KNOWLEDGE Established, 1905, by Caspar W. Hodgson YoMKERS-ON-HUDSON, NEw York 2126 PRAIRIE AVENUE, CHICAGO s--- In an autocracy a very small political group may take the most fateful decisions respecting peace and war. In a democ- racy the citizen participates in this grave task. It is therefore the pramount duty of all citizens who wish to see our civiliza- tion preserved and advanced, to know the peoples about them, their problems, their desires, their resources, their possibilities, and their spirit, — in short, the political and geographic as well as the historic and economic bases of their life. Yet such in- formation concerning the different peoples and countries of the world is often hard to come by, and its interpretation usually requires an acquaintance with the sources of knowledge that few people possess. The New World is designed to provide for the average citizen the background of in- formation that is necessary to understand the main international questions of our time and to follow their development BNw.j-r Copyright, 1921, by World Book Company Copyright in Great Britain All rights reserved Aaaa….” º * *...'~ * ) s º 2.2 ſ 33 |PREFACE WHETHER we wish to do so or not we are obliged to take hold of the present world situation in one way or another. Though that situation is based upon a group of international problems of extraor- dinary complexity, opinions respecting these problems must in many cases be translated into immediate action on the part of govern- ment executives. In an autocracy the people are asked to accept unquestioningly the judgments of officials reputed to be wiser than they; in a democracy like ours we periodically ask the voters (suddenly doubled in number by the extension of the suffrage to women) to express an opinion and commit the government to a policy. No one can contemplate our relation to affairs with equanimity in view of the state of political education in the United States. Our hitherto domestic point of view, our century-long and uninter- rupted success in territorial expansion, the high and false values set upon material wealth, even our view of party politics and the respon- sibilities of party leaders, all alike increase the difficulties of a time beset by perils of a new order. To grasp the full meaning of questions which involve other powers that like ourselves have patriotic pride and the means to defend their honor, requires something more than native common sense and a willingness to deal fairly. For these questions have a geographical and historical setting and require scholarly consideration. It is to the roots of wrong that the voters and the constructive statesmen of our time must address themselves. In England and France the govern- ment leaders can depend upon a body of specialists and experienced administrators. In America we have never had a trained and per- manent foreign-office staff; and however lofty our intentions, we work, so far as scholarship goes, on administrative principles little different from those of a hundred years ago. It is therefore unnecessary to elaborate an explanation for a book that deals with so many political questions as this one. As a general review it is likely to display many faults of judgment and emphasis. It goes without saying that no one could hope to present a wholly balanced account of present political conditions. However, the attempt has been made to avoid all but the most necessary expressions of editorial opinion, leaving the facts on the two sides of a given question to speak for themselves. Where this principle has been set aside, it has been for the purpose of pointing more explicitly than could otherwise have been done to the gravest of existing dangers. V vi Preface There are some questions that can hardly be said to have two sides, and there are other questions of a debatable character that require a judgment now and not later. The text has been illustrated at every turn by maps, many of them specially perpared for the purpose, because maps are particularly current problems of political geography. Furthermore, not only are many valuable published maps difficult to find, they are still more difficult to interpret. It seemed that a real service could be rendered by assembling them and commenting upon the facts that they display. The large number of maps required and the many boundary changes taking place have made it impossible to represent the latest bounda- ries on every map, in spite of the fact that some of the maps have been engraved several times in order to have them include more recent decisions. Liberal cross-references are therefore given in the figure inscriptions and in the main text. A few of the maps represent conditions that may not actually be carried out, as, for example, the maps illustrating the treaty of Sèvres between Turkey and the Allied Powers, a treaty still awaiting ratification. In fact, many of the conditions set forth in other treaties now in force may be altered by later negotiation. *- There are three personal acknowledgments which I take pleasure in making: to Mr. John Storck, Miss Gladys M. Wrigley, editor of the Geographical Review, and Miss M. A. Purcell, editor for the pub- lishers, all of whom gave the most intelligent and constructive assist- ance. In addition I wish to thank Mr. Storck for his help in assem- bling the statistics and in the preparation of the maps. Thanks are due the officers of the American Geographical Society for interest in the work and for permission to use many of the original drawings, as well as plates, of maps which first appeared in the Geographical Review. I wish also to record my great obligation to former members of the Commission of Inquiry, an exceptionally able group of scholars who coöperated with the American Geographical Society in forming an organization which had for its object the systematic collection of data for the use of the American government in the conference for the establishment of peace, thus rendering an important public service in time of need. Further acknowledgments are made in the form of bibliographic notes at the end of the volume and in the inscriptions beneath the maps. ISAIAH BowMAN 2 April 1921 CHAPTER I. II. CONTENTS . MAJOR PROBLEMs © tº PROBLEMs of IMPERIAL BRITAIN • III. SPOLITICAL AND COLONIAL AIMS OF FRANCE IV. BELGIUM As A EUROPEAN Focus • W. L.THE ITALIAN SITUATION THE DEMOCRATIC DRIFT IN SPAIN VI. VII. PoETUGAL's Colon[AL PolicIES e e VIII. THE SCANDINAVIAN Countries AND Holi,AND . © IX. RAILWAY AND TERRITORIAL PROBLEMs of SwitzERLAND . X. PROBLEMs of THE GERMAN PEOPLE . XI. THE NATIONAL ExISTENCE OF AUSTRIA XII. THE NEW HUNGARY . g gº XIII. THE DOMAIN OF THE CzECHO-SLovAks XIV. JUGo-SLAVIA AND THE ADRIATIC XV. RUMANIA WTTHIN ITS NEW FRONTIERS XVI. BUL.GARIA UNDER THE TREATY OF NEUILLY XVII. THE ALBANIAN MoUNTAINEERs. XVIII. THE REUNITED GREEK LANDs . © ~k KIX. Poland AND ITS DISPUTED BoPDERLANDS XX. LITHUANIAN DEVELOPMENT AND RELATIONS ſº XXI. LAND TENURE AND TRADE OUTLETS IN ESTHONIA AND LATVIA—THE FoRMER BALTIC PROVINCES |XXII. FINNISH PROBLEMS IN THEIR GEOGRAPHICAL SETTING XXIII. THE POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY OF RUSSIA XXIV. ConstanTINOPLE AND ITS THoRough FARE © g XXV. PALESTINE : A JEWISH HOMELAND UNDER A BRITISH MAN- DATARY & c tº G © e e tº XXVI. ANATOLIA : LAST REMNANT OF THE TURKISH EMPIRE XXVII. THE MOUNTAIN HOME OF THE KURDS XXVIII. THE TRANSCAUCASIAN PEOPLEs. gº XXIX. PERSIA IN RELATION TO BRITISH INTERESTs XXX. INNER ASIA: THE UNSETTLED LAND OF THE NOMAD XXXI. THE FAR EAST . & & g XXXII. THE PACIFIC REALM AND AUSTRALIA c XXXIII. AFRICAN ColoniEs OF THE EUROPEAN Powers © XXXIV. LATIN-AMERICAN TRADE AND BOUNDARY DISPUTEs: RE- LATIONS TO THE UNITED STATES BIBLIOGRAPHY APPENDIx: PRINCIPAL TREATIES AND AGREEMENTs, 1814–1920 INDEx IPAGE 12 77 119 129 145 156 165 181 186 206 216 231 249 278 295 306 313 328 357 362 370 376 409 418 425 444 450 462 470 490 520 532 559 583 599 605 THE NEW WORLD PROBLEMS IN POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY CHAPTER ONE MAJOR PROBLEMS THE effects of the Great War are so far-reaching that we shall have henceforth a new world. Shaken violently out of their former routine, people everywhere have created or adopted new ideas and new material arrangements. Yet the student of history sees in this period of change but a step in an age-old process; to him the effects of the war are as new ingredients dropped into the caldron of humanity. The world is not new in the sense that war has ceased, that all political and social problems will be promptly settled, that present international boundaries and economic arrangements will forever remain unchanged. The qualities of selfish ambition and envy are deep-seated; they will pass away only when human life itself is extinguished. So long as they exist there will be war, with its revo- tionary effects upon political, social, and economic life. Man's mental qualities and reactions change but little; they repeat certain effects from age to age. Almost every event of our time has its counterpart in history. The officials of the Roman Empire faced problems strikingly like our own, whether they relate to land ownership and distribution, the burden of taxes, the drift of country folk to the city, growing love for material wealth and pleas- ure, or the rise of political problems of a magnitude beyond the power of individual rulers. Each age has had its grand catastrophe, its great war. We call the late war Armageddon, but historians have long called the battle of Leipzig (1813) the “Battle of the Nations.” After each crisis humanity has set itself vigorously to work recasting its world. This it is now struggling to do after the years of war just left behind. Like the great geologic eras of earth history, the new age dates from a period of general change in habit of life. Our political and social environment has been revolutionized. We now look out upon world problems and alien peoples, almost unknown to us until yesterday, in a spirit akin to that of Europeans four cen turies ago, when they stood at the threshold of the Age of Discovery. Everywhere men have been stirred by new ideas. The new era will 1 2 The New World date from the years of the World War just as medieval Europe dates from the fall of Rome, or as the modern democratic era dates from the Declaration of Independence. What are some of the new problems of the world? New World Whatever the faults of the old world, it was at least what a busi- problems ness man would call a “going concern”; can the new world be Set going in an orderly manner 9 How much of the old world is left? What new boundaries, concessions, colonies, mandataries, spheres of influence, and protectorates now appear on the map of the world? What kind of people compose the new states? Will the new democracies survive, – in Poland and Jugo-Slavia and Austria, for example, – or are some of the experiments in self-government likely to fail? What elements of economic strength and weakness has each of the new states, and also each of the old states whose resources have been either increased or diminished by treaty 9 The large and powerful states — the “great powers” — have, from this time forward, a new set of rights and responsibilities. How will these responsibilities be met? Will the strong states administer their colonies or protectorates in the interest of the natives 9 Responsi- Could the grip of the large “western” powers be loosened without bilities of anarchy following in the “protected” or “occupied” regions *::::" of the world, like Egypt (British), Santo Domingo (United States), Morocco (French) 9 Can the terrible burden of armaments be reduced by common agreement 9 Has the day of deliverance come for the oppressed minorities of the earth, those who have hitherto been persecuted because of differ- ences between themselves and the majority or ruling class in race, religion, or social customs? How far can the protection of minorities be carried? Can the so- called minorities treaties stand, or do they threaten the integrity of the unwilling signatory states – Poland, Czecho-Slovakia, Rumania, Jugo-Slavia, and Greece 9 Will strong nations continue the struggle for trade privileges, raw materials, and strategic zones, with the prospect of war between them if they cannot realize their commercial and political am- bitions otherwise? Major Problems 3 In short, will the changes in the political and economic geography of the world spell peace or war, strength or weakness, in the years im- mediately before us? These are vital problems for every nation. By regson of some of them war may come, not in a generation, but in a few years. The danger spots of the world have been greatly increased in number, the zones of friction lengthened. Where there were ap- proximately 8000 miles of old boundary about the former states of central Europe, there are now 10,000 miles, and of this total more than 3000 miles represent newly located boundaries. Every addi- tional mile of new boundary, each new location, has increased for a time the sources of possible trouble between unlike and, in the main, unfriendly peoples. Nor have neighboring peoples yet learned to look upon the new boundaries as final limits; for it takes time to adjust a nation's thought and life to a new frontier. º Hatreds have been intensified by the cruelties of the war, and one of the chief problems is that of restoring a state of friendship in the world. This will be difficult for all, but especially for weak, ignorant, and quarrelsome people. In some countries conditions of life and morality are even worse than before. A Syrian recently expressed this state of things in striking terms: “Once I wept all day long : now I weep for that day.” When the lovely windows of Rheims cathedral were broken into thousands of pieces and scattered through the streets, the people at once began collecting the pieces. Every fragment that could be found, no matter how tiny, was carefully laid aside against the day when the pieces would be fitted together again and the windows restored. * Rheims cathedral and its broken windows are a symbol of the world. A few years ago the world was orderly. To be sure, it was not perfect; some of its problems were exceedingly difficult and perplexing. Then like a thunderclap came the war and the terrible suffering and wreck of war. About some of the world’s peoples now lie the ruins of their former life, and they are trying to piece them together again. Even in the United States, remote though it be, the evil effects are manifold. No American, however secluded his life, however distant his home from the big cities and the coasts, is free from the consequences of the World War. The world is broken; its international life is disrupted; it is in a state of general economic disorder. Zones of friction lengthened Rheims cathedral a symbol of the world 4. The New World 20:: **, *, *. Alºuaºz; ... . ;##$27 gº % * ~ * * a s º * * * * I ºf s º * yº-yº e *'. N % 6 e • ***** - * * *, *, ** § §: º sº º % º 24. S0- 30. 55- \ ; CON FLICTI N G CLAIMS Z Claims involving Ç allies & neutrals |& only (incl. Russia) & Claims involving * § R § § g RSSSSº I. * allies & former §§ €nerſlie S 3.j & *A*-*-*-a-s §§§ & 0 100 200 miles §§§ FIG. 1. Overlapping territorial claims in central Europe. Claims are represented not in their most extreme but in their more conservative forms; in general, therefore, the ethnic line is taken as the limit of the claims of Austria and Hungary; the eastern limit of Poland's claim as shown on the map is some distance west of her boundary in 1772 (see Figure 166), etc. The districts are numbered as follows: 1. Part of Austrian Tyrol 18. Southern Bohemia 2. German-Slovene borderland 19. German Bohemia 3. German Hungary 20. Czech districts in German Silesia 4. Istria and Dalmatia 21. Teschen, Orawa, and Spits (named in 5. Valona order from west to east) 6. Northern Epirus 22. Ruthenia 7. Serbo-Albanian zone 23. Upper Silesia, Posen, Danzig, Marien- 8. Western Thrace * & werder, and Allenstein 9. Eastern Thrace and the area claimed by 24. Polish-Russian border zone Greece in Asia Minor 25. Lithuanian-Polish-Russian border zone 10. Southern Dobrudja 26. Polish-Lithuanian border zone 11. Western Bulgaria (See Fig. 153) & 27. Trans-Niemen territory 12. Southern Banat - 28. Saar basin 13. Northern Banat 29. Malmédy, Eupen, and Moresnet 14. Southern Hungary 30. Southern Limburg 15. Western Transylvania 31. Luxemburg 16. Eastern Ruthenia and Bessarabia. 32. Northern Slesvig 17. Southern Slovakia Major Problems 5 THE NEW MAP OF THE WORLD A map of the new world is a picture of one of the most important results of the war. Most people think of a map as a fixed thing. On the contrary it is almost as changeful as mankind itself. Two kinds of changes are constantly taking place, the first of which is brought about by scientific explorations. It was only a short time ago that the south-polar region and much of central Africa were blanks on the map. Thus the map grows with our knowledge of the world's geography. The second kind of change is brought about by the changing fortunes of nations. The boundaries of the different countries have never long remained fixed in history. “Frontiers are snapshots of the life of nations.” It was with a great deal of astonishment-and anxiety that many people saw the old landmarks suddenly disappear in 1919. The world was at one of the turning points of its career; new nations sprang up; men began to talk about a New Europe. SOME BASIC CAUSES OF THE COMPLEX PROBLEMS OF THE WORLD So far as Europe and western Asia are concerned, the current problems would be much easier to solve if people of different kinds were not so intimately mixed in broad belts on their common fron- tiers. Sharp lines of division between groups differing in race, re- ligion, or language are the exception, not the rule. Thus arise dis- putes as to the disposition of mixed zones, each side claiming to have a majority. These areas have often been referred to as the “twi- light zones,” or “gray zones,” phrases expressing doubtful character. Eastern Galicia (Fig. 167) is such a region of mixed population; in general the Poles live in or near the towns and the Ruthenians oc- cupy the country districts. Another region of mixed population is Macedonia (Fig. 159); another is the Dobrudja (Fig. 143). In a portion of Transcaucasia, Armenians and Tatars are so inter- mingled that to avoid the rule of one people by another they signed a special treaty in 1919 providing for joint administration of certain mixed zones. For many years we had almost forgotten that religion forms one of the world's major problems, not merely because there is a con- test between the various religions for supremacy, but also and chiefly because religion, from its nature or through its use by ambitious rulers or peoples, may become a political force. Mohammedanism, for example, has always been feared in this respect, because its followers are taught to carry its message to unbelievers even by fire and Sword. Maps as pictures of the new era, chang- ing with history The “twi- light zones” 6 e The New World Religion also a world prob- blem 26 16 6 |b - 80 Yo TERRITORIAL CHANGºgº / DUE TO THE WAR | *s sº * 400 0 || 00 200 * / . 2% vº * Z, Wew sſaſes (POLAND) 60 *s º %;..." Sfores wh new forms % t of governmenr (AUSTRIA) % § * º Additions of ferrifoy { gº ro offer sraſes (ſo Greece) 2% # C. P Aebiscife areas º t;0 * , als y (ºnfermaſjonahzed areas, & mandares, efc), //sfed below sww. * * * * * 3%. , ~&ºš% Neº- Internationalized ryvers * * * * * * S A * * * * * * * * SºT * * * ~ * ~ * * C * º * * Seº ºººººwº its sººn N. N. v. * * * * * * * * * \ \* * *** * N.N. e Sá0 w ~-ºws - % 2% wº sº ...--" º e º 30 A-3' FIG. 2. The territorial reorganization of central Europe and the Near East. The numbered areas are as follows: 1, Left Bank of the Rhine; 2, Saar district; 3, Danzig Free City (or State); 4, Zone of the Straits; 5, Syria, under French mandate; 6, Mesopotamia, under British mandate; 7, Zone of possible Arab state extending southward into Arabia and related to both French and British spheres of interest. For more detailed maps on larger scales see the appropriate chap- ters that follow. For the boundaries of the Free State of Fiume see Figure 139. The original plebiscite arrangements for Teschen, Orawa, and Spits on the northern border of Czecho-Slovakia were later set aside (Fig. 179). For the Tripartite agreement (southern Anatolia) see Figure 48. It is a religion of force and political authority, and we have nothing with which to compare it in the Christian religion except the forcible conversion of the American Indians in the days of Spanish coloniza- tion or of the barbarians of the eastern Baltic lands by the Teutonic Knights. In Russia, the national religion (Greek Orthodox) and the state were long inseparable ideas, and the Czar was the head of the church; but there was little politico-religious proselytizing and no fanat- ical spirit. Religious motives in the Mohammedan world are important in relation to French and British policy in the eastern Mediterranean and particularly along the road to India (pages 54 to 57). Islam, to use another name for Mohammedanism, is a religion that has mil- lions of converts each year, chiefly among low-grade populations, such as the negroes of central Africa. Major Problems 7 THE FORM OF THE PRESENT PROBLEMS The problems following this war are very much more complicated than those of any preceding time. The old causes of trouble, which had their roots in the unequal geographical conditions and in the jeal- ousies of different dynasties, are complicated by a general desire for better living conditions and by a universal unrest and dissatisfaction with present social and political forms. There has been growing, chiefly in Russia, an internationalist movement, and we have seen it in the form of Bolshevism carry devastation and fear into every corner of old Russia. It has sent its agents abroad to carry its revo- lutionary beliefs into peaceful communities and even into the democ- racies of the western world. In addition we have local problems that, put together, give the leaders of each nation the greatest concern. Everywhere through- out the world labor is demanding shorter hours and larger pay. In .* @ 23'ſ 4\ſ | ºA. Fº t $º %3° º º sº 5 * **a- - º - º *. * * : - a % 2. * * * • * * * • X. gº *... • ** * . . . . * ** 2. ſº::::::::s. - * 3:... ". . . . . .º. • - • * , * . . . \- - -- e - - :: ; ºr::::::. * * * * * * >. - - * * * * . - * * * , %:...;;.......” *A ::::::::::::...? * º * * * .* * * . • . . .” W. S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ." §§ {-\g Archangel. : :"....'...'... gº ; ::\S. Ş. . . . ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; * * * * * * , , . | * * * * * > --> * • * * * . . . . . - . . . . * * * * - - ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * = ... • * : * * * : " . . * * • * • * * * * ~ * • H = - ... • * * * * --> • ... • , = 1. “ - • - - - • * * * * * * U. - - - HITsº ºaº º N * & : : • *:S J.”.”. . . . . . . .”.”.”.” N3% Nºë N &epmbel ...'.º.º. . . . . . . . . ; - SN % Nº wº § ŽR §º ...º.º.º.º. . $22. º § §§§ §§§ º º RNNº º º: Nº. sº • * : ſº - - § - §§§ § ... • Nº. → • * * * BU § §§ SS $3% ... .º.º.º. 3trºë § ºś *:... ." . à. % yer - Šišč §º \ cººl 200 400 60 % Protestant N Roman-Catholic Greek Orthodox L. Mohammedan C Heathen FIG. 3. Note the religious differences between Russians and the people of the western border states that have broken away to form independent national units. The creation of Poland adds a powerful unit to the Roman Catholic bloc. International boundaries as in 1920 (for eastern Poland, Finland, and Rumania see Figures 182, 144, and 188 respectively). Boundaries of religions after Debes, Handatlas. * * Old prob- lems now compli- cated by new de- sires Even the local prob- lems serious 8 The New World New and broader issues in place of the old Varying and en- tangled causes of change Causes of the World War of 1914–1918 many countries peasants are taking possession of the large estates and dividing the land. Nations large and small are anxious about their frontiers and the stability of the arrangements resulting from the treaties following the World War. There is fear of trouble from the unlike populations that are included with the majorities of many states. Everywhere there is general anxiety lest the present disor- ganization of the world should lead to still greater economic distress. The early issues of the war have long since changed their aspect. Only to mention the outstanding persons and events of the years of war is to see how little concern there is with them at the present time. Their place is taken by larger and more enduring interests. The new interests consist of geographical, social, and political problems that affect the entire world. They may be thought of as due, at least in large part, to world disorganization. From a state of high idealism maintained during much of the war, men have passed into a state of realism. They are not seeking an opportunity for service so much as an opportunity for gain. The spirit of team-play that prevailed during the war has in too many instances changed to a spirit of extreme and dangerous individualism. Too many men are fiercely impatient with the necessary routine of life. On them the lessons of the war have been largely lost. Until a new atmosphere has been created, the world will remain disorganized, unstable, dangerous. In studying the changes that take place in the map of the world, we shall do well to keep before us at all times how complicated are the current causes of change in national boundaries. In the past these causes have been hardly less complex. Sometimes it was the personal ambition of a king or of the nobility that altered the frontier of a nation. Sometimes it was the pressure of a hungry population. Sometimes it was one of those great periodic migrations or waves of people that have swept from Inner Asia into the eastern and central districts of Europe. Sometimes it was religion, as in the spread of Mohammedan- ism from the 12th to the 15th centuries. And sometimes, as in the recent war, it was a great group of complicated factors very difficult to disentangle. It was not the death of a Grand Duke at Sarajevo or the invasion of Belgium, nor was it the ambitions of the German ruler or the Pan- German dreams of the German Junkers—it was not any one of these things that produced the war. It was a combination of all of them, colored by a desire to control the seats of production and the channels of transportation of all those products, like coal and oil and hemp and cotton and iron and steel and manganese, that are the founda- 1801 SC 6 rº. V p A i. sº* ºŞ. *º ł - r^ - zºº, , ºf y tº-35 3 * t"; g • Mauritius ſº SJ v. & ; : * 3. º $New Caledonis ". A U S TRA/LA A. J. gº W 2. 30 S O U 7" H' .S’ O Ú/ UL-Nººf." / A la c : P : c O C F A W 7" Z. A W 7" A C O || C. A. A. W. \) yº. Figures indicate percent of total value in 1913. A cross indicates less - than I per cent but more than one- g - 80 fourth per cent. sº ** ſº * º * * & - - - . } | 3}(|Graham Lahd - 1– * > * | —l- | == == % 8 30 –4% 60 d *— 150 I–e º 60 * * * 30– { ---. —sſ- } N LAN D}º Kºpisterden s º Q e; - yº, 5 I: * |Aºtº, | 6′lſº S-9 aſ: ſº tº & 10.5 ***** S.S. f; 2/ 9º 9 N. O. R. Tº I P A C E JP"I C & gº 'ode-bian ls. "s/ *º º ºra. Fig. 4. Comparative production of thirty mineral commodities. Squares are proportional, and figures indicate per cent of total value in 1913. A cross indicates less than one per cent but more than one fourth of one per cent. Note the total of 36.35 per cent for the United States as compared with 10.54 per cent for the United Kingdom and 14.88 per cent for Germany. Data from the United States Geological Survey. The New World Lack of agree- ment as to the objects of the war and the peace treaties J’ "… ºn W. &” #à sº Azºr “, £º swegº-lº k- 9 à * 7% S * 188RIA ºn; o # 2. º 14. A". ED ~ & |KINGOOM -ā #3|| ..? 3.3 lººk-ºr'ſ ſº ir C. O *: 0.G.e.9, GERMANY fusSIA #. ***** iéââ # Luxeuse-F-3 "Alérô A § Switzi'oº, * f.º. ºft . ++ #1 *-* ...?'s &" § iſ...g. "nºt 9 3. **** lăul fºrcelº … ºn CHINA * * sº + ALéERIA" "“” g JAPAN W.*...*.****N.e. ..'s e y º *: ll. £3 .*.* ****sº ...” Tº ; CTO.” “. . . .3 c. \\ …” '1NDIA **, *, ** 3. \. #". % 7 {} & , º, ºft & A.Ş. lº º º O### e. & *5.3. Borntg: *::. $ *. –3– suwarra” & “. . º - PRODUCTION l gº ºjº, |A || 7 Iron ore...: Coal § Oil ſ # * SouTH CONSUMPTION AUSTRALMA *AFRICA [] ... --~"... . O as sº *...****** | *- : **** º, chile ...} - - *… FIG. 5. Cartogram to show world distribution of the three leading industrial minerals. Figures represent percentages of the world's total in 1913. Data from the United States Geological Survey. tions of the modern industrial world. These commodities may become sources of unrivaled power, and in the hands of unscrupulous men or nations they may be used for the devastation of the entire world. And by this we do not mean merely the destruction of its material wealth, but also the destruction of its political and religious liberty. To the general difficulties of the present there are added many regional or local difficulties, which have now reached a climax in a rest- less and experimental world. Added to these causes is the confusion that has arisen respecting the objects of the war and of the peace treaties. With the whole fabric of society torn and disfigured, it was natural that there should be many divergencies of opinion as to the means by which it could be restored. To some the war meant political freedom; to others, the liberation of oppressed minorities. The “freedom of the seas” meant one thing to Germany and another to England. “Self-determination” to one group in Russia meant independence, to another autonomy, to a third the rule of the pro- letariat. One soldier from America might hope for better working conditions at home, while another thought only of helping France, or beating Germany, or possibly a glorious adventure, or a chance to follow the invisible banners of the spirit. Men suffered and died for different objects. When the peace treaties came to be framed, each person hoped to have his special object achieved; otherwise he would be disap- Major Problems 11 pointed. Add to the numerous disappointments the growing con- fusion resulting from the bitterly contested war that involved nearly the whole world, and it is not hard to understand that any settle- ment would have a far greater number of unfriendly critics than supporters. This will be true also of many of the international policies, agreements, and treaties of the immediate future, whether they relate to frontiers, commercial opportunities, or the forms of government. Because it is inhabited by imperfect human beings, the world has always had its causes of friction and its downright wrongs. These things the wise men of all times have tried to adjust. But complete success will never be attained. The evolutionary struggle that marked the rise of mankind from the primitive to the present state will long continue. Taking it by and large, this is a competitive world, and to the costs of ordinary competition must be added the cost of the supreme competition of war. National and racial ambitions, hatreds, and rivalries will continue to the end of time, though they may be reduced in scope and intensity. While it is important to face these facts, it is far more important that men's minds should be turned to experimentation in the field of coöperative plans. The world has had many leagues of nations in principle. The present proposal is set in high relief by the colossal losses of the war. For example, we had a working league of nations when practically the entire world combined against Germany and her associates; and in the future, whether or not the League of Nations in its present form continues, new leagues will have to be formed when new needs arise. The great practical value of an international court of justice and of experiments in the field of international labor, international postal regulations and patent agreements, the inter- national exchange of data on statistical sources and agriculture, and other modes of promoting international exchange of ideas has been demonstrated. By slow stages, through more general education, and especially through the influence in each generation of a few wise, far- seeing, and practical men, sound coöperative plans may be further developed to the point of reducing the causes of international trouble. But the world's peoples are still fundamentally unlike, and the road to success passes through a wilderness of experiment. Practi- cal value of exist- ing inter- national agree- ments CHAPTER TWO English- speaking peoples and the new map of the world Ultimate protection may de- pend upon naval strength Dangers of territorial inflation The favor- able geo- graphical distribu- tion of British possessions PROBLEMS OF IMPERIAL BRITAIN DESPITE the great colonial empires once held by France and Spain and the wide distribution of their holdings, it is the people of Eng- lish speech who have been the most persistent colonial organizers of modern times. Though they have frequently abused native rights, they have nevertheless been the most successful in their use of native help in managing the affairs of colonies of different race. This is true of American rule in the Philippines and Porto Rico as well as of the government of British colonies. Their sense of responsibility is alert. It is because their navies are powerful that the sea is free. In the common language they speak and write there is a bond of po- litical significance. Both have a traditional tendency toward liberal government. Among English-speaking nations the two most powerful com- mercially, the United Kingdom and the United States, have a com- bined naval strength which comprises nearly 75 per cent of the world’s total. This is a matter of the gravest importance, for in the past few years we have seen much of the world thrown into a state bordering on anarchy, and if the process continues or at some future time recurs, it may be that the sea lanes and distant strategic points on the rim of civilization can be held only if there be a powerful and mobile fleet. For these reasons, we shall wish to see first of all how the World War and the peace treaties have affected lands governed by the English. The territorial inflation of Great Britain as a result of the World War is a source of real danger to her. So widespread and varied are British possessions that commercial, racial, and religious convulsions, no matter in what part of the world they take place, impinge upon the interests of Britain. Even before the war her territory was suffi- ciently widespread to test her capacity for government; and in the past few years she has assumed new obligations which involve enormously heavy financial and military expenditures. The treaty with Persia requires Great Britain to give military advice and other aid to that country. Holding Mesopotamia and Egypt and Palestine means cultivating good relations with the Arabs. Thus in the Near East alone Britain has added to her former responsibilities an area of 800,000 square miles, with a population of 12,000,000. British possessions are so distributed that they lie chiefly about the borders of the Atlantic and Indian oceans, and it is on these two oceans that British commerce is of greatest importance (Fig. 7). 12 & Eð - A ; * . .2 8|s a RE ENLAND's Hiſ " 2. asſº * { ...A.” Q \ (h Q & º * - & ; $ - º: -- N- • %. & A £º || 2' * % º \-y 2-º-N † jº º s 2 Af P* º / & zº A - 4–3–24 * N Nº. Zººl, sº 60 Bertrºr £5 w NJ º weł - BR/ ſº sº * * ... /* /S/ ~ % - * .. ºsſewfound/and/ sº º .#". TS-... &\. § 1583 • *** º f #3 W. A—ff; =-> ré a CO , Ayi O He Z" | Hº § 22 yr- & ^{... C .N O R T H - *** * \-9">h_z-Z. a T W C O C E A W ~ - - P"ºſº23 , 1920 || op P A C I FI C & Nº. º -- * • * : 'o *** - - Arjºsh º: ^\lam - - iso : lººrbados “s trialis. § to ;"|19 Ç : Sºkotra 1876. …,N • * #! * - #. Laccadive'l asiºnnie I. IS88 _X814 %22rt/Jºº Maldive W. E.A. (Kenv Colony) 0 *...-H. . 1887 oenix is 1888 * - /. .# §-É # §§ §s. s “. w Asigni *...* \. ; # 1890 |"e * a º %, P\ -- 15H2. * Is. “. . . 'sºft - « ºf tº * * ... “ ... y º ) ... • Maºiſius º 3. ls. Cook ls sº : - * † ..Dudie l. - 18 Walvis 38 1814 1900 • * 'Pifcairh / Ağ § º 30 /79 B 30 AS O ZV 7" Hº § 2.47. A | *% § Tristan C I F W C | O C F A W 7" /. A M. z ic O |O AE'A Wr cº tº S. | *—tº ** GROWTH OF THE mº º , " | \ - Acquired, beforečoo from /800 - /9/4 Since /9/4 Bermuda /ē/2 % New Zealand 1840 || ||PALESTINE1920 1–––––– =l ſº- - *— 150 TEJ ~20– 30 —r— FIG. 6. It is difficult to fix dates for additions of territory acquired in so many different ways. Authorities do not agree: one may give date of occu- pation, another effective settlement, and a third treaty recognition. The chief references that have been followed are Colonial Office List, 1917; Oaford Survey of the British Empire, Vol. 6; Robinson, Colonial Chronology. w 14 The New World Protect- ing features on the landward side of British territory Extraor- dinary growth of the British Empire in a hundred years This distribution has also given Great Britain advantages in naval strategy, since the lines of communication are relatively short and are marked by an admirable series of harbors. It is remarkable to what degree the possessions of Great Britain, a maritime power, are protected on their landward side against in- vasion from continental interiors. In the case of the British Isles and Australia, this protection comes from insularity. In India the continental frontier is formed by a great mountain barrier; Egypt is in part set off from the rest of Africa by desert country; and South Africa is protected by the great Kalahari Desert, north of which is the barrier of a tropical forest thrown halfway across the continent. As a great naval power, Japan might be thought to have an advantage over Great Britain in Australasia and India, which are nearer to Japan than to Great Britain. But this advantage of nearness is in turn offset by the maritime supremacy of the British Empire as a whole and of the British Isles in particular. Finally, the territories of France, Belgium, Portugal, and the United States—four friendly nations—flank the possessions of the British Empire more extensively than do the lands of other powers. The size and population of the British Empire have trebled in the past seventy years, as the following table shows: GROWTH OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE DATE - AREA IN SQUARE MILES Population 1800 . . . . . . . . . . 1,500,000 20,000,000 1850 . . . . . . . . . . 4,500,000 160,000,000 1900 . . . . . . . . . . 11,300,000 390,000,000 1919 . . . . . . . . . . 13,700,000 475,000,000 The empire now contains well over one quarter of the land surface and population of the globe, and its possessions are so distributed that they give England access to raw materials vital not merely to the success of her commercial fleet, but vital also to the great host of industries upon which depends the welfare of the British people. The table on page 15 gives a comparative view of the great stock of raw materials available to British manufacturers within the British Empire. In the distribution of enemy territory at the close of the war, Great Britain won the largest share, and with her gains in land go important gains in material wealth. Mesopotamia has rich oil deposits. Tangan- yika Territory, as that part of former German East Africa now under Problems of Imperial Britain 15 RAW MATERIALS WITHIN THE BRITISH EMPIRE, 1914.1 The figures given are the approximate averages for four (or five) normal pre-war years. Commodity? Annual consumption of United Kingdom (with % from British Empire) Annual production within the empire Annual consump- tion within the emplme Chief sources of supply within he empire Antimony (metal) Asbestos . . . Borax . . . . Butter . . . Cheese. . . . Chromium (ore). Cobalt . . . . Copper (metal) . Cotton . . . . Fertilizers . . . Graphite . Iron (pig) Lead . . Manganese (ore) Mercury . . . Nickel . . . . Platinum . . Sulphur . . . Thorium . . Tin . º e º Tungsten (ore) . Wheqt . . . Wood pulp . Wool . . . Zinc - - - - 6000 tons (10 %) 160,000 cwt. (60%) 10,000 tons 6,500,000 cwt. (55%) 2,900,000 cwt. (80%) No data No data 120,000 tons (25%) 1,000,000 tons (20%) 600,000 tons 16,000 tons (45%) 8,600,000 tons (70%) 180,000 tons (25%) 430,000 tons (45%) 600 tons No data 35,000 oz. 370,000 cwt. 35—50 tons 20,000 tons (60%) No data 195,830,000 bu. (50%) 844,000 tons (10%) 566,000,000 lbs. (80%) 194,000 tons 1000 tons 1,784,000 cwt. 87,000 tons 1,250,000 tons 31,500 tons 5,800,000 tons 155,000 tons 600,000 tons 22,000 tons 120 tons 81,500 tons 3,700 tons 705,000,000 bu. 1,260,000 tons 1,246,000,000 lbs. 235,000 tons 12,000 tons 150,000 tons 850,000 tons 17,000 tons 10,000,000 tons 212,000 tons 850 tons 37,000 oz. 1,750,000 cwt. 27,000 tons 736,000,000 bu. 650,000,000 lbs. 200,000 tons Australia (output curtailed by development of Chinese deposits). Mexican supply (2000 tons) in British hands. Canada furnishes 80% of world's supply, and more than enough for the empire. British corporation controls important fields in Argen- tina and Peru. The supply is insufficient. Australia and New Zealand are the chief producers. Canada supplies 50% of con- sumption of U. K. Rhodesia supplies over 40% of world's production. Canada is chief source of world's supply. Australia (50%); (40%). India produces over 3 of total, but much of her production is not suitable for the Brit- ish industry. Egypt pro- duces high-grade cotton. No important empire sources. Ceylon produces the world's best graphite. United Kingdom (80%); Canada (15%). Large resources in Burma are being developed. India could easily supply the empire's needs. No important empire sources. Canada can supply the em- pire's needs, though her deposits are controlled by American capital. No important empire sources. No important empire sources. India produces 100 tons, formerly in German control. Straits Settlements (80%); Nigeria, United Kingdom, Australia (about 5% each). India and Australia each pro- duce about 30%, and the Malay States a little less. India (50%); Canada (25%); Australia (10%); United Kingdom (5%). Canada | Practically all from Canada. Australia (60%); New Zea- land (15%); South Africa (10%); United Kingdom (10%). Australia is by far the most important" (90%); promis- ing deposits in India also. 1 Coal and petroleum are not included. See Figs. 4 and 5. 2 The commodities of the table are indicated in three styles of type: boldface, representing those which are produced in quantities sufficient to supply the needs of the empire; italics, those which could be developed to the point of supplying the needs of the empire; and ordinary type, those for which the empire will have to depend in part upon outside sources. I6 The New World Material gains as a result of the war To pay the huge war debt indus- trial reor- ganization required a British mandate is called, has a large labor supply and valuable fibers, oils, cereals, and cattle ranges. Those parts of Togoland and the Cameroons gained by Great Britain have rich resources in palm oil. Nauru, in the Pacific, has valuable phosphate deposits. Kaiser Wilhelm's Land, now added to British New Guinea, has petroleum, copra, and pearl fisheries. With all these assets go strategic and polit- ical advantages, as well as increased coaling and cable station facilities of direct benefit to the entire British trade organization. In the industrial revolution that changed western Europe com- pletely, England took the lead, and she has held it in the hundred- and-fifty-year period since the beginning of that revolution. This she could not have done if she had not had within the boundaries of the empire a large part of the raw materials that she required. Trade became the life blood of the British Empire. Before the period of colonization, England was drawing the prin- cipal material for shipbuilding from northern Europe, and it was always a matter of anxiety to her that her sources of supply might be taken away. This was one of the strong reasons for colonizing America, where she could find an abundant supply of materials for shipbuilding. “Her shipping was to England like the hair of Samson, the secret of her national strength.” The extension of this policy led England into the adoption of political principles of most far-reaching consequences, for in seeking raw materials of every sort Great Britain's activities and claims collided at many points with those of the other industrial nations of the world. (A) TRADE ORGANIZATION OF THE EMPIRE There is a particular aspect of the British economic and political situation that we need to examine before taking up the problems of the empire in detail. How is the organized commercial life of Great Britain to be continued under the great strain of feeding and clothing England's industrial millions at the same time that an enor- mous war debt is paid? The map of the United Kingdom (Fig. 8) shows how remarkably concentrated is the industrial population, and how closely dependent upon coal. The people engaged in agriculture in England compose but 6 per cent of the population, while in France they form 40 per cent, in Italy 35 per cent, in Russia 72 per cent, in Jugo-Slavia 80 per cent. In general, the people of the British Isles live in dense agglomerations, and their welfare is bound up with coal, iron, and steel, the freedom of sea routes, and the right to trade wherever they choose. S FIG. 7. Shipping routes of the world. The widths of the lines and bands are proportional to the tonnage. handels und Weltverkehrs, 1911, Pl. 1. After Friedrich, Geographie des Welt- 18 The New World Conflict of trading principles F-r RELATION OF _56. ** CITIESTQQALFIELDS BRITISH ISLES SIZE OF CITIES 1911 • 100 Ooo O 500 ooo 20O OOO Q 800 000 A 300 OOO (Q 900 OOO m 400 ooo ºr 7200 ooo 22 coalfi ELDS S6 tº 54. § º' /9 | § D 3. .*) º & 62 #|_2 * scºe 1.7500.poo , p J- SO Eºmº ºr " THE GEOGR REVIEW, Nov. 1917 6 4. FIG. 8. Outline map showing the relation of cities to coal fields in the British Isles. From Mark Jefferson, in the Geographical Review, Vol. 4, 1917. PREFERENTIAL TARIFFS One of the most acute problems of Great Britain grew out of her attitude toward tariffs. England maintained throughout the modern commercial period a free-trade policy to which her whole commercial system became adjusted. It had aspects of serious international im- portance. England wished to see her goods admitted into the world's trade areas, regardless of political ownership, on terms of equality with those of all other powers. In carrying out this policy her interests Problems of Imperial Britain 19 ran counter to those of other countries, which impose a tariff upon imported goods for high revenue, or for the protection of their own industries, or for the exclusion of the trade of commercial rivals. In her own colonies Great Britain threw open her doors to the mer- chants of all countries on terms more liberal than those of any of the other great colonizing powers except Holland and Germany. In pursuing her free-trade policy, England at length found herself in opposition to her own colonies. For example, the Australian colonies fought the principle of free trade, and in 1873 were permitted by law to make such tariff arrangements as they deemed best with other British colonies. While the colonies found it almost impossible to take advantage of the opportunity this created, owing to mutual rivalries and differences in degree of economic development that would make any tariff law bear unequally upon the different regional industries, yet the principle had been won, and it was never relin- quished. It became part of a general plan for winning equality of privilege with the mother country, and eventually it led to the accept- ance by British leaders of the fact that a general preferential agreement, or commercial union of the empire on terms of absolute equality for each of its parts, was the one sure way of keeping the empire intact. To allow the self-governing dominions to continue to make tariff treaties with foreign states would be to invite in some degree dis- crimination against English trade. England's general policy as well as the nationalistic policies of its self-governing units have both been modified. After full discussion, a plan was put into force, called the British Finance Act, effective on 1 September 1919. This act applies the new preferential rates of duty to all the British dominions outside of Great Britain and Ire- land and also to British India, the Indian native states, and all British protectorates. Any territories that may have come under the pro- tection of the British government subsequently to the date of going into force of the act, or any territory which Great Britain may administer under a mandate of the League of Nations, may have the act in question applied to it by an Order in Council. The pref- erential rates apply to almost all goods subject to customs duties which are proved to be consigned from, grown, manufactured, or produced within the British Empire. In the same way American goods have preferential treatment in Porto Rico and the Philippines; that is, they are admitted duty free or with only a light import tax, while those of other nations pay a heavier tax. According to the British plan, a country that is willing Colonial opposition to British tariff regu- lations The new British Finance Act § §S.; –E– t gr 30 Kººister &n Igº- pad –30 - R. E. E s §: & f º L. A N D j º:\ Icelan P. & —ºr zºº’?” Sº S Lºrº Z/3 § % & &\ J'ed. O R. “Tº jº . …, rº W S- W A t we % O R 7"|Af .N O R T Fºr sta º.º. W T W G O C E 4 P A Cº I FI CP łorº * - "on-line. SS e º * or " ſ º: - 15 - A. ſh * Y. | # 2) §Dhilippineſs. - 15 t - ÖCeylon] . fº g SN3 º *} 0 w •w. J | N D * & g * º *A Sanga & O C. E. - -- tiº ;I--- * * * * * * . Tºº a" {& # \ ~, ºr- $ºwan. & ‘S’ O U |7" Ef so a z. A y P A c 1 F I C | O C & A W AV 7" A C O || C. E. A. A gº 45 t | * tº 45 ExPORT TRADE OF THE UNITED KINGDOM,1918 & Countries which imported more goods from the United King- e dom than from.all other countries combined. . 60 - spv *r -Tºg Countries which imported more goods from the United King- ſº * - dom than from any other single country. * g - h 2}(|Graham Lahd l l T * | - | l titatsº –lºſſ- º *—L - 0 3. 60. 9tſ 120 -150 180 FIG. 9. The map brings out two striking facts, – the importance of India to the British Empire, and the hold that Great Britain has on Latin American trade. Drawn according to data in Statesman's Year-Book. 1914. § { º #. Jº 3. # jº zº # , 240 Alſº wº º ºup N. O. R. Tº H O HE 7" A W 7' W. C. O P A c 1 Flſ & 6.dx. A cº •. oHawaiian le. ** * sy %y 45 fºº ßy .N D º & sitºl. ** O C E | A W te • y • Mauritius 4.3 cº s o w|T H. .S. O &/ y A |A C / F W C | O 7 Z A w. 7 iſ Nºſsland 45 | IMPORT TRADE OF THE UNITED KINGDOM, 1913 ^ % Countries which exported more goods to the United Kingdom than to all other countries combined. Ş. 60 ...-, * **H , ſº countries which exported more goods to the United Kingdom J.". e - º alº" than to any other single country. 2% ham Land - t —T55 –50– ——g raham 30 I # l —ºr | # ſ 90 | 120 150 180 FIG. 10. This map and Fig. 9, taken together, show how vital to Great Britain are the political and the commercial stability of the world. Drawn - according to data in Statesman's Year-Book, 1914. 22 The New World The process of empire building World trade a vital matter to Great |Britain British capital, in- dustry, and trade in the colonial possessions to extend to the British Empire the advantages of free trade, will in turn be able to trade with any country in the British Empire on the same terms." In the application of this principle it is not intended that there shall be a general policy of protection, except in the case of new industries. The new plan will greatly expand trade within the empire, decrease British dependence upon foreign states, and extend the development of internal resources and communications. It is also expected to increase the social and economic unity of the empire. - The growth of the British Empire depends upon a large num- ber of factors, some geographic, others historic or social or economic. For centuries Great Britain has been gaining experience in colonial administration. Each year large numbers of her young men enter the consular and diplomatic service. To do so they are required to pass a very rigid examination; the best of the applicants are chosen. Thus is formed a caste of officials from schools and colleges with similar purposes. A fraternal spirit with a strong imperial tinge is the result. Every official has been drilled in the principles of empire building. He goes out to the imperial frontiers, his mind well stored with the traditions of his race, eager to win every possible trade advantage. THE SEA POWER OF GREAT BRITAIN AND IMPERIAL DEVELOPMENT The British view of fair conditions of trade as embodied in the old free-trade principle and the new preferential tariff was the natural outgrowth of the rise of English sea power. Bolivia, for instance, does not contend for claims like those of the English, because she has no colonies and no fleet. After the last threat of disaster to Eng- lish power had passed, more than a hundred years ago, with the fall of Napoleon, the coast lines of the world became the frontiers of Britain. The men of England came to think more and more in terms of universal or world trade; any barrier to the freest and fullest exer- cise of trade rights was at once an object of concern; the larger Eng- land's commercial fleet and interests became, the more inclusive be- came her demands. - British merchants centuries ago had founded numerous plantations and then colonies; the British flag was recognized over “protected” and “occupied” regions in Africa, India, the Caribbean, and the Pacific. With the growth of industry based on coal for fuel, Great Britain passed the next crisis in her history, during the second half 1 A recent agreement with France provides equality of treatment of British and French investors in the colonies of either power. § Bö ſº 90 - 60 30 -3% s—F- $5 120 Tºo- –Tº • Saº' * LA \ 4;pitsberden e º • * \, . . - . %; % à º embla ..? & - * - .2% 2 - º - - 's ºn- . - * * º 57. “4. •9 ? *s lan & º } 9 50 - - —é - Lº - - - - - * º/3 | % & *49 ar - º i - - * * ** Q o A. - º - - •. **, - AV O R 7"|Af % Ti- - © N 0 R T H → - er 0H- =-2 ğ% - A T 4A W T 7 c o q=|A - - º — - - **He' º *- —mº P A C I 723% C E 4 wº **, 2– T-->-e-T ſº *W, - "ohawkslish Is. - • --> / - --- º- - º: / * *; - - - *A -- Hø. - ... • - | PL. V. †: - ~~~~ *. ****we: .* §§9hilippins|ls. - hu * - - - - N Cpylon || “. º z. º - * N ºgº - Žſ. + SS %2}\|Calaba —- ſo “T. J. S-I. —ºr, % Tr| W D / A N " ºn tº w 2. º Ž92 º - §§ſ. . . . . . . " +” “s "-- - *… . . - - * - - - Bºº. ~$2× s. WA isiº E z- AA e N º %2% . O'C' E | A W º ** tº Ji-wº- Tº “Tº - º * ~ * - - º Z!” • - 2. | R. 4. - *"ºuritius - ... ? |-> “H- 2” % - - º by- *>- *— __ w 2 . 30Hz e P- Nº- - v– \ U tºrn. * - * # #. ~r!, * S O U 7" H º rºy AS' O U 7 A/ N3% * * º - - - `-- - P A c 1 F + c o c : A w | & Z A z z A wr Jo o|224 Y Y! Mºſſland *iºs *** Aº - * 4% || &A |Graham Lahd - 1– -º-, canº. I5] —I’ſ in- 30 60 -gū 120– 150 130 FIG. 11. The sea-borne coal trade of the world. Next to the coal trade of the North Sea and the Mediterranean, that of South America is most im- portant for the United Kingdom. English and Welsh coal in part pay for Argentine wheat and meat and Brazilian coffee exported to the United Kingdom. By furnishing an outward cargo, exported coal reduces the cost of transportation of goods imported into the United Kingdom, and to this extent reduces the cost of food and raw materials. The annual shipments of British coal to the Mediterranean and Black seas in large part pay for the return cargoes of cereals, ores, oil, and cotton. See Supplement to United States Commerce Reports, No. 19 d, 25 September 1919; Friedrich, Geographie des Welthandels und Weltverkehrs, 1911, Pl. 6; and Bartholomew, Atlas of the World's Commerce, 1906, Pl. 131. 24 The New World The coal fleets of Britain British power ex- tended from the At- lantic to the Pacific of the 19th century, when successful continued occupation of remote lands depended upon the exchange of manufactured goods for raw materials. English capital flowed into the trade regions, to build railways, ports, and canals, and to buy land. English shipping carried more than half the trade of all the seas. London became the financial capital of the world. In still more recent times the growth of the coal export business has further increased the commercial and naval power of Britain. British-owned coaling stations are located at scores of strategic points. Wherever the fleet may be, there is always fuel for it; and, more important, there is always a cargo for the freight steamer that otherwise would go out empty, or nearly so, to a distant port for cottom or oil or hemp or wool or food to bring back to the close- packed, industrial populations of England. The Indian Ocean became a British lake. There was forged a great English chain stretching from Gibraltar to Nigeria, past Walvis Bay in Southwest Africa, down past Cape Town, up to Zanzibar in East Africa, onward to the coast of Arabia and Baluchistan. After the Opium War, Great Britain obtained Hongkong from China (1842); Queen Victoria was made Empress of India in 1876; Germany in 1890 agreed to recognize British rights in Zanzibar; the Boers were conquered in 1902; the British sphere of influence in Persia was recognized by Russia in 1907 – to mention only a few of the important steps in the progress of British empire building in the last few decades. - - Singapore is one of the commercial and strategic outposts of the British Empire that illustrates perhaps best of all the significant lo- cation of many outlying British possessions. It occupies an unrivaled position in the center of a vast area from which tropical products come and in which textiles and other manufactured goods are ab- sorbed in large quantities. As a naval base it guards the sea road to the Far East from southern Asia, commands the Dutch East Indies, is part of the outer defense of India, and is of almost equal impor- tance in the protection of Australia. Strategically it is to Asia what Key West is to the United States. With her interests so vitally connected with the sea, it is natural that Great Britain should have been anxious as to the outcome of the submarine campaign in the recent war. The total loss of merchant shipping of the United Kingdom, from the outbreak of the war to the end of it, was 9,031,828 gross tons. New construction in that period amounted to 4,342,296 gross tons, purchases abroad to Problems of Imperial Britain 25 F. R. (E.N. C. H. I N D 0 * H 1 N A § - * lºmº s: 3s S Straits Settlements RSS federated MalayStates ÉStates not in the federation SCAL E of Mºllº S |- 0 lſº ?00 300 400 ſº-t FIG. 12. Focus of American, British, French, Dutch, and Japanese interests in southeastern Asia. Burma, the Straits Settlements (including Singapore), the Federated Malay States, Sarawak, Brunei, and British North Borneo are the principal British possessions. The Dutch own the greater part of Borneo in addition to Java, Sumatra, and other islands near by. French interests are concentrated in French Indo-China, and in the corner of the region stand the Philippine Islands, an American possession. Japanese interests are both strategic and com— mercial and are related chiefly to trade with India, Java, and the Philippines, a trade which developed rapidly during the World War. 530,000 gross tons, and enemy tonnage captured to 716,520, making a net loss of 3,443,012 gross tons. In addition more than 14,000 lives were lost on ships sunk at sea. These losses have been a great strain upon the energy of the British people. To a limited extent they are offset by the gains of Great Britain in the division of the German merchant marine. Of 2,550,000 tons surrendered to the Allies by Germany, the larger part was given to Great Britain. Likewise in the division of the ships sunk at Scapa Flow by Admiral von Reuter and later salvaged, 70 per cent were delivered to the British. As a penalty for the sinking, Germany also agreed to deliver to the Allies 275,000 tons of tugs, lighters, floating cranes, and dry docks, the greater part of which goes to Great Britain. Of the shipping that Germany has agreed to build for the Allies (in amount not to exceed 200,000 tons a year for five years), Losses and . gains of the British merchant fleet 26 - The New World The basis of British trade policy Conflict of American and British interests in Latin America Britain's alliance with Japan Great Britain is also to receive a share. The predominance of British shipping is still as strongly marked as ever, in spite of the large losses of the war. - With a road opened to India and the Far East, colonies planted in the Caribbean, islands annexed in the Pacific, ports obtained in China; with British capital invested in the new countries of the world wherever trade centers had grown up; with a protecting fleet developed; and with cable and coaling stations to support and con- trol her fleet, Great Britain has a special interest.in the conditions of trade everywhere. As long as special trade privileges are restricted to the possessions of a single power, no objection can be made by Britain or any other power. Should they be established by force or otherwise in one country by the goverment of another, and in dis- crimination against Great Britain, they may become a source of danger. Herein lies the basis for disputes in which America and France may have a vital interest. It is in Latin America that the United States comes into sharpest conflict with British trade interests. Recently the merchants of the United States have built up a large trade with Latin American states; they have purchased many railways and established steamship lines, banks, and industries, and have invaded zones of business once ex- clusively in British control. America also upholds the Monroe Doctrine, especially in relation to the weak states of the West Indies and Central America. Should the United States greatly extend its political influence into South America also, and should it gain through political effort any special trade privileges, there would be conflict of one sort or another with the British Empire. In 1902 Great Britain made an alliance with Japan, another sea power with an island for a base. It turned out to be a wise alliance, for in the World War it brought Japan into the camp of the Allies. When, in 1920, the time had come to renew it, objections were raised by Japan on the ground that her subjects did not enjoy equality of privilege in British dominions. Against Japan's plea for equality the most vigorous protests were made by Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. If Japanese subjects were let into those countries in large numbers and were permitted to acquire every kind of property, especially land, then British subjects in India would also insist on admission to the dominions, with the result that the white popula- tions there would be submerged beneath a mounting wave of color. Had Japan won the hoped-for concession from Great Britain, she could then have brought pressure to bear upon the United States for Problems of Imperial Britain 27 the freer admission of her subjects and the removal of special restric- tions on Japanese settlers in California, which state now contains nearly half the Japanese in the United States. In closing their gates to Asiatic immigration into the white man's lands of the Pacific, the people of the British dominions and of the United States find them- selves drawn into a closer understanding, which is the strongest present guarantee for the peace of the Pacific. The alliance between Japan and Great Britain did not endanger the United States, for provision was made against the use of the alliance to force Great Britain into war upon the United States at the wish of Japan. The alliance kept Japan in active and necessary touch with western political ideals, but this result is now accomplished by Japanese participation in the affairs of the League of Nations. Without the alliance or the League, Japan's rapid encroachments upon her neigh- bors, as in China, Korea, and eastern Siberia, might well alarm Americans for the security of the Philippines. Great Britain has incurred a net war debt of more than $26,000,000,000, in addition to $9,000,000,000 loaned to her weaker allies. For a small country this is a colossal figure. The dominions have incurred their own huge debts, and cannot help except through the special channels of trade. It will tax British financial power to the utmost to keep the nation solvent. The interest alone is a staggering sum to pay each year. There are three principal ways in which it can be met: o (1) By increasing production through harder and more effective work. - - - (2) By developing important resources of food and raw materials in new colonies where land is cheap and labor abundant, as in former German East Africa. - (3) By capitalizing railroads and extractive industries, like agri- culture and grazing, in under-developed non-industrial regions like South America, the East Indies, Australia, and South Africa. The two last-named means imply political activity in every land where British capital goes, in order that investments may be safe and that they may grow in importance. Unless wise coöperative plans are developed for the regulation of investment interests among rival powers, the present struggle may be found more keen than the trade struggle before the war, because of the impulse of high taxes that are the necessary consequence of vast national debts. Effect of the alliance on the United States How Great Britain can pay her huge debt 28 - The New World The prob- lems of the British Empire Need for a new orienta- tion of British im- perial pol- icy (B) THE EMPIRE IN RELATION TO ITS PARTs With this general view of the British Empire, we may now turn to regional conditions that in a measure threaten its existence or limit its contribution to human welfare. Other empires have been great in their day, and the Roman Empire, in many respects the greatest of all, was for long periods in a state of comparative peace and was finally overwhelmed only after centuries of proud history. The Mohammedan Empire was at one time the greatest in existence (8th century). At the beginning of modern times, the colonial empire of Spain was the most remarkable. In a century Spain had pioneered a way into the western world, built up a powerful navy, and developed a system of colonial government. But all these empires failed, partly by reason of their vast extent and the inclusion of alien peoples in large numbers, but partly and chiefly because of the decay of national character, or at least its failure to develop in proportion to the growth of its responsibilities. When men became corrupt or soft at the same time that they ruled subject peoples selfishly, or neglected their own internal economic affairs, then each empire collapsed under the strain. Seeing their problems in the light of historical experience, the British have sought to anticipate the causes of decline and to provide against them by the adoption of coöperative plans whereby there is achieved a greater degree of local self-government. The collapse within a few years of four other empires now makes the faults of the British Empire stand out in clearer perspective; for its past benefi- cence was but relative, and its record was bright in part by reason of its contrast to the record of the autocratic empires of Germany, Austria, Russia, and Turkey. It must be said to the credit of the British that they have learned to develop, even in remote and diverse com- munities, a capacity for self-government in a manner and to a degree never before known in history. It must be admitted also that the British have dealt with a greater diversity of peoples and conditions than have the other colonizing nations of the modern world. While a marked devotion to high political ideals is evident in the present attitude of the British government towards its possessions, it was not the compelling force of such ideals that was responsible for the extension of British power. Political administration was assumed only because it was found necessary for the development of trade, and with each new development went the necessity for new conquests to protect the frontiers of the trade regions into which British mer- chants had penetrated. Problems of Imperial Britain 29 In spite of the many differences between them, the parts of the British Empire, outside the British Isles, may be grouped into three great divisions: (1) The five self-governing dominions, – Canada, Australia, South Africa, New Zealand, and Newfoundland,- units which are in general of the same stock and the same speech as the United Kingdom, each with a political consciousness that has led to the development of what amounts to separate nationality. (2) That part of the empire in which Great Britain governs peoples of race and speech different from her own. Some regions, like India, are complex countries with a wide range of civilization; others — the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, for instance — are un- developed tracts sparsely inhabited by people of a low order of social development; and there are dependencies or protectorates in varying stages between these two groups (1 and 2). (3) Military posts and calling stations, like Malta, Aden, and Gibraltar. — – -------- — THE DOMINIONS During the war we had the rare spectacle of devotion to the com- mon cause of the empire on the part of each one of the colonies and dominions, but withal a keen anxiety as to the political changes needed thereafter to give the dominions a larger degree of independ- ence. The most striking statement on the subject came from General Smuts of South Africa, whose address in London on “The British Commonwealth of Nations” was a daring exposition of the views of the distant subject who desires a larger share in the control of his provincial affairs, and who at the same time wishes the “com- monwealth of nations” idea to displace the old “imperial” idea within the British Empire. The natural political drift of a people in a new geographical en- vironment is toward independence. Rarely can the mother country long maintain its hold unless it adapts itself to this tendency. In addition, settlers of diverse views and nationalities become merged into a group with common aims and with plastic habits of thought. A national spirit is developed that cannot fail to exhibit original and independent tendencies. Here we have the essence of the colonial problem of every nation that attempts to rule distant peoples of the old stock in the interests of home commerce and industry and the general safety of the sea routes. Great Britain lost the United States, but she has never lost the lesson which the American Revolu- tion carried with it, and her five self-governing dominions are now in Colonial objects in the war Virtual in- dependence of the do- minions 30 The New World Imperial unity or eventual separation now in the balance Special problems of Ireland, Egypt, and India Two op- posing views of Irish in- dependence all practical respects free and independent, except as to foreign policy. The sole restriction is that they shall not have independent foreign relations. The dominions make their own laws, impose their own taxes, and even decide how much they shall contribute for the defense of the empire. Finally, the Peace Conference of Paris accorded to each of the dominions representation in the Assembly of the League of Nations, as if they were wholly independent states. - It is plain that a choice must soon be made between complete sepa- ration and a still closer union on the basis of equality. “Daughter am I in my mother's house, but mistress in my own’’ seemed the ex- pression of a liberal doctrine when it was written, but it does not satisfy present aspirations. The dominions are no longer content to be with- out a share in the direction of imperial policies, in support of which, as well as for their own security, they have incurred colossal debts and given thousands of their best men on the battlefields of Europe. Since 1887, the prime ministers of the self-governing colonies have met from time to time with the British secretary of state for foreign affairs (and in later years with the British premier) to discuss matters of general interest. The latest of these imperial conferences was held during the World War, and was by far the most important. On 4 May 1917 it recommended the convocation of a special conference after the war to consider the entire question of constitutional relations within the empire. - • But the most acute political problems confronting Great Britain arise, not from the dominions whose independence is now virtually complete, but from those portions of the empire where a fierce na- tionalism threatens to end in revolution — Ireland, South Africa, India and Egypt. These four have been long-standing sources of trouble, and they will continue to vex the statesmen of England for many years to come. Each one of these possessions is related to a particularly vital interest of the empire. IRELAND We will take the case of Ireland first. The Irish complain of long centuries of oppression, and no one can deny that unjustifiable and oppressive measures are the chief historical source of the present trouble. But the world has grown tremendously more complex. since the Irish question first took shape. In its present form it is to Englishmen less a matter of control by the British army or the civil officers, than of the security of the British Empire as affected Problems of Imperial Britain - 31 by a change in the political government of Ireland. Irishmen are now demanding, not home rule, but complete independence. This ap- parently simple political program is opposed by two vital conditions: (1) The division within the country itself between industrial Ulster and the rest of Ireland, chiefly agricultural. (2) The religious bitterness between Protestant England and ºoie Ireland, which is half the trouble in the case of Ulster SO. It has been well said that the key to the misfortunes that have Effects of overtaken Ireland is the geographical situation of that country, which . —e-----T *** --~~~~<---—---~~~~~~~~~er is near enough to England to enforce connection and yet far enough cal situa- away to discourage intimacy. St. George's Channel, which sepa- “ rates Ireland from England, is three times as wide as the Straits of Dover. Had it been narrower, Roman power might have been ex- tended to Ireland; and thus there might have been achieved in early times a unity of people in the British Isles out of which might have grown, if not a permanent union, at least a sympathetic understanding. A recent writer, contrasting the apparently insoluble Irish question with the progress of imperial policy in Canada and Australia, remarked: ſº dóminions are geographically remote and morally near—the Irish are geographically near and morally remote: * After the fall of Rome in the 5th century, Ireland remained a secluded Differences island, and there grew up an indigenous culture, especially marked }: by the rapid development of a distinctive Celtic literature and art. develop- From Ireland, where Christianity was introduced in the 5th century, #: Christian teaching spread to England and to northern Europe. In ºl spite of its cultural progress, however, Ireland, kept its tribal SYStem of government. In contrast to this system was the more highly developed English government, and out of that fundamental contrast and what it stood for in the way of English power in trade and land tenure was born much of the trouble that devastated Ireland in the bitter centuries that followed. The foci of trade would inevitably be also the foci of trouble. It was on the eastern coast that English settlements were made, through which flowed such mutual commerce as the two peoples had developed, and here, all through the 12th and 13th centuries, armed contests took place. There was chronic trouble between the Irish chiefss on the one hand and the British government on the other, and advantage was taken of the difficulties of the time to devastate the lands of the chiefs and to 32 The New World POPULATION DENSITY OF RISH COUNTIES (1911) . 3. 6. * figures give o'ezszzy aer sºoare 77//e U Union/sf area N. Waſiona/s/ " R /Pepub//can • 138 r & tº. § 136 M UN S T E R _ſ T & * * * * N-ºxº }.}~} •. blin. Cork *-* .** ...!" 2 19 i Scale of miles o to te 30 &Q FIG. 18. The distribution of population in Ireland by counties (1911). The shaded counties represent denser popu- lation and are the only ones in which manufacturing is im- portant. Note the evenness of distribution elsewhere. The Unionist, National, and Republican areas are represented ac- cording to the returns of the election of 1918. a religious motive, the people > -ºr-º-->~. plant upon them English tenants. Not more than one eighth of the soil of Ireland finally re- mained in native hands. Many Irish proprietors were executed without due process of law. Nothing less than the destruction of the Irish people was contem- plated. - Added to the differ- ences between the two peoples was the fact that the Irish were mainly Catholics and as such were regarded as representatives of au- tocracy, for it must be remembered that in England the feforma- tion was closely asso- ciated with the cause of political freedom. Strongly influenced by f. Ireland regarded law and govern- ment as opposed to the religion which they practiced and revered. This was the condition in Ireland throughout the 15th, 16th, and 17th centuries. To add to the difficulties of the problem, James I encouraged the colonization of Ulster, in the north of Ireland (Fig. 13), by Scottish settlers (Presbyterians), and thus a division on religious grounds was established on the soil of Ireland itself that has made Ulster a symbol throughout the world. Whenever in recent years there has been an approach to a solution of the general question, Ulster asserts its adherence to England and refuses to accept union with the rest of Ireland. To compel it to go seems to Ulster to be denying it the freedom that the rest of Ireland seeks. Believing that Irish industry competed with that of England in English and continental markets and that the naval defense of Problems of Imperial Britain 33 the British Isles was solely an English responsibility, England im- Regulation posed her commercial system upon Ireland. In 1665 and T680 ..." the sole Ireland was forbidden to send to England live stock and the products Hºot of live stock. In 1663, 1670, and 1696, acts were passed excluding England Ireland from trade with the colonies. The only way in which Irish- men could meet these restrictions was by emigration or by rising against the British authorities. Outbreaks against the British government were resumed after the Irish im- conquest of Ireland by Cromwell in 1652 and continued, from one jº cause or another, down through 1761 and 1771, each difficulty being #. marked by cruel repressions, continued confiscation of the land, and a swelli of emigrants. It was to America that most of the emigrants went, and during the period of the American Revolution ºAmerica gave it the fullest support, happy to fight in a distant land and under another flag the forces which they and their ancestors had been unable to overcome in the homeland. In this fact and in the subsequent large emigration to America of Irish people, Catholic in religion, bitterly hostile to England, and with a history marked by cruelties of every kind, is to be found the reason for the development of strong pro-Irish sentiment in America which has led, among others, to such actions as the Congressional resolutions (1920) favoring the independence of Ire and and the in- sertion, in the reservations to the League of Nations as originally discussed in the Senate, of a provision that the adhesion of the United States would be conditional upon Irish independence. Amidst all the complexities of Ireland's later relations with England Experiment there is one episode which stands out in strong relief, and that is the . development of an Irish Parliament, which tended more and more strongly towardſ independence. The significant date in this move- ment was ITS2, when the British Parliament at length gave to the Irish Parliament practically the fuſſ measure of power that the Ameri- can colonies had sought before the War of the Revolution. It might be thought that this would have marked the end of the Irish ques- tion; as a matter of fact the question only entered a more intense phase. The Irish Parliament and the British Parliament were united under the British Crown and were to coöperate for common purposes. Instead of coöperating, each sought to increase its authority over the other. Irish people talked more and more about the “inde- pendence” that they had gained in 1782. Englishmen, on the other hand, pointed to the common union of the two countries 34 The New World under the Crown and assumed an attitude of authority over the weaker state. During this period of political trouble, the religious differences were never forgotten, and from time to time they led to disorders in various parts of Ireland. The end of the experiment was marked by the dissolution of the Irish Parliament and the union ****** ***.*.*.*… of Great Britain and Ireland (1801). T-- A principle The Irish problem will never be settled until Irishmen are given a of settle- fair chance to manage their own affairs. And yet it is difficult to ment © © ... O g ſe give them that chance under conditions of disorder, such as prevail at the present time, – disorder whose roots run deep into the soil of hatred prepared by past wrongs. It is upon the historical facts that the Iris ye long dwelt, looking backward to the misdeeds of past generations of English rather than forward to the practical business of securing such conditional freedom as they can. The whole of . Irish and English relations is one long sequence of mismanage- ment. It was an English scholar who wrote, “Ireland is the one spot in the British Commonwealth where anarchy has continuously flourished.” Nor have the Irish people responded to the provisions of the Irish land purchase acts of 1903 and 1909, whereby a huge sum was made available to redeem for peasant cultivation the estates of the landed proprietors. In its later phases the long and complicated history of agrarian reform is primarily political rather than geographical. Too much attention has been paid to grazing; primitive agricultural methods are still in Vogue on the small peasant farms. To overcome the difficulty of supporting a dense population under these condi- tions and in the general absence of industries, the government in the past few years has fostered the growth of coöperative societies, only to find its work opposed at the most critical moment by the country traders, who found that the coöperative movement threatened their livelihood as middlemen. The Irish leaders also opposed the devel- opment of better economic conditions on the ground that these diverted the public mind from Home Rule. Attitude of To Ireland's arguments Englishmen reply by saying that in time *... of war the strongly indented coasts of Ireland might furnish bases iºn ºues for-hundreds of submarines that could blockade the English coast. tion Tritish leaders argue that if Ireland were given complete independ- ence, Scotland and Wales might well follow with similar demands for separation. They believe that the empire Would fall away; that the industrial power of Great Britain would be broken; that her naval preponderance could no longer be maintained. ^ --> ... ... … Jºzstatº, -***-*** -", erº"-" " Problems of Imperial Britain 35 Whatever one may think of these arguments respecting Ireland, Fate of pos- it cannot be assumed that outlying portions of the Empire, like South :::::::: Africa, India, and Egypt, if lost to British control, would merely change flags and live peacefully on without trouble. If England's grip is loosened there, one of two things will happen-independence . or possession by some other strong power. If the latter, shall it be Japan or Russia or Germany or Turkey 9 If the former, will a given people have peace or anarchy 9 To run a country, there are required strong men, experience in government, the organized collection of revenue, and a proper scheme of civil administration. These things do not spring up full-grown in a moment. THE SOUTH AFRICAN REALM Among more distant possessions of the empire, the question of local government in relation to British sovereignty is always colored by problems of race and often of religion and land tenure as well. In these respects South Africa presents complications of as serious import as those encountered in any other British imperial pos- session; hence it will serve to illustrate both the range of British interests and the way in which problems at first chiefly of local interest may become critical for the imperial scheme. Twhen England-first became interested in South Africa as a way English be- station on one of her imperial roads, she found the region in the hands #.”" of the Dutch. In 1806, during the Napoleonic Wars, Great Britain Africa captured Cape Colony, and the Congress of Vienna formally recog- nized her position there. . In 1820 a fairly heavy stream of English emigration to South Africa began. The rest of the 19th century was filled with a bitter struggle for mastery between the English and the Dutch settlers, or Boers, which finally ended in the Boer War (1899– 1902). In her development of the resources of South Africa and in her Prob- efforts to strengthen her political and military control of its popu- º: ent lations, "England found herself confronted with three prime diffi- culties: ------. . . . ._ _ _ ! (1) Possession of the unoccupied land had been acquired by people of Dutch descent, called Boers. (2) The richest regions had long been occupied by native blacks, who constituted a dense population fringing the eastern coast. ! (3) The distances that had to be covered were so great and the means of transportation so feeble that English control of the region could at first be only nominal. 36 The New World control by . The development of gold and diamond mining in South Africa *:::::" led to a heavy investment of capital in the region and a natural in- displaced flux of white labor. Parallel with these developments went the dis-- .* placement of both natives and Boers by English immigrants, or— what amounted to the same thing – the extension of English political control over unwilling peoples. At first Great Britain's success with the natives was far greater than with the Boers. She could make treaties with the native chiefs establishing conditions of trade, and by securing the coöperation of men of different race she could manage to extend her control over millions of blacks along the eastern border of the territory. It was the Boers who gave her the most trouble. As English colonists came in, the Boers moved târther and farther north, penetrating at last to Lake Ngami at the northern edge of the Kala- hari Desert, whence considerable numbers of them “trekked” still farther northward, into the interior of central Africa, cutting across the grasslands to the edge of the tropical forest, and westward almost to the Atlantic coast in Angola (Portuguese West Africa). Final The journeyings of some of these early Boer colonists occupied years, ... and their settlements were temporary, being maintained only until JBoers news came of richer prospects ahead. The largest compact body * of Boers settled permanently in the Transvaal, the country across (north of) the Waal River. Toward the English they maintained an attitude of afóðfriðSS and independence, and they regarded their own country as one in which discriminatory laws could be framed to the disadvantage of the foreigner. Naturally the English felt that the ensuing contest was not so much for political ownership as for equality of commercial opportunity, since the Boer republics frankly sought to keep out the British trader. After the Jameson raid (De- cember 1895 to January 1896) and other less important episodes, the contest between the English and the Boers ended in the Boer War of ISO9ET002. There were heavy losses on both sides, and altogether it was an expensive enterprise for Great Britain. The world has seen no more remarkable feat than the one that Eng- lishmen and Boers accomplished at the close of the war. Sincerely trying to forget the hostility and the bitterness natural towar, the lead- ers of both sides icy of conciliation. The Union of Sout Africa was formed in 1910, consisting of Cape of Good Hope, Natal, Orange River Colony, and the Transvaal. General Botha, who had been fighting the British less than ten years before, became the first premier of the new dominion, with a cabinet composed entirely of i. Since then, political and economic problems have been squarely _ –—T - - - - - --ºw. * Problems of Imperial Britain <> - £5– S-->75 h w ury Gº Gold 66 tº 600 Éastern limit of ------~" -->T jºzºW ! O_s º & Diamonds region having less | F------> ./ \ºats, & \ºx";" - - than 10 inches of | {::::::::::- º e 7 N –––Natural regions - |CEN i Rºk-1,...A FRICAN’ ‘83 g ) rainfall annually | *** . . .Y S O Úºſ % sRUTHWE, AFRIEN i Gºsstºw. Q § A * = eme - ". - * RROTECTORATE"T--~< * : *- "FSIA : / (a \ ! #aſº,” <^ \ l © * ~, N Tº BECHUANALAND | - e owindhoek PROTECTORATE | & KALAH A R A Nip H G H V E L p T •ºw NJT -----, c \ſio RTHERN ANDY- ‘… - A. •s - 4. 3. 2% • *. }% ~~~ 2. <-- J/3 \ . CENTRAL S--- 3.2% } PE_0F.G.00D__HQPE2% $!......GRASSIAND *2% &\g'(Kºgº) J.º. §% gape;19Wnº-Sºz., SST P º alº 100 50 0 too .. 200 % ZZ Sw. % % *, * , FIG. 14. The political divisions and plant regions of South Africa. From The Guide to South and East Africa, 1916, map opp. p. 101, supplemented by Bews, The Grasses and Grasslands of South Africa, 1918, and by Bartholomew and Lyde, An Atlas of Economic Geography, 1914, Pl. 39. See also the map and illustrations accompanying Evans, “The Weld : Its Resources and Dangers,” South African Journal of Science, Vol. 17, 1920, pp. 1–34. * X- * * faced. South Africa has won a larger and larger measure of inde- pendence. During the recent war the Union of South Africa Iſayed a notable part. General Botha invaded German Southwest Africa and in the course of a few months conquered the entire region. A long campaign ensued in German East Africa, ending with the total collapse of German power. But it was not chiefly of the British Empire that the South Africans were thinking. It was the con- solidation of a nation that they sought, and German East Africa and German Southwest Africa were regarded as a menace to the se- curity of the Union rather than of the Empire. Naturally, South Africa was opposed to the return of these colonies to Germany, and early in February 1921 the Council of the League of Nations ap- proved the terms of a mandate whereby German Southwest Africa is to be administered by the Union of South Africa. |South Africa may be a union, but it is by no means a unit. Even before the federation (1910), the colonies quarreled with each other over customs arrangements, railways, legislation respecting native * *-* *******- black labor, and immigration from India. The Transvaal govern- South African campaigns against the German . colonists Separatist tendencies caused by racial ques- tions 38 The New World South Africa’s de- sire to re- serve her lands for the whites Prob- lem of the native © ment favored the foreign port of Lourenzo Marquez (Portuguese) rather than Cape Town and Durban (British). Fearing the effects of education and industrialization upon the natives, the Boers wished to keep the blacks “in their place”; they disliked the English for treating blacks and whites upon a basis of equality. It must be admitted that their fear was based upon some significant historical facts. The Basutos once annihilated an English army; they can now put thousands of armed and mounted men into the field at a moment's notice. On one occasion they welcomed an English crown governor with an escort of many thousands of horsemen. The disposition of whites by political divisions is as follows: WHITE INHABITANTS IN THE UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA 1 PoliticAL DIVISION WHITE PopULATION |DENSITY PER SQ. M.I. Cape of Good Hope . . tº tº © . e 619,000 2.1 Orange Free State e º . e º e 182,000 3.2 Transvaal . e ſº º e e º e 499,000 4.0 Natal . e º © e e te º º 122,000 3.5 Southwest Africa . • * * . © º & 14,000 .003 1,436,000 2 There are four and a half-times as many blacks as whites in South Africa; the numbers are 7,000,000 and 1,500,000 respectively. The whites are increasing the more slowly; and with the use of col- ored labor, the percentage of “poor whites” is increasing. Troubled as the whites are by these considerations, their attitude toward Asiatic labor (Indian and Malay) may be understood. They do not want it, and they care little for the effect upon the British Empire as a whole should trouble be created by infringement of Indian rights. They point out that few regions are left in the temperate zone for the expansion of white populations. The black, on the other hand, is acclimated to low, hot countries with a high level of productiveness and need not feel cramped if he is kept in them. At one time the race problem assumed a most dangerous form. This was in 1913, when there was a great miners’ strike on the Rand, accompanied by disturbances on the lines of transportation from Bloemfontein to the sea. The possibility of a general collapse of --T ***** ***---, ... r. º. x - 1 The density of native population is 3.8 per square mile in Rhodesia, 18.7 in Basuto- land, and 9.2 in the Union of South Africa. Data from Statesman's Year-Book. e 2 This total would be increased by 45,000 if we included all British possessions in South Africa. The largest single unit is 37,000 in Southern Rhodesia. Problems of Imperial Britain 39 tr ion threatened to result—in-a-hative—tºprising. While the danger from the natives was temporarily averted, it continues to form one of the chief problems in South Africa. Parallel with the troubles between blacks and whites run the diffi: culties due to the presence of Indian laborers, who have migrated from India. The Indians were first brought in about fifty years ago to work as indentured laborers on sugar and tea plantations. Thus to the already serious problem of the blacks of Natal and Basutoland there was added the problem of the Indians, who now number 150,000. For the blacks, there was no mother country to raise questions that in- volved political interests or the integrity of the British Empire. The Asiatics, on the other hand, had the active support of the political leaders of India, who could make serious trouble for the empire. To Special difficulties raised by the Indian population settle the question, the Parliament of the Union-of-South Afriea in T919 passed the Asiatics Trading and Land Act. The two principal provisions of the act are: • *-- ~~~...~ *** *. (1) No new trading licenses may be issued to Indians after 1 May 1919, except in the case of a business which was licensed by an Indian before that date. -čº (2) After the above-mentioned date, no Indian may acquire fixed property in the Transvaal. This act has aroused the indignation of Indian subjects throughout South Africa, though it involves treatment of the Indians no different from what they already have experienced in Basutoland and Bechuana- land, where they are under the direct administration of Great Britain, or in Rhodesia, where they are subject to the regulations of the British South Africa Company. From the standpoint of the whites, the problem of the Asiatics in South Africa is frankly stated to be that of a struggle between the white and colored races for predominance in Africa, the case being the same as that of the blacks, as described above. The Indians bring in a very low standard of living and thus displace the European in labor and in trade. If the white race in South Africa can absorb a large white immigrant population in the next few years, it will be able to resist the colored races and occupy the land effectively; but the more abundantly colored labor is brought in, the smaller will be the stream of white immigrants. The effect of colored immigration in the large cities, particularly Cape Town, is socially and morally deplorable. Where Indianshave competed with the white inbusiness and industry, A “white man's country ‘’ 40 The New World #Indian erchants isplacing hites Objects of the present govern- ment The de- velopment of South African TeSOL11CeS they have largely displaced him. The competition of the Indian trader presses heavily on the European in the veldt country of north- ern Natal, where the principal industries are coal mining, cattle farm- ing, and the cultivation of maize. It presses upon him in the Vit- watersrand and in the towns of Pietermaritzburg, Dundee, and Lady- smith, where some European firms have been rendered bankrupt and residence property has depreciated in value in the vicinity of the Indian quarter. There is a large Indian population on virtually all plantations owned by white men. The Union of South Africa, torn by these perplexing problems, is divided into a number of political ies in violent opposition to each other. TtTwāSTy a relatively narrow margin that General Smuts became premier. He and the party of which he is the leader, the South African party, have three main principles as the basis of national unity and security : (1) The maintenance of South Africa's place in the British Empire as opposed to complete independence. (2) Fair and hearty coöperation between the various branches of the white race, particularly the Boers and the English. (3) Concentration of the national energies upon a policy of indus- trial development. By the election of February 1921, the South African party of Smuts commands a working majority in the South African Parliament. The success of his moderate policy has yet to be assured, however, for pposed to him is the disuni e * . Under the Union of South Africa the economic development of the country has been carried on far more effectively than in the days of rivalry and disorder. Comprehensive irrigation schemes have been developed that will reclaim much of the desert land of which South ºis in large part composed. Also there have been drilled throughout the dry veldt country, where grazing is the principal industry, a large number of deep wells which furnish the necessary "...º: the range of South African herds. Geological explorations have been carried forward to the point of making known the varied mineral wealth of South Africa, which includes gold, diamonds, iron, coal, copper, platinum, man- ul Nationalist party, which stands for -* Problems of Imperial Britain 41 Agricultural and industrial development could be greatly developed in the eastern and southern coastal strip. In a belt of mountain and tipland-country-hear—the-coast-1990-miles long and at least 15 miles wide, there is a rainfall exceeding 40 inches a year. If the run-off were regulated, forest growth encouraged, and waterpower developed, the region would in time vastly increase its agricultural production. It could also expect to become a center of industry in the manufacture of the raw materials of tropical East Africa. _/ i RHODESIA AND THE ADJACENT PROTECTED ZONES Lying north of the Union of South Africa is Rhodesia, the im- mediate government of which is in the hands of the British South Africa Company. At the present time the political and commercial airs of Rhodesia are in a state of change. Some of its people would like to see established a crown colony government, similar to that of Nigeria; others would prefer to have the colony included within the Union of South Africa; some advocate autonomy, which would place Rhodesia in a position in the imperial family similar to that of Newfoundland or New Zealand; and still others, chiefly mer-, chants, wish the continuation of the present régime. • The difficulties in the way of autonomy or of union with South Africa spring chiefly from the fact that the company which has de- veloped the region has invested a vast amount of money, and were this to become a charge against the people now inhabiting the region, it could scarcely be borne by them. Equally difficult is the proposal ‘to have the imperial exchequer pay the bill, to the advantage of the population of Rhodesia. The company is now confronting the very serious criticism that it is exploiting the native population, whereas Great Britain has al- ways prided herself upon her strict adherence to the principle of maintaining the rights of the natives in the colonies under her control. In Canada and Australia she has done this by special reservations, and corresponding attention was given to the same subject in New Zealand in 1840, in Fiji in 1874, in Papua in 1888. Moreover, Great Britain agreed to the insertion in the League of Nations covenant of . 22, which accepts the principle that the well-being and de- velopment of peoples not yet able to stand by themselves shall be a trust of civilization. • , Jt has been otherwise in Rhodesia, where the native is not allowed to live securely upon his land, and this in a region where landowner- ship is a TTāfter of pārticular importance because of the settled agri- A possible change of policy *~—------.” T Costs of develop- ment to be defrayed -*** *-********-*s------------. ----------> Native ſ rights i f | 42 The New World Land situation seriously affects the native farmer & º 4WD cº’ cº * S E At: SS Al tº dria tº t } \,: \".", | - | | SIERR § IVORY º £-º-º: # * * - *ść...ºast ºff spºłºś. :::::::::::\º º §: É. * & Gº {... º Sy” * = - " . . . . . . * , C. º º Sºſambasa 22, º: º - lº <> º Qares Salaam -z |º *º |- - ** tº . . . § r •St.Helena sº.” * § y {# ſº Fº tº tº 20 10 \0 | 4. º e.vºisºtº FIG. 15. British possessions in Africa, and the Cape-to-Cairo railway. Except for a short Section southwest of Albertville, the railway is completed from Cape Town to Lake Tanganyika. The principal unfinished section is in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. British possessions in Africa that were held before 1914 are stippled; those gained as a result of the World War are cross- lined. Note that the new name for British East Africa is Kenya Colony; also that the new boundary between that colony and Italian Somaliland is not shown on this map (for this see Figure 271). cultural life of the people. Great Britain knows perfectly well how to handle the problem. In Nigeria, for example, all the land is native- owned. But in contrast to this happy state of affairs, in southern Rhodesia the natives have lost landownership as tribes and as in- dividuals. Until the radical concession of the British South Africa Company is revoked, the native put in possession of his lands, and economic restrictions removed, the relation of natives and whites Problems of Imperial Britain 43 will furnish a standing menace to the people of South Africa, and may be the prelude to a race catastrophe. If Bechuanaland, Basutoland, and Swaziland are incorporated in the Union of South Africa rather than maintained as a direct charge of the imperial government, the native problem will become still more complex. It will be more difficult to keep the native population within its present confines, seeing that race consciousness is developing a tendency to press for a nearer approach to equality of privilege. But as the cost of the white man's living is constantly rising, his impulse is to secure himself in a position of relative economic advantage. This position he tries to gain by becoming a member of the Labor party, which seeks special privilege, or of the Nationalist party, which stands for race exclusion. THE INDIAN EMPIRE For Great Britain, the question of peace or anarchy wears some of its gravest aspects in India, where there are religious, economic, ...; the first order. Here are 66,000,000 Mohammedans who, with their brethren of the Arab world, threaten British hold on southwestern Asia; and were that hold broken at one place, it would immediately be relaxed at all others. Moreover, the trade of India is altogether essential to Great Britain's hold on general Asiatic trade. TThe British exports to India are greater than to any ºther-cºuntry except France. Let us look at the historical relations of this dependency of imperial extent and importance. Under the Portuguese, in the early years of the 16th century, there was developed a trading and governmental system which first brought European wares and political ambitions into the Indian field. Later came the East India Company, which was organized at London in T600. TThe Portuguese were easily displaced, and the Dutch were driven to concentrate their efforts in the East Indies. The French, however, offered a more effective resistance, and a long struggle was waged that finally resulted (1757) in victory for the English com- pany. During the hundred years that followed, the East India Company gradually lost its valuable monopolies, and after the Com- pany had proved itself incapable of handling the great revolt of 1857 Extension of bound- aries has increased the white man’s problem Colonial rivalry and the es— tablish- ment of English power (the Sepoy Rebellion), Parliament assumed full control of the govern- D ment of India. The problem of England i d – to control the 325 millions of India and to develop British trade, and to do both in such a man- ner as to keep the peace. For India has always been a diffcutt-coun- 44 The New World The diffi- culties of govern- ment India long in a state of anarchy Recent dis- orders in northern India Unruly border peoples try to dominate. Alexander the Great reached it in 327 B.C., but his empire did not remain. Many later invasions took place across the northern frontier: there came Mohammedans, congregated chiefly in the northern part; Afghans, who waged an almost continual border warfare; and Turks, who sought to extend their power into the dense masses of India and of China as well. In large measure India has absorbed the invader. With the British, however, this-has-not been true; they came for trade, not for Conquest. ^ =====-ºw" " ~~- ~ * . . . " As in so many of the protected regions of the world, the question is one not merely of trade, but of order. Many of the most progres- sive and intelligent Indians believe that were Great Britain to leave India to her fate, the land would fall into disorder and there would be rivers of blood. For when India ruled herself, there was incessant warfare between her many local rulers; each one sought an extension of his realm and an increase of power; intrigue, bribery, and war followed n logical sequence. Under Briti been in the main peaceful. But as in Egypt, there is a nationalist move- ment, and its followers regard the British as exploiters who lack real sympathy for the native. They wish to see Great Britain driven out and native rule restored. *- - The Moslem Indian population was more or less disorderly through- out the World War. The last serious trouble occurred in April 1919, when nearly four hundred natives of Amritsar were killed by General Dyer’s troops for assembling in a public square. Thereupon Indian feeling was greatly inflamed everywhere and the whole national movement was much intensified. The Indian National Congress selected the site of Amritsar for its 1919 session and sought to pro- mote Indian independence; but the more moderate Indian repre- sentatives had a separate conference at Calcutta and were concerned chiefly with reforms in the present government. On India's northern frontier, adjacent to the Afghan border, there is great difficulty with unsubdued mountain tribes – e.g. Wazirs and Mahsuds. The British government has respected the independ- ence of the tribes and has protected the area by maintaining garri- sons at strategic points. These tribes can put 30,000 armed men in the field and, as they are fanatical Moslems, they are easily tempted to hostilities through the influence of their religious leaders. In May 1919 they invaded northern India, burned villages, cut tele- graph lines, and carried out raids against the Indian population. Through the summer and autumn of 1919 the British, in the face of Problems of Imperial Britain - 45 ºs % º & 'A' 㺠% N % simáN º “ * * * º & º tº º N § º § ..plane, ºelhi ‘NSW N §§§ § Jaipur \"Agra §§ §§Rºs Diu. Bombs l, RELIGIONS [ ] Hindus (P SČ % Mohammedans gº º *N Buddhists MySQre |Madras **** §§ º - * tº Mahé. $ *Pondicherry(ºr) — g § š Animists (Fr:) #Karikaldºr) - §§ º Sik * I a '% º Si hs & § à 3 Christians — º Oinſ * % 0. 100 w S00 400 M l ºw0} { Sp O ! —º- l 76 § 84 916 GK FIG. 16. The widespread effects of the caste system of the Hindus may be realized from a study of this map. Note the large Mohammedan population of northwestern India. From Imperial Gazetteer of India, Vol. 26, 1909, Pl. 15. strong resistance, sent military forces into the mountain region where the unruly tribes live, and partly subdued them. - Disorder in India is a particularly grave matter, since it affects Danger of not only the Control of the country but also the distribution of food ... and the whole modern system of trade that has become established ºrganiza- there. India now has 112,000 square miles of irrigated land and the tion irrigation works require coöperative control and an orderly govern- ment. Were the railroads and the irrigation works, the ports, and _** The whole machinery of commercial life to be disorganized, India × would be ripe for a great disaster. The famines of the past would be repeated, millions wou'd be killed by starvation and war, and misery and anarchy would spread from India to the adjacent lands. If an Indian [Oſcy can be developed which will give autonomy to the local Indian governments, fair treatment to the natives, and an equitable 46 - - The New World º sº º - . International Film Service, Fig. 17. Dekka, near the northwestern frontier of India, where the British have fought Afghan and other tribesmen. - distribution of the profits of business enterprise among natives and foreigners, there will follow a better state of affairs than could be obtained under the rule of rival princes. Diversities The contrasts among the peoples of India are very great. The ºf race, ºr differences of caste and race are too extreme to permit any real unity ligion, and -º-º-º-º- - - -- - ... of the population for a long time to come. But what is of more pres- ... as ent practical interest, the diversities are so great that there is no tive gov: such thing as general public opinion. Each section of the country, ernment each part of a religious sect, each caste, has its own ideas and has no respect for those of another. The contrasts and animosities of feel- ing could not be more marked if the various groups were separated by great distances and lived under quite different conditions. “India” is not in their minds when they find fault with British rule; they think only of the autonomy of their own district. effects of a The contrasts between the different races, languages, and reli- .* gions of India have been increased through a long history involving storical - - - --- - and racial many different kinds and degrees of civilization. Moreover, three *...* fourths of the people are agricultural and live in small villages and on farms. In general, the better types live in the cooler regions of the north. The hotter the climate, the denser the population and the greater the ignorance. Climate and physical environment, as well as racial characteristics, have produced a degree of diversity Problems of Imperial Britain 47 almost incomprehensible, so that India is not to be thought of as a Country of common characteristics or as presenting to its leaders and rulers a problem of a simple nature. Its 325,000,000 people are com- posed of 45 different races speaking 170 languages and divided into 2400 tribes or castes. They are scattered over an area almost pre-T TCISely half that of Europe. Of this population three fourths are under JBritish rule, but only half of one per cent use English effectiveRT Of the total population, 217 millions are Hindus and 60 millions are composed of descendants of the original Turanian tribes. The latter form the lowest grade of inhabitants in the country. Many of them are outcasts doing the lowest and most menial work; others have kept their freedom by living in the mountains, in the deserts, in the for- ests. All of them hate the Hindus bitterly. From long before the Christian era almost to 1000 A.D., the Hindus The Hindu º e conquests came from the north in wave on wave of conquering hordes that, ºne crossing the high passes of eastern Afghanistan, subdued the land ...” Only after long and bloody struggles. After the conquest of the aborig- inal populations, the Hindus fought each other and a state of anarchy revailed. Finally there came the perfection of the caste system to disunite the Hindus still further, reduce the warlike class, make the people pacifistic, and lay India open to invasion and conquest. Of these invasions, the one that produced the greatest visible effect ended in 1206 A.D., when the Moslem hordes poured into India; during the next three hundred years the Mohammedan kingdoms were **** -- ~~ formed the basis of past anarchy subsided. But even now the number of castes, the prejudices of the people, the restraints which their religions put upon their treatment of animals, all greatly retard the economic development of the country...! In all India there are some 700 feudatory states, each jealous of the Problem of others’ rights and privileges. They include two fifths of the land of ºne. India and have a population of about 75,000,000. There are states, of every size, scattered from one end of the land to the other. The largest is Haiderabad, with a population of 13,000,000. Some of the states are of ancient origin; others are recent; some were formed out of the fragments of the Mogul Empire (1526–1761). When the British government took over the management of the country, it guaranteed the integrity of existing states and the dignity and privileges of the rulers, making treaties with them which have per- sisted down to the present time. The rulers are not sovereign, but are subordinate to His Majesty the King-Emperor and to his repre- *— **** *~~~~~~~< ... *-* 48 The New World Willage or— ganization the basis of self-gov- ernment *- POpULATION DENSITY º % per sq.km. per sq.mi. §§ 15 under IO | lunder26 * 10 - 50 É26 - $28 12 50 - 75 ã128-192 75–2005"Sig2-512 OVCP 200% Over 512 & 0 100 200 300 400 500 M FIG. 18. The importance of the monsoon rains is suggested by the denser populations of the eastern and western coasts; and the Ganges valley is marked by a population density greater than that found in all but a few other regions in the world. After. Bartholomew, Advanced Atlas of Physical and Political Geography, 1917, Sheet 65. sentative the Viceroy, or Governor-General, of India. Were the people warlike, they would-present—te—Great Britain an impossible problem of race, religion, and general ordy. But only 25,000,000 can be sai ye any military spirit, and † are widely scattered. The society of India has its basic feature in the village organiza- tion. Through all the Tong and complicated history of India. Varied by conquest, by interstate rivalries, by famines, by calamities such as plagues of locusts and epidemics of disease that carried off millions, the village organization and confederations of village communities ------------v".” -“Tº Tºº" " cº--------~~~~-ºº-º-º-º-rº * have been maintained. These confederations have been the most • * *-*** **w-w" “ºst-r----------> durable organization in India, and the improvement of Indian con- ditions can be carried on only if attention is paid to the value of the Village community as the basis of self-government) ----- India is fundamentally agricultural; less than 10 per cent of the population is urban, as compared with 78 per cent in England and Problems of Imperial Britain 49 TIG. 19. The native states and territories are shown in light stipple and the territories perma- nently administered by the government of India with diagonal ruling, while British India is left white. From Imperial Gazetteer of India, Vol. 26, 1909, Pl. 20. Wales and 48 per cent in Germany. In Bombay, 18 per cent of the population is urban, the high percentage being due to the presence of cotton mills; while in Assam, where the country is broken and the e----e. T-7- º e tº . tº º people lead an unsettled life, only 3 per cent live in cities. India as a whole has but thirty cities of more than 100,000, while the United States, with one third the population, has sixty-eight cities of more than 100,000. Only two of India's cities, Calcutta and Bombay, have more than a million people each. The population, completely de- pendent on agriculture, is crowded on the flat lands of India, where a rainfall of seventy inches is needed to insure crops. As a conse- quence, terrible famines ensue when the rains are light. So long as India depends upon minor crops, such as form the basis of her present food supply, her condition will be slow to improve commercially. The more remunerative crops are wheat and cotton, = — 50 The New World Recurrent famines and the famine service Small irri- gation works or tanks -:33. INDIA AND CEYLON RICE ºgº* § ACREAGE A. each por. REPRESENTs 10.000 Acres 0 - .* INDIA ; t WHEAT 0 A} ſ ACREAGE * EACH bor REPRESENTS 5,000 ACRE8 {} 's g sº ºes ºne tº sº tº &=>tºr:Exº-K-9 FIG. 20. Distribution of wheat and rice crops in India. Compare with Figure 18. From Finch and Baker, Atlas of American Agriculture, 1917, Figures 25 and 58. - and these are to a large degree dependent upon artificial irrigation. Moreover, increased irrigation would make the people more inde- pendent of the uncertain rains. The rains of India are seasonal in character — the so-called monsoon rains — and have great varia- tions from year to year and from district to district in the same year. When the rains fail altogether, famine results unless there is arti- ficial irrigation. Formerly these famines were accompanied by ter- rible loss of life; but with increase of railway lines and better facili- ties for the transportation of food by motor and otherwise, and es- pecially by the organization of a “famine service,” the loss of life is now largely averted. The ensuing poverty is still very great, how- ever, on account of the loss of cattle, which strip the grazing grounds and migrate from place to place, dying in large numbers and thus wiping out the peasant's capital. - Much has already been done to further irrigation; but the task is only begun. The irrigation service in India includes not only great modern engineering works but also an immense system of artificial res- ervoirs, the most extensive of their kind in the world. Some of them are of great antiquity. They consist of earthen tanks formed by build- ing a series of banks around a depression in the ground or across the outlet of a small valley. Their extent is from a few square rods to several acres. Some of the more modern ones have dams made of masonry. When one reservoir is filled with sediment, another is constructed above or below it. The floor of the former reservoir Problems of Imperial Britain . . . . . • * * . * * 30 * . . . ; : ... • z - * * * * . . • z * * * * * 20 * * * * * * , º a 90 & 0 100 200 300 400 $00 MI. ----Chief famine 3 iſ ... ſeas Co January & February $EEEEEE-s June to October [T] under I inch 3%. 5 to 20 inches % 50 to 75 inches l to 5 -. 20 50 s & over 75 p FIG. 21. Rainfall and famine areas in India. Rainfall from Imperial Gazetteer of India, Vol. 26, 1909, Pl. 10. Famine areas from Andree, Geographische Handbuch, 1899, p. 579; id., Geo- graphie des Welthandels, Vol. 2, 1913, p. 552; supplemented by Digby, The Famine Campaign in Southern India, 2 vols., 1878; Merewether, A Tour through the Famine Districts of India, 1898; Scott, The Famine Land, 1904. is then converted into cultivated fields. Figure 22 shows the reser- voirs in a small portion of the province of Haiderabad; the minute distribution gives an idea of the large number of people of India that live in villages and on small holdings of land, and makes one realize the full meaning of the statement that three fourths of the people of India are agricultural. Among the larger works is the Punjab system (at the northwestern corner of the northern famine district, shown in Figure 21), whereby nearly 2,000,000 acres of land once arid have been placed under irrigation, in addition to more than 9,000,000 acres previously irrigated in the Punjab district. This was done by turning river water into three great canals that, with their main branches and smaller tributaries, have a total length of 3000 miles. The irrigated area lies in a region whose average rainfall is from 7 to 25 inches, and where agriculture would always be precarious without artificial help. The fault which almost all classes of Indians have to find with the British government is based upon the cumbersome workings of the India Office and the Indian administration in general. The rural people, who form three fourths of the population, pay the greater part of the revenues in the land tax; yet they are without repre- sentation in the legislative bodies, and have no way of expressing their grievances. The revenues are not employed to suit their local needs. Great irrigation works and railroads are built and harbors are improved, but the lot of the farmer is unchanged. The great Punjab system Indian complaints of British adminis- tration , 52 The New World The delays The policy of centralization of the work of the India Office has been * * carried to a high state of inefficiency. A mere handful of 3000 British administrators are trying to rule 325,000,000 subjects. Those in supreme authority are overloaded with work. The officials are criti- cally selected, but they are confronted with overpowering difficulties, being required to make rulings upon trivial and local affairs, though lacking acquaintance in sufficient detail, with the climatic, racial, and religious peculiarities of the diversified Indian empire Long delays ensue, and it has been recognized in all times that delays in securing justice constitute one of the fundamental and justifiable complaints of a subject people. These things touch the life of the people in a vital way. Their complaints will not be stopped until they have local self-government, which in some form should be integrated with the general admin stration of India by provinces and as a whole. Pressing upon the people of India in a manner to produce great The land : 81 distress is the land tax, in addition to which is the water tax in the †n irrigated areas. The land tax keeps the mass of the population in a state bordering on slavery. Millions cannot get sufficient food. At the end of his year of labor, the farmer finds his crop divided be- tween the landlord and the government. He has to go into debt to the village shopkeeper, getting credit for food and seed in the ensuing year. Since 240,000,000 people in India are connected directly or indirectly with agriculture, this means that a large majority of them, probably two thirds, are living in a state of squalor. 22\\ Scale of miles % ź - O 1 2 3 4 5 º 2 Ø \, '79°45' FIG. 22. Small “tanks” containing surface water impounded behind earthen dams and used for local irrigation. They occupy 1580 square miles in British India. Reduced section from the topographic map of India, scale 1: 253,440, Sheet 56–0, 1914, Problems of Imperial Britain - 53 This does not mean that many Indians are not living under better conditions. Thirty millions of them, many of whom are town- dwellers, have prospered by the general increase of trade and through the benefits of the Indian administration. There are many rich bankers and merchants. But the position of the peasant remains the same, and it cannot be improved until the land revenue system is changed and the heavy land tax reduced. The most serious of the social and economic problems of India were not created by the British, but the people of India look to their British rulers for a Solution. Here, as in Ireland, there is an economic problem of great magnitude that is constantly involved with political issues. As in all times and places, a government remote from the common people is blamed for disaster and appealed to for relief. What has England done to meet the complaints of her Indian subjects? On 20 August 1917, the Secretary of State for India announced in the House of Commons that the British government was in favor of gradual development of self-governing institutions in India. To this end there was introduced into Parliament the Government of India Bill, which was passed in 1919 as the so-called Reforms Bill. In each of the eight major provinces (excluding Burma) administra- tion will be divided between the governor, who retains power over questions that are “reserved,” and the ministers, who deal with questions that are to be “transferred” to them. Among the trans- ferred subjects are local government, agriculture, industrial develop- ment, public health, education, and public works. The governor will continue to be appointed by the Viceroy or by the Crown, and will be assisted by an Executive Council, of whom one must be an Indian. The ministers are chosen from the elected members of the Legislative Council. Not more than one fifth of the Legislative Council may be officials (i.e. British). Three seats on the Viceroy's Executive Council are assigned to Indians. This dual form of government has not been applied to the central administration, but there has been created a second chamber, the Council of State, and a majority of both assemblies will be elected by popular vote. India’s financial policy will be largely in her own control. By this bill the franchise has been extended to more than 5,000,000 persons, out of a total of 60,000,000 who might be eligible. The franchise was previously exercised by some 33,000 persons. The bill is avowedly transitional, and itself provides for a commission to investigate its results after the expiration of ten years. The re- vised gov- ernment of India Financial matters now largely under In- dian con- trol 54 The New World Brahmins Opinion with respect to the new form of government varies widely. ...” Some objection has been raised on the ground that the Brahmins, a powerful caste despising all other Indians and constituting but 5 per cent of the population, may win fresh political and administrative power in addition to the vast social, religious, and official powers which they already possess. THE EMPIRE AND THE MOHAMMEDAN REALM Mohamme. We have viewed India's problems mainly from the political and *.** economic standpoints. While the religious aspect is important, its political te e tº force importance springs chiefly from the relation of the whole Moham- medan question to the maintenance and security of the road to India. We shall first discuss the power and geographical extent of Islam. No matter where that realm might be placed in the world, it would interest thinking men. - - Mohammedanism is in substance a political as well as a religious matter. Although its adherents are widely distributed (Fig. 23), every Mohammedan every day turns in prayer toward Mecca, his Holy City; only from Mecca can be proclaimed a Jihad, or Holy War, to which all Mohammedans must respond; it is the religious capital of 250,000,000 people and has been the center of Moham- medanism for more than a thousand years. The pilgrimage to Mecca draws thousands of picked men from every part of the Moslem world, and thus is practically an annual Pan-Islamic congress where all the interests of the Moslem world are discussed. Mohammedanism is the most fanatical religion in the world. To the Mohammedan, the Christian is “a dog of an infidel.” To die for the Prophet is to save one's soul. The extraordinary fact about Mohammedanism is its strong hold upon its followers. No people once Mohammedan has ever been converted to the Christian religion. The power of Islam is per- sistent. There is scarcely anything like it in the world, and it is grow- ing with terrific speed, not only among the crowded populations of the East, but also and chiefly among the millions of negroes in cen- tral Africa. Brown and black and yellow respond to its teachings. On all these races the white man has laid the hand of political control and is correspondingly feared or hated. Mohammedanism there- fore represents a fanatical religion whose political power will try the tact, and it may be the military strength, of the western powers. Problems of Imperial Britain 55 ſº - \ º & aWarsa º Laccadivesº, MALDIves. - §§ i. i- wº A & S tº-2 & ſ * # s Çiğ (Z i"; *\ §§ 3 § S Q *S *** * tº THE MOHAMMEDAN WORLDºº º º, ſº ‘. . . . . $/anzibar" rº wº - s. e. gº s & *s: *:::::: SS Sunni Mohammedaas in majority wavºr “2- *::::::3 #A 2.4%me . . . 20 tº gº Mohammedia/, //70//fres * 20 *.* º Z e º 0 \ is h; |Z4 Centers of f/he Seness, |O0 ºn tº FIG. 23. A study of the map suggests the extent to which colonial government and commerce are affected by religious considerations in the East Indies, northern Africa, and the Near East. There are many Mohammedan sects, but only the powerful Senussi sect is shown here in its chief centers of influence. After Schrader, Atlas de géographie historique, Pl. 51; Senussi locali- ties after Debes, Handatlas, 1913. Area A, in northern India, represents a locality inhabited by both Shiite and Sunni Mohammedans; B, in the Balkans, represents Bosnia. The heart and center of the Mohammedan realm is on the east- ern side of the Red Sea. On the western side of the Red Sea is Egypt, sometimes called the “wasp-waist” of the British Empire. Great Britain's interest in Mohammedanism is therefore vital. At the northern end of the Red Sea is the Suez Canal, on the direct route to India from the whole Mediterranean region and from England. Of the 325,000,000 people of India 66,000,000 are Mohammedans. During the recent war it took 250,000 Anglo-Indian troops to hold in control the Mohammedans and the border tribes. For Great Britain, Egypt and India and Mesopotamia and the gateway of the Mediter- ranean Sea all hang together joined by their common association with Great Britain's road to India and by the presence of a Mohammedan element. The problems of these regions have long had vital and sinister aspects for the men of England. .. With the break-up of both the Turkish and the Russian empires, Great Britain's relations to the Mohammedan world and the Near East have been altered in many respects. Turkey was always able to threaten trouble among the Mohammedan populations of the British Empire, not only in the Near East but also in Zanzibar The road to India through the Mo- hammedan realm 56 s The New World Turkish and Rus- sian inter- ests no longer a menace to Britain The wide- spread in- fluence of Moham- medan sects Aims of the confraterni- ties and British East Africa, South Africa, and India. Russia, in her search for a warm-water outlet, was making desperate efforts to reach the head of the Persian Gulf. In 1907 Russia and Great Britain signed an agreement giving the former country political rights, or a “sphere of influence,” down to the line shown in Figure 230. But for that agreement, the probable ambitions of future Russia might still be added to the force of the dominant religion in Turkey to keep British statesmen uneasy about the safety of their far-flung empire. A source of anxiety, however, remains in the activities of Bolshevist agents among unstable British subjects, whence may spring results as sinister as those that had their origin in the imperialism of the Czar. The Religious Confraternities Closely related to British imperial interests in Egypt and also to the field of French and Italian colonial expansion in northern Africa, are the powerful and influential secret societies, or “confraternities,” among the Mohammedan populations. This is a general or collec- tive name for the various religious societies of the Mohammedan world, of which there are from fifty to one hundred distributed all the way from Morocco to Bagdad. Almost every adult male Moslem is a member of one of these societies. - The confraternities came into existence in an interesting way. After Mohammed's death, Mohammedanism changed its aspect. It reached into the field of law and gave religious authority to the words and decrees of the lawyers. The rulers on their side also sought to control the church and make it an instrument of military and political conquest. In addition, the Turks and the Arabs developed strong racial and then political animosities. In re- action to all these changes, pious men of strong character founded sects or fraternities, withdrew to remote regions, gathered disciples, and built monasteries. - Some of these societies were active and reached from one end of the Moslem world to the other; others were very obscure and local. Some have lived for a long time; others went out of existence almost with the death of the original founder. Some were military in spirit; others were pacifistic. Some of them have become great missionary agencies whose chief goal has been the vast interior of Africa, where they would befar from the arm of European authority, and where there are millions of ignorant, superstitious negroes to convert. Some were devoted to poverty, and others amassed great wealth Problems of Imperial Britain - 57 with which they could fit out small military expeditions. These extended Mohammedan authority and provoked border tribesmen to make trouble for European governors about the borders of the Sahara as well as in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, Libya, French Equatorial Africa, and elsewhere. The most powerful of the African societies is the Senussi, which has been in existence for about eighty years and has a quite special character. Its founder claimed to be a direct descendant of the Prophet. He traveled from Mecca all through northern Africa, founding fra- termity centers, and for a time became so powerful that the Sultan of Turkey feared loss of prestige as Caliph. He finally settled down in Cyrenaica (Fig. 74), where he was almost out of reach of the Turk- ish authorities and where he could travel among his own people by convenient caravan routes. - Though at first free from all political influence, the Senussi grad- ually were drawn into political relations which have affected their later development. They resisted the coming of the Italians after the Italo-Turkish War (1911–1912), feeling that with Italian control over northern seaports, the lucrative trade in slaves would be suppressed or heavily taxed, and ordinary trade diverted. Between 1912 and 1914 they were supplied with arms, ammunition, and money by the Turks, and thus were able to resist successfully the Italian advance into the interior of Cyrenaica down to the end of the war. With the outbreak of war in August 1914, Turkish agencies became active in Libya (Tripoli), and the Italian forces were driven back nearer the coast. As the war progressed, the leader of the Senussi became more and more ambitious, and desired to make himself sov- ereign of the Moslem word. He attacked the Egyptian border from three points, the central one being the oasis of Siwa, but the British drove him out in February 1917, and so completely defeated him that his forces made no effort to return. The central stronghold of the Senussi is the oasis of Kufra (Fig. 74), in the heart of the Sahara, more than five hundred miles west of the Nile. It is surrounded by absolute desert, and the caravan routes to it are known only to Senussi guides. From this point the influence of the leader of the sect extends over most of the Sahara country. Occupying a central position, he has a convenient system of commu- nications. Tilho has given a fascinating account of his long strug- gle during the World War with desert tribesmen under Senussi influence in the Tibesti region northeast of Lake Tohad on the border of French Equatorial Africa. The most powerful religious sect, the Senussi The Senussi in inter- national politics The at- tack in Lower Egypt Central stronghold of the Senussi 58 . The New World Egyptian rising of I919 Growth of an Egyp- tian na- tionalist party and violent Iſleál SūTeS in 1919 Egypt can- not be al- lowed to be- come dis- orderly A deep re- ligious motive underlying political disorder in Egypt THE EGYPTIAN PROTECTORATE Ever since the beginning of the World War, political storm signals have been flying in the Near East, and it is worth while to see what they mean. The most recent was the threatened revolution in Egypt in March 1919. Egypt asks for freedom : can she be trusted with it? The British government had its hold on Egypt confirmed by the treaty of peace with Turkey (1920): why did Egyptians resent this? The Egyptian leaders, who are intellectually alert, developed a strong nationalistic movement at the time England occupied the Nile valley (1881). In 1882, the nationalist party asked for “independ- ence,” and England undertook repressive measures. In 1914, as a result of the World War, England abolished the shadow of Turkish overlordship which had existed since 1882, and declared Egypt a protectorate of the British Empire. Thereupon the nationalists be- came more active than ever, again demanding independence. Failing to reach the Peace Conference at Paris, they broke into insurrection. From one end of the lower Nile valley to the other, property was destroyed and shops were looted; a number of British soldiers were killed. - The rioting of 1919 was one of many proofs of the limitations of British policy in Egypt and of that violence which marks the char- acter of the small nationalist groups of Egypt. If the Egyptians lived at the South Pole, the organized world could forget about them and let them trouble each other as much as they chose; but instead they live near one of the great world thoroughfares, the Suez Canal; this is England's road to the East, her direct road to the most im- portant of her possessions — India. - Moreover, whatever the faults of British rule in Egypt, — and they are many, - the whole world is interested in these disorders be- cause behind them lies a far deeper motive than desire for political independence: the hatred of the Moslem Egyptian leaders for Christian rule. The outbreaks in Egypt have been supported largely by Turkish gold; the leaders have often been incited or inspired from Constantinople. The British assert that the test of capacity for self- government by Egyptians is not to be found in the violent spirit and phrases of the extreme nationalists, nor in their policy of assassination and intimidation. The nationalism of Egypt is unworthy of consideration in so far as it is the work of agitators of mixed allegiance, like Syrians, Turks, and Albanians, and of religious fanatics. In so far as it is the honest Problems of Imperial Britain 59 expression of the Egyptian people, it is a matter of serious import. It is futile to point to the benefits of British occupation, for in all lands and times the benefits of alien rule have been considered incapable of balancing its disadvantages. It is axiomatic that a second-rate government under native control is better than a first-rate gov- ernment under foreign control. While nationalist sentiment has made a deep and wide penetration, of which account should be taken, it must be realized that the alternative to British occupation is the return of the country to the mixed people, chiefly Moslems, who constitute the leaders of the nationalist movement. It would not mean turning the country over to the Copts, or true Egyptians, who form the bulk of the population; it would bring Egyptian control of the restless negro populations of the Sudan and would reënforce intolerant Moham- medanism throughout the Arab world. The trouble in Egypt can be under- stood only if we know the way in which the British came to control the country. The Turks were the nominal rulers, having conquered the country in 1517 777,777% AZAZ-21 T35 Alexandria Oz FortSaid Ç & * Wºº º C air: Q IE t ill O ;4 Akatº / Cafarach % - (2) Wadi Haifa &raracf N U b i a n. I) e S e I t Abu Hamed : . V —-v4 elima Yº 2 S O 20 is #3 (afarācy. §Dongola. fafargof Y503%rect º erber 6 Caſaracf Omdurmanoºkhartum 100 50 0 100 M E –33 Universal dislike for alien rule a deep- seated motive The alter- . native to British control Beginnings of British control ? FIG. 24. Map of Egypt showing the when — as now — it was weak and principal towns, the bordering deserts, disorganized. During the Napoleonic and the * of the Nile. Wars there was military occupation by both the British and the French. After the withdrawal of the British there followed a fierce war of factions ending in the complete victory of Mehemet Ali, who was practically independent ruler of Egypt till his abdication in 1848. Although Mehemet Ali continued to acknowledge the nominal suze- rainty of the Sultan, he succeeded in having the pashalik made heredi- tary in his family and his fourth successor, Ismail, was called Khedive. Both British and French commercial interests in Egypt increased, especially after the completion of the Suez Canal in 1869 by a French 60 The New World French and British Dual Control The Mahdi and trouble Fig. 25. Entrance to the Suez Canal at Port Said. This narrow ribbon of water is vital to the integrity of the British commercial and political empire. company. In 1875, needing money, the Khedive sold his shares of the Suez Canal Company to the British, who since then have watched every move in that part of the world. Would America, or France, or Italy not take the same interest in a disorderly country bordering its most vital waterway? Since the greater part of the huge debt which the successive rulers of Egypt had accumulated in the 19th century was borrowed from the British and the French, those two powers established a con- dominium, known as the Dual Control (1876–1883). The Egyptian leaders bitterly resented the interference of the foreigners; but only after they had accepted foreign money did they raise the cry of “Egypt for the Egyptians” and seek to organize a general revolution among the people, who had not shared in the original loans now squandered by leaders seeking their support against the foreigner. France having declined to use military force, the British took the field and crushed a rebellion engineered by Arabi Pasha, an army officer. To main- tain order Great Britain kept in Egypt an army of occupation and named herself “adviser” to the new Egyptian government. Directly thereafter trouble arose in the Sudan, where the Mahdi, in the sugan who had proclaimed himself as the “deliverer” of his people, appealed to the fanaticism of his followers (1881), defeated the Egyptian troops, massacred General Gordon and 11,000 men at Khartum (1885), and for about twelve years held the region in his grasp. Finally, in 1898 General Kitchener completely annihilated the armies of the Mahdi at the battle of Omdurman. As a war measure the Sudan, as well as Egypt, was declared annexed to the British Empire in 1914, with the Problems of Imperial Britain 61 status of a “protected state.” Moreover, the treaty of Sèvres between Turkey and the Allied powers (1920) recognizes the British protectorate in Egypt, and Turkey renounces the tribute formerly levied on Egypt. But a treaty which is not signed by the representatives of the people whom the treaty affects does not in itself settle disorder or kill political ambition. The Egyptian nationalist program calls for noth- ing less than independence from British control, neutrality of the Suez Canal, the recession of the Sudan to Egypt (it was never under effec- tive Egyptian control), and a parliamentary form of government. Egypt protested that she would keep on struggling to be free as she understands freedom; the British government renewed its deter- mination never to relinquish its hold. The resulting disorders forced Great Britain to attempt a wholly new orientation of her Egyptian policy through the Milner mission of 1920. After a conference between British and Egyptian representa- tives, a tentative agreement was drawn up, promising self-govern- ment in the immediate future, with moderate British control and special reserved rights in relation to the Suez Canal. While Egypt would secure “independence,” Great Britain would reserve the fol- lowing rights: (1) To guarantee Egypt from outside aggression and to have access to Egyptian territory in case of War. - - (2) To maintain a garrison in the Suez Canal Zone. (3) To control the foreign policy of Egypt and to represent Egypt in countries where no Egyptian representatives are appointed. Great Britain would also agree to abolish the capitulations which granted special privileges to foreigners, and to have no more “advisers” in the different government departments. The ex- pected adoption of this preliminary agreement would alter the British protectorate declared in 1914 and recognized by the treaties of Ver- mone or cºnces sailles, St. Germain, and Sèvres. FIG. 26. The ribbons of The pro- gram of the Egyp- tian na- tionalist party The population of Egypt now numbers inigated land along the Nile River, including the 13,000,000. The people are mostly farmers ...dºt.sº © C. o tº the Nile Delta. From living on the delta and on narrow strips of fertile Annuaire statistique de land on either side of the life-giving Nile. There inſpie, 1914. 62 The New World The land and the people Three types of distribu- tion The Nuba tribes as an example of colonial difficulties is a well-educated and wealthy class in the towns eager to secure political control, though a limited number see and acknowledge the benefits of British supervision and work with British officials in maintaining order. - THE ANGLO-EGYPTIAN SUDAN South of Upper Egypt there is a vast extent of country known as the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, extending from Wadi Halfa to Uganda in the Victoria Nyanza region. It was formerly a source of great difficulty to the British administration of Egypt. Unruly tribes inhabit its semi-arid western sections, and their fanatical religion (Mohammedanism) has led them to oppose bitterly the authority of Christian rulers. It was in 1898 at Omdurman, opposite Khartum, that Kitchener defeated the Mahdi, or “Deliverer” (page 60), and restored order. The climax to the events since that time was reached in July 1919, when the Golden Sword of the Mahdi was surrendered to the Imperial Sovereign of the British Empire. - The country lies partly in the basin of the Nile and partly in the interior-basin drainage of the Sahara. The portion lying in the east and south is fertile and has great possibilities for agriculture and cattle breeding, while the northern and western portions are arid or semi- arid. Negroes and Arabs comprise the bulk of the population. They fall into the following groups: (1) Cattle-owning nomads who occupy the watered and more luxuriant country toward the south. In the region of the Nile the country is thickly settled. (2) Sedentary peoples of mixed type (as in central Kordofan); these live in villages of a dozen or several score huts, the size of each village depending upon the quantity of ground that can be conveniently cultivated and upon the supply of water. (3) Camel-owners living chiefly in the northern desert districts; these own also large herds of cattle, sheep, and goats, and culti- vate the soil. As an example of the sedentary type we may take the case of the Nuba tribes of Kordofan, since they illustrate also the difficulties that confront British officials in these remote sections of the world. The Nuba tribesmen occupy the Nuba Hills in central Kordofan. Each community is restricted to a given hilly district whose boundaries are naturally defined. Cultivation is limited to the terraced slopes Problems of Imperial Britain w 63 * — — 25 SS º * y & Il Wadi H oel Fasher ſ' F U. R. *** \.--> L.MUN'ſſ LA Jº Stanleyville §§ tailſº F-A- § - º,0p; 㺠3% D Anglo-Egyptian Sudan SOther Britpossessions & Non-British possessions. o: 50. 100 200m. FIG. 27. Six hundred miles in a straight line south of the Nile mouths the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan begins, to extend nearly fifteen hundred miles farther south. Much of it is desert. Part of its population is difficult to manage. Its control is one of the many difficult tasks which the British have undertaken in the field of colonial government. New boundary (between Wadai and Darfur) in the area of the dotted rectangle, left center, from L'Afrique Française, February 1920. The boundary between Egypt (British) and Libya (Italian) is still indeter- minate. So far as it has been defined in preliminary agreements it is shown in Figure 74. 64 The New World Aridity of the Western desert portions has led to Water storage in trees The better land and denser popula- tions bor- der the Nile of the hills. Some grain is º, produced and vegetables, cot- ſº ton, and tobacco also are % grown. The Nuba tribesmen own considerable herds of cattle, sheep, and goats. They have long defended their hills by stone walls built across the Valleys and by a system of water, grain, and even cattle storage in the caves found in the more inaccessible heights. One of the most remark- à able of the features of the 2% region is illustrated in Dar Hamar, southeastern Kor- dofan, where the natives are dependent for most of the - .* tº gº • g º º | year on the supply of water FIG. 28. The difficulties in the way of management tº of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan may be judged by stored in the enlarged Inatur al studying this map of comparative distances. A cavities of the tebeldi trees in single main railway line runs from Wadi Halfa ſº tº , tº southward through Khartum to El Obeid, 230 miles sufficient Quantities to last :::::::::::::::"Rºº" through an entire dry season. The diameter of the trees varies from 10 to 15 feet, and the interior reservoir is often 20 feet high. The trees form valuable property and are let or sold with the adjacent land. It is estimated that there are at least 200,000 of them in the district. When the local water supply becomes inadequate, certain families break away and form a new village. The best agricultural land of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan is in the Kordofan region, but the crops are limited by the amount of rain- fall, except locally along the river, where river floods or irrigation from the Nile make possible a larger extent of cultivated land and a denser population. Swarms of migratory locusts occasionally visit the district and devour the crops. Cotton and cereals are grown, and a variety of grains. Cattle form the principal basis of the ex- port trade to Egypt. Ivory is imported from southern districts, and ostriches are kept in some of the villages. Gum arabic forms a prin- cipal article of commerce. Protection from the various Arab tribes and sub-tribes of the plains round about has been secured by payment of a regular tribute Problems of Imperial Britain 65 of grain and slaves. Among themselves, the more powerful hill com- munities of the Nuba tribes have always made war upon the weaker communities, an intertribal conflict stimulated by the protection from Arab invasion which the English government gave to the hill communities. In 1908 a military expedition was sent into the coun- try to storm the principal strongholds and bring the natives to a state of submission, and again in 1909, 1910, and 1911 successive expeditions had to be sent to maintain order. Darfur, west of Kordofan province, remained semi-independent until 1916, when, following the rebellion of the sultan Ali Dinar, the country was conquered and later incorporated as the fifteenth prov- ince of the Sudan. This measure led to the settlement of the long- postponed frontier question of Wadai and Darfur. Great Britain and France have now agreed upon the boundary line shown in Figure 27. It is a settlement of importance to the peace of the Sudan by reason of the fact that until it was made neither the British nor the French could effectively pacify the more remote peoples on their common borders, the British operating from Khartum and the French from the forts along the Shari River, the principal feeder of Lake Tchad. . . BRITISH INTERESTS IN ARABIA Interior Desert Tribes and Coastal Settlements British power in Arabia has been exercised hitherto chiefly on the borders of the country and in places accessible to naval vessels. With the advance of the Turkish armies on Egypt by way of Syria and Palestine in 1916, British forces had to win and hold the allegiance of the Arabs. The enormous difficulties of this task were over- come with marked suc- CeSS. To understand the political problems of Arabia, let us look first at the physical geog- raphy. Arabia is a huge desert peninsula. & Placed over the United Fig. 29. Anatolia and Arabia in terms of American locations. Military expeditions against the Nuba hill- Iºlel Pacification of the re- gion on the Western frontier * 3. Mesopotºº Bagdad Physical geography of Arabia as | an isolating factor 66 * The New World The fanat- ical and intolerant character of the desert tribes The Nejd the heart of Arabia; its people 116-Ver COIl- quered States, it would extend from San Diego, California, to Chicago, and from Canada to Mexico (Fig. 29). Every part of this vast region is more or less a unit in itself. It is bordered on at least one side by a broad and nearly impassable desert. The isolation of the country is still further marked by the absence of good harbors and improved roads. The country is broken into strongly marked physiographic units, and its people have always been divided into primitive organizations, in which the tribal idea is paramount. The tribes are all fiercely famatical and have excluded the intruder to a remarkable degree, being helped in this respect by the inaccessibility of the country. Even the Turkish officials and the Turkish tribes have been kept out. Though the desert interior is sufficiently high to make the climate possible for white men, no white men — not even explorers — have penetrated the innermost districts until recent times. The nomadic tribes live within a limited space, and the persistent feuds, especially between the northern and southern tribes, have intensified their iso- lation. This is the more remarkable when we consider that the gen- eral mode of life and the language of the whole nomadic group are the same. - The population groups lying in the heart of Arabia are very strikingly located. They occur at oases scattered along the valley floors of a drainage system associated with a belt of highland known as the Djebel Tuwaik (Fig. 30). This highland — the back- bone of central Arabia — is in the form of a long ridge extending roughly north and south for a distance of nearly 400 miles, with an average breadth of 20 miles. Its western border is a relatively steep and regular scarp 400 to 600 feet high. Its eastern slope descends by broad steps to the desert wastes that flank it on this side. On the south, the north, and the west lie other sandy desert tracts that form a great moat about the central uplift, which, far removed from the coast and from other desert settlements, having small resources, inhabited by scattered groups of limited size, and with a people sin- gularly hostile and fanatical in their attitude toward the stranger, is more isolated than if it were a remote oceanic isle. Southeast of the highland region is a broad tract called the Empty Quarter, which has never been traversed by a European. The tribes of the highland region of the Nejd have never been brought under subjection by foreign powers in modern times. Some of the towns are of considerable size. Riyadh has a population of 12,000 to 15,000. The inhabitants of this district form the Wahabi Problems of Imperial Britain group of Arabs, who live under Ibn Saud as ruler. The latter has maintained a rather high state of military efficiency and religious ardor, and by favoring the development of the principal towns and vil- lages is able to preserve the integrity of his desert empire. It is an interesting fact that the traders of Yemen and Koweit send part of their wares through this belt of Oases in the heart of Arabia. Hither comes coffee from the Yemen in exchange for the tea, Sugar, and other goods of the Persian Gulf COaSt. The Mohamme- tº |\º danism of these desert 47 tribes is much diluted. Fig. 30. The heart of the Arabian desert and home of the There is a great variety independent Wahabis. After Philby, Geographical Journal, March 1920. of religious tendencies, * expressed in various sects, and there are even primitive pagan and semi-pagan forms involving the worship of rocks and mountains. Arabia has a northern border of watered country, often called the Fertile Crescent, where the nomadic Arab has become a sedentary tiller of the soil. Mesopotamia and Syria, like the Hedjaz, Yemen, and Oman, are settled by branches of the Arab people. The govern- ment of the outer coastal states, the commerce, and the customs of the people as well, are quite different from those of the inner desert tribes. In many places the latter are peaceful enough; in others they periodically raid the rich valleys of the fertile border, or they take to piracy, as on the shores of the Persian Gulf. Owing to the lawlessness of its people and their disorganized po- º § -ºwº º: :*A 2] SOUTHERN NEJID - Scale of miles tº ſº c g º 39 y 4g The Fer- tile Cres- cent and the divi- sions of Arabia 68 The New World Foreign control of Arabian gateways British control of the Tru- cial Coast, or Pirate Coast Opposi- tion to a great Arab confedera- tion Difficulties of control of the Arab world from desert Arabia litical condition, it has been the fate of Arabia to have its borders invaded by foreign interests. Non-Arab powers have controlled all the water approaches — Great Britain on the south and east and formerly Turkey on the west. Al Hasa is the name given to the Persian Gulf border of Arabia, and it has long been famous as the home of pirates or slave traders and of evil-minded merchants who thrive on the sale of guns to unruly border peoples. This whole region was once described as the Pirate Coast, and British control over it has its foundation in an attempt to put down piracy, which throve on British commerce. The pirates occupied the coast of the Katar peninsula at the strait of Hormuz, northwestward to the head of the gulf (Fig. 230). Early in the 19th century the British began to police the gulf, and from 1805 to 1821 they had frequent naval encounters with the pirates. Between 1835 and 1856 the British made many treaties with the Arab chiefs to maintain the peace of the gulf, regulate or abolish the slave traffic, and end piracy. As a result there was formed among the six princi- pal Arab tribes of the region a so-called Trucial League. The chiefs of these tribes, known as Trucial Chiefs, deal with the British resident, or political officer, at Bushire on the Persian coast in all matters in dispute between themselves, the Turks, the Persians, and the British. Recently there has grown up, chiefly as a result of the newly-created Kingdom of the Hedjaz, a movement to secure Arab unity. The political form would be a confederation of Arab states extending from Mesopotamia to Egypt and from Syria to the Red Sea, including the whole Arabian peninsula. In fact, the religious or learned doc- tors of Mecca have already (1916) proclaimed the Sherif Hussein, of Mecca, King of the Arab Nation. But the great powers have never recognized this action; their interests, no less than the weak- ness of the Arabs themselves, will prevent real confederation. Also opposed to the desired Arab union is the physical geography of the Arabian peninsula. The detached tribal states are widely separated on the margin of the great Arabian desert. It is nearly a thousand miles from Damascus to Mecca. While the Hedjaz is the strongest state, with a population of several hundred thousand, its military power is feeble and its political experience small. Nor do all the Arab states welcome control by the King of the Hedjaz, who rules his tribes like a patriarch. Added to the opposition of the chieftains of the inner desert tribes is that of the sheiks of Asir and Yemen on the coast, farther south. Problems of Imperial Britain 69 - - - - - - ºr - --- - * * ----- tºº * -- º --- ºil - º - -- * * * * * * * * * International Film, Service FIG. 31. General view of Jiddah, an Arab town, chief port of the Kingdom of the Hedjaz. Even before the recent war, the Arab half of the Turkish Empire was interested in the founding of a separate Arab empire. Among the Arabs there has never been any real interest in the famous Pan- Turanian movement of the Turks (page 435). Here we have a very interesting fact: there was a division of the Ottoman Empire along lines of nationalism rather than religion. The local differences of culture and history likewise oppose confed- eration. Syria and Arabia have unlike customs, traditions, and habits. Damascus has an age-old ambition herself to become the head of an independent Arab kingdom. While the movement for Arab independence made rapid headway during the World War, it has now taken on very artificial forms. As soon as the war was over, the traditional disputes of the Arabs were revived. They ended in an armed conflict between Ibn Saud, leader of the Wahabis of the Nejd, and King Hussein of the Hedjaz. The former represents the most extreme elements of Mohammedanism; the latter stands for a more reasonable and orthodox view of his religion. The quarrel grew out of a question of boundaries, but it rests in large part also upon deep-seated religious differences that illustrate the difficulties of Arab unity, whether we consider Arabia itself or northern Africa, or the Sudan, or Syria and Mesopotamia, the other principal territorial divisions of the Arab realm. If France and Great Britain have their way, the Arab state will not be formed of the parts which the Arabs have claimed, nor even Sectional rivalries Struggle be- tween the interior tribes and those on the border 70 The New World Protection of foreign interests Hedjaz and the annual pil- grimages Oman and the illegal trade in firearms of Syria combined with Palestine or Mesopotamia. At most it would consist of interior territory southeast of coastal Syria, and it is not expected that the French will permit it to include the railroad and cities east of the Sykes–Picot line, – Homs, Damascus, Hama, and Aleppo. (See Figure 209 for the Anglo-French agreement of 23 December 1920.) The border regions of Arabia will stay in the hands of the European powers as long as these powers remain strong. Only by becoming orderly and self-governing can the Arab tribes expect at last to be measurably free from foreign control, because disorder would threaten not only the trade and lives of foreigners; it would threaten also England's road to India, besides stirring up trouble in Egypt and among the Mohammedan peoples of India itself. Because of its relation to the Pan-Arab movement, the Hedjaz will continue to be important in international affairs in spite of its small size. It is only about 700 miles long and 150 miles wide, and lies between the highlands of the plateau of Arabia and the Red Sea coast. The name “Hedjaz” means barrier, which refers to the wall of high mountains on the edge of the tableland. The largest city in the Hedjaz is Mecca, with a population of 80,000, and next to it is Medina, with 40,000. The principal traffic is related to the pilgrimages made by many devout Mohammedans from all parts of the Moslem world. From 80,000 to 100,000 people annually visit the holy cities of Mecca and Medina. Most of them come by sea, but many come by caravan and, more recently, by rail as far as Medina. Only Mohammedans may enter either city. Of special interest in a study of Arabia is the principality of Oman. The eastern Oman is one of the most advanced districts of Arabia. The population of the entire province is estimated at 500,000. First in importance is the town of Maskat, with a population of 10,000 and a fine harbor, the seat of extensive trade with India and East Africa. One of the long-standing difficulties at Oman has been the illicit trade in firearms. In 1912 the British compelled the Sultan to pro- mulgate a law prohibiting this trade; but French vessels, down to the time of the Hague arbitral decision of 1905, had entire freedom of commerce in the waters of Oman and could not be searched by British gunboats. It is probable that Great Britain will assume a protectorate over the region. Everywhere else in the vicinity she has increased her power, in line with her policy to control the approaches to the route to India. Since 1885 the various sultans or emirs of the small Arab states Problems of Imperial Britain 71 along the southern coast of Arabia have virtually recognized British protection. The British have also annexed the Kuria Muria Islands and assumed a protectorate over Bahrein Island in the Persian Gulf (Fig. 230). A treaty concluded with Turkey in 1909 recognized as a British sphere all of Arabia south of a line drawn between Yemen and Aden and extending northeastward to the Katar peninsula, on the Persian Gulf. The two border provinces of Yemen and Asir remain to be con- sidered. Yemen is the small province at the southwestern corner of the Arabian peninsula. The strip near the coast is barren coun- try with a few oases. Toward the east, at the edge of the tableland with local mountains exceeding 10,000 feet in height, there is greater rainfall and high production. The people are mostly town dwellers and fairly industrious. It is believed that the population numbers at least 1,000,000, but no census has ever been made. Europeans in the region number less than 1 per cent of the total population. The largest city is Sanaa on the edge of the plateau, with a popu- lation of 25,000; Hodeidah is the principal port. Paying little heed to Turkish overlordship, Yemen was a virtually independent country up to 1914 and will probably remain so, provided it enters no alliance that threatens the welfare of the great powers. In length the province of Asir (Fig. 30) is about 230 miles, in width about 150 miles. Like the Hedjaz, it has for eastern bound- ary a rugged mountain belt, with well-watered and fertile valley floors that produce dates and coffee known for their quality throughout the world. Shells, skins, and salt also are exported. There are no navigable waterways. All inland communication is by caravan. Asir has unexplored regions inhabited by warlike tribes. Ghizin is the principal port. In 1912 the ruling sheik declared his country autonomous. In 1914 Turkey sent warships to the coast, but the World War prevented further military measures. With a mandatary for Palestine and Mesopotamia, Great Britain has almost encircled the Arabs (the French remain in Syria), and need fear no immediate difficulties in protecting her sea route from the Suez Canal to India unless there should come about a general union of Mohammedan peoples. There is a particular spot near the border of Arabia that deserves notice because of its critical relation to the Aden and Red Sea out- let on the British road to India, at the Strait of Bab el Mandeb. This is the port of Sheikh Said, which the French have claimed for more than half a century. It lies on the eastern shore and Extent of the British sphere of influence in Arabia The geog- raphy of Yemen The un- ruly coun- try of Asir British penetra- tion of the Arab world French and ‘ British in- terests in conflict at the Strait of Bab el Mandeb 72 The New World A British protecto- rate on the southern coast of Arabia British interests and prob- lems directly opposite the British-owned island of Perim in the strait itself. It is between Perim and Sheikh Said (Fig. 271) that ships take their course, and if the place were fortified it would menace the Indian and eastern Asiatic commerce that passes this way. The British look longingly at it, for with this and Sokotra Island — which they al- ready own — in their hands, every part of the Indian route would be amply protected. The small French colony of Somaliland exists near by, but it is so completely overshadowed by British Somaliland and the British Aden colony that it can never become a menace to legitimate British interests, either commercial or naval. East of the port of Aden is an undefined area on the Gulf of Aden which is a British protectorate known as the Makalla Sultanate. The region exports raw tobacco, skins, coffee, honey, and shells, and has a total annual trade of about $2,000,000, nearly equally divided between exports and imports. MESOPOTAMIA In Mesopotamia Great Britain confronts two matters of special political concern to her, in addition to the general problem of responsi- bility toward the native Arabs: (1) The country flanks Great Britain's land route to India. (2) In southeastern Mesopotamia Great Britain has built great oil refineries and docks for handling the rich petroleum yield of regions near by, both in Mesopotamia and in Southwestern Persia. * Great Britain's sense of responsibility to the native is not unmixed with other motives; for Mesopotamia, as a part of it (Irak) was in ancient times, might become part of a general Arab confederation and would then be lost to Great Britain. A British company controls transportation on the Tigris-Euphrates river systems, and British capital has been invested in the railroad from Basra northward (now extended almost to Mosul as part of the Bagdad system). British surveys of the irrigation possibilities of Mesopotamia have shown the enormously productive capacity of the soil when properly watered. Cotton, tobacco, silk, and other subtropical products could be grown on a huge scale and might give the region extraordinary com- mercial importance. The possible value of these products to industrial England is almost incalculable. Originally interested in the region chiefly because of the pirates that infested the Persian Gulf and preyed upon British shipping, England established political residencies and Problems of Imperial Britain 73 I 40 . Zł4. Mardi * 48 aſ Cill O tº e º º ; Nisibin * M ESO POTAM |A `s, * \ š Settled Arabs *~ A9 * –36 M9;n {-, -, - ſº. Railroads & ~\ #. sm ºs *:::. C’ Scale of miles l sº es Zor §:gatoKirkuk \ —; |00 |50 Birſabaküß. *ś, ::\lſ 2. * * * - ~ *::: *ie. Kutel Amara 40 Kerbela': & *::::::::::::. us § § A2% :er. ; ~~ :::::::::A; º: U. \ s & l 32– Y / & I • * * *Sºº, e s • * §: I #!-- tº ths al § M ILES sº O 10 4. Kowetº FIG. 32. Drainage, population, and boundaries of Mesopotamia. After Map of Eastern Tur- key in Asia, Syria, and Western Persia (Ethnographical), scale 1: 2,000,000, British General Staff, No. 2901, 1915. Lake and swamp areas in the Euphrates valley are shown by diagonal ruling. For boundary with Syria see Figure 209. trading posts about the shores, and extended her commercial and political penetration until she is today in secure hold of the chief re- sources, which are growing in value with the rapid increase of the world's industrial population. Ambition to control the Berlin-Bagdad route — as part of the Pan-German scheme — was one of the causes of Germany's hostility to England before the war. The rich trade of India and the Orient, including the East Indies, makes the possession of these regions a commercial advantage. Together, India and China possess more 74 The New World Interna- tional ri- valry for the wealth of Meso- potamia than 40 per cent of the world's population. China also has vast un- touched resources of iron and coal, and were they to be developed and the population industrialized, these resources would become a source of economic power with which an ambitious nation could control vir- tually the whole world. Mesopotamia, by reason of its position be- tween the industrial nations of the West and the undeveloped popu- lations of the East, becomes a critical region, a true problem area. * England's occupation of the region, including her development of its resources and her relations with the native, will be challenged The oil of Mesopo- tamia and the British commercial fleet by her rivals, the more so because her control of Mesopotamia will not end with this territory alone. To the north lies Kurdistan; to the west lies the Arab realm; to the east lies Persia. In each one of these regions other powers have what they regard as vital in- terests, and they will not stand by and see the region exploited for the benefit of British capital only. The English have been enterpris- ing and successful hitherto in many of their political ventures, but they have here a problem that will fully test their administrative powers. Those who challenge the British claim to the occupation of Meso- potamia have to recognize, however, that if Great Britain's hold were relaxed, rival ambitions and native intrigue would surely make this a field of disorder, to the injury not only of Great Britain but of France and Persia as well. At least until affairs become orderly again, the peace of the world demands that the region be held, if not by England, at least by some other strong power. While irrigation may furnish the basis for the chief riches of Meso- potamia, the immediate wealth of the country lies principally in trade and in the development of the oil resources (Fig. 230). The produc- tion of the Persian and Mesopotamian fields is small at the present time, but the reserve is great, and this is a matter of prime impor- tance to Great Britain, whose navy depends chiefly upon oil for fuel, and whose commercial carriers are being turned into oil burners at a rapid rate. Late in 1919 plans were made calling for the development of huge oil refineries at Swansea in southern Wales, and already large refineries have been established at Abadan on the Shatt el Arab (Fig. 32). The control of the world’s oil supply is a matter of great con- cern, and it will form the basis of one of the keenest commercial rivalries of the next fifty years. Thus Mesopotamia means not only problems of land, frontiers, natives, railroads, and river steamers; it is also vitally related to one of the many life streams that support the British commercial fleet. Problems of Imperial Britain 75 In many respects the occupation of Mesopotamia is an exception to the established British policy of keeping to islands, as in New Zealand and Jamaica, or to relatively detached areas, like Australia or Egypt, or to strategic ports, as at Walvis Bay and Aden, or to peninsulas partly shut off from the interior by mountains or forests or deserts, as India, the Straits Settlements, arfi North Borneo. Mesopotamia is an alluvial basin bordered by tablelands and moun- tains inhabited by restless, unruly, nomadic, and fanatical Moslem peoples who, both far and near, have overrun the basin time and again, and who will not leave Great Britain to occupy peacefully a rich land which is their traditional prey. Like India, Mesopotamia will have its problem of a northwest frontier, and in an equally dangerous and costly form. ** THE GOSPEL OF EMPIRE IS THERE OLL IN MESOPOTAMIA 2 ” In this headline from a London paper we have illustrated the opposition between two divergent theories of political control for British protected areas and mandates. (1) There is the principle that, taking advantage of mandatory power assigned to it, Great Britain may encourage the development of resources of special interest to British citizens. The British public would thereby pay what might be called the overhead charges in maintaining opportunities and privileges which would be of financial benefit only to the private trader. Once accepted, this policy leads naturally to the strongly developed tendency to give protection and special benefits to the British trader, since British taxpayers are pay- ing the costs of government and desire to see concrete financial com- pensation. To a like degree there would develop a tendency to give special favors to the British trader rather than to the native trader, who by himself is incapable of organizing a strong government. (2) Opposed to this principle is the theory of protection for the benefit of all, the native and the non-British subject to have equal opportunities with the British trader. This clearly requires altru- ism on the part of the British taxpayer, who reaps no advantage in holding the territory, except the indirect benefits conferred upon the British citizen due to the increase of trade. To put into practice such a policy is an uphill task. - The enduring wealth of Mesopotamia is the extraordinary fertility of the soil. It is competently estimated that the average combined Occupation of Mesopo- tamia a departure from tra- ditional British poi- icy 1 The Daily Herald, 26 March 1920. Two op- posing views of British expansion 76 The New World The irriga- tion pos- sibilities discharge of the Tigris-Euphrates rivers would irrigate 7,000,000 acres in winter and 3,000,000 acres of varied crops in summer. Half of this area could be immediately reclaimed if the ancient system of canals and drains were restored, and the Euphrates water turned into the land west of the Tigris, while the Tigris and its tributaries were made to irrigate the land east of the Tigris. It is even suggested that for the better utilization of their waters for irrigation purposes, the rivers should not be used for navigation, but should be super- seded by railways for the transport of cereals and cotton. CHAPTER THREE POLITICAL AND COLONIAL AIMS OF FRANCE (A) READJUSTMENT AND REORGANIZATION HAD it not been for the temperamental flexibility of her people, the War of 1914–1918 might have ruined France. Almost the whole World eventually came to her aid, but it should not be forgotten that she also helped herself through a courageous expenditure of her energies and resources that now brings her a crop of after-war troubles of the gravest import. More than 1,400,000 of her soldiers were killed. Of these about half came from French farms, and almost all of them were young men, whose death resulted in a heavy capital loss to the state. Her soil and forests were devastated in a large part of the occupied region; her mills were destroyed in the most highly industrialized part of her territory; and her coal mines were damaged so seriously that it will take several years at least to restore them to productivity. She lost 30 per cent of her shipping. Three million head of cattle were taken by Germany in the occupied region. Every Allied army operating in France had to get a large part of its mine-timber and railway ties as well as road metal in France. Her ports, never large enough for her own normal needs had to be occupied in large part by British and American engineers. Her farming and industrial popu- lations were displaced. In consequence, the whole economic life of France must be made over, owing to the disturbance caused by the abnormal arrangements of the war. To be sure, there was some financial return to France during the war, in that more money was spent by the Allied armies in France than in any other country. On the other hand, she had so little coal, her industrial machinery was so badly deranged, her manufacturing energies had to be spent so largely on big guns, ammunition, and the repair and replacement of the material wastage of war, that she was compelled to make a large part of her purchases for her ordinary needs and for much of her ammunition in the United States and in England. The problems of France are therefore largely those of reconstruction — to set going again her national machinery. To develop her own mills and factories to the pre-war point and to turn back into their old channels the forces of labor and capital will require years of patient adjustment. Remaking her industrial organization will also create new social and political problems that may threaten the internal peace of France. What the War COst France Recon- Struction a difficult and costly problem 77 78 The New World The effect of the dis- covery that Germany could not pay war costs Impossi- bility of ad- minister- ing the whole of Germany THE BURDEN OF WAR COSTS In the first place, every Frenchman took for granted what Lloyd George felt obliged to promise the British people in December 1918– that Germany could be made to pay the costs of the war; it was in that expectation that many men had toiled and fought during four years of war. It was likewise expected that the bill to Germany should include compensation for all the damage done to civilian property. When the war ended and a settlement came to be made, it was dis- covered that Germany had destroyed so much that she could never pay the damage in addition to the costs of war. This was a terrible blow to France. The effect on the French spirit was not unlike that of a great military defeat. People had lost sight of the fact that the war had cost the Allies more than twice Germany's total wealth before the war and much more than the combined national wealth of all the enemy powers. If absolutely everything in Germany could have been confiscated and sold for what it was normally worth, the total would have amounted to less than one half the war expenditures of the Allies alone. In addition, Germany's own debt amounted to one half her total wealth. In short, the costs of the war could not be repaid. But there were other reasons than its inadequacy against such a confiscation of German wealth. It would have reduced the Ger- man people to economic slavery, and the administration of Germany under such conditions would have cost much more in trouble and money than the value of the goods produced. It was impossible to escape the fact that, in the last analysis, only those reparation pay- ments would be of value which were made in goods or in services. To confiscate immovable German property would not have helped at all, since only those goods (or their equivalent in sound, not inflated, money) which could be moved to Allied countries could be of the slightest value to the Allies. In other words, if reparation payments were to be of value they must be made outside of Germany — at London, Paris, Rome, or New York; for as long as either money or goods remained in Germany they could be of use only to Germans. This meant, of course, that reparation payments must be made over a term of years, since Germany's national income in any single year would amount to but a very small percentage (about 5 per cent) of the total costs of the war. It also meant that Germany must produce a great deal more than she con- sumed, if large payments were to be made. That is, Germany must Political and Colonial Aims of France 79 T RELIEFT: …Tº Lºº C Mefers feet 22, 2* * •Briggs eantwerºy lier800 pºund:#50 * : . . . { ºn-ºff As? 200-500 % 650-625 &Tº ſºyººr”;Já N. cº Y&Tourºfig fiégéºp Over 500 NOver 1625 iº; º -50 - º à. '• Cities of 50000-200000 % O Over 200000 % SCALE OF MILES 2., Eº- 50 O 50 100CS, Mihić 6% % - º ſ º º S Nº. º % % - º sº 3%\\? § * [] §§ gº º 2sº & º g NŽ &§º *4.º §º & º-১ %22& S º % & tº º § SN&W º sº an sº º & RN Ł §§ %SX N & 2 Ş }SN º 2% TIG. 33. Relief map of France, based on Vidal Lablache. North of the line A-A’, one third of all persons engaged in gainful pursuits are employed in industry (as derived from Album graphique et statistique de la France, 1907, p. 82). This is the chief industrial region of France and was the seat of the German invasions of 1870 and of 1914–1918. The plains of Belgium are continuous with those of northern France. It was by way of Liége, Brussels, and Lille that the German armies invaded France in 1914, reaching in a few weeks a point within a few miles of Paris. Note the position of Alsace-Lorraine and the defensive value of the Rhine. - be allowed to prosper in order to pay a large indemnity, and of course a certain part of this prosperity could be won only at the expense of the nations with whom Germany would compete for world trade. Finally, the Allies saw that even to confiscate Germany's gold re- serve would be unwise. Paper money has no value in itself; its value depends upon the willingness of people to accept it, and that in turn depends upon the ability of the government to redeem it in gold or silver upon demand. When the Germans occupied Poland and Serbia and Rumania, they issued floods of paper money based upon their small gold reserve. This paper money would be worthless if there did not exist the possibility that it could be exchanged for gold. Why Ger- many's gold re- serve had to be left in Germany 80 The New World France obliged to pay her OWIll War costs The labor- ing classes and taxes How France met the prob- lem of demobili- zation The return of Alsace- Lorraine For the Allies to take away Germany's gold reserve would mean the ruin of thousands of people who had accepted the paper money (based on that reserve) or who had had it forced upon them. Furthermore, the amount of Germany's gold reserve was only $700,000,000, and the estimated war costs of the Allies are several hundred times as large. Reluctantly French economists came to see that it would be best to leave Germany's gold in her own hands, let her run her own gov- ernment, including her railways, and obtain payments by taking from her the products of her industry or their equivalent in value. In other words, German labor for many years to come, rather than present German capital, would have to pay the bill. Even then the money that could be extracted and still leave German industry a basis on which to continue would be enough only to restore the dam- age to civilian property. The war costs of France must be paid by the French people themselves. The realization of these facts produced a profound impression in French labor circles, where it was at last clearly seen that for a long time there will be heavy taxes to pay for a war that was forced on France by Germany. Laboring men object the more because during the war French capital did not pay nearly so high as British and American capital; income taxes and excess-profits taxes were lower in France. Yet during all that time the cost of living was mounting rapidly. The French government therefore tried to avoid labor troubles by demobilizing slowly, so that the returning soldiers might be found employment as rapidly as they became free from army discipline. Societies were organized to assist locally. The government lent its aid to rebuild the devastated regions of northern France. These measures, with the granting of small pensions for temporarily un- employed soldiers, made the return to normal conditions of life easier than it would otherwise have been, and also safer for the country. PROBLEMS OF THE EASTERN BORDER One of the largest territorial gains made by France as a result of the World War was due to the recovery of Alsace-Lorraine (5600 square miles). These provinces were taken away in 1871, following the Franco-Prussian War. They are inhabited chiefly by Germans in the central and eastern portions, and by French on the west. Nearly half of Lorraine is occupied by a French-speaking majority, but only 6 per cent of the area of Alsace. As a whole the people are 4 Political and Colonial Aims of France 81 unquestionably French in sympathy. To Tɺf §§ have these provinces held by Germany 84.3 . . . . was intensely irritating to French pride, º ãº, \}, \ and their return became one of the ob- §§§ 8, & ‘s’ jects of the war. Resentment toward Kingpoº.º. Germany was the more bitter because the *: * º iron ore of Lorraine was one of the bases K- i. 3. “s, of German industry, and possession of it Sº- * \'z,\ = proved to be a marked advantage in a - war largely based on machinery and steel. Fig. 34. The narrow belt of country Th f th e d d t between France and Germany is an e return O © PrOVIDCCS adClS UO old zone of friction. It was once held France a population of 1,900,000. It gives as a separate, kingdom, as shºwn gº º above. The idea of creating a line her also the richest iron-ore beds of Europe, of buffer states in the same general thus enabling Rººm become a great pro- tº ºne * ducer of iron and steel to provide for her own normal needs, to restore the devastated areas, and to export to her colonies and elsewhere. It was from Lorraine that Germany derived 75 per cent (21,000,000 long tons) of all the iron mined in the empire. Alsace has oil wells at Pechelbronn, and at Wittelsheim there is one cf the two greatest potash deposits in the world, the other being at Stassfurt in Germany. The Saar basin coal deposits extend into northern Lorraine, and there are also valuable salt deposits. In contrast to the mineral resources of Lorraine, and the industries de- pendent upon them, is the great agricultural production of Alsace. Its soil is a marked addition to the wealth of France. The return of Alsace-Lorraine brought up an interesting religious problem, seeing that during the period of their occupation by Ger- many these provinces did not share with the rest of France the rup- ture between church and state. And in Alsace-Lorraine the clerical party is quite as strongly religious and Catholic as it is Francophile. This situation has led French leaders to take steps to restore diplo- matic relations with the Vatican, a plan which received great im- petus in the administration of Millerand, following Clémenceau. The result will be to weld the provinces still more firmly to France, while at the same time French foreign problems will receive far more sympathetic consideration in Spain and Italy, where powerful clerical influences are important in the management of political relations. France will benefit also by the support that the Vatican may give her. in the settlement of the Turkish problem, for the Vatican is concerned in the treatment of the Christian populations in Asia Minor and Syria, and in the disposition of the shrines of Palestine. The re- ligious leaning of Alsace-Lor- raine 82 The New World The Left Bank of the Rhine as a buffer State * Y. gº ; [80 BELGIUM', Luxembur f Co M A Y N Lgn O 6° N ,-- º ãNº. eim. oRaiserslautern. C *Heidel: berg S--~~ l runº . S. 67Pechº.” S & S.S ºAMHCº(E cy §§ :::::# Cö .4 oRaden. - *N P M\gſ %. ºlºun : \ Strasbouráž :*- Ye & jº * = º sº ^y jº G. C{ E 3% §Die? $ | % al $/g)* OIII] & "N 'N, - 4. Colma; ſ's 3% «» |-J o § ! § 48 ^_ſ s/y cºreiburg - º P % Iron § { 4 sº tº C % ...ſºj Coal (withseams) a “ sº %is...} (- % Potash & Begor) gº * 2. :J. N Salt Y Aseſºef Yeº C Petroleum (“*. QNS Basel º | 0 10 20 30 40 M 2. *-2 rt T. Z. E RL NID FIG. 35. Mineral resources and principal water communications in the Alsace-Lorraine region. By taking these two districts from France in 1871, Germany deprived France of the strategic frontier of the Rhine and won for herself immense iron-ore resources that were of increasing value in Germany's modern period of industrial development and overseas commerce. A new well at greater depths than hitherto reached has located large reserves of petroleum at Pechel- bronn (1920). Petroleum products to the amount of 50,000 tons are now derived annually at this locality. After Gallois, the Geographical Review, August 1918. It will be a great temptation to the French people to interfere in the affairs of the region called the Left Bank of the Rhine, for it is here that French military men would like to create a buffer state in which there should be no danger of German military preparations against France. The idea is a tempting one, though we must remem- ber that the people are German and not French. For twenty years before the treaty of Vienna (1815) made it Prussian, the Rhineland Political and Colonial Aims of France was French, and there is still a certain pro-French element mindful of the prosperity and democracy of the days when it was a part of France. Many people hoped to see the region become self-governing or in some way attached to France. If local self-governing geo- graphical divisions are set up in a future Germany, the Rhineland will probably be- come one of the principal di- visions. When a few of the people in the region started a sepa- ratist movement at the end of the war and proclaimed the “Republic of the Left Bank of the Rhine,” they immediately won French sympathy. At the peace conference it was urged by some Frenchmen that Al- lied, or at least French, mili- tary occupation of the region was necessary for a long time to come. This should not be hastily branded as mere impe- rial design; for more than four years the sound of artillery fire could be heard at Paris; it takes but an hour to drive from the city to the nearest battle- fields of the war; there was almost nightly danger of air raids; the - - * * * * f" v. * (2. • a e s s = • * * * * ~ * * * * o/úrich FEEE- | 6 * FIG. 36. The Saar district (diagonally ruled); the Left Bank (stippled area west of the Rhine); and the bridgeheads and adjacent territory east of the Rhine, subject to temporary Allied control and to demilitarization. 13 nerves of the French people had been strained to the limit of endurance, and the effect on many French children will last throughout their life- With victory in her hands, France passionately desired to be times. free from the long-standing menace of German invasion. France has gained important advantages in the region of the Left Bank. The Allied armies are to occupy it for fifteen years, with- drawing their troops from each of three successive zones at five-year §rº'Tº TÉ §3 º \s * §ºf Wesel §§ Essen, bLortmund Jī;::::::::PDuisburg $ºſ:::::Z-S : f. . . . . . .... [------ ‘. º: Íñºl)isseldorf $ Aº:::::: * . . .”.” - \ % *i.B. R if J.S.H.):... :). \ º ºritish; golºgne oSiegen 3:::::::::::::$#%.: “... ūāthāpaleºčiū--Sº. e \{...' ........... : U-T: N % oGiessen *ś & ºx \ % etzlar § $º àCoblenzº", &MERIgANgº The Rhineland 84 The New World Control of Rhine navi- gation Luxem- burg also a buffer state, long under Ger– man in- fluence Inter- national status of the Saar region intervals. All the fortifications in the region are to be destroyed, likewise those in the strip thirty miles wide, east of the Rhine. The occupied territory is to be governed by an Interallied Rhineland High Commission. g By the treaty of Frankfort (1871) the eastern frontier of France was pushed back from the Rhine; by the treaty of Versailles (1919) France once more becomes a Rhine power. Regulation of the traffic of the river had been conducted by the Central Commission for the Navigation of the Rhine created by the Mannheim Convention of 1868. But neither France nor Belgium, and not even Switzerland, was represented. France now has four representatives, and the other powers, including Italy and Great Britain, have two each. The powers of the commission are extended to include the upper Rhine between Basel and Lake Constance, if Switzerland agrees, and, in the interests of Belgium, the lower Moselle with its connecting canals. By special treaty provision the port of Kehl (Fig. 35) is joined to that of Strasbourg for seven years, in order that the port facilities of Strasbourg may be developed more conveniently. The foregoing facts help us to understand why France wished to secure control of Luxemburg. For Luxemburg, as may be seen by reference to Figure 36, is in the narrow frontier belt, every part of which has high strategic importance. This duchy was taken into the German Customs Union almost eighty years ago; its ruling house had a German origin; its railways were built by German capital; it has valuable iron mines that were used by the Germans during the war as one of their sources of steel for shell and cannon. Clearly Luxemburg could not be returned to German control, and its small population (260,000) and area (1000 square miles) do not permit it to stand alone either politically or economically. It had been taken, from Belgium in 1839, but in the plebiscite of September 1919 it voted to enter the French Customs Union. French control of its iron mines and blast furnaces is inevitable. The small duchy is virtually a dependency of France. - There remains the problem of the Saar. This region consists essen- tially of a coal basin from which, before the war, Germany obtained about 9 per cent of her total coal supply, or more than 17,400,000 metric tons. The coal reserves of the Saar are 17,000,000,000 tons, or a thousand times the annual production and 22 per cent of the total reserves of Germany in 1913. France was poor in coal and had practically no petroleum at all. What she wished to secure was outright ownership of the region. Eventually she obtained outright the French. See Figure 35 for the course of the canal. - º º Fig. 37. The Marne-Rhine canal at Lutzelburg, its most elevated point, where it crosses the Vosges Mountains. It was completed in 1854 by - º 86 The New World Temporary military control of the Saar basin French political and mili- tary inter- ests on Germany's frontiers ownership of the mines (which were also placed in the French Customs Union), as compensation ºn for the damages inflicted " by the Germans on the French mines at Lens and Valenciennes, where the shafting was blown out by dynamite and the y_s_l galleries were flooded. #ºl At the end of fifteen Fig. 38. The Saar district of the treaty of Versailles. It years a plebiscite must *...* far the larger part of the Saar coal basin be held in the Saar re gio Il, and the inhabitants will then be permitted to vote on their future ownership, whether by France or by Germany. But provision is made for the exclusion of immigrants, whether French or German, from the privilege of the plebiscite. Only those may vote who will have attained the age of twenty and who resided in the Saar district when the treaty with Germany went into effect. Until the treaty of Versailles went into effect on 10 January 1920, the control of the Saar basin was in the hands of the military au- thorities. There was a short period of strikes, together with general disorder and some pillage. This disturbance proved to be the work of persons from outside the region, more than seven hundred of whom were arrested. Eight of these were condemned to twenty years of forced labor, and others to five or ten years; one was executed. By the terms of later French decrees the expulsion of political agitators ceased; some already sent away were invited to return; and a larger degree of self-government was promised the people, most of whom have offered no active opposition to French occupation. France is indeed beset by problems that arise because of her con- tact with Germany. Practically all of France's mineral resources (Fig. 40) and most of her great manufacturing cities (Fig. 33) are grouped along the German frontier — and Germany will always be in need of all the coal and iron she can get and may again be tempted to seize a neighbor's supply just over the border. Is it surprising that many French statesmen are anxious when they look towards the future? This anxiety as to possible future action by Germany is most clearly seen in the eagerness with which French diplomats have reached Political and Colonial Aims of France 87 understandings with Rumania and some of the new states created by the Peace Conference of Paris, especially Czecho-Slovakia and Poland. The French detailed well-known generals to help develop the armies of these states, and appear to have succeeded in effect- ing friendly alliances with their governments. With their support France would naturally feel more secure. In this connection it is necessary to add that in acting as guide and friend to the young and untried nations France has assumed a very real responsibility. Each of the new states will often find its position difficult, and the possibilities of friction with neighboring states will be many; it will often be tempted to resort to force to gain its ends. The peace of Europe may well depend chiefly upon the kind of advice and sup- port that France gives to the new states of central Europe. THE GREAT NEEDS OF FBANCE France needs two things to put her on terms of equality with Germany, her ancient foe. She needs a higher birth rate, and she needs a complete awakening and reorganization of her economic life. As long as the population of France remains at a standstill and that of Germany increases, there will be a steady ethnic penetration by German-speaking people, against which France cannot effectively contend. Germany has a population of 60,000,000; France has less than 40,000,000. The birth rate of France just offset the death rate in 1913; in 1918 the population of France declined 190,000, not counting the war losses and the deaths due to an epidemic of grippe. In Germany there was persistent increase in the years be- fore the war period. Unless the situation in France improves, the French people, declining relatively in numbers, will decline in power also. To study the problem more effectively and provide practical measures, a national bureau was created in January 1920, dealing with the question of the birth rate. The acquisition of the Saar coal and the Lorraine iron may take on a new significance in relation to the future population of France. A recent writer has argued the close relation between coal production and the birth rate; he points to the fact that it was the coal and iron districts of Germany that had the greatest increase of population since 1871. The second of France's great domestic problems is how to place her industries on a pre-war basis. During the war her manufacturing energy was turned largely to the making of guns for herself and her allies, while England built ships and created great reserves of ammuni- * The lower- ing birth rate of France The ship- ping prob- lem . 88 The New World The eco- nomic prob- lems of France z |4 - |2 |0 MOVEMENT OF POPULATION Sº C 50. 190|-|9|| Lille - _ Increase 1906–19|| - *...*.*.*.*Aºy. º \ º sº M. *…* 2.7 ºl. 2 Q º *4. ſº T tion. By the treaty of peace England has her merchantmarine nearly restored; France, how- ever, gets relatively few a ships as a result of the division of the German merchant marine. Even before the war France & Sº “ had a ship deficit, and º y now she needs raw ma- J. \\_ſ terials more than ever. - At the present time the *: cost of building ships is excessively high, and the difficulty of France 6 is correspondingly FIG. 39. The large established centers of population and most great. of the industrial regions show increase of population. Rural To awaken the eco- France shows general decrease. From map in the Geographical o “ e. e Journal, Vol. 40, 1912. nomic life of Fr ance IS - perhaps less difficult than to solve the problem of the lowering birth rate, but it is only slightly less difficult. France is an old country, with life adjusted to her resources and to modes of thought and work against which modern ideas have long beaten in vain. This adjustment has some advantages: the life of such a nation is steadier. But the disad- vantages also are great, and of this fact the ports of France furnish an example. Control of a given port is divided between more than half a dozen different government authorities. For example, at Havre the Ministry of Public Works can build the docks, but the French Ministry of Marine controls the pilot service, the Minister of Commerce is responsible for the warehouses, the Minister of Finance collects the dues and regulates the hours of work, and the Minister of the Interior polices and lights the quays. Whereas in most Ö the world's ports it takes but a few years to carry out improvements, here it takes many years. All French ports, even Paris, the largest of all, have obsolete rules for their regulation and are years behind the ports of America and Great Britain in administration. Even before the war these rules interfered in the most serious manner with the development of French trade. Turning to the industrial field, we see that French iron and steel Marseilſº º Political and Colonial Aims of France 89 plants need more coal than France herself will be able to supply for several years, even with the addition of the Saar fields. Part of the lack will be supplied from Germany under the clauses of the treaty of Versailles relating to the importation of coal, but this is a temporary measure. A sound solution requires efficient handling of the whole coal and iron problem of the region of which Lorraine and the Saar are a part. Since several tons of coal are needed to smelt one ton of iron, it is in general cheaper to carry iron to coal. To reverse the process would be to increase the cost of iron and steel goods and diminish the chances of successful French competition in foreign markets. But the coal fields are still chiefly in Germany, Westphalia having the largest reserves of coking coal in continental Europe. In 1913 Westphalia produced 69 per cent of the coke used in reducing the Lorraine iron ore, the Saar only 15 per cent, and France 12 per cent. If we look into the future the story is the same. Of estimated reserves of coal in fields tributary to the Lorraine iron districts, Westphalia has 62 per cent, the Saar only 19 per cent. The Rhine valley and Belgium offer cheap canal and rail transportation. Though some iron ore can be economically smelted in France with imported coke from Germany, Belgium, and England, some also would naturally be shipped to western Germany for smelting, since the Saar coking coal is inferior in quality and offers only local competition to German coke. The result of shipping iron ore to Germany for smelting and manufacture would be improvement of German industry and quicker reparation payments to the Allies. These facts will help in understanding future agreements between France and Germany relating to iron and coal shipments and industries. Such agreements are bound to come in time, for they are distinctly to the advantage of both parties. In this connection it may be noted that France has obtained large interests in Luxemburg blast furnaces, and that whatever her arrange- ments with Germany, she will have an excess of iron and steel above her ordinary needs. This will help her foreign trade in China, South America, Asia Minor, Italy, and the Balkans, and it will also help in the rebuilding of the devastated and occupied areas of northeastern France. One of the current questions of more than local interest relates to the internal administration of France and the effect upon the national spirit. Partly by reason of its geographical position, partly through sentiment and the influence of the national capital, partly because the functions of government have been centralized there ever since the Increased coal and iron assets of France Relation of German coal to French iron Ore The ne— cessity for political and eco- nomic de- centraliza- tion 90 The New World * vºy 4. 2 º -* 0 * º - 2' sº 3 NHaríºſ ($ --- & {& J §, > *% Š & ^ * 4. SS T lſ *~~~, § - INDUSTRIES UTC | Coal 3% Z. Iron Industrial ! centers 2%, [C] - *ºne. Y &A (A.- * Waterways of the -Q. £eceſs first importance "J- | -B- C.K. FIG. 40. The concentration of France’s mineral resources and industries on her northeastern frontier is shown. Though iron and coal deposits are rather generally distributed, those of greatest commercial value are in the eastern districts, where more than half of the iron and steel products are manufactured. According to United States Commerce Reports for 1919 and 1920, the cen- tral districts of France produced in 1919 but 12 per cent of the steel, the southwestern 4 per cent, the western 3 per cent, and the Southeastern 3 per cent. Alsace-Lorraine in the first six months of 1919 produced 32 per cent of all the steel manufactured in France. The total water-power development by 1921 will be 1,500,000 horsepower, or 20 per cent of the total avail- able. The Alps, central France, and the Pyrenees are the chief centers of development. By “Regional industries” are meant industries based upon products derived directly from the soil. After Vidal Lablache, supplemented by World Atlas of Commercial Geology, Part I, Distribution of Mtneral Production, United States Geological Survey, 1921. days of Napoleon, who used this method to consolidate his personal power, Paris has played a part in the economic life of France out of proportion to her industrial advantages. The ninety administrative units of the country — the départements — are artificial divisions, with few geographical or economic bases. Nearly all the local func- tionaries are appointed by the central government or by its local * Political and Colonial Aims of France 91 representatives, and even the mayors of the towns are under its con- trol. In later years, however, the increase in the speed of telegraphic and other communication has enabled the provincial newspapers to publish the world's news long before the Parisian newspapers can reach the provinces. Thus the provinces have come to have opinions of their own on the happenings of the day. In addition, the people are demanding a greater share of power in the settlement of their local affairs. Consequently, there is a strong movement for a measure of governmental decentralization, and it has even been proposed to divide the country into a number of geographical regions, each several times the size of the existing départements, for purposes of local ad- ministration. It is thought that such regional capitals would become strong centers of intellectual and political life and would increase the political strength of the country as a whole. RELATIONS WITH THE COLONIES Unlike England, France has no problem of satisfying the growing demands of self-governing dominions. All the overseas possessions of France are directly dependent upon the central French govern- ment. Very heavy responsibilities remain, nevertheless, because France had rapidly expanded her colonial possessions before the war and now gains additional territory. She has acquired a mandatary over Syria, has divided with Great Britain the Cameroons and Togoland as mandatory colonies, and has had her status in northern Africa confirmed by the great powers. Figure 49 shows her new territorial gains in Africa as a result of the war. It may be safely predicted that French colonial rule will be of a high order. The example of Morocco is heartening. Under the wise administration of able army officers, assisted by a few civilian officials, the country has become safe and orderly, and every advantage has been given the native to help him improve his lot. Development has not merely produced railways, automobile and wagon roads, and mines; it has also improved public health and education. It is the thought of some of her wisest leaders that it would be greatly to the interest of France if she were to make no further efforts in the field of imperial expansion. The world has now been parceled out nearly to the limit of vacant “political space.” France formerly opposed British expansion in Africa and in the Persian Gulf region, and German expansion in central Africa and Turkey. Further pos- sible gains are not worth the price of diplomatic quarrels and perhaps French colonial responsi- bilities Morocco as a sample of what France can do in her colonies Advisa- bility of discarding the old imperial program 92 The New World His– torical im- portance of Syria The racial mixtures of Syria war. Of diverse peoples in widely scattered lands, France now has all that she can well manage. To her at this time is applicable in a peculiarly strong sense the principle that “the test of mastery is restraint.” (B) SPECIAL COLONIAL INTERESTs of FRANCE With this general view of the problems of the French people, we may now look at their special colonial interests as developed by the results of the war. We shall not examine each colony in detail, but shall select for consideration only those that present political or com- mercial problems of the first rank. Among them two are predominant, — Syria and French North Africa. SYRIA From eyery standpoint the problem of Syria is the more vexatious of the two, partly by reason of the strong dislike for the French among the native Syrians (Arabs chiefly), partly because French and British interests intermingle in a complex and even dangerous manner. Here we have an echo of the past. “Nowhere else has so much history run into or through so narrow a space,” it has been said, and “The military history of Syria may be pictured as the procession of nearly all the world's conquerors” — from Thothmes to Tamerlane and Napoleon. While the Turk has administered Syria, he has been an alien there. He has not settled upon the land in any numbers, and separate Turk- ish colonies do not exist in Syria. There are few social and family ties between Turks and Syrians. The removal of the Turk from Syria therefore involves no important social or economic readjustments. Syria is one of the most densely populated portions of the former Turkish Empire. Though a mere coastal strip, barely fifty miles wide and three hundred miles long, it has nearly 3,000,000 people, of whom two thirds are Moslems. There are also nearly 500,000 Christians and 125,000 Druses. Racially the Syrians are of highly mixed origin: Hittites, Egyptians, Greeks, Romans, Arabs, Turks, and Assyrians, not to mention lesser folk. In the mountain val- leys of the Lebanon itself and in central Syria live the Druses, warlike tribes sharing the Lebanon with the agricultural Maronites, whom they frequently raid. On the grassy seaward slopes of the mountains bordering the Gulf of Alexandretta are the settlements of the Ansarirebs. § f ;N LAN t. º Aſ g . a ze º Barzīz J'ed: 37 § * * /* * P A C I F *C. - * ...sºrºn, Aswa ze ; : / Clippdrſon / ** ºutch Guiana L^{-3 #}/rench Guane & - . . * g ~ §§ whº s] . . . sºyassas's Wºº H * & .*sº, - ! '', º homoro /s. O C. E. ** § Arg Az TV, .C. a "zº Tº, * M : ...? y ** “F***se.; º :* * - *** 7sh/#// ... lº R. A ſ agesgär jº: Is, **** *|†, y **ślinion / sº ºrsby & * ...” f : hº Mºog /* f º \{\!--~~ * 30 S O U 7" Er AS O Z/ - U–Z * / Amsterdam. Sz. Pau/. * }; P A C Y F / C | O C R. A. W. 2" /. A W 7" iſ C O |O EA MV V2 2/? jº º 45 *S* * • Kergueſen / , • *º ſº. /rench colonies Z/Madagascar * * Dutch colonies, EğDutch Guiana —Iſº- º 90 6 3% | 0 30 50 90 120 150 Wººl FIG. 41. Distribution of French and Dutch colonies. Boundaries of all countries are given as in 1914, except for changes in Togoland and the Cameroons, now divided under the mandatory powers of Great Britain and France. Though widely distributed, the French colonies are of small economic importance, outside Africa, Madagascar, and French Indo-China. The Dutch East Indies have an immense labor supply and furnish heavy exports of raw materials — fibers, rubber, coffee, spices, etc. 94 - The New World Gate- ways of Syria Damascus & S 8 COIIl- mercial and politi- cal focus Beginning of French interest in Syria dur- ing the Crusades The Taurus ranges shut Syria off from the Anatolian plain (Fig. 42), for the great pass in the Taurus, called the Cilician Gates (Pylae Cilicias), has long been in Turkish hands. The effective northern frontier has been the ranges of the Amanus Mountains, with a pas- sageway at the Syrian Gates (Pylae Syriae). The mountains of Leba- non terminate Syria on the south, though the Syrian claims include Palestine and even the peninsula of Sinai on the Red Sea. A desert separates Syria from Mesopotamia. On the eastern bor- der of the better-watered coastal strip are the sown lands, the grain- growing regions. One of the richest of these is Damascus and the belt of country south of it. g Damascus lies well out in the desert, and a desert strip separates it from the sown land on the west. It is far from the sea and does not lie on a natural route of commerce. Yet it has endured from the earliest times by reason of its advantageous situation on the alluvial deposits of a river that runs eastward from the mountains and waters a hundred and fifty square miles of otherwise desert land. It is the oldest, the largest, the richest of the cities of Syria, an object of em- pire throughout its history, and of sufficient political importance to draw to it much of the through trade that would follow other natural courses if topographical considerations only were taken into account. The population of Damascus exceeds 250,000. The interests of France in Syria do not date from recent times. From the days of the early Phoenician traders, long before the Chris- tian era, Marseilles in southern France had maintained commercial intercourse with Syria, and the relationship has remained unbroken to this day. During the Crusades, France took the lead in the effort to redeem the Holy Land from Mohammedan conquerors. It was quite a natural thing that Frenchmen should thereafter become the rulers of Syria. Antioch and Tripoli had French princes, Jeru- salem a French king. France, “the eldest daughter of the Church,” had played a noble part in the redemption of lands sacred to Chris- tians, and in recognition thereof the Pope conferred on French kings the title of “Protector of Oriental Christians.” Castles in the French style were built in Syria; Marseilles, in competition with Genoa and Venice, established commercial and political ties. Silks, pearls, spices, and camphor were brought from India to Palestine and Syria, and thence to France, Germany, and England. The material aspects of French interest in northern Syria are dis- played chiefly in the silk industry and the railroads. Excepting the Hedjaz line, every railroad in the country has been financed by French Political and Colonial Aims of France 95 A ºss-e: e------~~~ '#4 7| #" sº-yº” *s **º ***, TI, /* M. P. G. a- # 'aº * §§ .* § **** § Nº. ,” itſ, º & % s \,z^* f. 3. 26) w ** - iſºft." ** ° jºišº * zºº’ º & Ş * ..., N.A 2. Zºn tºs &---sº º z=- º: : ºº zeidifié isipinº; * º ºts, * A. º §§ % 2’ 2% 2^ : §uropg C º `ss...}º* : § (Jērāblus) º } ſ” ; ! --rºº; *s * t Aº $9 *~..." - .N eSyriae 2* \ * §§§ºv (Beilamp ,”. A ; }THE SYRIAN SADDLE & - - 2” º ſº A N D §§ OIl Bal 2% # \ A. ºº:::::::: Chayººberoes, MESOPOTAMIAN PIEDMONTs *ss *(Aleppo) \,. !e 1: 4,400,000 th €10 *... pp. ... ** ſoman roads (ºffer/*p/.. to Scale tº sº to stwurs § 3.j 3F, -- 7~7//s asce/72/7eo'---//o3&4% 4|| e º 36° s? 38° se sºft e º e.” sº º - * gr jºš sº W/º, : §º º S/3. 5-ſº ºš/lºº-ºº: abde & ...tº t 8TIlO 59za lºº & rej tº Y #$*Tarsuso gºC sº OS al Sº,”*. - § * (Jeråålus) tº 2. - S . *2 § 15 §: s £º: GArpad $ º lºgºs) e Sº... 35 #& tioch •Ghalybol §§ el Q) Rºº- N § > Hamaſh Thäpsacus" Surá diceºš - : Antar d * - - *W, agº. o'ſadnor, Palmyra. pºlišº & SS S/SSº e N (, 'S - ‘. § ^ N. ś *g oDamascus e sº § y r 1. a n |D e s e s t selºriºsiphon % * erg abylon O MTS * o ale w—- - * E. R. § HISTORICAL SKETCH MAP ^ THE TRANSIT LANDS B ETWEEN § Retri THE MEDITERRANEAN AND THE PERSIAN GULF 30° Scale 1:10,000,000 50 0. 50 100 150 206 750 Muſº 3|5" Azczęzzzzzzes (Assyr/a/7, Ahoemſø/2,6′eek, ſoman) /a, s/zaea /errers. THE GEOGR. REviewſ, sepr. 1914 Azzer” hazes Z/2.37%, 7% erºy'7%%-77e/eºs. 44* - FIG. 42. The upper panel shows the region through which the French in Syria and the British in Mesopotamia will maintain mutual trade relations. The lower panel locates places o historical interest in relation to modern towns and ports. See also Figure 44. - 96 The New World ſº gº gºº � • • • • • • •* SN Ņ N • * • • • • ... •• T • • • • ... • • •„ ” , … • . ..”, * . Șº. * * · · ·· § • * •�* •• ... • •«» «»# * •»-s �&• • • •* * į • • .• • • • • • • •• º • • • •� �• •• ’ .• • º • SÐ. „ “... • ... • . * ... • . ., º º º. (A • • . . • • •„ * * • •, , • • • •* * . . . * • * … • • • •→... * .\,& & ſº … ( §* →• – — ° • •* * · * . ... • . ' •• ~ . * … * *ș • • •º •• • • • • • ... • • • •/* , , • T • • • • • • • ... * . :* • • •º. • •« » º &-->• • • • • • • • • •* a• «»• × ° �* • ×* . . • •° - ° ) ' • • ●·* *ș ºf ... • „T * • • • × ° * .• • • .y • „... • • • • • • N • .* * · · • • • ... •* , , s * • • • • • • • • • •• • • ” ’ , ’ ’. T. ’ .... • • T. • : ·* . . . * .• • * ——.”�: • • . . . . » ' * • • • º. º. º. (...' .. $m N\! W ſ'. Číſ; ; ; ; , • • • • • ~ _ • *« ( • * * * *•… * ... •& �... • • • • •ș· - ģSS5ţſ: •-Ñ:KNNS N ?*Ñ DENSITY OF POPULATION per sq.mile w//7der 50 /00 50 over /00 Dººl Æegſon of nomad’sm 100 MILES —-a-a- , 80 §§§ →&&&&→·→ ¿??¿QS- Ș«» àș ∞ pae; gęs, 、 }}}}&#\ ! •ºgë, §), >$ș 2À Ë © ſae # Akab Political and Colonial Aims of France 97 capital. The silk factories of ~35 O Lebanon, the most important A- single industry in the country, Af were founded by Frenchmen, A CŞ.E = º º, º . ‘. º -& A#= _-->~~ Imated at a million pounds o - º &zzº, silk, is exported to France. § sº & To all these long-standing is §: * SS causes of interest in the po- - y litical affairs and trade of the º Syrian coast, there has been oD added the effect of French 1 ºgº ºf thought and life on the people Jerusalem. of Syria. French schools are &#es 2 % of more numerous throughout the §§ 1 # £º.ot, Azé former Turkish territories than . . * * 3 º*::::::::: ..)" those of any other nation. * Y= | # , cou nity of There is need of France in § # 4}..., Syria and elsewhere in the A - Antioch. E=Edessa. S=Samosata. Near East, in the interests of | D-Damascus J-Jerusalem. T-Tripoliº western civilization and as a meanºr.” . . . barrier against anarchy and Mohammedanism. England alone is unequal to the task. The growth of the desire for independence among the Syrians, as opposed to French control, is shown in a specific way by the action of the General Syrian Congress held at Damascus on 2 July 1919. This congress is one of the most important political events in the past several years in Syria. The principal features of its program (the so-called Damascus program) are as follows: - FIG. 44. Syria under French princes, after the Crusades. After Shepherd. (1) Complete political independence. (2) Constitutional monarchy with the rights of minorities guar- anteed. • (3) Assistance from the United States for twenty years in financial and technical matters. - FIG. 43. The Damascus population group is dependent upon irrigation. The city is a central point in the caravan trade of the desert of Syria. Djebel Hauran, Gilead, Moab, and the plateau of Judea are foci of heavier rainfall and population. The coastal fringe of population also corresponds with a belt of heavier and more dependable rainfall. The nomad of the Syrian desert has always coveted the crops and raided the villages of the settled oases dwellers. See also Figure 45. From L'Asie Française, February 1920. Railroads and the silk in- dustry in Lebanon French schools in Syria The Damas- cus pro- gram 98 The New World * Moslem opposition to Zion- ism (4) A protest against the creation of a Zionist state, which is con- sidered a grave menace to the bulk of the people. (5) Lebanon and Palestine not to be separated from the rest of Syria. (6) Complete independence for Mesopotamia. (7) The annulment of all agreements previously made by France and Great Britain for dividing Syria or establishing Zionism. A still bolder step was taken in March 1920. Another Syrian con- gress was held at Damascus and the independence of Syria was de- clared, with the Emir Feisal as King. The text of the Declaration of Independence adopted by the Syrian Congress is as follows: “The Conference declares: (1) The complete independence of Syria within its natural bound- aries, from Sinai to the Taurus, and from the Syrian desert to the sea, without any protectorate, mandate, or other form of foreign interference. (2) The proclamation of Emir Feisal (son of the King of Hedjaz) as King of Syria. (3) Compulsory military service. (4) The notification of the representatives of the European powers, and of the Peace Conference at Paris, of this decision.” The matters in dispute between Great Britain and France on the one hand and the Arabs on the other are still in process of negotiation. In the meantime, the aggressive attitude of Emir Feisal has led to French military action. In July 1920 Damascus was taken; a heavy fine was levied against the city, and Feisal was driven away. In the summer of 1919 an American commission was sent into the country to inquire into the wishes of the people of Syria and the needs of the country. It was found that if the people of Syria had a free choice, they would undoubtedly prefer Emir Feisal as ruler. They wish also to see Syria extended southward to include Palestine, as in the days of the Crusades. They certainly do not wish Palestine to become a Jewish state, since the Jews constitute only a little more than one tenth of the total population. They believe that in a Zionist state the Jews would secure political control and would not respect the holy places as impartially as would an outside, established FIG. 45. Relief map of Syria to serve as a reference in the study of Figures 42 and 43, which show respectively the historic routes and the density of population. Political and Colonial Aims of France - 99 SºftNZ% QN & lº - * . . . * * * - - §§§ &x$$$$ * ... • . . Tripol O $. & - š. N 6. NS ‘s §§ 2% & '^N § %$ % º º S sº *. S R E L L E F Meters Feet (approx.equiv.) Over 3000 22. Over 9800 2000–3000N 6500-9800 1000–2000%3200-6500 500–1000 N1600–3200 200–500 [º]. 600–1600 0–200 [ ] 0 - 600 100 M 3d 100 The New World The Leba- 11011 The Sykes- Picot agree- ment British troops re- placed by French in I919 power, for the so-called “holy places” include places sacred to the Christian and to the Moslem as well as to the Jew. The Catholics of the Lebanon, as well as the Maronites, prefer French ownership or protection, and in using the word “Lebanon” they mean really a greater Lebanon outside of Syria. On the other hand, the Moslems wish American or British assistance, combined with political independence. The Druses are everywhere opposed to France. The Lebanon was set off from Turkey in 1861 under the nominal protection of six European powers, with a Christian governor. The population is composed chiefly of Maronites, who are attached to the Roman Catholic Church. After an international régime was estab- lished, there was an almost complete change in the conditions of life, military service was abolished, the taxes were reduced, a great deal of wealth was accumulated, roads were built, orchards were planted. The population of the Lebanon is more than 200,000, or 160 to the square mile, while the rest of Syria has but 30 to the square mile; about 350,000 are Christians, about 50,000 Druses, and the small remainder is Mohammedan. On 1 September 1920 General Gouraud proclaimed the autonomy of the Lebanon. Beirut is the seat of government. From Palestine the district given autonomy extends northward to the River Kebir, which empties into the Mediterranean due west of Homs. The Jews have sought to include the southern Lebanon within the new boundaries of Palestine. To this arrangement is opposed the fact that the Phoenician coast shows practically no influence trace- able to Jewish culture and has never been under effective Jewish occupation. Nor was the civilization of eastern Palestine, beyond the trench of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, ever Jewish : it was Greek, Roman, Byzantine, or Christian Arab. Over it the Jew has never exercised control, except temporarily after conquest. . During the World War, the British and French diplomats framed the so-called Sykes–Picot agreement, which was designed to give France permanent rights in Syria and to delimit French and British power in Armenia, Mesopotamia, and Syria. Of great importance for a time, this agreement has now been set aside. Though all of Syria was overrun by the British troops under Gen- eral Allenby, it was agreed, before the task of occupation was begun, that military success or failure should have no bearing upon the future political control of that region. Therefore when it became necessary to provide a somewhat more permanent form of govern- ment until the Turkish treaty could be arranged, the British troops evacuated not only Syria but Cilicia, and their place was taken by the 5 -- Fig. 46. West of Damascus are the mountains of southern Lebanon, from which descend toward the east a number of small streams that water a large tract of very dry country. Damascus has been proclaimed the capital of the Arab nation, but the Allies have not recognized Arab independence, and French military forces hold the town. The New World French position respect- ing Syria G. K. 40 rºsº & o Adrianopl idia. t L A. A- S. A." Lºf g § - - ** & ** iflis wº aturn En * * © o gº tº - tizon Caird • M. wº Scale of miles s ro \,........'...? § 0 *—“–* Š ¥ :::::::::::::::A;& IGK. 28 Šſ sk. Gulf of 4 - ...º.º.º.S. • . . . . . . - e º w e 2 * - - * Under British administration (includes Haifa) % Under Italian administration N & , French J) § , Russian y # Under International administration FIG. 47. Division of Turkey according to (1) the Sykes–Picot agreement of May 1916 (and the later Italian agreement); (2) the secret treaty of London of 1915 as it affected the Straits Zone at Constantinople, the Italian sphere of influence in southern Anatolia, and the Russian sphere in Turkish Armenia. From maps and text in the Manchester Guardian, 8 and 10 January 1920. International boundaries as of 1914. French (November 1919). French occupation was to extend east- ward only as far as the Sykes–Picot line, but it was specifically agreed that this arrangement in no way prejudged the question of mandates or boundaries to be determined in the future. It was agreed also that British troops should occupy Palestine up to the ancient boundary — that is, from Dan to Beersheba – and Mesopotamia, including Mosul. It was further agreed that France should protect the Armenians; and that the cities of Damascus, Homs, Hama, and Aleppo were to be garrisoned by Arabs. When these arrangements were put into effect, Arab hostility to French occu- pation obliged the French to proceed against Feisal and take Damas- cus, as already described. The French also seized Aleppo and thus held the gateways to the desert. & 4. The French insisted that the basis of any new plans for the disposi- tion of Syria should be the Sykes–Picot agreement. This meant that they could not see Mosul and Palestine go to Great Britain or to Political and Colonial Aims of France 103 any other power, unless France got concessions in return. France also insisted that she should have the same status and relations with the Arabs of Syria that England had with the Arabs in Mesopotamia. The Syrian situation had been further complicated by the creation of the kingdom of Hedjaz in 1915. Through Emir Feisal and his father, King Hussein, special agreements had been made between Great Britain and the Arabs, and the Emir long received a large monthly subsidy from the British government. France did not wish to be bound by any of these British-Arab agreements, all of which lent support to the idea of Arab independence. - By the Sykes–Picot agreement the eastern boundary of the Syrian region lay west of the Damascus–Medina railroad; this would have permitted France to hold only the coastal portion of a broad group of regions, and France wished to control the interior pastures, farms, and cities of Syria from Aleppo to Damascus and beyond. France insisted on the frontiers of 1916, with rectifications based on geographic and ethno- graphic grounds. She also sought concessions at Mosul for petroleum and pipe lines, claiming these on terms of equality with British oil AS Az' 40 •Kutais “" iflis º SS \ }- Z & Sº °Konia \ No. .2° ** & vº ū Mersina £AQ º * se \ Ş. (k º \\ O8 ! autofº” ~ 34 Tripoli M E|D - - I 7" E. R. R 4 W E A S E A Beirut $6 Scale º: miles. 150 28 32. - y4. oDamascus 40 4 *Bagdad FIG. 48. The tripartite agreement between Great Britain, France, and Italy (10 August 1920) regarding equality of commercial privileges in the respective spheres of influence of the signatory powers. This agreement displaces the provisions of the secret treaty of London of 1915, the Sykes–Picot agreement, and certain other special agreements and promises. By its terms Italy gains recognition of her special interests in Zone C, and France in Zone D; the three powers give each other diplomatic support in their respective spheres; provision is made for the capital- ization on terms of equality by British, French, and Italian bankers of the Bagdad railway and other lines; the coal basin of Heraclea (on the north coast of Anatolia, east of the Bosporus) is to be exploited by Italy with French and British reservations. On the map, A represents the southern, or Asiatic, part of the Zone of the Straits, B represents the Greek zone at Smyrna (Fig. 161), and E represents Syria. . . . - French op- position to Emir Feisal 104 - The New World Pres- ent possi- bilities of a united Syria interests in Mesopotamia and Kurdistan, as France is in great need of petroleum in her home territory. Matters were finally settled when France relinquished claims upon Mosul, where her sole interest was petroleum, in return for the privilege of getting one fourth of the oil that Great Britain secures in Mesopotamia. This was good policy for Great Britain, because it gave her unrestricted control of the Tigris and easier access to central and western Kurdistan. France also grants to the British the right to build oil pipe lines to the Medi- terranean, across the French sphere of influence in Syria, in return for the privilege of buying one fourth of the oil that may be piped in this way from Persia. There can be little hope that a greater or united Syria will be established, owing principally to the unwillingness of Great Britain and France to withdraw from their respective spheres of military occupation. Yet if Syria should break up into small units, the effect would unquestionably be to perpetuate the old religious differences. This is one of those rare times when men's minds and plans are in a state of change, a time of political experiment. Some statesmen think that before new habits of intrigue and religious rivalry are formed, it would be well to make a united state out of these diverse religious and racial elements — one in which religious hatreds would become lessened in the common thought that men would give to political experimentation and a new economic life. - The Arabs of the desert wish to hold the settled coastal strip, but there is one clear historical argument against such an arrangement: the desert Arab has never long held or effectively governed the people of the settled lands. There are strong ethnic reasons also. We commonly think that the pure-bred Arab nomads of the desert typify the Arabian population. But they have little in common with the Arabs settled on farms or in towns, as in Mesopotamia and Syria, In addition there is considerable variation among the Arabs in the matter of racial purity. Those in Syria have become modified in part by invading stocks; those of the Yemen have probably as much east African as Semitic blood in their veins. - Many political writers see only selfish aims in the efforts of the strong powers to maintain themselves in some of the most important localities in the world. But one thing is tied to another politically in such a way that many motives, rather than one, control the ac- tions of the powers. Hedjaz could not rule Syria. It is far away; the new kingdom is poor and weak; and the leaders on whom the King of the Hedjaz could call for help are few in number and quite Political and Colonial Aims of France 105 without the necessary experience. The business of governing is not simple; it is difficult and costly. Left to themselves, the people of backward countries become the prey of strong and selfish nations, or create disorder, or join with other weak people and make first politi- cal and then military trouble for neighboring nations. FRENCH INTERESTS IN NORTHERN AFRICA Morocco French popular interest in northern Africa has long been keen, and the economic development of the region has been steadily pro- moted. Morocco is first in importance and is of international interest because it in part controls access to the Mediterranean. The country is divided into three zones (Fig. 50): * (1) Tangier, under international control. (2) The narrow Spanish Zone, south of Tangier. (3) The French Protectorate, including most of Morocco. By international agreement Tangier has been administered by the resident diplomatic corps. It is probably the most instructive example of the difficulties and penalties of joint government of a town by representatives of the great powers. Until it is put into the hands of a single power, or until the authority now exercised by different men is consolidated in the hands of a single administrator, the people of Tangier will be subject to unjust treatment and the com- mercial possibilities of the region will not be developed. The trouble dates back to 1856, when, by the terms of the British-Moroccan treaty of that year (later supplemented by the Spanish-Moroccan treaty of 1861), a “system of capitulations” was established, which has lasted down to the present day and which exists in modified form in the Spanish Zone as well as in the area of the French Protectorate. In 1880 the capitulations were codified, and any benefits under them were to be equally enjoyed by the subjects of all foreign powers. In 1904 England and France exchanged forms of recognition, the one declaring that she abandoned all political interests in Morocco, the other making a similar declaration respecting claims in Egypt. Each nation, further- more, undertook to support the other's policy. In the same year France and Spain came to terms as to their spheres of influence in Morocco, and this date (1904) therefore marks the beginning of the division of Morocco into three distinct spheres, Unsatis- factory status of Tangier 106 The New World 2A. A. → - º • * - * * * *. ºlºs' . - sº º § * i #g } . - 4 §§§ - #–#i #sº *.*.*, * * * * º §. `'`---- ; *: : - 7. : '......: z Lif .. § A, 3 Sy” *\ei: - ~~~ & vº, ~ & \e & 0 Sz, * } 0 *A* wº, T-> Ombasa O a M7 tº a ºn cº, ares Salaam cº 10 * — |0 . . .” - 0° º - º o •). 3, Ozambi %; - •St.Helena jSº º &. ... .º.º. *šić &lypsº, Wańt’s BY, Cape 2. | 2 FIG. 49. French possessions in Africa. The dotted areas were acquired before 1914; the cross- lined areas are under French mandate. Two small areas north and south of Ghat in Libya were ceded to Italy by France in 1919 in pursuance of that article of the secret treaty of London, 1915, which stipulated that Italy was to have grants of territory in Africa from both France and Great Britain provided these two powers gained territory in that continent. Great Britain made similar frontier adjustments on behalf of Italy in Libya and Somaliland (Fig. 74). The map also shows existing and proposed railways in French Africa. Most interesting are : (1) the trans- Saharan projects, which would link North Africa with British South Africa and the Guinea region; (2) the coast project from Morocco to Dakar, which, if connected with the Spanish system by a Gibraltar tunnel, would cut the time from Paris to South America by nearly a week. Sca 300 le . 500 I\p \0 0. 3 4 - e.t.catsch — Tangier, the Spanish Zone, and the French Protectorate, – though the treaty with Morocco providing for the French Protectorate was not signed until 1912. France's treaty of 1912 was signed with the Sultan, Mulai Hafid. It was the outgrowth of difficulties with Ger- many, following the conference of Algeciras in 1906, and especially Political and Colonial Aims of France 107 of the threat of war in 1911 in connection with the events at Agadir." * - It was also in 1912 that the French and Spanish came to an agree- ment on the limits of their respective spheres. Since then, efforts have been made to frame a rational government for Tangier, but they have so far failed. The diplomatic agents of the various powers are also the judges in the courts, and citizens of each of the powers have extraterritorial rights, because it is impossible for a foreigner to enjoy security of life or property under a Moroccan administration. The Sultans of Morocco have delegated to the foreign represen- tatives matters of trade, public health, and general administration, and this fact has still further complicated life for the native. Public works are neglected; the population continues to suffer from a short- age of water; commercial efforts are not organized; social legisla- tion is practically unknown. So much the greater part of Morocco lies in the French portion that the administration of the whole region may fairly be considered as a French problem, in spite of the other foreign interests. The population of French Morocco is between 5,000,000 and 6,000,000, and the area is 220,000 square miles. If the arid lands were irrigated, forests protected and replanted, and the locust plagues controlled, the population might be increased as much as 500 per cent. To control Morocco might today be easier were it not that for several centuries the descendants of the Moors expelled from Spain have been spreading fanatical hatred of the European; and until recently, when the French began effective intervention, they defeated every effort to hold their land in European subjection. The long contest between Moors and Europeans is marked by more than one historic episode. One of the decisive battles in world history was that of Kasr-al-Kabir in 1578, when the Portuguese king and army suffered a terrible defeat with the most destructive consequences upon French penetra- tion and extension of political power The present status of the French in Mo- TOCCO A long and bitter con- test Portugal's future colonial history. For a few years (1661–1684) the British held Tangier, but eventually were forced to evacuate it. Within the past fifty years France has intervened more and more often in Moroccan affairs. She has governed with rare ability, 1 The Agadir crisis took place in 1911, when the German gunboat Panther was dispatched to the port of Agadir in Morocco, ostensibly to protect the commercial interests and the lives of German nationals, but really to check the French policy of expansion in Africa. At the moment of the crisis unexpected sympathy developed between France and England, and Germany was obliged to withdraw her demands under cover of the grant by France of ex- tensive territory in French Equatorial Africa on the southern and eastern borders of the Cameroons. 108 The New World New inter- national agreements respecting Morocco § # • - - !---ſº THE PºpCREss Ba. Almº FRENCH of cupATION Cádiz sp. A MOROCCO _s- A. —* 19 scale rºoooo lºomfies e - M ED I TE H. *Alboran l Ol' Areas occupied Tangier Tetuan to Dec. 3/907 N to Dec3, 1912 * ill sº isos Hitſ; " sº Iarºſs sº Sºfalº- º " tº # * * */ººn I Šán Gºlo socce.º.º.º. E * /glo N m 1915 S.------- FIT-- tº- #sº jda % a 1911 H m 1916 *…Nºir:Lºgº.T.:#: i: ºt * ...º. - - Q  Rººs- Rºgrºſſ; ...].” \ Military oasis { * 6arrisoned' 3. ºº:: &lº, . 34 º zoos {:}:. Raba |Fezºğ Tāzalº - º 34 krºš; ...}}; i. Casabl #; Š ...: 3rd &S 'P § - º, Safi º as: SºFigig $, :SNEA --~~~" . : 2 Beniünif <> * e § Žiž :::::::::Nº A { Colomb Béchar Mogador, €S § - i S---> N 2 - || - 2' T Vºl. A l; N. < Fº \- t < \ - \ 30 N \ 30 sº } s a N H A R A º p1:2. - % ºf / w_prº- & 22° __* - - sº-º: –a– 8 6 4. IHE GEOGR. REVIEW, July 1919 Fig. 50. Note the location and number of French military posts. Géographie, January 1917. From map in Annales de though she would find her problem much easier if she could get rid of the Spanish Zone, which is a refuge of brigands and political agitators. This she cannot do, for Spain considers her Moroccan territory of special political value, possibly of ultimate commercial value, and will not relinquish it (page 154). The French government has declared the policy of the open door in Morocco, which guarantees commercial and industrial equality to all the Allied nations. The attitude of the French government is based upon the willingness of the Allied nations to surrender all special priv- ileges of an international character which they formerly enjoyed. That is, the Moroccan people and rulers are not under special obligation to any nation other than France; all outstanding obligations to other nations are canceled. German interests in Morocco have long been *fš.f 3. i e Gibraltar 4. 2 36– T; # O 3C SKETCH * MAP sº —Alboran |. OStaſºalle OF * TANG! Ceuta M. E. Dr T E R R A N E A Ni S E 4 ORAN elizane MOROCCO Y fº)-Ketuan & sº scale Jé 099 009. 100 mil 4° º SCar i R i * 100 miles & Melilla g (22 Aſſevofion fry me?ers * * * * #; * § źafarill: Sidſbel-Abbe o- ſooo [...] Forest areas Ö • * ps •e O ...: & 12. Z! /000-2000 ----Railroad's O &\h a Yºgas ) zá Yºº N2OOO - 3OOO Main roads *..., \ sº 2% *º ©e º * E over 3000 Secondary roads Keni ºãº, ...~~~ ** 2: S3 | ; §: S$2.222 tº eigº" Z 34 - * | Rabaßre %. * SS FE Tºza. & Fedalah_atºš * € Şe S25% & Azemmur. §e *Y., ...& & 3% . § f K. ...' ...}…" º º Q. * agan W jºš 2YX/6. 2 º,' 'o. §º * * sº wº ©.3% % % Q. %. sº © *A** - Cº. Ž t W. oS & & & % } * * dº * $%/2 £ % 2. f \ * § 3:38 Ta & Safi Q, S W. *sº \ * & % 2 -U 32 P. 3?&N * gº - † & W - %& $8– 32 */’ves : iOmif 9–3 soº £28s ºf º W. & 2 emi U H , Mo .a. §.” 4& 63-N / Colomb- - * ga % ºf * ºl ox'ud Béchar Qi - Nº Cl WAQ X, Yºº H \ } aa.” * g * º r- | ) W o.O. sº * * ſº \ ! § Ša Q. * \ & \ \ \ Q. ºss, ; : \ \ ; dºo." 3 Sii 9 w ſ | *---- A gº gºś $% \ lf {2}= f: C. 3 Sº * KS ſ ſo Igli {.. º } \. *$. e i wº #º-> % t %’| PTamgrut ( {Beni Abbes 30 * * rº-Nºiz-Czzz, 'Nº, Tiznit/\--(4.4 %% \!” Y& 2 N *— © %% *mºs +. ! 4. Y} THE GEOGR, REVIEW, July 1919 : 51. sº. Imap º º the natural features and the means of communication. Compare with Figure 50, showing French pene- wration o OTOCCO. e tribes of the inner districts of the Atlas Mountains are still unpacified. The f y is large and may become important to French industry. p e forest wealth, now protected from waste, 110 The New World French Supervision over Mo- roccan gov- ernment affairs French de- velopment of ports, roads, and a good civil ad- ministra- tion Agriculture and for- estry en- couraged of little consequence; but Germany pressed her claims upon every occasion, not because she hoped to control Morocco, where the French and Spanish interests had been longer established than her own, but because she wished to have a pawn in disputes with France elsewhere, as in Equatorial Africa (page 107). The treaty of Versailles carries a provision requiring Germany to abandon all rights and privileges granted by the General Act of Algeciras of April 1906 and the Franco- German agreements of February 1909 and November 1911. Ger- many further renounces all treaties and agreements between herself and the Moroccan Empire, abandons the régime of the capitulations (carrying servitudes in favor of European nations, including herself), and gives up all mining rights. . Before the period of European intervention that began about 1875, the Sultan of Morocco had absolute power, both political and religious, and his immediate officers controlled all the affairs of the country. The French have continued this form of government, ex- cept that the French resident-general has become a kind of minister of foreign affairs. The French have also added such departments as those of public works, public lands, finance, agriculture, and postal service. Thus France exercises supervisory power over the sources of production and the means of exchange. Through her intelligence officers and her military and civil ad- ministrators, France has conducted her relations with the natives in the most delicate manner and with fine respect for the native cus- toms, though sufficiently firm in carrying out the pacification of un- settled regions. In short, she has extended the best of her policies in Tunis and Algeria throughout all Morocco. She has developed the ports of Morocco, not only Casablanca as the major port, but also local ports like Kenitra and Mogador. In the matter of railroad building France was handicapped by the agreement of 1911, which required construction of the international Tangier-Fez line — on which work has only recently begun—to take precedence over other lines. Several narrow-gauge lines have been construoted, however, and an impetus has been given to road building. More than twelve hundred miles of metaled roads are open to traffic, and about the same mileage of other roads. Agriculture has been encouraged by teaching the native Moroccan the advantages of modern methods and the use of agricultural ma- chinery. Agricultural experiment stations have been established. Stock breeding has been taught in order to improve the strain of sheep, cattle, horses, and mules. The French have taken strong Political and Colonial Aims of France 111 Fig, 52. Casablanca, one of the seaports of Morocco. An airplane photograph showing the Place de France and the European quarter. From the Geographical Review, 1919. measures for the protection of both the cork-oak forests of the littoral and the beautiful cedar forests of the Middle Atlas. Algeria Including the Saharan district administered with it, Algeria has nearly a million square miles, or four times the area of France; but it is . only the coastal belts that are of present economic importance (Fig. 55). It is divided into four physiographic zones which run parallel to the Mediterranean coast: (1) The Little Atlas, or maritime, mountain and valley belt called the Tell. (2) The intermediate plateau of the Shat, marked by failing streams and salt lakes. (3) The Great, or Saharan, Atlas range, with peaks that exceed six thousand feet in height. (4) A second interior piedmont belt with intermittent streams, broad mud and salt flats, and the gravelly and sandy wastes of the northern Sahara. The people are distributed chiefly in the coastal belt and in scat- tered oases in the interior. Their lot has been made easier in places Physio- graphic divisions of the country 112 The New World Figs. 53 and 54. The old and the new in Moroccan agriculture. To the primitive plow are harnessed any available animals — and even women. “It is not unusual to see a camel, an ass, and a woman drawing the plow,” says Bernard (Le Maroc, 1913, p. 170). The introduc- tion of modern agricultural machinery is, however, beginning to transform Moroccan agriculture. Political and Colonial Aims of France 113 by the good results of French irrigation, which has involved the building of two large water-storage basins. - French control in Algeria dates from 1830, when the occupation of several coast towns was carried out and negotiations with native chieftains were begun. The effect of French occupation has been to stabilize the social and business life of the people, remove the con- trol of military chiefs who ran the country under nominal Turkish sovereignty, and put an end to depredations upon Mediterranean commerce by the Barbary pirates. - - These results France was able to achieve only after a long struggle. Incidents of There was practically continuous native opposition to her control . from 1830 to 1847. Again in 1851, 1864–1871, and 1881, insurrec- tions were put down. From that time on the country was sufficiently quiet to enable the French to press inland step by step, until by 1905 their control of Algeria was extended also over the whole desert interior. It is interesting to note that by the treaty of Sèvres Turkey is to recognize the French protectorate in Morocco as of 1912, and in Tunis as of 1881, thus confirming French occupation of northern Africa from Libya westward to the Atlantic, except Tangier and the northern Spanish Zone. - - There are about 4,750,000 native inhabitants in Algeria and in addition 30,000 non-European whites and 750,000 Europeans (chiefly French and Spaniards). Berbers form three fourths of the total population. The present tendency is toward a decline of the Euro- pean population, in spite of port improvements, the construction of several thousand miles of railway, and the building of an equal mile- {& A jºy 2. - Al Gr, R1 §3. sº & & razzºzzzzzz \; - *...*&^{...ºc . Touggourt & % ſº £% º V - º Zºº - º 3. V & Roughlands sº forest areas o” . , 50 = Pi—º: 200 M Bºr º == Fig. 55. Generalized relief belts of Algeria and Tunis. Forests from M. Marc, Notes sur les - forêts de l'Algérie, 1916. - 114 The New World Decline of European population Importance of Algerian products in French trade Plan of govern- ment under Turkish rule age of first-class roads, besides telegraph lines and other modern facilities of commerce. - - The decline of European population is in part due to a bad system of land tenure. Boundaries are ill defined, titles are insecure, and much of the land is held in common by individual tribes. Though the French authorities have delimited many tribal boundaries and passed laws permitting the sale of family as opposed to tribal prop- erty in land, the tribesmen have not responded to the opportunity, chiefly because they saw the demoralizing effects upon families that, having sold their land, dissipated the proceeds and fell into a state of poverty. Those French colonists who have purchased state lands, hitherto unoccupied, have been compelled to live for a term of five years upon their holdings, and this obligation has further diminished the zeal of intending colonists. . * . " . The land of Algeria is capable of high production. The hilly maritime belt (fifty to one hundred miles wide), known as the Tell, grows cereals — chiefly wheat, barley, and oats — in abundance, es- pecially since the increase of water supply brought about by the drilling of artesian wells. Olives, tobacco, and wine are produced in nearly all the cultivated oases of the interior valleys. Nearly a half-million acres are devoted to the production of grapes for wine. A review of these and other exports of Algeria, like horses, sheep, oxen, wool and skins, fruits and oils, and a consideration of their total value, -which with imports now exceeds $250,000,000 annually, - will show the practical basis of French interest in the territory. The products are such as France needs to supplement her own re- sources and to feed her industries. To reap the highest advantage, the French government requires Algerian overseas commerce to be carried wholly in French ships. Tunis Under Turkish rule and before the French occupation, Tunis was divided into sixty administrative districts with a total extent of 42,000 square miles and a population of 2,100,000. At the head of each dis- trict was a caid, or ruler. He was assisted by caliphs, who governed the smaller administrative divisions, and by sheikhs, who ruled the individual towns and villages. There were more than thirteen hundred sheikhates in Tunisia at the time of the French occupation in 1881. - - The French in general retained the old system, except that they Political and Colonial Aims of France 115 ºgg øınāſ) aºs uoſqwoo! Io I reſuº'ºty uſ ºuņuaeqsuo;O ‘Iſa L æq? Jo Aqſo y ‘99 ºbraſ 116 The New World Fig. 57. Oasis in the gorge of Kantara, Algeria, located in the Maritime Atlas (Fig. 55). changes divided the country into territorial divisions, rather than ac- * cording to tribes, and themselves reserved the privilege of appoint- French ing the tribal chiefs, or caids. - Semi- The various tribes of Tunis numbered from a few hundred to many . thousands in each district. Originally they were practically all semi- Tunis nomadic, and some of them were wholly so. Wherever there was good pasture, there they grazed their herds and flocks, and the size of the tribe was largely controlled by the size of the pasture, the nearness of towns or the sea coast, and their military strength, the purely nomadic tribes preying upon passing caravans or upon more settled people in the towns of the oases. Unruly The French occupation was largely to prevent raids of the Khroumer #.” tribes on Algeria. There was a great deal of trouble in 1881 and also tribes in 1887, but since then these tribes have devoted themselves more steadily to cattle-raising and agriculture. They number probably about 7000. Some Tunisian tribes, such as the Drid and the Ouerten, composed of hard-working people who raise cereals, cattle, and sheep, have submitted peacefully to French occupation; others, like the Chaihia, have never become reconciled to it, and are ready for revolt at almost any time. Some of them were extremely unruly during the Turkish occupation, as for example the Souassi, who at one time Political and Colonial Aims of France 117 Fig. 58. Scene in the desert interior of French Algeria. Photo by Gautier in the Geographical Review, January 1921. \s. s Brown Bros. Fig. 59. In the northern sand dune belt of the French Sahara. 118 The New World The native way of life were obliged to flee into Tripoli, but returned to Tunis as a result of famine. They number about 37,000 and at present are engaged in agriculture. The Neffet, who are warlike and fanatical, have more than once revolted against the Turkish government. They are occupied chiefly as shepherds, but own some palm groves in the oasis of Gabes (Fig. 55). e In the Nefzaoua district there are nearly, fifty villages scattered among the oases and surrounded by sandy soil and sand dunes. The population is engaged in the cultivation of date palms and numbers about 10,000. Formerly the villages bought protection from nomad raids; but with French occupation and the pacification of the wild frontier tribes this is no longer necessary. A large number of the tribes of Tunis live in a confederation called Overghemma. They are supposed to number nearly 50,000. Some of these have fixed dwellings; others are nomads. For a time after the French occupation they kept the border districts in a con- stant state of turmoil; but gradually they were driven out or sub- dued, and the frontier regions are now kept in order by a string of fortified posts. - Difficulties of administration over these people have been most admirably met by France. Tunisia, indeed, is often held out as a model in this respect. In the present state of the country and the future prospects there is promise of reward to France for the drain upon her military and economic resources entailed by occupation and pacification. * CHAPTER FOUR BELGIUM AS A EUROPEAN FOCUS THROUGHOUT recorded history Belgium has been a battle ground Belgium as of rival tribes and nations. As early as the middle of the 17th century ...” she had been called “the military arena of Europe” — and since battle that time she has continued well to deserve the name. For more “ than two hundred years previous to the War of the Spanish Succes- sion (1702–1713), Belgium was ruled by the Spanish Hapsburgs. As a result of that war she was handed over to the Austrian Hapsburgs, the dynasty which continued to rule Austria-Hungary until that coun- try surrendered to the Allies in November 1918. In 1792 an army Ç was sent by France, then in the midst of her great Revolution, os- tensibly to free Belgium from Austrian rule; shut before long Belgium found herself annexed to France, and French domination continued until 1814. At the Congress of Vienna in 1815 the wishes of the Belgian people winning were again ignored; for instead of becoming independent, Belgium : e was joined to Holland to form the Kingdom of the Netherlands, in order to improve the defenses against France. But there were dif- ferences of language, religion, and economic interests between the two peoples that could not be reconciled after a separation of one hundred and thirty-five years, especially as the Dutch took care to enforce the use of the Dutch language and to occupy the best offices of the government. In 1830, when the news reached Belgium that Charles X, the Bourbon king of France, had been deposed by his subjects, the country was profoundly stirred. Petitions were sent to William I, king of the Netherlands, asking for the administra- tive separation of Holland and Belgium. William replied by send- ing an army to put down the ensuing disorders, whereupon Belgium declared and won her independence. Her final status, however, was not settled until 1839, when Holland accepted the treaty of Lon- don, which, in 1831, had established Belgium as “an independent and perpetually neutral state.” This was the treaty which was broken by Germany when she invaded Belgium in August 1914. Thus the World War saw Belgium affected by only the latest and The dissi- most grievous of a long succession of servitudes and disasters. The ºl." reason for her melancholy history is clear: she stands upon the great energy on world highway that joins central and western Europe. She has ..." suffered, not because of her own ambitions, but because of the ambi- Flanders I 19 120 The New World Growth of - industrial power Present handicaps º:POPULATIONDENSITY & : . º § ersq.km per sqmile 2-. 2: under 25 Dunder 64 º:25-75 E.64-182 *...:::NY ::: Scale of miles º ‘. . . . . ( : ... *9, Lº 30 °9 ºf" . . . . . ." ...:”, e e • " . - • * * * * * * * * * - ... . f* FIG. 60. The two converging belts of densest population in Europe, with Belgium at the meet- ing place. Cities with a population exceeding 500,000 have their names spelled in full; those with a population less than 500,000 are indicated by initials only. Based on Andree, Handatlas, Sheet 31. tions of others who have struggled for supremacy on her soil. Her shattered hopes have been the evidence of her neighbors’ greed. It would be difficult to measure the human energy that has been dissi- pated and perverted upon the fields of Flanders; it is imperative that means be devised for preventing a recurrence of so terrible an expenditure. - If the position of Belgium has brought her tragic consequences in times of war, it has nevertheless given her prosperity in times of peace. During the 19th century, and in spite of her small size, Bel- gium became a great industrial nation. In 1910 her population (7,500,000, or more than 650 to the square mile) was comparable to that of Pennsylvania, whose area is four times as great. She was the third greatest industrial nation of the continent, mined consider- able coal of her own, and had other valuable mineral resources, al- though her iron supply was wholly insufficient for her needs. THE TASK OF REBUILDING . The German occupation and the general effects of the war require that the industries of Belgium be rebuilt from their foundations. It is estimated that from 1914 to 1918 the country suffered damages totaling $7,600,000,000. Although she will receive 8 per cent of the Belgium as a European Focus 121 ×y rj W. ! ſº 20 ºrg %" Europe g 2} * Regions fought over N * In the Napoleonic Wars ..! In the Great War : O 10 A 40 ZZ 50 FIG. 61. Comparison of the European theaters of war a hundred years ago and today. The ) Napoleonic Wars are taken from Putzger, Historische Schul-Atlas. Scale of miles 100 0 500 Lisb Trº Xèriven I 2 3. º 5 * 7 8 9 | - ~ j * |Dover Lunki @An rp --~ { Düsseldorf – ſº ?.)” * 5| alai Gravelines Diest A j Cologne •---Y. B E L GIUM © §PEN t S} lenz, Huy e”. @*#): *}º }cob **Muſeuge, ºver Ai- š---- A || SOI. V. { 'N. ºr ." zièresſ... I - Montmlé }*, -a, - {6}Thi ©Neu - N - . . " Scale of miles N &Langres 0 10 20 30 40 50" 60 70 80 90 C.K. |2 ls 4. 5 TIG. 62. Modern defenses in a historical field of conflict. Note the chain of German defenses on the Rhine, the belt of forts close to the French frontier, and the great forts of the interven- ing country, - Strasbourg, Metz, Namur, Liége, and Antwerp. There is a large industrial population between Paris and the northeastern frontier (Fig. 33). A dense industrial popula- tion also occupies the frontier zone of Germany on both sides of the Rhine. From map en- titled Guerre Européenne, 1914, 1: 1,200,000. I22. The New World The work of restora- tion Revival of industry Flemish- Walloon problem German indemnity, the amount of indemnity that the Allies can collect is wholly uncertain. In addition Belgium is to receive re- imbursement from Germany for all sums (about five billion francs) borrowed by Belgium from the Allied and Associated Powers during the war, with interest at 5 per cent. The recovery of Belgium has been extraordinarily rapid. Within a year of the time of the armistice (11 November 1918), almost the whole Belgian railway system was restored to full activity, and this in spite of labor difficulties and the lack of building ma- terial. Likewise the road system, of which a thousand miles had been damaged or destroyed, had been restored and the canals had been cleared, putting Belgium again in possession of all her means of communication. In a few years Belgium may be ex- pected to recover her place among the industrial nations of the world. The spirit of unrest prevailing in Belgium at the close of the war Soon subsided. Crop production was raised in less than two years to the pre-war level, and the country was started upon a program of real economic revival. By the end of 1920 Belgium's industries were producing 80 per cent as much as before the war. Glass manufactures recovered to the extent of 98 per cent. In Ghent, half the cotton factories were in operation. In 1919 there were produced 18,500,000 tons of coal. That the iron and steel industries show only 18 per cent of pre-war output is because nearly all the mills were dismantled dur- ing the German occupation. By the terms of the armistice and the peace treaty, Germany was required to return a large part of the ma- chinery taken from Belgium. . In addition to the other difficulties there is a vexatious language problem at home, and, across the border, misunderstanding with Hol- land. A little more than half the people of Belgium are Flemish, and quite closely resemble the Dutch; the rest are Walloons, and speak French (Fig. 63). The Flemings have kept their old indigenous language, as well as French, though practicing a certain amount of exclusion toward the latter. As Catholics they are opposed to the religious liberalism that the Walloons have imported from France. The Walloons have had a preponderance of power in the past, though the Flemings in recent years have slowly been gaining a status of their own. While the Germans were in Belgium, they tried in all possible ways to foster a separatist movement, and even promised the Flem- ings to guarantee their independence. But the Flemish people re- mained loyal to the idea of national unity. Belgium as a European Focus 123 w § º Nº. & TN E T H e * 6 N L3 sº \s=\ OIICIIIlOſl 1. NAjº. Us, T-ſlºſ J. 4. A" lmond. 3! Nuºng - WSW, - tº: غf (T- 2* % . - 2. ºº \ Tułhou ~~~~ - cBruges ZZZZ” >Antwerp \, - ºr ~. - L - I }% a Yº W. oGhent * U M £% Dunkirk', - oMălines & 5l. \ tº gº \ • ‘º \ t ºy oHassel ? s I TeS Courtrai.v olouvain. * - sº A * t ~~ y - --gº º: F/em/3/2 —ºrussels: $22:43éooz 22.3 & º tº pelle & 2-e L-º-º-º- *-ºs - ^ Y ~\ § j/2//oo/7 0 10 20 30 M. St Troud"--& FIG. 63. The shaded areas represent the districts in Holland which Belgium would like to have. Possession of the one on the left would permit Belgium to improve the Scheldt and thus remove long-standing restrictions on the growth of Antwerp ; possession of southern Limburg would increase the defensive strength of Belgium's eastern frontier. The Flemish- Walloon speech boundary is after Vidal Lablache. BELGIAN CLAIMS TO ADJACENT TERRITORY Belgium's misunderstandings with Holland arise out of her claims to Dutch Limburg and to the left bank of the lower Scheldt (Fig. 63). The Limburg region is inhabited by Dutch people and was given to Hol- land by the powers in 1839, greatly to the dissatisfaction of Belgium. Belgium would now like to have it back, chiefly on account of (1) its coal deposits, (2) its strategic value in the military defense of the country, and (3) its relation to the eastern water transportation routes. With the coveted strip in her hands, she could connect the Meuse and the Rhine by canal. This is an almost vital matter in a country having the densest population in Europe and the highest per capita mileage of railways and canals. Belgium feels that Holland cannot defend the region in time of war and calls attention to the fact that Ger- man troops retreating into Germany after the armistice of November 1918 crossed Dutch territory, thus violating the neutrality of Hol- land. Under the treaty of Versailles, however, Germany is not allowed to maintain armed forces in the region known as the Left Bank of the Rhine, and Belgium is therefore fully protected against a sudden attack from this side. As for the problem of the Scheldt, Belgium claims that the growth of her great port, Antwerp (on the Scheldt, 50 miles from its mouth), is largely at the mercy of Holland, which controls both banks of the river for a distance of 40 miles. By the treaty of 1839, regulations regard- ing pilotage, buoying, and dredging of this river must have the joint consent of Holland and Belgium. Holland, however, has prevented or delayed improvements of the river in order that Rotterdam might Limburg question Belgium's desire to share con- trol of the Scheldt 124 - The New World Relations with Luxemburg Territorial gains in Europe and Africa profit at the expense of Antwerp. The negotiations between Bel- gium and Holland had for their object a guarantee to Belgium of the full use of the river in time of peace and of its improvement to meet Antwerp's growing needs; but Holland refused to yield, and no im- provement of Belgium's status on the Scheldt was secured. The left bank of the Scheldt in Dutch possession covers an area of 275 square miles and has a population of about 80,000, practically all of whom are Dutch. - Belgium has always wished to regain possession of the grand duchy of Luxemburg, for it was a part of Belgium, or the Southern Nether- lands, until the French Revolution. In 1839 the western, or Walloon, portion was assigned to Belgium and the eastern, or German, portion became the grand duchy of Luxemburg as we know it today. Though its neutrality had been guaranteed in 1867, the duchy was occupied by Germany throughout the World War. Ever since 1842 it had been a member of the German Customs Union, and its railroads have been under German control. Both of these conditions are now set aside by treaty. The country is rich in iron and has some coal. France, to which the upper classes of the duchy have been very partial, has also been interested in the possession of Luxemburg. A plebiscite held on 28 September 1919 favored a customs union with France and a con- tinuation of the rule of the reigning family. The grand duchy is a little smaller than Rhode Island, having an area of 1000 square miles, and it has about 250,000 inhabitants. - EUROPEAN AND COLONIAL ACQUISITIONS - Belgium's territorial gains as a result of the war are very small. They include the following: (1) Small additions of territory along the German frontier, in the Eupen, Malmédy, and Moresnet regions, with an area of 382 square miles and a population of 64,000 (Fig. 64). (2) Ruanda and Urundi, a minor but agriculturally valuable part of former German East Africa (see Figure 65 and also page 125). - - The additions on her eastern frontier were made in order to strengthen Belgium from a military standpoint. In 1839 the defensive strength of her frontiers was not thought a matter of great importance; but the invasion of Belgium by Germany, one of the powers that had guaranteed her neutrality, made it clear that the country is not safe as a neutral and must be given the means of defending herself in case Belgium as a European Focus 125 of attack. Before the war Ger- many had built military railways leading to the border and along it that were a menace to Belgium's peace. One of Germany's famous concentration camps was at El- senborn, near the Belgian border. Strong dissatisfaction was ex- pressed in Germany with the terms of the treaty of Versailles that provided for the disposition of the Eupen and Malmédy districts. Under Belgian supervision, all voters were permitted to express a preference for German owner- ship, but because voting took the form of signing an open register, the arrangement prevented the free expression of opinion. Only a few hundred persons registered a desire to have the districts return to Germany. The Ruanda and Urundi dis- tricts in eastern Africa were as- signed to Belgium in return for the help given by the Belgians in the } \ 50 2\-Sh N & UXE . R G Scale fm//es. FIG. 64. The “circles,” or administrative dis- tricts, of Eupen and Malmédy, which Belgium gained in 1920 by the terms of the treaty of Versailles. With these two industrial districts there was included, by treaty, the small tract of Moresnet which had been overlooked in the treaty of 1815 and was thereafter subject to international administration. The delimitation of the exact boundaries had not been completed by the boundary commission down to the end of 1920. s M campaign for the conquest of German East Africa (1917). Belgium is to act as mandatary of the League of Nations. In ceding the two districts, Great Britain reserved small portions on the eastern side in order to have a practicable route for a railroad which shall join Tan- ganyika Territory (as former German East Africa is now designated) to Uganda. railroad (Fig. 15). This portion of the line is a link in the Cape-to-Cairo In return for these important concessions to the British, Belgium obtains valuable economic advantages, as follows: (1) A free outlet for the produce of the east-central portion of the Belgian Congo by way of Lake Tanganyika to Dar es Salaam on the Indian Ocean. (2) Concession areas at Kigoma (on Lake Tanganyika) and Dar es Salaam on the eastern coast for the storage of goods. (3) The right, to transport merchandise from Lake Tanganyika to the Indian Ocean in Belgian freight cars. African concessions to Belgium 126 The New World 32 sº Ø 2% º 30 3 U_g a n d a P r o tele c t . (B r it.) o Usuvī T A N G A N Y I K A T E R R. I. T. O. R. Y Mavetas o 1 23 30 31 FIG. 65. The northwestern corner of former German East Africa, allotted to Belgium. It is densely populated and has a considerable extent of upland suitable for white settlement (Fig. 263). The part ceded to Belgium (districts of Ruanda and Urundi) has an area of 18,000 square miles and a population estimated at 3,500,000, or about half the total of former German East Africa. Agriculture and grazing are the chief native occupations. Belgium thus gains in former German East Africa 18,000 square miles of territory of great economic value, to be added to the 1,000,000 square miles she already possesses in the Belgian Congo. Ruanda and Urundi are high plateau regions, the former culminating in the volcanic mountains northeast of Lake Kivu, the latter bordering on Lake Tanganyika. While climatically suitable for a white man's country, the territory has a dense native population, intelligent and independent. The soil is fertile and native agriculture is well devel- oped; it is one of the most important cattle regions in Africa. Its mineral wealth is still unexplored. - Belgium as a European Focus 127 THE BELGIAN CONGO The economic value of the Belgian Congo is still unrealized. Most Value of of the territory lies far inland, and this location has imposed a handi- * cap upon both settlement and trade. The white, or European, popu- lation numbers only about 6000 persons; of these 3000 are Belgians, more than two thirds of them officials. The region is in great need of white colonists, chiefly planters and traders; and it needs capital to develop its resources. Its native population is variously estimated at from 7 to 15 millions, chiefly negroes in a low state of social and economic development. Taken as a whole, the colony now involves the home government in little expense over revenues, which have been greatly increased through an improved but still unsatisfactory census that extended the application of the native tax. Cotton planting is done on a grow- ing scale and has only begun to be developed in large regions favorable to very extensive production. The chief item of export is copper. Palm oil and rubber also figure in the export list. Katanga, the comparatively healthy upland rim of the basin in the southeast, is highly mineralized. The copper deposits are known to be among the largest in the world; already copper is exported to the amount Obstruction tonavigation| - Head of navigation º &|... (prolºgical Railroad ..—present boundaries -—Superseded s º:33. & : >} ré S 0 § g $5 to ſº e -----, 25 tº 35 Y3% º: TIG. 66. Rail and water transportation in the Belgian Congo. Railroads from 1 : 2,000,000 map of Africa; data on navigability of rivers from G. Kaeckenbeeck, International Rivers, Pub- lications of the Grotius Society, I, 1918. º ^Sºº 2:2 ºr o'e 128 The New World of 27,000 tons, and the export of tin has begun. Diamonds (in the Vasai basin) and gold (in Welle) are other exploited mineral TeSOUTCOS. The state-built roads now aggregate more than 6500 miles in length. More than 1200 miles of railway have also been built, the existing roads being as follows: Matadi-Leopoldville 240 miles Stanleyville-Ponthierville 75 miles Kindu-Kongolo 150 miles Kabalo-Albertville 165 miles Katanga Railway (completed to Bukama) 435 miles Mayumba Railway 84 miles These are supplemented by a water-transport system of many thousands of miles and by a series of wireless stations, at Boma, Stanleyville, Albertville, Kilo, Kindu, etc., which link the coast with the more important inland towns. CHAPTER FIVE THE ITALIAN SITUATION No one of the other powers allied against Germany in the World War has come out of the struggle with so many threatening internal and external questions and so little increase of national territory in pro- portion to area, population, national debt, and war effort as Italy. The internal difficulties were bound to come; the external problems are chiefly of her own making. POPULATION DENSITY per sq km per sq mile more than 200 more than 5|2 i 100 - 200 % 256 – 512 sº e. có 3.4% RSICA 3OME.º. *::::::::::::::, ; 0. ve” º - - - - - --- Jºe º * as •º (2. 5.§ & - ~3° © 0. § º 㺠—tº: Sºlº *ś. #. & > * > $3 & Caſſiiami * 38 * 4. Paler º § º §§ O 20 40 60 80 100 MILES g-E-Er:Ex-Ex-El -- C-KPISCri |2 | |8 FIG. 67. Italy is about twice as large as the New England states and contains five times as many people. Only a few districts in the United States have a density of agricultural population as great as the cross-lined areas on the map above. From Agostini, Atlante geografico metodico, 3d ed., 1913. The line of the treaty of London, 1915, is shown by heavy dashes on the eastern border of the Adriatic. By the treaty of Rapallo between Italy and Jugo-Slavia, signed in November 1920, this line has been modified to form an international boundary, after a dispute that lasted for two years and frequently threatened war, owing to D'Annunzio's seizure of Fiume. See pages 259–270 for a discussion of the Adriatic question and a map of the new boundary (Fig. 138). The total Italian gains in Europe as a result of the war embrace an area of 8900 square miles and a population of 1,600,000. 129 130 The New World FIG. 68. The harbor of Trieste, western side of the Istrian peninsula. While - chiefly by Jugo-Slavs. The city AMIBITIONS FOR EXPANSION IN EUROPE Imperialistic A great debt and small means to pay it, loss of man power to the º * extent of a half-million men, devastation of the occupied provinces on the northeastern frontier, unemployment among the demobilized soldiers, difficulty in obtaining coal for her slowly reviving industries — these were troubles grave enough in all conscience. But Italy in- creased the anxieties of the time by trying to obtain lands and people to which, according to British, French, and American official opinion, she had no right. These governments argued that the taking in of unwilling aliens of quite different speech and race has in the past often led to war, because the ruling race has been tempted, in all but a few cases, to persecute and drive out of the country those whom it should be its policy to protect; the habit of persecution becomes fixed in the minds of the ruling class, and there arises a general policy of force which is not long in changing into naked imperialism. To these arguments Italy has replied by saying that both England and France are holding unwilling peoples under military control, and that her colonial enterprises are as honorable and successful as those of her neighbors. Promises If we study the situation of Italy in the light of Italian arguments, i. we shall have a great deal of sympathy for her. She entered the war 1915 in 1915 with the distinct understanding that she was to gain large - territories. On the north especially she sought territory to remove the historic menace of Austria. That power had crossed the great The Italian Situation 131 the city is inhabited chiefly by Italians, the surrounding country is inhabited was formerly Austria's chief seaport. northern mountain wall and held the heads of the valleys that drain the southern, or Italian, Tyrol; a first concentrated rush would bring her down into the densely populated and fertile northern Italian plain (Fig. 67). In this region, at least, Italy's expectations have been realized. Elsewhere she has not been so fortunate. France and Great Britain both promised her additional territory in Africa if theyº gained African territory themselves. But in the final settlement France was long unwilling to make any territorial concessions to Italy in Africa, though the British government eventually surrendered considerable tracts of territory in western Egypt and British Somali- land. In this matter, whatever reasons may have guided her, France was clearly delaying a proper settlement of Italian problems. A basis for final agreement was laid in 1920, when France and Italy agreed upon a Libyan boundary, as shown in Figure 74. In 1915 the French and British (and the Russian government of that time) had agreed also that on the eastern side of the Adriatic Italy was to gain territory as defined by the treaty of London line (Fig. 67). This agreement was made at a time when the old diplomatic methods of settling a dispute were still in vogue; the powers thought of themselves as victors rightfully taking spoils from the van- quished. With this point of view no one would disagree when the vanquished had sinister designs on the nations they forced into a terrible war, were it not for the fact that such a policy would merely lead to another war. Now it was the thought of many of the soldiers who died for their ideals that this was a war that should end war. Purpose of the War 132 - The New World That could only be if the peace that followed the war were a just peace. Otherwise, as one statesman remarked, it would be “a peace that would end peace.” The di- To grasp this principle in its full significance took a long time, and º the idea was especially slow in gaining a place in the thought of the tº. Italian political leaders. They felt that they had nothing tangible to show their people for the sacrifices of the war. A successful fight tº j had been waged, but all they had to exhibit was a moral victory, and a moral victory will not buy coal and raw materials for factories, nor will it buy machinery and ships. For a long time the Italian mind dwelt on the practical rather than the idealistic aspects of the victory. The Allies, whether rightly or wrongly, came to distrust Italian political judgment and became anxious about her influence in Turkey and northern Africa. - - It was asserted also that although Italy agreed to fight all the enemies of the Allies (treaty of London, 1915), she never made war upon Turkey, and declared war upon Germany only after she had been fighting with Austria for a year. She was to have a protectorate over central Albania only ; but she really took control of all Albania. Fiume was outside the treaty of London line; but she claimed that also. Finally, she landed troops in southwestern Anatolia (Scala Nuova) without the authority of the other Allied and Associated Powers, and in fact against their strong protests. In many quarters it was said that the action of the Italian government in Anatolia was no less radical and unauthorized than that of D'Annunzio at Fiume. As a result of Atfied protests, the Italians at last agreed to stay behind a demarcation line in Anatolia. Italy was requested to give up the things she coveted. She had taken the Dodecanese, a group of islands off the coast of Asia Minor, Italy in 1912 at the close of the war with Turkey; but the islands are ‘..., Greek in speech and race, and the Allies insisted that they be turned conquered over to Greece. The Dalmatian coast is solidly Jugo-Slav, and this territory also Italy was urged to give up, though possession of it was promised in 1915 as an inducement to her to enter the war. Outside of Europe she made important but not large gains: additional territory in Libya (Fig. 74), a sphere iſ southern Anatolia (Fig. 48), owner- ship of the island of Castelorizzo near Rhodes, and Rhodes itself for a term of years. She also won the Trieste region and the Istrian peninsula, besides a large tract in the Trentino as far north as the Ötzthaler Mountains, a district whose northern part is inhabited chiefly by German-speaking people who do not welcome Italian rule. g 3 º' ºº - º 'º -- Fig. 69. Arco, on Lake Garda, in the southern Trentino. Part of the territory inhabited by Italians which was hel it was “redeemed” by Italy as a result of the World War and the treaty with Austria. - *** - d by Austria until 1914, when 134 The New World ! % - "ºft /-3% a º'. £3%.A. Øſº º 㺠% #, % * 6. %2. - Žá Zºº ; gº % Landºck Tſ -- olubildº (' s " "... " wer?” A. Vy sº 47 fºr- low 2} N. Y2 j \ % .227 2) ~, cº a 2% K. § A A. * % A e * % $ v-z. §ſ ºf *& H * - &- 2 & ſº f % 2% N 4.2 × × º \ % * 3' - * % § g” */2 º 3. ſº Ø % Ž sº % Ú) slº. tº Italians Ladins Germans Ll PracticallyUninhabited & 8T6aS FIG. 70. The disputed territory of the southern Tyrol. Austria made two offers in 1915, the second of which would have given Italy most of her “unredeemed” people in the Trentino. Austria refused to make further concessions, and at length Italy went to war. By the treaty of St. Germain (1919) between Austria and the Allied and Associated Powers, Italy was given what she called her natural, or geographical, frontier in the Brenner Pass region; but it should be noted that she thus gains nearly 230,000 German-speaking people who are likely to create an irredentist problem as serious as that before 1914. From C. Battisti, Il Trentino, 1917, Pl. 3; O. R. Torniolo, L'Alto Adige, 1917, Pl. 1. Legend applies only to that portion of the map in- cluded within the limits of the Tyrol gained by Italy. - -1t was in the Trentino that Italy made her chief effort to win terri- tory by diplomatic means after the war started in 1914. To keep Italy out of the war, Austria offered in 1915 to give her that part of the Tyrol ethnically Italian (Fig. 70). Italy refused the offer, entered" the war, and by the treaty of St. Germain-en-Laye obtained all the territory south of the Brenner Pass, thus adding to her population about 230,000 German-speaking people. The irredentist problem of the Tyrol is not settled; it is simply transferred from Italy to Austria. The Italian Situation 135 Fig. 71. View in the Brenner Pass region on Italy's present northern frontier. Southward through the pass have come the Teutonic invaders, again and again, to occupy the valley lands and threaten the rich northern plains of Italy. The desire for territorial expansion and the increase of her foreign Historical commerce is not a new thing in Italian life. It should not be taken ..." as a sudden expression of national greed. It flows naturally from the program historic position of Italian cities, notably Genoa and Venice, in oriental trade. They were among the greatest of Mediterranean marts of the 12th and 13th centuries, and only entered a period of definite decline when the Turk reached the coast of the Near East in the 15th century and the Portuguese in the early years of the 16th century developed the commerce of the route to India by way of the Cape of Good Hope. In the long period from the 10th to the end of the 18th century, Venice held the Dalmatian Islands and a large part of the coast. When the western European powers were pushing on to new colonial fields in America, the Far East, and Africa, Italy still moved in a Mediterranean orbit. Trade, not territory, was the limited-am- > - bition of her regional leaders. ºx. CIn modern trade, however, territorial ownership is a vital matter. Benefits 2.T..". service, coaling and cable stations, spheres of influ- :... ence, capital investments, and emigration, all have greater or less relation to diplomatic exchanges and advantages that spring from 136 The New World actual ownership of exploited land and people. Italy has been slow and vacillating in building this idea into her national policy. Her present effort is designed to prevent her latest opportunity from es- caping. º That Italy has pushed for advantages with her allies is also not strange when we remember her traditional enmity toward France. Up to 1915 Italy was still formally allied with Germany and Austria (the Triple Alliance). Suddenly she changed friends. Limited in her demands by the counter proposals of France, Great Britain, and the United States, her leaders were not sure of those practical advantages that they had expected. There was for a time, after the war, a growth of pro-German feeling. Thus Italy finds herself again in the middle of the road. Her future diplomatic and commercial orientation can scarcely be predicted. INTERNAL POLITICAL AND INDUSTRIAL PROBLEMS : only sixty years ago that she became a unified modern state, and the | forces of disunion that long kept her the prey of foreign powers and : that fostered the petty quarrels between Heighboring states of the Italian peninsula have not yet been destroyed. The long struggle between the Vatican and the Court has kept her people divided. The good of the country demands a strong, unified government, and this can develop only if her domestic problems are solved. | Annual “” Italy is one of the most densely populated states of Europe. The | Union of * The domestic problems of Italy are large and menacing. It was loss of . climate is sunny and the soil fertile; the crops are varied and abun- remain dant, the people industrious. But each year thousands of Italians emigrate to newer lands in the United States and South America. While many of them, having acquired a modest fortune, return to stay, and many others return for a season only, a greater number #-remain in the new lands. The children of Italy to a large extent become the citizens of the Argentine or the United States. lack of 9. In part, this emigration is due to the lack of coal and #. petroleum. Without native fuel, Italy can develop certain Íñāmū- dustries factures only to the extent to which she can import coal. She must purchase coal from America and from England chiefly. While seventy-seven million tons of coal are to be exported to her by Germany in the ten years ending 1929, it is almost certain that this amount will be diminished. Not only does the lack of coal in Italy increase the cost of her manufactured wares to her own people; <--—TT"--~~~.. --- ,----~~~~... . . . . __----------~~~~ -, * * -- *** * ** ==ºs …→ * ...... --~~~~ ***-----, ... *- :-º-º-º-º The Italian Situation 137 it tends also to make *—ſ '? ... .ºg';* , her import her manu- as - ſhifi. y factured goods from |& gºiºieste abroad:-The northern Fº § iume Túðūntain regions will % Pols § enable her to develop tº †: § water power to take the TB 7 x Nr. place of coal in some degree; but this is a possibility of the future rather than a remedy for present problems. Sulphur and mercury are the only minerals >produced in large quan- §§ fities in Italy. Italy **...* o . . held the mercury mines as SICILY” “ ”, 38 of Idria (Fig. 138) from w-tº *Tºy; the armistice of No- F- W º vember 1918, and these, 8 º 12 |4 ||6 | finally allotted to her FIG. 72. Average annual emigration of Italy's population for by treaty with J ugo- the years 1902–1906. Figures, represent losses per hundred © gº thousand. Below the lines A-A’ and B-B' the emigrants go Slavia, place her in the chiefly to the United States and South America. Elsewhere first position in the ... ...". . world in the production land. From Guido Assereto, L'Italia e le sue colonie, 1912, f O f h Pls. 30–31. For the final boundary between Italy and Jugo- OI mercury. the Slavia as determined by the treaty of Rapallo, see Figure 138. world’s total of 4000 & tons of mercury, Italy produced during 1919 nearly 1700 tons. The sul- phur of Italy comes chiefly from the volcanic region of Sicily and con- Kºstitutes 47 per cent of the world's total production. But it is a minor mineral, and its total value is not sufficient to make it the basis of such great industries as arise IñThe iron and coal fields of the world. At best, Italy is a poor country industrially. The need for developing industries is the more serious for Italy strikes and at the present time because she has not the ready means, found in hºnº- - - © ſº e bilization England and France, for absorbing her unemployed in factories of large and mills. Her people are poorer than before they entered the war, * and for a long time to come the channels of trade and development will be clogged because of the abnormal conditions, and especially because of the waste produced by the war. This is bound to lead to general internal disorder, which in turn increases the number and less than 500 ,, . 1000 2000 3000 4000 & 8000 Over 8000 & & N a :* 42 COHSICA º • | <> 42 ** 40 Mineral resourceS i88 The New World seriousness of her problems. The strikes prevalent during the late months of 1919 and throughout 1920 have disarranged the machinery for coal importation and reduced fuel production at home, thus making heavy inroads upon Italy's limited supply of valuable timber. In some cities revolutionary workmen have taken over factories without opposition from the military forces, to the still further disarrange- ment of industrial life. - General The government of the country is the result of struggles between 1 k f i sº e ſe e - ge * > .* determined ſº of the various arties Or factions. The mass of politics, the people have little voice in important decisions. For example, ... the labor-party of the cities, the so-called proletariat, denounced . D'Annunzio's adventure at Fiume and opposed the effort of the ruling class to make it fight for imperial ambitions. In a few cases, notably at Trieste, there was even a demand for a republic. > The greater number of the Italian people are farmers, who are on the whole without education and who take little interest in politics. (Figure 73 shows the distribution of illiteracy in Italy.) They are against communism; that is, they wish to keep the principle of pri- vate ownership. But in 1919 they did demand, and secure to some extent as a result of the fear of the government, the use of unculti- wated lands on the large estates, the latifundia. There appeared to be no choice for the government in this matter, for early in October 1919, agrarian disorders, especially in the south, grew in intensity and in scale, and at one time reached a point that threatened civil war. They were especially marked in Sicily, where, in the first two weeks, thirty persons were killed and a hundred wounded. Peasants went about in armed bands, taking forcible possession of uncultivated estates. The disorders began to decline at the end of a month, stopped in less than three months, and revived for a time in 1920. Italy finan- The per capita wealth of Italy is lower than that of Great Britain, sº France, or the United States. She had just finished the costly war War. with Turkey in 1912 when she had a new war to face. Only by im- porting coal, iron, and cotton in order to increase her i ial pro- 7 duction can she hope to pay her staggering war debt. At best it will be difficult for her to meet current expenses and the interest on her debts, to say nothing of paying the principal. Altogether praiseworthy have been her efforts at financial recon- struction thus far. By practicing economy and by taxing her people heavily to pay for current expenses, Italy has shown a disposition to mee tº a º If she continues in this course, her credit will be good, her money will rise in exchange value, her trade will w The Italian Situation 139 ! N |LLITERACY : [] II–25% \ 25–50% Ž 50-70% 0 20 40 60 80 100 M N N :::::::Florénée: COIlāl & sº - * * 42 42 < P. <> z 4. 9 Šáé 40 * • * “s Pal O 38 s—s. % º N Tūnis, S §§' . ||4. |6 |8 C. FIG. 73. Compare with Figure 72 to see how Italian illiteracy affects the character of the popu- lation of the United States. European neighbors of Italy get the largest number of emigrating literates, but character and literacy are not necessarily related. All territory outside the bound- aries of 1914 is cross-lined downward and to the right. Compiled from data given on sheet 15 of Mori, Nuovo atlante de geografia fisica, politica ed economica, Vol. I, 1918. increase. It will be a real test of Italian national character to come out of the present difficulties without throwing the country back into the state of disunion and poverty from which it rose only after so long and painful a struggle. - * Europe and the world need a strong Italy. The genius of her people, their industry and strength, should be developed, not im- paired. Relieved from the prolonged threat of invasion from the north, she can afford to reduce her army and navy to small size and Reduc- tion of 3IIºla- ments a boon to Italy 140 - The New World thus throw off one of the chief burdens of the past. The capital formerly spent in preparation for war will build dynamos, railways, ships, and factories, and will put her on the road to becoming a stronger commercial nation. - ITALIAN COLONIAL INTERESTs Figure 74 shows the distribution of Italian colonies. Their relative poverty and unimportance are noteworthy. Every step in the ^ direction of colonial expansion has been costly and disappointing. But Italian ambitions will not be satisfied until there are Italian colonies in the lands bordering the Mediterranean – in Adalia (Turkish) and in Africa (Berber and Arab). - Feeble and Italian efforts at expansion have been wholly artificial. Lacking ... , internal political cohesion, without colonial experience, having no efforts capital for the development of colonial enterprises, yet proud of her traditions and entertaining the hope of a revival of military powers and the ancient glories of Rome, Italy could take only feeble steps along the road by which Great Britain and France had passed to power. Assab on the western Red Sea coast was purchased in 1870, where- upon Italian colonial ambition declined until 1885, when it was suddenly revived. The port of Massowah (Fig. 74) was occupied. The vast and continuous stream of Italian emigration, due to heavy taxes and a hard life, was to be turned into colonial channels. Yet Ttaly had no large modern merchant marine, and was obliged to import coal |- and iron for the manufacture of raw materials from possible colonies. Colonial expansion took its most active form in East Africa. Italy prished into Abyssinia, and in IS89, by the treaty of Ucciali, claimed virtual suzerainty over the country. But Menelik repudiated the treaty, claiming that it read differently in the Abyssinian text, and in 1896 at the battle of Adowa a force of 12,000 Italians was almost annihilated by an army of 80,000 Abyssinians. Italy was forced to give up her idea of an Abyssinian protectorate, and in addition she had to pay a heavy indemnity. T-- ~~~~ - Only the Eritrea and. Somaliland regions remained, with their arid climate and poor soil. A poor late-comer in the colonial field, Italy had only the Crumbs that fell from the British and French tables. Yet the Italians have taken intelligent and energetic action with respect to the resources in their possession. They have built roads, traine native troops for police purposes, drilled artesian wells, built light- houses, established schools, encouraged immigration, and regulated the water supply. - The Italian Situation 141 —zº- ITALY'S COLONIAL GAINS [º]Regions in Africa and Asia Minor claimed by Italy, . Present boundaries of Italy's colonies & - sº II.Y - | "º "N. –––––Superseded boundaries. 3° (Ghadames - ãºs L IBYA * ;" º ighat.-- oMurzuk i oMedina. •y * º - 2* * * >< wº F. $93. SS Mecca. d iºnºsº; 3.jäää 20 |20:::::::::::::Tibeşti; ... .sº C º v2. %% RSAN IS, 'y OWº º Sanaa Maka sºº *% E K. : : ºf: :::: - \ © ºs. :*.*S-wº - QºYN . . " - * * * * * * - / Tº y UGANDA ºf: ğleyville A ºff; % § o, f º%2 Kenya. V. D # -ážozza Colóny % º } % N. • G % FIG. 74. Italian colonies. To Italy were assigned the islands of Rhodes and of Castelorizzo near the mainland of Anatolia. (See Figure 158.) Additions of territory, at British expense, were made west of Egypt and in the eastern part of Kenya Colony, and the French agreed to a rectification of the Libyan boundary. Based on L'Afrique Française, January 1920, p. 10; March 1920, p. 89; Mouvement Géographique, 15 August 1920, p. 438. Of far greater importance to Italy than her own dependencies are Italian “colonies” established under other flags. Wherever the Ital- ians have gone in large numbers—America, Argentina, Brazil—they X have formed settlements of great benefit to Italian trade. Italian merchants have established branch houses, Italian newspapers have kept up interest in the homeland, Italian banks have facilitated the flow of credits. Returning emigrants, with large aggregate funds, have enriched Italy's national treasury and promoted home indus- tries. It is in such colonies in large and rich commercial nations rather than in the poor national possessions in Africa that Italy - has reaped real commercial benefits. * -------> --------- * ****T" 142 The New World Libya (Tripoli) 9. In northern Africa, º; center in the province-of-Libya, which became a part of the Italian realm as a result of the Turkish- Italian war of 1911–1912. The Ber- Libya is the great region between western Egypt and Tunis. It . is inhabited by Mohammedan Berbers and Arabs, both of which Libya stocks are strongly mixed with negro blood, owing to the con- tinual flow of slaves northward from central Africa. Slaves are still kept, and, until the Italian occupation, were exported from those parts of northern Africa that were in the control of Turkey. In Libya the Berbers have been pushed back into the mountains by the Arab in- waders. In the large towns the Arabs are also mixed with Berbers, Jews, Egyptians, and natives of Algeria, Tunis, and European coun- tries. Mode of The Arabs came into Libya as a result of the Mohammedan con- ... quest of the country in the 7th century. In the 11th century there came a still stronger inflow of Arab robber tribes. Their conquest of the coastal region was complete; but they were never able to extend their control far inland. They live in tents, own flocks and herds, and raise dates and other tropical products in the oases scat- tered along the depressions or along the upland borders where a little water is available. The Berbers are almost altogether º: tivating the soil and living in permanent habitations. The oases o the coast are fertile and well-watered in Libya, and these draw to them, in the harvest season, many nomadic tribes of the desert. Division of The nomadic tribes of Libya have a patriarchal organization, and the lºº, property within the tribe is collective. Each family lives by itself into tribal © © territories in a group of fifteen or twenty tents, and a collection of families con- stitutes a tribe with particular ownership of oases and pasture land, be- yond which it cannot go. The boundaries are clearly marked and recognized in the oases, but rather badly marked in the pastures, and quarrels are frequent. Even the largest towns are not big cities in the American sense of the word. Tripoli has about 73,000 people, Ben- ghazi 35,000, and the others are much smaller. The war- TOne of the most interesting tribes of northern Africa are the Tua- º regs. They are warlike and engage chiefly in raiding caravans that * traverse the desert. While a few live in Libya, most of them live farther west in the French colonies of Tunis, Algeria, and Morocco. They are treacherous and revengeful, and they have been brought under control by the French only with extreme difficulty. The Senussi The Italian Situation t 143 (page 56) have some of their chief centers and strongholds in Libya, whence they wield great political and religious influence over Saharan tribes of Mohammedans, both near and remote. During the World War, the interior of Libya and some of the coast line was recaptured from Italy by Arabs, Turks, and Germans work- ing in coöperation. A final armistice with the Arab chiefs was not signed until 24 April 1919, when they agreed to recognize Italian Sovereignty over the country. During the last few years the value of the trade leaving Libyan ports has steadily declined. Goods worth more than $3,000,000 were exported from Benghazi, the second port of the country, in 1905. In 1908 the exports amounted to a little more than $1,500,000, and in 1913 they had fallen to less than $200,000. This decline in trade was caused by the unrest and brigandage which prevailed in the interior, and by the success of the British and French in deflect- ing the trade of the Lake Tchad region to Egyptian and Tunisian outlets. --> • * The interior of Libya does not seem capable of important develop- ment. In many places it is impossible to build railroads or construct roads, since in this portion of the Sahara the desert sand shifts to an Operations in Libya during thee World War Decline T. of Libyan trade unusual degree before the driving winds. Agriculture is possible only x in the oases, and irrigation elsewhere is out of the question. To these natural difficulties must be added the fact that Italy has assumed a privileged position with respect to her colony, and foreign merchants must pay double the customs duties and anchorage charges collected from Italian shipping. - * Under the Romans, Libya and Cyrenaica had a far larger popu- lation than they now contain. With the invasion of the Islamic Arab, the country was depopulated and large sections reverted to the desert. To control the population of 600,000 Berbers and Arabs, to reconcile the natives to European ideas and culture, to reëstablish the irrigation works, to destroy the locusts, – or at least to diminish their numbers, — and to carry out sanitary and educational measures, will be no easy task for Italy. The administration of Libyan peoples calls for adaptation to the spirit and needs and way of life of strange and hostile tribes. For years to come a considerable military force will be required merely to pacify the country. Moreover, the colony will not pay. It will not be possible to expand into adjoining fertile regions having a rich trade. Libya is a liability that will test Italy's interest in difficult colonial problems and her power of handling them. Difficulties confronting Italian officials in Libya 144 The New World Italian op- erations in Asia Minor The Albanian Venture Italian Interests in Asia Minor and Albania After her war with Turkey in 1912, Italy sought privileges on the Turkish mainland opposite her new-won archipelago of the Dodecanese. Italian bondholders of the Ottoman Public Debt obtained a concession from the Turkish government for a railway line to run from Adalia on the coast to the inland town of Buldur at the southeastern end of the Aidin railway. By this means Italy hoped to win the trade of a rich coastal lowland region and its tributary valleys, whence subtropi- cal products are exported, like rice, tobacco, opium, cotton, and fruit. More recent—advances of the Italians have emphasized their eager- ness to win a foothold in Asia Minor. They occupied the harbor of Marmara as a coaling station and landed troops at Adalia in April 1919, when all that had been agreed to by the Allies was that Italy should have a battalion in Turkey. They also sent battleships to Smyrna and landed 500 men at Scala Nuova. These operations of the Italians, taken independently of the other Allies, were a source of anxiety to the Greeks about Smyrna and to the French in Syria, and also caused grave unrest among the Mohammed- ans, who feared that even temporary occupation by the Italians would mean a loss of sovereignty or of important commercial advantages. The final result of Italian ambitions in Asia Minor is conditional possession of the island of Rhodes. At the time of signing the Turkish treaty (treaty of Sèvres, T920), Italy also agreed to relinquish the Dodecanese to Greece, except for Rhodes, which is to have a plebiscite in a few years. If the people of Rhodes vote for union with Greece, Italy will retire, provided Great Britain also retires from Cyprus — which Great Britain will probably never do. Equally disappointing to Italy has been her Albanian venture. Be- ginning with the occupation of large parts of Albania and claims to all of it as a protecting or mandatory power, she retired her troops to Valona, only to be driven out of this port by Albanian forces. On 3 August 1920 she signed an agreement with Albania by the terms of which she abandons Walona (much overestimated as the naval key to the Adri- atic), but retains the island of Saseno, which commands it, and the use of the bay of Walona when necessary for shelter or refitting. Italy also has the right to occupy and fortify the two points of land that inclose Valona on the north and south, and to have freedom of action if the integrity of Walona and Albania is threatened. She recognizes `, the independence and unity of Albania, and hopes in this way to neu- tralize anti-Italian influence in both northern and southern Albania. S CHAPTER SIX THE DEMOCRATIC DRIFT IN SPAIN THOUGH Spain neither gained nor lost territory as a result of the World War, her international relations have taken on new aspects by reason of her participation in the fulfillment of the treaties that closed the war. She is a member of the Council of the League of Nations, and her representatives sit on several important commissions. She also enjoys a new status in the Spanish Zone of northern Morocco. Her financial condition is so greatly improved as a result of her active trade as a neutral during the war that she has entered upon a new period of industrial development. The features of Spanish life that may counterbalance these favorable conditions are the social insta- bility of the people and the political instability of the state. In recent years there has been a rapid development of the radical, or socialist, movement in Spain, and the revival of a separatist tend- ency on the part of the provinces, a tendency which has manifested itself repeatedly in Spanish history, despite the unifying influence of the long struggle against the Moor. RADICALISM IN SPAIN The period of recent socialist activity corresponds roughly with the reign of Alfonso XIII, since his coming of age in 1902, though the impelling causes of unrest do not lie in the character of the king, who is popular, or in his influence in government, which has always been conciliatory and constructive. A few months before his coro- nation there were serious riots at Barcelona and Saragossa. In 1903 riots took place at Salamanca, Barcelona, and Madrid. Stimu- Social and political disorder lated by a crop failure and a famine in Andalusia, rioting occurred in southern Spain in 1905; disorders led to the proclamation of martial law in Catalonia; Seville, Granada, Oviedo, Bilbao, and Valencia were centers of serious disturbance. In 1908 martial law was pro- claimed in Barcelona, and the restoration of order was followed by the passage of laws that improved living conditions — at least to a modest degree — in the industrial regions. The more liberal policy of the government following these various disorders might have had a happy outcome had it not been for native troubles in Morocco, which required the increase of the Spanish mili- tary forces and the calling out of the reserves. In Catalonia there Causes of recent trouble 145 146 : The New World - _ - - - - - - - - - - - - -- º - - - - º º FIG. 75. General view of Toledo, a town of great historic interest as a center of Christian military organization in the reconquest of Spain from the Moors. were strikes and disorders as a protest against the government's policy in Morocco. These had their center at Barcelona, where in July 1909 a revolutionary mob, consisting among others of Spanish workmen and disorderly spirits from South America and eastern Europe, attacked the convents and churches and engaged in three days of street fighting. It was necessary to establish martial law through- out the whole of Spain on 28 July, and for two months the coun- try was kept in order only by military means. Ferrer, an anarchist and leader in the disorder, was tried by court martial and shot. On top of these difficulties came the news of the defeat of the Spanish forces in Morocco by the Rif tribesmen, who were subdued only after six months of hard fighting. Thereupon trouble broke out afresh. Constitutional guarantees had to be suspended in 1911, owing to a general strike on government-owned railways. In 1912 another strike was avoided only by putting the military in control of the train service. To the opposition elements the government has become the symbol of inefficiency. - That Spain should have continued its traditional form of government without a general revolution is a tribute to its democratic king, for the liberal agitation that started before the beginning of his reign has never ceased. While the loss of the last of her American and Asiatic colonies, in 1898, might have enabled her leaders to turn their atten- tion to domestic problems, the action of the radical elements in indus- The Democratic Drift in Spain 147 trial regions hastened the country into a series of bitter contests, the end of which is not yet in view. - In November 1919 a lockout was put into force at Barcelona by the employers, and the threat was made by the Spanish Employers' Association to extend the lockout to the whole of Spain if the gov- ernment did not treat more fairly the two parties to the quarrel — employers and employed. Each accused the other of political motives. By January 1920 terrorism and bitterness had greatly increased, and Internal disorgani- zation strike agitation had extended to Madrid, Walencia, Vigo, and other cities from Barcelona. Closely connected with these disturbances were the perils of the army juntos, which exist for political and illegal as well as for professional purposes. Growing in power, they may menace the security of the state in times of internal disorder. SEPARATIST TENDENCIES AND THEIR HISTORIC CAUSES The World War of 1914–1918 divided Spain. Many Spaniards are jealous of French cultural influence in Latin America and resent French pressure on Spain in Moroccan affairs. Gibraltar is re- membered against Great Britain. The liberal and many of the intel- lectual elements favored the Allies during the war; the conservative elements were in sympathy with Germany. Running like a thread through all the political turmoil and the disturbed social and financial conditions of Spain is the vexed ques- tion of the relations between church and state, which reached its cli- max in the attempt of the government to control the religious orders. It was during a period of general protest against the corruptions and privileges of the ecclesiastical bodies, and specifically in the year 1836, that religious congregations had been banished from Spain. But in 1851 the law of 1836 was so far altered as to permit the re- establishment of certain orders. From that time down to the present, the growth in the number and power of the orders has been rapid, and their political and social influence is formidable. Every attempt to tax or control them has been met by violent clerical agitation. Ex- empted from taxes, they have been enabled to engage in commercial projects and industrial work in such a way as to compete unfairly with lay rivals. - Troublesome as it already was, the problem presented a more seri- ous aspect with the change from a monarchist to a republican form of government in Portugal in 1910, when the religious congregations expelled from Portugal came to Spain. There were also ecclesiastical Rela- tionship between church and state 148 The New World Natural divisions of Spain Effect of the ex- pulsion of the Moors refugees from France that came to Spain at the time of the separa- tion of church and state in France (1905). In addition to the political factors, there are geographical conditions that make it difficult to maintain the territorial integrity of Spain. The Spanish peninsula is broken up into a number of natural regions separated by formidable barriers which, in the past, exercised a strong influence upon the local inhabitants, and later, upon their social and judicial systems as well as upon their political forms and solidarity. The great extent of the interior plateau, the broken character of its borders, and the ruggedness of the more prominent sierras, have made it more difficult to diminish those diversities of speech, political thought, and social character which for a long time kept the populations of Spain apart and which still threaten to turn the country back into the state of disunion that has repeatedly pre- vailed. From the earliest times down to the union of Castile and Aragon late in the 15th century, as well as in the period following, princely rivalries have disfigured the political life of Spain. The population of Spain numbers about 20,000,000, and the den- sity is a little more than 100 to the square mile. Considering its geo- graphical position and its natural resources, the country is very thinly populated as compared with the rest of Europe. The long succes- sion of military expeditions conducted against the Moors during their occupation of most of the Spanish peninsula greatly decreased the native population. On the other hand, the country never recovered the loss sustained by the expulsion of the Moors in 1609. It was a great blow to agriculture, for the Moorish peoples of the southern semi-arid region were masters in the reclamation of arid lands. They had built irrigation works and applied a system of cultivation far su- perior to that formerly in vogue. The Moors introduced sugar cane, cultivated cotton rather widely, and in general improved the breeds of live stock. Of less importance, but still a considerable factor, was the expulsion of the Jews late in the 15th century. The whole colonial period was marked by emigration and heavy loss of life in military expeditions and in the struggles of the pioneers in new and unhealthful conditions. It must be remembered that there was no such thing as a science of tropical medicine in the days of Spanish colonial expansion. The earlier history of Spain has some striking modern parallels. Spain made great progress during the period of the Roman occupation and possessed a certain unity, due to the general use of the Roman law and the organization and almost universal influence of the Christian church. When the Roman Empire fell apart with the onset of the The Democratic Drift in Spain 149 § Steppes •-- Irrigated areas — Boundary befween ! arid and humid regions ,--) (a---. ~~~ Qporto .* Orian 2. FIG. 76. The greater part of the plains and valley country of Spain is dry. The boundary between arid and humid regions is after Brunhes, La géographie humaine, 1917; the limits of the steppe regions are from E. Reyes Prósper, Las estepas de España y su vegetación, 1915. Each steppe district has a local name; e.g., the one about Saragossa is called Estepa ibérica, the one about Granada Estepa granadina. barbarian invasions, the accustomed routes of commerce were broken, and the invaded country dissolved into its component fragments. In its fragmented condition the peninsula was weak and subject to weakness foreign conquests; hence, when the Moslems came in 711, the country sºn fell an easy prey to their armies. The success of the Moslems lay opposition not in their political organization or military strength, but in the *: social and regional disorganization of the people of Spain. The north- ward progress of the Moors was almost unobstructed. In 718 they crossed the Pyrenees and invaded the country of the Franks, only to meet with defeat at the hands of Charles Martel at the battle of Tours in 732. Monasteries and cities, landowners and local rulers, paid tribute to the invader. Some of the people even accepted the Mohammedan religion. The invaders had come from the desert. They were the last western 1 The New World Reconquest of the land features that still have Moorish names. T0 º ſ sº-º-º-º: § ---s º, “w oBur: Ç º ºº k CŞal *ś A 4. tº - tº-º i- * .. * ſix-ºffs * º 3ºss ºº:: § §: 1168 e $ e §/ * . %-ºº ºf sº º * ...(ſ... . . . ;-&--S.’ā º º e º * -- * -2 º §C. § • F **) • Arabic place %. * 100 50 0 | 00 M. nameS f S-2-º-º--N_j 10 FIG. 77. The numbers represent the dates on which Spain and Portugal were reconquered from the Moors by Chris- tian forces, in each case up to the limit shown by the broken line on which the date stands. It was only in 1492 that Granada, the last stronghold of the Moors, was retaken. The dots represent the locations of towns and geographical After Reclus, L’homme et la terre, Vol. III, p. 448; IV, p. 159. extension of the great Arab wave that swept from east of the Red Sea over northern Africa. Their Mohammedanism was hardly orthodox; their blood was ex- tremely mixed. The “Moors” were a sort of loose confederation of Arabs, Berbers, Syrians, and others, and they quarreled among them- selves. The Berber re- volted because he was assigned the barren cen- tral plateau. The vari- ous Arab tribes quar- reled as a result of rivalries and disunion at the heart of the Arab world. Only by main- taining a mercenary army of African negroes were the Moors able to keep their Spanish possessions. At that they were never able com- pletely to subjugate the peninsula; the Basques and other isolated groups in naturally strong positions on either side of the Pyrenees and in northwestern Spain maintained their independence throughout the long period of Moslem occupation. - We may summarize the greater part of the period of Moorish occu- pation by saying that it was thoroughly confused; and as order and organization developed in the Christian portions of Spain not occu- pied by the Moors, the long strife began which ended in the reconquest of the land. As military inefficiency and corruption increased among the Moors, the Christian kings advanced into the Moorish country with well-disciplined cavalry belonging to the great monastic military orders. Cordova was conquered in 1236, Seville in 1248, Valencia in 1237, and in 1340 at the battle of the Rio Salado the African in- waders suffered a critical defeat, after which they were only occa- sionally a dangerous factor in Spanish life. Their last stronghold, Granada, fell in 1492. From 1340 forward, Spanish history records a long and painful The Democratic Drift in Spain 151 process of unification. It was not until the early years of the 18th century that a really ardent spirit of nationalism was displayed. Except for a common religion and a common throne, there would hardly have been any progress at all. For patriotism in Spain is a local thing that reflects the geographical division of the country; a man says he is a Galician, an Asturian, a Castilian, an Andalusian; he rarely thinks of himself as a Spaniard. While Castilian is the literary language of Spain, the people of each great region have a distinctive speech. In Aragon the people speak a dialect of Cas- tilian; the people of Catalonia speak a dialect similar to that of south- ern France; the Basques have a distinct language of their own, and both Catalan and Castilian have several important dialects. Locally, Spaniard is separated from Spaniard by mountain barriers, by tradition, by language, by social customs, by grades of society. Cities were long arrayed against cities, and villages against villages. There was unequal distribution of the taxes; there were special privi- leges to this and that city or monastery, and the nobles were exempted from taxation. With the increase of landed possessions by the nobles and monasteries, a heavier burden of taxation was thrown upon the towns. These difficulties have their effect even in our own time. The present contest between church and state reaches back to the time - Brown Bros. Fig. 78. Granada, a stronghold of the Moors in Spain. After its capture in 1492 by Spanish troops the Moors were driven into Africa. The famous palace of the Alhambra stands on the height at the left. 152 The New World Decline of Spanish character and the loss of empire Spain. From Agostini, L'Europe ethnique et lin- of the Christianization of Spain. In Spain as in France and Italy, and almost every other European country, the ..] fortunes of the country are §4,..., strongly affected by the com- § plications of history. If soci- * * * *.*.*.*.*.* - sº e < * * * & sº a * * ***. § | ety is steadied by age-old cus- s toms, it is also thwarted at times by the power of histori- =l cal fact and precedent. Though it had its glorious days, Spanish colonial history wistique, 1: 10,000,000, 1917. is remarkable not only for the g & great extent of its field, but also for its rapid decline after reaching a brilliant climax. The last stage of the process came in 1898, when, as a result of the Spanish- American War, Spain lost to the United States all but a few of her Pacific possessions, which few she later sold to Germany (page 202). Her West Indian possessions also were lost, and nothing now remains to her in the way of colonies except Rio de Oro, Spanish Guinea, a few small islands in the Gulf of Guinea, and small portions of Mo- rocco — the northern and southern Spanish Zones (Fig. 80). The causes of Spanish colonial losses are many, and some of them are still embedded in the national life. Heavy emigration during the colonial period, the expulsion of Jews and Moors in the 15th and 16th centuries and also earlier, special exemptions from taxes, government interference in trade, a lack of industry among some classes, and an exceptional number of convents and monasteries, are among the chief causes. Government intervention in trade became a habit, and yet the government, until quite recent years, has never done anything constructive in modifying geographical conditions and increasing productivity. On the contrary, chiefly through the institution known as the Mesta, an organization of the pastoral interests, it long favored grazing at the expense of agriculture and forestry, and it did not adequately maintain the irrigation systems developed by the Moors in the south of Spain. Scale of miles 20 0 100 Q FIG. 79. The generalized language boundaries of PRESENT POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC SITUATION To break up along lines of race and local interest would be greatly to the disadvantage both of all Spain and of the smaller units, and one The Democratic Drift in Spain 153 of the problems of the day is to accomplish a change toward demo- & afarin bº. cratic rule and yet hold the country together so that the different parts - may have the benefit of º free exchange of prod- ucts in a fairly well- balanced state. The setting up of a number of independent states, with the resulting in- crease in boundary lines and the creation of boundary disputes, would complicate the social and commercial life of the Spanish pen- insula and weaken the Spanish people. . The outstanding problems of Spanish government relate to - tº e a gº tº FIG. 80. Spanish possessions in Africa. It has been arranged the governmental atti- with France that zone. A may be occupied by Spain at her tude toward the policy pleasure. The heavily shaded area north of zone A is the Southern Zone of Spanish Morocco; a similarly shaded zone of organized labor. The south of Gibraltar is the northern zone. From Stieler's Hand- labor element is cen- atlas and the Geographical Journal, June 1920. tered chiefly in three cities, – Barcelona, Bilbao, and Valencia. The demands of the labor party are for an autonomy so complete as practically to remove the laborers from the control of the non-indus- trial part of the population, but they would be clearly outnumbered at the present time by other political elements. The King of Spain is himself inclined toward larger and larger demo- cratic rights, together with an increase in the constitutional powers of the law-making body. But more than once in the past few years it has been a question whether he would ally himself with the working population closely enough to maintain his throne. During the World War, though he was surrounded by pro-German influences, his sym- pathy for the Allied cause was repeatedly proved. By maintaining a neutral position, Spain was able to increase her trade, and the resulting R1O DE ORO Separation of Spain into small states inad- visable Policy of or- ganized labor Attitude of the demo- cratic king 154 The New World The pro- French element Conflict with French interests Value of the Spanish Zone prosperity helped to stay the oft-impending revolution. It was freely predicted that a revolution would occur directly after the war, but the economic rearrangement of the life of the country was effected with sufficient skill to delay it still longer. In view of the strong opposition of the conservative Spanish ele- ments — the nobles, the landed proprietors, and the capitalists — it is doubtful if evolution of government can come about by orderly processes. Their philosophy is frankly that of the privileged caste. Perhaps the chief hope of the present lies in the coöperative asso- ciations, or Catholic Syndicates, first organized in 1918. They serve as employment bureaus, provide a workman's bank, care for the sick, and exert themselves to prevent oppression; in return the work- man promises not to strike, and the employer agrees to the arbitration of labor difficulties. So rapidly has the movement grown that there are 600,000 workers enrolled in more than 4000 local syndicates. An important political influence is exerted by a group of pro- French Spaniards, which is anti-monarchical as well as anti-cleri- cal. It is a large and influential element, located chiefly in the in- dustrial towns and capable of effective organization. Opposed to it are the aristocratic class, the church, and the peasantry. The line of separation between the two groups became sharper when the French government seized the church properties in France and ex- pelled large numbers of priests and nuns, who took refuge in Spain (page 147). Opposition on this score cannot fail to diminish with the recent establishment of better relations between the French govern- ment and the Vatican (page 81). Spain continues to be suspicious of French expansion, in spite of the treaty of 1904, mutually recognizing Spanish and French rights in Morocco. In 1911 the two countries were close to a military clash. In 1912 their differences were harmonized by an agreement extend- ing Spanish territory and giving to Tangier, with a district of nearly 150 square miles about it, an international status. Spain was to have 40 per cent and France 60 per cent of the stock of a railway to be constructed between Tangier and Fez. Small as it is, the Spanish Zone of northern Morocco is a great drain upon Spanish resources. To keep the people of the region in order requires an army of occupation of 80,000 men, and the expense involved is not offset by products of equivalent value to Spain. The sole commercial advantage appears to be related to a railway tunnel which it is proposed to build under the Straits of Gibraltar as part of a line to extend southwestward to the coast of Africa at Rio del Oro, The Democratic Drift in Spain -- 155 T 4. 31- ăltar - --- Øzazz --~~~~ ſ: Melilla. % *NZafarin is FIG. 81. The northern Spanish Zone in Morocco. The spelling oi “Zafarin Islands’’ follows the United States Hydrographic Office charts; on some maps the name is spelled “Chafa- rinas.” After map in the Geographical Journal, May 1920. where Spain holds additional African territory (Fig. 80). From that point and from Dakar in French West Africa there would be short steamer connection with South American ports. The project is one that could succeed only after agreement with France. At the present time the rivalry between Spain and the United America States is limited almost entirely to the field of Latin American trade. ** Spain perhaps desires nothing else so much as to maintain commercial and spiritual bonds between Spanish America and herself. But her path in this direction is beset with many difficulties. In Mexico, for example, Spaniards are almost as much disliked as Americans. Spain depends upon the United States for cotton and in part for her coal, petroleum, lumber, and wheat, and this dependence has tended to keep alive commercial relations, which were developing rapidly between the countries just before the World War. Between 1912 and 1917 the general trade of Spain had increased but 25 per cent in value, while imports from the United States had increased 400 per cent. - As a neutral, Spain made large profits on war supplies. Gold flowed Present into the country in a steady stream. The output of coal of all ” grades increased from 4,400,000 long tons in 1914 to 7,200,000 in 1918. Water-power resources are being developed. The electrification of some of the railways has been begun. In spite of internal difficulties, the economic situation of the country is better than at any time since 1898. CHAPTER SEVEN Anti- monarch- Leader- ship with- out public opinion IPORTUGAL’S COLONIAL POLICIES PORTUGAL was in the midst of a period of national and colonial recon- struction when the war came in 1914 to add to her already complex problems. There had been grave dissatisfaction with the govern- ment, nominally a constitutional monarchy, but in reality a reac- tionary oligarchy headed by the king. In 1903 an insurrection of peasants took place at Fundāo, and in the same year there were riots at Coimbra and a strike of weavers at Oporto. In 1908 King Carlos and the Crown Prince were assassinated and Prince Manoel succeeded to the throne, only to flee to England for safety in 1910. The corruption of the public service and the poverty of the over- taxed peasant and artisan classes had at last ended in revolution. For many years the country had also suffered the difficulties of ad- ministering large and remote colonial possessions, which were so inefficiently managed as to require heavy annual subsidies for their maintenance. Portuguese administrators were weak; for the most part the colonies had an unhealthful climate; there was no capital for colonial development. The political and economic situation of Portugal was bad from every standpoint when the republic was pro- claimed in 1910. THE PROBLEMS OF THE NEW DEMOCRACY Among the new policies of Portugal as framed by the present leaders, there are two items of special importance: (1) the separation of church and state, and (2) a larger degree of autonomy for the provinces and colonies of Portugal. But the country is far from unity in the matter of general policy, being broken up into nearly a dozen political parties, all struggling for the success of special and, on the whole, narrow programs of political and economic reconstruc- tion. The leaders of the political parties and their principal followers have very little in common with the mass of the people. Each party includes only a small minority of the electorate. With a popula- tion of 6,000,000, of whom 67 per cent live in the country, the ques- tions of taxes and wages, of the price of crops and the improvement of transportation lines, appear to the people to be of far more im- portance than the political programs. The gulf between people and leaders is a matter of more importance by reason of a degree of illiteracy higher than anywhere else in western Europe. According 156 Portugal's Colonial Policies 157 to the census of 1911, the figures are 81 per cent for the women and 67 per cent for the men. - It has been said that Portugal's chief export is peasants. Emi- gration became a serious factor between 1890 and 1900, and even today adds 60,000 Portuguese annually to the population of Brazil. There is no money for the development of the land, and Portugal is chiefly agricultural. Capital cannot be made available for industries, of which the country has long felt the need and which would absorb the natural increase of population. º Only a third of the land of Portugal is cultivated, since much of it on the east, along the common boundary with Spain, is too rugged for extensive cultivation, and elsewhere there are high moorlands too cold for agriculture and, in the south, regions too dry without irri- gation. In all, 28 per cent is forest and 27 per cent pasture. It was natural that Portugal should join with the western Allies in the World War, for she is traditionally friendly with England and she is dependent to a large degree upon imported coal and wheat and upon her relatively extensive fisheries. She was not placed, like Switzerland and Holland, where a lucrative trade with Germany could be carried on. Nor did she care to lose her colonies, which in the future may have more value to her than in the past, consider- ing their supply of the raw materials needed by the industrial populations of the world. The pressure of Germany on the Afri- can colonies of Portugal had become embarrassing before the war, and it was feared that Germany was only waiting her time to absorb Portuguese East Africa. Indeed, Germany had already absorbed the so-called Kionga triangle (Fig. 263), about 400 square miles, south of the estuary of the Rovuma River. This danger is now removed; the Kionga triangle is restored to Portugal, and her ownership of her African colonies has been confirmed by the active part which she took in the fighting in Southwest Africa and in East Africa and by the help which she gave elsewhere through her army and fleet. THE EXPANSION OF PORTUGAL There is thus brought to an end the long decline in the extent of the Portuguese overseas territories, which, at the beginning of the 19th century, formed a larger colonial empire than that held by any other European power except Great Britain and Spain. These are now her possessions: º Portu- guese emi- gration a grave problem Portu- gal's do- mestic needs Portugal’s interests in the War Extent of colonial possessions 158 - The New World Historical view of Portuguese colonial policy Close his- torical and commercial relations with Brazil In Africa In India In Melanesia Cape Verde Islands Goa Eastern Timor, with St. Thomas (São Thomé) and Daman tributary island Princes (Principe) Islands (Damão) and district Portuguese Guinea Diu - Angola (Portuguese West Africa) º Mozambique (Portuguese East In China Africa) Macao The earlier history of Portuguese colonization illuminates the whole modern period of Portuguese colonial development. The Portuguese were the leaders in pioneering the sea road along the western coast of Africa, even before the discovery of America. By twice defeat- ing the Mohammedan fleets, Portugal confirmed her hold upon the trade of India, which she had developed after Vasco da Gama com- pleted his voyage to India in 1498. She had broken the old route between Europe and India by way of the Persian Gulf and greatly ob- structed the commerce of the Red Sea, and she stood at the Atlantic gateway of the Mediterranean. With Spain she had divided the New World by the treaty of Tordesillas (1494) and subsequent agree- ments, receiving the lands east of a north-south line 370 leagues west of the Cape Verde Islands; she thus acquired Brazil and confirmed her right to her possessions in Africa and India, including Ceylon and Persia. In 1500 King Emanuel assumed the title, two years later confirmed by the Pope, of “Lord of the Conquest, Navigation, and Commerce of India, Ethiopia, Arabia, and Persia.” - Relations with Brazil The relations of the Portuguese to their settlements in Brazil are of more importance today than the colonial possessions of Portugal in Africa, for here we have real intimacy between a new country of 25,- 000,000 inhabitants and the home country with 6,000,000 inhabitants. Not only in the late colonial period but in all the years that have followed, down to the present, there has been in general heavy emi- gration from Portugal to Brazil. Moreover, there is in Brazil a sympathy for Portugal that has important commercial consequences. The colony of Brazil was not only the most important one that Portugal possessed; it was also the best founded of the Hispanic colonies, owing to the fact that agricultural products of a tropical variety, chiefly sugar, were the early economic basis of the colony, and not gold and silver, as in the case of the Spanish possessions. It was an accident that led to the Portuguese discovery of Brazil in 1500. Cabral, a Portuguese navigator, in laying his course for Portugal’s Colonial Policies 159. southern Africa and India, took advantage of the trade winds to go well to the westward, and thus came upon the Brazilian coast. Settle- ment was desultory and development neglected at first, and at one time Brazil was even thought worth so little that it might be aban- doned. The colony was held in light esteem because the tide of de- velopment set toward India during the period of the discovery and early settlement of Brazil. It was only after India had been lost to the Portuguese that they turned their attention to the development of Brazil. For three hundred years the efforts of the colonists were confined almost exclusively to sugar growing. Interest in the colony increased very rapidly after the discovery of gold in Minas Geraes during the early years of the 18th century and of diamonds in 1730. The im- mediate effect on agriculture was bad, because men were drawn away from the plantations and their interest in agriculture was diminished. The ultimate effect was to broaden their outlook and open up the inte- rior. The colony also gained great impetus in Napoleon's time, when the Portuguese crown was transferred to Brazil. Rio de Janeiro be- came the real capital of the Portuguese Empire, and the royal family arrived there in 1808. But in 1822 the Brazilian democratic leaders proclaimed the independence of the country, recognized by the mother country in 1825. Thereafter Brazil had an imperial form of government until the revolution of 1889 and the proclamation of a republic. te But so closely connected were the peoples of Brazil and Portugal, and their differences of opinion had so much the character of a limited family quarrel, that there has been no real interruption of relations, either social or commercial. In fact, the relations would be far more close today if it were not for the fact that Portugal is economically weak and small, and cannot assist Brazil in the development of its resources. Such development has come from Great Britain, France, Germany, and the United States, all of which have made great de- mands upon Brazil's tropical and subtropical products in their in- dustries. The result has been to diminish the effective participation of Portugal in the economic development of Brazil. The African Colonies In eastern Africa, Portugal found it necessary to overcome the Arabs, who by the 10th century had occupied the seacoast as far south as Sofala. After the conquest of the Arabs, Portugal had developed a trade between eastern Africa and Arabia, the Persian Gulf, and Early his– tory of Portuguese settlement in Brazil Later history Limitation of Portu- guese com- mercial influence Portugal in East Africa 160 The New World Portuguese control of Indian outposts Loss of Portuguese . colonies India. Like the Portuguese Sº who came after them, the Arabs occupied the coastland rather than inland points. By 1510 the Portuguese were mas- ters of all that portion of the eastern African coast formerly held by the Arab sultans. The contest between the Portuguese and the Arabs in eastern Africa but continued 0 the struggle that had lasted so WTW long in the Iberian peninsula *IºTº” and in Africa against the in- 20 MJ Ö ºf T.I.' fidel Mohammedans. The his— FIG. 82. Portuguese navigators were the first to ex- e e plore the west coast of Africa and to conquer the toriC city of Goa, à Portuguese Arabs of the east coast, particularly at Zanzibar. settlement in India, stood Op- They were also the first to plant European settle- ments in distant India, where they still have Goa, posed to Aden, which WaS IIl Diu, and Damão. Brazil was lost in 1822. Colonial © tº- administration was so inefficient as late as 1914, Arab possession. In the COIl that Portugal was in danger of losing even Angº, test between these two central and Mozambique. Reforms are now in progress. pos ts of rival reli gions and political faiths we have a repetition in Albuquerque's time (the first part of the 16th century) of the early struggles of Portugal and Spain against the Mohammedans in the west. By establishing themselves in India the Portuguese made rich trade connections with farther India, China, and the Orient generally. With the decline of Portuguese power at home and abroad, the Arabs won back, in the early years of the 18th century, all their African possessions north of Cape Delgado, and the Dutch, French, and British invaded Portuguese territory in the south. Between 1737 and 1740 Portuguese commerce was practically swept from the sea by Arab parties and rival European powers. A state of warfare among the inland tribes prevented effective Portuguese administration in the region lying behind the coastal strip; and with the explorations of Livingstone in the Zambesi basin (1850–1865) the British were led to establish settlements in the interior at the southern end of Lake Nyasa and in the Shiré highlands. Thereupon the pressure became continuously greater, and when the scramble for Africa was over Portugal held only a part of her former domain. On the west coast of Africa, however, Portuguese Angola was held with little serious rivalry from neighboring colonial powers. For Portugal’s Colonial Policies 161 one thing, the Portuguese were the first claimants, having discovered and explored the coastal region from 1482 to 1485. The natives were in part reduced to submission (a process that ended only in 1907); Loanda was founded in 1576, Benguela in 1617. Prosperity was de- pendent upon the slave trade with Brazil. The frontiers were vague and brought boundary disputes with Great Britain, France, and Ger- many, until the period from 1885 to 1905, when successive agree- ments, treaties, and arbitral awards fixed the boundaries as shown in Figure 82. THE COLONIAL POLICY OF PORTUGAL Devoted to the maintenance of a powerful navy and an active commerce, Portugal's colonial activity was always governed by the principle that the seacoast, should be held, rather than large ter- ritories that would require the sending of troops inland. Thus throughout the 16th century her settlements were confined to the coasts of Asia, Africa, and America, and the policy followed has had its effect down to the present time. There was no real develop- ment of the native and of the resources of the land. - Contributing to the loss of the colonial possessions was the weak- ness of the whole Portuguese economic system. The merchants and bankers of Portugal sought to increase the amount of gold in the country rather than to increase the industrial output. This line of economic theory led to a decline of agriculture and the increased importation of raw materials which might have been produced at home, at least in part. Portugal soon became, commercially, a mere appanage of England. - The home industries of Portugal have not grown at the same rate as those of other western European countries. Hence the colonies have been of less value to the people of Portugal itself than to other powers, particularly Germany, which had a large commercial fleet and well-established industries. Portuguese East Africa, for example, with its population of more than 3,000,000 and with the ports of , Lourenzo Marquez, Mozambique, and Beira, has great capacities for the production and export of sugar cane, rice, coffee, rubber, and to- bacco, as well as cotton and coconuts, and a part of it is high enough to produce wheat and cattle. There are also large deposits of coal and some of copper. The trade of the colony was artificially stimu- lated in 1909, when Portugal signed an agreement with the Transvaal government which gave Delagoa Bay more than half the import trade of the Transvaal; in return the Transvaal obtained the privi- Seacoast possessions Decline of colonial power Portuguese East Africa, or Mozam- bique 162 The New World Economic importance of Angola The two principal colonial. problems German penetra- tion in Portuguese East Africa lege of recruiting natives in Portuguese East Africa to work in the Rand mines. - Under the Portuguese the West African colony, Angola (Fig. 82), has developed hardly at all. It is of small present importance, yet it may ultimately develop into a rich and powerful colony. Its popu- lation is estimated at 2,000,000 and its area (485,000 square miles) is as great as that of Texas, California, and Washington combined. The coastal belt is in general dry; but with increasing altitude at the inner edge of the coastal plain, from thirty to a hundred miles from the sea, there is heavier rainfall and abundant vegetation. Then follows a relatively unproductive plateau with scattered vegetation and a more moderate water supply; this merges eastward into the forested basins of the Congo and the Zambesi, while in the south it runs into a barren sandy desert. The coastal region is rich in oil palms, and at the extreme north are dense forests of economic value. Some rubber is gathered from the wild rubber plants. Sugar, cotton, coffee, and tobacco, together with rubber, palm oil, cattle, hides, ivory, and gum, are the chief exports. The two most important commercial towns are Loanda and Cabinda, the latter the outlet for an enclave of Portuguese territory, surrounded by the French and the Belgian Congo. While the colonies have required a subsidy, on the other hand there have been commercial compensations. By tariff and trade regulations much of the colonial produce was brought to Portugal, chiefly to Lisbon, and there reëxported. Two serious political and commercial difficulties were constantly feared: - (1) As the colonies wished to trade wherever they chose, and since Great Britain and Germany were the two powers by whom the products were carried, there was fear that the colonies might be taken over by one or the other of these two powers if they were to trade freely with them. (2) If the colonies were given self-government, foreign capital would increasingly divert the colonial products and Lisbon would lose a large part of its trade. ---, These dangers were the more real because the value of raw ma- terials, such as the rubber, copra, cotton, and hides of the Portuguese African possessions, was increasing constantly with the rapid increase in the trade and industry of the world. Neglected for a time, Portu- guese possessions have become an object of envy to stronger powers. Germany bought more Portuguese colonial produce than any other power, particularly cacao, coffee, and rubber (from São Thomé and Principe chiefly). And Germany still needs these things more than i --- - - - º -º-º: º-º-º-º: º: sº º - - - - º FIG. 83. Cabinda, a Portuguese port and district on the west coast of Africa, north of the mouth of the Congo. 164 The New World Colonial self-gov- ernment any other power, and now has no colonies of her own on which to depend for a supply. German financial influence in Lisbon is likely to continue. The government of the republic has made “colonial self-govern- ment” a part of its program. This it had to do, for a revolutionary spirit was active in the colonies, especially in Angola; the colonists felt that their backward condition was due to political and economic dependence upon the home country. In 1912 each colony was given a separate budget and a separate subsidy, where a subsidy was neces- Sary. By a decree dated 10 May 1919, Portugal granted extensive auton- omy to her colonies and promised administrative reform in continua- tion of her earlier declaration of 1914. State aid was promised to settlers, and expert agricultural and geological investigations were to be encouraged. These promises of reform and development were probably made to offset the desire of other states to benefit by Portuguese misgovernment. The Union of South Africa wishes to acquire Portuguese East Africa, or at least Lourenzo Marquez, and Belgium would like to secure northern Angola in order to lengthen the coast line of the Belgian Congo. Universal discontent in the colonies plays into the hands of outside powers. Certainly improvements in colonial management are much needed. The colonies could furnish food needed by Portugal if transport by sea and land were available. About 30,000 natives annually leave Mozambique to work in the Transvaal gold fields. In 1916 the government deficit of Angola alone was $30,000,000. & More intensive agricultural cultivation of a modern type, the build- ing up of home industries to absorb colonial products, the stabilization of her political processes,'— these are vital needs for Portugal. By successfully meeting them she can keep her colonies and can become a powerful country again; if she loses her colonies, she will continue to rank as a declining power. CHAPTER EIGHT THE SCANDINAVIAN COUNTRIES AND HOLLAND ONE of the most striking conditions of the World War was the per- sistent neutrality of four northern European states,—Holland and the three Scandinavian countries, Norway, Sweden, and Denmark. Each of them provided Germany with large quantities of foodstuffs and raw materials needed for the conduct of the war; yet each of them suffered the loss of lives and ships by German submarines, against whose use they frequently protested. However, because of their small size they felt unable to do more than protest. The Scandinavian coun- tries carried their dependence upon each other to the significant point of making an agreement during the war to take no part on either side unless the three of them unanimously approved such action in ad- Vallce. In the future we shall find these four states playing an important part in international agreements affecting the North Sea and, more The neu- trality of Scandinavia A possible Baltic Confedera- particularly, the Baltic. A possible Baltic Confederation would be of tion interest to all of them. For hundreds of years one nation after an- other owning a part of the Baltic coast has sought a dominating posi- tion on that sea. Four hundred years ago Denmark was the leading Baltic power. Later Sweden won preeminence, only to lose it to Russia. With the rise of her naval power in recent years, Germany held a superior position. The natural currents of trade in the Baltic basin require coöperation of the Baltic powers. Russia exports chiefly to Germany; Sweden exports to Russia and Germany; Den- mark is a way station on the sea road eastward; Finland, like Nor- way, will have a large trade with England, but of more importance to her will be her trade with Esthonia, Sweden, and Germany. On 9 June 1920 there was held at Copenhagen a “Baltic and White Sea Conference” in which eleven nations participated. Germany was invited to the conference, and Russia was represented by non- Bolshevist agents. America was not represented at all. The confer- ence took up questions of working hours, equality of trade in the Baltic and North Sea shipping, and the matter of rebates. The virility of the Scandinavians is well known. Their men and women are physically strong and healthy. The northern climate, a high level of success in overcoming the natural difficulties of their environment, excellent maritime traditions — these have bred a whole- some race that has left its mark in history. Norwegian kings once ruled the northern Scottish islands. The Danes once held nearly Scandi- navian tra- ditions of power 165 166 * The New World - § - Tº |5 | N H A B | TANTS per sq. mile per sq km 0 – 13 ſºl 0 – 5 — 13–50 É 5–20 ſº 50– 128 20–50 /# gº over 128 over 50ſ” Złº Glacial zone 2 sº ::: CZ Chief fishing-i º grounds es”-ess *e. g ... " " . .” - a . * * * * * * * **** * * * * * * * * * * .... e • * * * **** #. .. iel,” . sº ~ D * Scale of miles ckaſſ |Hamburg ºff anzlg"29, -ºº-e [0 agº FIG. 84. The population of the Scandinavian peninsula is largely limited to a seacoast belt, except in the southern portion. The capital city of each of the three Scandinavian countries and of Finland is a salt-water port. Danzig will become Poland's maritime outlet. Riga is the capital of Latvia. Memel, between Danzig and Riga, may become Lithuania's sole port. Sea-borne trade is of interest to all, and Baltic agreements are likely to be made in the common interest. - The Scandinavian Countries and Holland 167 all of England and the lowlands of Tºº 35 Scotland. The English and the la º º s French prayer-books long con- 3º * tained an echo of those far times in sº 3. the petition, “From the fury of the sºvº s Northmen, good Lord, deliver us.” He ºr ... sº ..º. The extent of the realm of Gus- *_2: & 0 º tavus Adolphus, the greatest of the Scandinavian kings, is shown in Fig- gº *...... %;1658 \Memel 1629(635) ge tº 58 g C ure 85. The colonial enterprise of §§º #ºastas, e -----º-f º º Danziq'Uffº, Elbin the Danes led to the establishment | ºffº, ºy. & • . g sº 1848(1719)?" 1648(1815) * $60 6 $go ºgo of colonies in Greenland, Africa, ſº p * - N Tº", the Far OeS, and the West Indies. FIG. 85. The Swedish state at the time of its It was only in 1917, by selling the greatest * The first date in each case tº º o represents the year in which the district was Virgin Islands to the United States, won; the date in parenthesis, the year in which it was lost. After Putzger, Historische Schwl- that the Danes gave up the last of , tlas, 1906, Pl. 25. iº * their possessions in the West Indies. THE SCANDINAVIAN PENINSULA If we turn to the commercial power of Scandinavia, we shall find some noteworthy facts. In proportion to her population, Sweden has a greater railway mileage than any other country in Europe. Nor- way possessed more than 4 per cent of the world's shipping in 1914, though her population numbered only 2,600,000, or less than 0.2 per cent of the world's total. Norwegian sailors are known the world over. Norway has forests of great extent, and fisheries upon which millions outside her own frontiers depend for sea-food. Sweden has a vast supply of timber (Fig. 87), and the development of her iron mines in recent years has made her one of the great iron-exporting countries of Europe. Though both countries extend far to the north, it is in the southern section that their chief populations dwell (Fig. 84). The main topographic axis of the Scandinavian peninsula lies close to the western side. Between the cold, rocky highlands and the sea is a very narrow fringe of country where more than 80 per cent of the people of Norway live (Fig. 84). Norway has but 4400 square miles of territory under cultivation. Rivers and lakes cover 4 per cent of the total area, as compared with an average of 0.5 per cent for Eu- rope. Three fourths of the land is unproductive, and a fifth is forest- covered. Essentially a maritime nation, Norway has from the first been dependent upon open sea routes. On the other hand, Sweden dwells on the eastern or long back slope Commercial impor- tance of Scandinavia Geo- graphical position of Scandinavia and its effects 168 The New World Scale miles too 60 O *—ºr-E-rº-EEE=E=ºes 100, POWER SCALE H. P. Area under forest @ Imuse (1912) within each district, on the same scale as the ê In reserve map. •r afiron deposits ~...~ District (län) boun- dary. FIG. 86. Water power and iron ore. The FIG. 87. Lying near highly industrial and iron ore of northern Sweden, in the famous larger nations in need of raw material, Gellivare district, has opened up a remote Sweden finds her forests a powerful asset. and thinly populated region. Coal is lacking, IFrom Sweden: Historical and Statistical Hand- except in Small quantities, and water-power book, 2d ed., 1914, Vol. II: forests, p. 169; development is therefore well advanced. iron, p. 243; water power, p. 325. º of the Scandinavian peninsula, and has a greater extent of fertile land. Norway and Sweden are also different as to climate. East- ern Sweden has the dry continental type of climate, while western Norway has the mild and moist climate of England. The Scandinavian Countries and Holland 169 In 1814 Norway was taken from Denmark, to which it had been joined since 1397, and given to Sweden as compensation for the latter's services in joining the European powers against Napoleon, with whom Denmark had become allied. The union of Sweden and Norway lasted until 1905, when a dispute arose over Norway's right to main- tain her own consular service. The union was then dissolved without resort to arms, in spite of the high feeling aroused. These historic estrangements are of far less present importance to the people concerned than are the common benefits which they have enjoyed by standing together during the past few years. Like the rest of the world, the Scandinavian countries have undergone a marked change in their political attitude since 1914; the old problems seem Small and remote, and new problems are pressing upon them from every side. e PRESENT PROBLEMS Norway is now less concerned over her relations with Sweden than with practical international guarantees for the freedom of shipping. Sweden no longer fears conquest by an imperial Russia, but she still has the vexed question of the future form and conditions of a new Russian government. Denmark long lived in fear of German en- Croachment, and would now welcome an international order in which guarantees would be given for existing boundaries and for equality of trade privileges. Only Holland stands on an independent basis. She is as watchful of the British as of the Germans; she will take no dic- tation from either, nor will she yield to Belgium on the question of the Scheldt or of Dutch Limburg (page 123). MARITIME INTERESTS OF NORWAY During the World War, Norway lost nearly 2000 sailors; she lost also torpedoed ships to the number of more than 800, with a capacity exceeding 1,000,000 tons. The commercial life of the country was deranged. Norway dropped from fourth to sixth place in mercantile tonnage, being replaced by Japan. Opposite Norway, across the North Sea, is another maritime nation, Great Britain. Their interests are common in many respects. Norway, though neutral in the war period, was friendly to the British, for she has everything to gain by that extension of the power of Anglo-Saxon navies which is implied in the League of Nations cove- nant. She has joined the League of Nations. Under the League, the freedom of the seas is guaranteed by the large nations, and the over- Separation of Sweden and Norway Vital im- portance to Norway of freedom of the seas 170. The New World - - - Fig. 88. Adde and the Sufjord on the Norwegian coast. Note the presence of flat land in the foreground (head of fjord) and the absence of it along the foot of the fjord wall in the distance. seas commerce of the small trading nations, like Greece, Norway, and Holland, may be expected to grow rapidly as soon as the world has become more orderly, when industry is revived and capital is made available for the purchase or building of ships. - Since the trade of Norway will be chiefly between ports in foreign lands rather than between Norway and the world, security for goods and ships is Norway's principal need. She is not a manufacturing nation, except in a very limited way, and she has no vital need for colonies. She is satisfied if shipping is free to all flags. In the security and ownership of fishing stations near home, how- ever, Norway is much interested. Hence she pressed her claim to Spits- bergen, a group of islands in the Arctic Sea north of the Scandinavian The Scandinavian Countries and Holland 171 own Bros. Fro. 89, Buga, one of the oldest towns in Norway. Note the crowding of houses on the narrow fringe of flat land near the coast. peninsula, in which claim her interest is heightened by the rich coal seams that outcrop on the main island, Norway herself having to im- port all her coal from overseas, chiefly from England. Ever since 1261 Norway has periodically asserted her claims to Spitsbergen, as in 1608, when the British began whaling off the islands, in 1666, when France did likewise, and in 1679, Sweden. The archipelago has been explored chiefly by Norwegian navigators. The Norwegians already have wireless and meteorological stations at Green Harbor and a meteorological station on Bear Island. They have established fur stations; they have maintained regular navigation between Spitsbergen and Norway (since 1911); and they own the two largest of the four coal companies in the islands, with a production in 172 . --. The New World Guarantees secured from Norway ; 1918 of more than 50,000 | tons. Norway has other- | wise no fuel except wood and no native source of power save the “white coal” of her waterfalls. $ º §. In recent years there : /, Séa §§ have also been developed Jan Myf º § in Spitsbergen a whale- oil industry and general fisheries of importance. Though far north, – & halfway between Nor- way and the North Pole, — the islands benefit § by the warm Atlantic waters that drift right § up to the Arctic Ocean, past the northern end of Norway, and create open FIG. 90. Spitsbergen in relation to Norway. The group is º now under Norwegian Sovereignty, after an indefinite status Winter ports €V€In aS far and the expression of political or economic interest by both east, as the Murman Great Britain and Russia. coast of Russia (Fig. 90). In order to put an end to the status of non-ownership, the Allied and Associated Powers have put Spitsbergen under the Norwegian flag, but Norway does not receive the islands in unlimited sovereignty. The Allied and Associated Powers have laid down certain specific guarantees. These affect only nations having actual vested in- terests in Spitsbergen at the present time, and direct the manner in which new commercial interests may be acquired. There is to be no naval base in the islands, and no use of Spitsbergen in time of war. The Danish government is to represent Russia's interests in the islands until that country gets on its feet again. The ships of all signatories to the Spitsbergen treaty are to enjoy fishing and hunting privileges in territorial waters. All ships are to be enabled to touch at some point in Norway on the way to or from Spitsbergen. Wireless stations are to be at the service of all, and an international meteorological station may be established. A Danish commissioner will examine all claims now outstanding, and final settlement is to be made by a 1 By Spitsbergen are meant also Bear Island and all other islands between 10° and 35° longitude east of Greenwich and 74° and 81° north latitude. +. The Scandinavian Countries and Holland 173 * > º • e - & e tribunal of the interested powers, with the commissioner as presi- dent. º * SWEDEN's FOREIGN PROBLEMs Sweden's foreign problems have arisen largely from her long-stand- ing fear of Russia. In 1809 Russia took from her the country of Finland, thus removing a barrier between Sweden and the growing power of the Russian state. The reëstablishment of Finland as an independent state (page 370) will free Sweden from dread of Russia. The evidence of Russian power took its most menacing form in possession of the Åland Islands, which are only seventy-five miles from Stockholm, and if fortified by an enemy power would prove a real menace to Sweden. Fortified by Russia early in the World War, they were temporarily occupied late in the war by the German fleet. Because Russia had broken up into a number of separate states, among which was Finland, and because of Allied recognition of Finnish in- dependence, it was thought possible to settle the Åland question by direct negotiation between Finland and Sweden (1919). This plan failing, the matter was referred to the League of Nations, with the result that the case was studied by an Interallied commission for report and eventual settlement by the League. The Soviet government on its part also protested against any agreement regarding the islands to which Russia was not a party. DENMARK Denmark’s position gives it special importance in relation to the com- merce of the Baltic, for its chief city, Copenhagen, is located on the is- land of Zealand, which borders the gateway to that sea. At one point the water passage is but three miles wide. Down to 1857 Denmark actually collected dues on cargoes passing through the “Sound,” as the strait is called. Denmark's right to levy dues was always pro- tested by other countries — in the 17th century by the Netherlands and Sweden and in the 19th century by the United States. For re- linquishing the privilege Denmark was paid $20,000,000, of which sum more than a fourth was supplied by Great Britain. The commercial welfare of Denmark depends largely upon the growing export of dairy products and the facilities offered by the free port and bonded warehouses of Copenhagen.” Denmark's geograph- 1 Recently the free port of Copenhagen has been doubled in size, larger warehouses have been constructed, and every effort has been made to take advantage of its position as a port of call for steamers in the Baltic trade. These efforts were largely offset by a succession of strikes during 1920 and the ensuing diversion of trade. Sweden and Russia The Åland Islands 174 The New World Present colonial possessions of Denmark Scandi- navian in- terest in German TeCOD- struction Denmark's Alsace- Lorraine ical position fosters close relations between its merchants and those of Germany and the United Kingdom. Its agricultural products (three fourths of the land is in farms) find a ready market in the industrial centers of its large neighbors. Denmark's colonies were never commercially important. The Vir- gin Islands, its only West Indian possession, were sold to the United States in 1917 for $25,000,000 (Fig. 272). By virtue of explorations in Greenland, chiefly by Peary and Greely, the United States had certain vague rights there, all of which were given up as part of the general agreement whereby the Virgin Islands were acquired. Green- land, Denmark's sole remaining colony, has little commerce at pres- ent, its exports being fish, skins, seal oil, feathers, and small amounts of copper ore; but it is capable of some development and may ulti- mately have wireless telegraph stations of importance in commerce and war. On 1 December 1918 Iceland, a Danish possession, became nominally a sovereign state, though Denmark represents it in foreign affairs and is united to it in the person of the Danish king. . Norway and Sweden, like Denmark, are now most anxious to favor a policy that will re-create the industrial life of Germany, start ships moving in her ports, and renew her industries. They are Germany's neighbors, and their trade with that state has been an important part of their total commerce. Whatever they may have thought or done with respect to the issues of the war, the Scandinavian states cannot be expected to look with ill favor upon a more active merchant fleet in the Baltic and the renewal of the commerce and industry of the whole tributary region. , - TERRITORIAL GAINS IN SLESVIG The principal Danish-speaking portions of Slesvig have been returned to Denmark. The case grew out of former German ambi- tions. Until 1864 the duchies of Slesvig and Holstein were joined in a personal union under their duke, although Holstein was also a member of the German Confederation (from which in part the German Empire was formed in 1871). The two duchies were pre- dominantly German, except for the northern part of Slesvig, which contained about 150,000 Danes and a few Frisians (Fig. 91). The Germans saw that it would be possible to dig a canal from Kiel to the mouth of the Elbe which would give German ships a direct passage between the North Sea and the Baltic. With the Kiel Canal in German hands, the German fleet could not be bottled up in the Baltic so readily, should war eventually come. The Scandinavian Countries and Holland 175 Consequently,in 1863, A-.” `s slesvig when the Duke of Sles- " \r- . - <> -----Roundacy of /9/4 vig and Holstein came (f) A\ty ---------Boundary of the thr f D e2 , - plebiscife areas to the throne O €Il- -Boundary of 1920 mark as Christian IX Arºrado 2. Wy [T]/) tº & Ç O/PéS and attempted to unite stoniº {Z6ermans both provinces to his kingdom, Denmark was invaded by Prussia and Austria, the two princi- pal members of the Ger- man Confederation. After a short campaign, Christian was forced to surrender Slesvig and Holstein (1864). Two years later, however, Prussia and Austria came to blows about the disp osition of the FIG. 91. Language boundaries in Slesvig according to Danish region. Prussia was vic- authority (Clausens, 1912). The northern plebiscite zone voted torious. She for thwi th to join Denmark; the Southern zone (between the dotted line º and the solid one, except where the latter is bordered by dots) annexed the duchies and ºººººººººººº; began a Campaign of in detail, as at Pattburg and south of Alsen Island— adjust- gº e ments designed to avoid disturbing the industrial relations of Germanization that con- . SNN Mixed, Alames .*-sº-ºº--- and 6ermans ºleº see” Frisians C Scale of miles O 10 tinued without cessa- tion until the beginning of the war in 1914. Between 1867 and 1895, there emigrated from the small territory of north Slesvig 57,000 persons. In 1898 about 1000 persons were expelled from the country. The Prussians made homeless those who had declared their inten- tion to settle in Denmark, an act of oppression which contravened a privilege granted by the treaty of Vienna in 1864. All the chill dren of those parents who declared their intention of returning to Denmark were forbidden to marry, and as soon as they married were expelled from the country. The Germans also obliged many purely Danish parishes to adopt German church services and forcibly colonized much of the land, giving state aid and more favorable terms of payment to Germans. In the treaty of peace which defeated Austria signed with Prussia in 1866, it was stipulated that the inhabitants of northern Slesvig should have the right to decide by a free vote whether or not they The Ger- manization of Slesvig 176 The New World Dutch colonial power Colonial policy would unite themselves to Denmark. This plebiscite was always deferred by Germany. By the terms of the treaty of peace between the Allied and Associated Powers and Germany at the close of the World War, arrangements were made for the plebiscite. The region was divided into two parts, a northern district voting as a whole, and a central district voting by communes. The northern district has about 1500 square miles and 165,000 people, and in February 1920 three fourths of its inhabitants voted that the region return to Den- mark. The vote in the southern district, taken March 1920, resulted in an even greater majority in favor of Germany. The principal town of this zone is Flensburg, which voted almost solidly for German own- ership. Neither side, of course, is completely satisfied. The Danes would like to have Flensburg, and the Germans want Tondern, a small district in the northern zone which voted for Germany, but which is now assigned to Denmark. The southern boundary of Denmark as finally drawn is shown in Figure 91. HOLLAND Holland, with 12,582 square miles of territory, is a mere spot on the map in comparison with her colonial possessions, whose total area is 783,000 square miles. Of this area, 737,000 is in the Malay Archipelago of the East Indies (Fig. 254). The Dutch West Indian possessions, including Dutch Guiana on the mainland of South America, have an area of 46,000 square miles and a population of 90,000. Holland has a population but little in excess of 6,700,000, while her East Indian colonies have 47,000,000. The island of Java, a Dutch colony, is the most densely populated land mass in the world. It is noteworthy that all of Holland's colonies are in the tropics. They thus supplement the products of Holland and have long formed the basis for an im- portant trade with Germany and Great Britain. Through their use of cheap Malay labor and their development of the plantation system, the Dutch laid the foundations of colonial success. Coffee and sugar culture in the Dutch East Indies have long had a vital relation to Dutch prosperity. More recently the production of plantation rubber has brought huge amounts of foreign capital and a fresh hold upon international trade. As far as treatment of natives goes, the Dutch “culture” system was at first absolutely ruthless and native exploitation became a highly developed art. Famine and pesti- lence resulted, and at last the system, which was virtually slavery, was abolished for one that provided for at least theoretically free labor. To make labor really free in the Dutch East Indies will be one 5 Fig. 92. Flensburg, a town near the border of Denmark and Germany and thirty-two miles north of the Kiel Canal. This was a center of rivalry between Danes and Germans during the plebiscite period. Consult Figure 91. - - 178 The New World of the problems to which the signatories of the Labor Con- vention will be compelled to - address themselves in the near *—º-º-º-º-º: future. & ºf ºº The results of Dutch ac- & º º % c--> tivity in the East have been & ſº sº ** - - excellent in other fields. The & & *** topographic surveys are of high jºirºlâgºutrecht . c. grade and, along with scientific * expeditions to little-known in- terior regions, have opened up valuable lands to future de- velopment. Telegraph lines, cables, lighthouses, and free Fig. 93. The struggle for land in Holland. After harbors have promoted trade. . jº. Handboek der Aardrijks- Piracy has been all but Sup- pressed, and the benefits of orderly government have been extended to peoples once lawless. The conditions of life in Holland have created an intense interest in the principle of the freedom of the seas and the security of distant colonies held by the smaller powers. Threatened by the growth of Germany’s submarine fleet, Holland could scarcely hope for German success. At the same time, she could not forget her historic naval defeat at the hands of the British, the colonies in South Africa that she had lost to Great Britain, or the kinship of the Boers who had fought in vain against British domination. As long as she was not directly threatened, she did not wish to disturb her profitable trade as a neutral with needy Germany. With Allied victory safeguard ng her colonial titles, Holland had only to hold fast to all her European territory to come out of the war with relatively small losses. Her shipping and commerce had suffered by submarine sinkings and by American and British iuternment, but she had escaped the huge debts of the bel- ligerents and their loss of man power. We have already reviewed her disputes with Belgium respecting Dutch Limburg and the left bank of the Scheldt (page 123). However desirable these additions might be for Belgium, their loss was not to be thought of by the Dutch. Limburg contains coal deposits, and Holland is poor in mineral resources of every sort. The Dutch have a remarkable maritime and commercial history, and they could hardly be expected to advantage a neighbor at direct loss to themselves. Holland’s foreign policy Territorial disputes with Belgium Bºlands reclaimed from the sea Reclamation projects The Scandinavian Countries and Holland 179 Fig. 94. Rotterdam, the chief Dutch rival of the Belgian port of Antwerp on the Scheldt. See Figure 63. - Antwerp may need the lower Scheldt, but its growth would check the development of Rotterdam and other Dutch ports. That Holland's course might lead to Belgian enmity was a difficulty hardly to be avoided in any case, seeing that Belgium had revolted from Holland in 1830 and that Belgium's foreign policy favored France while Holland was commercially and politically more closely allied to Germany. To secure sufficient soil for her people, Holland reclaims the shallow sea floor and marshes of the coast. The Dutch have a saying: “God made the sea, but man made the land.” Vast sums have been ex- pended on reclamation projects and more will follow if the plan of reclaiming part of the Zuider Zee is continued (Fig. 93). These efforts have induced an appreciation of land that makes the loss of it, in whatever form, appear to be a calamity. The lower Scheldt is also vitally related to the whole matter of Holland's frontiers. On every side she seeks to develop the strategic value of water. A belt of marshes forms the northern third of her eastern frontier. The long and indented coast is fringed with shallow water easy to defend. Much of the reclaimed land is pasture and could be flooded, if the national defense required it, without destroying the principal towns. Like Belgium, the country occupies a highly strategic position between larger powers intent on maintaining the 180 . The New World integrity of a small state which no one of them would like to see absorbed by another. A third of Holland is pasture land in a high state of development. She can never rival Belgium's industrial production, but she has the navy, the colonial sources of raw material, and the thrift to develop her natural resources and her maritime trade to a high degree. In the past half century her industries have grown rapidly in response to her desire to be more nearly independent industrially, a desire that she could the more easily satisfy because of her colonial supply of raw materials — sugar, hemp, vegetable oil, and rubber. CHAPTER NINE RAILwAY AND TERRITORIAL PROBLEMs of SwitzERLAND At the end of the World War, Switzerland, though a neutral, was left with at least three possible sources of trouble: (1) International traffic passes through Switzerland on a great scale (Fig. 95), and this fact affects the economic and political freedom of the country. The navigation of the Rhine has never been controlled to Switzerland's satisfaction; and she is also interested in the new Allied purpose of internationalizing by treaty certain ports, rivers, and canals. (2) The eastern part of the country is German-speaking, the western part French, and national opinion is strongly divided on questions that affect relations with neighboring states. The isolated mountain communities of western Austria, like the Vorarlberg, for example, wish to escape the heavy tax burdens imposed on Austria by the treaty of St. Germain-en- Laye, and to this end plead for admission to the Swiss Con- federation as a separate canton or district. (3) Because of limited resources and heavy emigration, Switzerland has grown very slowly by comparison with other central European countries. As much as 28 per cent of the land is unproductive, though we must count as an asset the scenery, which attracts a heavy and profitable tourist travel. There are only 4,000,000 people, and while this number represents an increase over earlier years, more than 40 out of 187 of the political districts have had an actual decrease of population. The foreign element has increased despite the heavy emigration of the Swiss. Between 1880 and 1910, Italian citizens resident in Switzerland increased from 41,000 to 203,000, the greatest influx being due to the employment of Italians on railway and tunnel construction. They congregate in the cities and live in insanitary surroundings, thus increasing the social problems of the government. POSITION WITH RELATION TO OTHER COUNTRIES An interior, landlocked state, without a seaport, without colonies, a buffer between powerful nations, Switzerland has maintained her independence in spite of aggressive and ambitious neighbors. But the independence or sovereignty of Switzerland is in actual practice limited. For example, take the convention of 1909 between Germany and Italy on the one hand and Switzerland on the other, made when the Interna- tional problems of Switzer- land Switzerland a land of very limited TeSOU11'CeS Pressure upon the Swiss government pyltaly and Germany 181 182 The New World N *º-ſºft, SN !ohntwerp and Ni Hamburg ºw ºr’yº Tº º Wº S$ º N Ş 22* * \{\e V 5Thun a h iſº * SN Af fº *. terlaken y St.Götthard - Albula ( \ ~ N N *s-sº § º M -D N sº-º-º-º-º: -º FIG. 95. The place of Switzerland in the railway net of Europe. Railways with more than ten freight trains daily are shown by heavy lines. Railroads from Atlas géographique et statis- tique de la Swisse, 1915, Pl. 48, and Documents cartographiques de géographoe 6conomique, No. 1913. £ - - - - POPULATION DENSITYºğ § §§ š persq.km. persq.mile :::::::::: §::::::::::::: :ºx; Ulm der | % ..W.2 - * - * - - % £%:#2%; 㺠%3 ... • M* % º - y;33; § É;% %.2%% § º % C - 3. wº- º º º £ºl{&#}}{S$%fºllºń: ºf 2-Jººººº.. *Yº:/.". ...Y X. A. :’. . . . . . e : º aſ: -- 2: ... - :::( : V. aft'...". Yºº Jº A..."...º. :::: *--Nºv. TS// ...'...' •º * - "...W.2). ºs ::::2. º/Z. . . .i...b. Y2 - ×. "Yº 4. º Z.F.'....” &: Ø: º + - º ſ ‘....?..." º ſº - º º . 33. 2% iſſä FIG. 96. Switzerland has population bands conforming to the Alpine valleys) which repre- sent in many cases the extremities of similar though broader bands of population in adjacent countries. With such a distribution of population, railways are peculiarly important (Fig.95). From Schweizischer Schulatlas, Railway and Territorial Problems of Switzerland 183 - - Publishers' Photo Service Fig. 97. Andermatt, in southern Switzerland near the St. Gotthard Pass, where a railway tunnel pierces the southern mountain wall. Swiss government proposed to buy from its private owners the St. Gotthard railway system, which is a part of the through rail route between Germany and Italy, under the famous St. Gotthard pass in the Swiss Alps. Germany and Italy objected to the purchase, unless Switzerland would promise to allow traffic at the same rates as over other parts of the system in Germany and Italy. Switzerland protested, but her protests were of no avail until the treaty of Versailles was ratified. In the articles governing Rhine traffic freedom of access to the sea for Swiss commerce was guaranteed and pressure heretofore brought to bear on Switzerland was removed. In return, however, it was stipulated that there was to be freedom of transit across Switzerland for goods and persons of neighboring States. Late in 1919 railway conferences between German, Swiss, and Italian interests were held at Heidelberg, Germany, and as a result the German-Swiss-Italian traffic was in part renewed in the summer of I920. Swiss com- Inerce now guaranteed free access to the sea Agree- ments with neighbors 184 The New World Switzer- land the interna- tional country Swiss political tendencies toward socialism T - Publishers' Photo Service Fig. 98. Interlaken, with the Jungfrau in the bagkground — a typical Swiss landscape. The peculiar position of Switzerland among the countries of the world is further emphasized by the fact that she has long been the refuge of exiled scholars and scientists from the less liberal countries of Europe. She has been a center of advanced education and, at times, of political plots aimed by exiles at their enemies at home. She has consistently preserved the rights of asylum, and during the war, as well as after it, she permitted numbers of political agents, exiles, ex-kings, and the like, to take refuge within her frontiers. Switzerland is the home of a number of international organizations like the Postal Union and the International Red Cross Society; and Geneva has been selected as the seat of the League of Nations. POLITICAL TENDENCIES OF SWITZERLAND State socialism has gone very far in Switzerland, and it has not yet reached its climax there. For nearly thirty years the state has had a high revenue from customs duties, with which it has bought five great railways, guaranteed work to every able-bodied man, and enforced compulsory sickness insurance. Railway and Territorial Problems of Switzerland 185 FRONTIER QUESTIONS Switzerland has had no change in bounda- 20 *F ºs- O La UIS8DDI iſº ries as a result of the % à lem on her eastern * %. }% frontier, in relation to number of high Alpine stands for Liechtenstein (enclave of German territory) and V. for Vorarlberg (Austrian). The latter sought unsuccessfully to war. Nevertheless, she %. º - e % % * #& the Vorarlberg region * º2. ºº E. valleys in the extreme secure union with switzerland that she might escape the fate faces a territorial prob- (Fig e 99) e Here, IIl a FIG. 99. Switzerland and the western provinces of Austria. L. Western part of Austria of Austria under the treaty of St. Germain-en-Laye. 2 lives a group of people unwilling to remain a part of the Austrian Republic. Shortly after the armistice between the Allies and Austria- Hungary in 1918, delegations of Vorarlberg citizens, chiefly workmen and innkeepers, sought to secure incorporation of the district into Switzerland. This would add about 15,000 German-speaking people to the already heavy German majority in Switzerland, besides greatly increasing the present Catholic majority. - * * Switzerland long opposed the union, though there are the closest ties between her eastern districts and western Austria. It would increase her debts, for these former citizens of Austria-Hungary could not be allowed to escape their part of the heavy Austro-Hungarian debt by becoming Swiss citizens. They should pay a share of the pre-war debts, the war debts, and the so-called Rhine dues formerly paid by Austria. The people of Vorarlberg have sought union with Germany also. Happily, the long-standing claim of Italy to the Ticino, a part of Swiss territory, will probably never be raised again. Italy has re- ceived such ample satisfaction in the Tyrol (page 134) that her irre- dentist claims on her Alpine frontier should be now fully satisfied. The Swiss Federal Council has agreed to assume the diplomatic and consular representation of the principality of Liechtenstein. If the negotiations succeed, Switzerland will take over the postal, telegraphic, telephonic, and customs service. Liechtenstein, a de- tached part of Germany, also is seeking recognition as an independ- ent state on account of her peculiar geographical position (Fig. 99). Swiss op- position to incorpora- tion of the Liechten- stein now the ward of Switzer- land CHAPTER TEN Former German commercial power Germany's new orien- tation Distribu- tion of German- speaking people PROBLEMS OF THE GERMAN PEOPLE BEFORE the war of 1914–1918, the problems of the German people covered political and economic fields nearly as broad as those of Great Britain. German wares had been carried into every trading realm of the world, and the trader meant political as well as commercial penetration; colonies had been acquired in Africa and the Pacific, and concessions in China. The products of German industry were of high grade, and they were cheap. In central Europe, the Bal- kans, and Turkey, Germany's political influence was dominant and her trade was rapidly increasing. Supporting these advances in trade and colonies was an intelligent and industrious people, trained in the arts, and possessing enviable sources of mineral wealth, especially iron and coal. - As we shall see from a list of her losses on a later page, Germany has been stripped of her overseas possessions, her merchant fleet has been surrendered, her good-will is gone, and the goods of other coun- tries — former rivals in trade – have displaced German goods almost everywhere. Her problems are now of a new order. Domestic issues, chiefly social and economic, have attained first rank. In place of colonies to be developed, there are debts to be paid. Instead of continued territorial gains, there are territorial losses. Once she could threaten her rivals, in a diplomatic struggle for land or trade resources, with a powerful navy and army; now her navy is gone and she is required by treaty to reduce her army to 100,000 men. Once she looked out upon the world as a growing state; she must now turn her attention inward, for domestic resources and political arrangements must first be developed, in the reconstitution of the national life. TERRITORIAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE GERMANS In rebuilding the German state, there is one factor of immediate concern — the distribution of German-speaking people on the map of Europe (Fig. 100). Formerly Germany and Austria contained the principal block, with an extension of 2,600,000 German-speaking people in eastern and central Switzerland, another much smaller group in Sleswig-Holstein, and scattered “islands” in Hungary, southern Russia, and the Baltic provinces, besides important “colonies” in southern Brazil, Chile, Colombia, and China. Upon this geographical distribution there depend political relations 186 Problems of the German People 187 º º \; sº. º. ‘. º º º d * = .” ---- Boundary of ſhe //o/y Roman Ampire ........Aoundary 6efween&ermans ama/J/aks affheffme of Char/emagne (a/o/r4/0) S = Jemya/a, .E = Arm/a/7a/ K= A2//77er/a/7a/ Scale l:19,000,000 100 so Q 100 200M. FIG. 102. The contest between German and Slav at the beginning of the 15th century. Based on Putzger, Historischer Schul-Atlas, and Droysen, Hand-Atlas. In Germany today there is a strong tendency to pivot future po- litical and economic influences in eastern Europe, particularly in Russia, upon these German colonies. And if this policy is followed, Germany will in the future have an eastern, as opposed to a former western, orientation. A practical exhibition of this tendency was given in 1920 when thousands of Germans entered Lithuania to fight on her side against Polish control of Vilna. Problems of the German People 191 GERMAN MINORITIES IN THE NEW STATES With the fall of German rulers in 1918, the democratic era, fore- shadowed by the Revolution of 1848 and by the steady increase of the Social Democrats in the Reichstag, at last began. There came also the final liberation of peoples who, by gaining independence, took away sub- stantial portions of Germany, as well as the greater part of Austria and Hungary. Additional losses of population were incurred through the treaty of Versailles, which included many Germans in the new states, on the ground that the colonization methods of Germany and the forced ethnic penetrations of Austria and Hungary had put the former minority populations of these countries under a handicap. They had been driven out of districts in which they had a right to live on equal terms with the German-speaking newcomers. However, this political principle should not diminish appreciation of the service rendered by many German settlers on the eastern frontier of the German lands. While each one of the three great eastward-reaching prongs of German population, shown in Figure 100, is often described as the result of a war of conquest against Turks and Slavs, these wars were in the main a part of the general process of expansion of the higher civilization of western Europe eastward against the lower oriental civilization that long threatened to overwhelm it. The historic boundary of Bohemia has become, for a part of its course, , the new boundary of Czecho-Slovakia, although more than 2,500,000 Germans are thereby included; and the strip of land between Schneidemühl and Bromberg (part of the Polish Corridor) becomes a part of the new Polish state, in spite of the present pre- dominance of Germans (Fig. 171). The exclusion of large numbers of Germans from Germany raises a group of problems which every thoughtful person should examine very closely. There is no more effective cry in the world than the cry of oppression, and Americans in particular have always had a sym- pathetic ear for a people in distress and struggling to be free, because as a self-governing, democratic, and free people they know what free- dom costs to get and to keep. What if these excluded Germans in a few years raise the same cry as the peoples once held.in their grasp? In general the world was not sympathetic toward France in 1870– 1871; but by 1914 it had become educated to the wrongs done by the German overlords in Alsace-Lorraine. The Poles and Czechs, who, if they cared to, could now turn the tables on the Germans run grave risks if they choose the way of the vengeful oppressor. Rise of German democracy and liberation of subject peoples Germans outside of Germany in neighbor- ing states 192 The New World Will Aus- tria join Germany P The Ger- mans of the new Poland The largest group of Germans outside the German Empire is that in Austria. To join this country to Germany would give the latter a total population larger and much more homogeneous than that which she had before the war. It would also throw the frontiers of Germany eighty miles nearer the head of the Adriatic. While the Baltic and the North Sea coasts would be left practically unchanged, except for the short strip at Danzig and Memel, there would be consolidated a solid block of German territory that might lead to the revival of the former Pan-German plan by which central Europe would again pass under Teutonic domination. The treaty of Versailles has forbidden this union, which will not be permitted until it is reasonably certain that German democracy is real and has come to stay. The limits of the German Empire as drawn in 1914 show that the largest linguistic or “racial” minority within it was the Poles. These have now joined with the Poles of Austria (Galicia) and of Russia (Congress Poland * and a strip of territory adjoining it on the east) to form the new Polish state. In the Polish state about 2,000,000 Ger- mans will be included, but they form almost everywhere the minority of the population. Figure 170 shows that they were, in large numbers, officials of the Prussian state, officers in the German army, German teachers, colonists, foresters, and the like. They have the privilege of becoming Polish citizens before the end of 1921 or of moving into Germany if they wish to escape the handicap of German speech or birth. It would be a great calamity for Poland if the whole body, of Ger- mans should choose to remain and to have representation in the Polish Diet, because they would form a minority party with an obstructionist policy, a party devoted to the harassing advertisement of wrongs real or alleged. The presence of such parties within the state was a standing difficulty with both Germany and Austria- Hungary. It embittered almost every debate and caused the neglect of purely national business to a deplorable extent. - The same observation applies to those Germans, about 3,500,000 in number, that have been assigned to Czecho-Slovakia. Many citi- zens of that country regret their inclusion as a minority group with- out interest in national affairs. The Germans of the Tyrol are in the same situation with respect to Italy. Only the most careful treatment by these three nations — Poland, Czecho-Slovakia, and Italy — of The Ger- mans of Czecho- Slovakia and Tyrol 1 Name given to a political division of Russia (created a kingdom under the Czar by the Congress of Vienna) which includes chiefly Polish populations. Its boundaries on the west and south were the former German and Austrian international boundaries. Its limits are shown in Figure 169. Problems of the German People 193 the minority Germans within their frontiers will relieve the anxiety of statesmen lest they turn on their former oppressors and create in the future a new crop of troubles for themselves and the world. The protection of minority rights is indeed one of the great prob- lems of the time. It cannot be solved by splitting up the world in- definitely. Not every tiny group can have its own flag and place in the family of nations. For the weakest peoples there is only one practicable alleviation—that minorities shall have a court of appeal and certain broad guarantees of personal rights of speech and religion. CONSEQUENCES OF THE WAR Instead of advancing her program of expansion toward Russia and in Africa, the Pacific, and the Near East, Germany has lost territory, trade, and privileges. The following are to her the most important European consequences of the World War: - (1) German coal in the Saar valley has been given to France to offset the losses caused by the destruction of the French coal mines, chiefly at Lens and Valenciennes, during the war. A plebiscite at the end of fifteen years will determine final ownership of the Saar district; but the region may vote for France in spite of the restriction of the privilege of voting to persons living in the Saar on 10 January 1920. Before the war (1913), the Saar coal mines yielded 17,400,000 tons of coal, or about 9 per cent of Germany’s total. (2) Eupen, Malmédy, and Moresnet, ceded to Belgium, have mineral resources of value, but their total little affects the totals for all Germany before the war. (3) The loss of a part of the Silesian coal fields of southeastern Germany is inevitable, and with that part will go some of the strength of the city of Breslau and the other towns near by. The area of the plebiscite zone is about 4000 square miles, and the population is 2,000,000. The coal production of the district was 43,000,000 tons in 1913, or more than one fifth of the total production of the German Empire (which exceeded 190,000,000 tons in 1913). It also produced 57 per cent of the lead ore of Germany and 72 per cent of the zinc. Though 65 per cent of the population of all German Silesia is Polish, the great economic loss to Germany which the ces- sion to Poland would cause resulted in the decision to hold a plebiscite. The vote was taken in March 1921, and was on the whole favorable to Germany; but the final boundary, which will be determined by the Supreme Council, may not accurately reflect the results of the vote. The rights of minori- ties often difficult to guarantee What Ger- many has lost in Europe by the treaty of Versailles 194 The New World (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) The transfer of former German territory in the northeastern part of East Prussia beyond the Niemen River is justified by the presence of the Lithuanian population that has lived there for centuries (Fig. 184). With the recognition of a Lithuanian government will go, of course, the effort to join into one group the whole Lithuanian population, as far as this is possible. With the trans-Niemen country will probably go the former German port of Memel, the outlet of the Niemen basin and the terminus of a Russian railway. Pending a settlement of the Russian question, with which Lithuanian independence is intimately related, Memel is held by warships of the Allied powers. Exclusive of Danzig and Silesia, Germany has lost 2,800,000 people and 16,000 square miles to Poland; this territory includes the rich industrial province of Posen, besides valuable forest and agricultural lands, coal and other mines, and about One tenth the total German production of grain and one sixth the German production of potatoes. The separation of East Prussia from the main body of Ger- man territory doubtless will disturb the economic life of the region. But it is important to furnish a nation of 25,000,000 people (Poland) with a port (Danzig) and the means of a secure access to the sea (the Polish Corridor, or strip of land west of the Vistula that joins Poland with the Baltic). The middle of the Polish Corridor is only thirty miles wide, too narrow to be the base of great military operations; and the city of Danzig itself is to be governed by the League of Nations through a High Commissioner. The provisions for the management of the port of Danzig and for a treaty between Danzig and Poland respecting the use of the port guarantee freedom of transit to the Poles at Danzig and also to the Germans of East Prussia over the railroad from Königs- berg to Schneidemühl and Berlin. Besides this there is free navigation of the Baltic for goods that may go by sea, and the common use by both East Prussia and Poland of the navi- gable (and internationalized) Vistula that separates their territory. The plebiscite held in southern East Prussia (Allenstein), re- sulted in favor of union with Germany. The people are Poles in race and speech, but they are Lutheran in religion, unlike the main body of Poles, who are Catholics. The total population is about 716,000. The neighboring plebiscite area of Marienwerder (Fig. 171) is almost wholly German and also voted to remain in Germany. The area which Germany has lost in Slesvig contains about 1500 square miles; the population is 300,000. This Problems of the German People 195 #. - § A - (Y. e § 2. 3: ) s? §§ º: C. SS $º z: Sº <[ : ‘; 4 ; ; ; ; ##! Qe -T tú © .N ý š ~ $º © |- | : S S. S. Su So # op Zyſ, > 8 h, --> š Šišš , s \ . <ſ § { & Sä & 3 S $ tiſ t; O § { $ So t; S ‘S * | | | SN. N. § $$$$$$ $$. tº - S R S. NSS s/ × < 3 $$$$$$ $º evº © & § $ $3, $, $ $ $ 5 § *** ** •] > * . . §§§ 3 & S S º S. iIS § $$$ N. S. § s $ $ : —l * Sº *Q ºš §§ $ § § § N #! O S. S & 3 -S S S & N - —l § ::::::. ! º § - SN2 CO * § ! N §§ * C/) SN; | ſº O- li) O R2-T: 81 \ . Sº § { $..N. 'E §§ ‘53+ š. Ø& ... " I st Tº * S. © S.S Qſ) S$ \\ co #3 # 2 Yt 2. - st 5 4. <\ 22 Ž \n 7. - 4. X. 2. Z g= * Cº. lul ‘ao º % º # O > à *e - - * ...º %2 - * Z '. Y. Sº, nzzº * Y. N \G\3 ºr E a * - lil SE -> e O 9. • **** ***.*. O * ,” TH /S •ºf * 2 4PAS \, Z LLl f \ & --> ) i gº .” IS s -5 *e * 2& # §º at # X: ***. Or Soo _---ºf 0 R. : . SN N **, 2*"Tºo T., e-à's ; ::$º e H. sº à CŞ Rb, 3 Š 6; §§ ^ S. - {" 's S 3 g $ g” 3 # 5 #3. § S > F # F# # is 2 - ## #* | *ś S.ſº wo 92 s; 55 E3 ‘s Lal O e on SS < 5 - 3. —l O 2 \ En ºf .; $# 3. Or - 2: “S. Lišš º Gº. " lil r’ &- ~är" N. - sº is sº ..] $, J. © O. S- H. -* § * -1 CD TJ K. - lil & > S. Jil t > § 1 -º 3.2 oz. 2–1 ~ſ <ſ # &: º: 1- Næ. ... (5 fe W. # > ..Sº (* {} #| = \#3 *, * : $ 4% o #3 & co." K. tº 3 3 * §§ .# # & % o: *-ºſ. cº +5 Ry. Qº •+-##### K, * r SR § --w o : 3. } Qu — . . .* ºf E % <ſ -2" Uſ) - - -1 & 3.2% sº !- -- ** © 0. Ø à LLl § g FIG. 103. Generalized view of the conditions of German territorial losses by districts. The figure under Malmédy represents the total for the districts of Eupen and Malmédy. The Allen- stein and Marienwerder districts east of the Vistula have voted to remain German; only the northern of the two Slesvig districts voted to join Denmark. For details of final Slesvig boundary see Figure 91. Originally set apart as plebiscite areas, the Teschen, Orawa, and Spits districts have been settled by the Conference of Ambassadors (Fig. 179), though the Polish Diet has yet to ratify the agreement. Czecho-Slovakia eventually gains a small district north- west of Teschen. If Austria should join Germany (page 214), German losses of population and territory would be more than counterbalanced. - 196 The New World & (9) (10) (11) is an agricultural region and its loss does not seriously affect Germany. - The loss of Alsace-Lorraine includes not only territory, but the city of Strasbourg and control of the Rhine River traffic. The region also produced 21,000,000 tons of iron yearly and 350,000 tons, or 3 per cent, of the world's potash supply. A large part of Germany's reserves of potash were in Alsace, besides important reserves of petroleum. - All told, the loss in Germany’s principal agricultural prod- ucts, such as barley, oats, wheat, rye, potatoes, sugar beets, etc., is from 12 to 15 per cent. Her loss in manufacturing will be about 10 per cent, and her loss in population about 12 per cent. There were also lost 2,550,000 tons of shipping, not including 1,000,000 additional tons to be built in the next five years to offset in part the loss of Allied shipping by submarine sinkings. A fourth of the country's canal boats and thou- sands of locomotives and cars were surrendered. The terri- tories lost include 35,000 miles of railroad. German losses in European territory are summarized as follows: AREA OF PARTS OF GERMANY AFFECTED BY THE TREATY OF VERSAILLES . SQ. MILEs Neutral Moresnet . 2 Kreis Eupen . 68 Kreis Malmédy. 314 Alsace-Lorraine . . . . . . . . 5,600 Saar Basin (possibly not permanent) tº gº tº 730 To Poland (not including Silesian plebiscite zone). 16,000 Free City of Danzig . . . . . 729 Memel, or trans-Niemen, district 910 Slesvig plebiscite area (northern zone). 1,550 Total 25,903 Taking all the losses together, the former Germany in Europe of 203,834 square miles has been reduced by over 25,000 square miles, or 13 per cent. Of her European population, Germany has ceded 8,000,000, or about 12 per cent of her pre-war total. Owing to the losses of the war by disease and in battle, there has been a reduction of the population by more than 5,000,000, including 2, young men. Among the losses incurred in China by Germany are these: further 000,000 Problems of the German People 197 );!■■-v.VI ň.£;§ ��*«?? wºzº,z(x,z;2º» («-»% 2:222222222222,2%\ *„Te ? e ø.º.º. º., ººººº«. (». e., º.º.,,,,*º %ſ%22%22%222ºººººººº • (e.e.,ºººººſe e º *. :)%22%2,3 27,4%º;» ZººZºº 2. ^ • •º’ºlº,,z pº;44,2°-2°24′′, 2°, 22 eeº,,,,,^«? ø• • • • • • • •74,2Zºzº, 2 • • •„ºeſº,,,,,,,*) º. º. g support more than 40% of the local population 100 Husbandry supports more than u « …, ∞ œ • ∞2.2.2.2.2, rºw, 7ºº.ººº• •Q º)،$ºp:42*„“,%%%%^,2 SAX, 2, 22°,22 ſºwº, Zºº, °, 223* √æCl- \\�%%*%? 2)',«» ©®ý,2°, z »aeº.',ſaec , , , , , ,,? ;ºe)• • •• -ºx, (* ø § 2, …?” ejº,•ș ،,,,?. ^ ^ ^>$ D£4,222228(3:2, ſººſ ºſz, 222229,222 :ſae *^* * * · · · ·•7. *** %, º º, , * ^•• „* •©± 52/22° 22.242.2°E 22,222~o ºſ•Zºº, 7, 2 e 22°.2,2,2,22%22•©3 ø, * ººº*№. 22′′, 222222 22:22, 22 º 24, 22„ºae$s= 72°, w 73• • • •2:22 e 2 % e 27,4yº » • • • • •Zºº, ºrº, “… • • • Zºº ». », , , º, z, ź • • • • • №ºrººae ), « » « » ,2ſºſy;oo�ia) •???-?? 22?,27?, ?, ?, ??? 22?, ¿?,> • • • • • ???)/2ø • • • •-,-0 ^_^ ^,..,^ ^ „ ”, a * : *a · · · · * • • • '^ aX^**? 22??? 227,2%„42222222 • « •* • • • • • • • • •■º.º.º. • • • å§ (222222222(2-v^2%%%%%%%%•—•� ∞-, , : º.º.222222222222, 22 % 2%•;..?,?,!,2%22º”,22%(%)%.%%%%%%%%>� , , *،aeºººº..ººº • •;*•± ►º.º., 2°27′N,222222222222; �:22%%%%%%%%º • • • • ••{•%�� %%%%• • • • × ° +2 r. º, , ,Ķº, º Zº, Zºº 22.22%%%ºtſaſº • • • • • • • • •، ، ، ، ،«^ „ “, „Zºzº » Zº zº’, 2, 2,ſ2º.º. . ^ ^ ^ 2 ze z 22Zºº, e º 2 • • • • • • •ze ſą�^)© y., 22 °, 222 ×، ، ، ، ،* • • • • • • ? »Zº22 2 2 2 2 22% 22•*© 2,2,2,2,2,222z º.º.º.º.º.º. (N. 222222222(ſ^4222222222222Zºzº zºo::∞ �2:22, 24 , 2 2 2 5 2 °, 2 2 , 2 º. º. º. Z 2X2 ) » • • • • 222.e”Rºw), z2.2.2.2 422 · 221,2%-ºſº,º);>< • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • ►e « »• • • aeOT3%%%%%%%* * * ?…ae- &, %, 2%%%% %% ', , » » » » • • • • 7,2222 2 2 %% %.%%%%%%%" %2:/22 zzzz??O (22222222222, 22 2 2 2 2222222222 % 2 2 2 2ſ2 2 2 7 • • • • • ¶º.222222222∞ %%%%%%22%22222222222222:33.22222222222223. №.2222222222?ætrò º.º. º. • • • • • • •، ، ، ،2^ ^ ^ • 7,\! , , , , , a z • • • • • • *>/, ';» •• • º • • • • • •22. ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 2}- 2 2 2 2 , 2 ž • • • • • • 2Z2 ,2222222;§ 2,2223242 222 · · · · · · · · · · · · · (, 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 • • • ZZ Ź Ź ź • ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ;22%22 zº zºº • • • • • • •2$ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2%%%%%% zº z º.º.;* • få22 2 2 2 2 2 , 2^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2zae’’, ºzº • • • • •*•:>::>::>:; 2222222 • • • • • • • • • • •^ • • •z zę“*.º.º.º.º.º.,*« »^ ^^; ∞%222222222222222222;• • • • • • •*******●$ : • • • • •% %22%22ſ2 2ſ2 2ſ2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 °^ ^ ^ ^ „ … •.•*.*f!§ 2º • • • * º * * • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Q●• • • • • : ž%%%%%%%• • • • • • • ^ ^ ^ ^ • • , !* • • • • • %22222 e º £2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • •!·? ، ،º • • • • • •• •±Ģ•* • • • • • :• • • ø ø •• • • • • • • • • • • • • •*��! 2222222222,736222222 zº • • • • • • • • 3.Ñ,S1 (Z ) Zºz: •%22%22222)($3.22%22, 24. ^ • • • • • • • • ×Ņ→©NY)(ſººſ º, • • •• 22,22,2% ſº • • • • • • • • •;-:****sº � • • • •ș * • • • • • • • •• • •�·º.ſ. • aº• • • • • • • • • • ** * * · * * • •·?; ? e ! º.º.« • • ^2 , !22222;ť:222222;5(22%、。 š, * * * * *¿? 22:24,• •%22; ; Ż,ż;$* . . *(.*,* *** • • Z Ž ŹŹ yº & & & &••*. ^^ • §-ſŚĆ Zºº e º*** • • • • • • •ș ޺f, º…ºº * * • • • • • → →→ *æ <;~~!» «» º * * ap • ±%%%%")!? • • • • 2. §ſ', º ø • • •?', * ¿Zº z º.º. 22.22%), §§: « • • • • • • • •%"; ſº « • • • • • • • • • 2, 2, ģ%%%%%%%%%;} º. }º • • • • • • • • • •2×22), * • §22222222222222222222$, § 222222222,5%+22222222; zº • • • • • • •}}ººº »...• • • • ?% • •§:22222); • # • ••szº;•* • • *** • • • •'º º ae → *** • • • • » »· • • • • };22%22%3E%22%2% ·* & * • • „ ”, ”4” Z3Zººzº ez• • • • Ž2222222222 272 €, e, e• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 242\ ^\%2344;&aeº • • • • • • • • × 2 × 2 × 2 •* •&& &&§zº. Zº zº • • • • 22.2 %§§• ^:�* * * * • • • • • • • • •º ºsv? * №w.….? » « » , » » » » • • • • X}2).%% «}; * 2 » 2 2 2 2 23 e 42 ) » №.22;# ø ſºº • • • • • • 222 ze{22,5% 23 º• • • •*ø • *«, sº-ºº: Z • • • • • • • •.fºº.ººº ſº • • • 4.2,***§ ●•*$zº ·ſº:× -«»2. § The d during the Onies Sup- 20 The territorial IIle From maps in Statistische Jahrbuch ta. e China had (All the powers OT The col d bef VIC62. 15. In Crea.Se Wa,S Ina,In alſle postal ser vilege, which was g In the decade from 1880 to 1890, German pig- The same rate of Note the belt of industrial population along the French and Belgian , and port rights now turned over legation guards at Pekin. alming a t alning all l sin, Hankow, and Kiaochow (Fig. 244). t alſl ient Way, mines ail s pri * * * * * * d 100 per cent. 1OIl IIl Crea,Se Distribution of industrial and agricultural population of Germany in 1895. map represents Germany in a period of transition. Compare this map with the map of population density (Fig. 60). losses on the east involve chiefly agricultural population. des Deutsches Reich, 1898. duct two succeeding decades. FIG. 104. Iron pro frontiers. d thi a postal service.) (2) Concessions at T (1) The privilege of m enjoye to the Japanese government. In addition to her losses in Europe and Asia, Germany loses all her overseas colonies, amounting to an area of about 1,000,000 square * For the value of these possessions see the chapters on Africa, Australia and the Pacific, (3) The privilege of m and the Far East, (4) The Shantung r plied a fourth of the total German demand for rubber, besides valu- miles and a population estimated at 12,000,000. able oils and fibers." 198 . The New World Difficulties in the way of colonial expansion Reasons for enter- ing the colonial field Struggle at Walvis Bay The colonial losses not specified on page 197 are as follows: Africa Pacific (1) Togoland (1) Marshall, Marianne, and Caro- (2) Cameroons line Islands (3) German Southwest Africa (2) Kaiser Wilhelm's Land and Bis- (4) German East Africa marck Archipelago (3) German Samoa and Solomons (4) Nauru Island FORMER COLONIAL INTERESTS OF THE GERMAN EMPIRE Germany entered the field of colonial activity late in her national career. She made her first essay in colonial expansion in the Pacific as late as 1884; and it was only after much vacillation that she finally established herself in Africa in the same year. Her leaders had been opposed to colonial expansion; their sense of economy was shocked by the large expenditures that were necessary to keep distant and undeveloped territories under control. As a consequence, Great Britain and France had a full half century and more of advantage in time and experience. Between 1876 and 1884 these powers had laid claim to some of the choicest areas in Africa. The field of colo- nial expansion had been greatly narrowed. When Germany awoke to a full realization of the value of colonial raw materials to her magically expanding industries, she found that she could gain important advantages only by pursuing an exceedingly active policy. What she had lacked in initiative she now made up by aggression and skill Wherever her colonies touched the territory of other powers, she made the fullest possible use of any differences of opinion regarding the location of boundary lines or the extent of her concessions or the terms of her treaties with native chiefs. Her mer- chants had established trading stations on both the east and the west coasts of Africa. In 1859 Hamburg, Bremen, and Lübeck made a commercial treaty with the Sultan of Zanzibar. By 1884 about sixty German trading posts and a hundred or more of missionary stations were located on the west coast. To consolidate her interests, impose her own tariffs, and have strategic commercial and military bases for further gains now became accepted aims of Germany's African policy. The field of her activity was limited to central Africa, where Vague boundaries enabled her to gain control without resort to war. German Southwest Africa was the scene of the first struggle. Fear- ing the results of the activities of German traders and missionaries in the Walvis Bay region, and yet momentarily timid in extending its Problems of the German People 199 own frontiers, the Brit- NZ. | 9 r–N-y f : ish government in 1878 cº -A ſºcio-Egypt N declared the bay and ; Q sub An Ş. —s fifteen miles round it British territory. The % Germans responded by % taking possession of % ; WIA § ABYssini £º O § 2; SAFRICA à GERMANY Angra Pequeña, pro- º sº Bf 10 IAN : claiming it as German É. º!: O N G % territory, and with it that part of the west || coast between Portu- guese Angola and the Orange River, save the small tract at Walvis É #. # ** } i * Bay. In the same year % % %aphica Ž j (1884) Togoland was * % clºſ º Q r Cs declared a German pro- THE GERMANCOLONIES3% *3% % CAPE OF GOOD HC % tectorate, on the ground that eight German trad- INAFRICA %& scaleormies º zº * O ing stations had been *——a-A— 500 % % JAN,198 o FIG. 105. General map showing the location of the former established and that German colonies in Africa. For their disposition see Figures definite claims to the 15 and 49. region had not been made by either France or Great Britain. Also in the same year, German political agents concluded treaties with some of the native chiefs of the Cameroons and the German flag was hoisted over the third of the newly won African colonies. In the following year Great Britain acknowledged German com- mercial claims over East Africa. By 1888 some thirty coffee and tobacco plantations were in operation. Arab slave traders fomented a rebellion which was speedily put down, and in 1889 the German East Africa Society bought out the claims of the Sultan of Zanzibar to the coast strip, then under German control. Subsequent agreements with Great Britain in 1886 and 1890 fixed the boundaries of German East Africa and closed the first chapter of German colonization there. Germany's ambitions looked not only toward the development of the African colonies, but also to the acquisition of other colonies near those already established. Her political moves in East Africa led the statesmen of rival nations to believe that she wished to acquire Portu- guese East Africa as well as portions of French and Belgian territory. That the trade of the African colonies of Portugal was carried largely *—a German ambitions in Africa 200 - - The New World Africa the chief theatre of German colonial enterprise Beginnings of German expansion in the Pacific by German ships and that the Portuguese colonial administration was weak, were facts of significance. While Germany's African colonies might ultimately prove to be of large importance, they were a drain upon her national resources (ex- cept in the case of Togoland). Neither was her control to the advan- tage of the regions she occupied. One of the reasons which impelled the Peace Conference of Paris to take the colonies from her was her treatment of the natives. The most striking case of the violation of native rights was in the Herero war in German Southwest Africa. Two of the four African colonies of Germany — German Southwest Africa and German East Africa —fall under British administration, the former as a part of the Union of South Africa, the latter, except for a small portion ceded to Belgium (page 126), as a separate colonial possession. Neither is held, however, in full sovereignty, but as a mandated region under the authority of the League of Nations, to be administered for the benefit of the natives. Togoland and the Cameroons are divided between France and Great Britain (Figs. 267 and 268) for control in the same way. This is a new departure in colonial government. It makes the details of administration in these areas matters of public knowledge and approval. It also makes it possible in the future to return the colonies to Germany, though such a step is most unlikely in view of the flow of capital from the mandatory powers into the colonies and the strong objec- tion of business to the unsettling effect of changes in political status. FORMER GERMAN INTERESTS IN THE PACIFIC Four stages may be recognized in the development of German ambitions in the Pacific. The first was purely commercial; the second was annexation—to extend the German Empire; in the next stage the islands of the Pacific were regarded not merely as additions to empire or as commercial assets, but as naval bases from which the power of the German government could be extended to rich and populous countries; the fourth, or present, stage is one of complete loss of former territories. International Rivalries in Samoa Germany's first colonial activity in the Pacific was due to the effort of a Hamburg merchant prince — Godeffroy — who sent agents to Fiji and Samoa to establish cotton plantations. This was just after the American Civil War, when the European cotton famine turned the minds of merchants and statesmen to the necessity of producing - --- Problems of the German People 201 at least a part of their raw cotton within their own empires. Later the schemes of Godeffroy's company won a subvention from the Ger- man Reichstag. * But the field was not entirely open in Samoa, for the United States had had since 1839 the exclusive right to establish a naval base in the harbor of Pago Pago at Samoa, and the British colonies of Australia and New Zealand had developed an important trade in Samoa. In order to adjust the conflicting claims, the three powers—the United States, Great Britain, and Germany —sent representatives to a con- ference in Berlin which resulted in the Berlin General Act of 1880, providing a government for the kingdom of Samoa, the condominium, which existed down to 1899. In that year the three powers signatory to the Berlin General Act jointly agreed to annul the act and distrib- ute Samoa. Tutuila was allotted to the United States, Upolu to Germany, and Savai'i to Great Britain. No sooner was this done than Great Britain gave Savai'i to Germany in return for conces- sions made by Germany to Great Britain in the Tonga and Solomon Islands. - In German Samoa the native population is about 35,000, and the annual trade has a value of $2,500,000. These islands are now turned over to New Zealand to administer as a mandatory power of the League of Nations. New Guinea In 1884 Germany annexed the northern shore of New Guinea, from the Dutch boundary eastward to Dampier Strait, and inlanºl as far as the supposed crest of the central range of mountains. Almost imme- diately thereafter she annexed the whole of the New Britain Archi- pelago (renamed Bismarck) and the northern Solomon Islands. Before these acts were committed, in 1883, Queensland had annexed the eastern half of the continental island of New Guinea, but the British govern- ment disavowed the act on the ground that it gave sovereign rights to a colony. It was in the face of this disavowal that the German an- nexation of the northeastern part of New Guinea (Kaiser Wilhelm's Land) took place. But the British government, yielding to popular sentiment, then annexed the southern shore of New Guinea and turned it over to Australia for administration, at the same time establishing a protectorate over the southern Solomons and Santa Cruz (Fig. 253). The area of these territories, now assigned to Australia, is nearly 90,000 square miles, and the population numbers about 700,000. The con- dominium in Samoa German occupation of New Guinea, on the thresh- old of Austraia 202 The New World Difficulties of colonial trade re- vival The Sparta- cists or Bolshevists of Ger- many * Only two years after the acquisition of northeastern New Guinea, Germany hoisted her flag over the Marshall Islands, in protection of the commercial rights of a German company, and in 1899, the year after America had acquired the Philippines and the island of Guam from Spain, Germany bought from Spain the rest of her holdings in the Pacific — the Carolines, the Mariannes, and the Pelew Islands. These territories have an area of less than 1000 square miles and a native population of 70,000. All of them go to Japan except Nauru, which is south of the equator and goes to Great Britain (page 523). With all the colonial possessions lost, German merchants are limited in their efforts at reviving overseas trade to general trading conditions like those that affect, say, the foreign merchants of Sweden or Switzer- land. Since the commercial advantages and resources of every man- dated region are open to the traders of all nations on terms of equality, German trade in her former colonies will revive, at least to some extent. And that it would revive quickly is certain, were it not for the lack of shipping. As a result of her unrestricted submarine campaign Germany was required, by treaty, in part to restore Allied shipping by surrendering her commercial fleet and allocating a large part of the tonnage to be built in the next few years. In the colonies of other powers Germany's trade can be recovered only so far as tariff arrangements and good-will permit. France, Great Britain, and the United States have preferential rates; Italy, though her colonies have small interest to Germany, has restrictive shipping laws in force in Libya; Portugal puts all foreign traders under a handicap ºn her African colonies. Tropical raw materials will be less easy for Germany to obtain, and her trade with the nations of the temperate zone will be distinctly revived only when a stable govern- ment is formed, shipping built, currency deflated, and credit provided for new mercantile enterprises. - THE BURDENS OF THE NEW GERMAN STATE The chief problem of Germany today is one of reconstruction to fit to her desperate needs the resources left in her hands and to stab- ilize the social and economic conditions created by the revolution (November 1918). . The social and political conditions of Germany were becoming more and more critical even before the World War. Through the revolution that accompanied the armistice, they have become the vital problems of the day. The disorderly elements among the laboring classes in the industrial centers have taken advantage of the general turmoil to demand sovereign rights for themselves, which Problems of the German People 203 means merely that the tyranny of the militarists and imperialists has been exchanged for the tyranny of a small organized industrial class — the so-called proletariat. It also remains to be seen whether Germany will become a great confederation or a collection of quarreling and self-seeking states, such as existed before the German Empire was formed in 1871. For the strength of the former empire is not a measure of the political resourcefulness of the people in the present democratic régime. The German people had never been able by peaceful processes to join together into a German union the various small Germanic states that had arisen during the two hundred years before Napoleon's time. The growth of Prussia and the absorption of the smaller states of the German union was almost uniformly effected by military means, and when in 1870 France was conquered in a brief and spectacular campaign, military autocracy was confidently crowned with glory by the German people. Thereafter the government was supreme and molded public opinion to its will, instead of drawing its inspiration from public opinion. The growth of the empire had indeed been marvelous, but the principle of growth had been one of dependence upon military autocracy; and the spread of German culture implied the control, by that autocracy, of peoples who cherished liberty far more dearly than any benefits which German culture might bring. No one should minimize the feat of the German people in holding together in one fashion or another through the days of the Spartacist" uprisings and the final realization of Allied victory. The terrible defeat of the German armies practically destroyed the dreams and ambitions of all but a desperate and limited group. Though the people tried to delude themselves into thinking that they had not met a military defeat, they all knew that such a defeat was a reality. All thought of a greater Germany was destroyed. Every one had been fighting in the hope of victory, and when defeat came, people had no alternative purposes or new sources of enthusiasm. They had neither hope nor a common plan of action. As with the Russian people, life had lost its old meaning. It will take time to develop constructive schemes. •: - Tending still further to disorganize German life was the length of the period of the armistice and of the blockade. The Germans had no raw materials, work would not buy clothes and food, and even the habit of work itself had been destroyed by the war, at 1 The name given to radical groups, organized almost wholly in the towns, who estab- lished local governments on the communistic principle (1918–1919). Possible revival of the Ger– man Con- federation Basis of former German unity The broken spirit of Germany The long prelimi- naries of the new eſ: 204 The New World Means of COmnºleſ Ce destroyed The new constitu- tion of Germany Amount of the German indemnity least among the returned soldiers. The effect was heightened by the stories of what the treaty of peace would do to Germany. The whole Silesian district, it was reported, would be given to Poland; and for a time the belief was current that the whole Left Bank of the Rhine would be given to France. For a short time a “Republic of the Left Bank of the Rhine” was in nominal existence. In addition, German merchants had been driven out of all the Allied countries and from Africa, the Far East, Turkey, and South America. There was no basis for foreign trade. The colonies were lost and the shipping had been surrendered. Transport facilities had to be rebuilt. Raw material was doled out to the Germans. There was not sufficient work even for those who wanted to work. With the actual signing of the treaty of Versailles accomplished, Germany had her first hopes established, and immediately the radical movement received a severe check. Up to that time no German leader had a material basis for his program; he could build only on prophecy and hope. It was therefore natural that the radical and disorderly elements of the towns should have split the empire into a score of fragments. While there was a central government with headquarters at Weimar, later in Berlin, yet its authority was long recognized in only a small part of Germany. The new constitution of Germany, framed by a constitutional assembly sitting at Weimar in 1919 and adopted by the Reichstag early in 1920, has many excellent features, but it remains to be seen if the people really intend to obey its conditions. There is liberty of speech and of the press as well as of association. There is complete religious freedom. The whole structure of the government is demo- cratic — at least theoretically. The seed planted by the German thinkers and dreamers of 1848 is now bearing fruit. Though these men were exiled and imprisoned, they laid the foundations of the new Germany. The whole world was so shocked by the conduct of the war in the occupied territories and by the disclosure of sinister imperial designs in the treaties of Brest-Litovsk and Bucarest (which had put Russia and Rumania respectively in a state of economic slavery), that only actual and prolonged experience with the spirit of the new Germany will convince it that the change is sincere and last- IIlg. Working against Germany in her economic struggle are the ill-will of much of the world and the headway other European nations have made during the war in seizing foreign markets. She will find it hard to get raw materials: her competitors control nearly all the sources. Problems of the German People 205 Also, German goods will not be so readily purchased by persons who remember her evil course in 1914. Her people can overcome these handicaps only by work. According to the treaty of Versailles, for five years beginning in 1921, Germany must pay $250,000,000 a year, and thereafter $600,000,000 a year. This is arranged as interest on gold bonds amounting to $10,000,000,000, which Germany is to deliver to the Allies. A second issue of $10,000,000,000 at 5 per cent interest is to be made when Germany is thought by the Permanent Reparations Commission to be capable of paying the interest. To avoid the business checks that grow out of the indefiniteness of the reparation total it was planned to fix that total while at the same time securing Germany's assent to it. The amount proposed was $55,000,000,000, to be paid in about forty years, and an export tax in addition; but Germany's representatives aftempted to reduce this sum on the ground that it is economically impossible to pay it. When Germany finally rejected Allied proposals, French, British, and Belgian armies advanced still farther into western Germany, occupying places of strategic and industrial importance. They are to be withdrawn when Germany gives evidence of good faith in carrying out the terms of the treaty of Versailles and in meeting the first of her reparation payments. | The Allies had it in their power to impose much more severe con- ditions. In the matter of trade (which involves both access to raw materials and a market for her manufactures) Germany has come off well. Practically the only limitation is the reasonable one that her tariffs and other trade arrangements shall be uniform and shall be as favorable, at least, to her late enemies as those accorded to the trade of any other state. Even this arrangement is to be in force for five years only. Out of it may grow much simpler tariffs for all Europe. Limita- tions on German trade CHAPTER ELEVEN THE NATIONAL ExISTENCE OF AUSTRIA WHEN the Austro-Hungarian Empire fell apart in 1918, there was formed, out of the chief German-speaking element, the Republic of Austria, with Vienna as its capital and with a provisional democratic government. The frontiers remained to be defined by treaty with the Allied and Associated Powers. Ex-Emperor Charles took refuge, early in 1919, in Switzerland, where he still resides. The northern and southern Slavs set up new states; the Magyars, always loosely joined to Austria, adopted a separate national program; the Rumanians of Transylvania (Fig. 143) became a part of Greater Rumania; Galicia was included within the frontiers of Poland. These changes brought about a reduction of population from 51,000,000 for the whole Austro- Hungarian Empire (or from 28,500,000 if we exclude Hungary) before 1914 to 6,000,000 at the present time. 6 * & ls ls 5 : - O C § 3 E T H 5 - T48 - º tº e. ſ? - $ A U S T R I A º' sº hiº.Yé J’ 5.7; #: f & *\ *6 ſº * º K :- - & }* 2 rººf º Q ,--T v/\ſ * ; , ſº T O J U G 0 - S L A V I A & ,-] % *>/3 3. - ſº, .*\ f * - tº Á *r-f Q...’s *NA /23 &a, {, * 4* 3%, ’N y ----- Former boundaries *$, ...} \ • Ž% X, Y |— Present " Šs ſº Treaty of London line », Plebiscite areas %2 º ~ y, § & 2 0 22 50 100 º 200miles * FIG. 106. Division and allotment of territory of the Austro-Hungarian Empire. The plebis- cite areas are indicated by K for Klagenfurt (now Austrian), T for Teschen, O for Orawa, and S for Spits. For solution of the three last-named plebiscite areas, as recommended by the Conference of the Ambassadors, see Figure 179; for boundary between Italy and Jugo-Slavia See Figure 138. 206 The National Eavistence of Austria .*****: Innsbruck Brºgºerº af º sº 2 - “... * Yºss & Tº C, ſlºgs% exº an gº ºrgº- [. § 2 㺠jº . . . $ sº “i §§ sº |: * ºsºyººs jSºxº; * - Żë 3. 0 10 20 30 40 50 M —º- | FIG. 107. The new Austrian boundary and the principal cities of Austria. Note the Klagen- furt plebiscite area, the Southern border of which now becomes a part of the Austrian-Jugo-Slav boundary. Note also the addition to Austria of western, or German, Hungary. L is for Liechtenstein. *s #º: By the terms of the treaty of St. Germain-en-Laye, the area of Austria is reduced from 116,000 square miles to 32,000 square miles. Before the World War she had an outlet on the Adriatic at Trieste and Pola, and she also owned Dalmatia. With Hungary she controlled Bosnia and Herzegovina and thus held that long stretch of the eastern Adriatic coast that extends from the southern border of Montenegro northwestward for nearly 400 miles. With Hungary she controlled more than 700 miles of the course of the Danube. Her frontier ran for more than 1000 miles coterminous with that of Germany. She held the strategic passes in the mountains lying near the Italian frontier. East and west she had a maximum breadth of 750 miles in a straight line. North and south she extended 625 miles, thus spanning a sec- tion of country that extended from the plains of northern Europe to the Mediterranean lands on the shores of the southern Adriatic, and from the heart of the Alps on the borders of Switzerland in Worarlberg to the plain of the Vistula on the farther side of the Carpathian Mountains. The northern and southern Slavs (Czecho-Slovaks and Jugo-Slavs respectively) were chiefly in her domain. The Hungarians were allied with her in the empire. Her territory contained a large block of Ruma- nians, a smaller block of Italians, many Poles in Western Galicia, and 4,000,000 Ruthenians in Eastern Galicia and on the southern side of the Carpathians; it even included a large number of Mohammedans of Slavic race in the provinces of Bosnia and Herzegovina. Extent of the Austro- Hungarian Empire Racial complexi- ties of the empire 208 The New World Extraor- dinary layout of the national domain of Austria Fragmen- tation of Austria The empire was geographically compact; ethnically it was highly heterogeneous. It was long customary to call Austria-Hungary the polyglot empire, but it should be remembered that within the Rus- sian realm and the present British Empire there are many more ethnic complexities than Austria-Hungary had. The ethnic com- plexities of Austria-Hungary appeared the more prominent because the various elements were far more self-conscious politically and had had at one time or another a national life that formed a strong basis for continued agitation for independence. THE PRESENT TERRITORY OF AUSTRIA Viewing the Austro-Hungarian Empire with Hungary excluded, we find Austria itself to have been a fringe of country semicircular in form, reaching from near Cattaro on the eastern Adriatic north- ward to Fiume, Trieste, Vienna, and Prague; eastward to Cracow and Lemburg; and southward to Czernowitz and Kimpolung in Buko- vina (Fig. 108). The length of this fringe exceeds 2000 miles and its average width is about 100 miles, reaching over 200 miles in Bohemia and Moravia, 250 miles in the Tyrol-Salzburg-Styria region, and nar- rowing to a strip of islands in the northeastern Adriatic and to a belt of mainland only 10 miles wide in southern Dalmatia. Within this area there is great diversity of relief, of ethnography, of density of population, of products, and of means of access to the sea. Neither the courses of the rivers nor the trends of the mountains justified so extraordinary a layout of the national domain. The vari- ous fragments of larger physical and commercial regions that formed Austria were held together by no natural bonds. The southern Tyrol is now politically united to Italy, by the treaty of St. Germain. Por- tions of Istria also were Italian, and they too are added to Italy by the treaty of Rapallo, which fixed the boundary between Italy and Jugo-Slavia. Except for Zara, the Dalmatian mainland goes to Jugo- Slavia. Bohemia and Moravia, populated chiefly by branches of the northern Slavs, become a part of the Czecho-Slovak republic. Poland has obtained all of Galicia. There is added to Rumania the former Crownland of Bukovina, except for a small salient on the northern frontier, which Poland has gained. The fragments that have thus gone to a new or a rival power are in general in more natural relationship today than under the former system. The Bohemian plateau and its adjacent valleys have marked geographical unity. Galicia has a natural southern border—the The National Earistence of Austria 209 Carpathians—and a southeastward-trending valley lowland that con- tains a belt of dense population, a lowland which is continuous with the plains of the Vistula drainage basin. • $47," fº º . Nº ºZºe's º Population Density per sq.km per sq.mile 0 - 50 Cl 0 – 128 s 50–100 € 128-256 *::: **** 100-150 N. 256-384. 150–250 384-640 over 250 | _ over 640 0 70 40 60 80 100 tº -º-º-º-º-cºmmº-Fº FIG. 108. The shape and population density of Austria according to the official census of 1910. For the break-up of Austria-Hungary and the relation of its parts to the denser nuclei of popu- lation shown above, see Figure 106. Note the denser population centers of Bohemia, the band of population in Galicia, the great contrast between the Viennese district and the western part of Austria proper, and the losses on the south to Italy and Jugo-Slavia. After Wallis, in the Geographical Review, July 1918. Only a small portion of the Austrian frontier was left to a decision Klagenfurt by plebiscite – the Klagenfurt area (Fig. 109). In trying to separate ...”.” Jugo-Slavs (Slovenes at this point) from Austrians, there was one results feature of the physical geography that gave much trouble. The Klagenfurt basin is enclosed by high land. It would seem wise to treat as a unit a region so well-marked by nature and by commercial relations. But the southern side of the basin is peopled by Slovenes, the northern side by Austrians. The city of Klagenfurt, with a popula- tion of 29,000, has a German majority, though this condition is of recent development. The matter was settled by a plebiscite in October 1920. It was arranged to take the vote in two zones, a northern and a southern. The people of the southern zone voted first and decided to join Austria. This made it unnecessary to take a vote in the north- ern district, which automatically remains Austrian territory. 210 The New World . Ethnic differences Present distribu- tion of population *, RACIAL ELEMENTS In sympathy with the main outlines of the physical system was the distribution of the linguistic groups within Austria—there is no “Austrian” race. Thus the tendency toward the break-up of Austria which is indicated by the unnatural physical relationship was reën- forced by the strong ethnic differences. The following table, based on the Austrian census of 1910, shows how the 28,500,000 total pop- ulation of Austria was distributed among the 17 provinces: PopULATION, NATIONALITY, AND RELIGIONS OF AUSTRIA * PERCENTAGEs POPULATION PROVINCE IN THousANDS RELIGION - NATIONALITY Lower Austria . 3,532 96% Roman Catholic 96% German . . . . . . . . Upper Austria . 853 97 &&. & £ 100 “ . . . . . . . . Salzburg . . . 215 98 é & § { 100 & & e < * * * * * * Styria . . . . 1,444 98 & & & & 71 & 4 29% Slovene Carinthia . . . 396 94 & & § { 79 “ 21 é & Carniola . . . 526 100 & & & & 94 Slovene . . . . . . . . Trieste . . . 230 95 é & $ 5 62 Italian 30 Slovene Goritzia . . . . 261 99 & & & 4 62 Slovene 36 Italian Istria. . . . . 404 || 99 & 4 & & 44 Serbo-Croat 38 é & Tyrol . . . . 947 99 & & § { 57 German 42 é & Vorarlberg . . 145 98 & 6 “ 95 “ . . . . . . . . Bohemia . . . . '6,770 96 & £ & & 63 zech 37 German Moravia . . . 2,622 95 “ & £ 72 & 6 28 & 6 Silesia . . . . 757 84 & 4 § { 44 German 32 Pole Galicia . . . 8,026 47 & & & £ 59 Pole 40 Ruthenian Bukovina. . . 800 68 Greek Orthodox 38 Ruthenian 34 Rumanian Dalmatia . . . 646 83 Roman Catholic 96 Serbo-Croat tº e º $ tº e º 'º Total . . . . 28,574 The new state has a population exceeding 6,000,000, distributed approximately as follows: ..- * Lower Austria 3,500,000 Tyrol and Vorarlberg 450,000 Upper Austria 850,000 Styria 750,000 Salzburg 200,000 Carinthia 300,000 In the case of Tyrol, Styria, and Carinthia, only the German districts that are left to Austria are counted. Owing partly to the conditions of life under an autocratic gov- ernment and partly to the general economic tendencies of the time, including growing industrialization, emigration from Austria rose to Emigration from Aus- tria 1 Up to this point we have been dealing chiefly with western European peoples. We now have to deal with new national and linguistic elements. Here we face the problem of the Magyar and the Slav. The reader should turn to Figures 111, 120, and 121 and to related pages for a general view of the population elements listed in this table. The National Eatistence of Austria 13°30 Tºo º }S^ śnd Kogel º - *Sºrt 6'a 2 Z §§§ sº AP A º Osfènić 4.6°30' °º: *==º PS C § º : &Mi-, -a, §ſ:::::::...!ºiº/; Cabine ޺mar" § ~ : § 3-3 4\$ N § § išºws Sºy: - º, Yºse& tº " Fezz Oſ, i: % Armé%. X; Aormer bound. & A in \ § ſ E º-35 % º 6efween º o ..; § sº 2^ and Carboſa i...' ** ***** Scale of miles N. : § 19 15 20 —a-a-a-a- 3: 13 ag. J 14° FIG. 109. The Klagenfurt plebiscite area. Austria on the north rather than be transferred to Jugo-Slavia on the south. As a result of this action, district II avoided a vote and automatically remained with Austria. higher and higher figures in the years before the World War. From 1910 to 1913, the total net emigration from Austria to the United States averaged more than 80,000 a year, of which 36 per cent were Poles, 24 per cent Ruthenians, 10 per cent Czechs, and 7 per cent Germans. For many years 75 per cent of the overseas emigration from Austria has been to the United States, with 12 per cent to Canada and 4 per cent to South America, chiefly Argentina and Brazil. Within Austria itself there was a tendency toward migration of the people from the country to Vienna and other large towns. In the period from 1880 to 1910, twelve towns had an increase of be- tween 60 and 120 per cent, including such places as Vienna, Czer- nowitz, and Innsbruck among German towns, Lemberg and Cracow District I voted in October 1920 to remain with ** Dispro- portion between city and country populations among Polish towns, Pilsen and Budweis among Czech towns, and Trieste among Italian towns, to mention the best-known places on the list. - - Among these Vienna had the most unnatural growth, partly be- cause, as the capital of an empire of 51,000,000 people, it attracted thousands of officials, soldiers, and tradesmen and had a number of imperial institutions, and partly because of the forced growth of industries and its reputation as a center of culture. It now contains 2,000,000 people out of a total Austrian population of 6,000,000, a disproportion in population between capital and country greater than that of any other state in central Europe. Merely to exist requires of Vienna an economic and industrial reorganization of the most ex- treme kind. Already the suffering has been terrible; it remains to be seen if violence and anarchy can be averted. - Special problem of Vienna 212 . The New World Economic weakness of Austria : A defi- ciency of food The prime need for fuel The hard conditions of life in Austria after the World War and the hopelessness of the future led to a separatist movement in western Austria among the people of the Tyrol and Worarlberg. For a further discussion of the matter see page 185. THE ECONOMIC PLIGHT OF THE COUNTRY If we now turn to the distribution of the crops and other resources as a basis for understanding the present condition of Austria with its non-German elements excluded, we shall find the country left in a strikingly helpless condition. Unnatural as the population , distributions appear in Figure 108, the region had one great advan- tage over its present condition — it was economically strong. If it did not produce all that it needed, at least it had the means to import and pay for what it lacked. Railway systems were laid out with regard to the trend of trade, and the fact that they are now crossed by international boundaries results in great inconvenience. In principle, the relocation of a boundary always seriously disturb custom, a powerful force in economic life. - Let us see what Austria has lost by the setting up of the new nations formed in part from the several fragments of former Austria. The Czechs were the chief producers of sugar beets. Moravia was the most successful farming province, standing ahead of Bohemia in this respect. Maize and wine were produced in the Slovene region of Alpine forelands; barley was produced chiefly in Bohemia and Galicia. Istria was famous for its maize and wine; Goritzia yielded wheat and maize. If we now exclude Hungary in addition to the subtractions already made, the situation of present-day Austria from the standpoint of food will be still clearer. The total wheat crop of Austria was about one quarter of the Hungarian crop. She must import corn, barley, wheat, rye, and other supplies from Hungary, Bohemia, Russia, and Rumania, by way of poor railroads and along the Danube and connecting canals. Since Austria has been set up as a separate state, her difficulties have been especially increased by lack of fuel. She has to import practically all her coal, and she needs a million tons merely for the elementary purposes of heat, light, and street railways. About half a million tons was promised from Poland and Czecho-Slovakia in 1919 soon after the close of the war, but only half the promised quantity was delivered in that year and 1920. Nor can Austria start her industries again without help from outside, for she has no rubber, : FIG. 110. - - - - - - Innsbruck in the Tyrol. a º, - º *- º º º - - - - - º º º - - - - --- º s -º- - ºn - - - . - - º º The town lies in western Austria, where there has been a strong separatist tendency since 1918. 214 The New World chemicals, fats, oil, or wool with which to supply her mills. She needs also copper and petroleum. There is very little iron. These conditions appear the more serious when we consider that Austria was formerly an industrial country, and 40 per cent of the total in- dustrial population of the empire lived in Austria. To create a trade balance, Austria must manufacture and export, and if she is to become a strong nation, she will have to do this more Tendency to unite with Germany Principal terms of the treaty efficiently than in the past. Working to her advantage is her posi- tion in central Europe. There are already in operation the canals, waterways, and short hauls for the products of her factories. On the other hand, her sea outlets are no longer open to unrestricted use and development; they are in the hands of other powers. Only the Danube is left as a water connection with the commercial high- ways of the sea. It is difficult to see how Austria can create a com- mercial fleet under these conditions. . It is natural that, confronted by these difficulties, the Austrian leaders should have turned more and more to the possibilities of a union with Germany. In March 1919, the National Assembly framed a constitution which declared that German-Austria was part of the German Republic. It went on to say that the union was dependent upon arrangements yet to be made. But the Allied and Associated Powers required Austria to remain a separate country, at least until some future time. Again on 1 October 1920 the project was revived by the Austrian National Assembly, which directed the government to carry out within six weeks a plebiscite on the union of Austria with Germany, but it was never held. Such action would have the special support of the Pan-Germans. France would always oppose the project because of her fear of increasing the strength of her traditional enemy. For the same reason the project will be opposed by the small central European states just created, who are naturally suspicious of any augmentation of German power. With Austria joined to her, Germany would have a population of 65,000,000, as compared with the 64,000,000 she had before the war. THE TREATY BETWEEN THE ALLIED POWERS AND AUSTRIA According to the treaty of St. Germain-en-Laye, Austria agrees to the following conditions, among others: (1) Austria renounces all rights to territory formerly held by the Austro-Hungarian Empire outside the boundaries shown on Figure 107. This includes both the territory formerly held by the empire but now assigned to Jugo-Slavia, Italy, Czecho- The National Ealistence of Austria 215 (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Slovakia, Poland, and Rumania, and also all her former rights and privileged positions in Morocco, Egypt, Siam, and China (concessions at Tientsin). She agrees to abolish universal military service, promises not to maintain an army of more than 30,000 men (under con- ditions laid down by the Allies), surrenders all her war vessels and aircraft, and submits to limitations respecting the manu- facture of war material or trade in it. She promises to deliver for trial all persons accused of acts in violation of the rules of war. (As in the case of Germany, this clause was modified so as to limit the delivery of accused persons to a small number of the worst cases, which would serve as an example.) She acknowledges her indebtedness for the costs of the war and engages to pay an amount of reparation to be determined by the Permanent Reparations Commission, payments to ex- tend through a period of thirty years and to begin 1 May 1921. (As an immediate advance she agreed to deliver live stock to Italy, Jugo-Slavia, and Rumania, during a period of three months after the coming into force of the treaty.) t She grants freedom of transit through her realm for goods and persons passing to or from the territories of the Allied and Associated Powers, who are to enjoy most-favored-nation treatment. The Danube from Ulm (Fig. 103) is declared an international river, together with all navigable parts of its system. The courses of the Morava and the Tisza, in so far as they form the frontier between Jugo-Slavia and Austria, are also declared international. She is assured free access to the Adriatic, and freedom of transit for postal, telegraphic, and telephonic services. In view of the clearly defined ethnic frontier between the German Austrians and the Hungarians in western Hungary, this frontier, with slight rectifications, was taken as the international boundary between the two states as recognized in the treaty of St. Germain- en-Laye. The change in boundary in western Hungary transfers 25,000 German-speaking people to Austria. This is the only case in Europe where an enemy power was given additional territory, though it is to be noted that the gift was made at the expense of another enemy power — Hungary — and that Austria lost elsewhere much more than she gained here. Rectifi- cation of boundary between Hungary and Austria CHAPTER TWELVE Difficulties following upon the division of Hun- gary THE NEW HUN GARY HUNGARY has existed for a thousand years. Since 1867 it has been joined with Austria to form the Austro-Hungarian (or “Dual”) Empire. The chief bond of union was the Crown. Each country had a separate parliament, and while there was a unified tariff system and joint consent was required to commercial treaties with foreign countries, in almost every matter of common interest there was the most violent difference of opinion between the two kingdoms. Only the clear recognition of their economic interdependence prevented the rupture of the empire and the complete political independence of Hungary. They agreed only as late as 1907, and after a bitter con- test, to improve railway transportation conditions, each for the other's benefit. Suddenly the aims of the Hungarian nationalists were achieved with the collapse of the Austro-Hungarian armies in October 1918. Hungary became an independent state. But she was not to be consti- tuted of the large block of territory which she had acquired by her centuries-old struggle. The thousand years of Hungary’s existence had also been in large part years of oppression for most non-Magyar peoples – Rumanians in Transylvania, Slovenes in Slavonia, Serbs in the Banat and elsewhere. The break-up of the empire offered these peoples an opportunity for political independence within roughly ethnic frontiers, and whatever the economic cost, they were determined to shake off Magyar rule. What they did not foresee was the inconvenience and disorganization that actual separation from Hungary would bring to the machinery of life — for themselves as well as their Magyar overlords. Cherished political freedom was won, but at a cost equal to that of a year of war. It was the chief argument of the Magyar leaders during the period of the peace treaties of Paris (1919–1920) that a people accustomed to living together within long-established frontiers should not be torn apart, lest the organized life it had taken so long to develop should be destroyed. A new international boundary would cut across rail- Ways, Watercourses, roads, and recognized administrative districts, requiring the creation of scores of new customs houses and railway stations; shipments would long be confused and delayed; food and fuel could not be distributed promptly and evenly; a fairly well- balanced production of live stock, cereals, forage, minerals, and manufactured goods would be impossible. 216 The New Hungary 217 ·6/I o Inēſā 90s quouroſQq05 pôsođorđ sųđş pua ‘gae.IO ‘uoqoso L aqq IOÀI ‘uoqosa L Jog sp L ºsoțoaſ ‘6 ſ (streț -uſer>{(n) su equaqqnyſ ‘8 : su eſ reāInq ‘Z : streſueuing ‘9 : sueſeņI ºg : SAęIS-Oãn r 'ſ : suguIJøſ) ºg! Sx[8AOIS-OųoøZO ‘z : suaſ reāun H ‘I : SIBIeuanu Oļ KøXI *(8I6 I ’000’00g“I : I) geņS [eraueſ) qsņț18 eqq &q edo InGI uJeſsee pue[8JQueo go sďguu oſuqqa aqq uIoIį pagſpolu pub pºzĮIelaua? oJº edo InGI Ļeņuoo yo seſ Iļu noo aqq Joy sdeur Jeņuſs puſe sȚųJ, ‘seqeņs poȚIIV O) uloq, uïsse oſ auſsop oqº, pub sÁBAIĪGI øq? Jo suoņſsođ pieaxſae oq oq ÂȚIeđļou! Id qniou pua nseº aqq uo enp \\ sea souĮI KIępunoq Ibuoſągu 194uſ pub oſuqņa uøøAqaq KouređøJosip oq L 'OZI !!!) qqſa oređuIOO ”uusſquapa II, snore? ;). $* -uap oq paºl Águi qeqq uoſqanqļ8 8 3u}\bolo Snq} ‘04848 \eq} pºſſolſe seda Kıbā un H oſūtņa ugqq ssºſ õuȚqqøūros (III ºbț¢\º^) »T Źžºgº, | –9 d. „ſ- ſae ae *III ‘āſ H 04 KøXI 'W 001 09 09 07 02 0 Se9.Je 9ļļOS!Q9|d ) ( ) ſº │ │ │ è.œ}} §3 $\, jsºļuepunoqluosºdd Ģģijºſ --~~~----Kue6unų %%%%%40 Kuepun0q p|0 :!źø}ø šºşý {• �%$§$%]%]%ſaeuºſmūsų puſo .ż (ºț¢,2} ); }№ “№ſae saqueuoffenpºx|W 22Z283 JOE’A”Zſőý ſ g.ģ% %|-2 ØŹ%%;£�# !}}0%ſae%%ſae ſú$2§%% ׫-ºſ ?^J/ae,ý: ,%ØYNNE ( )Z $2§§Š%%% • NNN|-...gº:№::::::::::#;:373 <<<>e ) »º∞ SRÜNN NÒNNNſy-O ŞŠŅŠş№NŠŅ$%Ø»),-· §ŽŠ-Ø&NNNaeff §ŅŇŇÈŞŅ%ŽýØ%%$$% ĶŘšź•%}ț¢ÂĞģ}{{ý NSNÄSNINNS™`N&ŅŠØ%v , !$%$§$%%%;"ØJÄLſlalº NNNNNNNNNNSS&ŅĶS``,``SNSN3№. !}»№,[×22°�••، N`§§§Ņ%$§èÈ№ģ%%%%%Z€ /ZZºº --©,ſae ŅŇŅŅŅŇ�ŠŅŇſºŻ////, ;· }`N`````№&£§§ ÑŅŇNº SNSŅ§§■■ N. ŅŅŇ-NNN!!ØNNNN ÑÑŅŅŇŇ NSN KØ&%22%22&N’SYNĘ ÑŅŇ7&ĶSS [BILJØÇ Zz %%%$%%ZsueluefiunH ! Ø$§§ :• %ZZZ% ſae %%% ſaeź%ØSRSSNNS %%@Ź}% 0) {UT : %% 218 The New World The new State a small and weak frag- ment of former Hungary Scale I: 8,250,000 Per Per 50 0. 50 500 miles sq. kilometer sq. mile [T] under 50 under 128 [[[T] 50 – 100 128 – 256 3. E 100–250 256–640 *~~ [-º] over 250 over 640 º I V7 aſ S Nº. |}} º "...i. *RETo E. P º Q N() ſº º 22 §e ſ - E-i Cl --.º GCº5.d aC. :BW E l C! º #. º \ i & º al THE GEogR. REview, bec. 1917 HUNGARY : POPULATION DENSITY IN | 9 || 0 FIG. 112. Population densities in Hungary. (After Wallis.) Of over one hundred principal centers of population (solid black) in Hungary as formerly constituted, about 12 are now trans ferred to Jugo-Slavia, 25 to Rumania, over 30 to Czecho-Slovakia, and about 35 remain in Hungary. New boundaries are shown by solid heavy lines; the outermost line (broken) rep- resents the former boundary of Hungary. THE DIFFICULTY OF MAINTAINING INATIONAL EXISTENCE The new Hungary is indeed a problem. Within its present bound- aries it is one of the smallest states of central Europe in both area (35,000 square miles South Carolina has 30,500 square miles) and population (7,500,000, or 210 per square mile – Connecticut has 230 per square mile). Comparison with the pre-war area of 125,600 square miles and population of 20,900,000 (in 1910) shows a reduction to about one third of its former greatness. As in the case of Austria, a large part of the population is centered in a single city, Budapest, which had about 900,000 inhabitants in 1914. Of Magyars and closely related groups in former Hungary, 2,000,000 are left out- side her present boundaries. Of these the most compact group is composed of the Szeklers of Transylvania. - A mountainous border (Fig. 113) has been taken away on the north, the east, and the extreme southwest, leaving a flat plain with little The New Hungary 219 14 16 J& 20, Scale | 8250 OOO I 50 100 miles *over 1200 meters 800-1200 meters 3%400-800 meters Ø200-400 meters D below 200 meters % 2?; ſºft % Z2 sº% Pº & º 52A Öğ %% º % º º ; I [tº §§º % 2. - * 52 Szege 3%Nº 3.2% º sº ~. gº 2 º - - ſº Argº A. agreb Cººs Jº | *.*, *. Fºl IX à: § % %. §ºss º SN I źs º ... . ºf &% 3 * , $ºśº.º.º.B - ğ& ź. §§2632 A SNeus sº sº º } 2% Ø & Šºć APEvžCºrsº, Z' §§§º % §§3%. ºğ % §º %2% & * % N 44 l 3. THE GEOGR REVIEW, Dec. 97. HUNGARY : RELIEF FIG. 113. Hungary lost chiefly mountain country as a result of the war, but she also lost the richest plains country, the Banat (Fig. 142), which went to Rumania and Jugo-Slavia. wood and practically no water power. The country has neither suf- ficient fuel nor the raw materials with which to produce an adequate supply of manufactured goods. Even before the war it imported a third of its coal supply. Its frontiers everywhere lie upon an open plain. Can such a state survive? Certainly it cannot grow unless treaty arrangements permit the old currents of trade to resume their flow, perhaps in modified form; for a reasonable degree of economic pros- perity is the first essential to successful government. No political party can retain the confidence of the national parliament and man- age public affairs steadily unless its program rests upon a hopeful economic basis. This is true in Hungary as well as in Italy, or Russia, or Great Britain. Even with a loan with which to start her industries and import raw materials, it would be difficult for Hungary to avoid anarchy. It is customary to lay the blame for Hungary's plexus of evils upon the treaty-making powers at the Peace Conference of Paris; but it should be remembered that the prime causes of evil are the accumu- Can Hun- gary Sur- vive P Causes of Hungary's distress 220. The New World The Hun- garians, or Magyars, a steppe people º º º - º * * 7. * S. Sººns Fig. 114. The city of Budapest, capital of Hungary. - - - - -- --- º - - - - - - - | º Wilſº º -- A T lations of centuries—oppression of non-Magyar peoples by Magyars, a medieval system of land tenure long discarded by France and Great Britain, a strangle hold upon the peasant (Magyar as well as non- Magyar) of the commercial system of the town, managed by powerful merchants, mainly Jews. Add to these causes the four anxious and devastating years of war and the crushing disappointments of defeat, and it is clear that the people of Hungary would naturally strike out blindly against every proposal of restraint. For a time there was downright Bolshevism, and then a wave of reaction toward a monarchical form of government. MAGYAR RELATIONS WITH THE SUBJECT RACES The Magyars For hundreds of years the ruling class in Hungary has been the Magyars. Who are they? Whence did they come? They are a steppe people, originally a race of nomadic horsemen, who conquered the grasslands of the middle Danube basin about 895 A.D. They have always been a plains people and have left to others the bordering highlands. In the period of their early development in the grass- lands of Hungary, they repeatedly ravaged Europe from mid-Russia to westward of the Rhine. With a language totally different from The New Hungary 221 *> -- Buda on the left, Pest on the right, looking upstream. Brown Bros. that of their neighbors and a territory bordered for long distances by high wooded mountains, holding the heart of the land, they have stood together socially and politically, alien alike in speech and custom from the peoples whom they conquered, - the Rumans of Transylvania, the Ruthenians of the central Carpathian foothills, the Serbs north of the Danube, and the Slovaks of Slovakia. Out of a total Hungarian population of 20,900,000 in 1910, the Magyars claimed 48 per cent, but this number is excessive. The Magyars' present claim to the gratitude of western European powers rests on their long struggle with the Turk. From 1363 on, when Turkish and Hungarian armies first met near Adrianople, the conflict was almost continuous. In 1529 and again in 1683 Vienna was besieged; but the second siege was lifted by the help of the Polish leader Sobieski, and in 1699 the Sultan acknowledged the rule of the Hapsburgs over all Hungary and Transylvania except the Banat. The subject races of Hungary were separated from each other on the rim of the central Hungarian plain. This separation and their unlikeness in speech and race prevented them in times past from uniting to fight the Magyar. Hungarian rulers gave them neither freedom of the press nor the right of association. In some notable instances, persons who made even trivial exhibitions of non-Magyar sentiment were cruelly persecuted; almost all officials were Magyars; The Ma- gyar as the outpost of Europe against the Turk 222 The New World Magyar oppression of subject rºl CeS Hungary surrounded by enemies After Wallis. elections were a farce; subject peoples |- 1880 1890 1900 1910 were practically unrepresented in the - 88WarS national parliament. ..HUNGARY º gy With ". for landholding, the Populatº GROWTH, A Jews Magyar, like the landlord of feudal NATONALITIES ſº times, has occupied huge estates, and # this system of land tenure has pressed Hungary |Éms most heavily upon the subject border peoples. In the towns the Jewish Magyar as merchant and banker has eventually dominated the peasantry as well as the artisan classes. The new boundaries have recast ethnic percentages in such a way as to raise Slovaks the proportion of Jews from 5 to 7 per Germans Cent. - .*1 Serbo-Croats • • ... e. O = •e Hungary is ringed about by enemies. The GEOGR. REVIEW, Aug. 1918 Hatred of the Magyar is traditional FIG. 115. Diagram showing, by national- with the people who are now her ities, the population growth in Hungary neighbors. Even in Magyaria itself proper (exclusive of Croatia-Slavonia) tº º fº isão º 1910. Logarithmic scale, the autocratic ruling class has been hated by the Magyar peasantry, whose economic condition has been only a shade better than that of the subject races. The latter were also denied equality of educational privileges, especially in districts where they were numerically greater. 25 A Rumanians The Rumanian and German Elements Of all the subject peoples of Hungary the Rumanians were the most numerous, 3,000,000 in all. Behind them stood the people of the Rumanian nation, to whom they appealed constantly for libera- tion. Magyar persecution inevitably pressed hardest upon them, for their chances of liberation were best. If they were lost, so also would be lost to Hungary a million Szeklers and German-speaking subjects inhabiting the Carpathian foothill region east of Maros- Vasarhely and about Kronstadt (Fig. 143). Persecution was justified by the central Hungarian government on the ground that the Ruma- nians formed an illiterate peasantry incapable of ruling themselves." In late years the German element in Hungary has been declining in both influence and number. The scattered settlements of the German 1 For further discussion of Transylvania see Chapter Fifteen, page 283. The New Hungary is /* WEST-CENTRAL HUNGARY " Nº º, MOVEMENT OF THE POPULATION { —f º O Scale gf miles 5 rs ºf \ /N. & ! _j^\,, @ ecº-Q) c ~ſ: AS'- &. <—[JJ | r Q. cr' ‘. . . º * sº § {\,…sº & ^ ūJº -A \, `-- G } 2^- º ^ / M. P. j <-LJ. & § Y *. ~! \ f (^\5 Q } & Al-J - A \. V A tº . t <–[J. ſ- T. Inward sº !--J —). migration t 2 ºv Outward }. _r’ *-L-I migration \. * rºl <-O Emigration 36 *S-y M Magyars 46– G Germans J Jews rheatoen. Review. Now sle Y 2. 22 FIG. 116. Compare with Figures 123, 128, and 146 for results of Magyar oppression as a whole. Inward and outward migration refer to movements of population in and out of the region here shown in relation to the rest of Austria-Hungary, while emigration refers to movement to other countriss. The heavy solid lines denote present boundaries. After Wallis. have not tended to make him politically strong. Emigration has been chiefly to America. In all there were about 2,000,000 Ger- mans scattered here and there throughout Hungary. Their ancestors had been brought in principally during the 16th and 17th centuries in the process of beating back the Turk, first as frontier guards, to which fact witness still the German fortress-churches and the habit of stor- ing grain near the churches as a safeguard in case of attack. Later, as colonists, they received grants of lands, freedom from taxation, and financial assistance in house building and the stocking of their farms. Many German place names dot the map of eastern Hungary. Wherever the Germans have gone, they have kept their ancestral customs and maintained separate German schools. For the most part they have lived in groups of villages. Their conservative and alien ways have kept racial antagonisms alive, but it is difficult to see how this could have been avoided; for on the whole they have represented a far more advanced type of living and could hardly have been expected to lower their standards to fit those of the people about them. Their scattered settlements form a speech mosaic very hard to reconcile with any principle of boundary making. German settlements in Hun- gary The Ger- man colo- nist's dis- dain of his neighbors 224 º The New World Ruthenians in Hun- gary an overflow from East- ern Galicia Treatment by the . Magyars Reasons for assigning Galicia to Poland Rise of Bolshevism The Ruthenians of Northeastern Hungary, Eastern Galicia, and Bukovina The Ruthenians were scarcely heard of before the World War. Yet there are 35,000,000 of them in central-eastern Europe, if we include the Ukrainians." In former Russia were 30,000,000 of them; 3,500,000 live in former Austria (Galicia and Bukovina chiefly), and 500,000 in former Hungary. Those in Hungary represented an over- flow of Ruthenians from their homeland in Eastern Galicia and Russia, across the relatively low passes of the central Carpathians to the edge of the Hungarian plain. * * - In Hungary the Magyars have pressed heavily upon the Ruthenians. Since 1880, every effort has been made to occupy the region with Magyars and thus drive a wedge between the main body of Ruthenians (in Galicia and the Carpathian valleys) and the Slovaks on the west. Education among them was discouraged by the Magyar overlords. Without Ruthenian schools or newspapers there was naturally a high percentage of illiteracy and almost no political self-consciousness. Though incorporated with Czecho-Slovakia to the number of 475,000, they occupy a privileged autonomous position. In order to unite Poland and Rumania and combine their strength against Bolshevist Russia, and also to join to their kinsmen the Poles who dwell in the towns of Eastern Galicia, the whole of that province is desired by Poland. This would place about 3,000,000 Ruthenians (a clear majority in Eastern Galicia) under Polish rule. In the province of Bukovina, 300,000 of them are assigned to Rumania. The main body of Ruthenians in Russia formed a part of Ukrainia (page 400), which for a time vanished from the map with Bolshe- vist control of Russia, but which may return eventually.” DISORDERs FOLLOWING THE END OF THE WORLD WAR In the land situation we have part explanation of the revolution of 1919 in Hungary and the quick growth of Bolshevism. In the face of approaching famine and with the collapse of the government that followed the abdication of the Emperor after the armistice of November 1918, the peasants seized the land and killed numbers of the landlords. Many of the larger estates were placed in the hands of coöperative production societies. Step by step with the disorders * The word “Ruthenian” is now generally assigned only to the Ukrainians of Galicia, Bukovina, and former Hungary. * For a discussion of the Slovaks, Jugo-Slavs, and Rumanians formerly under Hungarian rule see the several chapters on these nationalities. . . The New Hungary . 225 of the countryside went the disorders of the towns, where the food situation was even worse. Completely freed from restraint, the evil elements of the population took advantage of the times to commit excesses. What was started in the form of a civil war, to win political and economic freedom, became wild disorder and crime. Karolyi began a sane and democratic program of reform (October 1918 to March 1919); he was succeeded by the “Reds,” or Bolshevists, under Bela Kun (March to August 1919), who were in turn succeeded by a provisional government that represents little more than a succes- sion of self-appointed public committees. The general tendency has been toward control by representatives of the old monarchical régime, and both Admiral Horthy and ex-Emperor Charles are thought possible candidates for the throne in a constitutional monarchy. Bolshevism in Hungary was marked by downright theft from the public treasury of millions of dollars. The money was distributed on the order of no central authority and without obtaining receipts. It is a melancholy thought that here, as in Russia, there should have been started a liberal movement which at once degenerated into rob- bery. Hope turned to disgust when the people saw that in the name of liberty a new and terrible burden of loss had been laid upon them. OCCUPATIONS BY RIVAL BORDER STATES The portions of Hungary that were lost to her by the terms of the treaty of peace were occupied during 1919 and 1920 by rival bor- dering states. No one of these states waited until the peace treaty with Hungary was signed, but against the orders of the Peace Confer- ence of Paris they rushed in to occupy the land they expected to receive. While Rumania was the most extreme and the one which seized and carried away the greatest amount of property, all followed the same general policy. Rumania first went beyond the demarcation line set for her armies by the Allied and Associated Powers, then passed the line of the pro- posed new boundary, invaded central Hungary itself, and early in August 1919 occupied the capital, Budapest. In the two following months she defied the Peace Conference, and seized and sent to Rumania vast quantities of supplies. Her excuse was that much more had been requisitioned in Rumania by the Austro-Hungarian army authorities in the period of military occupation before the close of the war. In addition to the Rumanian advance, Hungary suffered aggression at the hands of two other neighbors. At Pécs the Jugo-Slavs occu- Rumanian occupation of Hungary 226 The New World Similar OCCupa- tions else- where Hungary not well- balanced economically Hungary’s coal de- posits The cen- tral plain, the Alföld pied certain coal mines of Hungary without authorization. Lack of restraint was shown also in the acts of violence committed in the plebiscite area of Klagenfurt and in the occupation of Montenegro with several military contingents and persecution of members of the anti-Serbian party. Czecho-Slovakia likewise surpassed her demarca- tion line, before being authorized by the Peace Conference of Paris; and, like the Serbians and Rumanians, she began at once to persecute and drive out of the newly won lands the people who had formerly persecuted her. The military occupation of portions of Hungary by Czecho-Slovakia, Rumania, and Jugo-Slavia was not discontinued until the summer of 1920, after the peace treaty with Hungary had been signed, and then only under pressure of the Allied powers. AGRICULTURE AND INDUSTRY IN THE NEW HUNGARY The new state of Hungary is chiefly a plains country. It will have an excess of agricultural products for export, and it will have to import nearly all its manufactured goods, both now and in the future. The Tisza, next to the Danube the principal stream, has a fall of only a hundred feet in the two hundred miles from the Carpathian foothills to its junction with the Danube. The sources of the tributary streams that drain the Hungarian plain are all in foreign hands. Water power is therefore unavailable. There is no precious metal in Hungary. There are, however, several important deposits of coal. The reserves of the Pécs field are said to amount to 110,000,000 tons, and the coal is of excellent quality. The Jugo-Slavs wish to exploit the Pécs mines (Fig. 131) for five years, as compensation for the destruction of their mines by the Austro- German armies. The losses of coal which Hungary suffers as a result of the new boundary arrangements affect chiefly her reserve supplies, and she loses but a comparatively small part of the coal beds in which production is practicable. Of her former iron-ore deposits those left to her represent but a fifth of her former production (more than a million tons in 1913). All the salt resources are in the ceded lands. The central plain of Hungary is called the Alföld (Fig. 113). It is a western outpost of the vast Eurasian steppe, and was formed by the gradual silting up of a great Alpine sea, remnants of which survive in shallow lagoons. The climate is of an extreme continental type, and the Alföld, a true grass steppe, is naturally treeless, in parts even semi-desert. Flooding is characteristic of the streams. This is especially true of the Tisza, and hence few towns have arisen on its The New Hungary 227 BOUNDARIES IN THE TISZAVALLEY mºm New boundaries A Abarzdozzed and * Zzzzzzzzazzez zzzeanders T-Regulatedriver Scale of miles £º: - *—49–38–43–52 gºoodareas IEEEogº.seview.nic.iºn ºf FIG. 117. The Alföld is the large and fertile central plain of former Hungary. Its chief river is the Tisza. The correction and control of the Tisza permits the use of most of the lands formerly flooded. The map shows the location of the new boundaries in the Tisza valley where Jugo- Slavia, Hungary, and Rumania meet. To reach the Danube a barge at Nagyvárad must pass through a corner of Hungary. Note the manner in which the boundary between Jugo-Slavia. and Rumania in the Banat (west of Temesvár) crosses the streams. These inconveniences were considered less important than railroad questions (see Figure 135). Modified from map in the Geographical Review, December 1917. banks. Szeged, the chief town on the river, was practically destroyed by flood in 1879. Between the Danube and the Tisza are patches of lagoon and some rather extensive arid, sandy tracts. The influence of the drainage network on the life of the low-lying where the plain is shown in a number of striking ways. The people live mainly . On the intermediate levels. East of the Tisza, floods are frequent live 228 The New World The rich agricul- tural region what Hun- gary can produce PRODUCTION CEREALS Scale 1: 8250 000 - º Wheat Barley Oats Rye Maize BO miles 3500-4500 A || A 2 A3 A4 A5 2500-3500 8 | 82 B3 B4- B 5 ~, 1500-2500 C 1 C2 C3 C4 C 5 A-ly º [[III] E ſ 'N SN º 3& N CXX2/CNNY XX}^NY &f §: & ſº 52 0xC r’ & C ! >\ 2. \ 92 \ XX CO & 2& **, - - Sºx) * * & º &ºf $3& S&^& e” §s R& & - §ºxe-Cº. §38º3: & - *º - º Qº XXXX XXX XXX: sº - º §3333333333 S&S ~2-/- gº ×׺ §§º & S& ÇKXX * & & - - 3 & ÖxXXSºxxºxx. KXXXXXX - º sº KXXXXXXXXXX-XSXXXXXX& º º “N re-r º £323 º & 333333. ę #2S2. KXtſºxxx. A 223 tº º- £383 & º &^*\ % & º ~~ Cyße * % Nº 2:22. tºº º * 2§ HUNGARY: PRODUCTION OF CEREALS IN 1900 FIG. 118. A comparison of former (broken) and present (solid) boundary lines shows what Hun- gary has lost. and dry house sites are not easy to find. Long stretches of the Danube, the Tisza, the Maros, the Drave, and the Save serve as county boundaries. Nearly three fourths of the people of Hungary derived their living from the land. In the region east of the Tisza, noted for its wheat and maize, the yield of wheat equals that on the best wheat lands of England and northeastern France. Sugar beets, potatoes, and oats also are grown extensively, both east and west of the Danube. Cattle are raised everywhere. The boundary line of greatest productivity tends to follow the limit of Magyar speech at the edge of the Transyl- vanian Mountains. - Reduced to the limits of the new boundaries Hungary becomes a still ore exclusively agricultural state. Though she loses the maize and wheat lands of the Bačka and the Banat and the barley and sugar beet fields and rich pastures of the Little Alföld north of the Danube, the area of good agricultural land is higher in proportion to the population. The population is reduced approximately to 35 per cent. Wheat and rye are 40 per cent and 62 per cent respectively The New Hungary - 229 Dijºn FARM ANIMALS iſe Cattle Horses Pigs Sheep rºw ºr "º". Scale I : 8250 000 50 miles A3 A4 B3 B4. 50-400 (Eve C 3 C 4. *# tº III. Bº re HUNGARY: DISTRIBUTION OF FARM ANIMALS IN 19|O FIG. 119. Losses due to the creation of new states are suggested by the difference between the present (solid) and the former (broken) boundaries of Hungary. of former yields, barley 47 per cent, maize 27 per cent, and sugar beets 37 per cent. Such a proportion of crop yield to population might seem to indicate a very favorable situation, but it should be remembered that agricultural products are almost the only source of exports to pay for imported goods. With the loss of the Carpathian and Transylvanian country Hun- other losses gary loses not only mineral resources and sources of water power, ... but the great proportion of her valuable forests. Instead of export- ing timber, she will have to import it. g Before the World War Hungary had 3750 large manufacturing situation establishments, of which she retains 2155; but many of these, being ...” deprived of their sources of raw materials, are now idle. , factures Hungary has only a quarter of the former capacity to support sheep, and wool production will fall off accordingly ; and at least half the required woolens must be imported. Cattle production falls to 31 per cent, horses to 40 per cent, and pigs to 44 per cent. Of hemp, with the pre-war figure cut to 15 per cent, not enough to supply the spindles is left. Two thirds of the flax lands have gone, 230 The New World Hungary's effort to form an alliance with Jugo- Slavia 42 per cent of the spindles, and 84 per cent of the weaving looms. Nearly three fourths of the glass works will be lost. A review of these facts will show that Hungary presents a strong contrast to the new states that border her. They have won their long fight for liberty. They have thus solved one of their main prob- lems, which to Hungary is still a riddle, a question mark. They have almost no debt: Hungary has a pre-war debt, a war debt, and an in- demnity bill. The Magyar nobleman points proudly to a thousand years of history; but he suffers from the reaction to the accumu- lated woes of that long time and at the hands of those whom he systematically oppressed. One result of the Rumanian invasion of Hungary was to arouse such bitterness in that state that the government attempted unsuc- cessfully to form an alliance with Jugo-Slavia. This alliance would give Hungary the privilege of exchanging agricultural products on a complementary basis and would give her a better chance to secure adequate commercial outlets at Saloniki and on the Adriatic. Such a project is bound to be revived, for the geographical layout and the natural economic tendencies of the region call for coöperative tariff and transportation agreements not only between Hungary and Jugo-Slavia but also between Hungary and all her neighbors. CHAPTER THIRTEEN THE DOMAIN OF THE CZECHO-SLOVAKS THE country of the Czecho-Slovaks runs in an east-west direction The national athwart a network of railroads that carry most of the commerce of * central Europe. It is bordered by five nations, of which three (Ru- mania, Poland, and Germany) touch the sea, and of which two (Aus- tria and Hungary) are, like itself, landlocked states bordering the Danube River. Of its 14,000,000 inhabitants 35 per cent are of dif- ferent race or language: about 4,000,000 Germans, of whom 1,700,000 are in western Bohemia and other powerful groups in Silesia, Moravia, and the larger cities; 750,000 Magyars in Slovakia; 400,000 Ruthe- nians in the eastern districts bordering the Carpathians. The state is a peninsula of Slavdom thrust westward into the heart Aslavic of Europe, a long and very narrow strip impossible to defend in its * entirety against aggressive and more powerful neighbors, should it ever come to blows with them. Two long pincers of German popu- lation press upon it, the Germans of Silesia and the German-Aus- trians northeast of Vienna. Five nations, all at one time or another hostile, stand about its borders. It has no seaport, and its people own no railroad to the sea, from which it is distant more than 200 miles (Bohemia to Trieste or Stettin). Its central part is only from 50 to 125 miles across from north to South, yet from east to west the country extends 600 miles. Its area is 55,000 square miles, or slightly more than that of the state of New York. Its population density is also not far from that of New York. From whatever angle we view the foregoing facts, we are forced Importance to conclude that the welfare of Czecho-Slovakia is to an extraordinary ..." degree dependent upon its international relationships. From the latiºnships first, the statesmen of this new nation must face political questions . Inew of the gravest and most complex character. Almost before the new government was organized it had two serious quarrels on its hands: one with Poland over the coal lands of Teschen, and one with Hun- gary over the conditions of the military demarcation line east of Pressburg. Between Czecho-Slovakia and its neighbors there must needs de- . velop a bond of union in one form or another. This bond may take j the form of commercial treaties respecting tariffs, transportation rates, * and exchange of products, such as are now under discussion; indeed, two have already been ratified, those with Poland and Jugo-Slavia. 231 232 The New World Problem of the minori- ties Beginnings of govern- Iment It may take the form of a treaty based on a military alliance with Poland and Jugo-Slavia, two other Slav states (page 241). It may take the form of a waterways convention with the other Danubian states — Austria, Hungary, Rumania, Jugo-Slavia, and Bulgaria. Or it may be that a treaty will be arranged affecting the use of railways, canals, maritime ports, and other instruments of trade, with all the other central European states. If these results should be achieved on a friendly basis, the economic welfare of the country would be assured; for, like several other new states of Europe, Czecho-Slovakia enters upon its national career with a rela- tively small debt (about a half billion dollars). The question of the treatment of peoples of different race and speech within the new state is likewise fraught with danger. That too may be settled upon the basis of justice or it may become the source of bitter and disastrous irredentism. The German-speaking populations will offer the greatest difficulties (Fig. 120). They will resist the overlordship of the Czechs if Czech rule is accompanied by unjust discrimination against them. (A harmonizing factor is the long-standing economic interdependence of Czechs and Germans in the principal towns of Bohemia and in just those districts where the Germans are most numerous, as in western Bohemia.) The Magyars. of Slovakia will fight before yielding to Czech or Slovak exploita- tion. These are fundamental facts; in them may lie the seeds of failure and of future war. By forming a voting coalition in the na- tional parliament, the non-Czech parties could leave the Czechs with so narrow a margin of control that vital measures for national security and development would frequently be endangered. The welding of the parts of Czecho-Slovakia into a strong state is difficult also on account of the diversity of languages. Although Slovak and Czech are much alike, there is in reality no such thing at, the present time as a “Czecho-Slovak” language. Czech is the official language for meetings, conferences, and oral and written official communications. Where racial minorities number 20 per °nt of the population, however, they may use their own language before judicial and administrative bodies, provided they are citizens of Czecho-Slovakia. THE HISTORICAL STRUGGLE The independence of Czecho-Slovakia was formally proclaimed during the World War, on 18 October 191 8, though earlier informal an- nouncements were made in 1917. Even before the Austro-Hungarian The Domain of ks the Czecho-Slova 233 09ZO ‘I : Sx[8AOIS-OUĮ0ņuºs ºz: sx{ØJĀuſ ſp �¿J948 n}I‘#iſºſae;u!! 4ºſ) �! suaquaqazſeliausa Ināſ H. {ſeuung ºgQ9 UCIOJ!Piſpue80ſ. ¿¿.ſae; ſ. “I : I 9đOJøųQ no ſ!!! Igſ§§§§),JL JO QS8 S��©I auaſ)q�JO�O '8I6||}}ĮdS‘’SÞ Á9XI9ų}�Sqſ : sperºsȚg 918 -ĐIdº, O 99đS Įo ug uouſn[ou] ua°03] “ĐIJI Įgoo pįJJun pºp-oq00ZO sąſsođøpĶipſºſ8AOIS ſae,¡¿ 939 JOH. *9qS94 ILIAA}uoſq&ſºu ºuſ SCſeULIſaeūöț¢ů¿90ds Sņſ į JOdºgo& ~ ~ ~ asunoq uſeuuJºſ)OJKļļogSøſſep ¡¿?,od SqĮ Oļ søſ 959), pºUIQUIUIJOOq [80ſ}{[ uoņeĮº� ºpțS KJØAº ūO LuJOJ saluepunoq de |OS {qºld e 9ļļOS! ; S {29J pºx!W NN u Oļļe N Lļļ uºlųO S014||e U €2 – ou OºzO >{e^O ĮS pĐx|W -OLļ09ZO 9ųļo pue S>{e^OIS |4e N Jºl S9ļļļļeuo! «* []|? … : N *NN(N) ŠĶÈ NNNN ŅŇSN`R` ^NNNNNN N NNNN\^^ È NN §§;&^ §§§$Neº §|-§§Ş ſºs\NŅŠ§§ŞŽ NNNN3&SKN�`3NS§§ŅŅŠ §§§§>$§§ NNSNNNNNNNN §§Ņ º § otlamburg S-SP O Berlin - Sº, sº % ** Sež % 3. 50 % * }% % % % - º >3)ppelnº. % 9. Ž2% º Ǻ º % gº % % 62 ſº >. 62 C | % & 3 % o . Préssbºr 2%%:...“. Munich O-Jº…?? % %% & Viennºść Sºgº - & § ***** sº ałº!? r ZZX. º 2%\e R ~ºlºgº %; - iA% sº X- § "N, º 4. % ſº gº º غ c Z2 º alltinoplé & º sº * } C; - %$áláš% o cale of miles º Q & 50 0 |00 200 300 | 2:5 f** * 310 {\\ FIG. 121. Slavs in Europe outside Russia. The common boundary of Poland and Russia was tentatively laid down at the Riga peace conference in October 1920. The key to the numbers is as follows: 1, Poles; 10, mixed Poles and Ruthenians; 1b, White Russians; 2, Czechs, Moravians, Slovaks; 3, Ruthenians; 4, Serbo-Croats; 4a, Slovenes; 5, Bulgarians (originally Finno-Ugrian but now principally Slavic); 6, Macedonians. armistice of 4 November 1918 was signed, the new state had formed a provisional democratic government and had been recognized by the Allies. The returning soldiers formed an army to protect the still un- defined frontiers from disorder. Money was borrowed to begin the operations of government. The United States, Great Britain, France, and Italy gave the new country credit and supplies. Masaryk be- came prime minister and minister of finance, and later the first presi- dent. - - g The new state has the benefit of stirring traditions and also of the The Domain of the Czecho-Slovaks 235 recent heroic exploits in Russia, which form one of the great epics of the World War. During the fighting on the Russian front in 1916– 1917, tens of thousands of Czecho-Slovak soldiers surrendered to their brother Slavs, the Russians. They were organized into armies in the prison camps, but before they could be brought into the field Russia had become Bolshevist, and the Czecho-Slovak corps opposed not Austrians, but Russians. For many months they fought unceas- ingly against the Bolshevist armies, all the way from central Russia eastward along the Siberian railroad to Vladivostok. Only after several years of exile were they returned, late in 1919, to their native land. The achievements of the new Czecho-Slovak nation appear the more remarkable when we consider that the people have been under foreign rule for nearly four hundred years and that the present gen- eration has had very little experience in government. From the 10th century Bohemia was under the influence of Germany, and several of its kings became emperors of Germany. Doubtless the Czechs could have been won to either people — the German or the Austrian — by benevolent measures; but the general policy of severity toward minorities of different race never permitted the ruling castes in the two states to tolerate political liberty, even in the form of local autonomy. While primarily a Roman Catholic country, Bohemia was the seat of a bitter religious war in the early part of the 15th century, when John Huss, who had led the popular demand for clerical reform, was tried by an ecclesiastical council and burned (1415). A civil war broke out which was to divide Bohemia for many years and cause the loss of a large part of her people. When the struggle began, one third of the soil of Bohemia belonged to the clergy, and the taxes levied by church and state were intolerable. It was therefore easy for the religious question to become joined with the question of land tenure. Since the land question affected the peasants (chiefly Czechs), the movement of John Huss and his followers became also a peasant movement; and since the welfare of all the peasants was involved, it soon became a national movement. It is interesting to note that Germans held almost all the ecclesiastical offices, and the problem of race was thus added to the problems of religion and land tenure. Ranged against the Bohemians were the Catholic princes of the neighboring countries, who argued that if religious liberty were tolerated in Bohemia it would surely assume dangerous forms else- where. Coupled with this view was the fear of the Hapsburg kings Epic of the Czecho- Slovaks in Russia Long oppression by Austria Religious WarS 236 The New World Battle of the White Mountain The tradition of hate that their claim, made in 1526, to the Bohemian crown would be denied as soon as the principle of nationalism began to grow in the soil of religious liberty. The question of the Bohemian language and literature was closely tied up with that of religious differences. It was in the Bohemian language that some of the severest denunciations of the clergy were written, and some of the most violent attacks upon the tyranny of nobles and kings. German officials secured control of the University of Prague and thereby sought to denationalize Bohemia, and to impose the German language and secure its dominance. At just this period there was a division of the Papacy between Rome and Avignon which caused a division of authority and opinion, both political and religious, in many centers of the Christian world. In the Bohemian church the division was seized upon by the one party to impress German authority, and by the other to hasten the day of the national independence of Bohemia. The Catholic countries of Spain, Poland, and Bavaria aided Aus- tria, and in the invasion of Bohemia the nationalist Bohemian forces were defeated at the battle of the White Mountain in 1620. Follow- ing the defeat the Protestant clergy of Prague were obliged to sell their goods and go into Saxony. Censorship of the press was established, statues of Huss were destroyed or altered, Protestants could not secure good titles to their land; in short, the movement to Catholicize Bohemia was really a movement to destroy its national aspirations. Towns that resisted were deprived of their charters. Thereafter Bohemian nationality was promoted very largely outside of Bohemia. The battle of the White Mountain and its tragic religious and po- litical associations are mentioned here because they assist our under- standing of the present spirit of the Czechs as well as of other central European nationalities to whom the facts of history have a poignant significance. As a certain Czech statesman put it after the Czech forces had advanced into Magyar territory in northern Hungary: “We have now revenged the pain and grief of the great numbers of emigrants who fled after the battle of the White Mountain.” But this battle was fought three hundred years ago! If all the wrongs of the past must become bitter traditions to be revenged sometime in the future, then Hungary may choose to remember alleged wrongs of the present and revenge herself three hundred years hence — or sooner. This is one of the terrible problems of the moment: Where is the process of hating to stop? - § - - - - * -- º º - º - Fig, 122. Aussig, northwestern Bohemia, a town composed of German-speaking people who have been incorporated in the new Czecho-Slovak state. At the left are the lower ridges of the Böhmer-Wald Mountains on the southern boundary of Germany. 238 The New World Literary revival Forms of Austrian oppression Elements of sta- bility The suppression of the liberal movement of 1848, and the wars of 1866 and 1870, were steps in the progress of that Austro-German dominion of Bohemia which continued until 1918. The hope of free- dom might have been altogether lost but for the stimulation of na- tional consciousness and sentiment in the 19th century, when a few Czech patriots revived the almost-forgotten literature. Jan Kollar (1793–1852) inspired his people by a collection of poems called Slavy Dcera, or Daughter of Slavia; Safařík (1795–1861) wrote Slavic Antiquities and Slavic Ethnography; Palacky (1798–1876) was the author of A History of the Bohemian People. * The struggle for independence in later years was often focused upon the question of the Bohemian language. On the one hand the insistence upon German speech was a constant attempt to deny equality of race as expressed in the national language; on the other it represented a repression of religious liberty which carried with it the persistent denial of civil liberty. Though Bohemia is largely a Catholic country today, most Bohemians have resented for centuries the measures taken by foreign princes to weed out Protestants by expelling them from the country (as in 1627). Only in this way did the rulers think it possible to kill the feeling of independence, which would inevitably lead to a separate national life. Instead of equalizing the German and Bohemian languages, the Hapsburg over- lords prejudiced the latter by appointing only German-speaking officials and encouraging the growth of a German aristocracy. So fierce was the struggle between Czechs and Germans that the Pro- vincial Diet of Bohemia was practically closed for some years before the World War. The more numerous the repressive measures, the fiercer raged the struggle on the part of Bohemian students to prove a long-estab- lished nationalist sentiment. Archaeological facts were brought to light proving that Bohemian culture had an independent or autoch- thonous origin; manuscripts were discovered which revealed a liter- ary culture unmarked by German influence; every distinctive social and political phase of the past was set in high relief by the intense patriotism of Bohemian scholars. INITIAL DANGERS TO THE NEW STATE The Czechs have shown remarkable strength of purpose and a reasonable temper. Like all Slavs, they have extremely volatile elements in the population, so much so that it was for a short time a question whether they would be able to resist the Bolshevism they The Domain of the Czecho-Slovaks 239 17 18 * º 20 2. ' 22 23 24 25 RN-- }*"...fºr º S.--ee NORTHERN HUNGARY ,---" sºlº ºz. ºrs. MOVEMENT OF THE POPULATION j <— * ,-- º :IGI2 * Hºº \s- , Sºle of miles HA9 ~’ [S] º, <-(S) \– UTH;Nºt; h →A §ss 1–a–a—a------ 25 i * s 49- * cJºe-S)) ..., z-rºw. * º 2'sZo →A Inward migration ^...~~~~ Sº ºt-ºs-S) Yºº,”%lº-AN's <—[] Outward migration * -- ** <-EJ \–"NS 2. YS3 <-(S) A ->A Yºº-A ! S 3. f s°º O Emigrati v2. .r- J’A-TV/" Vſ A. jºk I à- \ f ~! S. migration * } 29(S) 2% C-' º = ~~ © **@ #Hiſ #A º § rS º \ º- -*. sº l \ e \**ś , , sº × kºº-ºº...?, iſº, w *GD \ k- ré—[G] } As'. Aſ { -** 2--~ @4% 7 & >{\ t Slovaks -$ º \, CŞ SD 2 % ^2- _- Sº-Ri. ºy. 8 f~2 |-º. §§).” ...” & * ge(ºff" N. 48– 4- iºdºas gº Sº K->/ARA º ºr Sºl. 3 “J S. ****** * * 20 2. 22 23 ŽSº-r FIG. 123. The process of Magyarization in Slovakia. Out of 20 districts, 12 had incoming streams of Magyars, and 17 had outgoing streams of Slovaks of which 13 were emigrants and 4 migrants to other parts of Austria-Hungary. Education in Slovakia is on a very low level, and while the outgoing streams of Slovaks consisted chiefly of peasants the incoming educated Magyars comprised officials, large landowners, and capitalists. From Wallis, the Geographical Review, September 1918, with new boundaries added. had so heroically fought in Russia and thus keep the friendship of the western powers. - Czecho-Slovakia is yet to be measured. Up to the present the Czechs have had chiefly to depend upon themselves. When their dispute with the Poles over the coal mines of Teschen brought them to the verge of war, the Allies sent an Interallied commission which demar- cated a line of division for the armed forces, regulated coal production and shipment, and kept the peace. . - On the south, also, the Czechs had the support of the Allies during 1919, through operations which kept Hungary's attention focused on her southwestern borders. Detachments of the French Army of the Orient under General Franchet d’Esperey were sent into Bul- garia and Transylvania; the Rumanians occupied a part of the de- marcation line on the western border of Transylvania, where Hun- garian troops sought to retain a hold over Rumanian districts and towns; a British admiral held the gateways of the Danube and operated a fleet of river monitors and coal barges. Held in the grip of the Allies on the south, Hungary could exert only feeble effort on the north. The new Czecho-Slovak armies maintained a frontier along the line established by the Allies after the armistice. Austria could offer no resistance at all. Thus the new state has come up to the present without invasion or Bolshevism or discredit. It appears to have real political and social vitality. - An important source of anxiety to the Allies is the degree to which Czecho-Slovakia may form political or economic relations with Russia. “Race” may be a powerful factor in political affairs, and is still more The protection which these powers can give Allied help to new na- tions in central Europe Relations and sym- pathies with Russia 240 The New World powerful in the field of economic development. A Czech leader, Kramer, stated (1920) that the war could not be said to be over until the Russian question had been settled, that the Czechs should remem- ber that they also were Slavs, and that they should remain faithful to Russia so that Russia might not have to seek alliance with Ger- Differ— ences be- tween the Poles and the Czechs Dangers of militarism many. He added that future relations with Russia would depend largely upon general European conditions. Beneš, the Czech pre- mier, likewise favors closer relations with Russia, but never on a visionary basis. He says, “The individual states . . . are not self- sufficing, and in the Europe of the future they cannot be.” The Czechs were for some time ambitious to have direct territorial connection with Russia. It is for this reason that they have opposed the Polish ownership of Eastern Galicia. In the summer of 1919 there was organized in Prague, the capital of Czecho-Slovakia, a Ruthenian society which has for its object the promotion of the in- terests of the Ruthenians of eastern Czecho-Slovakia and of Eastern Galicia. Thus the state of Czecho-Slovakia is in a position to make trouble for Poland in the government of several millions of unfriendly Ruthenians northeast of the Carpathians. Yet Czecho-Slovakia and Poland, in spite of differences, are likely to become good neighbors, because they are similar in “race ’’ at least, and they are both opposed to Germany. Moreover, their frontiers are exposed to German attack, and neither is strong enough to stand alone against the possible German armies of the future. The Czechs are more materialistic and less imaginative and romantic than the Poles. Poland's history is largely the history of her landed nobility; Bohemia has been historically a land of peasant farmers, like Austria. Like all the other new states of Europe, Czecho-Slovakia will run the risk of becoming militaristic. It would be possible for an ambi- tious military man to throw the Czechs into a state of nervous dis- order and feed the spirit of war; he could point to long and exposed frontiers; he could dwell upon the greed and ill-will of unscrupulous neighbors. It was the “exposed” position of Germany that was the theme of her Junkers for a generation; the idea of the menace of the slow-encroaching Slav became fixed in the minds of the German people. Following this line of reasoning, every people in the world should have a powerful and aggressive army and navy and be pre- pared for war at any minute, even though the cost of such prepara- tion be staggering. - - The problem is not one for the Czecho-Slovak state to solve alone. If relief is not found in the plan of a League of Nations which will The Domain of the Czecho-Slovaks 241 compel reduction of armaments and keep the peace of the world, it will have to be found in regional alliances designed for the same pur- pose. To some political students this would seem a feasible plan for the states on the Danube, which have a common bond of economic and military interest. A “Danubian Confederation” might thus be created in place of the old Austro-Hungarian Empire, to include also Jugo-Slavia, Rumania, and Bulgaria. Significant in this rela- tion is the “Little Entente” formed by an accord between Czecho- Slovakia, Jugo-Slavia, and Rumania. It was designed for protection against Hungarian aggression directed toward Rumania and Jugo- Slavia, to promote trade on the Danube, and as a defense against Bolshevism should the Soviet armies pass Russia's western frontier. Treaties pending between Austria and Czecho-Slovakia, Bulgaria and Greece, Rumania and Hungary, Jugo-Slavia and Austria, Poland, Rumania, and Hungary, though involving complex and even con- tradictory political relations, carry at least the promise of a general accord in promoting peace and reviving trade through regional agreements of broad character which would still leave each national group independent. POLITICAL PROBLEMS DEPENDING ON RACIAL ELEMENTS The chief economic and social difficulties of Czecho-Slovakia are: (1) The making of loans to build new roads, railroads, and canals, and to run the machinery of government. (2) The execution of a program of social reform. (3) The reform of the land-tenure system, to break up the huge feudal estates that still exist. - As seen by its leaders, the first and principal task of the new state is in the field of social reform. This is conceived not as a revolu- tionary but rather as an evolutionary process, not a radical break but a gradual development. In this view the efficiency, the enter- prise, and the brains of capitalism are to be continued (not destroyed or discouraged, as in Russia), that there may be wholesale production of goods for consumption and export. In the Czecho-Slovak view, socialization does not mean a radical change whereby the state ex- propriates private property in order to set up state capitalism. With Russia's example before them, the Russophile Czechs might have been thought capable of uncritical acceptance of the Russian pro- gram. Even with so radical a difference of political and social views between the Russian and Czech leaders, the relations might A Danu- bian Con- federation New roads and the division of the land Czecho- Slovakia's program of social re- form evo- lutionary, not revolu- tionary 242 The New World Elements of political diversity Contrasts between Czechs and Slovaks have been far closer — to the detriment of the latter — had there been better means of communication. - The mixed composition of the Czecho-Slovak people provides elements of almost certain political difficulty. The Czechs and Slovaks together form 65 per cent of the population, while the other nationalities number 35 per cent. In the spring of 1920 the first election was held for representatives in the National Assembly. Out of the total of 300 deputies, the Czechs command 147 votes and the other groups 153 votes, of which 41 are Slovak and 70 are German, described by the prime minister of Czecho-Slovakia as “resentful and powerful.” * . In the Czecho-Slovak state it is not thought possible to grant auton- omy to Slovakia, owing to the mixed character of the population. Only 60 per cent of the people of this district are Slovaks; a Quarter are Magyars; 8 per cent are Germans, and 7 per cént are Ruthenians. The total population is about 3,000,000. Therefore in any local Slovak parliament there would be a bare majority of Slovak members. In a crisis involving the Czechs, Slovakia might lean toward Hungary in a way that would imperil the existence of Czecho- Slovakia. Thus there is added still another to the many weaknesses that affect the destiny of the new state. & REGIONAL DIVISIONS The long, narrow shape of the land of Czecho-Slovakia leads to serious difficulties as regards government, transportation, and even security, the more serious in that the Slovak peasant, who as a rule is ignorant and lives primitively, has little in common with the Czech, who has a high level of general culture, is democratic, and yet does not know how to govern tactfully. In Bohemia literacy is extremely high ; in Slovakia it is as low as in Russia. The two peoples have a common literary language and the differences in vernacular are so slight that each can understand the other without difficulty. Politi- cally they have nearly always been separate, and since 1031 they have not enjoyed political union. They are held together now, not so much by a desire for union as from the sympathies of a common struggle — the Czechs against the Slavs and the Slovaks against the Magyars. The Slovaks speak of the Czechs as “the Prussians of the Slavs.” A Slovak revolt against the Czechs is not impossible, and should it succeed it would probably be followed by an attempt on the part of the Slovaks to form an independent state. . Bohemia, the land of the Czechs, is a basin-plain, bordered by The Domain of the Czecho-Slovaks Hig Nº. 25 §24 ZET Chemni Dres {{lºſºritz O *s \ 0 20 40 60 80 too M.I. O rº- - Breslauſ \\ S Iºanen º º:- Was W soczenstochow “s -º-º- S & Oppeln \ _; Yºs zz-: - - º sº Y r” -lº º w & e º ** & - 80 *2 e tº º Aº * S---.” 50 - & *D-...):-} \º di Ratibor's `---... 0. y Pºsen 3LOfDſt # \{z *N'-->4 Cracow oL - ~K 2S--~ emb ºw B O M I A -- º' §§4 ºffeºchen c. A L erg s-- \s. ~' * * y wº 4 \ tºº w Reqensbühq a’ ºr 0 Rºy, I.A. tº re-ev-, 4 gº Us Bušweis obrúmn A R.U.T.H E N ºs ( º §ain -...…' \ S.Lovščáº. & - &’ i. O V A. K. I & okassa £--- *s Kºš º S A 2.Ungvar *... • X > 48 * U.P.H.E.R.: WINA [] >7 NºNT J. * Czernºwitz.: º- rSA.U STRIA A c oPressb º º | § S.A U.S Tº: urg J. tº-RJ & Sº § --~~~~ & *g % º Fº § - “, } -vſ’ * S I A\|^ j * * * * ºr at, sº oDébreczen § 2^ r **I, 2 B v. Fºr T Y. R. I. A. º Budape {K. V.J * * *-i-S lſº |2 20 sº 2 214 *— FIG. 124. Regional divisions of Czecho-Slovakia (light broken lines), international boundaries (heavy solid lines), and plebiscite areas (heavy broken lines). For a proposed disposition of Teschen and the two enclosed areas southeast of it, see Figure 179. fertile mountain valleys and underlain in part by deposits of coal, lignite, and iron, as well as nickel, cobalt, and copper. More than 90 per cent of its land is agriculturally productive. It not only is rich by natural endowment, but also has highly developed metal indus- tries, clothing mills, paper mills, etc. Its glass is famous the world over. Its silver and leather work have a long history. With the addition to the state of the coking coal of Teschen, which provides half the total fuel supply, it is industrially independent—perhaps as well balanced in this respect as any state in Europe. The difference between Czechs and Moravians (Fig. 124) is very slight. Their physical features are not greatly different; the Mora- vian dialects vary but little from the speech of the Czechs of Bohemia. This is the more surprising when we recall the isolation of their mountain environment and the differences that such an environment commonly produces. It is the closely similar speech of the three Slav groups composing Czecho-Slovakia, as well as their common oppression by the Hapsburgs, that has helped to weld them into one nation. The Moravians are mostly farmers. They number about 1,800,000, and scattered among them are 735,000 Germans whose ancestors, coming by way of the valley of the March, which drains the heart of the country, settled on the border heights and in the towns, many of which they fortified (600 to 700 years ago). The German element is better educated and is the stronger industrially, because it has capital and technical education. The Germans are a class apart. Antagonisms between them and the Moravians have grown, not The Bo- hemian basin Close re- semblance 6f the ** North- ern Slavs '' The people of the Mo- ravian country 244 The New World Land of the Slovaks Oppression of the Slovaks The Danube outlet lessened, with time. Religious differences also have had a share in keeping the races in a hostile attitude, for while the Moravians themselves are largely Protestant, most of the Germans in Moravia are Roman Catholic. Slovakia, in the east, is a rough and more thinly populated coun- try. The forested mountain land was, in earlier years, a natural ref- uge of the Slovaks. The people live in valleys separated by ridges that run southward to the edge of the Hungarian plain. The streams flow southward into the Danube. We may say that physically the country faces south, but politically it faces west. There are but two railway lines connecting it with Moravia and Bohemia. It is a land of small towns, farmers, shepherds, and lumbermen, rather than a land of mills, shops, cities, and railroads. The Slovaks are the least important and the least capable of the three Slav groups that compose Czecho-Slovakia — the Czechs, Moravians, and Slovaks. None of the subject races of Hungary has been so much oppressed as they. There was for years a steady flow of Magyars into the lands of the Slovaks, where they took the places of Slavs who emigrated in large numbers to foreign countries. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF AN INTERIOR STATE - Like Switzerland and Hungary, Czecho-Slovakia is a landlocked state. It borders the Danube for less than a hundred miles, and this river, as we have seen, flows past so many other states that it is not a Czech stream as the Seine is French or as the Volga is Russian. To improve the facilities for water transportation, the Moldau and other tributaries of the Elbe have been canalized, although a great commerce cannot be developed on the Elbe until a deeper channel is provided in Saxony and Bohemia. With these and other improvements, the cheap export of goods would be favored. Further assistance is given by provisions in the treaty of Versailles for the export of Czech goods over German rivers (chiefly the Elbe) and from German ports, where it is stipulated Czecho-Slovakia shall have the privilege of making installations and shall enjoy rights of a special character. The im- portance of this is seen in the fact that before 1914 three times as much Austro-Hungarian commerce flowed through Hamburg as through Trieste, though special customs arrangements were respon- sibie for part of this result. If the Allies can enforce the international agreements they have signed respecting freedom of transit from one state across the terri- The Domain of the Czecho-Slovaks 245 tory of a neighboring ~\ 2"> <-(S) ****, Sº y Yº...? <-G)\º "A SOUTHERN HUNGARY * * ~ <-G) \\ MOVEMENT OF THE POPULATION - Alº, gº Scale of miles § $º t * &W * 25 O 25 50 15 <—[] Outward migration #1 Slovaks *s sº 1–4–4–4–1–1 e - M Ma arS \! 17 ſº I? <-O Emigration G §. * THE GEOGR REVIEW, OCT 19! FIG. 128. Compare with Figures 115, 123, and 146 to show effects of Magyar discrimination against subject minority peoples. Hungarian territory, but chiefly to the fact that the main mass of Jugo-Slavs lived in the provinces where Austria-Hungary had her only direct and unrestricted outlets to the sea; that is, in Bosnia and Herzegovina (occupied by Austria-Hungary in 1878 and annexed to the Austro-Hungarian Empire in 1908), in the Adriatic provinces, and about Trieste and Fiume. Behind Austria-Hungary stood a still stronger power, the German Empire. These two great empires, together comprising 115,000,000 people, were not willing to foster Balkan nationalism at the expense of their own political scheme of creating a Central Europe under German domination. Their aim was not merely to invade and seize the Balkan lands or limit the sovereignty of the Balkan peoples, for the Balkan lands are in general poor. Their object was more far- reaching: it was to use the Balkans as a passageway to the Turkish Empire; to build the Bagdad road to the head of the Persian Gulf; to win the subtropical products (chiefly raw materials) of Mesopo- tamia; and, from the Persian Gulf, to invade the great trading marts of the Orient, principally those of India and China. We have referred to the low commercial rank of the Balkan coun- tries. The point will be clearer if we look at the outstanding economic features of the Balkan peninsula. The four largest Balkan countries in 1914 had a total trade (com- bining imports and exports) of $400,000,000, or less than 1 per cent of the world’s total. Together they had a commercial importance that outranked that of Portugal or Norway and was less than that of Sweden, or Spain, or even Denmark. Of the total Balkan trade Rumania supplied half. Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 253 Agricultural products are of chief importance in the export and import trade of the Balkans, forming three fourths of the whole. The industrially undeveloped state of the region is shown by the fact that products of the forest, the mine, and the factory form only from one fifth to one tenth of the total trade. They are composed chiefly of the lumber and petroleum of Rumania and the mineral ores of Greece. In more highly developed industrial countries with exports like those of the Balkans, the imports would include raw materials for manufacture. Not so in the Balkan countries. For example, the imports of raw cotton form only one third of one per cent of the total value of imports. Greece alone among the Balkan countries has a deficit of cereals and must import grain. Even sugar and coffee are imported in very small quantities; the consumption of coffee is less than one pound per person a year and of sugar eight pounds, or about one tenth the per capita amounts used in the United States. The exports of the Balkans went chiefly to the industrial districts and cities of central and northern Europe. Of Germany’s total commerce with the principal Balkan states, 50 per cent by value was with Rumania. One half of the total imports of the Balkans came from Germany and Austria-Hungary. Measured by tonnage, 75 per cent of Germany’s total Balkan trade was sea-borne, while 72 per cent of the trade with Austria was carried by rail. Of Germany’s total commerce 8 per cent was river-borne, which indicates that Germany has as much interest in the physical improvement of the Danube and the commercial regulation of its trade as if she were a Balkan state. BOUNDARY DIFFICULTIES The new state of Jugo-Slavia consists of the former kingdom of Serbia, to which are joined the former kingdom of Montenegro and the districts of Bosnia, Herzegovina, Croatia, Dalmatia, Slavonia, a part of western Bulgaria, and part of the Banat of Temesvár. The total number of inhabitants is about 12,000,000, divided as follows: Serbs, 6,000,000; Croats, 2,500,000; Slovenes, 1,000,000; Mace- donian Slavs, 550,000; Magyars, 450,000; Albanians, 250,000; Mos- lem Serbs, 625,000; Rumanians, 150,000; Germans, 450,000; others, 175,000. One of the most difficult problems of southeastern Europe — and the most likely to lead to future war — is the boundary problem con- fronting the new state of Jugo-Slavia. Practically every mile of her frontier, excepting only a portion bordering Greece, faces an unfriendly state. The danger springs from a number of complex causes, but is Division of population Difficult situation of Jugo- Slavia 254 The New World ·æāeđ aq ſsođđo eos uoſqđțJosep Joſſ – '6ZI (ĐIGI 9, 2§šķº wſz№&Ø%$§§012• ��ź%şš%}}uolų e^919 go 9^ųoads9Ju!’ su ſeld ºğ, s } ) ) *(?:%¿«!’ suſela D–1 №ģèſ*$%%%%§§svºjºu 00G-002 RS suºlau 009 i < ſawa] S 4/ o // o /19/57 uoļ698 snpuļd}uoſô98'oueuſq W 00|| WinSNINGA NYXTygaeºſ",..., ¿ºſ EH-1 -10AV V * # 5 SN01038 TWHQIWN „№ ، ģĶØ. 。§§ •ģÄN§:%%Ķ% %$§$%%%%%% ºģš%Ø%ſ@ % uoſ698 oſjeug 6 ſ-opuld Jo'ujaſsaM ‘O u01688-qns Jepje.A Jºawo I q. 9 :Zſaeaeaeuoſô9ğ-qnš0xſequeļu0p30ew e 8 ģ@¿uoſ6a8'ueluopeoew JoſepJeAg %%%%%ğ\$’euon,Uo169}}'exiusex, Joºſejuua ź%�ŠŘ%ğèĢ,A•}}’e>|ųSex}|eJĮ0 /uo 169ºu epu e Ø。Ź№uoſ:688-qns uelusog 99| p38 ºu epu BA №ģ% %%%%%ğğší*! u SOg-eaeJOW JoºſeJļu30 g ∞∞∞∞∞ %ſ%È№ ffuoſ 638'eſpeunųS Jo'eaēJow 9 Šſ?uoi 698 uĮseg Jax'sı Jeddn G ſºº$$$(~ŠĶ№č%$%$%^%$% $À4)?$ſaeZ2 · Ź ſ. §§§|× §§§§ §ZZZ,23% Ø SSSS}}∞Źſſae ZZZ)©r.Ķ§§©:%%№Ø2& §§ÈğĂgºšģĢ≤ſae№ž$('º'aozzeuoissaJde Q uexileg-qns eſt;uoı698'uexileg 。、「」、。%}JnGIu iseg es!!Je W #Jo ‘uJ34se). W º SSN §§àygøžģ%$§Ņ%%%%%%%%%%%% §ģק2:§%Ż%%% <%:§§§ſaeneēļeid ueſqnued Jaawon € §§§§��Ź%% %·$Ø%ſaeuoſ:688 uo!!!sueu L Ø·%Š$('• /2Z Ø §292ĀÈ№gĮSS9>| %%%%}}!|eJO44|-1:::::::::|OQ18 ſequêuļļu00 || į,%62• (e)"Øſae$2€. §@ź ź№ſaeffuoț698 ue069 w I %% %%%%%%%22:24, 22@źğ%$\`\}\,uo ,63x) oyue ||3 H |→? :sººſſ» §§ſaeºſ () :ſae S 2. . S 4S2.Ō S §§ S S § §: §§ §§ SS Qs 2}© $4@Ķ@% ()¿ § Ç § 4. Å §§§ ×2. 2%), ■§§ ،ºzº §§ lº % §§ §§ >3. § ... SºS § ∞ :��4$2~3,2%(&%2%Øſ% ∞%%%%%%%%%%$§$ſaeØS™ÈN ∞≤* …§NY &©ZOE™N (S,*)(><Šsh^ ŤŇ№,:∞∞∞。 §§*№,§§ „№é%$§$% №$ſae%%Øžģ$Ņ §º &&،§§§š%№taſSº Ş、。,N}}„Sº*}}S``S$7Z•7çºxaeŹźŹŞ$%$§§§Ķ%�∞ ſaeae�¿?∞ ∞∞∞∞ -x^2{-442,04%296297222222/aſa/Ö009 2/222/92a}^0)/ Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 255 due chiefly to four, whose effects must be closely watched in the future: (1) The peculiar distribution of the ethnic elements of the Slav state, whereby peninsulas of Slav population interlock with those of other nationalities in a way that makes it impos- sible to divide the territory without leaving both sides re- sentful. (2) The inclusion within Jugo-Slavia of blocks of territory in- habited almost exclusively by people who will constitute centers of irredentism in a politically weak state. (3) The occupation of Montenegro by Serbian troops. (4) The rivalry with Italy at Fiume and at Zara in Dalmatia, and with Italy and Albania at Lake Scutari, where a struggle may ensue for possession of the Drin outlet. The basis of each cause is worth thoughtful attention. (1) The northeastern boundary of Jugo-Slavia has been extended so far north of the Danube, especially in the region of the Banat of Temesvár (Fig. 142), that it includes numbers of Magyars and Saxons who are unwilling to be associated with the Jugo-Slav family and who will long favor a return of their land to Hungary, to which state they have belonged for a thousand years. (2) Equally serious is the annexation to Jugo-Slavia of the Tsari- brod, Bosilegrad, and Strumitsa districts (Fig. 153) inhabited by Bul- gars and taken from Bulgaria for strategic reasons. The three districts FIG. 129. This map (on the opposite page) should be freely consulted in the reading of the chapters relating to the different Balkan countries. The characteristics of the regions shown are briefly summarized as follows: 1. Mediterranean climate and vegetation; population restricted to small cultivable areas and pastures; trading cities with maritime traditions. 2. Some rain in summer, in contrast to 1; better access to interior; a transition zone with respect to vegetation, climate, and population. - 3. Continental extremes of climate; fertile loess soil, but wheat harvests apt to be affected by summer drought; Balkan mountains on South, though easily crossed, a cultural boundary. 4 and 4a. Mingling of Mediterranean and steppe characteristics; diversified relief, climate, and agricultural resources. 5. Elevated deforested country with small resources. 6 and 6a. Terraced plateau with abundant rain; modified central European type of climate; large maize and prune crops; home of main body of Serbian population. 7. Series of tectonic basins with fertile soil, graded river outlets, fine bordering pastures; center of ancient Serbian state. 8a and 8b. Cultivated basin floors; winter pastures supporting herds of migratory shepherds; climate and products reflecting Ægean influences. g 9. No unifying centers of life and culture, yet markedly uniform linguistic and ethnic char- acters; absence of deep transverse valleys; upland pastures separated by barren broken zone from low littoral belt with Mediterranean climate and products. 10. Deep transverse valleys and high mountains bordered on seaward side by marshy coastal plain; difficult relief reflected in tribal life and general backwardness of people, though the region is well endowed with natural resources. Bases of difficulties 256 The New World Differ- ences with Montenegro Fig. 130. The Rieka Valley, a typical landscape view in Montenegro. approach rather closely to the main railway line leading from Belgrade and Nish southward through the Wardar-Morava trench to Saloniki, which is destined to be in time a great seaport and commercial outlet for Serbia. (3) In addition to the difficulties on the east, due to the violation of the ethnic principle for reasons of strategy, there is added the Monte- negrin problem on the west. Montenegro joined Serbia in the war against the Central Powers; but owing to a lack of public confidence in the king and his court (they left the country in 1916), a strong public sentiment developed in favor of union with Serbia, Croatia, and Slavonia to form a Jugo-Slav kingdom. It is natural that the officers of the old régime should wish to regain power, and that a separat st party should exist which will be a source of dissension and weakness for the newly created and experimental Jugo-Slav state. While Serbia has occupied Montenegro, the occupation was not ac- Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 257 complished without violence and disorder, and this unfortunate cir- cumstance has diminished the faith of many of the Montenegrin people in the plan of union itself. There will long be a troublesome group of Montenegrins intriguing with the Albanians against the Jugo- Slav government. A similar state of animosity exists on the Albanian frontier, where Serbs and Albanians are traditional enemies, the first being Greek Orthodox, the latter—in part, at least-Moslem. A large number of Albanians live in the region of Prizren and Usküb and desire union with Albania. On the other hand, Jugo-Slavia wishes to retain them and to absorb all of northern Albania, at least as far south as the Drin, in order to get a railway outlet by way of the Drin valley and at the same time protect her naval defenses at Cattaro and the Lake of Scutari. (4) Formerly Serbia was struggling for a “window on the sea.” At first she sought an outlet at Saloniki, but when this was lost to her by the Greek capture of that city in the First Balkan War, she sought an outlet on the Adriatic. The federation of all the southern Slavs offered her a long-delayed opportunity. Not merely a window, but the whole Dalmatian coast now became a chief territorial object, involving a prolonged diplomatic struggle with Italy which ended in 1920 with the treaty of Rapallo (page 269). POLITICAL UNITY OF THE STATE Overshadowing all the difficulties enumerated above is the in- herent weakness of the entire plan of a Jugo-Slav state, viewed from the standpoint of national unity. The strength of the idea behind a Jugo-Slav kingdom has yet to be proved. Croatia long and stead- fastly opposed the idea of Slav union, and thus played into the hands of Italy and Austria. Reconciliation of Serbs and Croats was achieved only as late as 1903. Though an actual government was organized at Agram only after November 1918, the political foundations of the present Jugo-Slav state were laid in the pact of Corfu (July 1917). Representatives of Serbia and of the Jugo-Slav Committee of Lon- don met at Corfu and adopted, among others, the following reso- lution: “The territory of the Serbs, Croats, and Slovenes will com- prise all the territory where our nation lives in compact masses and without discontinuity, and where it could not be mutilated without injuring the vital interests of the community. It desires to free it- self and establish its unity.” Troubles with the Albanians Pact of Corfu 258 The New World Separatist tendencies Regional differences The principal items of the pact of Corfu are as follows: (1) The Kingdom of the Serbs, Croats, and Slovenes shall be a democratic, constitutional, and parliamentary monarchy under the Karageorgevichs, whose three co-national parts shall have a single allegiance. - (2) The equality of the three chief religions within the new state — Orthodox, Roman Catholic, and Mohammedan — shall be guaranteed. (3) The Latin and Cyrillic alphabets shall both be used. (4) The territory of the new state shall be extended over all areas where Jugo-Slavs live in compact masses — which involves the union of Montenegro and Serbia. (5) The Adriatic Sea shall be kept free and open to all. (6) Elections shall be by universal, equal, direct, and secret vote. (7) A constitution shall be framed by a constituent assembly which shall serve as a basis for the life of the state. In spite of the pact of Corfu, the different parts of the state have not yet become amalgamated. Croatia has been in a separatist mood, due to the uncertainties arising from the Fiume situation and to the failure of the Jugo-Slav government to oust the Ital- ians, settle the foreign policy of the country, start railroad trains, supply coal, and defend the frontier against Italian aggression. The tendency toward disunion at one time (July 1919) reached a dangerous climax when an independent but short-lived Croatian republic was proclaimed, and conflict followed. If the separatist tendency should develop, the effects would be deplorable. The interests of all the peoples making up Jugo-Slavia are so closely re- lated and their neighbors are so formidable in size and strength that a strong confederated union, economic as well as political, is required if the state is to survive. Though all three main ethnic groups of Jugo-Slavia are Slavs in race, there are strong provincial differences of custom and speech be- tween the Slovenes, Croats, and Serbs. Some of the Slovenes and Croats — and their number is considerable — do not wish to have their capital at Belgrade, where, they feel sure, Serbian influences are bound to dominate the councils of the new nation. Finding them- selves placed athwart the highways leading out of the densely popu- lated hinterland of central Europe, the two northern elements (Slo- venes and Croats) see many advantages in independence. As the Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 259 boundaries now stand, Serbia would be practically compelled to find her outlet to the Adriatic through the northern provinces. Related to the separatist problem is uncertainty as to the outcome of the long struggle which Jugo-Slavia has made, and through which it has not yet passed, to decide whether its government shall be strongly centralized or whether there shall be a high degree of local autonomy. In the pact of Corfu, as we have seen, a strongly centralized govern- ment was proclaimed, and this was reaffirmed by the Act of Union (1918), when the Prince Regent proclaimed the “Kingdom of the Serbs, Croats, and Slovenes.” At that time the Croatian national assembly voted for the union. Later, in 1919, there was a sharp struggle, owing to the inability of the various political parties to agree on a cabinet which the national assembly could support. The new country has had to depend for a long time upon a pro- Struggle OVer Cell- tralization visional government, and until a convention is held and the final form of government determined, it is not desirable that the provisional government should go too far in either direction; that is, either toward centralization or toward local autonomy of the people of the different regions. All parties in Jugo-Slavia outside of old Serbia are opposed to the dominance of Serbia in Jugo-Slav affairs. To add to the difficulties, schools and newspapers are few, illiteracy is high, and the people have for the most part a warlike disposition. Having passed in review some of the outstanding current prob- lems of Jugo-Slavia, we shall now return to each principal item and discuss it in greater detail in connection with the maps, Figures 131 to 142, before passing to the study of the economic strength of the new state and the character of its people. RivaL TERRITORIAL CLAIMs The Eastern Adriatic — Jugo-Slav or Italian The most serious zone of friction is the Istrian peninsula, Dalmatia, and the uplands of Carniola bordering Italy. It is of prime impor- tance to establish the facts, not merely in relation to a problem that was long prominent, but for the understanding of future boundary disputes that any present settlement will be unable to prevent. Let us begin with an examination of the map which shows the ethnic distribution of Jugo-Slavs and Italians (Fig. 131). The Slavs are indisputably predominant up to and beyond the Isonzo. Trieste is, so to speak, an Italian island in a Jugo-Slav Sea, and by far the greater part of the population of Istria itself is Jugo-Slav (Fig. 132). Difficulties of political organiza- tion The Istrian problem 8 real The New World ***** & sºsºs. §§§§ Nº. S$ sº MNs º i jº Jugo-Slavs Other Nationalities Mixed Jugo-Slavs and other Nationalities Mixed Nationalities other than Jugo-Slav Macedonians Scale of mild 8 I0 30 50 160 Sºº —Present boundaries–––former boundaries-----Plebiscite areas.......... Treaty of London line Rey to Fig. 131. FIG. 131. Ethnic elements on the boundary of Jugo-Slavia, including the line of the treaty of London of 1915. From British General Staff ethnic map, 1: 1,500,000, 1918. Key to numerals: 1, Jugo-Slavs; 2, Italians; 3, Germans; 4, Czecho- Slovaks; 5, Magyars; 6, Rumanians; 7, Bulgarians; 8, Al- banians; 9, Macedonians; 10, Greeks; 11, Vlachs; 12, Turks. But the term “Jugo-Slav” includes Croats and Slovenes as well as Serbs, and while Serbia fought most gallantly in the World War on the side of the Allies, many Croats and practically all the Slovenes fought with equal tenacity on the side of the Central Powers. Italian armies faced Slovene and Croat divisions for more than three years. Yet when the Austro-Hungarian Empire fell apart and a Jugo-Slav kingdom was created, Slovenes and Croats who had been fighting against the Allies were suddenly thrown by a mere political phrase—“the Kingdom of the Serbs, Croats, and Slovenes”—into the ranks of the Allies. Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 261 By way of further explanation of Italy's attitude, it may be stated that Italian armies proved a big factor in the winning of the war, during which Italy suffered heavy loss, including at least 475,000 men killed — many of them at the hands of Slovene soldiers. Her northeastern provinces were devastated. It would be easy to make out an equally good case for Serbia, which Italian losses in the War Inot Compen- sated by material gains suffered even more cruelly from the war; but the argument cannot be applied to the whole of Jugo-Slavia. And, as we have seen, this is but one of the differences between the parts of the Jugo-Slav state, all of which make its continued existence uncertain, its boundaries, therefore, to a certain extent hypothetical. The integrity of the state depends upon its internal unity as well as upon external agree- ments with neighboring states. The forces of disunion in Jugo-Slavia are stronger than in any other newly created state of central Europe. When we contrast these two sets of considerations, – the service of Italy to the Allies and the weakness of the Jugo-Slav state, – we see that the principle of drawing boundary lines on an ethnic basis is one that at times must be modified in favor of other factors. Italy is a narrow peninsula with an extremely long and vulnerable seacoast. Added to dread of the overwhelming strength of a historic enemy on the northeast — the old empire of Austria-Hungary — was the fear of possible attack from the eastern Adriatic shore. Faced by these historic conditions and the relative strength and importance of the Italian and Jugo-Slav states, the Jugo-Slavs them- selves did not deny the right of the Italians to enjoy naval supremacy on the Adriatic. That Trieste should be in Italian possession and that Pola should be a great Italian naval base, were points conceded by every student of the problem. Up to this point we have been dealing with matters about which there has been little, if any, serious dispute. We now enter the realm of controversial facts and conclusions. The Italians claimed the Dalmatian coast on the ground that the culture of the whole eastern fringe of the Adriatic is Italian. It is true that Italians predominate: (1) In the narrow western fringe of Istria. (2) In the towns of Fiume (not including Sušak) and Zara. (3) In the islands of Lussin and Unie. - But it is true also that the Italians scattered along the eastern Adriatic littoral are city and not country dwellers, traders and not farmers. They cannot be said to occupy the region. A like criticism may The fringe of Italian culture 262 The New World Relations of culture and ethnog- raphy -z ſº \ - www. *N*WA ſ A- I \\ * .# old{a\ 46 Aº \ $s. - ia. - S. *~. *~ */ % º 45°30' 45 0 º to 15 20 §. \\RSNNŞNN :N s § ^N NN N N N N N N N N § N § \ \ § N NN N S N N N N §§§ NSNSN NSSRSSSS NNN §§§ SN N NSN NSNNNNNN NNS NN ŞSSSSSSNS §§§§§ F NSN ãSSSSSS. M NN Abbāī § §§ tº-35 & RSS y CHERSO K \\ 25 M. p Q, * ( • I 0 —.--—Boundary of 1914. e - © e º 'º e º Italian claim,Apr 8,1915 Austrian offer, May 10,1915 Fig. 132. Ethnographic and boundary map of Istria. -----Line of occupation Free state of Fiume as proposed in 1919 –Treaty of London Line ---ltalian claim !919 after armistice ZItalians Eth- nography after the Austrian census of 1910. For detailed map of Fiume see Figures 133 and 139. There are valuable mer- cury mines at Idria, now acquired by Italy. be made of the cultural argument. The evi- dences of Italian culture in the towns belong to past importations and give no basis for true regional development. The extent of Italian cultural influence is greater than the area in which Italians live. Italy was historically and culturally far ad- vanced when, behind the coastal fringe, the uplands of Jugo-Slavia were a primeval wilder- IleSS. Cultural considera- tions here form a pecul- iarly weak basis for national claims, because the ties of race, lan- guage, and political faith are stronger than the ties of culture, even though that culture be long established. The people are Jugo-Slavs and wished to remain Jugo-Slavs, and they did not wish to accept Italian sovereignty merely because from early times the coast of the region, formerly known as Illyria, had attracted Roman warriors and ship builders, traders, travelers, and priests. “How many thousands of Jugo-Slavs are you going to claim because the architecture is Italian, and because the Romans hundreds of years ago cut timber on our coast, sent missionaries, raised large buildings, and traded with our people?” The difficulties of the dispute between Italy and Jugo-Slavia arose in large part because the ethnic, cultural, and military lines do not coincide. three considerations. The Jugo-Slavs asked: It is hard to select a line that gives equal attention to these If the best military line be selected, the ethnic Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 263 principle is violated; if a cultural line be followed, military and naval considerations are set aside. The geographic argument was often invoked for the union of eastern Adriatic lands with Italy. The climate and vegetation are “Med- iterranean,” like those of the Italian eastern coast, but so also like the coast of Greece. The physiography, wholly unlike that of eastern Italy, is a unit with that of western Serbia. The commercial relations have been Italian, and the people have always had a seafaring element, and so much at least depends upon geographical situation. As for similarity of geographical factors supporting the idea of political unity, this argument is at best a broken reed upon which to lean, wherever it is applied. The stage of civilization counts for much. What is geographically feasible and even advantageous in a modern state may have been impracticable in the period of Venetian power. The measure of obstruction which the Dinaric Alps and the Karst offer to the people east of them is not to be taken in hundreds of feet of elevation. The burden of transportation costs over the coastal mountains falls upon a vastly greater population today than in the days when the Italian frontier followed an interior line; and the per capita share is proportionately smaller. Finally, geographical unity involves the matter of scale and relationship. The unity of Venetian lands is a smaller and a more localized matter than the unity of Jugo- Slavia. The Appalachians were once a serious barrier, and their influence is still felt; but they hardly impair the unity of the United States. A situation so complicated as this is could hardly have been settled to the satisfaction of both sides under the most favorable conditions. But confusion, misunderstanding, and the causes of endless disputes and ill feeling were increased by the secret treaty of London, signed in 1915, between Great Britain, France, Russia, and Italy, under the terms of which Italy agreed to enter the war. By this treaty Italy was to receive : - (1) The Austrian Tyrol, to the Brenner Pass (Fig. 70). (2) All of Goritzia, Gradisca, and Istria, and the city of Trieste (but not Fiume). (3) Dalmatia to Capa Blanca, with practically all the Dalmatian islands (Fig. 138). (4) Walona, in Albania, with the surrounding region (Fig. 155). (5) The Dodecanese and a zone on the Turkish mainland, to be defined later (see Fig. 158). • * Known also as Avlona and Vlore. The two sides of the Adriatic geographi- cally unlike Secret treaty of London, I915 264 The New World (6) The right to claim compensation in Africa, in case France and Great Britain should secure increases of territory on that continent. According to the treaty of London, Italy was to get not only Trieste, but Istria, Goritzia, and Dalmatia as well, and in all those districts the proportion of Italians was less than of Jugo-Slavs, save along the western margin of Istria. On the other hand, in Dalmatia, out of a total population of 635,000 there were only 18,000 Italians as opposed to 611 000 Slavs Of the 18,000 Italians, 11,768 were in the district of Zara and 2357 in the district of Spalato, every other Dalmatian town having less — generally much less — than 1000 Italians. It would have been easy for everybody to accept the terms of the treaty of London had the Austro-Hungarian Empire hung together. Instead it broke up into its ethnic divisions, one of which was Carniola, the country of the Slovenes. This district was joined (by decision of the Peace Conference of Paris) to Serbia and Croatia to form Jugo- Slavia. As a result, when Italy sought to annex the territory, she found herself dealing not with an enemy (Austria-Hungary), but with an ally (Serbia). - - - The city of Fiume is the chief focus of difficulty. Counting the suburb of Sušak, the city has a Slav majority (26,600 Jugo-Slavs to º s" * * ~ * * •. º * • * • * º © d ſº sº .* s • ** ‘e {! S2 º s's * * • * & * * * - * º *.*. Šs S. g (2 tº Ş. • •. :* * *$3. * > P šš=sºs-l. º * * - - #9 *šº /? NS sº *. !eº ‘. . . §tio §§s • *%’ **.... • & º % $º &S *:::::-346% §§ $ºs.; ſºsºs º AE ºš § 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000 FIG. 133. The organized character of the port is in contrast to the backward state of ports on the Dalmatian coast. Note that Sušak, a suburb on the east side of a small stream, is an integral part of the city of Fiume. From United States Hydrographic Office chart, No. 4072 (1915). ! Ø § Ç * Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 265 25,800 Italians); but ** the Italians are in a : of slight majority if this. the Adri- atic suburb is not included. Many persons talk loosely of Sušak as if it were another city separated from Fiume by a river. As a mat- ter of fact, only a shal- | low brook separates <-, *, * * : * -> =*-i \} the two; Sušak is as f*.innsbrid.” much a part of Fiume |-...--zá as Brooklyn is a part | of New York. The country around Fiume Fº .# º is solidly Jugo-Slav. .# *Tereste.” In the hands of the * ~~ a dº ') r. \ º ! A* º ^ % UME Jugo-Slavs the trade of º * 'fscaä of Miles º % | $0 | Q so | lºo Fiume would grow, and the town would become - a rival of the port Fig. 134. The field of traderivalry between Trieste and Fiume. gº From Meereskunde, Vol. 5, 1911. of Trieste. The argu- ment advanced by the Jugo-Slavs is that if both ports are in the hands Rivalry of the Italians, Trieste will be highly developed by them and Fiume ...", a left to stagnate. Fiume and Trieste are the natural outlets for a Fiume large commerce that is bound to be far more important in the future. Figures 134 and 135 show the relation of these two towns to the trade of the hinterland. As shown by the railroad map (Fig. 135), to take Fiume from Jugo-Slavia is to take away the focus of her northern railways, the one Adriatic port easily accessible to Jugo-Slavia and capable of high development, the natural center of a Jugo-Slav region, a possible commercial capital. Figures 127, 129, and 135 together exhibit the relation of the dis- tribution of people and railroads to the outlines of the country and to the seaboard. Most of the people of the new state live in interior valleys shut off from the sea by a broad belt of mountain ridges par- allel to the coast. These ridges are difficult to cross; only two tortu- ous narrow-gauge railways traverse them. It might be supposed from Figure 129 that the five hundred miles of deeply indented and island-bordered coastline of the eastern Adriatic imit º & *E. tº º- #.''}. —.—. Present boundaries ...... Former boundaries 266 The New World Small would furnish the new harbors of e the eastern state with adequate * harbors, even with Fiume lost to it. But this is not the case. The harbors are small and they are not capable of economical improve- ment. The mountains stand knee-deep in the sea, with so little flat land along the shore for the development of towns, and such steep descents from the up- sº W8% - lands behind the towns, . E.; Fºurt. - that port works on a - Narrow gauge TIG. 135. Fiume, Trieste, and Saloniki are the chief ports of large scale are almost - the Jugo-Slav region as of 1914. The Dalmatian coast is prohibitive. Another difficult of access, and the completion of the projected Drin- e Scutari outlet would involve Jugo-Slavia in international quar- disadvantage - of the rels with Albania and possibly with Italy. From Railways of Coast, is the “bora,” al Jugo-Slav countries, 1 : 2,300,000, Paris (1919?). RAILWAYS OF JUGO-SLAVIA 8cale of miles tº ſº. sº & º tº º - cold and treacherous north wind that descends swiftly from the uplands and is exceed- ingly dangerous for ships in narrow passages and in deep water where anchorage is difficult. Buccari is surrounded by steep cliffs and has a dangerous entrance; Porto Re is too small; Zengg is at the base of lofty cliffs and is noted for the fury of the bora from October to March; Spalato and Se- benico have good harborage, but they are separated from the interior by lofty mountains, and their narrow-guage railway is closed by snow nearly every winter for two or three weeks; Cattaro and Zara have no railroad; Metković, Gravosa, Ragusa, and Castelnuovo have a narrow-gauge railway connection with the interior, but the service . . is costly and uncertain. - Jugo-slavs The whole Dalmatian coast is almost exclusively Jugo-Slav. With- i.e. in the treaty of London line as drawn for Dalmatia, there are more than 600,000 Jugo-Slavs and only 18,000 Italians. In two coast ports, Zara and Sebenico, the Italian element rises to higher pro- portions than elsewhere, and Zara, like Fiume, has been made a free - port as a compromise. . . ; - The Jugo-Slavs assert that the justice of their claim to Dalmatia is Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatie 267 For a map of the port see Figure 133. A part of the water front at the port of Fiume. Fig. 136. - 268 * The New World Plebis cite in Dalmatia Fiume and the Italian program - sia RN 1 C I. A. :* Yiğia - u - 1st ki A º º: t £º 3. - * Polae ". º hº ^+- | further supported by the re- * A v. - o . .] sults of the plebiscite taken ~! Az 3] (1919) in all the communes ...] fifty towns participated in the s Sº **, elections, and the result was a - * , §: * * ‘ vote of 96 per cent in favor of - - - Riº § {{\ union with Jugo-Slavia. The cº C. -ºšº, Új nine islands all gave majorities tº above 95 per cent for union. * scale of miles . <>| | Except for Zara, there is no |-º-º-º-º-º-º: H town with an Italian majority #: ...º.º.º.º.º.º.º.º. in Dalmatia, and none other London, 1915. However, Spalato and Zara are the with ITQOI’6” than 10 per Cent, of only cities which have an Italian population in ex- e e cess of 1000. From Giotto Daimelii, La Dalmasia, Italian population. 1918. Map 11. Some of the islands, notably Lagosta, depend entirely upon their trade with the Jugo-Slav coast. Fishing and grape culture are their two principal industries, and their products are abundant in Italy and needed in Jugo-Slavia. In some instances the people of the islands asserted that to give them to Italy would be to destroy their economic life. . . . The agreement embodied in the treaty of London, to give Italy large territorial grants, handicapped France and Great Britain at the Peace Conference of Paris. Fiume, especially, had been excluded from the treaty of London agreement; this new desire was in re- sponse to the demands of political opponents of the Italian govern- ment, who forced Orlando and Sonnino, the chief Italian representa- tives, to adopt the most extreme imperialistic claims. - - To make matters worse, when the armistice was signed in November 1918, between the Allies and Austria-Hungary, Italy was assigned the military occupation of the country between the London line and the sea; and she therefore came to the peace conference with the expressed hope that the terms of her secret treaty with France and Great Britain would be the basis on which her eastern frontier would be fixed. France and Great Britain were willing to put into effect the treaty of London, since they regarded it as a solemn engagement. They could not concede anything more. Then came D'Annunzio to thrust himself into an already over-complicated situation. With several contingents of Italian troops he occupied Fiume in violation of the so & occupied by Italian troops. More than three hundred and s Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic solemn pledge of Italy, in the armistice of 4 No- vember 1918, whereby she was to keep only a handful of troops in Fiume as part of her obligation to maintain order in the former Austro-Hungarian Em- pire as far as the treaty of London line. The Italian govern- ment felt that it could not send Italians to kill Italians, and therefore made no serious at- tempt to dislodge D’An- nunzio. Before his ul- timate surrender late in 1920 he was able to defy the Italian and Jugo- Slav governments, to f raid Zara, to establish a postal service, to print money, and to attempt to organize an inde- pendent city state. The boundary be- tween Italy and Jugo- Slavia was settled in November 1920 by the treaty of Rapallo (Figs. 2--- tº \,-sa-see" ~~~ \5 , Radmannsdorf § C. - -º º &ºſ,” N TRIESTE & sº iOld boundary ---Newboundary” Of AUSirid - —IſGāiy Of LOndonline ---Limit [f]uſſºlāV CONCCŞ- Sions by Treaty of Rapallo l 25 km | | Fig. 138. Final settlement of the territorial dispute in the region at the head of the Adriatic. The shaded portion of the map represents the territory gained by Italy in excess of that pledged to her by the secret treaty of London, 1915. See Pigure 139 for details in the Fiume region. 138 and 139). By the terms of the treaty Italy secured the impor- tant railway junction of Tarvis, a part of Carniola, and all of Istria as well as the adjacent islands of Cherso, Lussin, and Unie, and obtained for Fiume the status of a free city with direct territorial connection with Italy. She obtained also the Pelagosa Islands in the mid-Adriatic and the island of Lagosta at the southern end of the Dalmatian chain. Zara (Fig. 131), including part of the hinterland, was made a free city. Jugo-Slavia secured all the remaining islands along the eastern Adriatic. 270 The New World Italian naval pre- dominance in the Adriatic g *...* º *s, gº oloscº. FIG. 139. New boundaries in the Fiume region according to the treaty of Rapallo, between Italy and Jugo-Slavia. The broken line at Lenci is part of the boundary of the “corpus sepa- ratum,” and the remaining part is the solid line northward and eastward terminating on the coast between Fiume and its suburb, Sušak. From Lenci westward to Rubesi is the “strip” added to the Free State of Fiume to provide direct territorial connection between Fiume and Italy. The area of the Free State of Fiume is 11 square miles, and its population is 53,000. Spellings follow the 1: 75,000 Austrian General Staff sheet. Jugo-Slavia's fleet will long be small, and her hold upon the sea feeble. Only a few naval bases are available to serve as rendezvous for the armed ships needed for the control of the fishing industry, the supervision of the customs arrangements, and the protection of the ports. It had been the policy of the Allies to make Italy not merely strong, but in every respect predominant in the Adriatic; for her position on a slender peninsula, with a coastline mpossibly long to defend by land, puts the burden of national security upon the Italian fleet To have two equally strong navies on opposite sides of the narrow Adriatic Sea was deemed unwise. Italy's long-deferred hope to secure complete control of the Adriatic is now realized. - The Scutari Region While there are scores of problem areas in the world and scores of points of friction between neighboring states, a few of them are of quite special importance because of the unsettled nature of the ques- Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 271 tions they present, and also because T.Tº...T Rival they lie in situations that offer every 0 º * of inducement for a quarrel. Among such cawe- Tº: \ ºr i. and the Scutari region is one of the most ~ 2. } *:::... outstanding. It will be difficult to pre- *~~~~ i Scutari vent Italy and Jugo-Slavia or Albania ~ * and Jugo-Slavia from becoming in- | * Cº- Aſſ’ volved in actual war because of the º, Lºr *..., complicated geographic and economic e - © e FIG. 140. The broken line shows the conditions that have their focus: position of the new international bound- ary between Italy and Jugo-Slavia at the southern end of the Dalmatian Is- (1) On the lake and in the town of Scutari. (2) In the Drin valley, which crosses northern Albania. lands, according to the treaty of Rapallo, November 1920. Lagosta and the adja- cent islets as well as Pelagosa are added to Italy. The land mass at the upper right-hand corner is a part of Dalmatia; that in the lower left-hand corner is a part of Italy. The width of the Adriatic is here only about 60 miles. (3) At the Boyana River, which is the outlet of the Drin-Scutari basin. (4) At the large port of Cattaro, which is the only port that by present arrangements can become a Jugo-Slav naval base. It is worth one's while to % Tiny- i.e. make a close study of Figure & 2^ it: i. 141, which shows the critical º # the Scutari relations of the region. The o ſº&xt% region Serbs would like to have actual % % possession of the Drin valley, for it is the natural main out- 2 | º let of all that portion of Serbia & oantivari º - tº from Nish to the Greek frontier A *s Cutari in Macedonia. They, would Ø \ °42 like also to have the Boyana Ż 6. • y ºv 3–2. 0 - River, which is the outlet of all the country centering on Lake Scutari, a country with rich trade possibilities and of great importance to Jugo- Slavia in the protection of her mountainous southwestern frontier. Jugo-Slavia is eager to lose no trade advantage, and the northern Albanian tribes have ſº 1–1–1–1–1–1–1–1–1 0 f__{ * 3% FIG. 141. Drainage relations in the Scutari region. The broken line is the boundary between Albania and Montenegro, now part of Jugo-Slavia. Both Albania and Jugo-Slavia wish to control the Drin Valley and Lake Scutari. Note the two outlets of the Drin and the connection of the Boyana with Lake Scutari. 272 The New World & % Ż º º sº * % §: 2 º § * J’ 22 * * % ºft. 3. ºr s ºr tº *-*.*.*, * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *.*.*.*.*.* = ; : * > tºº *: - * F *::::::: *...º. 3.3%) º ż *...* x * * * Iº º, * -- ... * * * 1 * & * . . . - *...* : % * x $º’s * * % ** 25 Jugo-Slavs Rumanians % Magyars Cl Germans(chiefly) ; g-à-in-ºf-hºurs tº tricts, according to Cvijić, Carteeth nographique des régions septentrionales Yougoslaves, 1: 1,000,000, 1919. a considerable trade, which Italy wishes to control. Thus the through trade of Jugo-Slavia, from the southern part of old Serbia to the sea, the local trade of the Albanian tribesmen and the Montenegrins, the defenses of Cattaro, - all have combined to develop trade rivalries, territorial rivalries, and political rivalries of the sharpest kind, which, if uncon- trolled by the good services of the League of Nations or the larger powers, will surely lead to war. The Western Banat Dominance A part of the Banat of Temesvár has had a close connection with * Serbian several of Jugo-Slavia's most pressing difficulties. One of these interests e e wº in the new is the location of the future national capital. The Serbs natu- ºut. rally wish the capital to be Belgrade; but if that city is chosen, Serbian influences will greatly predominate in the government. Moreover, Belgrade lies near the margin of the country and with the Danube as a boundary would be open to attack from the north, where there is no effective military barrier. That is one reason (as well as deficiency of cereals in Serbia) why the Serbs carried on a diplomatic fight for the rich farming country of the Banat. They secured, not the whole district, but the western third, and this with Rey to Fig. 142. tº Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 273 a part of the Bačka, north of the Danube, gives them a bridgehead of great defensive value. In the Banat, Serbia has a serious difference of opinion with Ru-. mania. The peasants of Temesvár wished to join the Serbs; the landowners wished to join Rumania. This disagreement was a natural consequence of the general policy of the Rumanian govern- ment, which has long favored the large landowners, although division of the large landed estates has been compelled at times by revolting peasants or by special political conditions. Both Jugo-Slavia and Rumania regard the Banat as vital to their future, not only from the standpoint of defense, but also from the standpoint of agricultural production. Jugo-Slavia lacks cereals; she does not produce enough food for her own people and must therefore import grain. The rich grain fields of the Banat would be a boon to her. The shepherds of the hill country (which is of large extent), the dwellers in the towns, the workers in the mines and factories, the fishermen on the coast, — all have need of other foodstuffs than those they produce, and the Banat, with the Bačka, is one of the most important sources of surplus food for the supply of the Balkans. Unfortunately, it is hard to make a fair decision in a region whose population is so thoroughly mixed as that of the Banat (Fig. 142). In any case there would have been serious difficulties; but the diffi- culties were greatly increased by the heavy requisitions made by the Serbs in the Banat, especially during the latter part of the period of their military occupation (1919). Since the drainage of the Banat in general runs across the boundary line between Jugo-Slavia and Rumania, some agreement will have to be made whereby the two states shall coöperate in the maintenance and development of the canals, waterways, and railways, for the mutual benefit of their people (page 290). INTERNAL COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PROBLEMS We turn now to the domestic and internal problems of the new state. The resources of Jugo-Slavia are poorly balanced. Like Italy, she will have to depend upon northern Europe for coal. Her northern half, like Hungary, will have an excess of food supply over consump- tion. Like Albania, her southern half will be difficult to govern; for here live turbulent mountain elements, including Albanians, Greeks, and Mohammedans. The Danube offers a means for local commerce; but for export other than to Bulgaria and Rumania the Danube outlet is too roundabout. It strengthens the capital to Serbian claim to the Banat of . Temesvár Jugo- Slavia not economi- cally self- Supporting 274 t The New World Lack of coal Com- mercial treaties with her neighbors Land laws in Bosnia and Herze– govina have all the drainage run toward it; but the economic life of the whole country would be better served if the streams ran toward the Adriatic instead of away from it. - Jugo-Slavia is poor in coal; the only mines of commercial impor- tance are in Serbia and Bosnia. She formerly used about 300,000 tons a month, of which she produced about 270,000 tons, making up the deficit from Great Britain, Austria, and Germany. In the retreat of the enemy armies in 1918, the Serbian coal mines were largely dynamited and flooded, and production was all but stopped. Austria has to import most of her coal; Germany must export to France and Italy by the terms of the treaty of Versailles; Great Britain's export coal will be sent to her own colonies, to South America, to France, and to Italy. Serbia's neighbors have no coal to send her. Moreover, Jugo-Slavia is a region cold in winter. Its prevailing winter winds are from the north, and much of its surface consists of mountain upland, where coal or wood is a necessity. To complicate the situa- tion, few of the railroads can deliver fuel; they cannot properly take care of even the products of the farms. The new Serb-Croat-Slovene state (Jugo-Slavia) will not be able to mine 3,000,000 tons of coal a year. Of other commercial minerals, Jugo-Slavia has important deposits of manganese and iron. Slavonia has lead mines capable of further development. Within the new frontiers there are extensive forests and water-power resources; but neither of these can be utilized effectively without an extension of the present railway network. - In starting her commercial life, Jugo-Slavia has found it necessary to make commercial treaties with her neighbors, each party to the treaty improving its condition by marketing abroad its surplus and importing the complementary products of its neighbor. Commercial relations are already developing between Jugo-Slavia and Poland. The former sends meat, fat, tobacco, prunes, and distilled liquor to Poland, and Poland sends in return petroleum, salt, sugar, and manu- factured goods. Jugo-Slavia also benefits from the conditions of a treaty with Austria which favors her transit traffic, and from a treaty with Czecho-Slovakia by which Jugo-Slavia receives large quantities of sugar in exchange for grain and cattle. Jugo-Slavia is attempting to exchange merchandise with Russia through the Pan-Russian Central Union of Coöperative Societies. Like all the other new states of central Europe, Jugo-Slavia has its share of land problems, owing to the dissatisfaction and poverty of the peasantry, who suffered terribly in the war. In Herzegovina the Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 275 farm holdings as a rule are uniformly small, while in Bosnia a large part of the land is held in common by villages or is in the hands of landowners of moderate means who own several farms apiece. The new land laws of Jugo-Slavia have thrown this system into confusion by distributing the lands among many landless peasants, thereby creating a great deal of discontent among former owners as well as among dissatisfied peasants who want still larger holdings. As a result of general discontent, the farmers of Bosnia and Herzegovina have sought to form a separate political party for the protection of their rights, and opinion is tending in the same direction in Serbia. A first conference of farmer-peasants was held at Velika Plana in October 1919. In that portion of former Austria-Hungary now included in Jugo- Slavia, about 35,000 acres of land have been divided among the peasants. - s Every new state first organizes a government, and directly there- after seeks to borrow money abroad with which to pay expenses and start imports of food and raw materials. When industrial life has begun, commerce revives, and government “machinery” is provided, then taxes can be collected. But at first loans are vital to national existence. Confronted by this necessity, Jugo-Slavia finds that, like a number of other weak states, she can borrow money only under conditions that make the loans a factor in international politics. There seems to be no easy way to avoid this curtailment of freedom of action; for if a nation is unable to obtain its funds among its own people, it must appeal to its neighbors for help, and it is to be ex- pected that help will be given only with undesirable stipulations. THE TREATMENT OF MINORITY POPULATIONS Like the other Balkan states, and also Poland and Czecho-Slovakia, Jugo-Slavia was required by the Peace Conference of Paris to sign a separate minorities treaty with the Allies which guarantees certain rights to alien peoples living within the boundaries of the state. It was the thought of the Allied powers that the signing of these treaties would help to establish full liberty of speech, press, and religion, and that one of the causes of war would thus be removed. The minorities treaties are alike in all essentials. They differ from state to state only in that special provisions are made for special cases. Since Poland has many Jews and the others a relatively small number, special provisions were made for the Jews in Poland. Loan of money to the new states often a political matter Minorities treaties Char- acteristics of these treaties 276 . . The New World Clauses in favor of the Allied and Associated Powers Winter retreat of the Serbian army across the IIMO111- tains of Albania In Jugo-Slavia special provisions were made for the Moslems (who may have a head of the church within the state), and for the special protection of cemeteries and religious establishments. The minorities treaties remove all restrictions upon the use of languages, upon the exercise of any religion not injurious to public morals, and upon the press, public meetings, etc. All languages are to be given adequate facilities before the courts. All racial, linguistic, and religious minorities shall have the right to establish, manage, and control at their own expense charitable, religious, and social in- stitutions, schools, etc. The national government may make the official language obligatory in all the schools, if it provides adequate facilities for other languages used by the people within its frontiers. The minorities treaties also provide for the equitable treatment of the commerce of the Allied and Associated Powers within the states signing the treaties; and the central European states who have signed the treaties must give to the commerce of the Allied and Asso- ciated Powers, during the succeeding five years, at least as favorable treatment as they may accord to the commerce of those states with whom the Allied and Associated Powers have recently been at war. Vessels of commerce are to have equality of treatment, except for Special provisions affecting coasting traffic, as on the Adriatic coast of Jugo-Slavia, the Baltic coast of Poland, and the Black Sea coast of Rumania. The treaties also provide for the freedom of transit of persons, goods, carriages, wagons, and mails over the territory of the sig- natory powers, and for the freedom of transit of postal, telegraphic, and telephonic messages. THE SPECIAL CASE OF SERBIA Partly because Serbia is the largest of the political units of Jugo- Slavia and partly because it formed the nucleus of the new state, special mention must be made of its particular problems. - The Serbian army was one of the first to feel the shock of war in 1914. After a brave defense of Belgrade it was overcome, and there- upon began its famous retreat across Albania, in the winter of 1915. The casualties were enormous, not only among the army but also among the half-million civilians who attempted to follow the same route. It is estimated that 10 per cent of the men died of famine and fatigue. From the end of 1915 until the armistice of 1918, Serbia was oc- cupied by Austrian and Bulgarian armies, which had as their declared Jugo-Slavia and the Adriatic 277 object the extermination of the Serbian people. They stopped import of food to the starving population, drafted the young men into their armies, assassinated priests and teachers, abolished Serbian customs, closed schools and churches, and in some districts destroyed the entire population or drove it into the forests and mountains. The total population of 4,500,000 was reduced by these means by more than 1,300,000. In the army the killed and missing numbered 690,000; the civilian dead numbered 640,000. Of the total popula- tion, 30 per cent had been killed by the end of 1918. To restore such a country to national life and happiness is a task of incalculable difficulty. The sources of revenue have been dried up, the country is devastated, the herds and flocks are largely destroyed. Seed is wanting, trade is stopped, industries are ruined. As a start in the direction of reconstruction, the Alles have given Serbia, to be shared with Greece and Rumania, 6 per cent of the total indemnity exacted from Germany. Yet this is not enough to re-create her in- dustries and to revive her industrial and commercial life, even if it could be obtained at once; and there is no certainty that it can be collected at all. As we have emphasized in an earlier chapter, the Central Powers destroyed far more than they can be made to repay (page 78). Serbia, like Belgium and northern France, will long retain the scars of war. Attempted extermina- tion of the Serbian people CHAPTER FIFTEEN People of the Ru- manian homeland Turkish invasion. Carpathian gateways and the Danubian Imoat RUMANIA WITHIN ITS NEW FRONTIERS THE life and history of the Rumanians is closely associated with the Carpathian valleys and bordering plains. Their settlements extend from within the edge of the Hungarian plain eastward to the Black Sea, and throughout the valleys of the southern Carpathians as far south as the Iron Gate of the Danube. Farther north they have long occupied the Bessarabian foothill region of the Carpathians. In the Timok valley in Serbia south of the Danube, there is a Rumanian area which has been made the basis for a claim to extend the Rumanian frontier toward Belgrade. In Transylvania, deep notched by rivers, the people live in farms and villages on the narrow valley floors and on flat-topped ridges and spurs where pasture abounds. The greater part of the Rumanians live on the Moldavian-Wallachian plain between the Carpathians and the Danube. More than 80 per cent of the population live on farms, and they are not easily won to an industrial life. In the whole Rumanian region (Fig. 143) there is a population of 16,000,000, and so com- pletely do Rumanians occupy the land that there are only about 3,750,000 non-Rumanian peoples included within the present bound- aries: 1,500,000 Magyars, 400,000 Germans, 1,100,000 Ukrainians, and 750,000 Jews. It is a compact and virile nation, ranking (roughly) with Czecho-Slovakia in present economic power. THE ORIGINS OF THE RUMANIAN STATE The rise of the Rumanian nation is an event of recent times. When the Turk occupied southeastern Europe and annexed Hungary in the 15th century, he turned his attention to the Rumanians, who fought valiantly under Stephen the Great, only to be defeated under the leadership of his son. Thereafter the Turk received the homage of the Rumanian and Transylvanian princes, though he never over- ran their country completely. This nominal overlordship continued until 1829, when, by the treaty of Adrianople, Czar Nicholas of Russia obliged the Turkish government to grant practically complete autonomy to Moldavia and Wallachia, the two chief provinces of modern Rumania. That the country of the Rumanians was never overrun by the Turk was due to the defensive wall of the Carpathians, rugged and forested, with few defiles, which kept the Turk invader from entering Rumania by the Carpathian passes from the west after his conquest of Hun- 278 Rumania within its New Frontiers 2. 7 9 º º %º º--a º} -* º*ę :a% s: .- ji %.:o :% §§*: :: à gºtØ §;; ;; §: ::§Ż §4% º % tºº.º. º * * Sº sº. % % % º ** ºf º º º%a % } * % à 2 § ãºidin º sºfº Cl Rumanians iºd Mixed Rumanians and other Nationalities à Other Nationalities 4. Mixed Nationalities other than Rumanian Present boundaries tº e º 'º ºe Former boundaries E. Nº 5 L.A. SOE º tº: 2% % .º.º.º. R § 8 I : FIG. 143. Ethnography of the Rumanian region. From the <> British General Staff ethnographic maps of Europe, scale 1 : 1,500,000, with modifications from De Martonne, Annales de Géographie, March 1920. Key to numerals: 1, Rumanians; 2, Jugo-Slavs; 3, Bulgarians; 4, Turks; 5, Greeks; 6, Germans; 7, Ukrainians (Ruthenians) ; 8, Magyars; 9, Czecho-Slovaks; 10, Poles. Bessarabia was made a part of Rumania by treaty with the powers, but final settlement depends upon further negotiation with a reconstituted Russia (page 289). Key to Fig. 143. gary. And the broad and then unbridged Danube, its lower course bordered by wide, impassable reed swamps, was a protective moat at the edge of the fertile plains. After years of effort the Turk gained access to the Rumanian plains, only to find the population fleeing before him to the mountains. Thus the infusion of Tatar blood in Rumania is very small. Thus likewise the Rumanian was spared those religious and national antagonisms between the various Christian populations which the Turk always stirred up in order to strengthen his own hold on the subject races. The Rumans therefore have had a greater national and cultural solidarity than any other Balkan people except the Greeks. 280 The New World French and Russian influence Russian political influence in Rumania became marked with the revival, beginning about 1850, of efforts to defeat the Turk and reach the Dardanelles. Under Napoleon III, France began to work for the independence of Rumania, not so much to encourage the forma- tion of a Rumanian nation as to thwart the ambitions of the Czar; and to this day French cultural influence is stronger in Bucarest than that of any other nation. The Russians ended the military opera- tions of the Crimean War with the treaty of Paris in 1856, by which Moldavia and Wallachia were freed from Russian influence. In 1861 the two provinces were at last united under a common ministry and with a common national assembly, and by 1878 the independence of the Kingdom of Rumania from both Russia and Turkey was finally ac- knowledged, but only after the loss of Bessarabia (formerly Rumanian) to Russia, following the Turko-Russian War of 1877–1878. During the years from the Congress of Berlin (1878) to the period of the Balkan wars (1912–1913), Rumania was occupied chiefly with questions of internal administration, and especially with difficulties relating to land tenure. There was also fear that Russian domi- nation would become overwhelming, and there were flurries of feeling against several other neighbors, as Hungary and Greece. But on the whole, Rumania was a spectator of the Balkan turmoil rather than a participant in it. She stayed out of the First Balkan War (1912); but in 1913 she joined the coalition against Bulgaria which fought the Second Balkan War, and by the treaty of Bucarest of 1913' acquired from Bulgaria the Dobrudja, on the southeastern border. Rumania entered the World War on the side of the Allies in 1916, and for a time her fate was in doubt. When German troops under Von Mackensen defeated the Rumanian army in Transylvania in December of 1916, German armies streamed through the Carpathian passes and held a line athwart the Rumanian plain. By the terms of the treaty of Bucarest of 1918, Rumania was to lose a strip of terri- tory averaging five milesin width along the Carpathian frontier, includ- ing all the passes, observation posts, and valley heads that looked down upon the fertile plains and the capital city; and also valuable oil conces- sions (Fig. 144). Her losses included the Iron Gate of the Danube. This would have made her defenseless in any future war with the Central Powers. The treaty was never promulgated. It was drawn up in July 1918, but King Ferdinand saw to it that his prime minis- The treaty of Bucarest of 1918 1 Two recent treaties are named after the Rumanian capital: (a) the treaty of Bucarest of 1913, which ended the Second Balkan War; and (b) the treaty of Bucarest of 1918, be- tween the Central Powers and Rumania, which was to terminate the war with Rumania. Rumania within its New Frontiers 281 D / 48 ºv. &n 0. tfe 2. Ay #4. *&e. oDebreczen oMagyvárad R. A. N. Żege - T ** 6 ad 0. M o'ſ A N A T £zz3% * º: elgra - ſ - 2.” o e º §: K- # Q * Si § W IL! \P C oBUICăTêSt. 44. Q * - *> * º C 44 - ºo. £rºº - - & A #º º S^ ish * Scale of ºs- º; - } / . ſ 2 *. 24. g 5 O 20 40 60, 80 10 % #: 30/ & Oil deposits Present boundaries .......... Boundaries of 1914, Ø º;§º }. FIG. 144. The eastern boundary of Rumania is the Dniester. The shaded areas were never legally transferred to Austria-Hungary or Bulgaria; the Rumanian king had not signed the treaty of Bucarest when the Austrian armistice of 4 November and the German armistice of 11 November 1918 required both these powers to abrogate the treaty. The shaded areas are: 1, territory to be ceded to Austria-Hungary according to treaty of Bucarest; 2, to Bulgaria; 3, to the Central Powers. Carpathian boundary of treaty of Bucarest of 1918 according to 1918 edition of Stieler's Hand-Atlas. Oil localities after Draghicenu, Geologische Ubersichtskarte des Königreiches rumânien, 1891; Redwood, Treatise on Petroleum, Vol. I, 1913; Deutsche Rundschaw für Geographie, Vol. 24, 1901–02, p. 418. ter was never able to find him. He traveled through mountains and forests, and before his signature could be obtained, Marshal Foch had begun to strike the western German front from Château Thierry to the North Sea. By the armistice of 11 November 1918, Germany was forced to denounce the treaty of Bucarest. Thus Rumania had restored to her the Dobrudja up to the boundary of 1913, and the way was opened for broad extensions of territory on both her eastern and her western frontiers. - In the 1918 edition of Stieler's famous Hand-Atlas, it is interesting to find the new boundary of Rumania in the Carpathians shown by a red over-printed line—probably the only case in which these thorough German cartographers have placed on a map as an international boundary a line that was never established. 282 The New World Racial ele- ments in Rumania Relation of Rumanian life to the finountains Home places of the nomadic Vlachs THE PEOPLE OF RUMANIA The Rumanians, or Wallachians The Rumanians, or Wallachs (hence Wallachia), are of mixed race but of distinct speech, the Ruman, which is based on Low Latin. They claim to be descendants of the ancient Roman inhabitants of the frontier province of Dacia in the days of the Roman Empire. They have absorbed Gothic, Tatar, and Slavic invaders, but pride in their Roman ancestry has led Rumanian authors more and more to eliminate Slavic words from their vocabulary and to make their language resemble the Latin more closely. Words relating to agri- cultural pursuits are generally of Slavic origin — an indication of the large amount of Slavic blood in the peasantry, whose origin is less closely related to the Roman legionaries and officials that once dwelt in the province than to the early Slavs that swept eastward over their plains in successive waves of migration. Latin influences among the people are still marked, however, although their form of Chris- tianity is Byzantine, not Roman; they are nearly all adherents of the Greek Orthodox Church. The mountains of Rumania are celebrated in Ruman verse and romance no less than in history. This is clearly understood if we but remember that for a time they were the refuge of Rumanian nation- ality, when Slav and Tatar successively held the plain. The Ru- manian came to know the passes, the mountain pastures, the secluded valleys, and the defensible gateways to the plain. When the people were able at last to reoccupy the plain and resume their agricultural life, they kept up their spiritual as well as their material connection with the mountains. Every summer the cattle still are driven to the high, rich mountain pastures. Every winter many of them are driven down again to the shelter of the deeper valleys and the plain. Many Rumanians have a plains residence and a mountain residence, to fit their twin occupations of farmer and shepherd. It is a distinc- tive form of seasonal migration, or nomadism. The Vlachs Rumanian nomadism is seen in its purest form among the detached bands of people of Rumanian speech that inhabit parts of Macedonia, Albania, and Thrace — the Vlachs, or Kutzo-Vlachs. Many of their villages are inhabited only in winter; in summer they roam the mountain pastures with their herds and flocks. Colonies of them, each with its own dialect, live in the Olympus ranges, in the upper Rumania within its New Frontiers &º ſº \ —T- Nigh N-S -NF * •, º \ \ 'az 3. Pirot º * e "N.J. fº. ALA °Prishtina Vranye \ \ ^f \s r ~ 2: y Yº tz .2:3 2-- ...” ** sº 2 *24, ſº % Q 2 aſ º %2/? º %. % FIG. 145. The Vlachs, or pastoral nomads of Rumanian affiliation, in the central Balkan lands. From British General Staff ethnic map, 1 : 1,500,000, 1918. Semeni and Devol valleys and at Frasheri in Albania, at Okhrida and Krushevo and Monastir, in the Wardar valley in Macedonia, and along the Greco-Bulgarian frontier. Several times in the first decade of this century they were the cause of disputes between Rumania and Greece, disputes arising from the vigorous campaign of Pan-Hellenism which the Greeks were carrying on in the Macedonian region. Rumanians and Magyars in Transylvania Their close historical association with the mountains has welded Ireden. together the Transylvanian peoples and those of Wallachia and ..." Moldavia. In later years it fostered the irredentist movement which late years arose from the cruelties of the Magyar oppressor. Two and a half million Rumanians of Transylvania wished to join their kinsmen on the eastern side of the mountains and form an independent state. 284 The New World The diffi- cult ter- rain of Transyl- vania ſ I * I { - -48 *S 24 25 26 48 "Z- \ —A Inward migration |-> r * R ><. <—[T] Outward migration ~ / "s e2--> ***** ,-\º-O Emigration ! ~~ i ºr * h M Magyars W. %. 2-"2 & § ; {e © m UlyſhanianS f <-End A 4-[G] { Sl Slovaks \ —- Y. “S---~3° Serbo-Croats ~& § --~~~~. -47 g ----' ~~ <–G) Q ^{ *} \. 47– r º e” º - ^.- <é– 2’ \ →A*-B. z. ~~ } \ z., f:--> g $ r->~~~~J"Y r! Q)→ Y rt-º-º: ſº - - .*~~, /* <<– & © ,” ~ (* ~Jºsi º, ºf T R A NºrSAx, L W A Nº, I A **. | .< s = **s - -i. fºr " “..…" -- —2. Ǻ \ J &@ >rº-Q) → c-/ \ºG) &-G) - Triºs Ş _^. Fre: **-*N.-- *: Z Q ~ /~ **~~. S.2° \ * *****ses *P. * ^.… —” *—[G] S-a-(- tº *4. *ASn. →A “Y / --> 546- “ r ~} * \. r^. $Cº-J S.) @->/Nſ f I § k * *-*. 3.3 _^*...* ** * ( <-G) A 2: St. © <-Q) § <<– age,-º-º: =% ū- * Aſ 2 º § –(6) & J g *** sº § *A \. e le .* ‘.…" 5 \ ...” J.------ ſº º * RUMANIAN HUNGARY 45- MOVEMENT OF THE POPULATION Scale of miles | 25 so 75 THE GEOGR. REVIEW, Aug. 1918 23 24 25 26 FIG. 146. The territory east of the heavy line has been awarded to Rumania. Magyar perse- cution before 1914 is suggested by a study of Rumanian emigration. After Wallis, in the Geographical Review, August 1918. They constitute half of the population of Transylvania and are the largest single ethnic element there. The others are Magyars, Jews, Ruthenians, Slovaks, and Germans. Kolozvār, the capital of Tran- sylvania, is said to be an important center of intellectual and public life in Hungary. y Transylvania has a population of 2,700,000, for the most part agricultural and pastoral, with a relatively small city element. The Rumanians of Transylvania are chiefly illiterate peasants, hillmen, and herdsmen whose permanent homes and villages are scattered along the narrow valley floors or in a belt of plains population just west of the mountains, at the eastern edge of the plain of the Tisza. Their western limit is marked by a number of important towns — Arad, Nagy Várad and Temesvár in the Banat. It also corresponds closely to a belt of dense population (dense in contrast to the light population of the rest of Transylvania) which has increased the difficulty of separating these Rumanians from the Magyars of the plains. Travel Rumania within its New Frontiers 285 Whole Population Magyars Germans Rumanians 1880 ego 300 so | 880 890 000 so | 890 ego Soo so | Isao isso soo iso nºse - / - | | - | | H | § f – RUMANIAN HUNGARY —lso / POPULATION GROWTH BY . / NATIONALITIES AND DIVISIONS | / - 7Pansy/vania. - - - - Aumanian Aore/ana's /* 25 —HAR- - 25 / // / N / / / / / / wº O A. R - O THE GEogr. Review, Aug. 1918 FIG. 147. Diagram showing, by nationalities and divisions, the population growth in Rumanian Hungary from 1880 to 1910 and the privileged position of the Magyar. Logarithmic scale. After Wallis, in the Geographical Review, 1918. : and transportation from one valley to another proceeds, not over the intervening forested ridge, but down the valley to the plain and back again to a neighboring valley. The new boundary, established by the treaty of peace with Hungary, includes in Transylvania — that is, in Rumania — the railroads and towns at the edge of the plain. To have left them out would have completely deranged the commercial life of the region. It should be noted, however, tha this arrangement to an equal or greater degree deranges the commercial life of Hungary, and it is hard to believe that the boundary will permanently remain in its present position Highly intelligent Magyars are here placed in great numbers under the rule of a people of lower culture. In some districts, especially in the towns they are locally in the majority. Irre- dentism will almost surely follow, unless more good comes from the application of the questionable minorities treaties (page 275) than can now be foreseen. º - - The antagonism between Magyars and Rumanians has been in- creased by religious differences, which always tend to reënforce dif- ferences of “race” and speech. The Magyars are Roman Catholics Religious differ- ©11CeS 286 The New World Problem of the Ru- manian Jew - - - - - - - - - - - - - º -º-º-º- - - - - ºº ºf ºººººººº, º --> Fig. 148. A view in the timbered zone of the Transylvanian Alps. chiefly; the Germans are Roman Catholics or Lutherans; while the Rumanians belong to the Greek Orthodox Church. THE QUESTION OF MINORITIES There are more than 750,000 Jews in Rumania, and there would be many more but for anti-Jewish laws that have led to a steady stream of emigration. In the past hundred years these laws, to the number of several score, have denied equality to the Jew in the trades and handi- crafts and in landholding, education, the professions, etc. To the Rumanian the problem looked much as the Japanese problem appears to a Californian. One of the considerations was the fear that all the land would be owned by the Jews unless restrictive measures were enforced. The expulsion of Jews from Rumania before 1878, and their perse- cution, induced the makers of the treaty of Berlin of that year to demand of Rumania full citizenship for the Jew. Less than a thou- sand Jews were then naturalized, but in a few years the treaty pro- visions were abandoned altogether. One restriction after another diminished Jewish rights until all Jews were practically without standing under the law. Rumania within its New Frontiers 287 The Jews of Rumania offer a problem that has taken on an inter- national character, now that Rumania has signed the minorities treaty with the Allied and Associated Powers, a compact which pledges her to give equality of privilege to all minority peoples (page 275). Ru- mania, mindful of the servitudes of the treaty of Berlin, long refused to sign the treaty, and the utmost diplomatic pressure was necessary to secure the signatures of her representatives at Paris in 1919. But for Allied assistance Rumania would have been destroyed in the World War, and this fact gave the Allied powers a strong argument in im- posing the minorities clauses. It should be noted, however, that Allied assistance was pledged as a condition of Rumanian entry into the war. It is doubtful if Rumania means to keep the terms of the treaty, for its significance pertains chiefly to the Jew. Czecho-Slovakia, Jugo-Slavia, Poland, and others were obliged to sign similar treaties, by which the Jews, the most widely distributed and generally per- secuted minority element of the population, are enabled to combine in a powerful central European organization to force the League of Nations to take account of future persecutions or restrictions. Equality of treatment to the degree specified in the treaties places restrictions upon the action of a people in making laws or modifying their constitution that may prove unendurable. Such restrictions are really a limitation of national sovereignty respecting internal affairs. They are justifiable only if the League of Nations will see that the minorities do not become a privileged class and do not carry on cease- less and unjustifiable agitation. In the United States there is soli- darity, in part through a common language. In central Europe the languages of the minorities are retained, and the state is compelled to countenance and even to develop them. Linguistic differences will be perpetuated and even increased. Irredentism will continue. Many of the wisest men of Europe and America deprecate these treaties; they regard them as a standing invitation to quarrel. THE BORDER REGIONS" There remain to consider certain other areas where people mainly of Rumanian speech have now come under one national flag – Buko- vina, Bessarabia, and the eastern Banat. There is also to be consid- ered the Dobrudja region, in Rumanian possession since the end of the Second Balkan War (1913). 1 In addition to the territorial gains mentioned in this section, Rumania receives by treaty the island of Ada-Kalessi in the Danube. It is made a condition of the grant of this island that it is to be demilitarized. Minorities treaties a source of irredentism 288 The New World People of Bukovina Bukovina divided be- tween Ru- mania and Poland People of Bessarabia Doubtful whether Bessara- bians wish to become a part of Rumania Bukovina Bukovina, with an area of 4000 square miles, was a crown province of Austria at the opening of the World War. Though Austria has held it since 1777, its people are chiefly Rumans, Ruthenians, and Germans. The Rumans settled here by spreading northward from their plains country, which is continuous with that of Bukovina. They number at present a full third of the population, or about 275,000 out of a total of 800,000. The Ruthenians spread southward from Galicia and con- stitute more than a third of the total, or about 300,000. The Ger- mans, about 170,000 in number, came as artisans and traders from Transylvania and Galicia. The treaty of St. Germain (Austria) allots to Rumania all of Bukovina except the territory crossed by the railroad running from Laleszcyki to Kolomea; but it is interesting to note that the allot- ment is made on condition that Rumania keeps faith with the Allies. The small portion of Bukovina left out of Rumania is given to Poland, to include an important railroad junction on the Polish frontier. & - The land is densely populated — 198 to the square mile — but the cultural level of the people is very low. Illiteracy was higher here than anywhere else in Austria-Hungary, except in Dalmatia. A third of the land is arable; half of it is forest covered. It is a country rich in agricultural resources and pasture lands. Bessarabia Bessarabia is the region between the Pruth and the Dniester. Its population of 2,700,000 is composed of over 1,000,000 Rumanians, 900,000 Ukrainians, scattered German colonists (Fig. 100), and 300,000 Jews. The Rumanians live in northern Bessarabia, on the broad hilly spurs of eastern offshoots of the Carpathians between the Dniester and the Pruth. The flat, marshy, treeless tracts along the Pruth and at the mouths of the Danube are occupied by Cossacks and Tatars. The mixture of races and the historical changes of Ownership record the repeated migrations that passed over Bessarabia; Turk and Slav both made this region a corridor of conquest. While more than half the people of Bessarabia are of Rumanian blood, there is not a clearly defined ethnic division, as in Poland or Czecho- Slovakia or Greece. Moreover, their culture is closely connected with that to the east of them. The Bessarabian people use the Cyrillic, not the Latin, alphabet; and the peasants all use the Russian language. Rumania within its New Frontiers 289 Bessarabia was a part of Russia from 1812 to 1856; a strip along the Black Sea was then restored to Rumania, but was returned to Russia by the Berlin Congress of 1878. With the fall of the autocratic Russian government, early in 1917, Bessarabian peasants took over all the land; but it was not until May 1917 that a “National Committee” was set up. In the autumn of that year there was a congress of Moldavian soldiers and officers which proclaimed the autonomy of Bessarabia. This congress elected a “Council of the Land,” which in December 1917 formally proclaimed the country a republic. The Council maintained an orderly government, and when anarchy broke loose in Russia and overwhelmed the Ukraine (including Odessa), the Bessarabians held the frontier along the Dniester. Since January 1919, Rumanian military forces have occupied the country on the plea of maintaining a defense against Bolshevism, thus creating a complex political problem. - - The National Council formed during the Rumanian military occu- pation to supplant the Council of the Land was a Rumanian invention. It was what may be called a “rump”, assembly, with no mandate from the people, and it was this Council that twice in 1918 asked for an- nexation to Rumania. Those who opposed its decrees were deported or imprisoned; democratic local governments were dissolved; Bessa- rabian judges were dismissed and courts abolished; all but pro- Rumanian newspapers were suppressed. Rumanians have also ex- propriated the estates of the large landowners. In October 1920 there was signed a treaty between Rumania on the one hand and Great Britain, France, Italy, and Japan on the other, whereby Rumania is to receive Bessarabia. Minority rights are safeguarded by the usual clauses (page 276). Boundary ques- tions are to be settled by a commission of the League of Nations, which likewise determines the proportional part of the Russian national debt that Rumania must assume with the addition of Bessarabia. Provision is made for consideration by the Council of the League of Nations of future objections and changes, proposed by Russia, though pledges are given that such consideration will not affect Rumanian sovereignty as established by the present treaty. This clause, however, will almost certainly undergo revision if Russia emerges as a powerful state within the next few years. The United States is not a party to the treaty, having held that whether or not it joins the League of Nations it cannot approve the dismemberment of Russia without the consent of the Russian people and while that country is controlled by an unrepresentative government. Beginnings of Bessa- rabian in- dependence 290 - The New World Border region of the Banat Possi- bility of trouble in the Dobrudja The Eastern Banat In the territorial settlements of Europe, the disposition of the Banat was a question in which Rumania and Jugo-Slavia had an equal interest with Hungary (page 272). It seemed impracticable to assign the whole region to any one of the three claimants; yet to separate the Rumanians of the eastern Banat from the Serbs, Magyars, and Germans, who live in the western half of the district, in a measure disorganizes the commercial life of the region. The Banat is a very rich farming country with many railways and towns. It is just such a region as a rough hill country, like Serbia, would wish to obtain to supplement her deficient food supply. The language distributions are shown in Figure 142. They indicate clearly that Rumanian speech is dominant in the two eastern counties of Krassó-Szörény and Temes, while Torontál on the west is chiefly Serb. It should be noted that the new north-south boundary in the Banat cuts across all the westward-flowing streams and also the railways and canals. It will take years to readjust the commercial life to the new arrangements. In the division of the region it was stipulated that agreements between Rumania and Serbia should be made at an early date to maintain and develop the irrigation canals for the benefit of both countries. w The Dobrudja In the present Rumanian occupation of the Dobrudja, the southern part of which is almost exclusively Bulgarian in population, there is a real cause for future trouble. After 1878, the year when, by the treaty of Berlin, Rumania got control of a large part of the Dobrudja region, the Rumanian government expropriated the lands of the inhabitants on a large scale, and even made the peasants pay for what was left to them. The expropriated lands were then sold to Rumanian colonists. Many property owners were reduced to poverty; others emigrated to America, Bulgaria, Russia, and Turkey, and a country theretofore prosperous was thrown into disorder. The same methods have been followed since 1913, when, by the treaty of Bucarest which closed the Second Balkan War, Rumania won another slice of Bulgarian territory in the Dobrudja. It remains to be seen whether Rumania has profited by the lessons of the World War, or whether she will continue to exploit an alien people unfairly in the attempt to Rumanize it or expel it. If she follows a selfish course, trouble with Bulgaria is bound to come. Rumania within its New Frontiers 291 RUMANIAN INVASION OF HUNGARY As an example of the difficulties which the larger powers meet in dealing with new states, we may cite the case of Rumania, which from a state of 8,000,000 has been raised by the action of the Allies to a state of nearly 16,000,000. It might be supposed that a state which owed its continued existence and the enlargement of its terri- tory chiefly to the Allied armies would be willing to heed the direc- tions of its protectors. Let us glance at Rumania's record during the invasion of Hungary in the summer of 1919. Rumanian troops crossed the Allied demarcation line in Hun- garian Transylvania in late July and took Budapest, the Hungarian capital, in August. They drained the city and the country of re- sources — food, rolling stock, live stock, war materials, etc. Only the sharpest notes by the Allied powers brought their withdrawal in October 1919. - - The Rumanians say that the Hungarians broke the armistice terms by reënforcing their army, mobilizing the young men, and attacking the Rumanian troops. Rumanian leaders say, further, that the armi- stice of 4 November 1918 with Austria, and that of 11 November with Germany, gave the Allied powers vast quantities of cars, locomotives, money, implements, and coal. Rumania received nothing. She had steadfastly and gallantly fought on the side of the Allies, losing more than 332,000 in dead alone from the army, and as many more from the civilian population. She fought the Bolshevists in Bes- sarabia. Her land was devastated almost from end to end. Enemy troops stripped the country, taking food, telegraph and telephone wires, ammunition, live stock, grain, and other supplies. The Rumanians point out that in contrast to Rumania, Czecho-Slovakia was never invaded; that Jugo-Slavia obtained a great deal of material in Hun- gary and Slavonia; that Rumania repeatedly asked for economic help and could not obtain it; and that it was a choice between (1) helping herself to the things that had been taken from her by Hungary and (2) facing internal disorder and outside pressure brought to bear upon her by the Bolshevists. It will not soon be forgotten in European political circles how readily the oppressed can become the oppressor, and how quickly a weak nation, as soon as it gathers strength itself, can adopt the outrageous methods of which it so loudly complained in the past. The new states of central Europe have yet to demonstrate that they possess moral strength equal to their new-found opportunities. Rumanian occupation of Budapest The oppressed become oppressors 292 . - The New World Rumania free of Bolshevism Land prob- lems and peasant revolts in recent years THE RUMANIA OF TODAY It is noteworthy that the disease of Bolshevism is virtually un- known in Rumania, – a disease due chiefly to the break-up of the feudal system that long persisted in Russia and Hungary, where but a few landlords held a farming peasantry in virtual slavery. Ru- mania once had the same system; its destruction began in 1864, when the large estates owned by the monasteries were confiscated and each peasant family was given a farm between seven and a half and fifteen acres in extent. Over 400,000 peasants shared in the dis- tribution of 4,000,000 acres.” But the farms were still too small, in general, for the needs of peasant families, and in 1889 the government divided all the state domains — about one third of the total area of the country – into small parcels which were sold to peasant families. In 1907 the peasants still felt themselves so poor that they broke into revolt, and at the beginning of the World War the disorders were again repeated, each time end- ing in new action by the government to divide the remaining large estates and better the lot of the farmer. In 1912 there were 3755 large estates, while the peasant holdings, numbering more than 1,000,000, were still too small for the needs of the population. Never- theless, the process of land division had gone so far that the Rumanian Tulers were justifiably confident of an orderly people when Bolshevism overran the countries on either side. - Today, 40 per cent of the Rumanian land in old Rumania is in the hands of the large landowners. In Transylvania the big proprietors hold only 8 per cent. Under the new Rumanian land act, one half of the remainder of the big estates in Rumania is to be divided, so that only 20 per cent of the arable land will remain in the form of large estates. In Transylvania the Rumanians, under the guise of a re- form in agriculture, are dispossessing and expelling the big Magyar landowners, thus leaving the Magyar peasants without leaders. Such is the Rumanian law that the state may take away land from the estates of all persons not of Rumanian citizenship. The minorities treaty will affect this law, but its provisions have yet to be tried by the fires of experience. Unless changed, the law means that forest 1 An exception to the general rule of land distribution in Rumania is found in the area inhabited by the Szeklers, where small landholdings are the rule, and have been so for hun- dreds of years. In the 12th century the free Saxons colonized the region. There came a first liberation of serfs in the same region in 1848, a process that was completed in 1861. Altogether, about 1,200,000 acres, or one half the arable land in the possession of big land- owners in the region, was divided among the peasants, Rumania within its New Frontiers 293 *::::3% £º 3. : *.*. • * ~ *. . º º - * - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .” - * * * * * * * * *. . - a .T. * * : - º . . . * : *.*. . . . . . . . * * * * ad - - -- a-- . . . .” - - ". . . - - .*.*.* * * : * . * * * , ſº. . .l" sº % º % % •.- :-: §4::--. -.-:. ..-º ..- º - - - 2. . . . . . . .3% - - - S.*.*.*.*.*.*&^.1". . ; * • * : . . ." Sº... : : : º: ::::3% H.º. - &23Sºč; * * * * . ...T. ". . . . ...r.º.º. . . Fr.: - i. E: •.: •A3. .. ºf Ø2%::::: "* #: ºfºl lºº.23 : ... }. º Z2. •.’...I *:- . .2°ºk: . . •: *Nº.” hºº!" -> wº Ø% a fºr w e -, *, *…* : * : ... .º.º. - º, *-J .. º t º Nº.” * - tºº, • * * * - T - .*.*.*.* º: .*.*.*.*.N. ; * = *: º - *:N. #:::::::: x. * º."rºyº ºf £-ºº: : * : º * - s & .*.A". "N. *::gºleſ: Vº 'º: - C - Sº .3 º: ; :: Ojºyrºº V::.. *. ... Yº - LiêG . Nº gº... º. &º:::::::::::::::::::::::# 2. £º: - - • *...* '. * , •. • *.* º º?::: º - - * - - - s • * >. * * * eº *:::::::: ... * :::: *:::::::::2;ºs: - H • * * * * - - º ..º.:*::::/2\r. • * : - - Hºs - *: - - . . . ; §::: • *... : : * * * * a.º. º. º. - * - sº Nº-º-º: ... ." :* . gº. -- reg ‘. . . * * * •º::::: - A.: + •. "... . ** * * * * * - * -ºº Yº * ** a' - ~~ * * ". 'a Žº #S &: % - * • * * * * * * * * * * *.*.*.*.*.*. . . º §§éâié of ºmiſes ; : E, ſº 5 b '' ' 20 40 60 80 *...* r * * * * * * * , POPULATION DENSITY; L.; #ift ma ... } ... - ... . . . . . . . FIG. 149. Population density and boundaries of Rumania. The boundary of 1914 was on the Pruth River, but Rumania now holds Bessarabia, a former province of Russia. Her position there has been confirmed by treaty with Great Britain, France, Italy, and Japan, but not with either the United States or Russia. Adapted from De Martonne, Annales de Géographie, March 1920, supplemented by Petermanns Mitteilungen, 1913, Vol. I, Pl. 2. Key to place names not spelled in full on the map : T. S. Turnu Severin Bo. Botosani N Nagy Kikinda V. Versecz (Banat) M. W. Maros Vásárhely H. Hátszeg N. K. Nagy Károly FCr. Kronstadt Bi. Bistritz M. Munkács S. Sulina M S. N. Szátmar Németi B. Bender I EC. Kolomea V. Vidin (Danube) Ismail lands and oil fields owned by foreigners, such as the British, French, and Italians, can be expropriated by the Rumanian government. The wealth of Rumania is very great. The agricultural lands have long been famous for bountiful crops of wheat, maize, barley, oats, rye, and millet. Hemp, flax, wine, sugar beets, tobacco, and cotton are other important products. In the foothills of the Carpathians are large petroleum deposits in process of development by foreign capi- talists (heretofore chiefly Germans), who hold 8 per cent of the in- vested capital. The production is about 13,500,000 barrels a year, or 3.5 per cent of the world's supply. The chief localities of pro- duction are shown in Figure 144. . S. Mármaros Sziget Economic assets of the new State 294 The New World Rumania and Poland as a barrier against Bolshevism Deposits of coal, iron, copper, and lead also have been discovered in the mountain country. All these resources are very little de- veloped, and the vast forest wealth is almost untouched. An agricultural country, with mining and forest wealth little developed, Rumania has few large cities today. There are only the beginnings of industries. The most important trade centers are Braila and Galatz on the Danube, and Constanza on the Black Sea, all of them grain-exporting towns of rapidly growing importance. Rumania stands in the world's family of nations, not as a weaker member, but as a vigorous state of growing power. National feehing was never so intense. Her financial system, based on the gold standard, is sound; her resources, though largely undeveloped, are vast; her leaders are intellectually alert and capable. She has been orderly in the midst of disorder, and now that her territory extends into Bukovina and that of Poland extends eastward to include all of Galicia, these two nations occupy a belt from the Baltic to the Black Sea, and are thus more likely to have a common policy with respect to Russia. Thus the government signed a treaty, early in 1921, with Poland and Hungary which sought to solidify the opposition of these two states to a possible attack by the Bolshevist army. CHAPTER SIXTEEN BULGARIA UNDER THE TREATY OF NEUILLY IN spite of a deficiency of mineral wealth, the Bulgarian nation had risen notably in the twenty-five years before the First Balkan War. At least some coal and iron mines had been opened, a few industries had developed, railways had been extended, the commerce of the state had increased 500 per cent. A population of more than 3,000,000 in 1888 had grown to 4,300,000 by 1910. To this number as a result of the Balkan wars of 1912 and 1913, Bulgaria added a net gain of 130,000 people. - From the time when the Turk overran Bulgaria, even before the capture of Constantinople in 1453, down to 1885, the northern Bul- gars in the principality of Bulgaria, beyond the Balkan range, were separated from those in the southern province of Rumelia. The Growth of independ- ence and national sentiment Bulgarians of northern Bulgaria obtained their autonomy in 1878 by the treaty of Berlin, which ended the Turko-Russian War; but their national history in modern times may be said to date from 1885, when, by the revolution of Philippopolis, they were joined to eastern Rumelia; and from that time onward, though the Bulgars were still under the suzerainty of the Turkish sultan, the growth of national feeling was rapid. Finally, in 1908, taking advantage of the Young Turk Revolution in Constantinople, the Bulgarian prince proclaimed himself Czar of the Bulgarians, and the country became completely independent of Turkey. BUILGARIAN AMBITIONS AND THEIR OUTCOME When Bulgaria became independent, she was in an excellent posi- tion for growth into a modern state. The problem of the great land- owner had never vexed either the peasant or the government; small farmers had always been in possession of the soil. There had con- sequently grown up a spirit of independence that in turn devel- oped intense patriotism and willingness to sacrifice for the national security and power. All would have been well but for the growth of an excessive nationalistic ambition. Bulgaria wanted to control the whole Balkan peninsula. Had her expansion been only at the expense of the Turk, the world would have applauded; but it was to be also at the expense of neighboring powers as worthy as herself. It was inevitable that such a course should end in disaster. •e 295 Beginnings of imperial ambition 296 The New World, War with Turkey in 1912 — the First Bal- kan War The Bal- kan cam- paigns of I912-1913 Terms of the treaty of London, I9I3 The First Balkan War The next step in the Bulgarian drama was taken in 1912, when Bulgaria made a secret treaty with Serbia, which was soon followed by similar treaties with Greece and Montenegro. The object of the four states was to drive the Turk out of the Balkans and if possible into Asia, and thus not only liberate the persecuted Christian popu- lations of Macedonia but also end the Turkish menace at their own doors. Each state agreed to put into the field a given number of troops and faithfully to play its part in the final act. - These arrangements were made when Turkey was embarrassed by the war with Italy (1911–1912). That war ended with Turkey en- feebled and discouraged. Disorders broke out again in Macedonia and Albania. In October 1912, hostilities were begun by the Balkan states. The armies of Turkey, poorly equipped and disease-stricken, numbered less than 500,000; those of the Balkan allies were nearly 800,000, of which number Bulgaria alone had 350,000 and Serbia 250,000. The first contest came at Adrianople and Kirk Kilisse. The latter was captured, the former besieged. Farther south, on the line from Lule Burgas to Bunar Hissar, came the decisive battle of the war, a fierce four-day contest on a front of more than twenty miles, with losses of 50,000. The power of the Turk was broken. He retreated to Chatalja, twenty-five miles from Constantinople, and there fought out the winter, while the Montenegrins captured Scutari in north- ern Albania, the Greeks captured Yannina, and the Serbo-Bulgar armies took Adrianople. Earlier in the war, the Greeks had cap- tured Saloniki and the Serbs had overrun Macedonia. The Turk retained only a toe-hold in Europe. Turkey agreed to make peace, and by the treaty of London, May 1913, ceded all territory west and north of a straight line from Enos on the AEgean to Midia on the Black Sea (Fig. 150). She also gave up Crete to Greece and permitted the great powers to determine the final disposition of the AEgean islands and of Albania. The whole world had recognized the heroic work and brilliant success of the Balkan armies. There was therefore general dismay when the Balkan states fell to quarreling, and at last to fighting, over former Turkish territory. The situation may be summarized thus: (1) Bulgaria wanted and had been promised most of the captured territory. (2) Serbia, blocked in Albania by the action of the great powers (they set up an independent Albania in 1913), had there lost a § Djiurdjiu A L GORA G *g, SE4 of MARMAR4 e gº * 5 ~ - eº & © - - -• Boundaries before fle Baſkan Wars e -º- * affer -º Af * (7×eaty of Bucharasſ $2., E Confested zone according fo the Serbo-Bugarian freaty Aumania Keded by Bulgaria) quo - & - Territory acquired affer §ſº - * , S| the Balkan Wars by 3. ceded by Turkey Montenegro CORFU C. , v3 \R, AF E A. N Ö S F. A. - * ——— Main ra//roads |: “p T H ce sašti tº a FIG. 150. Changes of territory in the Balkans as a result of the First and Second Balkan wars. Spellings are those followed in the Geographical Review. Heavy dot-and-dash boundaries are those of 1914. The Enos-Midia line, occasionally mentioned in the text, is merely a straight line join- ing Enos on the AEgean and Midia on the Black Sea. By the secret treaty with Serbia before the First Balkan War, Bulgaria had been promised Macedonia south of the contested zone shown on the map, which zone was reserved for eventual arbitration by the Czar of Russia. 298 The New World Second Balkan War — causes and effects The spirit of revenge Bulgaria an ally of Germany in I915 chance of access to the sea, and now wanted an outlet at Saloniki. She therefore claimed a part of Macedonia. (3) But Greek armies had captured the town of Saloniki; Greece also wished a part of the Macedonian coast. (4) Montenegro felt that she had received no substantial reward. (5) Seeing Bulgaria gain territory elsewhere, Rumania urged that she be given the southern Dobrudja at Bulgaria's expense. The Second Balkan War Thereupon followed the Second Balkan War, in which Turkey joined Greece, Serbia, Rumania, and Montenegro against Bulgaria. The Turks retook Adrianople; the Rumanians seized the Dobrudja and advanced to within twenty miles of Sofia, and Greeks and Serbs closed in on the west. After a two months' war (June–July 1913), Bulgaria was obliged to make peace, signing the treaty of Bucarest of 1913, whereby : (1) Bulgaria gave up northern Macedonia to Serbia, including Usküb and Okhrida. - (2) Saloniki and southern Macedonia were given to Greece. (3) Bulgaria retained the town of Strumitsa in eastern Macedonia and about seventy miles of the AEgean seacoast west of the Maritsa River, but not including the port of Kavala. (4) Montenegro got the western half of Novi Bazar. (5) The southern Dobrudja was ceded to Rumania. Bulgaria made a separate treaty with Turkey, and the line between them was drawn as shown in Figure 150, thus shutting off Bulgaria from direct rail connection (along the west bank of the Maritsa) with the AEgean coast, except through Greek or Turkish territory. But the losses and gains in territory were a small matter compared with the bitter hatreds that the war had caused. Each of the Bal- kan states was even more jealous of the others than before, and the Bulgar felt himself humiliated and outraged. The nation had lost the flower of its manhood to win Adrianople and Lule Burgas in 1912, and now these strongholds were again under Turkish sovereignty. The hands of the clock could not be turned-back; Bulgaria sullenly waited her chance to retaliate. Bulgaria's Part in the World War The opportunity came in the World War. In October 1915, after negotiations with both sides in an effort to sell her alliance to the highest bidder, Bulgaria joined Turkey and the Central Powers. Bulgaria under the Treaty of Neuilly 299 ‘616I ‘KIIȚnòN JO A380-14 aqq Aq uIoIyalaqą uoſsnĮoxo Ieug øųą puſe ugođGY øųą pie Moq uoſsueďxo aqq oqoN - Ig I (ĐIJI €. 2 « O/ SS2220 (9) y0 00/0 S/2/u/s/p 3/doc/o/-/p/ (ç) ºos/jun/$(#) 22/6e/ -/sog (£) 00/Q/./09/ (Z) ºoºº wo36øy 2y0ur/ (/) /0 SS07 yo yvoq 1/9/(Z)/22/0 42///Sſ/0 0/000/2/…/Oſ/ (/) ſo voz//&/762/ y 29/////// | 9 ||6|| w/om/qõ «vºŲnos(º)/O SS07 zy z uvºÁ709 /0 w/3.09 (fº) (O3ý yo06øy og sºººoo (g) ºſo/00/3/W 90000\/y(Z) º/º/04 05://u/////9 (/) ſo worzysznáºſ, £I6|| 20øys ø006.///////90 -wodºwy zwo6/09) /24//s/2/2/22/Øy(Z)/ºzzo (Mº/oA ow/o/Jyvºdzºny (/) /0 l/0/SS320&y 616|| (206/ ? /90 %% /o/ o/ /2///S/o 30000\/y 988|| -oâng wae o/eu/ffy 0/0/S07./0 0/0/0/? � Z2 // 988|| Y wtewº04/22/3/ „~“Zzzº, o Azo3.// cºm 6&zovoºoo Azop Áunog posodova---- !A7d/o --/9ZnS. tys/y/p/ ./300/? owo6yng /o/-/od/? Zu/-/of 34///O (/O//23/2 (€/////) 919|| 000’000’9 J : L ȘIȘI-9|9|W|\|\|9||18. JO INHWd0THMH0 TW|}|0||\|\|]] |H| 300 The New World Principal terms of the treaty with Bul- garia Problem of the future Her active part in the war was confined to military operations near the Serbian and Greek frontiers. She became also a thorough- fare between the Danube and the Bosporus for German artillery, ammunition, and reënforcements for the Turks. German officers con- trolled her armies on the Saloniki front. When the final Balkan drive of 1918 came, the Bulgar troops fled in disorder. According to the terms of the treaty of Neuilly between Bulgaria and the Allied and Associated Powers (1919), Bulgaria: (1) Renounces all rights to territory formerly held by her outside the boundaries shown on Figure 153. (2) Agrees to protect alien minorities within her realm under terms laid down by the Allied and Associated Powers, and is assured like protection of Bulgarian minorities in neigh- boring states. (3) Promises to reduce her army to 25,000 men, to destroy her vessels of war, to maintain no air forces, and to submit to the restrictions laid down with respect to war materials. (4) Agrees to pay 2,250,000,000francs gold ($450,000,000); promises to restore the equivalent of requisitioned live stock; and acknowledges her obligation to contribute to the liquidation of the pre-war external Ottoman debt. She will also supply 50,000 tons of coal annually to Jugo-Slavia for five years, in com- pensation for the destruction of Serbian mines. (5) Allots to Greece, Rumania, and Serbia live stock to the number of 70,000 head by way of restitution for animals taken by Bul- garia during the War - (6) Gives the Allied and Associated Powers most-favored-nation treatment and freedom of transit for goods and persons. She is guaranteed like freedom of transit to the AEgean. WHAT BUL.GARIA NOW FACES Like Germany and Austria, Bulgaria has now the enormous task of meeting the conditions of peace after a military defeat and the sur- render of a great quantity of war material in compliance with the terms of the armistice, and in the face of economic disorder that every- where, even in the Allied countries, has followed hard upon the long and terrible strain of war. Her people are profoundly discouraged. Hereafter, Bulgaria's path will be beset by grave difficulties. Hers is a country agriculturally well-favored, a land of farms, with no great mineral deposits, no large manufacturing towns. The largest city, Sofia, has a population of only about 100,000. The chief seaport, Varna, has about 40,000. The greater part of the population lives # - Brown Bros. Fig. 152. The port of Kavala, on the AEgean, east of Saloniki between the valleys of the Struma and the Mesta. The port is the natural commercial - º ººº-º- outlet of western Bulgaria, but it has been in Greek hands since the Second Balkan War (1913). 302 The New World Bulgarians assigned to neighbor- ing states in a strip a hundred miles wide, south of the Danube. Aside from the fertility of the soil, coal is the chief natural resource, and the amount of this is very small. The yield during 1911 was only about 325,000 tons. There are also small amounts of iron, copper, and zinc, but the mines have been but little developed. Naturally poor in resources, Bulgaria has been losing man power rapidly for the past eight years. The Balkan wars took tens of thou- sands of her best men. These wars and the World War piled up a huge Bulgarian debt, which is now equivalent to the entire wealth of the country. It is impossible to calculate and impose revenues that will pay off this sum. Bulgaria is essentially bankrupt. Only the in- dustry of her people and the fertility of the soil are left to her out of which to make a nation. The cost of her aggression at the end of the First Balkan War, and of her union with Germany from 1915 to 1918, is the complete failure of her unwise plans to dominate the Balkans, a terrible loss of life and property, and a heightened reputation for cruelty to non-Bulgarian people in territory occupied by her troops. Bulgaria's neighbors have been given important groups of Bulgarian people. Greece in Thrace, Serbia in the Tsaribrod, Strumitsa, and Bosilegrad districts, and Rumania in the Dobrudja have acquired . thousands of Bulgarians. The case of the southern Dobrudja is especially important. It became Bulgarian in 1878, is inhabited by Bulgarians and Turks to the number of 273,000, and was lost in 1913 owing to Rumanian aggression, against which weakened Bulgaria could not offer resistance. Rumania wished to obtain the port of Baltchik on the Black Sea. On the other hand, we must remember: (1) That in September 1915 Bulgaria agreed to join Austria- Hungary against Serbia, and in return was to receive a certain share of Serbian land and people. (2) That Bulgarian authorities at one time declared that Serbia no longer existed, that it had become Bulgarian; closed schools and churches and even burned them ; compelled the people to speak Bulgarian ; and, like the Germans in Belgium and northeastern France, levied fines and contributions, took away food, and ruined the country. (3) That out of tens of thousands of Serbians interned in Bul- garian camps, at least half died. (4) That Bulgarian outrages upon Greeks and Serbs—mén, women, and children — were among the most hideous of the war. An unexpected difficulty for Bulgaria comes from the large numbers of refugee Bulgarians from Thrace, Macedonia, and the Dobrudja Bulgaria under the Treaty of Neuilly 303 ·oz6I oump ºmøyaøy ſooņņdoudoop oq, moſq ºre M pțioM aqq jo ºmsø) e se ºpſežng yo sessoi reſuo4priº L '891 ºbrī sougęĢì7:7777777777777OoOºOºººl : 0 ~zº��§2/o MCzºozºoq. 94, 3&&3&º oz.aerº, Mazºv, 94, z// |�*gņu10ië1S10 «>; ſae.§§©Š````zºzowºcz/ sºvá/zz2z723/4/22/6oº6; º, //yN| 89 ©Ş(Aſſoļebņ3999N�zdºwy;&çoſtºº £6,3‰, dºts & & & ���■ ■· Z řaeºlººg (`>>^I^>:( : · · zadov --★ }și-º§§ -' *==). № F : (a) ≠√5)22/26/27 /o sºzvoodooq A13/Żą, 3 %}o№SºJº So_^~ 0 …:(§.|- ޺fJļOCI ģºſ*%,∞ ,^2% CI ȘI Oșé ſõűfffffff(!qųöģğ%(~~~~, §§|-?a?* #Ïïºffſ|esų Ļº} d0 NW18||aulipaſ į%. » p ,••••••**……..…`.* 1W ÅHW0 NT108¿< >Q0.Iſ (guA. •�ººy/g,'${09,‘ºed. �16 euaſqăışşağı”• %·}TOEN• {\\y§ l[9]ųSIAS· O XO^IO &%%«),?\\|-„Ž402334∞9 ^/12 ·<|?odoſ§} (>{nupļusnyſ)3Y ,�22» sº'';»Ģ !,asn}},??. S& % »22. º X º 2 - & 3 et / 2' > $ººrººſ t Sº røj % $35% 42 % M 0 SLEM sº tuida J’ , ſº-é 3–’ §§§z. ſ & 4 à º gº % (ºnaer /faſh $. .- 2_ ſº º N jºijSī. KA } 2 wº FIG. 155. Schematic representation of pro- posed division of Albania according to the secret treaty of London, 1915, between Italy, Great Britain, France, and Russia. Niš zone for land operations in case of attack. This would assure her naval supremacy in the Adriatic and protect her entire eastern coast, a highly important matter when we realize that she is singu- larly exposed to attack by sea and has the densest population of any Mediterranean state (Fig. 67). In the face of a strong land attack by Albanian forces, Italy withdrew from Walona in the summer of 1920. The Albanians were stirred to action by the belief that Italy had agreed to approve the cession of southern Albania to Greece and was on the verge of securing an Albanian mandate from the great powers. First plan — to di- vide Al- bania Albania not well organized to oppose foreign control Italian de- sire for mandate OVer Albania 310 The New World Distribu- tion of Al- banian people Centers of Albanian interest and oppo- sition §s . . غ ºf-S \º º $º º º - § º \ \ º & y N º *T. É% zºr sy - j^ i _% º P&I Nº-tº AL; ) ...~" Djakova 9 (CHRISTIANÇATHOLTö) vº wiſfies some % - º «» 2. §ºuſe: [C \vº º QHA #Dºn RIBES ź #S$ 2. §§ $2% % * º º sº º º p Şsº º Scale of miles & S$3% 10. 0. N. S-3 º Sºğ22 N i-ºff. I Jugo-Slavs, 2 Vlachs, 3 Turks FIG. 156. Albanian ethnography, religions, and boundaries. For a key to the numbers, see the panel at the bottom of the map. The region north of the Shkumbirriveristhemore typically Albanian. Greek sentiment prevails at Argyrocastro and Albanian sentiment at Koritsa and Valona. Note that all the principal towns, of which Scutari is the largest, lie near the border of the country and have been occu- pied one after another by foreign powers most of the time since the First Balkan War (1912), despite the fact that Albania won its independence from Turkey in 1912. The effect has been to prevent the people from taking united action on national questions. See Figure 129 for a relief map of the Balkans. THE PEOPLE OF ALBANIA The northern Albanians are distributed along the valley floors tributary to Lake Scutari, and about the lake border itself. South and east of these groups are the true moun- taineers, the most primitive of all, a pastoral people of rude life and custom. Still farther south are bands of population along the valleys, separated from each other by high and steep mountain chains with few passes. At the southern end of the country are good agricultural districts with larger towns, like Koritsa. Along the eastern margin of the main Albanian mountain mass are broad, rich walleys where out- liers of Albanian population live in large numbers, as for example, Üsküb, Prizren, and Okhrida. - -- The people of southern Al- bania have many resemblances to the Greeks. In the neigh- borhood of Argyrocastro there % is a strong pro-Greek feeling, on account of Greek schools; but north of this region again the Albanian national spirit is strong and hatred of the Greeks intense. The town of Koritsa is Albanian, and so is the ter- ritory around it. In northern Albania the mountain people depend upon the market towns for a great many of their life needs, and The Albanian Mountaineers 311 Fig. 157. Part of the town of Koritsa, southern Albania. these market towns, with the exception of Scutari, are in Serbian or Montenegrin territory. The result is that in mountain communities, far from Scutari, there is almost general scarcity of the products of the towns. Everywhere the frontiers are practically closed, and there is almost complete stagnation of economic life. The life of the Albanian mountaineer has been unsettled by long military occupation. Patrols of Albanians and Serbs were obliged to guard almost all the roads in 1919–1920, after the Italian and French forces of occupation had gone. No one could travel in Albania without an armed guard, and bands of mountaineers com- mitted atrocities in many sections. The general unrest was fostered by Serbian conscription in areas of Albanian population included within the Jugo-Slav frontiers. THE PROSPECT FOR UNITED ALBANIA In the meantime Albanian leaders are working for the union of the Albanian people into one state, and their efforts have resulted in admission to the League of Nations and a recognition of independence. A provisional government has made a preliminary agreement with Italy which leaves the latter in possession of the peninsulas on either side of the harbor of Walona and of the islands that guard the approaches, but releases the town and port to Albania. Italy also Prevalence of unrest and brig- andage Present plan of union 312 The New World obtains recognition of her paramount political interest in Albanian affairs ss part of her general program of Adriatic defense. It will be important to have the final boundaries of Albania carefully drawn, so as to bring about union, as far as possible, of all Albanians directly connected with the main body, and ensure economic prosperity, which forms one of the bases of enduring peace. However, the pro- cess of making a unified state will be doubly difficult in a land with almost no railroads, few newspapers, and a high degree of illiteracy. Also opposed to the unifying processes are the rivalries of bordering states—Greece, Jugo-Slavia, and Italy. If in furthering their com- mercial interests these states employ the traditional forms of political propaganda, there may ensue disorder, if not disaster. CHAPTER EIGHTEEN THE REUNITED GREEK LANDS THERE are three salient periods of development in Greek history to which attention may be directed for an understanding of the modern Greek program and the new boundaries of Greece: (1) The early period of Greek settlement on the shores of the Mediterranean. (2) The revival of Greek national feeling that led to the war of independence in 1829. (3) The territorial growth of the immediate past (1912 to 1920) that has culminated in the Greece of today. The first period spanned a space of many centuries, until Greek col- onies were established along the thousands of miles of coast from the Pillars of Hercules (Gibraltar) to the eastern end of the Black Sea. By the 8th century B.C. the Greek people occupied an area far greater than Greece itself, and some of the larger and earlier settlements, particularly on the AEgean, “were ready to send out colonies in com- petition with those of the parent land.” The motive for emigration was at first the pressure of population in Greece. Later the Greeks invaded the Phoenician trading areas, their pirates preying upon the commerce of the Phoenicians. A spirit of adventure, travel, and foreign settlement marked the rise of Greek power upon the sea. It was natural that conquest should go hand in hand with the development of this power, and at length in Alexan- der's time (331 B.C.) effective Greek control was extended as far as the Euphrates, which for many centuries was to mark the line between the enterprising, virile peoples of the west and the more static oriental culture of Asia. The maritime traditions of the Greeks, their skill as traders, their occupation of the entire AEgean realm, their distribution throughout the Mediterranean and Black Sea basins as merchants and carriers, their hold upon the commercial outlets of the lands tributary to these basins, their settlement in patches and fringes of population on the Seacoasts of lands inhabited by non-Greek peoples—all these factors converge upon the problems of the moment and render the tracing of Greek boundaries exceedingly difficult if justice is to be done to the nations that border Greece in the Near East. Rise of Greek commercial and politi- cal power 313 314 The New World. Rise of the city-state Change in ethnic character of Greeks o 22 Uskub Okhrida . . Monastir; Koritsäºf nº rº,fººt –––Bounda/YêS C/aimed by Greece — Boundaries gramfed. by the Aeocedom?rence ----Superseded boundarés SCALE OF Mll-FS ā-ā-ā-ā- 22 24. FIG. 158. The map embraces the whole field of Greek territorial claims. For detailed bounda– ries in the Smyrna and Constantinople districts see Figures 161 and 207. The Armenian boundary southwest of Trebizond is subject to modifications in detail. The cession of the Dodecanese to Greece by Italy (excepting Rhodes, which Italy retains) was by treaty between Italy and Greece, but with general Allied sanction. With “Boundaries granted by the Peace Conference ’’ in the legend are grouped present de facto boundaries such as the Albano-Greek and Serbo-Greek boundaries. Hand in hand with the rise of Greek power there went the develop- ment of the city-state, the first great milestone in the progress of liberal government. Attica became the symbol of democracy, and though it was but a seed that was planted there, the fruit eventually borne contributed to the political life and institutions of democratic governments everywhere throughout the world. We shall not attempt to trace in detail the fortunes of the Greek people in the period of their long eclipse. In modified (Byzantine) form Greek civilization survived during the interval between the con- Quest of Greece by the Romans in 146 B.C. and the ultimate winning of Greek independence in 1829 (the treaty of Adrianople). At least in name, Constantinople was a Greek city for a thousandyears. Here the Greek Orthodox Church took its rise, and from this and other centers of Greek life and culture there radiated the power of Greek ideals in literature, art, and government that for centuries profoundly affected the Roman world; some of its impulses are felt even in the life and institutions of our own time. Yet in the long centuries of eclipse, profound changes were to affect the Greek people. The racial character itself was ethnically altered. Strong Slavic infusions took place. The genius of the people declined. Many of the modern Greeks, including even those who live within sight of the Acropolis, are ignorant of the noblest traditions of Greek life. In place of the The Reunited Greek Lands 315 Odysseys of ancient Greece, we have in modern times the sordid tale of petty trading and bartering in the ports of the Near Eastern world. In spite of the Greek decline, there are two qualities that stand out with striking prominence. The first is the capacity of the Greek to absorb the people who invade his lands. The invader, whether it was Albanian or Slav, who penetrated the Greek peninsula, came to have something more than a veneer of Hellenic culture; for it is difficult to resist assimilation into a mode of life, a regional spirit, as distinc- tive as that of the Hellenic lands. Something of this regional spirit may be at the bottom of the second quality — the tenacity shown in never-fading desire for independence and the reunion of Greek lands, at least about the borders of the AEgean. Doubtless there could more than once have been a realization of this aim if the Greeks had not lacked that vital thing necessary to national power and welfare—the unity of its people. Just as the city-states fell to quarreling with each other (for example, in the Peloponnesian War of 431–404 B.C.) and finally almost extinguished their national inheritance, so in the later history of Greece rival chieftains and the leaders of opposing factions have harmed Greece as much as has the outsider. Finally, through the bitter lessons of Turkish rule, from 1456 down to 1829, Greek leaders were taught the necessity of working for a com- mon purpose, and in the Greek war of independence at last achieved freedom from the Turk. The history of Greece from that time for- ward is marked by almost incessant internal disorder and by the practical overlordship of the great powers of western Europe. To mention only one episode in her foreign relations, the war with Turkey in 1897 brought upon Greece a heavy indemnity of $20,000,000; and in addition she was forced to submit to a loss of territory on her northern frontier. At the outbreak of war in 1914, the pro-German sympathies of King Constantine, who had married a sister of Emperor William of Germany, led to a long internal struggle, ending in 1917 with the flight of the king and the elevation to leadership of Venizelos, one of the most remarkable men of modern Europe. Thereafter Greece fought on the side of the Allies, and though her total war effort in 1917–1918 amounted to but little, she had participated heartily in the Balkan War of 1912 by which Turkey was all but ousted from Europe. She had still further extended her territory, at the expense of Bul- garia, in the Second Balkan War, and in 1914 her frontier stood as represented in Figure 150. Late in 1920, as the result of popular vote, the government of Venizelos fell. Constantine returned to the Greek Independ- ©11Ce 8. persistent 8||1111 Greek war of inde- pendence 316 The New World Macedonia a transition region A theater of political propaganda throne, but it cannot yet be said whether this means a repudiation of the Venizelos program. In the new settlement of the Balkans and the Near East it was the Greek plan to lay claim to the most important Greek lands in the Near Eastern realm. These we shall now discuss in detail in the following order: Macedonia, Thrace, the Dodecanese, Smyrna, Epirus, Trebizond, Cyprus. THE DIVISION OF MACEDONIA Macedonia under Alexander became the heart of a great empire, and some measure of its greatness was retained by the country until the Turkish invasion of the 14th century, when, in common with other Balkan lands, it became a part of the Turkish Empire. With the revival of nationalities in the Balkans, particularly in the 19th century, the Macedonian question in its modern aspect took form. The region has always had indefinite boundaries. It reaches the sea. at Saloniki on the south, extends westward to Lake Okhrida and the Albanian frontier, merges almost insensibly on the east into Bul- garian territory in the Strumitsa region, and on the north reaches as far as Üsküb. Within these limits the population may be estimated around 2,000,000, of whom more than half are Christians and the rest chiefly Mohammedans, with some Jews in the towns, notably at Saloniki. In population as in position the region is a transition land. The language has qualities that resemble both Bulgarian and Serbian. Church membership in many cases classifies a man “racially.” From Figure 159 it will be seen that Macedonia lies at the meeting place of three Balkan states, Serbia, Bulgaria, and Greece, and it was natural that each of these states should make an effort to impose its culture upon the people and develop a nationalist sentiment among them. Bulgarian claims rested upon one-time possession of the region and the racial character of the people. But the Serbs also held the country for a time and left a deep impress there, for exam- ple, in architecture and literature. The chief media of propaganda were the school and the church. Until her wars for independence early in the 19th century, Greece led in influence because of the strength of her church organization and her superior culture. Her hold was all the stronger because she oper- ated chiefly in the towns, where powerful Greek merchants lived, and the towns in turn greatly influenced the country districts tributary to them. Even Rumania joined in the effort to penetrate Macedonia and win adherence to her program of national expansion. This she The Reunited Greek Lands 317 22% 2. ºž 2 "I AZ N 2I º % SO 52 2. 3% ºl.% - On- C7 Uſ/C/Q/r/Q/7S (ICCOPOI//7 2” º *… %% % #ºrang \. }% % Ø % ſº – Western /imit of area *Isrºya -*\ }% % % inhabited by Bulgarians "S.S. Ø @ º according fo CVijjó. %3 & % ...... Limit of area inhabifed by Macedonian S/q vs according fo Cvijić. C % 3%32 3%% % º Prºzºr Prºv Scaſe of miles ØØ Ø% 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 1 * * * *-f f t L t % ºf Šº %: Eğ * ( Sºº O º: 3°3. FIG. 159. Conflicting views on ethnography of the Macedonian region by a Bulgarian, Ischerkoff (Petermanns Mitteilungen, 1915, Pl. 44), and a Serbian, Cvijić (Report of the International Com- mission to Inquire into the Causes and Conduct of the Balkan Wars, Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, 1915). Existing international boundaries are shown by heavy dash-and-dot lines. was able to do because of the presence of Vlachs in large numbers — probably between 75,000 and 100,000 in all in the Macedonian coun- try (Fig. 145). In the struggle for supremacy Bulgaria was favored by the establishment of the Exarchist, or Bulgarian, church in 1870 by Turkish authority. The Exarch was head of the church and was able to further Bulgarian interests by impressing upon all members of his church the national, or Bulgarian, character of their religion. By the secret alliance between Serbia and Bulgaria before the First Balkan War a detailed line was agreed upon, beyond which Serbia was “to formulate no territorial claim,” and a contested zone which ex- tended westward far enough to include Úsküb and Dibra was reserved for arbitration by the Czar of Russia (Fig. 150). But Bulgaria made unexpected gains in eastern Thrace, and the powers decided to form an independent Albania in the regions where Serbia had hoped to increase her territory. Wherefore Serbia denounced the territorial Macedonia in relation to the Sec- ond Balkan War 3.18 The New World terms of the alliance, and the Second Balkan War resulted. With the complete success of Serbia and Greece they divided the country as shown in Figure 150. Serbia obtained still more territory by the treaty of peace with Bulgaria which followed the World War, whereby the Strumitsa salient, with other bits of territory, was ceded to her (that is, to Jugo-Slavia). The local disarrangement of life which this brought about was very serious. Macedonians in large numbers had emigrated from Serbian territory into the Strumitsa salient at the close of the Balkan wars, and with the cession of this territory to Jugo-Slavia they have again been required to move. :: *. The Macedonian question, once the chief political problem of the j, Near East, has passed into an entirely new phase. Neither Greece question nor Serbia is expected to give up Macedonian territory for a possible future Macedonia. The Macedonians are without leaders of real ability, and the heterogeneous character of the population makes it impossible for them to have or to express a common public opinon. There are no significant resources. It is a poor country, largely de- forested and partly desolate, and will always be commercially tributary to communities that are richer and economically better balanced. It is therefore improbable that the Macedonian question will be re- vived except through the possible cruelties of Greeks and Serbs in their treatment of the Macedonians, a danger of the kind which it was the chief purpose of the minorities treaties to avoid. THE QUESTION OF THRACE Distribu- An extension of her eastern frontier in Thrace as far as the Black ‘.... in Sea gives Greece control of the entire southern littoral of the Balkan Thrace peninsula, and with this acquisition go commercial advantages of peculiar interest to a seafaring and trading population like the Greeks. In support of her claim to this important strip of territory Greece pointed to the thousand years of control of Constantinople by the Greek or Byzantine Empire, and to the large number of Greek people in eastern and western Thrace, who would have numbered still more had it not been for the massacres by Turks and Bulgarians in the Balkan wars and in the recent World War itself. An ethnic map of the region is difficult to construct because of the unequal character of the statistics and the lack of any statistics at all for important places. This much is surely known, that the two principal towns, Adrianople and Kirk Kilisse, are chiefly Greek and that in the region as a whole Greeks outnumber Turks. Bulgarians form the third of the three principal ethnic groups. The mixture of populations is The Reunited Greek Lands 320 The New World Greek acquisition of Thrace Restric- tions and obligations Italian occupation in 1911 due to the historical character of Thrace as a transition region between Turkish and Balkan peoples. The problem was further confused by the effect of the two Balkan wars and the World War, which displaced or destroyed whole sections of the population. Before 1912 the Greeks in eastern Thrace (east of the Maritsa) numbered 400,000 as against 250,000 Turks and 50,000 Bulgarians. According to Greek estimates western Thrace had a population of 400,000, of whom 70,000 only were Greeks, 59,000 Bulgarians, and 285,000 Turks. Bulgarian fig- ures ascribe 185,000 Bulgarians to the region and only 32,000 Greeks. In laying claim to the whole of Thrace, Greece had the powerful argument that if any portion of the coast bordering the AEgean were left in the hands of Bulgaria or Turkey, the harbors of that coast would furnish bases for submarine attacks upon the long coast line of Greece. By the terms of the Turkish and Bulgarian treaties she wins all the territory of eastern and western Thrace except a small area at Constantinople, though a coastal strip on the sea of Marmara is to be under Allied control (Fig. 158). By acquiring Thrace, Greece has achieved the principal part of her program of the reunion of Greek lands. She is restricted, however, in three important matters: (1) She must guarantee Bulgaria freedom of transit to the AEgean through Thrace. (2) The Maritsa is to be constituted an international river upon application to the League of Nations of the states bordering that river, — that is, of Bulgaria and Greece. - (3) She undertakes to protect minority populations, especially at Adrianople, where the racial elements are to have representa- tion in the local government according to a scheme prepared by Greece. It is further provided, on account of the large number of Turks in Thrace and the large number of Greeks on the southern shore of the Black Sea and elsewhere under Turkish sovereignty, that Greece and Turkey may negotiate for the reciprocal exchange of their nationals. THE DODECANESE AND OTHER ISLANDS OF THE AEGEAN When she secured liberation from Turkish rule in 1829, Greece acquired only a portion of her national territory. An important part of her population is located in a group of islands off the coast of Ana- tolia and south of Smyrna, known as the Dodecanese. The popu- The Reunited Greek Lands 321 lation comprises 100,000 Greeks as compared with 12,000 persons of other nationalities. By the terms of the treaty of Lausanne, which closed the Italo-Turkish War, the islands were to be occupied by Italy until Turkey had withdrawn officers, troops, and officials from Libya. Before these agreements had been completed the World War broke out, and in the peace settlement of 1920 with Turkey the Dodecanese were ceded to Italy; but at the same time Italy and Greece signed a separate treaty transferring the islands to Greece. Rhodes alone was retained by Italy, though a qualified plebiscite is provided for at the end of five years (page 326). - Commercially the islands are not important. They have little arable ground, no industries of importance, and no maritime activity except some sponge fishing. Conditions of life are distinctly hard. But the islands do form an important base for the commercial pene- tration of Anatolia. . . As a result of the Balkan wars, Greece had already received Lemnos, Samothrace, Mytilene, Samos, Nikaria, and Chios, in addi- tion to other smaller islands in the AEgean. She now receives Imbros and Tenedos. The total area of these islands is somewhat less than 2000 square miles, and they have a population of about 325,000, of whom "90 per cent are Greek. The islands are of moderate commer- cial importance. THE SMYRNA REGION Possible cession to Greece Greek gains in the Ægean islands Among outlying territories it is the Smyrna region that is of chief The Greeks interest to Greece, for here live about 500,000 Greeks in an area but little larger than the state of Connecticut. The city of Smyrna has 375,000 people and is now the largest city in the Greek world, Athens having but 168,000. Ever since the coming of the Turk (early 15th century), these Greeks have been under the government of an alien conquering race. During the World War they were badly treated, and during the period of peace-making they were alleged to be in serious danger of massacre by Turkish troops. To save the Greek population from possible attacks by the Turks, the Allies permitted Greece to land troops at Smyrna and occupy the adjacent district. Allied warships were present to take part in the operations if necessary, an action that was complicated by the pres- ence of the Italians immediately to the south. Unauthorized by the Peace Conference at Paris – in fact, in the face of its direct protests — the Italians landed troops in the Adalia region on the pretext of protecting their interests. As a matter of fact, they have no inter- of Smyrna Greek occu- pation of Smyrna; complica- tions with the Italians to the South 322 - The New World Greek claim to the region Smyrna, the port of an ex- tensive hinterland 28 -5-1 ests there worthy of mention. Clashes oc- curred between Greek and Italian troops, and finally (July 1919) the peace conference sent a military mission to Smyrna to establish the limits of the Greek and d Italian military Occu- | % º e z_* pations. - ‘.…Sººº. 4 *:::  ſº The Greeks are a $2 |&’%...…" º LA- 43. $3% % - coast and island people. s fºº The AEgean is their is ºp' ..Sººº... olyſiſ: % =9–4–3 tº a tº —# —# sº +** sea historically. The According to Greeks outnumber Turks Trojan War was prima- Greek statistics : , number 50% of Turks e e ty , 25 °/, , , rily an issue of the * Greek need—a need Fig. 161. Map of the Smyrna region, showing the ethnic basis e tº 2 & f f of Greek claims according to Greek statistics. still existing—for free - access to the grain lands of the Black Sea. In the Smyrna region Greeks have been set- tled for thousands of years. With the city and the region adjacent to it is associated a great deal of Greek history and tradition, and it has long been a trade focus. Greek traders here met the laden cara- vans that every year. journeyed out of Inner Asia across the wastes of Persia and the Syrian desert with the rich spices, teas, silks, and jewelry of the East. Camel caravans may still be seen, but now a railway connects Smyrna with inland towns that may grow to be important cities under a reorganized Turkish government. - As the outlet for a large part of western Anatolia, Smyrna is a commercial prize. In 1914 the chief exports were: Tobacco . . . . . . . . $1,380,000 Valonia . . . . . . . . . $208,000 Opium . . . . . . . . . . 1,365,000 Olive oil . . . . . . . . . 148,000 Figs . . . . . . . . . . 700,000 Raisins . . . . . . . . . 80,000 Licorice root . . . . . . 460,000 Wool . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 Carpets and rugs . . . . . 400,000 Walnuts . . . . . . . . . 17,000 Emery stone. . . . . . . 280,000 Peas . . . . . . . . . . 17,000 Skins . . . . . . . . . 233,000 Preserves . . . . . . . . 14,000 The table shows that Smyrna is the port not only for the district immediately around it, but for the far interior as well. The products of the desert, where a certain amount of grazing is possible, the prod- The Reunited Greek Lands 323 ºspueq ſſºaiſ) uſ wou are (19 I (?!)) noſansſp puae aeqqo aq L ºperą nuođxø uſ quod øper, ſeqoq uſ &øyſun, L. Jo quod puoøæs æq} sew sqq.L. 'soºeae (IN tuouſ uººs 'eſſoļeuw urºqsøM 'buiſtus ! , ! \sing aqq pueºsugºuſºq ºrdouņuensuoo |- 2. "Z91 ºbiſ |× 324 The New World Terms of Greek control of Smyrna ucts of the irrigated oases at the borders of the desert, as well as the products of the farms and orchards in the mountain valleys that face the sea behind Smyrna — all find their outlet through this, the greatest of Turkish ports except Constantinople. Some statesmen think that Greek control of Smyrna would have the advantage of combining the principal Greek element in the eastern Mediterranean with the home country, and of strengthening the Greek nation. Others contend that it would be unfair, as it would so weaken Turkey as practically to destroy her economic life. According to the terms of the Turkish treaty (still unsatisfied), the management by Greece of the Smyrna region (Fig. 161) is to follow the lines indicated in the following summary: (1) Turkey keeps her sovereignty over the region, but transfers her “rights of sovereignty” to Greece, who may maintain the military force necessary to keep order, though compulsory mili- tary service is forbidden. (2) The ports, railways, and waterways of the region are included within the régime for European waterways provided by the earlier treaties of 1919–1920 between the Allies and the Central Powers. (3) Greek customs are to be collected on the frontiers of the region. (4) Greece is to provide diplomatic and consular protection for Turkish nationals from the Smyrna region abroad. (5) A local parliament is constituted, including representatives of all races. The principles of the Greek constitution are to govern the relations of this parliament to the Greek adminis- tration. - - (6) The final status of the region is not determined. In 1925 the local parliament may ask the League of Nations to per- mit the union of the region to Greece, in which case the Coun- cil of the League may require a plebiscite. (7) Turkey is to have a customs zone at Smyrna, in which she is § enjoy full freedom of commerce without paying customs U16S. - NORTHERN EPIRUS Northern Epirus (southern Albania) has a population estimated to number between 250,000 and 300,000. It is equally divided between members of the Greek Orthodox Church and Mohammedans, the former speaking Albanian, but presumably having Greek sympathies. The Reunited Greek Lands 325 Fig. 163. A laden camel caravan marching toward Smyrna from the interior of Anatolia. For a time just before the war, the Albanian Greek Orthodox people of Epirus proclaimed themselves an autonomous state, and estab- lished a provisional government at Argyrocastro. In 1914 “sacred battalions,” said to have been composed in part of Greek citizens, ravaged the country of the Albanian Moslems and massacred or drove out a great many people, at the same time destroying their villages. Twenty thousand people fled into the Walona region. At the Confer- ence of Corfu in May 1914, the Albanian government and the great powers agreed upon a separate government for northern Epirus. Albanians violently oppose the Greek claims to northern Epirus. Their arguments are similar to those advanced in so many other disputed regions of Europe. The people of the region speak Albanian, and nearly half are Mohammedan in religion. Koritsa, the most important town in the disputed zone, is a center of Albanian nationalist influence. The schools are almost exclusively Greek, and Greek culture and economic influence are dominant. The sentiment of the Albanian population here, as elsewhere, is very difficult to esti- mate. It has had no practice in free voting and has always been dis- tracted by the propagandist agents of neighboring powers. The disposition of the northern Epirus region long awaited the settlement of the Albanian question. Now that Jugo-Slavia and Italy have come to an agreement that does not include Greece, Greek claims in southern Albania have little importance. The return of Con- stantine to the Greek throne has also diminished Allied support of Albanian view of Greek control 326 The New World Greece. Moreover, Albania has won recognition as an independent state from the League of Nations, and as such she is now probably secure from selfish territorial encroachment. - TREBIZOND The strip of Greek population along the southern shore of the Black Sea that includes the city of Trebizond numbers 350,000, but it is far from the central portion of the Greek world. For these reasons the Greek desire to have a zone of influence there met with no support from the treaty makers at Paris in 1919. The only ad- vantage that has been won for these people is their protection as a minority population, partly within the new Turkish state and partly within the new Armenia. CYPRUS Great Britain “occupied” Cyprus from 1878 on, according to an agreement of that year whereby she should remain in Cyprus as long as Russia occupied the Transcaucasian provinces of Kars, Batum, and Ardahan, which she had taken from Turkey. Though Cyprus is Greek in population, it forms a link in the British strategic chain. On 5 November 1914 the British government annexed the island, and this action was confirmed by all the interested powers in the Turkish treaty of 1920. Finally, Article 3 of the Franco-British agreement of 23 December 1920 provides that Great Britain shall not cede or alienate the island without the previous consent of France. Connected with the question of Cyprus is that of Rhodes, held by Italy since the Italo-Turkish war of 1911–1912. By treaty with Greece (1920) provision is made for a plebiscite in five years. If the inhabitants vote for Greece Italy will withdraw, provided Great Britain will withdraw from Cyprus. THE OUTLOO K FOR GREECE As a result of the treaties which closed the two Balkan wars and of the terms of the Turkish and Bulgarian treaties and other ar- rangements with the Allied powers in 1919 and 1920, Greece has won so much territory that her area is now twice what it was in 1911. Before the Balkan wars she had a population of 2,700,000. With the addition of 1,400,000 in Macedonia, Epirus, and Thrace, some hundreds of thousands inhabiting islands now ceded to Greece, and about 1,000,000 at Smyrna, her population is about 5,000,000, and of the population gained since 1912 about 2,250,000 are Greek. The Reunited Greek Lands 327 With inspiring sea traditions, Greece is now on the way to becoming one of the strongest minor powers of Europe. At the beginning of the World War the tonnage of Greek merchant ships was about 820,000; that is, in proportion to the population, Greek merchant tonnage compared favorably with that of all but four countries. Greece has acquired new harbors of great importance to her. Saloniki was added in 1912, Dedeagatch and Smyrna in 1920, not to include such important inland stations as Adrianople, Kirk Kilisse, etc. This advantage is offset in part by shipping losses during the war, which have brought her total down to 291,000 tons. There is promise of increasing strength in the internal economic situation of Greece. In order to stimulate commerce and industry, as well as agriculture and the merchant marine ministries of agriculture and shipping have been created in the cabinet of the government. Fortunately, there is no troublesome land-tenure question; in late years the proportion of small estates has increased rapidly, and pro- duction has been stimulated by the formation of coöperative agri- cultural societies. - It is too early to estimate the political and economic effects of the return of Constantine to the Greek throne. Certainly it will be more difficult for Greece to secure loans from the Allied powers; and Greek participation in the Turkish treaty may be far less favorable to her. The Allies have it in their power to embarrass Greece, if they wish to do so, by refusing military and moral support when clashes occur, as they are bound to, between Greek civil officials and troops of occupation on the one hand and minority groups in the newly won territories on the other. Whether Allied help will be withdrawn is a matter of vital importance to Greece, whose present territorial status is almost wholly an Allied creation. Poland O11Ce 81 great free nation Rapid de- cline and ultimate partition of Poland CHAPTER NINETEEN Poland and its disputed Borderlands AMONG the reconstituted nations of the world there is none other that has had so great a past as Poland. The Polish realm long included Lithuania, and as late as 1740 it extended from the Baltic almost to the Black Sea (Fig. 165). At that time it nearly reached the Oder on the west; it passed the main stream of the Dnieper on the east. Warsaw was then one of the great capitals of Europe. The trade of the Ottoman Empire in part flowed northwestward from the Black Sea and the Bosporus through Polish towns. During the 12th and 13th centuries Poland was the scene of costly civil war, owing to the quarrels of the rival Polish princes. Military pressure by Mongols and Prussians further diverted the strength of the Polish government. By attaching Lithuania to itself in 1386, Poland had increased its territory so greatly that for several centuries thereafter it was one of the two or three largest nations of continental Europe. But its internal and external difficulties were at last to prove fatal. As Prussia advanced on the west, Poland sought to advance eastward. It was a great and historic mistake, and one which Poland appears determined to repeat. Poland does not seem to be able to absorb large Russian elements successfully. Within thirty-two years of the climax of its power and one hundred and twenty-four years after the time of its greatest expansion, Poland suffered the first of the divisions known in history as the three partitions of Poland (1772, 1793, 1795). Evil effects # The three partitions of Poland, in which its territory was divided of the partitions of Poland by Russia, Prussia, and Austria, left it paralyzed. National pride was humiliated. The robber states set up new boundaries that completely disregarded the natural relations of the region. The social and economic life of the people was shaken to its foundation. Rivers that once pulsated with life became merely “dead border lines.” Though revolutionary movements were started in 1831 and 1863, the latter being suppressed by outrageous cruelties, until 1918 Polish nationality was hopelessly enchained. - A review of Poland's problems will show that its situation and international relations are matters of vital importance to the future stability of Europe. The elements of danger are as great as in the Balkans, and most of the available leaders are untried in adminis- tration and government. It will strain Poland's intellectual resources 328 Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 329 POLAND | 64.8 Scale 1: 17 500 000 & º too 2 25 cº-ºš FIG. 164. Based on Droysen, Allgemeiner Historischer Handatlas, Pl. 40. From the Geograph- ical Review, Vol. 4, 1917. to provide officials of the right kind to manage her complex problems of state. Among the historical and geographical elements to which attention is here given are the following: . . (1) The geographical position of the country is in the midst of (2) (3) (4) (5) a vast plain without natural frontiers eastward toward Russia or westward toward Germany. . Though Slavs, the Poles are Roman Catholic, whereas the Russians are Greek Orthodox and the Germans chiefly Protestant. Though Slavs, the Poles represent western, as opposed to eastern, culture. - Once a great nation, there would be a natural tendency for Poland to wish to include within the present frontiers all of its former territory, even if acquired at the expense of neigh- boring states. . The Poles were once divided among three rival powers — Russia, Germany, and Austria – and this fact, in part, makes them the enemies of their two strongest neighbors, Germany and Russia. , * - 330 gº The New World * º C 2: - * * ,” %22% % (ſ) º 3e sº K9/, fienº N # D 9 M, % J.---> ?” § 2-er º < JY OF POLAND .*. I74.O Ul, N G A R 300 pºſses Scale 1:17 500000 o 122 2C PARTITIONS . OF POLAND 0. R. 7bRussia Toprussia TbAustria. % 1772 N Z [[III] . I793 [795 Scale 1: 17 500 OOO o Jºo 200miles Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 331 (6) Though a strip of Polish population reaches the Baltic, this strip is very narrow; if widened it would be at the expense of the Germans, who already have protested at even so nar- row a strip as that shown in Figure 171. (7) The eastern border of ethnic Poland is ill-defined, and the recent growth of Polish population in this region is more rapid than anywhere else on the borders of Poland. It follows that Polish statesmen desire a new frontier to be established as far east as possible. ORGANIZATION OF THE NEW REPUBLIC There is a saying that when the white eagle of Poland flies in the sky, the red eagle of Prussia must come down. But the red eagle was in the sky for a hundred and forty years. Had the Polish people not had great tenacity and a long national history, they might this day be divided among neighbors of different race and speech. But throughout the long period of oppression by Russians, Prussians, and Austrians they kept alive their national consciousness and pride, and despite enormous difficulties organized a central government in 1918. Pilsudski became the military leader and provisional president, and Paderewski was later appointed president of the council of min- isters, or premier. The latter's knowledge of American and English character made him a most powerful exponent of Polish affairs at the Peace Conference of Paris. The steadying effect of his work was of vast benefit to his people. He was threatened by Bolshevism outside of Poland and by doubters within; he was confronted by almost general want, the lack of money and troops, the absence of rolling stock, a threatening horde of Germans on the west, and the Ukrainian army in Galicia on the southeast. These difficulties were increased by the extraordinary nature of the Polish program. Almost every Polish leader wanted to see the "reatest possible Poland created, no matter at what expense to the leighboring states. Many wished to see even East Prussia included. It was taken for granted that Danzig would become a Polish port. All of Eastern Galicia was assumed to be naturally Polish territory, though inhabited chiefly by Ruthenians. No leader could have won on such a program before a general congress of European leaders striving to adjust rival claims. The best that Poland could do was Fig. 165 (upper). Based on Shepherd, Historical Atlas, Pl. 130–131, and Droysen, Allgemeiner Historischer Hanſlatlas, Pl. 44. ge Frg. 166 (lower). Based on Putzger, Historischer Schul-Atlas zur alter, mittleren wrºd neuen Geschichte, Pl. 25. Both figures are from the Geographical Review, 1917. The white eagle of Poland and the red eagle of Prussia Two great leaders: Pilsudski and Pade- rewski 332 The New World Breach between Pilsudski and Pade- rewski | SN º &: Sºº º ºr 2 & º Nº. 23. ſº º º ſº |->} º º º º º º sº ***. R •S ſº º 3& gº sº - §§§§s ..." §§§§" § § 3. 5. 2. Pºsºs *...* * §§§ S㺠§ # * ... sº Nº * * 5 § “ , ” º ºx ....."- N. $PCsen & º o f - - - - §§ s º sº º & (ººº- #; N § - sº § - § §ºğ §: º §§§ º s s º - D. Poles Mixed Poles and other Nationalities § Other Nationalities Mixed Nationalities other than Polish FIG. 167. Ethnography of Poland and its border zones. Eastern Galicia is occupied, but with- out treaty confirmation. Poland did not accept the eastern boundary as proposed by the Peace Conference of Paris. For the boundary with Soviet Russia see Figure 169. The Allenstein and Marienwerder plebiscites have been held, and the vote was almost unanimously for Ger– many; but the powers have yet to delimit a boundary. The division of Silesia will be based on a plebiscite held on 20 March 1921. Teschen, Orawa, and Spits have been recommended for division between Czecho-Slovakia and Poland by the Council of Ambassadors (Fig. 179). Ethnography based on British General Staff ethnic map, 1: 1,500,000, 1918. Key to numerals: 1, Poles; 2, Germans; 3, Czecho-Slovaks; 4, Magyars; 5, Rumanians; 6, Ruthenians (Ukrain- ians); 7, White Russians; 8, Lithuanians. far short of her hopes, and the leader of the hour was destined to enjoy only a short period of authority. Gradually Pilsudski and Paderewski became the heads of opposing factions. Paderewski led a party which desired to see a liberal gov- ernment developed, and one which should have the good-will of the Allies. Pilsudski, a socialist before the war, had now become a sort of military dictator who wished to arrange an understanding with either Germany or Russia and to free himself from Allied control. Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 333 §: ...º.º.o. 20:45, so an ion:::::::i55 & Esº: - • * * * * *_* * * * * * * * * * . . . . " * * * * tº sº. - ºrsº. gº::::::::::::::::Scale of miles: '...... . . . . . . . . .”. . . . §§ ... "...Sººº... ::::\,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; : . . . . ‘. . . . . . .” N. . . . . . . . . . . . O- ; : ; : \ . . . ...-3. Frgrazºr. 52. º ź º º '...'- . ~ º º º • * * * * * & à - º Sº 3%. §. • * : - > sº § sº § & º º º: sº * : . . . *.*.*, *. * * *...*... .**** * * : * L *...*, *.*.* S. * 㺠# pOPULATION DENSITY S. per sq. km persq.mi. • * under 25 Dunder 64 25 – 50 [º] G4-128 50 – 75 |78– 192 ** 75 – 100 Z192–256 - *- |00 – 2008N256–5|2 :::::::::3% * * º Over 200% Over 517 %: * * º 4. :::::::::::::::...'s. % ... . . . . . . . . ||7 9 %::3% º: . . & –º ſt . §27 º FIG. 168. The Cracow-Czernowitz region of dense population is the eastern end of a belt that extends northwestward into Belgium. Notice the lighter grades of density in the region of Brest- Litovsk and Grodno, just where the absolute number of Poles is increasing. See inset of Figure 182. Based on Romer, Atlas géographique et statistique de la Pologne, 1916, Pl. 7, supplemented by Andree, Handatlas, Pl. 30, and Petermanns Mitteilungen, 1913, I, Pl. 2. For later boundary details see Figures 179 and 180. - - In the ensuing political contest the advantage was all with Pil- sudski, who held the reins of power, had the army and the police with him, and was supported by prominent groups with imperialistic and militaristic aims. He gradually won to his favor the political leaders, and Paderewski was forced to resign early in 1920, after which he became Poland's representative at Paris until his retirement in January 1921. DOLAND AND RUSSIA The policies of Pilsudski were not continued in the direction of closer relations with Russia. Early in 1920 the Soviet government had defeated Denikin, the Cossack leader who organized the anti- Bolshevist forces of southern Russia and the Kuban. Anticipating Success of Pilsudski 334 . The New World a Soviet attack following Denikin's defeat, the Poles pressed forward for more than three hundred miles, took Kiev in May 1920, and held the northwestern part of the Ukraine. It now appeared as if Poland could realize her aspiration to settle her difficult eastern frontier question in her own way. Let us examine the background of the situation. Indefinite The eastern frontiers of Poland are difficult to define because there .** are no sharp lines, whether of race, religion, or national conscious- Poland mess. The historic boundary of 1772 is out of the question; it would include more non-Polish than Polish populations. The best defensible frontier is a line drawn through the Pripet marshes, in the headwater area of the Pripet River, but this also is far beyond (east of) the area of strictly Polish speech. And the world can never be at peace for long if every nation struggles for the best strategic fron- tier. No sooner is one strategic advantage gained than another farther on is desired to protect it. The process is endless. The eastern boundary of Poland as recommended by the Peace Conference at Paris is shown in Figure 169, and it was planned to leave to negotiation between the governments of Russia and of Poland the settlement of the precise boundary between these two countries. It was not thought wise to go further until the Russian people had a chance to reorganize their political affairs and express their views as to the position of the Polish frontier. Poland could not forget those glorious pages of her history that recounted the heroic deeds of her leaders in eastern fields of war and commerce. Polish military power and intellectual force had made themselves felt from Vilna to Kiev. Polish colonies are scattered throughout this broad region. To be confined to ethnographic Poland was to accept the historic injustice from which she had so long suffered. Attack of The Russian Soviet government now took up the offensive with a ... on concentration of forces along the Polish eastern frontier, and a vigorous Poland attack swept the Polish army back to the gates of Warsaw (August 1920). With its armies in a favorable position it was the turn of the Soviet government to make extreme demands upon the Poles. The acceptance of these demands would have made Poland a vassal of Russia and guaranteed the extension of Bolshevism into western Europe. Russia was to have a large army on Poland's frontier, and Poland was to have scarcely any army at all. Radical groups in Poland were to have government sanction, and there were to be no restrictions upon the spread of Soviet propaganda. Only in the Imatter of eastern territorial limits was there an apparent liberality; Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 335 but the other terms made this condition of no consequence. Faced by these conditions, Poland had no choice but to fight. With French leadership, munitions from the Allies, and fresh re- cruits from every rank of Polish Society, the Polish army now took the offensive. In a few weeks it had reached a line corresponding roughly to the line of German occupation in 1918 and the treaty of Brest-Litovsk. Here it remained while a treaty on new lines was framed by Russian and Polish representatives at Riga, the capital and chief seaport of Latvia (October 1920). The treaty was prelim- inary in nature, involving an armistice or truce of uncertain duration. Nor can it wear really serious aspects until a stable all-Russian govern- ment is formed in place of the present class government of the Soviets. The treaty of Riga fixed the eastern limits of Poland beyond the line recommended by the Peace Conference of Paris (Figs. 169 and 180). It required the payment of an indemnity to Poland. It was framed on the principle of no victory for either side and, most sig- nificant of all, it was signed by representatives of the Ukraine. Though the Ukrainian representatives were Bolshevist and not from Petlura's Republic of the Western Ukraine that had been fighting against the . Poles during 1919 and with them in 1920, yet the fact that the rights of the Ukraine as a national or semi-national unit were recognized would make it appear easier, if the Allies, including Poland, later desire it, to establish a line of cleavage between White Russia (Fig. 191) and the Ukraine. It is often argued that Russia should be united because all the parts are needed to make a well-balanced state; but this is hardly true of the Ukraine, the most nearly self-sufficing unit. In general it would be to the advantage of Poland, Rumania, and . the western powers to divide Russia. Her reserves of man power are enormous, and if focused upon a weak border state like Poland or Finland might prove to be overwhelming. The treaty between Poland and Soviet Russia has one feature that will intensify the long-standing and bitter differences between Poland and Lithuania. It provides for an eastern Polish frontier that em- braces the entire hinterland of Lithuania. It was precisely here that Lithuania herself expected to expand at Russia's expense. Moreover, the signing of the treaty was followed immediately by the Polish occupation of Vilna, in the heart of the country in dispute. The occupation was carried out by army leaders acting on their own initiative and under formal government censure, yet the sympathy of the Polish government for the acts of the irregular forces was unques- tioned. The matter was considered especially unfortunate because The Wilna Storm Center 336 The New World ſ Anti-Rus- sian feel- ing in Poland Basis for a pro-Rus– sian policy The Polish Corridor west of a truce had just been arranged between Lithuania and Poland, through the good offices of the League of Nations, that appeared to promise a settlement of their acute difficulties in the Suwalki region southwest of Viina, where fighting had been going on for months. The action of the Poles at Vilna nullifies this decision and makes the disputed zone a possible source of the gravest trouble. The hatred of the Pole for the Russian is based on differences of culture and mode of thought, on marked differences of religion, and on the terrible persecutions of the past hundred and fifty years. Poland is a nation of western ideas; Russia is almost Oriental by contrast. The strength of the hostility is suggested in the romantic poetry of Poland, which is full of anti-Russian allusions. Nevertheless, so fiercely concentrated is the feeling against Ger- many that there has grown up a very strong pro-Russian policy. It is not that this new party hates Russia less, but that it hates Ger- many more. It foresees failure and a new division of land and people if Poland does not become rather closely attached to one or the other of her two powerful neighbors. This was preeminently the theory of % Pilsudski. Yet the settlement of almost every detail of the Polish frontiers has raised up an enemy. Russia will take nearly as lively. an interest in the fate of Eastern Galicia as Germany takes in Upper Silesia or Czecho-Slovakia in Teschen. Another reason for a work- ing agreement between Poland and Russia lies in the fact that before the World War the Polish textile mills depended upon Russia for a market. Most of the manufactured products were sent east, not west. If this normal pre-war stream of trade is to be revived, per- manent peace with Russia is the first essential. POLAND's OUTLET TO THE SEA : DANZIG AND THE POLISH CORRIDOR Poland is ill favored in the matter of its “corridor” to the sea, a narrow band of Polish population that extends along the western the vistula side of the Vistula to the Baltic (Fig. 167). It was the dream of all Poles that the peace settlement should give them a broader stretch than that occupied by “indisputably Polish population”; the more so since the Vistula has been regarded from the earliest periods of Polish nationality as a Polish river in its entirety. From the Car- pathians almost to the sea the banks of the Vistula have always been bordered by Polish populations. It was this ethnic corridor to the sea that the Germans for many years had been trying to Germanize. While the corridor was the Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 337 scene of most intense penetration, the process was general throughout eastern Germany. German officials in great numbers were established everywhere. The Prussian government, working chiefly through the Imperial Colonization Commission, had sent more than 100,000 colo- nists into German Poland, giving them such substantial preference that the Polish farmer was gradually forced out. Large tracts were bought up by the government as forest reserves. Danzig, at the coastal end of the corridor, had its Polish population gradually reduced until Poles numbered but 10 per cent of the total of 170,000. Thus was fought out the last of the many struggles that were waged here between German and Slav for the possession of a strategic zone which each considered vital to its national security. The corridor upon which Poland depended for its “secure access to the sea,” as promised by the Allied powers, had been so narrowed by artificial German settlement for many years before the World War that a strip but fifty miles across could be assigned to Poland on ethnic grounds. Danzig, the outlet port for the corridor and for Poland, was turned into a Free State, or Free City, though with Inter- allied guarantees to the Poles ºf that will assure them full and Ph. regulated use of the port for || goods and transport of Polish jº origin or destination (page343). Danzig thus returns to some- what the same status that it enjoyed for more than three hundred years – 1454 to 1793. It was then practically a free republic, though joined volun- tarily to Poland and living under its sovereignty. During this period there was attached i s Eastern Galicia inder Polish Control) FIG. 169. The Vistula in relation to Polish cities. Of a total of 40 cities of more than 20,000 population in Poland, 23 are on the Vistula or its tributaries. to the free city an area about half that of the present dis- trict. It managed its own in- ternal government, yet was Polish in sentiment and had common economic interests with the ‘Polish state. The Polish government could pro- The improvement of the Vistula and of the Free City of Danzig is an outstanding problem in the economic geography of Poland. The railway freight traffic of Danzig before the World War was about five times as great as its river traffic on the Vistula. From Thorn (Th.) to Danzig the river is regulated by dikes. Farther upstream the regulating works are of small importance. The eastern boundary, of Poland is that of the preliminary treaty of Riga, 1920; it was slightly modified in the final treaty. Key to nu- merals; 1, Danzig; 2, Marienwerder; 3, Orawa; 4, Spits; 5, Teschen; 6, Vilna disputed zone. German . coloniz- ing plans Poland’s limited access to the sea Danzig, a free port in earlier times 338 The New World Govern- ment of the new Free City of Danzig The future port of Danzig tect itself from foreign attack at Danzig, close - and reopen the port in ſº case of danger, maintain :::º:::::: a state official there to look out for national interests, and share to a moderate degree in the PROPORTION OF GERMAN OFFICIALs revenues, chiefly those * To Total GERMAN Population derived f hippi ICSS than iO7. 25-50% || €TIW6 rom Snipping. 10–25% over 50% On the other hand, the T free city could be rep- FIG. 170. The propor- y º ap tion of state officials in resented in the Polish general becomes greater Diet on great OCC8– toward the east. They ". e e | were almost all Germans sions; and it enjoyed and came from outside - tº the region. Data from full religious freedom, Statistisches Jahrbuch für e - dem. Prewssischen Staat. coined money, and con Drawn from a manuscript trolled the navigation .*** of the natural water- ways of the city. The internationalized state, or Free City, of today has a High Commissioner appointed by the Council of the League of Nations. The boundaries of the Free City (which include both the city and the district about it) correspond roughly with the limits of German popu- lation, so that there will be the least possible cause for friction be- tween two antagonistic racial elements. This, of course, gives the Poles not quite the entire length of the river, but at the same time it does give them a chance to get it in the future; for if Danzig is in truth to be the commercial focus of the new Poland, as it has become the only large seaport, its population will inevitably change from Ger– man to Polish, and new provisions will be made for giving Poland a still larger interest in its management. The population of the Danzig Free City zone is about 300,000, of which more than half resides in Danzig and Neufahrwasser. The port of Danzig without doubt will be rapidly improved by the nations responsible for its government. While Neufahrwasser is the port for Danzig (inset, Fig. 173), ocean-going steamers can also go to Danzig direct. Through Danzig will come cotton and wool for Polish mills, machine tools for the manufacture of machinery needed in Polish industries, agricultural implements, Swedish iron ore, Norwegian fish, and all the varied products, not made in Poland, of foreign mills and Scale of miles' to & ra ... º. Sy Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 339 TT Z. Tº º Hºfg % 2Zº º (ſ) */z º º 3 MäTT gº ſº %3 ; ( 2. % & & & Ç & º o © Ø º ^- Q Ø © 0 K %. B £2, © C *L. o ,” %%%jº"-ſo 53 % Ø Ø WCS-22A7222 ź º * tº Tº %22 *. £) (2 @ ſº Z. & i r ;& 3 aff ºf 2 & 2.j * @ 26 &2 J ° 2'4 /2 & 2 8 i & 4% & 2 *.* º oi %2 © 22 232 & • * * º © 2 ° (2) & - e—" © POSCIl 62 & 4 * z P^ .* * Scale of miles - A o 22 tº-º-º-º-º-º: waRsaw FIG. 171. Ethnography in the Polish Corridor, focus of conflict between Poland and Germany. . The shaded areas represent German-speaking majorities; the blank areas, Polish majorities. Solid heavy lines, present boundaries; dotted line, plebiscite boundary; dot-and-dash line, Russo- German boundary of 1914. The Marienwerder and Allenstein plebiscite areas have voted for union with Germany. factories. Down to the port will go, by way of the Vistula and the bordering railways, timber, salt, cement, hay, sugar from the beet sugar farms in which Poland has excelled, grain, and distinctive wares of Polish manufacture. It is noteworthy that though its rail connec- tions never have been particularly favorable, the city’s rail traffic tonnage before the war was about five times its river traffic, if we exclude the lumber rafts and floats on the Vistula. The improvement of the Vistula and a reorganization of the facilities of transport are required to make Danzig a great Polish port. 340 The New World &#Rººf; irs Scale of miles 10 20 C.W. FIG. 172. Railways in the Polish Corridor, suggesting the difficulties of separating East Prussia from the rest of Germany and the equally great difficulties involved in depriving Poland of a maritime outlet by way of the Vistula. In the second half of 1919 a large number of new firms established themselves in Danzig in anticipation of the future importance of the free city as Poland's outlet to the sea. Most of the new firms were of German origin, many of them being branches of houses that had had no representatives at Danzig. Others came from Poland, from Scandinavia, and from the Netherlands. Only one American firm, one French, and two British shipping firms were reported, besides a branch of the British Trade Corporation with a general banking and insurance business. There are at least eight steamship lines estab- lished between Danzig and English ports, the trade with England Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 341 Ø %DANZIG º `--— °4 E=º 㺠O FIG. 173. By the treaty of Versailles most of the country about Danzig that was inhabited by Germans, was united to Danzig to form a Free City, named Free State in the map above. It is not a “city” in the ordinary sense of the word. The inset shows details of the port and suburbs of Danzig. consisting chiefly in the export of timber and sugar and the import of coal and herring. The imported coal is used mainly in Danzig itself, since it cannot compete farther inland with the coal of southern Poland. ON THE WESTERN BOUNDARY South of the Free City, or State, of Danzig under Allied control, Poles and Germans face each other on the Vistula, where the historic struggle between the two races is bound to continue. Their common boundary is twenty-five miles long, and some sort of international supervision seemed necessary if both were to use the river. While the Poles own both banks, German access is assured, for Article 18 of the minorities treaty between Poland and the Allied and Associated Powers provides for the application to the Vistula, including the Bug and the Narew (Fig. 168), a branch of the Bug entering it near War- saw, of the international waterways régime as established in the treaty of peace with Germany. Commerce on the Vistula has not yet been developed on a large scale. For commercial, political, and sentimental reasons, however, Poles and Germans again fac- ing each other across the Vistula * The New World - - - º º: Fig. 174. Part of the water front at Danzig. the Poles will quickly begin the improvement of the river, since it is > their main stream. Poland embraces nearly the whole watershed The Wis- tula in need of many im- provements Canals to connect with other hydro- graphic systems of the Vistula (Fig. 169). Large sums of money will be needed for dredging and diking. The course of the stream is “braided” in places; that is, it is broken up into separate currents or channels by shifting sand bars, notably near Thorn. Ice rafts lodge upon the bars in winter and block the channel. From Thorn to the Baltic the river never has less than three feet of water; but the difference in level between high and low water is here from twenty to twenty-five feet. Dredging and partial canalization are needed to deepen the main channel and thus permit the use of large river and canal boats, as on the Rhine, the Rhone, and the Seine. Improvements are now projected which would enable vessels of a thousand tons' capacity to reach Warsaw. The improvement of the Vistula would also permit the construc- tion of branch canals. The Mazurian lakes lie near some of the eastern tributaries of the Vistula, and have several hundred miles of navigable waterways that could be utilized. In a similar way the Russian rivers have been brought within reach of the Vistula system (Fig. 168). The Netze and the Vistula on the western Polish frontier are already connected by the Bromberg canal, as shown in the same figure. Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 343 A preliminary economic agreement has been signed between Poland and the Free City of Danzig. Among its main provisions are the following: (1) Danzig and Poland form a single customs territory so that customs are not levied on goods passing from one to the other. (2) Danzig will collect and pay over to Poland duties on goods for Poland originating outside of Danzig and passing through that port. (3) Coöperation is assured in the use of railways, since Danzig is in part dependent on Polish lines and, until a new line is built, Poland can reach parts of its Baltic territory northwest of Danzig only by crossing the Free City territory. (4) Danzig guarantees Poland all necessary shipping facilities and permits importation of war material destined for Poland. (5) There is ample provision for the free and early development of adequate postal, telegraphic, and telephonic service between Warsaw and other Polish towns and Danzig. POLISH AUTHORITY IN EASTERN GALICIA On Poland's southeastern frontier lies the former Austrian prov- ince of Galicia, and there Poland faces one of her major problems. The western half is Polish, the eastern half Ruthenian. To differences of race are added differences of religion: the Poles are Roman Catho- lic ; the Ruthenians are Greek Orthodox Uniate. The culture of Eastern Galicia is Polish, and Poles form the chief population of the towns; no other section of the Polish people is more ardently Polish in nationality. It is the seat of a large university (Lemberg). Hardly any other part of Polish territory has published so high a percentage of Polish books and newspapers. The Ruthenians, who form the majority (59 per cent) of the popu- lation of Eastern Galicia, are closely allied to the Ukrainians or Rus- sians rather than to the Poles. Lemberg and other similar districts are Polish islands set in a Ruthenian sea. The Ukrainians and Russians wish to unite with them all people classed as Ruthenian: the Poles ask to have recognized their predominant culture and former ownership, and especially to have their territory extended southward so as to join with Rumania (Fig. 2). The territorial junction with Rumania would give these two countries better defense against a Bolshevist penetration of central Europe; it would provide what is Polish traditions in Eastern \º Galicia 3. Contest be- tween the Poles and Ukrainians in Eastern Galicia 344 The New World Foreign invest— ments in the East Galician oil fields Separate histories of East— ern and Western. Galicia Polish in- fluence dominant in Eastern Galicia called a military “barrage,” or “sanitary cordon,” all the way from the Baltic to the Black Sea, for a time one of the main objects in the Polish and even the Allied program. - The Ruthenians of Eastern Galicia unquestionably desire union with a democratic Russia. On account of Polish persecutions, they do not wish to unite with Poland. But Eastern Galicia has been unable to keep order within its own house, and so far as an intelli- gent class exists, it is composed almost wholly of Poles, who form 27 per cent of the population. Foreign capitalists are especially interested in the oil fields of East- 'ern Galicia (Fig. 175), and political interest in this district is cor- respondingly keen. Of $65,000,000 invested in oil land and refineries there, $50,000,000 is British, $10,000,000 French, and $5,000,000 Belgian. According as they are friends of Poland or of Russia will these nations be likely to favor one or the other in deciding the ulti- mate fate of this valuable territory. The most important oil pools lie in the foothills of the Carpathians. The wells are operated by trained Polish workmen. Now every new state is vitally interested in its future fuel supply, because with this goes the growth of manufacturing and commerce and, in general, better material existence for its industrial population. Junction with Rumania would give Poland control over the headwaters of the Dniester and permit the shipment of oil and other goods to ports on the Black Sea. - The problem of Eastern Galicia is further complicated by the his– torical division that existed between Eastern and Western Galicia as early as the 10th and 11th centuries. We shall not here trace this division in detail. The matter entered its modern phase in 1848, when a Ukrainian movement began in Austria that had for its object the creation of the eastern part of Galicia as a separate province. For several years there was much controversy with the Poles over the question; but in 1867 Austria made the whole of Galicia a single province with a common assembly, or Diet. * Since that time the Poles have become dominant in Galician affairs. They live chiefly in the towns, while the Ruthenian population is for the most part agricultural. Of the Ruthenians more than 60 per cent are illiterate, of the Poles 23 per cent only. The Poles naturally lead- in the professions and in commerce. They have controlled adminis- tration, courts, and education, and have obtained much of the land. Their methods have not always been above reproach. The struggle was one of those minor contests of nationality that were overshadowed Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 345 G A L I C I A --> 01 deposits – New boundaries ----Plebiscife areas ..-...-Eastern boundary of Poland recom— mended by the peace Conference — — —Superseded boun- daries ------ Railroads FIG. 175. Distribution of known oil deposits in Galicia, with railroad lines related thereto. The recommended eastern boundary of Poland was designed to be temporary. For further details respecting the boundaries of Poland and its neighbors, see Figure 169. Oil deposits after Redwood, A Treatise on Petroleum, 3d ed., 1913, Vol. I. in the past by the common antagonism of all subject races to the central government of Austria-Hungary. - According to the terms of a proposed treaty between Poland and the Allied and Associated Powers, Eastern Galicia was to have an autonomous government within the Polish state, freedom of speech, press, and assembly, and a single-chamber Diet, elected every five years by universal suffrage. The final status of the district has yet to be determined. In view of Poland's recent treaty with Russia (Riga, 1920) there seems little doubt that Eastern Galicia will be in- corporated eventually as an integral part of the Polish state. THE PLEBISCITE AREAS The ownership of a large part of the Polish borderland was determined by plebiscite in three districts: (1) Mazuria, which comprises the whole of the District of Allenstein, and which Vited overwhelmingly to remain German; (2) the part of West Prssia that lies east of the Vistula, which also voted to remain German; and (3) a part of Silesia, which, except in a few districts, vote to remain German. The case of Silesia is peculiarly important, forthe Treaty with Po- land con- cerning Eastern Galicia Plebiscites determining part of the boundary of Poland 346 The New World Contest for the coking coal of Teschen | ls M | b g Z Limits of Coal Basin N Production areas Oels \ Iron fields & ,” Main railways .*** ------- Secondary " TN - | sy fºe. Sl I burg rºl - 2. & ^ Ch s-s Pº () & * = § N $ *} 9 R; •.” Ž, e - - Ž eisse [. Sº * /A Neustaāt". & §§ WI.e.obschüt 3.3% ſº ibö {N § —50 * // e Troppa º 2% % 2 %. 2 Aſ sº ie % *. J % * “... * % **. % ºe 47 # - scAue of Mults à &^ % #: - 0. |0. 20 == #, ºš A 2-se”***** -- 18 dº - S | | . ºf - FIG. 176. Coal and iron deposits and railways of the disputed areas of Teschen and Silesia. In the mineral districts both main and Secondary railways are shown, elsewhere only main railways. The Silesian plebiscite was held on 20 March 1921. The Teschen dispute was transferred from the plebiscite com- mission to the Council of Ambassaders (footnote, page 347). If their recommendations are confirmed, Poland will retain the town of Teschen and all territory east of the principal north- South railway; Czecho-Slovakia will obtain the railway and all territory west of it (Fig. 179). Coal from various maps accompanying Handbuch des oberschlesischen Industriebezirks, XII, Allgemeiner deutschen Bergmannstag, Festschrift, Band II. Iron from F. Bamburg, Schulkarte zur Kultur-Wirtschafts und Handels-Geographie von Deutschland, 1: 750,000, 1913. Prussian state-owned coal mines might be- come the center of important Polish in- dustries. More than 45,000,000 tons of coal were produced in Silesia in 1913, or a sixth of Germany’s total pre- war production. The vote of 20 March 1920 showed that a majority of the inhabitants of Silesia preferred Ger- man ownership, but the final line of division will depend upon geo- graphical and economic conditions as well as the ; plebiscite. In Mazuria, Poland lost a large ele- ment which is Polish in speech and race, but Protestant-Lutheran rather than Catholic like the majority of Poles. Teschen The former Duchy of Teschen (Fig. 178) has had a singularly impor- tant part to play in Polish affairs. Here is the source of supply of coking coal for both Poland and Czecho- Slovakia. But Poland has large deposits of higher-grade bituminous coal, while Czecho- Slovakia has lower-grade bituminous coal and deposits of inferior brown lignite. In addition, the coal mines of Teschen lie in the western third of that district, just where the Czech population lives. Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 347 * It was decided to attempt agreement between Po- land and Czecho-Slova- || K kia, through the Council | * of Ambassadors, estab- * lished by the Allies. By - -º-º:- the terms of the pre- S I L E S 1 A NATIONAL ITIES IG 5 0. $0 20 30.14 liminary agreement the “ . . . § Bl larger western part of § o ... #: wa Teschen would go to lºº. ... ::::: Czecho-Slovakia and the : gº. §: ; : * ::::.º.º. rest to Poland; the Polish |zº. §: wº $3. as "º. § part includes the head- |...º.º.º.º. ººº-ºº." * * *N.o.o ... • *.*.*.*.*.*.*.* • ..." - waters of the Vistula, º, #: *... º tº Hy of 39. O © © Sºce where these take their ſº.º. Ö COO, ſº tº gº 15° © jº W * * * = rise in the Tatra, the *ś º: g © lofty northern summits of | * * * *; ...º.º. &f., ºf the Carpathians. If the of::º: agreement is confirmed, º Czecho-Slovakia will own liº sº § the coal mines but will | §§§ deliver a part of the out- §::::::::: put to Poland. The cen- ãº: COMMUNES0f200-1000 of 000$000 of over50%& .3853 6 tral railway would go to inhabitants inhabitants inhabitants 3 et: O $e e wº Polish O O m #3; " *:: Czecho-Slovakia, while |... . O D & 8 : © --> Poland would secure the LCzech 3 6 * \ z--~ l gº | 13 * town of Teschen. A iº d ith h FIG. 177. Ethnic distributions in Silesia and Teschen. The SSOClate Wit. the boundary of the Silesian plebiscite area (heavy broken line) takes in only a part of German Silesia. For general compari- Teschen s ettlement WeI’e son and key to names see Figure 176. After Romer, Travauac the two districts of Orawa geographiques, vol. IV, 1919. - and Spits, which have small groups of Polish people that Poland wished to include. By a decision of the Council of Ambassadors' the territorial limits were recommended as shown in Figure 179. In Orawa the new boundary is located southward of the main Carpathian divide; in Spits it is located north of the divide. As in the Teschen dispute, the matter awaits final decision, the Polish Diet, or Parliament, having so far (April 1921) withheld its approval in the hope of securing a larger share of the Teschen coal. * The Council of Ambassadors, composed of Allied ambassadors, was organized after the Peace Conference of Paris early in 1920. Its chief function is to execute the treaties of peace. In addition there have been various conferences of Allied premiers at San Remo, Hythe, Boulogne, etc. 348 The New World Dangers of Fear as a basic cause of war Poland potentially a wealthy nation MILITARISM AND THE FRONTIER PROBLEMs Everywhere the fron- tiers of Poland are on the open plain except \ in the south, where the high Carpathians form a natural common fron- tier between Poland and Czecho-Slovakia. Nothing therefore could be clearer than that Poland should strive to win the friendship of her neighbors. She has to choose between two 0 2 3 4 5 s h e s 10 ta. $E========== Fig. 178. The Teschen region, ownership of which is in dis- COULI'S6S of action. If pute between Poland and Czecho-Slovakia. For preliminary * * * * {º boundary see Figure 179; for general relations see Figure 167. she becomes militaris- tic, like the Prussians, she, like them, may be strong for a time, only to fall a victim to her own strength. To be sure, a limited army is necessary to prevent her from being helpless in case of wanton attack. w The old argument that “we are hemmed about by enemies” and that open plains everywhere invite attack was the stock in trade of the war party of Berlin. If leaders can get their people to believe it and to become sufficiently “jumpy” about it, they can impose heavy taxes for large armies that are meant, not for the defense of the coun- try, but for aggrandizement and the satisfaction of greed, until at last, having dug a pit for others, they fall into it themselves. The Polish army now numbers nearly 800,000, which, in the ratio of the two popu- lation totals, would correspond to an army of 3,500,000 or 4,000,000 for the United States. Beginning her new national life without a debt of great consequence, Poland has a chance to be free. If her army continues big, her debt will rise; her neck will be placed in a yoke from which centuries of effort may not free her. If she chooses the road of reason, Poland may become a great state. She starts with a population of 25,000,000, or more than that of Spain and about as large as that of Brazil. Her territory is drained chiefly by a single large stream capable of improvement from the Baltic to Warsaw and far beyond. Her forests have an extent of about 300,000 square miles. Her soil has long been famous for its fertility. There Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 349 * º - oGleiwitſ' º 20 Sºs T. e E S I 4. } Ø Cracow 8. §§ {{Ratibor 2. Cº- *$9.5 §:...Y o * - - O e % o , ;… & e |Z ^ e - * * ::::S §: h 3. Øſº POLAP ... ºſsilein § #:::::::::::::::39: É: TO CZECHO-SLOVAKA :::::::0ſ." Nº:######### $2, N*::Gâiº.º.º. * :::::::::::::::::::::l. – 10 O |O 20 M zº #S *I;-O W A K\; "... :::::::::::::::::::: • * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * FIG. 179. Division of disputed territory in the three districts of Teschen, Orawa, and Spits. The Teschen settlement is now awaiting the approval of the Polish Diet (page 347). For details of the Teschen area, see Figures 176 and 178. is abundant water power in the glaciated northern regions and in the Carpathians on the south, where large, swift streams flow through dense forests before reaching the agricultural plain. INTERNAL PROBLEMS Industrial Recovery Poland's immediate problem is to secure sufficient credit to start her mills, factories, and mines. Warsaw, a city of 900,000 people, had its machinery largely destroyed or stolen by the Germans. The same fate was suffered by Lodz, one of the great textile cities of the world and often called the “Manchester” of Poland. Germany set out to cripple Polish industry. It will take money and credit to revive it. Lodz alone requires $10,000,000 merely to purchase the necessary machinery. - The Lodz factories have a higher production than any others. A quarter of the Polish cotton and woolen mills had resumed operation by the summer of 1920. Every month Poland must import 4000 tons of cotton, 2000 tons of wool, and 13,000 tons of jute, to supply her textile factories. Credit for raw materials is the largest present need of Poland. - There are rich deposits of salt, potash, zinc, lead, and oil, all Need for Y credit to start in- dustries likewise dependent for their development upon credits and railways, The New World *s Sº |30 35 . S/Pskov | al iñs 3, 4/ oKovel Yºº * e &e & 2 * ^ . Cº | Cracow Kharkovo ^^ - 2% 3. fº •7 O. & tºº Aſ se Z º 0VAKIA N * * > w & ~38 *> º _.—.—Brest-Litovsk Line t2\ºe 3 eXtEkaterinosky, p_9 ‘ſt, :::::::::::: Polish-R uss.Agr eement 3> Z Ad ROS # g - ſº ºf S * e º ºs e e s e Polish-Ukrain, , 42 ºichiney & & Pºlish-Lithuaniam Demarcationline Nº. * §§§ "—"—”—” N&sa sºč𧧧 46 FIG. 180. Boundary complications of Poland's borderlands. The approximate limits of the Ukraine are shown by a heavy broken line. Note that Poland's eastern frontier as established at the Riga peace conference with Soviet Russia extends northward to the Dvina and cuts off Lithuania from contact with Russia. For the settlement of the three small areas of Teschen, Orawa, and Spits in southwestern Poland (numbered 2, 3, and 4) see Figure 179. The area numbered 1 is the Silesian plebiscite area. The Polish-Ukrainian agreement referred to in the legend is that of April 1920. } security of life and property, and stability of government. Po- land's natural resources can be developed only when the agencies of 2 commerce are organized, and especially when the railroads are put Devastated region of Eastern Poland into sound condition and coal production has risen to correspond with the manufacturing needs of the country. Displacement of Population During the World War the territory of Poland was overrun first by the Russians and then by the Germans and Austrians. The effect was wholly to depopulate large tracts. Still farther east the country was in part denuded by the Bolshevists of everything neces- sary for living. What was once the seat of a dense farming popu- lation became a desert. People flocked to the cities and there in- creased the number of idle, restless, and desperate elements, already large because of unemployment, for the Germans had taken away all the spindles and gear from the mills and in many cases burned or blown up the factory buildings. If we use the ordinary terms for Polish suffering, it is difficult to Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 351 describe the broad zone at and beyond the eastern borders of the country, inhabited by Lithuanians, White Russians, Ukrainians, and Jews, which almost down to the present has remained a sparsely populated desert, following its devastation by Grand Duke Nicholas during the Russian retreat, in the autumn of 1915. The famine zone begins at Brest-Litovsk. Factories are idle, streets deserted, shops closed, because there is nothing to sell. People live principally on the cheapest vegetables. Fuel is hardly to be had at all. The death rate rose from 15 per 1000 in 1914 to 29 per 1000 in 1919 in the town of Pinsk. The wave of agricultural population now spreading eastward from the cities to occupy the land is of different ethnic character from the old population. Although many of the former residents are returning to their old firesides, many others have been killed, and some have emigrated, with the result that for many years, or until a new census is taken, all maps of eastern Poland showing density of population and ethnic distributions will be mere guesses based on local statistics and the reports of travelers. Three Unlike Sections One of the difficulties of the new government of Poland is to weld together three unlike sections. There were really three Polands — German Poland centering at Posen, Russian–Peland centering at War- saw, and Austrian, or Galician, Poland centering at Cracow and Przemysl. Under normal conditions these three could supplement each other; but at the end of the war they were administratively and commercially unorganized, and the railroads and rolling stock Famine zone east of ethnic Poland Changing ethnography of eastern Poland Problem of welding three un- Af like sec- tions were in bad condition, so that one part was enduring famine whilstſ another had an abundance of foodstuffs. Industrial disorganiza- tion and unemployment were the two chief troubles. The three sec- tions are also unlike socially and politically. German Poland is the most progressive and prosperous section, Congress (Russian) Poland has a population less alert, and Austrian Poland has, in part, a large low-grade population of Ruthenians. - Proportional to its industries and the density of its population, that part of Poland that was included in Russia had few railroads, 1 At the time of the outbreak of the World War in 1914, the territory and population of ethnographic Poland were divided about as follows: Russia, 45,000 square miles, 12,000,000 inhabitants; Germany, 22,500 square miles, 4,000,000 inhabitants; Austria, 11,000 square miles, 5,000,000 inhabitants. 352 The New World Produc- tion and emigration in former Russian Poland IF o]Minsk Frºzazºº. 50 INDUSTRIES ºf º à Mining a metallurgical affº sº N. & $2. 3. ź Textile ſº à *** El Chemical 7). 48 x Leather * 'ºrº Wººs 50 0 50 100MW - 2. 213 27 FIG. 181. There is a close correspondence between the seats of industry and the foci of popula- tion as shown in Figure 168. Based on Romer, Atlas géographique et statistique de la Pologne, 1916, Pl. 30, supplemented by Andree, Handatlas, Pl. 40. and the cart roads were little better than tracks. Agriculture was backward and crop production low. The Polish peasant in many districts lived more primitively than any other class of people in central Europe. In some regions where production was highest there were no foodstuffs for export, farms being small and families large. From the standpoint of its actual industrial development, Russian Poland was overpopulated, and the mass of the population survived only because of the relief afforded by a continuous stream of emigra- tion. In 1913 there came to the United States 174,000 Russian Poles (excluding Jews), and there was heavy seasonal migration, more than 350,000 Poles going to Germany to work on German farms in the summer months during the year just before the World War, and about 50,000 to other countries. A similar migration of Poles took place to and from the Westphalian coal fields of Germany. Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 353 35E. E. Eºs3.2% % §,93. Tº % from{:};}}to 1910 the number of Poles sº Z. N Q §§ ANNUAL INCREASE OF POPULATION [...] under 2% 2 - 8% 8- 15% R 15-25% , 48 Z over 25% Scale of miles O $0 50 ! OG 1/7 x j9 Z 2. 213 FIG. 182. Note that Russian Poland had the greatest increase of population. It is significant in relation to Polish claims and ambitions on the east that Poles have increased in Eastern Galicia and in general in the belt of country just east of the line recommended by the Peace Conference at Paris (heavy broken line). Such a tendency might ultimately change the ethnic situation. Based on Romer, Atlas géographique et statistique de la Pologne, 1916, Pls. 7 and 11. Having rich mineral resources, Galicia, or Austrian Poland, is well supplied with railways. The same is true of German Poland, where industrial development had been carried far, especially in the Posen district. In the latter the number of textile factories had in- creased between 1901 and 1910 by 87 per cent and the output by 65 per cent. The Land Situation Most of Poland is a land of farms. The agricultural population is greater in numbers to the square mile (190 for Congress Poland) than in any of the other countries of Europe save Italy, Belgium, *oland a compact nation and Holland (Fig. 168). It is a compact and, to this extent, a pow- >< erful nation. The area of ethnographic Poland is about 80,000 square miles, or 40 per cent as great as Spain, or twice the state of Ohio. 354 The New World Like their neighbors, the Poles have a land question of serious aspect. Among large landholders, 18,000 own 40 per cent of the total area of Poland and leave much of their holdings uncultivated, with resultant overcrowding of adjacent agricultural communities. To better the conditions of life, the Polish Diet in July 1920 voted drastic land partition laws. But even this action will not give every- body a piece of land, nor will it necessarily increase production. The new law permits the Polish General Land Office to take the lands of the former Prussian Colonization Commission and other government owned land, as well as large privately held estates, and sell them to actual farmers, with preference to soldiers wounded in the war. Depending upon location, the maximum size of farms may not exceed 150, 450, and 600 acres. - The Jewish Population How Po. & The most serious racial problem in Poland concerns the Jew. He land be- C81118, 8. refuge for the Jews Jewish rights and restric- tions Jewish de- sire for a State within a State is more numerous there than in any other country in the world ex- cept Russia. During the 14th and 15th centuries the Jews came to Poland in great numbers, partly because of expulsion from many other European countries, partly to escape almost universal perse- cution elsewhere. In the 18th century many came from Austria and West Prussia. Poland was one of the few countries that never ex- pelled the Jew. - * Then the Jews became so numerous and powerful that they secured a general assembly in 1600 to apportion taxes among Jewish citizens and protect the rights of the race, and this continued until 1764. Jews competed with Christians in commerce and in the crafts with such success that eventually they were restricted by law. For example: in Galicia they were forbidden to be grain dealers; they could not export salt or deal in alcohol; their artisans could not be employed by Christians. By 1895, while only 14 per cent of the total population of Russian Poland were Jewish, 84 per cent of the merchants were Jews, 20 per cent of the literary men, 51 per cent of the educators, and 24 per cent of the physicians. Only 2 per cent of the farmers, factory workers, and miners were Jews. (From Russian census reports of 1897.) - The main difficulty of the problem springs from the lack of na tional feeling among Jews. Throughout Poland's history they have worked rather for racial rights than for national revolutionary aims. In 1907 they opposed the Polish national parties and contributed to a Socialist victory. * Poland and Its Disputed Borderlands 355 In 1919 the problem entered a new phase with the disorders at Vilna and elsewhere. The Polish Jew had not thrown himself whole- heartedly into the development of the new state. It was natural that the patriotic Pole should view his new-found freedom with ardent feeling and should have little toleration for any race that resisted the strong tides of nationalism. Better relations have now been estab- lished, and there need be no further political importance in the Jew- ish problem if religious liberty is guaranteed and the Jew attempts to seek no special political rights. In common with the states of Rumania, Greece, Jugo-Slavia, Czecho-Slovakia, Austria, and Hungary, Poland signed a minorities treaty with the Allied and Associated Powers." The matter is es- pecially important for Poland in relation to the Jews. Article 10 provides that educational committees shall be appointed locally by the Jewish communities of Poland and shall be subject to the general control of the state; it provides for the distribution of the propor- tional share of the public funds allotted to Jewish schools, and for the organization and management of these schools. Article 11 requires that Jews shall not be compelled to perform any act which consti- tutes a violation of their Sabbath, the only exceptions being in case of military service or the preservation of public order. Poland will refrain from holding elections, either general or local, on Saturday. Poland's RELATIONS witH FRANCE AND GREAT BRITAIN France has taken a keener interest in the new Poland than has any other nation. The French wish Poland to be both free and strong, and thus provide a powerful ally in case of future trouble with Ger- many, one favorably placed to strike with France on either side. This explains the encouragement given in France (1916–1919) to the organization and equipment of the Polish Legion, the use of French instructors in Haller's army, which was trained in France and entered Poland in 1919, and French diplomatic aid to Poland. It will explain much in the international arrangements of Europe in the future. Trade agreements with Poland will reflect French interest, for French goods have not been sold widely in the former Russian Empire. Moreover, there is a historic cultural basis for the friendship of the two peoples. French and Polish artists and men of letters have long Recent dis- orders in- volving the X Jew The minorities treaties Special provisions in the Po- lish treaty 1 In common with the other states that signed the minorities treaties, Poland must give equality of trade conditions to the Allied and Associated Powers, and, in addition, she agrees to the application to the Vistula, the Bug, and the Narew rivers of the international water- ways régime as set forth in the treaty of Versailles. France deeply in- terested in X/ Poland's welfare 356 The New World had a marked community of sentiment and interest. Henry of Valois, Duke of Anjou, was invited to become King of Poland, and reigned at Warsaw for a few years before he became Henry III, King of France. Napoleon revived Polish nationality for a brief period (Duchy of Warsaw, 1807–1815). One of the four best collec- tions of Polish books outside Poland was established in Paris by the poet Mickiewicz and is still directed by his son. (The three others are at Petrograd in Russia, at Rapperswil in Switzerland, and in the British Museum at London.) British 2: British economic interest in Poland is expressed in three ways: naval and ~~ *ial (1) Desire to have a British High Commissioner at Danzig. interests (2) Heavy British investments at Danzig and in the Galician oil in Danzig and Poland fields. (3) British-held stock in the factories and mills of Lodz and in the coal companies of the south and southwest. With Danzig an active commercial center and eventually a large city, and with British naval strength capable of controlling the city's government in time of war, Great Britain may be said to have won a commercial victory by securing a free-city régime for Danzig. She followed steadfastly the policy of not allowing it to return to Germany, nor would she consent to Polish sovereignty. The French and British policies, opposed as they are with reference to all things Polish, were thrown into sharper contrast when, begin- ning in March 1921, the Silesian disorders became a matter of inter- national concern because of their relation to the reparation payments. The German government sought to delay beyond May 1921 an agree- ment on reparations required by the treaty of Versailles, saying that the fate of the mineral wealth of Silesia was related to the amount of the payments Germany could make. An ultimatum from the Allies brought Germany to terms and the Silesian problem will have an independent settlement. But the problems of both Silesia and Dan- zig cannot be settled by fiat. In the years ahead French and British policies may be expected to clash again and again in these key situa- tions, and full advantage will doubtless be taken by Germany of the political possibilities of impending disagreements. CHAPTER TWENTY LITHUANIAN DEVELOPMENT AND RELATIONS THE Lithuanians are a weak people politically, though numbering more than 2,000,000, and including up to 4,000,000 of population in their territorial claims. Historically they have had close relations with Poland; yet they now fiercely hate the Poles. Ethnically they grade into Russians on the east; yet they desire nothing else so little as a return to Russian domination. Commercially they are disor- ganized, undeveloped, dependent; yet they wish independence and a hold upon the trade of Russia that normally flows in large volume through the Lithuanian port of Memel. A brief review of their historical struggle and their geographical environment is needed to understand their present anomalous political situation. IEXPANSION OF IITHUANIA for centuries the Lithuanian pagan tribes occupied a part of the Baltic fringe of eastern Europe, and their settlements extended inland only to Kovno on the Niemen (Fig. 183). They were shut off from the people about them by the heavy forests of the region and by the innumerable lakes and marshes. When the forests were partly cleared away and a commerce had developed, strong covetous neighbors in- vaded the land, for there are no mountain barriers — it is a plains country throughout — and the coast is easily accessible to other Bal- tic states. In the 13th century came the first invaders, the Teutonic Knights (page 362). Hard pressed by the newcomers, the Lithuanians withdrew from the coast and rapidly extended their eastern limits. The power of the nation seemed to grow in proportion to its diffi- culties. From a small state of 30,000 square miles in 1263, it be- came a large nation of 250,000 square miles in 1385 (Fig. 183). In little more than a hundred years, Lithuania pushed its southern fron- tier to the Black Sea. It controlled the entire Dnieper and the Nie- men, one of the great historical highways across Europe during the centuries before. This brought it to the Polish frontiers, and even- tually it joined the Polish state. TEIE TUNION WITH POLAND The union of Lithuania and Poland in 1386 was a personal union through the king, who was as much the king of Lithuania as of Po- land. This lasted until 1569, when there was effected a closer union Present weakness of Lithuania Coming of the Teu- tonic Knights Former greatneSS and - extent 357 358 ~. The New World Revival of national sentiment in the 18th and 19th centuries N R \{ SCSI SNSS, SS ſ? $$$$. sº § & NS SN Ø yS N 2% § % 22-NY, NYS sº º O POLAND AND LITHUANIA 152O [. Scale 1:17 500 OOO §º o too £ºoniº ls cº-eºš EIG. 183. Based on Droysen, Allgemeiner Historische Handatlas, Pl. 37. From the Geo- g gº graphical Review, Vol. 4, 1917. through a common Diet, with Lithuania still keeping a separate army and treasury and having its own administration. In 1691 the former distinction between the Grand Duchy of Lithuania and the Polish state was abolished. Thereafter there was to be a common admin- istration, one army, and one treasury. - Thus Lithuania was assured the support of Poland, at first against the Teutonic Knights and later against the growing Muscovite power, and was able to preserve its western civilization against the rising tide of oriental influence. Had Poland remained independent, the fusion of Polish and Lithuanian peoples would probably have been uninterrupted and the present antagonism between them would not exist. Nationalism has been carried so far that most groups, how- ever small, seek separate existence. In the 18th century a great educational movement began, which re- sulted in the printing of grammars, dictionaries, poems, stories, etc. In the 19th century came a further revival of national sentiment, and the publication of newspapers, folklore, ballads, and fables. All these pub- lications were greatly stimulated by the religious spirit of the times. g Lithuanian Development and Relations 359 TATE OF LITHUANIA IN THE PARTITIONS OF POLAND At the time of the partitions of Poland (1772–1795), the greater part of Lithuania came into the hands of Russia, which organized it as a province and put a governor in charge. The land-owning nobles were left in local control. In 1831 and 1863 the Lithuanian and Polish higher classes revolted against Russia, whereupon the Russian gov- ernment confiscated many of the large estates of the nobles and di- vided the land among the peasants, exiling the revolutionists. After 1864 the printing of Lithuanian books in Latin script was prohibited. The Russian language was made obligatory in the schools and in official reports and documents. The government seized Lithuanian books printed in Germany or Austria and imported into Lithuania. In 1905 a Lithuanian congress met at Vilna and protested against the acts of the Russian government, demanding Lithuanian autonomy and the use of the Lithuanian language. In that portion of Lithuanian territory which lay north of the Niemen and which was included in East Prussia, the Germans have carried on the usual Germanizing process (Frederic William I, in the 18th century, sent several thousand colonists into the country), but the region has remained strongly Lithuanian despite their efforts. In 1844 the Lithuanian language was forbidden, but later it was per- mitted in the schools for instruction. In 1896 it was decreed that German was the official language. THE ECONOMIC BASIS Lithuania is without mineral deposits of commercial importance and must depend primarily upon its forests and crops for means of livelihood and commerce. The chief occupation is a primitive type of agriculture, with cereals, flax, and potatoes as the principal products. Not more than half the tillable land was formerly owned by the peasants. The population consists mostly of small farmers. Since the organization of the provisional government of Lithuania, most of the landed estates have been seized and divided among the peasants. One of the great difficulties of a state of this character is to develop products which industrial nations want and which create a trade balance, for this makes possible the purchase of foreign wares like machinery, shoes, cloth, and special articles of food. The only way in which Lithuania can obtain such a trade balance is to sell its raw products, of which the most important in value are flax, rye, and flax- seed, in the order named. Its transportation conditions are still poor. Russian rule in Lithuania The Lithu- anians of East Prussia Need of a favorable trade bal- 8111Ce 360 - The New World The Niemen, an old Lithuanian frontier & Disputed boundaries of Lithu- ania The part nearest East Prussia has almost no good roads, though its soil is more fertile than that of any other part of the country. The commercial organizations are almost wholly in the hands of foreigners—Jews especially, and Germans. Lithuania was a part of the Jewish Pale (Fig. 192), and the towns are more Jewish than those of Poland. Vilna is often called the Jerusalem of Lithuania. PRESENT TERRITORIAL AND POLITICAL PROBLEMS While a good many Lithuanians live south of the Niemen (or Memel), they form a large majority north of that river at the tip of East Prussia, and it was this section, including the port of Memel, that, by the treaty of Versailles, Germany ceded to the Allied and As- sociated Powers, by them presumably to be turned over to Lithuania. The Niemen is to the Lithuanians what the Danube is to the Ruma- nians and the Rhine to the French. The Niemen separates the Lithuanians from their foes: On this side throngs of Lithuanian youths, On the other, in helmet and armor, The Germans on horseback stand immovable. Each party watches,the crossing. So the Niemen, once famed for hospitality, That linked the realms of fraternal nations, Now for them has become the threshold of eternity For none without loss of life or liberty Could cross the forbidden waters. --- ADAM MICKIEWICZ, Konrad Wallenrod The territorial and political problems include the settlement of the disputed boundary between Poland and Lithuania in the Suwalki region and in the provinces of Vilna and Kovno. A disputed boundary also exists on the east, where Lithuanians and White Russians merge into each other without strong ethnic distinctions. Here is a region fertile in political disputes. No one can say with certainty what are the distinctions between Lithuanians, Poles, and Russians. A de- marcation line had to be established in 1919, as shown on Figure 180, to prevent fighting between Poles and Lithuanians, and no arrange- ment has yet been made between Lithuania and Russia. It is just here that the Poles wish to extend their territory according to their eastern program and the preliminary treaty with Soviet Russia, signed at Riga in October 1920. If confirmed by a later treaty with Lithuanian Development and Relations 361 a permanent or an All-Russian government, the present treaty will interpose a belt of Polish territory along Lithuania's hinterland and put Poland in a favorable strategic position with respect to Russia's Baltic trade. Territorial and commercial restriction of this sort has been Lithuania's apprehension, and she may be expected to oppose it with all her strength. The population of the disputed zone has little political self-con- Sciousness. Its outlook has been admirably summarized by Golder: This brings us to the question of the common people. How about them 9 What do they think and how do they feel on these matters 9 On the border districts many of the inhabitants do not know and do not care to what nationality they belong. For genera- tions Polish, Lithuanian, and Russian peasants have lived side by side, have intermarried, have laughed over the same joys, and have wept over the same sorrows. They have even a ‘common speech” which is different from any one of the three national languages. For generations they have been exploited by Lithuanian, Polish, and Russian landlords, and they have not much love for any of them. The poor peasants are not interested either in cultural development or in national independence; many of them do not even understand the meaning of these words. What they want is steady work, good wages, and plenty to eat. They hate landlords of all nationalities, and they have no reason to think that a bishop of their own people would treat them with more consideration than one of another people. Ninety per cent of every nationality in Europe is more interested in social than national problems, in the question of food and wages than in culture and independence. It might be to the interest of Lithuania to combine with either Esthonia or Latvia, or both, and form a confederation (page 368); for the Letts are closely related to the Lithuanians in language, race, and customs, and their economic and political problems are about the same. The danger of political exploitation by the German barons is always real. But it would probably be lessened by a confedera- tion which would permit the ready flow of information and would probably increase the number and effectiveness of joint proposals to end foreign domination. The status of Lithuania itself has not yet been settled. While it seeks independence, no final recognition can be made until Russia, of which it once formed a part, is orderly again. The present pro- visional government is strongly anti-Polish, but there is no doubt that if Lithuania voluntarily joins Russia, it will be only on the basis of a large local autonomy. Hopes of the people A possible Baltic Confedera- tion Fate of Lithuania . still un- determined CHAPTER TWENTY-ONE Exploita- tion of peasants by . German and Rus- sian over- lords Brothers of the Sword and Teutonic Knights LAND TENURE AND TRADE OUTLETS IN ESTHONIA AND LATVIA — THE FORMER BALTIC PROVINCES At the beginning of the World War, Esthonia, Livonia, and Cour- land, known as the Baltic Provinces, were parts of the Russian Em- pire. The people of the region have now formed two states: (1) Esthonia, which is composed of the old province of Esthonia and more than half of Livonia; and (2) Latvia, formed out of the rest of Livonia and the whole of Courland. The Esthonian National Council was provisionally recognized by Great Britain on 3 May 1918, and similar recognition of the Letts was made on 18 November 1918, after the formation of the Lettish National Council at Riga (late in 1917) and the organization of a provisional government. Final recognition of both states was effected January 1921. DOMINATION BY OTHER PEOPLES These two new states do not base their claim to independence upon historical precedents, for they were always under the control of others — Germans, Swedes, or Russians. Their claim springs from the desire of the mass of the people to avoid that exploitation which has been their lot for centuries. No one can understand their present desire for self-government without examining the historic causes that have sharpened their opposition to the overlordship of Russians and Ger- mans alike. The exploitation of the peasants, who form the bulk of the population, has been carried on through a system of land tenure that has its roots in the events of the 12th century, when German traders first visited the region to exchange wares with the natives. With the traders came missionaries, and finally crusaders. Thus in 1200 came Bishop Albert, with twenty-three shiploads of knights, organized into an order called “Brothers of the Sword,” or Livonian Knights. They converted the heathen natives and subdued the land by force, making a place for the colonists, whose settlements have remained distinct to this day. This order of knights suf- fered severe defeat in 1236 and thereupon united with the Teutonic Knights, another order devoted to forcible Christianization. The struggle with the natives of the Baltic Provinces was then renewed. During the 14th century, and again in the 16th century, there was a series of religious wars; the religious orders were weakened, and their territory was overrun by Poles and Swedes. After 1561, Poland held southern Lettland, and Courland became a Polish duchy. Amid 362 Land Tenure and Trade Outlets in Esthonia and Latvia 363 W º Nº. O :* - - *s sº : , “.. • : * : 3. * $o ° º'-- o : gº ***.. * . ." o 2.x º' -......... "... ... or” # o & * T ºf • * * ~ *. ...” * “...? : * ^* • * v v. - ** : . . . ; ^o e - * ve ‘. ... of & “R el. * * * ~ * ~ *N Lyā... ? .." * eV • * * * v \, ve - c * . . . ....." sº • T-grº . * * * * * * * * v- * * * <\ 0 6 º'" gº o e º altic Port, , .v * v v v. v. v v v v v v^2 /o • , gº .* o ° a * * * * * * , v v v v we v v v v v v v v. v. º, o g ºg o º * * * v- w w w \r v v v × 9 & viſs'ſ a . * , cº’ \'vº o ºf v ºf ºf v > * * * * * ~ * > *NS v v J ºf a • * * ~ * 6 o * * * * * * ~ * ~ * ~, tº e º LTIC PROVINCES Esths Letts Lithuanians Poles White Russians Germans Russians -----Present Boundaries –––Probable 3? x * * * . x - ..? & . . º. ſº...º.º.º. 2. e 9& x 㺠ſº - $ ; e 㺠*% % §3% ---------Plebiscife' m 54 º º §§§::$:SN/ –––––. Provincial m ** %24 }^Nº. 0 2. 40 30 to 100M %Ž % º & 1–1 L - FIG. 184. Ethnography and boundaries in Lithuania and in the former Baltic Provinces of Russia. The eastern boundary of Lithuania as shown above represents the line established by treaty between Lithuania and the Soviet government (1920). It may be altered as a result of the occupation of Vilna by Polish irregular troops, which has led to a decision to hold a pleb- iscite to determine whether the Vilna region shall belong to Poland or to Lithuania. - all these and later changes the Prussian landlords kept their political hold upon the country, and with it their control of the land and the means of commerce. In 1629 Sweden, under Gustavus Adolphus, got control of Lettland, to give way in turn to Russia in 1721, in the time of Peter the Great. Under the Swedish rule of almost a hundred years (1629–1721) many 364 The New World Swedish liberality in con- trast to Russian oppression Forcible Russifica- tion of the people Disorders accompany- ing the revolution of 1905 A great coloniza- tion scheme of the Prussian landlords had to give up their estates. The people were able also to maintain schools. But under the Russian rule that followed, all the privileges of government were returned to the Ger- man lords. Churches, schools, and police laws were under their con- trol, and they made the fullest use of their opportunity. The peas- ants were made serfs, which practically meant slaves. They could be sold or given away; the lords had the power of life and death over them. Not until 1804 could the peasants own property or land. But the granting of this right of ownership accomplished little. The landlords obtained still more land until, by 1850, they owned 60 per cent of the whole. Between 1845 and 1863 laws were promulgated by the Russian government which limited the rights of the landlords, and since that time the peasants have been able to obtain a fresh hold upon the soil. - In 1884, with the active coöperation of the German landlords, the government of the Czar began a Russianizing policy which continued until the revolution of 1905. The Russian language was prescribed in the schools, in the University of Dorpat, and in the whole civil administration. German support of these measures tended to increase the differences between the peasants and the German barons; be- cause the pastors were German, congregations refused to attend church or were disorderly during services. At last there was a settled determination to develop a nationalistic movement, which, should it succeed, would rid the people of the German barons and of the auto- cratic rule of Russia. r In 1905 socialism spread rapidly in the general effort to overthrow the existing government, and many of the estates of the German landlords were seized. The Russian government put down the revolution with great vigor and brutality. From that time until the formation of republican governments in 1919, the Germans on the one hand and the Russians on the other were equally hated by the Esths and Letts. - ** It was the presence of the German barons in the Baltic Provinces that led Germany to hope for the conquest of this country early in 1918, when the German army completed its advance of the last months of 1917 and established itself on a line which it held down to the end of the war. By the treaty of Brest-Litovsk (between Germany and Russia, in 1918), all the country west of the line shown on Figure 180 was to be made into states whose government and economic control were to be in the hands of German princes. The German government also organized a great colonization scheme, advertising large estates Land Tenure and Trade Outlets in Esthonia and Latvia 365 that were made vacant by the flight of Lettish peasants. It was called the Hindenburg Colonization Plan. Every Courland land- owner whose estate exceeded a certain figure had to sell one third of it to the land company, which itself fixed the purchase price, if necessary by compulsory auction. - GERMAN ATTEMPTS TO RETAIN CONTROL For more than a year after the war closed, the fate of the region was in the balance. By an unfortunate article in the armistice of 11 November 1918, Germany was required to remove her troops from the Baltic Provinces only when ordered by the Allies to do so. A long delay ensued. This gave the army leaders and the power- ful German land-owning barons, or Balts, who had controlled the country for centuries, an opportunity to interfere with the newly formed and weak governments of Esthonia, Latvia, and Lithuania. Von der Goltz, the German army commander, supported by soldiers of fortune from Germany and the local German nobility, tried to bring the whole Baltic region under German control, intending thus to hold the Baltic outlets of a vast hinterland and provide a base for German economic and political penetration of Russia. Several times, as a result of Allied pressure, the German armies withdrew over limited areas and permitted the Bolshevists to come in and work their will on the defenseless inhabitants. They stripped the country of every useful object, as well as of food; agricultural machinery, factory equipment, beds, upholstery, etc., were carried away. By this action, Von der Goltz and the nobles created a still wider gulf between the native Lettish peasants and the German land- owners; instead of increasing German influence, they put an end to it. The result was open conflict, destined to throw out finally and completely the remnants of German power and to free the region from a control that had lasted for eight centuries. Under the super- vision of an Interallied military mission, the evacuation of the Ger- man armies was completed late in 1919, but the mission would prob- ably not have succeeded at all if a strong Allied blockade had not been maintained for several months on the Baltic coast of Germany. THE BASIS OF THE NEW STATES Political power in the three former provinces at last has passed into the hands of two national assemblies. These are inexperienced bodies, and it remains to be seen whether they can form strong governments. Tacit recognition of Esthonia and Latvia — and at the same time German delay in evacuating the Baltic Provinces Country stripped by Ger– mans and Bolshevists Weakness of the na- tional as- semblies 366 The New World Treaty of Dorpat, between Esthonia and Russia Fig. 185. Part of the harbor of Riga. of Lithuania (page 362) – was accorded in 1919 by the Peace Con- ference of Paris in dealing with the delegations from these states. Poland recognized Latvia in October 1919, and agreed to help her against the Bolshevists. A treaty was made at Riga late in 1919 between Esthonia and Latvia which provided for: (1) The division of military forces on the frontier opposed to the Bolshevists, including agreements about military supplies. (2) The demarcation of the Lettish-Esthonian boundary. AGREEMENT WITH THE PRESENT GOVERNMENT OF RUSSIA Having obtained recognition from the Allies, it was important for Esthonia to arrange peace with Soviet Russia, so that industries could be revived, order maintained, and an eastern administrative boundary established. As a result of a conference at Dorpat an armistice was concluded on 3 January 1920 between the Esths and the government of Soviet Russia, the Esths obtaining practically the whole of the territory they claimed on ethnic grounds. (1) Article I of the treaty announces the cessation of hostilities and the conclusion of peace between the two countries. (2) The Russian government recognizes the right of a nationality within the former Russian Empire to separate from Russia Land Tenure and Trade Outlets in Esthonia and Latvia 367 (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) and to enjoy absolute independence, basing this action on the principle of self-determination; it therefore renounces Voluntarily and forever all sovereign rights over Esthonian people and territory. The frontiers are defined as shown in Figure 184. It is further provided that no armed vessels shall be kept on Lakes Peipus and Pskov. Guarantees are given to disarm military and naval units of other powers that may be on the soil of Esthonia or of Russia. Direct telegraphic connection is established between Wesenberg in Esthonia on the one hand and Petrograd and Moscow on the other, as well as with Pskov, which is the headquarters of a mixed commission to carry out the military guarantees. * Russia renounces all claims to former Russian property, money, etc., located in Esthonia, and agrees to pay to Esthonia 15,000,000 rubles in gold. Esthonia has no responsibility for Russian debts or other ob- ligations created by the issue of paper money, etc., and the Russian government undertakes to restore to Esthonia valuables of all kinds that were taken away from the country. Of particular interest is the section of the treaty dealing with economic relations, providing for the equality of trade in commercial, industrial, and financial enterprises, ships and cargoes, farms and industries, agricultural products and ex- ported goods. “No customs duties or tariffs shall be levied on goods transported across the territory of the other sig- natory of this treaty.” Freight rates are to be no higher in one country than in the other country, for goods of the same nature over the same distance. Esthonia is to provide Russia with whatever port space is needed for commercial purposes, with a free port in Revel, or wherever a free port may be established. Special agreements must be made between Esthonia and Russia for any artificial diversion of the water from Lakes Peipus and Pskov which may lower the average level of the water of these lakes by more than one foot, and in a similar way fishing on the two lakes and the operation of commer- cial vessels are to be regulated. Russia is to have the right to obtain electric power from the waterfalls of the Narova River, and Esthonia is to have the right to construct and exploit a direct single- or double-track railway connection from Moscow to some point on the ES- thonian frontier. Finally, Russia, grants to Esthonia rights over 2,700,000 acres of forest land in the governments of Petrograd, Pskov, Tver, Novgorod, Olonetz, Wologda, and Archangel. 368 e The New World The new States an agricultural region with little in- dustry Present political program These provisions are, on the whole, surprisingly liberal to Esthonia, and, if carried out, will assure her a favorable basis for her economic life. If the Soviet government should be overthrown, the agreement is of interest as forming the probable basis of a new treaty, though the items mentioned in paragraphs 8 and 9, above, are likely to be modified in Russia's fayor. INTERNAL AIFFAIRS In both area and population the two new Baltic states are small: AREA POPULATION Esthonia 20,000 sq. mi. 1,750,000 Latvia 25,000 sq. mi. 2,400,000 Only a small part of the population is engaged in transportation and commerce, and another equally small part is engaged in industrial occupations. The chief basis of life is agriculture, which furnishes employment for more than half the population. While the hold- ing of land in large estates enabled the German landowners to exploit the peasants, it is also true that these landowners formed the most intelligent part of the population and were responsible for the intro- duction of modern agricultural machinery and diversified farming. In Esthonia the Germans constituted 13 per cent of the total popu- lation and owned about 50 per cent of the land. The peasants have won freedom from the Balts, but they have lost an important part of the brains of the country. While both states have been repeatedly overrun by armies during the war, Latvia was almost destroyed. It is estimated that in the district of Courland the decrease in population from 1914 to 1917 was from 800,000 to 300,000. As for internal political and economic problems, they relate prin- cipally to the land question. All parties are agreed that the land should be divided among the people, that church and state should be separated, and that the form of government should be liberal. While opposed to Bolshevism, Latvia is a socialistic state. The economic condition of the region is not favorable. A large part of the country is forested, and there is not a closely organized commer- cial life. Transportation, except along the few railways, is still prim- itive and slow. As late as 1911 Esthonia had no paved roads at all. Esthonia and Latvia would be strengthened commercially if they were to form an economic union and include Lithuania. The po- litical obstacle to such a union is the lack of sympathy between the different elements. They have different languages and have no close Land Tenure and Trade Outlets in Esthonia and Latvia 369 historical or political associations, in spite of the similarity of their social and political problems in the past. Such a combination might also enable the German barons to regain political control; being more experienced in commercial and political affairs, they could play one nationality against the other to their own advantage. INTERNATIONAL POSITION OF ESTHONIA AND LATVIA The importance of the region in international affairs springs from the fact that the ports of the Baltic — Riga, Libau, Windau, and Baltic Port — are the rail outlets for a large part of interior Russia, and all have an important commercial rank; Riga, the largest, is sixth in importance among the ports of Russia. Also, the exports are raw materials—like flax and wood — and these are of importance to the industrialized nations of western Europe, whose own produc- tion of such materials is small and who must find additional stocks on or near a seaboard, where water transportation assures low TateS. The recognition of the two governments of Esthonia and Latvia by Great Britain has a commercial significance, not only in respect of the future of Russia, but with reference to general imperial policy and understandings with the French. It appears to be understood that the Baltic Sea is a British trade realm in which there will be im- portant developments in the future. Thus it was the British navy that blockaded the coasts of Germany and Soviet Russia. A British High Commissioner sits at Danzig, and British naval units have pa- trolled the coast of the Baltic and guaranteed the safety of com- mercial exchange. All this is in line with the British traditional policy of establishing influence or control in ports and coastal belts serving as outlets for interior populations from which flow important currents of trade. freight The Baltic ports im- portant outlets for the raw materials of a large region Great Britain's Baltic policy in harmony with her tradition of coastal control Treaty of Dorpat Finland to have an Arctic Warm-water port CHAPTER TWENTY-Two FINNISH PROBLEMS IN THEIR GEOGRAPHICAL SETTING FINLAND’s chief territorial problem lies on her eastern frontier, long in dispute with Soviet Russia. The main points in contention were the question of an outlet for Finland on the Arctic Ocean (Pechenga region) and the disposition of eastern Karelia, a province occupied by a people racially allied to the Finns. An agreement was finally reached in a treaty signed 14 October 1920 and ratified 29 December 1920. The boundary articles of the treaty of Dorpat assign to Fin- land a strip of the Arctic coast and connecting territory as shown in the inset of Figure 188; and other articles provide for the neutraliza- tion of the frontier. The treaty also guarantees autonomy to eastern Karelia and to the Karelian population of Archangel and Olonetz (northeast of Lake Ladoga), which is Greek Orthodox in religion and Russian in civilization and has no marked political preference. Transportation and rafting of timber on waters crossing the boundary line is to be permitted to both countries. Commercial freedom of wide scope is guaranteed in articles on the use of ports, railways, telegraph lines, freight and customs rates, on fishing rights, harbor fees, and the like. The Pechenga region which Finland gained is a small, barren strip on the Arctic shore. Its significance arises out of the tempering effect exercised by a branch of the warmer waters of the north Atlantic drift (usually called the Gulf Stream), whereby the ports of Pechenga and Alexandrovsk, 250 miles north of the Arctic Circle (Fig. 186), remain open throughout the winter months, when all the ports of the eastern Baltic and the White Sea are closed by ice. Archangel is icebound for nine months each year. It was to secure an open port that Russia built the Murman railway to Catherine Harbor (Alexandrovsk). The northern ports would be of far less importance if it were not that Russia has already lost all her Baltic ports except Petrograd and may lose others on the Black Sea and in eastern Siberia. GEOGRAPHICAL CONDITIONS Of all of the new nations of Europe, Finland is farthest north. What are its resources? What is the physical basis of its strength 9 As outlined in Figure 186, Finland is a third as large as Ontario. While the extreme north grades into Arctic tundra, the country as a 370 Finnish Problems in their Geographical Setting 371 whole resembles the Lake Superior region in surface and climate. Everywhere the surface is rocky and lake-dotted, with an irregular drainage, a thin soil, and an extensive forest cover. In the milder south, where there is a deeper soil, there are farms producing hardy grains like rye, barley, and oats. The population of Finland is 3,500,000. Helsingfors, the capital, has 187,000. The towns are small, and include only 15 per cent of the population (in the United States about half the population is ur- ban). In the cold and remote north ºf rºº the density of population is less ſº than 1 to the square mile; but in lº the warmer and more fertile south, ſº on the edge of the Gulf of Finland, sº it reaches 93 to the square mile. ºn Half of the population lives by Šºš agriculture and cattle raising, but sº only 8.5 per cent of the land is jº cultivated or used for pasture. § Nearly a third of the surface is covered with peat marsh and bog, and nearly half is forested. Barley is grown up to latitude 68° north § and rye to 64°, or to 67° in favora- ºr ." º ble years. The farther north one Hºº # goes the longer — and also the N hotter — the summer days; and 2,6-26 26–64. whereas barley takes 116 days to & a º * ripen in the Aland Islands, there are Nº.e *: "...". hº º, but 63 days between sowing and º.º.º.º.º. harvest in the higher latitudes, 2, and Debes, Handallas, 1913, Pi. 12 c. the limit of its range. No other civilized race lives so far north as the people of Finland. “The Finns have been bred in the school of adversity.” As a whole the country is poor and famines are not rare. In 1867, for example, there was a fearful dearth, owing chiefly to the poor crop of rye, the principal food. Again in 1869 there was general want, due to the partial failure of the potato crop. The Finns have emigrated in large numbers, chiefly to North America, for Finland cannot support its people on its own produce. The chief wealth of Finland lies in its forests and its water power. FIG. 186. Population densities for Finland. & § WS over 25 per sq.km. over 64 per sq.mi. Distribu- tion of the population Crop fail- ures and famines 372 The New World Forests, Water power, and railroads Inland water sys- tem of JRinland The Finns predomi- nant Of the 3,000,000 horse power available, only 100,000 are now in use. In 1913, wood and wood products formed 75 per cent of the ex- ports of the country. Mineral resources are almost unknown. The total mileage of railways is 2500, which, in relation to the number of people, is a high figure and compares favorably with that of industrial countries like France and Belgium. In relation to area, the railway | mileage is small. The WATERPOWER long and indented sea- - § §§ § º * sº §§ º AND coast, with innumera- t s \\\\º: § à DRAINAGE ble havens and exten- § § sive fishing grounds, has naturally bred sail- * N * \ o 2000-10,000 H.P. @ over 10,000 H. P. sº - ,22°, *...* ors. Before the World ** - - roup or rapids., -> e e e - sº * a \ ‘ī each over 10,000 H.P War, Finnish ships plied & sº & All (Numerals indicate b € t; W. € 6. In Stockholm 2 © - * • * number of rapids grouped) - 3& Lakes and expanded Antwerp, London, Q -, º "..." | Havre, and Bordeaux. E- For the most part *** *** settlements in Finland follow the watercourses, just as they did in the Stone Age, because these º § are the natural ready- sº made means of com- §§ tº munication. Finland RW ºi has forty times as much §”%" | inland water as France. 㺠bºº Certain canals date sº £Sºś. The Saima Canal con- from the Middle Ages. FIG. 187. Water resources of Finland, a glaciated rocky country neCtS lakes of the Saima like Quebec. The Saima canal system, mentioned in the text, hich is shown just above Kotka on the Gulf of Finland. From Atlas System, Which COVers water, the largest lake group in Europe, of which more than 2000 square miles are in Finland (Fig. 187). This system connects directly with the Gulf of Finland and is an outlet of incalculable benefit to the country. : *. }\}; * * * WLA pº 4. :*: y - - - N º - º', F ÖF F º-º-º-º- ... t ...iſºgº. g THE PEOPLE OF FINLAND The Finns are closely allied to the Esthonians and the Letts on the Baltic; that is, they belong to the Finno-Ugrian stock, which is quite distinct from the Slavic stock of eastern Europe and from the Teu- * Finnish Problems in their Geographical Setting 373 tonic (Nordic) stock of Scandinavia and Germany. Finnish is the lan- guage of 88 per cent of the population; more than 11 per cent speak Swedish. Though small numerically, the Swedish element is very important because it controls a large part of the wealth of the coun- try and is active politically out of proportion to its numbers. The Small remainder of the people comprises about 1300 Lapps in the north and about 2000 Germans and 6000 Russians in the southern portions. Education in Fin- land is on a remarka- bly high level. Prac- tically every Finlander can read. There are two universities, Hel- singfors and Abó. Fin- land has one of the two geographical asso- ciations in the world that admit to member- ship only geographers who have done original work. - The discovery by Elias Lönnrot of the great epic of the Finns, the Kalevala, first pub- lished in 1835, gave a great impulse to the study of the Finnish language and culture. More than 300,000 legends, sagas, and proverbs have been collected. All this intellectual activity, but especially SWard; *Wadsj/- 40M 6 20 º & § # ſ i ** %2% s :**, 3 à e a Af Z Z, 2 %; gº£:- * à 2¥ % % *a % %2. ºº º º % %'s- º 2. 2 ** fº KºzX/22/.422 Nºxº~". 22,2,2,2,2,222222 %%22%22%22 «. . : Çe 7. N Finns . Lapps &Karelians % Swedes äNorwegians %Gr:Russians FIG. 188. The Karelians, though Finns, have many Russian characteristics. Were they added to Finland, that country's eastern boundary would be the White Sea. It is through the territory of the Karelians that the Russians have built the railway to Kola (K on the map) and Alexandrovsk (A). Based on Atlas de Finlande, 2d ed., 1911, Pl. 46, and Debes, Handatlas, 1913, Pl. 12 c. The inset shows the final bound- ary of Finland in the Pechenga district (page 370). Pechenga is shown by a small circle on the inset, and two fine parallel lines locate the road now running to that port, which will probably soon be served by a railway. the publication of the Kalevala, has had a strongly stimulating effect on the nationalist movement and has brought the Finnish element of the population to the front. Despite the difficulties of her geograph- ical environment and of ever-threatening trouble from the east, Fin- land has risen to the rank of a nation of great promise for the future — an outpost of western civilization. Literature and folk- 1ore of the Finns 374 - . . The New World Finland’s history Aland Is- lands a • source of dispute between Sweden and Fin- land RELATION TO NEIGHBORING STATES Finland's present problems in the field of political geography follow for the most part from the country's position between more powerful peoples of different race and speech—the Swedes on the west and the Russians on the east. Here, as elsewhere, the ruling political philos- ophy of the past has brought the heel of the conqueror on the neck of the small nation that stood in the path of empire. In the 12th and 13th centuries the Swedes, after repeated crusades against the country, conquered it; and they kept it until 1809 – more than six hundred years. During this time the history of Sweden is the history of Finland. The whole country was impregnated with Swedish culture. Then came Russia. - Through four centuries Russia has consistently extended her frontiers on all sides toward open water, that is, toward the Baltic and Black seas, the Pacific, the Mediterranean, and the Persian Gulf. Her rulers have made this the main national political objective through- out the two centuries since the time of Peter the Great. Finland stood in her path. So Finland was conquered by the Russians during the Napoleonic wars and was held by them down to 1917, when the Czar was deposed and the Russian democratic government set up. By the treaty of Fredrikshamn, in 1809, Russia, gaining control of Finland, agreed to respect its independence; but, as with all auto- cratic governments, the word of a treaty proved to be a thing easily broken when it suited the ruler's purpose to break it. How artificial was the process of Russification may be seen by the fact that Russian culture, after a century of artificial stimulation, is practically non- existent in Finland today. - In the alternate ownership of Finland by Sweden and Russia, the Åland Islands have been a matter of dispute. They lie only seventy- five miles from Stockholm and twenty miles from the Swedish coast, and if fortified by a neighboring power would be a grave menace. Their strategic value grows out of their good harbors as well as their geographical position. They were ceded by Sweden to Russia in 1809, but their population of 19,000 is almost exclusively Swedish. They have been recommended for assignment to Finland by the com- mission of the League of Nations that was appointed to study the Åland question. - Fortunately for the Finns, the Allies maintained a military front in northern Russia through 1918 and 1919. The Archangel sector protected Finland's flank, thus enabling the Finnish armies to hold Finnish Problems in their Geographical Setting 375 in check the Bolshevist T- & Af % troops based on Petro- “…; *Helvº grad. Thereby the §§§º"? country was enabled to right itself, after sev- eral brief internal strug- gles between the “Whites” and “Reds” which ended in quali- fied victory for the “Whites.” This out- come put at least a temporary end to Bol- shevism in Finland, won recognition and assist- £ e FIG. 189. Swedish colonists, former Swedish ownership of ance from the Allies, and Finland, and the wide distribution of Swedish culture have combined to make the Swedes a powerful political group in started the country on ..." ...º.º.º. II, p. 20, its national career. text to map 46. ZTE 3ſ, swedish COLONIZATION 4 š Former extent Ş Present extent Scale of miles 0 20 40 60 30 100 !–1–4–4–4–4–4–4–4–4–1. oTammersfors THE OUTLOOK FOR FINLAND Communist agitation still continues among the soldiers of the regu- lar army, and together with Bolshevist propaganda has undermined the morale of the army to some extent. The bitterness that arose in the civil war of 1919 has continued, and adds its problem to that of the contest between the working classes and the rest of the popu- lation, particularly the bourgeoisie. The conservative part of the population fears Red disturbances, and the Reds fear that the Whites will set up a reactionary government. The progress of the settlement and unification of the political life of the country is made more diffi- cult by proximity to Soviet Russia. The strong racial differences between Finns and Russians, the long political oppression of the Finns by the former Russian gov- ernment, and lately the evil effects of Bolshevism, will limit the re- lations of the Finns and Russians for many years to come, even in commercial matters. Of political union or confederation there can be none at all. Finland and Sweden having had the friendly assist- ance of the League of Nations in the settlement of the Åland Islands dispute, the bond between these two states ought to become as strong as will be, in time, that with the Esths and Letts. In short, the ex- ternal' political problems of Finland are relatively simple; her chief danger lies in the radical elements within her borders and the difficulties that naturally attend development of a strong democratic government. The pro- tection of the Allies Whites and Reds Finland's problems chiefly do- mestic, not interna- tional CHAPTER TWENTY THREE THE POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY of RUSSIA Russia; an A DRAMATIC theme of statesmen and publicists for many years before ... the World War was the growing danger of absorption of neighboring lands and people by the huge Russian Empire. British statesmen were anxiously contemplating every Russian advance in Central Asia. By 1893, Russia's frontier almost touched British India at Kashmir in the Pamirs; and Russian political agents were scattered through the distant Chinese provinces of Eastern Turkestan, Mongolia, and Tibet, as well as in Persia, Turkey, and Afghanistan. It was the steady growth of Russian influence in Manchuria and elsewhere in northern China that led to the Russo-Japanese War in 1905. The Russification of Congress Poland continued from 1815 down to the opening of the World War, and German leaders never allowed their people to forget the menace of the Slav. In 1907 the constitutional guarantees of the Finns were set aside. Russian influence was aggres- sive in northern Turkey – on the borders of Transcaucasia—and in both Persia and Turkey toward the Persian Gulf, whither Russia sought a railway outlet to warm water. With a strongly centralized govern- ment, Russia had been able persistently to absorb or penetrate those border regions of chief strategic importance in commerce and war. The break-up of the Russian Empire now seems a rather natural event, seeing how diverse were its various parts in customs, ideals, ethnography, history, and mode of life. The apparent harmony of the political map was merely the expression of centralized imperial power exercised upon an ignorant peasantry. Just as soon as indus- tries developed trained men and educational facilities, the old system failed, not so much because it was ill-adapted to modern needs, as because it ceased to function, particularly in the World War. First came the democratic revolution of 1917, and second the general dis- integration of political life as a consequence of the rise and spread of Bolshevist philosophy and power. In its present fragmented condition and state of disorder, will Russia be able to gather itself together again and form a unified government? We shall be able to estimate the chance of such reorganization only if we know, first of all, what peoples composed the empire, what diver- gencies existed among them, and finally what geographical, political, social, economic, or religious bonds may now be made to serve as uni- fying principles. Consideration will first be given to ethnic character. 376 - The Political Geography of Russia 377 -·țIIațqpuoIJL ‘J’, pug ºu3@Iągſ ºg ºbțuaņsȚIųO ‘O ‘Ā'InquieBI Squasa IđôI H ‘øđoInGI Jo įsaaqqiou aqq uſ : [ođoţseqøS ‘S ‘essapo ‘o ‘ezu8qsuoO squaserder o “gas ſoºſq aqq uo . snæIĻI Squase Ido I 900010 uſ & : Ispuſīgſ ‘ą pub ºſsoſ IJL ‘L ‘90țuo A ‘A ‘Bouðſ) Squasa Idol º 'Áſg4I uſ :§uoã84ņțųO Sņuose, der O ‘gurung uſ ! uapnŞ quoq ‘Ş 'qaſ pue ‘eſſe H ſpe M Squase Ida-I ‘H ‘A ‘qđÁēGI uI 'pºſſºſduuoo sy pepāøg jo qq ſou quļođ ſe pue erseg uøøAqeq Kewaſſer aq L ºu aqsțu'eqāyy pure ‘eſsra.I ‘A’ox{InL ÁĽreſnoņIeđ ‘eſsy uJøſsòA uſ !oſguoo ubuII00 pub ºubyssnſ ºgsņķī£I Iaurioſ go pſøg øqą puſe eſse In@I go sauſį Kaapſer TeđțoupId æqJL 06 I - or I UſuaeTOETĮ ĮN§§:Ņ}ŅŅŅĢy~~;~~~~); sæ :NŞ \!Sła\\ *Jef-§ÑRa/ �§),/ /§<ºff; (<§ÊNÇ*<\/ [ " … ∞: ∞p~~~$32×∞DZAŘ•ðº� �„--~~~~,\~~~,·X£}\\ /--- ºs ... Yºstº, �•�ſº |-•Aæ:ß �&%|× ∞ §à ∞ × 1),ſ', Ķī A. �� ! →Ō. eº~~~[ <ſ). o, 0 \\ Įgyſssſſſſ!!!--~~&Ęſ* -,-,-,-,***** ×<\ Nſ��\,\!\\ & Ș§}\}/{<%!~%§2 y√ì}¿(§§§§§ & \ffffffN x&ș.* ISanayo. A *A}_2^ y^^ - S, _- ºl, . A : \, 2… ovo, Nijni Novgorod -- " - O % RSS$º *— *---f ** ...—º - D all Y. c Sºx -\ pscow ./ º `i; % Vitebsk ~, 2' ~~ }* | <-- ſ:- Q}6% §§§fiólensk). \--- Kºſºvº-a *~~ ſ \{SYSS. 7- -- Atula) ; { "...~2. &Simbirsk) ~ & NNRRRRRSRRN. S. º'C޺ * § *N - §§§ X-, -/ *. § - Yn. asºn & - §§§: , ; –ſº ; : e.8 Saſſlara % N RRN ğ, o, § i\, f^* , ) (Pºnsº f* * } §§§ §º (Oreº s—º- Tºborº-- Ağ A-f SO §§3% Y S R *. * ^ \-" " . * * * *... - SSSNN\}}\º Fºº-ºº: «k 49 * % ºf Gºrº, f 2 % }%. Sºº-ºº: { {Vororiesh) i *Saratov -- O - %. . . . . .';.,.\. * */” TK_º $ %:...º:% 2 a º :: * > . . . . . .”.". ". . . * º - * : . . .” - a * * * • * * Scale of miles 0. 300 too 20 3 jo 3B: 40 FIG. 192. The Pale of Settlement, western European Russia, according to the Jewish Em- cyclopaedia (article on Russia). In none of the Russian governments without shading on the map do the Jews form as much as 1 per cent of the total population, except in the Baltic region, where percentages of Jews are given in figures (1, 2, 7). country, while still being chiefly settled in Lithuania, Courland, the Ukraine, and Bessarabia. In Russian Poland, Jews constitute 14 per cent of the total population, and in Bessarabia about 12 per cent, though from 30 to 60 per cent of them are in the cities. It is characteristic of the Jews that they have a community life distinct from that of the people about them, and they have grown so numerous as to become an object of persecution throughout Rus- sia, under the new régime as well as the old. The antipathy toward them is not wholly because of their religion; it is aroused partly by their success in business, particularly in money-lending. Many of them take no interest whatever in political affairs, or limit their activ- 382 The New World Scattered German colonies: Character and high ideals lack- ing in the “old ré- gime 9 3 Religious and eco- nomic bonds of the Rus- sian peas- ant ities to the gaining of privileges as a distinct race. The Jews form an element of weakness rather than of strength in the development of a unified Russian state. Of greater political importance are the Germans who have come into the Baltic Provinces, forming the landlord, tradesman, and ar- tisan classes. They live mainly in the larger towns, whither they were first invited as early as the 16th century by the Russian gov- ernment, Russia then lacking artisans and traders. In 1762 numbers of them were invited to settle in southern Russia in separate agricul- tural colonies, and, as shown in Figure 100, they now occupy im- portant geographical positions in the Don region and the northern Caucasus. They have increased the economic value of the regions in which they dwell, profiting by the allotment of rich land origi- nally granted to them, their exemption from military service, and the advantages of local self-government. In the Ukraine they exer- cised a strong political influence during the Ukrainian separatist movement (beginning in 1918), and wherever located they are a firm basis of German economic and political penetration. THE DEFECTS OF THE OLD SYSTEM Soil and climate, forests and minerals, do not make an empire; they furnish merely the physical basis for one. While Russia before the World War was a big, rich country, the Czar was a weak ruler surrounded by selfish and reactionary advisers. The real rulers were the Grand Dukes, the high government officials, and the nobility in general, who numbered about 140,000 families. It was this group that put into motion schemes for robbing the people, for exiling to Siberia leaders who manifested any independence of political thought; and it was they who were responsible for the bad management of the war, when, through graft and inefficiency, millions of Russians were obliged to fight under every sort of handicap. The hands of the rulers of Russia were in large part upheld by the religious sentiment of the people as expressed in their almost uni- versal membership in the Greek Orthodox Church and the various sects within it. The national church was identified with the state, . and it became an instrument of political power to serve the heads of the Russian government. - Nearly 90 per cent of the people belong to the peasant class, and the peasant was held in economic as well as spiritual bondage to the political forces that surrounded him. Though successive The Political Geography of Russia 383 º - º a º sº __ in the background. Fig. 193. The heart of Moscow, with the buildings of the Kremlin efforts were made by his leaders and even, through the fitful adop- tion of liberal policies, by the government itself, to release him from serfdom and allot him land, these movements were so widely separated in time and so meager in results that the situation of the peasant improved scarcely at all. He might possess land, but he was still in debt to a wealthy landowner. In short, the Czar and his advisers and the thousands of the no- bility learned that the strength of their system lay in the ignorance of the peasant; their wealth and privilege were gained at the expense of the misery of the peasant. When the masses also learned this, they were not long in seeking a remedy, however drastic. Of imme- diate importance to them was the fact that the old régime had to go; the only question was the manner of its going. 384 The New World Former serfs of Russia The serfs made “free * Famines among the Rus- sian peas- ants Revolu- tion of I905 THE BACKGROUND OF RUSSIAN DISORDER We have touched on the weaknesses of the former Russian Empire for the purpose of understanding the basis of that present disorder which is Russia's immediate anxiety. By far the most serious polit- ico-economic problem of the present is the reconstruction of Russia. This would seem to be most soundly based upon the traditional and distinctive Russian institutions known as the zemstvos and the coöp- erative societies. Coupled with these semi-social institutions there will doubtless be a central government of a liberal order. Finally, the whole political and social structure, to succeed, must have a solid industrial and financial basis. That is, the processes of reconstruction must follow the lines of economic development already laid down in Russian life. These considerations impel us to look a little more closely at the economic tendencies of Russia just before the war. One of the chief causes of the present troubles of Russia has been the ignorance of the masses. While many factors have contributed to this end, a principal one is the system of land tenure practiced in Russia. For generations the land has been held in large estates; a hundred years ago, and even later, nine tenths of it was so held. It was tilled by the millions of serfs that made up the bulk of the population. The serfs were not only ignorant; large numbers of them were indolent and of drunken habits. Their life was extremely wretched. The greatness and power of the empire meant nothing to them. For a long time, indeed, they were slaves in fact if not in name. Finally, in a series of edicts dating from 1859 to 1866, Alexander II abolished serfdom. At the same time he divided the land into two parts: one part was left to the landlords; the other was given to the serfs, on condition that they pay the landlords for it. To the peasant this arrangement looked like robbery. Instead of solving the land question, it made the difficulty only more acute. - During the next fifty years the population increased so rapidly and the need for land became so great that the Russian peasant was on the verge of starvation practically all the time. During 1890 and 1898 there were actual famines in which thousands died of star- vation. - Conditions such as these can be remedied only if the form and spirit of the government are altered by an intelligent people. Since . in Russia the rulers were stupid and vicious and the people ignorant, matters became worse instead of better, and finally when the war with Japan (1904–1905) turned out badly, disturbances became The Political Geography of Russia 385 general. The peasants burned many of the houses of the nobles; mutinies were of frequent occurrence in the army and the navy; the country was in a state of semi-anarchy. After trying with ill success to suppress the wave of disorder, the Czar at last issued a manifesto (1905) which promised freedom of speech and of the press; it also created, through general elections, a representative assembly, or Duma, which was to have the right of giving final approval to all laws before they were promulgated. But by one means or another the powers of the Duma were taken away or modified, until it no longer represented the people at all. Once more the fight for liberty had failed. Imperial ambitions demanded complete political assimilation of included peoples, and the methods followed were harsh and provoca- tive in the extreme. Between 1907 and 1914 the old policy of fright- fulness continued. The Poles were treated worse than ever; from the Finns were taken the last vestiges of an autonomous and constitu- tional government. The serfs became even more discontented than before; the land question was growing more and more acute. There was also added a new political element, the most threatening toward the autocratic régime of all the forces in the empire, one that was to be in time a powerful element — the industrial classes. Under Count Witte, a great statesman who became minister of com- munications in 1892, Russia had built railways. Before that time it was almost without a railway system; in fact, there were but six de- tached lines, serving only the principal towns. Witte argued that as the country was chiefly agricultural, it would be at the mercy of the big industrial nations of western Europe until it changed its ways; if it was ever to be free economically, it must use its own raw mate- rial and labor to create manufactured wares. Witte also urged state protection for infant industries, encouraged foreigners to invest capital, and started Russia on an industrial career. One of the immediate consequences of Witte's policies was the rapid growth of the industrial cities. In the sixteen years follow- ing 1897, Odessa, Kiev, and Kherson increased their population 55, 150, and 40 per cent respectively. These cities are the chief centers of steel and iron manufacture. The manganese ores of the Caucasus, the oil of Baku, the platinum of the Urals, and the forests of the north have all been developed at a tremendous rate—tremendous, at least, for Russia. º It was as natural as could be in an autocracy that the laborers, better organized than the peasants, more closely in touch with newspapers, The Duma, or National Parliament Return of the evil govern- ment of autocrats Witte's develop- ment of railways and mines 386 The New World Industrial middle class Low state of agri- cultural practice in relation to famines Fig. 194. The plain of the Dnieper at Kiev. in general more intelligent, should have revolutionary theories and should spread them. They and the students of the universities were the leaders in every radical movement. Side by side with the laborers and as a result of the same process of industrialization, there grew up a middle class, which up to that time had been all but wanting in Russia. These were the capitalists and business proprietors. They were demanding, as time went on, a greater share in the government. In spite of its wealth of natural resources, in spite of the liberation of the serfs and the tendency toward more liberalized forms of local government, the management of the Russian commonwealth was deplorably bad. The agricultural problem had never been thor- oughly studied, and no far-reaching and thoroughgoing schemes of agricultural reform had been worked out, to say nothing of their The Political Geography of Russia 387 application. More than this, large portions of the agricultural popu- lation lived upon land beyond the border of the zone of dependable rains. In the Volga region the winters are longer and more severe than in the Ukraine and droughts are more common. The peas- ants are always in a state of misery. Here is the border zone where the settler is tempted to an agricultural way of life, though the physical environment is such that he must make intelligent and substantial modifications of usual farming practice in order to suc- ceed; his problem is similar to that of the farmer in the semi-arid western states of Kansas, Nebraska, and Oklahoma, where by dry farming, with its special methods of water conservation, the dis- advantage of repeated drought is partly offset. The change from the old régime of the Czar, which ended in March 1917, to the present communistic, or Bolshevist, régime, was not im- mediate. The first step was the organization of a provisional gov- ernment under Kerensky, who continued to fight with the Allies against Germany and Austria until his government was over- thrown by the Bolshevists in November 1917. It was a failing venture from the first. The peasant did not hate Germany and was not interested in the war; he wanted land — the form of his government and its diplomatic and military policies interested him not at all. At first, he took up with the new and extreme policy of the Bolshevist leaders because they promised him land. The peasant would as readily have tolerated any other social or political theory. He has been as unwilling to fight for Bolshevists as for the Czar. In this respect he is to be sharply distinguished from the proletariat, the laboring classes of the towns, who sought to control the masses of peasant folk, reorganize the social life on a communistic basis, and by force impose social revolution and a theoric and alien form of govern- ment upon the peoples of the rest of the world. The war and its issues were left far behind. The Allies, no more willing to accept the dictatorship of the Russian Bolshevists than the military dictatorship and Kultur of Germany, parted company with Russia and stood thereafter in hostile, or at least neutral, relation to its unrepresenta- tive government. . BOLSHEVISM " Justifiable as the Revolution of 1917 proves to have been, Russia is in a most unfortunate condition today because, in changing from The peas- ant and the new régime 1 The name of the present Russian government is “The Russian Socialist Federal Soviet Republic.” The poison of Bolshe- vism 388 The New World Russia's losses Soviet industrial régime How the peasant looks at things one autocracy, that of the Czar, she has fallen into the hands of an- other autocracy, that of the Bolshevists, whose leaders, like the three wise men of Gotham, have attempted to go to sea in a bowl: & 6 6 Whither in your bowl so free?” “To rake the moon from out the sea.’” ... Bolshevism is the rule of society by a class, the “proletariat”; its methods destroy property — they do not create it. It has done more harm to Russia, materially and spiritually, than the World War did. Many of the most intelligent people, including teachers, doctors, and lawyers, have been killed. Thousands have fled to France, Great Britain, and the United States. Many others have been so long underfed and terrorized that they have no spirit left for a new time of peace and order, even if such a time should come soon. The actors, the writers, the investigators, are spiritually dead. For years to come these men will not produce a great play, a great novel, a great news- paper, a great university. Bolshevism has meant a step backward toward the barbarism of earlier times. Many persons believe that nothing less than the slavery of the masses will result from the latest labor regulations of the Bolshevist leaders. An Industrial General Staff with vast powers is at the head of the whole industrial organization of the country. The liberty of labor is stated to be an impossibility in a communistic state. Mili- tary discipline has been adopted, and the managers of workshops, appointed by the government, are given military rank and almost unlimited powers. If they desire, authorities may transfer men from one industry to another; if a worker does not lay brick to suit them, or handle tools to their satisfaction, he may be sent into agriculture or the mines. The peasants are less free than they were under the Czar. The Russian people may be sentimental and mystical, but they are also extremely practical. Lenin and Trotsky have used these qualities for their own ends; they could not succeed unless their new teach- ings were supported by very practical aims. Dividing the land was taken as a symbol of fraternity, but it also meant the gift of land, It was the sole proof that an era of good will had set in. Public debt. national honor, foreign relations — such terms are mere unintel- ligible words to most of the ignorant peasants. In their thought the world is divided between Russians and foreigners. - The American citizen speaks pretty directly through his congress- man. The Russian citizen proceeds through his soviet to provincial and regional congresses, which in turn lead up to the All-Russian The Political Geography of Russia 389 Congress of 1500 members, a central committee of 250, and thence through 17 commissars to the leaders, such as Lenin and Trotsky. So tortuous a channel of approach to authority would try the spirit of an educated people; to the Russian masses it presents impossible conditions of political navigation. MILITARY OPERATIONS SINCE 1917 Thrown into a state of general disorder, Russia found herself in 1919–1920 involved in not a single war, but a threefold war: (1) A war between the Bolshevists and the non Bolshevist ele- mentS (a) Within former Russia The Bolshevists have fought Denikin (southeastern Rus- sia and eastern Ukraine); Petlura (western Ukraine); the Poles; the Lithuanians; the Letts; the Esths; the army of Yudenitch; the Finns; Kolchak (Siberia); Wrangel (Crimea); etc. (b) External conflicts The Bolshevists have fought Allied armies on Russian soil in the Archangel region; in Siberia (Czechs, Ameri- cans, and Japanese); in Southern Russia (Rumanians and French). (2) A war between city and country The country is food-sufficient; the city is not. The city must supply the country with manufactured goods in exchange for food, and these materials of commerce the city could not get and deliver. With its function gone, it starved. (3) A war against banditry The returning soldiers took arms home with them. Many of them lived in organized bands that increased in num- bers and looted, burned, and devastated wherever they could. It will take a long time to get rid of them. Without any cohesion among the forces fighting the Bolshevist forces, there was a general circle of opposing armies that grew to large size by the middle of the summer of 1919. It was felt by nearly all the Allied powers that the extremely bad economic condition of Russia would soon bring about a collapse of Bolshevist rule, provided that outside military pressure was maintained. France was especially eager to achieve this result because of the declared opposition of the Soviet government to any plan of payment of the pre-war debt, held Russia's threefold War Fight against Bolshevism 390 * The New World Bolshevist Russia blockaded chiefly by French bankers. Nothing stiffened general Allied resistance so much as that part of the Bolshevist program which demanded the overthrow of the existing social and economic systems everywhere in the world. * Hoping to bring the Bolshevists to terms, oblige them to renounce their program of world conquest, and make a peace fair to their neighbors as well as to Russia, the Allies, in August 1919, sought to establish a semi-blockade, the principal features of which were as follows: (1) No clearance papers were to be issued from or to Bolshevist Russia; there was to be a land embargo of a similar nature; and no passports were to be given to travelers to or from Russia. (2) No banking business was to be transacted with Russia; and as far as possible all telegraphic and mail communications were to be stopped. Finding that this policy did not bring peace, the Allies, in the early months of 1920, adopted the principle of trade but not political recog- nition. Nothing practical came of this policy because the Soviet government insisted on combining trade agreements and political recognition. In the summer of 1920, after a rapid invasion of Russia as far as Kiev, the Polish armies were driven back and Poland itself was invaded by the Bolshevist armies. The terms which the Russian leaders sought to impose on Poland were so severe as practically to extinguish Poland, and the Allies supported the Poles with supplies and military leadership. In the ensuing struggle the Russian Soviet forces were thrown back far east of the border of ethnographic Poland (Fig. 167). The Soviet government thereupon agreed to peace negotiations at Riga, in Latvia, with the result that a truce and preliminary peace were signed between Poland and Russia early in October 1920 (page 335). By midsum- mer of 1920 military opposition to the Bolshevists developed in the Crimea, where General Wrangel, with French recognition and assis- tance, had reorganized the remnants of Denikin's army. It was partly owing to Wrangel's success that the Soviet government hurried its peace parleys with Poland and agreed to acceptable terms. A promising aspect of Wrangel's work was his agreement of 13 April 1920 with the Cossacks of the Don, which provided for their complete independence in domestic affairs and at least some measure of power in foreign relations that affect Cossack territories or people. With the The Political Geography of Russia 391 Poles eliminated, the Soviet army was concentrated on Wrangel, and in November 1920 all his forces were either driven out of the Crimea or captured. If the Allied and Associated Powers have repeatedly changed their policy toward Bolshevist Russia, it is also true that the Bolshevists likewise have changed their policies and views from time to time. Their present tendency appears to be toward a more moderate plan of government, though this change is interpreted by some students to mean only a respite in the war by which they expect ultimately to overwhelm the world. The dire calamities which Bolshevism has brought to Russia spring from deep-seated causes. It is im- portant to understand these to see how artificial the system would be if transplanted to countries with an economic and social life wholly different from that of Russia. ECONOMIC SITUATION In spite of government neglect and the natural rigors of the coun- try, the population of Russia is rapidly increasing. As in the case of Austria-Hungary, a political contest could have been avoided only by thorough reforms and the application of modern engineering skill. The reforms and the skill Russia's autocratic government could not supply, and one of the most serious questions confronting the coun- try today is whether her government, with its tendency toward communism and the leveling of classes — and particularly the level- ing of advantages — can ameliorate the conditions that formed the basis of the political troubles of the past. - Russia has always been in a low state of industrial development. Household industries, in response to the long and otherwise idle winter, are still maintained on a large scale (Figs. 196, 197), and trade by barter is on a greater scale than in any other civilized country of the world. Trade is still centered in part in village and city fairs of great commercial importance. More than 16,000 of these fairs are held in Russia, 85 per cent of them in European Russia. They are trading centers for the sale and in part for the exchange of goods, and like those that have been maintained in Latin America ever since the colonial period, they have retained not a little of the medieval aspect of the fair. - - In normal times more than 100,000 visitors attend the Nijni Nov gorod fair from 28 July to 7 September. The principal products dealt in are tea, raw cotton, furs, hides, woolen goods, undressed fur, camel's hair, iron and other metals. Low state of indus- trial de- velopment 392 The New World Imported Taw Ina- terials Disad- vantages of the navigable streams - III. Fig. 195. View of Nijni Novgorod and the fair across the Oka River. In the factories of the large cities, wages have hitherto been low, while the cost of production has been high on account of the nu- merous church holidays and the tendency of the Russian industrial worker to return to the land for the harvest season. A considerable quantity of the raw material for manufacture was imported, the rate of transportation was high, the industrial centers were far from the sea, capital and the higher grades of skilled labor had to come from abroad. In the absence of first-class roads and with few railroads until recent years, the streams and canals were the basis of transportation in large districts for a considerable part of the year. They have, however, only limited advantages. The great change in rainfall from summer to winter renders the streams unnavigable for part of the year, and The Political Geography of Russia 393 sº - w -ººrº-Lazzaga - * * Gulf 2. º A. A. Rºžº * X ׺f R. Sº 29 Hºw’ CY - - P :* º , ſº -º i” º so *N. jºggiº tºº y l, * § Kievº..” º X. º, Scale of miles \º wa Moe 200 300 • sº .. - / sºft e More than 1000 families -3. From 500 to 1000 x From 50 to 500 Fig. 196. Peasant industries: metals and minerals (upper panel). The rise of large in- dustries in Russia is a recent and limited development. The long winters of the central and northern portions and the poor roads have impelled the peasants to engage in industry locally and on a household scale. Compare with Figures 198 and 199. FIG. 197. Peasant industries: textiles (lower panel). Wood, leather, and other peasant industries show about the same distributions and form an interesting contrast in position and character with the mining and metal industries on a great scale that have developed in southern Russia, notably in the Donetz basin near the Black Sea. - all of them are frozen for a part of the year, – the Volga for nearly half the year in the north and for three months at Astrakhan on the Caspian Sea; the Don for more than 100 days on the average; the Dnieper for the same period; the Dvina for about 125 days; and the Vistula at Warsaw for more than two months. Russia is still poorly served by railroads, and what is almost equally bad, her rolling stock (especially her locomotives) has been all but used up, first in the World War, and later in the civil war of the 394 The New World. Present state of transpor- tation Old land- OWIAEIS driven from Russia Seizure of lands in other parts of Europe Bolshevists. According to official figures of the Soviet government, nearly half the capacity of the freight trains is filled with coal or wood or oil for the locomotives themselves, a quarter is filled with war materials, and a tenth with confiscated goods, leaving only a small percentage for trade. More than half the locomotives are defective; all railways are operated with a huge deficit. River transportation has been greatly reduced. As coal production has dropped nearly one half, the government permits forest cutting along both railways and navigable rivers. Only grain production has increased, but the crop cannot be utilized on account of the wretched transport conditions. Having much food to distribute and coarse bulky products, such as hay and lumber, Russia needs to develop her railways and canals. A normal deficiency of food occurs over three fourths of European Russia and must be made good by imports from southern Russia or from outside countries (Fig. 200). PRESENT PHASES OF THE QUESTION OF LAND TENURE In the old régime the land-owning mobility held the mass of the people in subjection, controlled the army and the courts, and kept tight hold on the local government. The revolution swept away this long-established type of feudalism and drove the aristocracy not only from their estates but also from Russia. The estates were divided up. The seizure of the landed estates of the nobility was part of a gen- eral European movement, for the same thing happened in Hungary, Poland, Czecho-Slovakia, Italy, and Rumania. In these countries laws were passed compelling the owners to sell all but a moderate share of their lands. In Poland the peasants could secure their object only by joining the Socialists of the towns, but this alliance will not last long, for, in every respect except their attitude toward the land- owners, the radicals of the towns are the exact opposite of the conserva- tive peasant class. In Italy, on the other hand, there were violent disorders in October and November of 1919, as a result of the peasants’ forcible seizure of the land. In Germany the big landowners have until 1921 in which to sell their estates. The process of division of large estates is going on in the Ukraine also, in the Baltic Provinces, and in Rumania. A great landholding nobility, long politically pow- erful, has lost its monopoly of the soil of eastern and central Europe. Thus both the democratic and the nationalist movements of central and eastern Europe have had a strong socialistic background. In the peasant class we may find the steadiest force of the future commonwealths of Russia, Hungary, Poland, and Czecho-Slovakia. The Political Geography of Russia 395 Once they have the land that they have long desired, once they own property and require laws to protect it, once they have their own products to market, the peasants will desire a steady government and individual ownership of property instead of the communism of the Bolshevists. THE SEPARATION OF THE BORDER PEOPLES When Russia became Bolshevist the border peoples everywhere broke away from the central government, organized local govern- ments, and sought to win recognition as independent sovereign states. The people of each region had long felt that their provincial problems were neglected by the former central government, and, infected by the general unrest and disorder of the World War, they sought a change of authority. The Bolshevist leaders were willing to sign with Ger- many the treaty of Brest-Litovsk in 1918, which withdrew Russian sovereignty from the Baltic Provinces, thus recognizing the measurably non-Russian character of the Esths and Letts as well as of the Finns, Lithuanians, and Poles. That treaty was denounced by Germany in the armistice of 11 November 1918, but the action of the Bolshevist government is significant in the history of later attempts of these border peoples to lead an independent national life. Of equal signifi- cance is the recognition by the Soviet government in May 1920 of the “Far-Eastern Democratic Republic” of Siberia, and its expressed desire to conclude commercial and political agreements. The following table gives the area, population, and degree of ethnic Peasant class a steadying force Nature of . the border States purity of the groups (exclusive of Finland and Poland) that have broken away from Russia in Europe and Transcaucasia: AREA IN SQ. M.I. PopULATION #. Esthonia . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 1,750,000 93 Latvia e e s - e º e º e s e º 'º 25,000 2,400,000 70 Lithuania' . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 2,500,000 66 Ukraine” . . . . . . . . . . . º 200,000 30,000,000 70 Kuban . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,000 3,500,000 - North Caucasia . . . . . . . . . . 58,000 4,300,000 - Azerbaijan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,000 4,000,000 75 Georgia . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,000 2,000,000 75 Armenia (Russian Armenia only) . . . . . 25,000 1,500,000 50 Russia may become stronger politically for the loss of her subject * Figures for Lithuania exclude the Vilna area and adjacent country in dispute with Poland. * Attempted separation repeatedly. 396 The New World /* 7's ſº “...aº r- / POPULATION DENSITY Under 10 Under 25 #1:::::::: º: *::: º 10 – 25 § 25 – 64 • . * * * 25 – 50 64 – 128 SNSºś º & 50 – 75 |28 – 192: ń. :::::::::::\ . º *3. § 75 — 100 192 – 256 3.N.K. §§ Over 100 ºn Over 256 sº N strºssº, i-S$º * f... • N §§§):g: > §§ §§ SS §§§ .2 ". . . ** * * w N.N. N.NNRN SY.' ...N.T.V. Z:. lºSNS$$$$ sº ::::::fl:S.p.ſ.º.º.º. §§§s & *"...º... .º.A:::::: . §§§. "... tºº.".::… . . §: ..º.º.º.SS$$$ S. - -- R_*". * . . . . . .Y......SN N - . . . . . . . . . . . . ." § Ş. º:S * Nº. §§ SN §§§§§§ SSº ::::$º º §§ N §§§SS ſº N. . . . . . A % §: § Ş N N NSSSSSN N % §§ O # % H& N º Ø ŞNS SS N Nº NNR-R N. : NS*SSRNRSV. $3 ŞRSSSSSSN ŠNº. º §§ NSN N § N&SNNS: S$ 2 NRSS S&SNS ºśćy" º º Cº % Ø\º NS § ... • §§% §§§§ºž &Sº 3&S$3.3% 2% º N § % - §§§ º N - - * - :. §§§ NS St. ": . . * § §º 50 & » 㺠% º - º a-v) tº • nºvº Nº-sº : º § % % £ºes; Ç 40 * TG ŠSNS$3&Sy §§ §§ §§ NN N £32 **** Ş §§§º NYº *NSS §§§ º 9 soo ğ. 3|-} 40 415 2NS •S s 55 crºtºw FIG. 198. The distribution of population densities in European Russia as in 1910 according to Petermanns, Mitteilungen, 1913, I, Pl. 2, and Romer, Atlas géographique et statistique de la Pologne, 1916. Note the effect of withdrawing Poland, the Baltic Provinces, Finland, the Ukraine, and Transcaucasia. The boundaries of the different governments of pre-war Russia are shown by fine dotted lines; the capitals are given in each case, without parentheses if the population exceeds 100,000, with parentheses if under 100,000. races, the Poles, the Finns, the Georgians, the Letts, the Esths, and the Lithuanians; the struggle of these peoples for freedom threatened the unity and institutions of the Russian state. The freedom-seeking peoples within the borders of the former Russian Empire were more democratic than their rulers, the Russian nobility. When they became free they discarded the rule of a medieval caste for the ballot of a The Political Geography of Russia 397 modern state, but their political strength and their ability to create favorable economic conditions remain to be proved. Working against the union of the fragments of former Russia is the nature of the land itself. In Siberia, for instance, broad mountains and plateaus (the Yablanoi and Stanavoi ranges) cross the region in the neighborhood of Lake Irkutsk and separate the lower Amur provinces from western Siberia; the trans- Siberian railroad cuts across them, but one railroad is too slender a thread to unite governments and people so widely different in op- portunity and in contact with the outside world. The chief rivers of Siberia flow northward to an ice-choked sea, accessible only from the west. Working towards separation is the desire of each section to profit by the special resources in its possession. Thus the Republic of Georgia produces 44 per cent of the world's manganese and wishes to profit by it, and a similar motive animates the Azerbaijan Tatars, who produce 13 per cent of the world's oil in the Baku region and do not wish to share the benefits with the rest of Russia. If union can be effected at all, it will be only by forming the scat- tered parts into a loose confederation that will guarantee that the needs of the local groups, or county governments, shall be met, while protecting the larger interests to which every state is com- mitted, especially in regard to foreign trade. The growth of coöperative societies in Russia is an extraordinary expression of the community spirit for a country in which more than 80 per cent of the population are illiterate. In the last forty years the number of societies has increased from less than 400 to nearly 50,000, with a total enrollment of 20,000,000 heads of families. But for these societies the economic needs of the Russian people could not have been met at all. Their work is based upon the principle of ex- change of raw materials for manufactured goods. They take the place, to a large degree, of the middleman class of other countries. Given peace and a restoration of foreign trade, Russia may quickly gain a place as a great trading nation through the development of her large coöperative unions. - The Transcaucasian peoples have broken away from the main mass of Russians and possess nominal independence (pp. 450–461). Theo- , retically, Georgia and Armenia are republics. The high snowy wall of the Caucasus separates them from the wheat-growing Cossacks of the Kuban, southeast of the Sea of Azov. The Caspian and Black seas are their natural frontiers east and west. In the valley lowland between the Caucasus and the Armenian plateau we have a thoroughfare for Physical diversity of the Russian Empire Transcau- casian peoples 398 The New World Possibility of a Black Sea Con- federation Russian extension into Asia a thing of the past Economic COI Se- quences of Ukrainian separation commerce for trans-Caspian or Russian Turkestan, an outlet for the manganese of Georgia and the rich oil fields of Baku. Inhabited by small nations the region would not be an outpost of Russian imperial designs on the Persian Gulf or on Alexandretta in the Mediterranean, where Anatolia and Syria meet. Even if the whole of former Russia should not unite into a com- mon empire, there is a real possibility of a Black Sea federation, be- cause of the common interests of the Ukraine, the Don, and the Kuban. The three wish to have : (1) Access to Black Sea ports. (2) Free use of the Dardanelles. (3) Strong defense against disorder. . (4) Technical help and loans from foreign powers. (5) Free inter-regional trade. - - The Kuban produces rice, wheat, wool, tobacco, and copper; the Ukraine sends to the Don and the Kuban corn, sugar, flour, and iron and steel products. Free interstate commerce is a real necessity, whatever political ties may be developed. A Siberian and a Turkestan confederation are other possibilities, but of them nothing definite can be said at this time. - The future international problems of Russia cannot be forecast clearly, but if the government becomes in truth democratic, the long struggle with England in central Asia will probably not be revived. In Mongolia and Tibet, in Persia and Afghanistan, in Caucasia and at Constantinople, the Russian has been pressing forward for three hundred years, and no system of government can stand that denies him proper commercial outlets. His slogan has been “a warm-water port.” That explains his reaching out in the Far East to Vladivostok, which proved not to be ice-free in winter; it explains his effort to reach the head of the Persian Gulf, where he was blocked by the British; it explains the development of the Murman coast, where a branch of the northern Atlantic warm-water drift keeps Alexandrovsk, north of the Arctic Circle, open even in winter; it explains the strug- gle with Turkey and the west-European powers for Constantinople. The advantage of reorganizing the Russian realm on the lines of a great confederation instead of allowing it to break up indefinitely is most clearly seen when we consider the economic and geographical effects of withdrawing the southern region — a possibility involved in the Ukrainian movement. As originally delimited in 1918, the Republic of the Ukraine would have an area of 20,000 square miles and a popula- tion, chiefly Ukrainian, of about 30,000,000 (page 224), out of a total of The Political Geography of Russia 899 Cultivated or arable lands COVer - less than 10% 10 30 % 30 50 % 50 70 % _ over 70% of the total area 22 % % sº ſº % à º \º º \ . Y * ~! {" Boundaries of governments in which #he area under whéaſ (or rye) exceeds /5 % of 7%e fora/ area (e ---Southern boundary of governmán's in which shafe ſands &over more f^an ... .. 50% of f/he fora/ area. Scale of miles too so o too 200 3oo 3 kJ 35 * 40 Fig. 199. Wheat and rye, cultivated and arable lands of European Russia. Compare with Figure 191. Poland, Finland, the Caucasus region, and western Siberia are omitted. From maps in La Russie à la fin du 19° siècle, Paris, 1900. 100,000,000 for all European Russia (Fig. 180). This means that the Ukraine includes 15 per cent of the area of European Russia and 30 per cent of the population. Its population density is 150 to the square mile, as compared with 70 per cent for European Russia. In European Russia about 25 per cent of the land is arable and 40 per cent is woodland; but in the Ukraine the arable land constitutes 65 per cent and the woodland 10 per cent of the total area (forests, 3 per cent). The Ukraine is the garden of Russia, a pleasant, warm 400 The New World 50 35 55 R U S S 1 A EXCESS AND DEFICIENCY OF GRAIN PRODUCTION “ (Average of 1908-1912) 6overnments producing wheat, rye, º; and corn (combined) to supply the following percentages of their population : 0 - %33)- || 782,& §§gº R iðau) & \" ~ N §§§ §§ 799 e *- - sº : §§ . . º § :::: Nº. sº §§§§§§ § * : : sº 3s § * §§§ Roºt. : º - 2–~~ §§ *$ y - of . S Š Nº:: - O .5 E Ş S W S$ § §§ §§§ S #S$ &N &% 38.3% 774.3%; (Kutais §§§ :*:Sº sº. Sº . * > . - %:::::: § • * * * * * * * ~ ‘S. . . . . **ś: \ſº • 35 49 $15 FIG. 200. The chief cereal supply of European Russia. A belt having neither marked excess nor deficiency trends northeastward from northern Rumania to the Urals and scparates a huge northwestern cereal-deficient tract dependent upon the southern Ukraine, the Don region, and the Taurida northwest of the Caucasus. The map suggests one of the grave problems of the rest of Russia should the Ukraine become independent. The figures give the average annual per capita production for each government. The average annual consumption of the four grains mapped is about 800 pounds a person. southland quite unlike the northern half of the country. It pro- duces 40 per cent of the wheat of the whole empire, 50 per cent of the barley, and more than 80 per cent of the sugar. In addition it produces two thirds of the tobacco of European Russia. Its grain crop in 1919. in spite of disturbed conditions, was one third larger than in peace times, The Political Geography of Russia 401 Fig. 201. Part of the harbor of Odessa, the chief Russian port on the Black Sea. The Ukraine also has very valuable deposits of coal and iron ore. Nearly 70 per cent of Ukrainian coal comes from the Donetz basin, which is located partly in Ekaterinoslav and partly in the Don terri- tory. These two regions together (Donetz and Don) yield 90 per cent of the total coal production in European Russia, exclusive of Poland. The Ukraine exports coal to Austria by way of the Danube and to Turkey by way of the Black Sea ports. Of its exports 83 per cent (by weight) pass through Black Sea ports. About three fourths of the iron ore produced in Russia comes from the Ukraine, chiefly about Ekaterinoslav and the province of Kherson. Though the Ukraine comprises about 10 per cent of the former terri- tory of European Russia, it has 25 per cent of the railway mileage. These figures for crops, coal and iron production, export, and railway mileage, show in a striking way the dependence of the central and northern parts of Russia upon the Ukraine for food, fuel, and access to the sea. The Ukraine is dependent, but not to an equal degree, upon the rest of Russia. It needs the oil of Baku, the timber of the northern forests, the dairy products of Siberia, the cotton of Trans- caucasia and Turkestan. Russia would be a far stronger country if it held together instead of breaking up into fragments. While its eco- nomic conditions make the Ukraine a fairly self-dependent unit empha- Interde- pendence of the Ukraine and the rest of Russia 402 The New World Tribal organiza- tion of the people Their enmity toward the Turks sized by its geographical situation and character, it has never had political unity, and its people do not form a distinct and homogeneous nation. There is no distinctive social and cultural type. These facts were clearly seen when the Ukrainian government began to function after the fall of the first democratic government under Kerensky in 1917. Division and conflict began at once to sap the national strength. A western Ukrainian Republic under Petlura was organized and op- posed Poles in the west, Bolshevists in the northeast, and the central Ukrainian government on the southeast. Later the central Ukrainian government disappeared and Petlura joined the Poles against the Bolshevists. In case of the complete defeat of Soviet authority, the policy of the Poles and the French would probably be to favor the creation of a separate Ukrainian state and thus reduce the strength and the chances of future Russian aggression. THE COUNTRY OF THE DON COSSACKS Still another group that favored a separatist movement and that is of great geographical and political interest is formed by the Don Cossacks, who live in southeastern Russia in a province divided by the Don River. The country is in general level. It is the transition region in climate and products between Asia and Europe. The soil east of the Don River is more suitable for grazing than for farming. The soil west of the Don is a deep, black, rich loam. The river itself is not navigable except for small craft. There are important deposits of coal, iron, and salt. tº The people are of Tatar origin and originally lived by fishing, hunt- ing, and plundering. It is only recently that they have become stock raisers and farmers. They own a higher percentage of live stock than any other group in the former Russian Empire. There are also 20,000 fishermen on the Sea of Azov and the lower Don. Wherever the soil was tilled, the labor was done by serfs. The Cossacks themselves disdained agriculture. They had a loose tribal organization which involved an assembly that determined questions of war and peace, and elected officers, including a headman, or het- Iſlall. In the 17th and 18th centuries the relations between the Cossacks and the Russians, which had been marked by mutual ill will, became closer because of their common interest in fighting the Turk on the northern coast of the Black Sea and in the Caucasus. There is an army of about 25,000 Cossacks in the Don Province in peace times, but five or six times this number may be called out. They are all The Political Geography of Russia 403 good horsemen and fight admirably in the old-fashioned way, but not against modern artillery and in prolonged campaigns. The total population of the country of the Don Cossacks is about 4,000,000, of which 67 per cent are Great Russian and 28 per cent Ukrainian. During the civil war of the Bolshevist régime they have formed an independent unit, fighting first under the leadership of Kolchak, then of Denikin, and later coöperating with Wrangel. Their local successes were due to the nature of the fighting, which was carried on in flat, open country where horsemen have an advan- tage over foot soldiers. THE SIBERIAN REALM An important feature of the character of the Russian people is their ready adaptation to new conditions. This quality has exhibited itself throughout Russian history. Successive waves of population swept across European Russia in the 7th, 8th, and 9th centuries of our era, and one may say that the entire population consisted of pioneers experimenting under new conditions. There went on during this period a process of ethnic absorption and modification, until there was evolved the Slav type of the present day, fairly uni- form in racial quality in later times. The Russian has always been able to become farmer, tradesman, hunter, fisherman, or cattle breeder, without losing the community organization that more than any other thing characterizes his life. This adaptability to circumstances has made him a successful explorer and colonist and has been one of the most powerful agencies of empire. In recent years the Russian colonizing movement has been most effective in Siberia. A narrow belt of European population has been thrown right across Siberia for 4000 miles from Omsk to Vladi- vostok (Fig. 203). With its 13,000,000 people, the region is so im- portant to the future of Russia that its historical development as well as its economic and political problems deserve special consideration. Up to the 16th century, Siberia was not safe for the settler or the traveler. Trade across it was from point to point through tribal territory, and continued thus until the subjugation of the southern region, first by the Turks and then by the Russians. By the early 17th century, after repeated efforts and failures by others, Yermak, a Russian Cossack explorer, had opened wide the door to the Orient and made possible the acquisition by Russia in later years of the vast Siberian realm, that includes a fourth of all Asia. For Russia the work of Yermak marks the beginning of a new epoch. By 1630 the Denikin’s . army of Cossack soldiers Russian power of adaptation Early Russian Conquests in Siberia 404 The New World Russia’s period of scientific exploration Spread of colonists and exiles Poor fa- cilities for export of products Russians claimed to be masters of the Yenisei. In 1638 tea was first imported from China. By 1643 the Cossacks had reached Lake Baikal, and by 1656 they had reached the Bering Sea, every step ac- companied by hardship. There followed a fierce contest with the Manchurians for the possession of the Amur country, which ended in 1688 with Russian colonists firmly planted on China's northern frontier. - In 1658 Russia seized the Amur, and by the treaty of Aigun the Amur was made the boundary between the Russian and Chinese empires. In 1733 came the expedition of Bering and Chirikov, who discovered the mainland of North America, the Aleutian Islands, and the Kuriles north of Japan. There followed great activity in trade and trapping. Just before 1800 the Russian-American Company was organized, with enormous privileges. With the Russians firmly planted in eastern Siberia, the power of the Mongol-Tatar hordes was forever broken. If western civiliza- tion held back the Slavic hordes, the latter in turn defended western Europe from further Mongol invasion. To Russia, the advance into Siberia was the opening of an epoch as important for her as the dis- covery of America and the opening of the water route to India were to the western powers. - Colonists and criminals were sent into Siberia to establish settle- ments around the fortresses, to work in the mines, and to guard the fur-trade routes. In the 16th and 17th centuries these movements of colonists and prisoners or exiles became an established custom. The first Siberian prisoners were sent out in 1593, and at about the same time state aid was given to a first group of farmer colonists. The census of 1897 gave Siberia 300,000 prisoners out of a total pop- ulation of 5,700,000. Of the present total of 13,000,000 population, 9,000,000 are Russians. In the past twenty-five years the popula- tion of Siberia has doubled. In the early 19th century, Russian state settlers began to go into the region in large numbers, and they are increasing faster than the total by about one fifth. The 6000- mile trans-Siberian railway was pushed to completion in 1904, not only for the purpose of defense but also in order to get colonists into Siberia. - Figure 203 shows the distribution of Russian settlements in Siberia and their close connection with the trans-Siberian railroad and its branches. However, in spite of the railroad, the conditions of trans- portation are still exceedingly difficult. The freight rates are high, and the markets of the Far East and of Europe, which furnish the only The Political Geography of Russia 405 Fig. 202. Russian colonists emigrating to Siberia. outlet for the grain, dairy products, etc., of Siberia, are far distant. As a result the development of the country is still slow, in spite of the fact that the quantity of grain produced is almost double the amount consumed. Grain and dairy products are produced in huge quantities in the Arctic pastures and prairies of the northern section, just at the edge of the ...” great taigá, or forest belt; cotton is the chief commercial crop of the southern section in Turkestan, where irrigation is developing to give life to the desert country beyond the Caspian. Just before the World War, great trading companies had started a regular fleet of nearly eighty steamers on the Siberian rivers and had brought out butter, furs, lumber, etc., in huge quantities; they had demonstrated the possibilities of the Arctic route to Siberia, a thing that Nansen, the Arctic explorer, had long advocated. With the revolution of 1917 in Russia, Siberia broke up into groups. Political Soviet committees were formed in all the important centers and º, included all classes, even bankers and business men. At first the system worked well, because it was democratic and there was no violence; but soon opposition “soviets” appeared. Democratic re- publics were organized in many places. With the coming into power of the Bolshevists, eastern Siberia fell into disorder, until the military 406 - The New World Objects of revolu- tionary groups in Siberia expedition of the Allies into eastern Siberia quieted the region and Admiral Kolchak on the west gained control of the border. With the defeat of Kolchak late in 1919 disorder again became general, and no coherent authority is now exercised. A republic of Eastern Siberia has been organized, but its power will be feeble so long as it has no effective railway connection with Europe and so long as Japan holds Vladivostok, the eastern Com- mercial outlet of Siberia. In European Russia the land question had been one of the bases of revolutionary agitation for many years, and with the passing of the old régime, the reform of the land tenure system became a part of the Soviet program. In contrast with this situation is the absence of a land question in Siberia. Hence the Soviet government was able to organize in Siberia local governments sympathetic towards it, not for the usual reasons, but for the reason that Siberia is composed of frontier peoples who had always striven for local self-government of the Zemstvo type, as promised by the Czar in 1905. This promise has now been repeated by the Soviet government, but there is no substance to the promise, since there is no unity among the Siberian people as to the practical form that local self-government shall take, and there is likewise as yet no uniformity or stability in the AFGHANISTAN º too o -- sº º sº. : ºf º º {sº ,” SAE i E-S-Sº; - it tº-fi hi-2->– ar 120 - 2-&S FIG. 203. The field of settlement of Russian colonists in Siberia according to the Atlas of Asiatic Russia, 1914. Note the scattered settlements in dry Turkestan and the continuity of settle- ments in the belt of heavier rainfall on the margin of forest and grassland farther north (Fig. 204). si § : ,41% Çı º *†, % - IP E R S I A ( º 100 200 Z / - Scale of Miles' i AFG HANISTA 300 400 Bop * sº ::::::…” Nº. |||||||| *::::: &yyy cotton. * = &rozz, c copper -———— main railroads * . N head of river sugar beet N f/ar aſſº coat! 1. &ead. J. Jºoz%ºJº . dairy products <2 silk =ºxegetº?” * & petroleum. z zz/2c ºw- boundaries A= fisheries 6.9 tobacco # *. Galt, x gold ;&#.º:3.% FIG. 204. Sketch map of the economic resources of the Russian Empire as of 1914. Based on Unstead, Bartholomew, Scobel, and others. From the Geographical Review, April 1916. 408 The New World Great size of Siberia and great extent of its frontier º- - - - - Fig. 205. Samoyeds of the island of Nova Zembla, a Russian possession in the Arctic. Russia's northern country for the most part is inhabited by primitive peoples of which this is one type. Soviet government itself. Siberia is without leaders. Its people are interested in the discussion of theories of government, but only a few are sufficiently educated to work out practical measures, and there is also a large proportion of lawless people who make the organization of life and government still more difficult. - Siberia is a country difficult to control at best. Its area is 4,832,000 square miles, excluding the Transcaspian, Turkestan, and steppe provinces, or 6,294,000 square miles if we include these provinces. Thus in size it is far greater than the United States, and it is more difficult of access than northern Canada. The length of the Russian- Chinese boundary is 4700 miles; the northern coast line from Kara Bay to Bering Strait is about 10,000 miles long; the length of the eastern coast line on the Pacific is nearly 8400 miles. To guard the excessively long and remote frontiers, partly in the north, partly in the mountains, is a problem of first importance, and but for the fact that long stretches of the frontier are yet uninhabited, effective government control could not be exercised. CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR CONSTANTINOPLE AND ITS THOROUGHFARE THERE are four cities, it is said, that belong to all men rather than to the people of one nation — Rome, Athens, Jerusalem, and Con- stantinople. All four are closely related to Mediterranean history. The capture of each one of them at one time or another has been a turning point in human affairs. Their temples have seen the growth of powerful religious influences. Their streets have echoed more than once to the tramp of armies bent on conquest far beyond “the rim of the known world.” Constantinople is one of the most beautiful cities in the world and has a history full of color and tragedy and romantic adventure. Jason sailed past the site of it in his search for the Golden Fleece. From the days of Xerxes and of Alexander the Great down to its capture in 1453 by the Turks, it was a point of great military interest. For nearly a thousand years it was one of the chief centers of culture and the capital of the Byzantine, or Eastern, Empire. Its natural defenses are very strong. Napoleon believed that its possession was worth half an empire. Even under the handicaps of Turkish rule Constantinople remained a great port. Its position at the crossroads of Europe and Asia enabled it, down to recent times, to profit enormously from the trade of southern Russia, the Transcaucasus, Persia, and Mesopotamia, and also, in earlier years, from the overland trade of Inner Asia, India, and the Far East. Through it ran a part of the Berlin-Bagdad rail- way line, by which Germany expected to control the Near East and the road to India. As a commercial thoroughfare for eastern products, the Constanti- nople region has now only a limited value. A large part of the com- merce of the Straits — that is, both the Dardanelles and the Bos- porus (Fig. 207) — passes the door of the city but does not enter it. While its historical position as a focus of sea and land roads is still maintained, the development of ocean commerce in modern times and the possibilities, supplied by the Suez Canal (opened in 1869), of an all-sea road from Persia and India to western Europe, have greatly diminished its importance in this respect. It has profited little from the rapid development of Black Sea lands during the past hundred and fifty years. Southwestern Russia, in that period, was transformed from a pastoral to an agricultural realm, rich in cereals. Cities grew marvelously; industries sprang up; oil and manganese Constanti- nople one of four world cities Historic setting of the city Only a small part of the trade of the Bos- porus sent through Constanti- nople • 409 º 410 The New World - ------ ºs- - * * * º - ------ºº: * * * * - - º - * --- - -ºº Aº º *-*sº - ºº-º-º-º: - º ºr ºº - * * * * * *-*. * ~~ - º - - - - - - - FIG. 206. General view were exported in large quantities. From 70 to 90 per cent of the total exports of these products went by way of the Straits. But in just the proportion that these lands became economically strong, Constantinople — the gateway of southern Russia — gained in political and military importance. For centuries it was one of the settled aims of intelligent Russians, as well as of Russian rulers, to gain possession of the city; and religious motives were added to commercial reasons: Constantinople was the city from which Russia got her religion. The pressure of the Russians was first exerted against the Greeks (for example, in the 10th century), and after 1453 against the Turks. In 1878 Russian soldiers were almost within sight of the minarets of Constantinople. In 1914 it was promised to Russia by the Allies if they should win the war. It is the only “warm” port and one of the three “open” ports that Russia could expect to have. The others are Vladivostok in eastern Siberia (Fig. 244) and Alexandrovsk on the Murman coast of the Arctic (Fig. 90)." Russian desire for Constanti- nople *At Riga the period of ice blockade is reduced to one month by the use of ice-breakers. Vladivostok, though called an “open port,” is closed for a short period in extreme winter weather; hence, in part, the struggle for Dairen (Port Dalny) during the Russo-Japanese War. Constantinople and Its Thoroughfare 411 --- - º - -- - _- - - - Ilºilº ill-ill- of Constantinople. constantinople's PLACE IN THE PAN-GERMAN schEME It was during the period of rapid growth of Black Sea commerce Growth of from 1880 to 1914 that there was developed in Germany a policy which . went under the name of Pan-Germanism and which was fostered by the and eco- military party and the Hohenzollerns. It sought to achieve many im- ..." perial objects, among which was the control of the richlands of the Near East as a source of raw material for the crowded industrial districts of Germany. In 1898 the German Emperor visited Damascus, Jerusalem, and Constantinople, making his visit the occasion for the furthering of Pan-German aims. From that time until the opening of the war in 1914, Germany pressed the construction of the Berlin-Bagdad railway as part of a general scheme for reaching into subtropical lands and controlling a larger share of the world's raw materials. She aimed to build the Bagdad railway to the head of the Persian Gulf, whence she could divert the commerce of India and the Far East. The Bagdad railway and its branches were her means of reaching the copper of the Taurus Mountains in southwestern Armenia, and of bringing out the tobacco, fruits, cotton, and wool of Meso- potamia and Kurdistan in return for manufactured articles from German mills. 412 The New World German goods in competi- tion with those of England and France Free use of the Straits of interest to many powers German enterprise was highly successful, and German imports into the Turkish Empire rose from 6 per cent in 1887 to 21 per cent in 1910; those of Austria from 13 per cent to 21 per cent. During the same time the imports of English goods fell from 60 per cent to 35 per cent, and of French goods from 18 per cent to 11 per cent of the total. German business men from 1908 to 1911 obtained very im- portant concessions for the port of Alexandretta and for the building of a line from Bagdad to Basra, in territory of great strategic impor- tance to India and the Far East and in relation to the politics and com- merce of the Mohammedan world (Fig. 23). In 1913 General Liman Von Sanders headed a German military mission at Constantinople which thereafter practically controlled the Ottoman army. The latest struggle for Constantinople began early in the World War. It led to the disastrous Gallipoli expedition of the Allies against the Turks in 1915–1916; and after the defeat of this expedition and the entry of Bulgaria into the war, direct railway connection was established from Berlin to Constantinople, thence across Ana- tolia and via the tunnel through the Taurus Mountains to the head of the Gulf of Alexandretta, and again through the tunnel that pierces the Amanus range to Aleppo and eastward to Nisibin. Germany did not relinquish her hold of the Bagdad line until the end of the war. She furnished supplies and ammunition for the Turkish armies operating in Palestine, which armies the Allied forces (chiefly British) could dislodge only by building another line from El Kantara in Egypt northeastward through the Sinai desert to Gaza, and thence to a connection with Jerusalem. - ELEMENTS AFFECTING THE SETTLEMENT OF THE CONSTANTINOPLE QUESTION - It was natural that the people of the other three world-cities, men- tioned on page 409, should be greatly concerned in the fate of Con- stantinople. Italy has a traditional friendship for Rumania, which she can reach directly only by passing Constantinople. The Jews of Palestine, and likewise the Syrians and Armenians, farther north, watched with intense interest the fate of Constantinople in the World War; the capture of the city by the Allies, it was believed, would free all the oppressed peoples of the Turkish Empire. Greece has long hoped to restore to the protection of the home- land those Greeks who live in all the fair lands bordering the Black and Mediterranean seas (Fig. 158). She could never relinquish the Constantinople -and Its Thoroughfare 413 ►'80.1Aęs go &quºiq aqq ſuqkueduloooº sďgūI uroly soțiepunog ’000’000’I : I (đaur geng lºººººÐ Rº!!!Jº tuoig ºpeo.Iſſºg '000'000'e : I ‘ºwº?đo lnq quºyao, ſ ºp ønbyſsynºwym ga ønſſyuqqa aquo;O ‘ſuņso@y puē ‘gigſ ‘000,00gºſ š Ť Ťăguroțuqqa gens IºººººÐ "{$ſuº grouy &qđerāouqſ, (191 ørnāſā oos sąſajºs eqq yo’ auoz aqq oq uoņator uſ uoſão, eurKurs aqą go sapiepūñoğ№tį, ioſºsaſarįš9ųQ JO ºvºz ºſº Pub ºídouņueņsuoO ſo soțiepunoq Aøu aqq 04 uoņaſal uſ “eſdouņuansuoo pue oog IqL uransa, jo uopāør øqį uț suoįſpūooöfuqqaſ*/03 ºſôIJI ·p!- SpeOu||ex} Aaſını pue (#IGI u ti -------- eļueºļng uæMqaq \G16|| Jo Kuepunog sºļJepunoq ļuasa JJ sugļue3ļngĒ sººlºg 414 The New World Greek wish to have ownership of Con- stantinople Changes in the popu- lation of the city thought that her thousand years’ possession of Constantinople had given her the strongest historical claim. Greeks form the largest element in the Christian population of the city. The war of Greek Independence (1821–1829) had for one of its objects the re-creation of a Byzantine Empire, including Constantinople. But the Greeks are not experienced governors of alien people. To be sure, in the colonial period Greece had settlements from one end of the Mediter- ranean to the other; and like most other peoples the Greeks wish to see their ancient glories restored. Of course that can not be done without ignoring the ancient glories of other equally worthy states whose claims overlap those of the Greeks. If the risk of war is ever to be seriously diminished, rival nations will have to give up the idea of a restoration of ancient glories by force of arms. Constantinople is a rich city to hold; and it will grow rapidly with the development of its tributary regions. Its growth would be stimu- lated by the construction of a tunnel or bridge — or both — from one side of the Bosporus to the other. The Bosporus is only 2000 feet across at the narrowest point, or less than half the distance spanned by the Brooklyn Bridge or the Eads Bridge at St. Louis. In addition to the 150,000 Greeks, there are 400,000 Turks in Constantinople, and less than 150,000 Armenians, besides 50,000 Jews, as well as Kurds and other Asiatics. Greeks and Armenians are almost certain to increase their city populations. Both peoples are traders, and the Greeks are also famous sailors. Allied control of Constantinople and the Straits will favor Greek influence there and throughout the Near East, where within the next fifty years the Greeks have a chance of becoming a powerful people. Constantinople was the last stronghold in Europe of the Turks, who had taken it forty years before Columbus sailed for America. For four and a half centuries the Turk has been astride one of the world's chief thoroughfares of commerce. The Mediterranean and its eastern approaches in the region of Constantinople have becn called the moat between Christianity and Islam. It was a moat that had been crossed at but two places, Constantinople and Gibraltar (Fig. 23). In modern times we have thought of Constantinople as a Turkish city; but, as we have seen, it was the capital of the Eastern Chris- tian Church for more than a thousand years, before the Turk came. There is no absolutely vital connection between the Mohammedan religion and Constantinople. On the other hand, the head of the Greek Church, called the Patriarch, lives there and signs himself Constantinople and Its Thoroughfare 415 Archbishop of Constantinople. To be sure, the Sultan declared him- self to be the supreme head of the Mohammedan religion, but this assertion was not agreed to by all the Mohammedans themselves. Mecca has always been their religious capital. In actual practice the Sultan delegated his religious power to the Sheikh-Ul-Islam, and every Moslem law or decision was supposed to be confirmed by him; but the Arab chiefs of Mecca, Medina, Bagdad, Smyrna, Yemen, and Asir never acknowledged this ruling. It was jealousy among the great powers that kept the Turk so long in Constantinople. No power wanted to see another in con- trol of the strategic gateway of the Bosporus. This jealousy is in large part the basis of the present settlement. In many respects the policies of France and Great Britain are directly opposed to each other here, as well as elsewhere in the Near East. For example, the British would like to see the Greeks stay in Smyrna, because it would put not only the Smyrna region but its Turkish hinterland under the influence of the British fleet and British commercial interests. On the other hand, the French would like to see the Greeks driven out of Smyrna, where they would greatly foster British trade and become rivals of French trade. A- - In Constantinople we are likely to see this rivalry become acute. For the French have been active, ever since the Turkish armistice, at Constantinople and in the Balkans, where the Allied army was for a long time under the command of a French general. This general has assumed, and all his officers with him, that Greece, Rumania, Serbia, and Turkey are a French sphere of influence, a policy that has called forth a great deal of opposition among all the peoples affected. Rather than see French influence extended, the British prefer to let the Turks remain in Constantinople. If the French thought that putting the Turk out of Constantinople would bring the British into control of the region, they would prefer to have him stay. The French policy was materially helped by opposition within the Mohammedan world, chiefly in India, to a removal of the cali- phate to Asia." The result was a provision of the treaty of Sèvres (1920) between Turkey and the Allied powers that left Constantinople nominally in Turkish hands. - The tables below show the trade of Smyrna, Trebizond, and Con- stantinople; they show also the overpowering strength of British shipping in that trade. They indicate how strong is the hold of 1 For a further discussion of the caliphate see page 441. Conflict of British and French policy in the Near East Acute con- flict at Con- stantinople 416 © The New World Predomi- nance of British in- terests in the Near East Importance of British shipping the British upon the coastal regions and towns in areas of commercial and strategic importance in the Near East. Indeed, the organized commercial life of the whole world at the present time depends upon Great Britain to a surprising degree. Not only is the through commerce of Constantinople large; the city is also the most important focus of Turkish trade. In 1910– 1911 it had nearly a third of the total import trade of the Turkish Empire: * CoMMERCE OF THE PRINCIPAL PORTs of THE TURKISH EMPIRE (1910–11) - e IMPORTs ExPORTs Constantinople . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.48% 9.00% Smyrna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.87 20.60 Saloniki . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.64 5.04 Beirut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.98 4.66 Haidar Pasha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total of 5.94% Trebizond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 1.28 Dedeagatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.65 1.82 Total value of exports in 1910–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $80,000,000 Total value of imports in 1910–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,000,000 The primacy of British shipping in the Mediterranean region is shown by the following figures, which give for the Mediterranean and Black seas, Red Sea, and Persian Gulf in 1913–1914 totals of (approximately): Tons TONs British . . . . . . . . 14,000,000 Italian . . . . . . . . 4,000,000 Austro-Hungarian . . . . . 6,500,000 French . . . . . . . . . 4,000,000 Russian . . . . . . . . 5,500,000 German . . . . . . . . 2,750,000 Turkish . . . . . . . . 5,000,000 Greek . . . . . . . . . 2,250,000 Dutch, Belgian, and Rumanian, less than 1,000,000 tons each For Russian, German, Austro-Hungarian, Greek, and Italian shipping, the total is about 1,000,000 tons each for Constantinople, with British shipping at 6,500,000 tons. THE NEW STATUS Constantinople is left in Turkish hands by the terms of the treaty of Sèvres (1920), and with the city goes a tiny hinterland (Fig. 207). All the rest of Turkey's European possessions are definitely lost: (1) To the Allies, at Suvla Bay, where an international cemetery (British, French, and Italian) is to be created for the soldiers who died in the ill-fated Gallipoli expedition. (2) To Greece, which obtains both Western and Eastern Thrace. Constantinople and Its Thoroughfare 417 The Straits are to be under Allied control; and the northern coast of Marmara, while under Greek sovereignty, is to be neutral more than nine miles inland. The new status of Constantinople excludes fortification. The definite intention of the great powers is to secure the freedom of the surrounding territory. It is thought that there is no need even for the fortification of any of the islands in the AEgean. Nearly all of these pass to Greece, whose navy is bound to remain too small to be a menace either to the great powers or to the security of the trade routes of the countries that border the eastern Mediterra- nean. Italy secures temporary possession of Rhodes, but as her navy can never rival that of Great Britain or of France, her position there is not a matter of great international importance. Statesmen are agreed that anything less than free passage of the Straits would be a source of irritation both to the people of southern Russia and to those of Georgia and Armenia, all of whom desire unrestricted passage for goods and ships, including war vessels. The principal provisions for the regulation of the neutral zone of the Straits, as established by the treaty of Sèvres," are the following: (1) The Straits are to be under the control of a Commission of the Straits, composed of representatives of Great Britain, France, Italy, Japan, Russia (if and when it becomes a member of the League of Nations), the United States (if it is willing to participate), Bulgaria (if and when it becomes a member of the League), Turkey, and Greece. But nominal sovereignty of the zone is divided between the two last-named powers, Con- stantinople and the southern shore being Turkish, and the north shore west of Constantinople being Greek. (2) The Commission is to have complete control of the naviga- tion of the Straits, and shall maintain equality of all charges or dues, regardless of the port of origin, or destination, or departure, or flag, or ownership. Sanitation and the life- saving service also are to be under its control. (3) Consular courts have supervision over infringements of the laws by their nationals, and in time the Turkish courts are to have jurisdiction over their own nationals. (4) The Straits are to remain open in peace and in war for all craft, and are to be neutral in time of war. They are not to be subject to blockade or other hostile act. (5) All fortifications within the neutral zone are to be demolished. 1. At the London Conference of March 1921, various compromises favorable to Turkey were discussed. If these are adopted, the treaty of Sèvres as outlined in this chapter may be greatly modified in Thrace and Smyrna and also with respect to the capitulations and the Ottoman Debt. - - - Constan- tinople under the new Allied régime CHAPTER TWENTY_FIVE The Jews a minority in Palestine Religious differences likely to C811Se trouble to the new govern- ment Great Britain appointed the man- datary of the League of Nations PALESTINE: A Jewish HomeLAND UNDER A BRITISH MANDATARY THOUGH Palestine is the birthplace of both the Hebraic and the Christian religions, neither faith predominates there today. Of Christian sects there are a few, the members belonging for the most part to religious orders that are associated with the holy places. Jews form barely an eighth of the total population of 700,000. The rest are chiefly Moslem Arabs, Druses, and Turks. Since there are about 15,000,000 Jews in the world, it is seen that the 80,000 who live in Palestine are but a small fraction of the total number. THE PROPOSED ZIONIST STATE The widespread interest in the creation of a new Jewish state, one of the chief objects of the Zionist movement, springs from the fact that such a state would form a homeland for Jews outside as well as inside Palestine and would afford an opportunity to establish a na- tion in which Jews might become, in time, the majority race. The most serious problem that arises is political control. To turn the government of the new state over to either the Jews or the Arabs would sow discord at the start. The population has had no expe- rience in government, and it would certainly carry into its first political contests a fanatical religious feeling that but for outside supervision would spell disaster. ‘. In the light of these possibilities there appeared to be but one course for the great powers to take: to make a strong western power the mandatary. In the treaty of Sèvres (1920) it was provided that Palestine should be administered by a mandatary, and that this mandatary should carry out the terms of the British declaration of 2 November 1917, which guaranteed the establishment of a Jewish national home. At the same time it was specified that the rights of non-Jews were not to be prejudiced. It was natural to select Great Britain as the mandatary, because of her interest in the security of the Suez Canal near by and in the orderly behavior of the Arab tribes that adjoin Palestine on the east and south. Experienced in controlling unruly peoples of diverse race, speech, and religious faith, Great Britain, with a strong and mobile fleet, will be able to maintain order and thus supply an oppor- tunity for the natives to learn the processes of self-government. Having been selected as the mandatary, Great Britain proceeded to 418 - Palestine - 419 appoint a High Commissioner. The announced policy of this com- missioner is: first, to provide for equality of treatment of the popula- tion elements; and second, to provide a national home for the Jews, permitting them to return to Palestine only as the development of that country guarantees the normal absorption of immigrants for rising industries and reclaimed agricultural lands. Jewish colonies began to be established in Palestine as early as the 16th century, but the principal efforts have been made within the last fifty or sixty years, partly because of the pogroms and other per- secutions in Russia, and partly for reasons of sentiment. By 1914 there were in Palestine 46 agricultural colonies, of which 20 were in Judea, 7 in Samaria, 16 in Galilee, and 3 east of the Jordan. They vary in population from 20 to more than 3000. The total number of colonists is about 12,000. The area of land they cultivate is about 2 per cent of the whole of Palestine, or possibly 10 per cent of its culti- wated area. Most of the colonies are agricultural. A few of them, like Telavio, are composed in large part of shopkeepers, teachers, and engineers. The colonists produce Oranges, olives, grain, dairy products, vegetables, and poultry. An agricultural experiment sta- tion is maintained by Jews at Haifa. RELATION OF PALESTINE TO THE WORLD The decision which has placed Palestine under British control is but one step in a long historical sequence. Foreign influences have always surrounded and permeated Palestine. The seacoasts of Syria have called forth from the vast interior of Asia caravan and army. Up and down the Mediterranean coast, Turk and Egyptian have passed again and again. Doubtless the land would have no political individuality whatever, had it not been for the plateau of Judea, a region from 2500 to 3000 feet above the sea, to one side of and above the main historical currents of western Asiatic life. When the Israelites sought to hold the lower flat land, like the Negeb at the southern end of the plateau of Judea, they were driven out. The armies of conquest kept to the roads in the fertile coastal plains. The Jew still looks out, westward from his plateau, across a rich coastal plain held by unfriendly people whom he has never been able to conquer, except here and there for short periods. It was in Samaria, northern Palestine, that outside influences were strongest. Here the trade routes ran just south of the Sea of Galilee to the Plain of Esdraelon and the port of Haifa. Thus they avoided the mountains of Lebanon on the north and the rocky plateau of Judea Origin of Jewish colonies in Palestine Foreign in- fluences in Palestine Samaria at one of the croSS- roads of Western Asia 420 The New World A small country with a powerful spiritual influence Spread of the Hebrew people Isolation of Jewish colonies on the south. Foreign influences penetrated the life of Palestine at the north, but were largely shut out of the region of Judea. Palestine is a tiny country. Set down in the United States, it would cover about the same area as Vermont, and it has about twice as many people. It has been called “the least of all lands.” Yet so mighty a force has emanated from it — the Christian religion — that its spiritual influence has penetrated every part of the globe. The inspiration of the great Crusades of the Middle Ages was the freeing of its holy places, then held by the Moslem Turk. It has long been a place of pilgrimage for the devout. No other land in the world so well illustrates the political force and historical importance of ideas. Christ said, “My Kingdom is not of this world,” but even the most ambitious and forceful rulers of history were unable to acquire em- pires whose extent equals that of the Christian realm at the present time. - THE PECULIAR POSITION OF THE JEWISH PEOPLE The Jew has spread from his homeland in Palestine throughout the world, and he is everywhere marked by strong racial characteristics. All told, there are about 15,000,000 Jews in the world, of whom 4,000,000 live in Russia, about 2,500,000 in Poland, and about 1,000,000 in former Hungary. There are also large Jewish colonies in Constantinople, Saloniki, Barcelona, New York, and London, as well as in the larger German cities. Wherever he has gone, the Jew has formed a race apart. This is due to his religion as well as to his social customs and his personal character, and also to the attitude toward him of the peoples among whom he has lived. He has been terribly persecuted in Russia, where repeated pogroms have had the aspect of wholesale massacres. The old Jewish Pale of Settlement in Russia (Fig. 192), east of which Jews could not settle, was designed to segregate him. The Rus- sian policy resulted in a large concentration of Jews in western Russia, particularly in Poland; and it led also to heavy emigration to America. The American Jews are chiefly from Russia and Poland; very few are from Palestine. In Europe the Jew is found in every great trading center. In many cities either the local law or the in- stinct of the Jew has led him to congregate in a certain section, known as the Jewish Quarter, or Ghetto. Normally the Jew has maintained a certain aloofness toward the political and social life of the country in which he has lived. * It is a striking fact that in his own country the Jew was histori- Palestine 421 cally not a trader. The Jews of Palestine were a secluded people, devoted to agriculture, who went out from their own land across the sea to distant countries because their own country was small and poor and because of Roman policy during the first few centuries of the Christian era. Thus the race has undergone a complete transformation, The Jew of Pales- time a farmer, not a trader for the Jew outside of Palestine is prečminently a trader. Indeed, a great deal of the general antagonism toward him, on the part of other races, is due to his exclusive devotion to trade and personal gain and his success therein. POSSIBILITIES OF AGRICULTURAL DEVELOPMENT The heart of Palestine is the plateau of Judea, flanked on either side by lowland. On the west is the fertile, well-watered coastal plain, a Form of the land . hundred miles long and about fifteen wide. The eastern margin is abrupt – a very steep scarp that leads down to the Ghor, the flat- bottomed depression in which are the Jordan and the Dead Sea, the latter more than 1200 feet below sea level. This scarp is the Wilder- ness of Judea, a rocky belt of land with steep valleys — a barren, waterless country, the home of the wandering Bedouin. Here early Christians took refuge in caves, and here a few Christian orders still maintain monasteries. Eastward, beyond the Ghor, is the Syrian desert, broken in three places by tracts of higher and better watered country. The plateau of Judea ordinarily has enough rainfall for a limited agriculture, though there are occasional droughts that turn the grain fields yellow before their time. On the east the aspect changes grad- ually. The rolling desert is grassy near the margin of the plateau, but parched farther east. In years of extreme drought the nomadic Arab comes up to the border of the desert, where the grain fields and the settled habitations are located and where fierce feuds arise between the settled farmer and the marauding shepherd. Only the center of the plateau of Judea has broad fields and fertile valleys; here also are the principal towns — Jerusalem, Bethlehem, and He- bron; and here the land is densely inhabited, though the total popu- lation is not large (Fig. 43). By contrast the Negeb south of the Judean plateau is a desert land, uninhabited except for a few small permanent villages supported by wells. It is a parched country in strong contrast to the grass-covered slopes of the adjacent highlands with their cereal fields, their flocks, and their historic cities. Isolated plateau of Judea 422 The New World Coastal strip Large fig and olive crops of Palestine Water by tunnel from the coastal region Outer border of land of permanent settle- ments The coastal region has a rainfall of more than 30 inches a year and is rich in verdure, except during the dry summer months. The great caravan routes of the region run along it. Here also are the populous cities and the ports. Four thousand years ago, in the days of Baby- lonia and Assyria, and again in the time of the Romans, the caravan trade was enormous. The whole region has been smitten by drought again and again, throughout its history, as in the terrible years of 1869 and 1870. Palestine is capable of great agricultural development, a matter of extreme interest in the life of a new state that has practically no mineral deposits. Its climate and soil are so varied from place to place in short distances that many plants become adapted to a wide range of temperature and rainfall. The olive grows on land from 850 feet below sea level in the hot Jordan Valley to 2500 feet above sea level in upper Galilee and 4000 to 5000 feet at Hermon and in the Leba- non, where there are freezing winter temperatures. The fig is grown abundantly in upper Galilee, where the population is dense and labor cheap, but export is on a small scale, Owing to the lack of shipping facilities. The crop is sold chiefly to the Bedouins. Grapes are grown in large quantities. Besides having a local use, they are car- ried by donkey and camel to centers of trade for nomadic peoples on the desert's rim. Barley is a standard crop, even in some localities having but 10 to 12 inches of rain. Water poverty is the great stumbling block to agricultural devel- opment. As a means of relieving it a Norwegian engineer has proposed the utilization of the difference in level between the Med- iterranean Sea and the Dead Sea. The plan is to construct a tunnel some thirty-seven miles long which would carry water from the streams of the Mediterranean coastal belt to the lower end of the Jordan valley. A more immediately practical plan is to turn into the valley lands of northern Palestine a portion of the waters of the Litani River and of its tributaries. The necessity of securing additional water for irrigation in northern Palestine stimulated the Zionists to claim a northern boundary which should include most of the Litani watershed, but this claim was not allowed in the final settlement of the boundary by France and Great Britain (Fig. 209). East of the Dead Sea depression is a belt of transition country be- tween Palestine proper and the Syrian desert. Its most important member is the Hauran, a plateau rising to 2000–3000 feet above the sea (Fig. 45). It has rich soil formed on volcanic rock; and though it has very few streams, it is sufficiently well watered to have wheat Palestine 423 •øørſteſ) rºwot jo uwon e “qqarºzen — “SO, “ĐIJI 424 - The New World fields and pastures of wide reputation throughout Syria and the Near East. The harvests are sent to Damascus and thence to the port of Haifa, formerly by camel caravan, since 1895 by railroad. South of the Hauran is the region of Gilead. Its summits rise to 4000 feet and support evergreen oak and other trees. Portions of the valley floors and plains round about are watered by springs and streams and have orchards and vineyards, and occasionally fields of wheat and barley. Its chief wealth is in its herds. Like the Hauran, the Damascus region, and Moab in the south, Gilead is a land of count- less ruins, witnesses of the denser population that once lived here. Moab, to the south, completes the line of heights east of the Jordan and marks the outpost of the agricultural land at the borders of the Syrian desert. Sheep and cattle live in great droves on the upland pastures and find water on the canyon floors and at scattered springs. It is also a region of agricultural importance, though subject prob- ably more than other lands nearby to raids from the desert Arabs, who look upon the farmers' fields as placed there by Providence for their enjoyment. –75– -E- := 4.4% 45 à- —so- a ſº {3 * - º % BOUNDARY AGREEMENTS* y Diarbekr - - “y | N. • ſº ––Marlin---Jºhnſº SYRIA º o N-> S- -", Ruinelan Keui T- FRANCO-BRITISH AGREEMENT M OF DECEMBER 23, 1920 36- - O –––LINE OF THE TREATY OF º SEWRES S 3. _-_-_PERSO-MESOPOTAMIAN § * \ c = * BOUNDARY e l Tripjº Horſ Abu Kema] -3'** tre % 50 0. 50 NO0 MilBS 34: ..º. Te A / "- ‘ārij **, 42 K ...:*::::: \ ºf- -Z/~~~! °Damascus €2 º agdad; : § : \ N - S. 3 &se t - *~ "S.-. iſ...INs fººleraa Kerbää \ 32- jaffa Nasib T’Imtan Y 2 * sh O A DEAD *: U.-- SEA * ! Basra. wº gº –30 3&saw Kowºſſº 36 -*— 40 42 44 46 Wei 48& FIG. 209. Boundary between Syria and Mesopotamia, with related localities, according to the text of the Franco-British agreement of 23 December 1920. Only that section of railway is shown which is mentioned in the treaty. CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX ANATOLIA : LAST REMNANT OF THE TURKISH EMPIRE FEw persons realize how far into Europe the Turk once penetrated and how dangerously near he came to overwhelming our western civilization. For more than two hundred years he was the aggressor against European peoples, chiefly Germans and Magyars, who bore the brunt of his repeated assaults; but in 1683, at the second siege of Vienna, he was decisively defeated by forces under the Polish leader Sobieski, and since then the field of his power has slowly diminished. As late as 1908 the Sultan of Turkey was the nominal or technical ruler of the Adriatic provinces of Bosnia and Herze- govina, although the special position of Austria-Hungary made her em- peror the actual ruler. The Mohammedans of Bosnia (chiefly Croats) number 30 per cent of the total population of the province; yet it is almost as far from Bosnia to Constantinople as from Bosnia to Paris. Before the Balkan wars the Turkish Empire was as large as Russia in Europe; its population was nearly as large as that of France. -->". . . . 2 3R. 3|: º 4 5'ſ *::::::::f . . . . . . . . . . . . . A lºº ‘. . . ; ºr ::::::::::A; ... ºft: §º | º * *-*. J". . º - 2-22 • 2.2222232 z -- z ºf 2/2 22,2,42 * Z, • *.*.*, *z, *, 2% 22.” ./ 2 3. ** º 2% & §§ sº %33% z º zzº. 22,232 - %$ § § Nº. § 2. § Ś % % 2. 2 % Nº N % Tº: N - SN §ss N N 35 º º N N N N § DECLINE OF THE TURKISH EMPIRE --- Extreme limits fºllosses by 1699 § = ** by 1792%. , . 1830 º , , 1882S , . 1908 tºº N É . .1914N , . 1919 SCALE OF MILES ººlºº &Q0 0. &S N - § N *: º % #º FIG. 210. Only the large white area (most of Anatolia) remains to Turkey in unrestricted SOV- ereignty, though she enjoys limited sovereignty over the Constantinople region and on the southern side of the Sea of Marmara. A mere shadow of Sovereignty also remains to her at Smyrna — the privilege of flying the Turkish flag over one of the outer forts. The western border of Armenia is represented in a diagrammatic way; for details see Figure 225. fºLITſ Penetra- tion of central Europe by Turkish power 425 426 The New World Complexity of the Turkish population Peoples of the Turk- ish Empire separated by relief and climate M * * * *T a #/. - * . §-errº razº % 3% :: .*- : * ſº º º 2. ºf Yºğāś"? 38 3.3% %mºst # *ś/ Vººk? Mtláš ((. % º - ſº • *.. § Nº: - à % - º * § **-* - - º ğ. - § S: ::::::: % $ %Kºśń. . sº Mtkar 80, * 4. * *C. Sºx ... º.” --~. A 15_LeMtkºf S5 . . " ſ 3. Sºº. - §ſsºg is . X. Wy --~~~Y"T 2- Yadašº's 86 Fºº \__L-----~~~TT ,” f Ada Q * x- \ º, Tºº Mºsadalia's _----...ſºlºiſ/ º "ºr"?/ \, Markt 738 & * sº º G >;--- N ſº --" º / \ Mo sº W \---- Q, } A- M 88 Ar 5 £, --f \, C 15 2” 2 * G12 *M. K9 W.Y.". A M 99 YW, tººk Markºs - * O 3×. X * a CC 3 \ - ----" ~3 º, e } AR Arabs M Moslems # _^*_--7- *. ! º, S-- ( A Armenians Mr Maronites ; f º A.----- § --> …A CC Chaldáčans N Nestorian §x:#; | ..--~~T * U as & Catholics Christians º }; f f w SS D Druses P Protestants # ------ i ,-------------*>, J 13 M *, sº \ G Greeks T Turks 4. $%tº A `--> 3agdad , J Jews SC Syrian Chris- § § 172 . * 2-º's Ág K Kurds tianS §§ ...sºmeº % Greeks form more than 2 ~2 KB Kizil-Bash X Christians #% A 20% of the total population k } Y 32 L Lazes 0 Orthodox § - M.52 / Armenians form more thanks!" | Lower case letters after M * *: Dº Yº A 20% of the total population \ } minº M99 designate component rages | *ś *=#–9–º" `s N 28 30 4. SJerusalem. 38| 40 412 44 * 416 EIG. 211. Population of Turkey, with emphasis (by shading) &n the Greek and Armenian ele- ments. (Figures after the letters represent percentage of the total district population.) One of the difficulties of the Turkish rulers is illustrated by the table on page 427, which reveals a degree of complexity in the ethnog- raphy of Turkey greater than that exhibited by any other empire in the world except Russia, with her vast extent, and Great Britain, with colonies in every part of the world. To the ethnic differences among Turkey's subject peoples were added equally important dif- ferences of religion and character. THE GEOGRAPHICAL ENVIRONMENT The task of governing Turkey was further complicated by the na- ture of the country. Locally there are rich plains, as about Smyrna, about Adana (Cilicia), and at Trebizond and Adrianople; but, as shown in Figure 213, a mountainous relief is characteristic of a large part of the border of the Anatolian plateau. The interior of Arabia is chiefly desert. The Turkish possessions in western Arabia — Hedjaz, Asir, and Yemen—were so remote and little known that Turkish sovereignty there was but a shadow. We commonly fail to appreciate their distance from the center of Turkish authority. Arabia is about half as large as that part of the United States west of the Mississippi (Fig. 29). It is as far from Constantinople to Mocha at the southwestern tip of Arabia as it is from New York to San Francisco. Outside of the Balkans, Anatolia, and the Syrian Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 427 CLASSIFICATION OF THE PEOPLES OF ASIATIC TURREY 1 NAME RACE RELIGION SPEECH HOMELAND Alevis (see. Tahtajis) Ansariyehs Armenoid Monotheistic Arabic sº *ºnd Cili- C18. In O Aptals Armenoid Sunni Arabic Syrian Mts. Arabs Semitic Mohammedan Arabic South of Tauric and - Armenian Mts. Arameans Semitic Hebrew Aramean Mesopotamia Armenians Armenoid Christian Armenian Armenian highland, (Aryan) Taurus and Anti- ASCliaS (See Taurus ranges Yezidis) AVSharS Turki Shia, Turkish Anti-Taurus BalikiS Armcnoid Mixed Moham- Mixed Arabic, Near Sasun medan and Rurdish, and - Christian Armenian Bejvans Semitic Mixed Moham- Arabic Near Mosul medan and Christian ChaldeanS Semitic Roman Catholic Syriac, Near Diarbekr and Rurdish, . Jezireh; Sert and Chepmis (see and Arabic Rhabur basin Tahtajis) CircassianS Mixed Turki and | Mohammedan Turkish Anatolia, N. Syria, Indo-European N. Mesopotamia Druses Armenoid Mohammedan Arabic Lebanon; Anti-Leba- non, Hauran MtS., around Damascus GreekS 3 Mediterranean Christian Greek Coast districts, min- - ing districtS, large Cities - ISImailyehS Armenoid Mohammedan Semitic Northern Syria. Jacobites Semitic Christian (Mono- | Syriac Syria, Mesopotamia physiteS º - Jews Mixed Semitic, Hebrew Hobrew Jerusalem ; environS Mediterranean, Of Damascus and Armenoid Karapapaks Turk Shia Turkish Tutakh-Patnoz Kizilbash Armenoid mixed Shia, or mixture of Turkish Angora, and Sivas vil- With Turki - Shiism, Pagan- ayetS; DerSim ism, Manichæ- ism, and Chris- tianity - Eurds Indo-European Mohammedan Aryan lan- West of the Sakaria guageS River; Kurdistan Lazis Georgian branch of Mohammedan GruSinian Lazistan ; north Of the acasO-Ti- Choruk Su, around betan peoples * - iza MaroniteS Armenoid Christian Arabic M; jºon, Anti- €108. In OIl Metauileh's Probably Armenoid | Shia Arabic Northern Lebanon Nestorians Armenoid Christian Syriac IBasin of the Great Zab ; Valleys of the BOhtan and Kha- 3r New Chaldeans Semitic Christian Syriac AlkoSh Sabeans Semitic Christian Syriac Amarar and Munte- - fik Sanjaks of the BaSra. Vilayet Samaritans Semitic Hebrew Hebrew Near Nablus Syrians Semitic Christian and MO- Arabic Syria and Mesopo- hammedan tamia, TahtajiS Armenoii Mohammedan Turkish Lycian Mts. Tatars Turki Mohammedan Turkish Anatolia and Cilician Terekinnans (See plains Karapapaks) TurkOmans Turki Mohammedan Turkish Angora, Adana, and - Aleppo Vilayets TurkS Twº º: With || Mohammedan Turkish Anatolia mainly TIOleIn O Yezidis or ASJais Mixed Armenoid | Devil-worshipers, Kermanji Eurt Dagh. On the W. and Indo- mixture of the to Zakho E. Of the European Old Babylonian Tigris; Badi near religion; Zoroas- OSul; injar t r i a n i S m , range Ma nic has iS m, - - and Christianity Armenoid Mohammedan Turkish * e à e º e º 'º e º 'º e º e * - 6 & 8 tº º - - - * * * * * * * * * * * * ESTIMATED NUMBER 175,000 uncertain 300,000 7 300 1,000,000 2 uncertain uncertain uncertain 50,000 500,000 200,000 2,000,000 22,000 15,000 150,000 3,000 400,000 1,500,000 uncertain 350,000 under 50,000 60,000 uncertain 300 uncertain 5,000 25,000 uncertain 8,000,000 40,000 200,000 15,048,600 1 From Leon Dominian, The Frontiers of Language and Nationality in Europe, 1917. 2 The figures for Armenians and Greeks require revision in view of the Systematic efforts of the Turks to extirpate these two peoples. The masscres of the entire Greek population of Villages of the Ægean coasts and the atrocities perpetrated on the Armenians of inland communities have largely depleted these two Christian subject groups. 3 Helienes, or subjects of the King of Greece, number about 20,000. region, there were almost no railroads in the Turkish Empire, and there has always been a central administration whose effects could hardly have been offset in any circumstances. 428 The New World Adrianople º 30 º § §§ gº 4. Š Batum 44 46 • b sº §º § D S3%ZNK&ſ. ** -...--" * -- * POPULATION DENSITY 34 per Sq. mi. per sq.km. under 25 Dunder 10 25 – 50 ɺ 10 – 20 50 – 100 N20 – 40 over 100 % over 40 tno 50 *——!” !#: -- ? 32 - 4%– 12 i —# 3.10 3. -Ö– d ſº %; s * L S Y R I A N D E S E R T 3|8 30 42 44. FIG. 212. Population densities in Turkey by sanjaks, after statistics for 1911. Figures - on the map represent density per square mile. º Nº. § ğ. s::::::::::: *º-s: § º: º 2× §§§ - --- W Fº - Ş%,92 & §§ § Sºn-2a. CŞ %2: & $% @% $2% &\}) Š ŞSSS Wº%2S2% - ºº: 3% º - §§ y (2. §3.4 SS iº% % ğ%& #3%*º % % Ž º & º º § º % º % Sº º º % Ø º º * ºPllS8. %NXS Š Ž % - §3&º % º Sº Sºč3 S3 & % Ø ºº % º %2 %2 & %% 2. §º. gºš º S$3. SN & 3& & %2, § { sº gº §§ - %& *% % à 2 Ø & $ N § s º % º *. Q3 § *Nº º §: 33 *NYNE\S$3% N 3% # sº §% º §: : &£32 sº º % ºsº - º % a º % Š & }%: º %5 IIl [] - & 2 sº 3P łº & QN & e” - Sº, - - §2. 29 §§ º º º C [. - º & Ž —º y:T-zº Žiž AV + : . RELIEF MAP OF A Meters Under 500 Ç 99.3% Over 2000 . . .333 Feet Under 1650 1650–3300 3300-6600 Over 6600 Tr 3%% ** =###H, FIG. 213. Relief of Anatolia. Note the plateau character of the peninsula, its abrupt and indented border, and interior valleys and basins. Of special interest is a comparison of new boundaries and of ethnic distributions in Figures 210 and 211 with the coastal valley lowlands as represented here. Contours reduced from the sheets of the millionth map, British General Staff. Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 429 The strong and varied relief of the Turkish regions and the great differences of climate from place to place have had a marked effect upon the division and mode of life of the people. The Turks are largely confined to the mountain-rimmed and partly desert high- lands of Anatolia; Judea is a relatively dry and inaccessible plateau where the Hebrew race had its early development; the Armenian race grew up in the high valley floors about Lake Wan; the Syrians hold a fertile strip of land along the Mediterranean, shut off by the moun- tains of Lebanon on the south and the Syrian desert on the east; the semi-nomadic Kurds keep largely to the mountain pastures at the headwaters of the Tigris and Euphrates rivers; the Arabs live inde- pendently in the oases of the vast interior desert of Arabia or in locally fertile districts about the desert border. Each people has a distinctive homeland." HISTORICAL RELATIONS AND POLICIES The complexities of race have also in part grown out of a long and changeful history. Military expeditions of the past, no less than commercial life, passed and repassed the sites of modern tribes. Hittite and Syrian, Persian and Greek, Egyptian and Assyrian and Babylonian, European crusader and Moslem, Arab, and Turk, sent their armies across this part and that to capture towns, take spoils, enslave peoples, or guard a highway of approach. The great Eurasian trade and political movements have involved some part of the Turkish Empire — sometimes all of it – ever since its formation. Armenia was a meeting place of the inner trade routes; Syria was the maritime outlet of the hinterland trade; Mesopotamia and the Persian Gulf region were a focus of eastern commerce. Im- portant towns grew up at critical places; Haifa is an historic port where caravans gathered; Mosul, or “Central Gates,” is near a high pass leading up to Armenia; Konia, once the capital of Turkey, was at a desert meeting-place of north-south and east-west routes in Anatolia; Aleppo was a focus for traffic about the shores of the Gulf of Alexan- dretta. When the Turk captured Constantinople from the Byzantine rulers in 1453 and thus completed control of the gateways to Asia and the rich trade of India, European traders earnestly sought a new route to 1 This chapter deals only with the Turks and the region of Anatolia. For discussion of non-Turkish groups formerly included in the Turkish Empire see the chapters on Greece, Transcaucasia, Palestine, France (for Syria), and Great Britain (for Mesopotamia, Arabia, and Egypt). Military campaigns 3.CrOSS Turkey Historic trade routes of Turkey Diversion of oriental, trade 430 The New World Oppres- sion of subject peoples Fig. 214. In the desert of Syria. A tribe of Anezeh Arabs moving from an exhausted pasture to a fresh one. India, for with increasing risks of trade over the old route went higher costs. Finally Dias discovered the southern end of Africa (1488), and soon after a new and all-water route to India which avoided the Turk was found by Da Gama (1498). The Suez Canal in our own time (completed in 1869) diverted trade still further from the old caravan routes across Asia Minor. The troubles of Turkey in modern times have arisen in large part because of the uninterrupted government policy of oppression of subject races. The present partition of the Turkish Empire calls for a just disposition of these races, to the end that there may be a reasonable chance of future peace and liberty. Let us now examine the political basis of the problem. Almost all the oppressed peoples of the world would have said that once the old autocratic political systems of Germany, Austria- Hungary, Russia, and Turkey were destroyed, everything would be set going again without delay in an era of democracy and happiness. They have found instead that they have merely shifted a great many of the most trying political and economic problems from their former rulers to themselves. Not everything that the past administration had done was wrong, and in any case it had kept the affairs of the coun- try running in one way or another. Granted the old system had to be destroyed, it was equally necessary that a new one be created to take Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 431 its place. A period of revolution must be followed by a period of building. e - There are two regions in which the people have not yet begun the building process–Russia and Turkey. Their territories join in the Caucasus, and there is now a great block of unsettled country extend- ing all the way from the Indian Ocean to the Arctic. The historic weakness of the Turkish Empire was due primarily to tWO CauSeS : -*. (1) The country's central situation at one of the greatest cross- roads of the world and its bridge-like character between central Asia and southeastern Europe. - (2) The inclusion of a large number of different peoples in a low stage of development. tº It will help us to understand the present problems of the Turkish people and the difficulties of the European nations who now have assumed control of the former empire, to look for a moment at the rise and spread of Turkish power. A background of historical facts is in this case peculiarly important. - The Turks are made up of two chief branches: (1) The Seljuk Turks, whose original home was in Mongolia; they conquered Anatolia from the Byzantines (8th century) and im- posed the Turkish language and the Mohammedan religion on the inhabitants that remained after conquest. (2) The Ottoman Turks, who migrated westward from the Altai Mountains and the plateaus of Inner Asia; they supplanted the Seljuk Turks, founding an empire in 1326, with the capi- tal at Brusa. Later (1371) Adrianople became the Turkish capital. In the eight years from 1512 to 1520, the Turks conquered Syria, Egypt, and the holy places of Mecca and Medina. By the latter ac- tion, Sultan Selim I of that time became the “Defender of the Mos- lem Faith,” and made himself Caliph, or Head of the Church. His successor, Suleiman, pushed the Mohammedan conquests far into Europe, besieging “Vienna in 1529, though without success. In 1565 Malta likewise was besieged. Thereafter there was a decline in Turkish power, especially after the defeat of the Turkish navy at Lepanto in 1571 and the second siege of Vienna, which ended disas- trously for the Turks in 1683. * Wherever they extended their conquests outside of Anatolia, the Turks forcibly Islamized the Christians, drafted their young men Disor- ganization of the huge em- pires of Turkey and Russia Historical develop- ment of the Turk- ish Empire 432 The New World Territorial losses Contest between East and West “Young Turk ’’ revolution of 1908 into the army, and placed many of the girls in the Turkish harems. This policy kept the Turkish stock in Asia Minor from being wasted in foreign battlefields and swelled the numbers of Moslems. During the 18th century Hungary was lost to the Turks. Then followed the loss of the northern shore of the Black Sea. In the early part of the 19th century the Greeks and Serbs successfully rose against the Turk, and from that time down to recent years the pressure of the Christian against the Turk has been almost unremitting. But for the antagonism between the Russian and British empires, the struggle might have ended long ago in the expulsion of the Turk from Europe. e Internal difficulties in the Turkish Empire, and even revolution against the Turkish authorities, continued until in 1876 the liberal elements were able to force the introduction of a constitution and a parliament. But conflicting racial and religious interests were so strong that the parliament no sooner set to work than it showed itself impotent; and in the long period from 1876 to 1909 Sultan Abdul Hamid II held the reins of power exclusively in his own hands. He fought western liberal ideas in his court and in the country, and tried to make Pan-Islamism a political force. Through it he hoped to continue his leadership of the Moslem world and to exercise strong political influence among the Moslem populations of: (1) Great Britain, in India, Egypt, eastern Africa, etc. (2) France, in northern Africa. (3) Russia, on the northern Black Sea coast, in Transcaucasia, and in Russian Turkestan. THE REVOLUTION OF 1908 AND THE NATIONALIST POLICY OF THE YOUNG TURES Only a few years before the World War the autocratic policy of the Sultan was most unexpectedly interrupted, with profound effects upon the subsequent history of Turkey, and indeed of the world. In July 1908 the Young Turks came into power, overthrowing the ruling party and forcing the reactionary, Sultan to restore the con- stitution of 1876. It was thought that the period of liberty and freedom had at last set in ; there was the greatest excitement and rejoicing all through Turkey. The Greeks of Smyrna, the Alba- nians in Europe, the Armenians, the Arabs, and even the Turks them- selves said that the day of deliverance had come. The racial and religious hatreds seemed to disappear in a day; and in their place Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 433 came the spirit of good will. There was almost equal rejoicing abroad when it was recalled how badly governed Turkey had been, how many of her own citizens she had massacred, how rotten was her internal Organization. At first the troubles of the Young Turks were due to the efforts of the old régime to regain control. After a mutiny in the army at Constan- tinople had been put down, the Young Turk party made the Sultan a prisoner at Saloniki and put his brother, Mohammed V, in his place. Then began the rule of the Young Turks. Their first thought was given to a great nationalizing movement known as “Pan-Islamism,” by which the scattered units of the entire Mohammedan world were to become federated in a vast political system. The power of Islam was to be consolidated. Even Finland and Hungary were to be brought into the scheme. United Turkey was to form the center of the Islamic world, though permitting distant peoples, like the Arabs of Egypt, Morocco, and Tunis, and the people of Persia and Afghanistan, to enjoy local autonomy. - To further their objects and stimulate popular enthusiasm, the officials and teachers idealized such barbarian leaders as Attila and Genghis Khan and wrote in poetic style of the glories of these so-called heroic figures. Scholars and writers formed clubs, published books, and held celebrations to revive Turkish hero worship. One phase of the movement was attention to national economic problems. The leaders asserted that as long as trade and industries were in foreign hands the Turk was not in power. The Greek and Armenian traders and shopkeepers were persecuted, boycotted, and expelled, and national banks were started, as at Aidin and Konia. But the Young Turks failed from the very beginning. They be- gan to oppress the subject races; made no effort to punish the men who had carried out the terrible Adana massacres of 1909, in which more than 30,000 Christians were killed; tried to suppress the liberties of the Greek Orthodox Church; started a commercial boycott of the Greeks; and sought forcibly to colonize Macedonia by bringing in Mohammedans from other parts of Turkey. Instead of bringing to- gether the diverse peoples of their empire, the Young Turks in the end only started into fiercer life the age-old racial and religious hatreds. These events made men despair of a solution of the Turkish prob- lem by the Turks. All the old ambitions of race, religion, or na- tionality revived. The Armenians wished to be free; the Balkan states banded together to throw the Turk out of Europe; Czar Fer- Abdication of the Sul- tan Proposed union of Mohamme- dan ele- ments in Pan-Islam- ism Failure of the Young Turks 434. The New World Young Turk revo- lution the first of a long chain of events Russian, Italian, and Brit- ish spheres Rise of the Trans- caucasian people Italian occupation of the Dode- C81 leSe dinand of Bulgaria proclaimed his country entirely detached from Turkish rule; Austria formally annexed Bosnia; Italy seized Tripoli, and forced Turkey to conclude peace in 1912. Instead of good will and fraternity, there was redoubled hatred and war and the setting into motion of that long series of events that through the Balkan wars led finally to the World War of 1914–1918. ZONES OF INFLUENCE OF THE GREAT POWERS One of the most serious consequences of the lamentable events that occurred in Turkey at the end of the old and the beginning of the new régime was the renewed ambition of the great powers to gain larger spheres of influence in Turkey, so that if the empire vanished they should have richer spoils. It will be seen by Figure 47 that Russia was to have the whole northern Armenian region, not as sovereign territory but as a sphere of commercial and political influence, which meant that if the Turk- ish Empire disintegrated, Russia would hope to own this part of it. Italy was to have special rights in Adalia and Dodecanesia. France was given a similar position in the Adana region, Syria, and southern Armenia; while England was to have a sort of protectorate over Pales- time and Mesopotamia. These arrangements were made as late as 1916, during the war. - With the complete collapse of orderly government in Russia in 1917, the Russian sphere fades from the map of Turkey and in its place there appear three countries – Armenia, the Georgian Republic, and the country of the Azerbaijan Tatars (Fig. 220). Each one de- sired an independent existence, though repeatedly attempts have been made to unite the three in a Transcaucasian confederation. The Italian zone at Adalia represents a recent ambition. When the Turkish Empire was in a state of disorder in 1911, Italy sought to increase her territorial holdings in Africa by acts of aggression in Libya (Tripoli). Austria-Hungary had seized the provinces of Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria had declared her independence of Turkey — why should Italy not have Libya 9 War with Turkey followed. It was a hard campaign, and before it was won Italy seized the group of islands known as the Dodecanese, from which she was to with- draw as soon as Turkish troops were withdrawn from Libya. Italy also obtained railway concessions in the Adalia region from the weak Turkish government, and strengthened her hold upon the coal mines of Heraclea on the southern Black Sea coast east of Constan- tinople. Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 435 As the World War progressed, it became more and more impor- tant for the Allies to have the aid of Greece, on account of the progress of German operations in the Balkans and the possibility of a sub- marine campaign with the Greek coast as a base. Greek adherence to the Allied cause could be won only if the Greeks felt that there would be a chance, after the war, to unite the Greek populations of the AEgean. While there was no agreement to this effect, there was a tacit understanding. Now the islands known as the Dodecanese (Fig. 158) are exclusively Greek in customs, language, and religion. Neither the Turks through centuries of rule, nor the Italians in a few years, could change the fundamental character of the people. To this day the sailors of Dodecanesia maintain the Hellenic tra- ditions of the past. Moreover, the islands lie near that part of the mainland of Asia Minor that is predominantly Greek, and that has Smyrna for its capital. By the treaty of Sèvres" between Turkey and the Allied powers the islands were ceded to Italy and have since been again transferred by treaty to Greece (except Rhodes).” . THE POLICY OF CAPITULATIONS Whatever their location and character, the Turks are poor, and the standard of education is low. As a result, almost all the business of the country is in the hands of non-Turkish people — Armenians, Greeks, Jews, Italians, French, Germans, and English. Wherever mines have been developed, railroads or irrigation works constructed, foreign capital and foreign brains have been chiefly responsible. At first thought it might be supposed that foreign assistance would be nothing but a benefit to Turkey. And so it would, if it were not that foreigners occupy a privileged position in the country. In fact, citizens of Great Britain, Italy, France, Germany, and Austria-Hun- gary were in many respects in a separate class from Turkish citizens, whether Turks, Greeks, Armenians, or Jews. A citizen of any of the great powers was practically exempt from the payment of income taxes and several other kinds of taxes to which the Turk was subject. He was immune from search, could secure passports from his own consul, and could be tried in courts of his own nationality. All these spe- cial privileges together constituted a body of privileges known as “capitulations.” One entire region, the Lebanon, was placed in Greeks of the Dode- CalleSe Turkish business in foreign hands 1 The treaty of Sèvres is discussed here and elsewhere as if it had been ratified, but rati- fication by Turkey had not taken place as late as 1 June 1921. See footnote on page 417. * For a more detailed discussion of the Dodecanese and of foreign spheres of influence in this region see the chapters on Greece and Constantinople. Privileges of the for- eigner 436. The New World Turkey as a field for political rivalry 3 * r , e (prºjected). Railroads - © French Harbor Concessions - Nasarie \. +. e German sº CD italian claims B * Tº Northern limit of British river navigation concessions cale of Iniles ... tº 50 º 150 2% * al, Y. Affoºroºzºa. * 4 FIG. 215. Navigation and harbor rights and concessions in Turkey in 1914. Railroads from the Geographical Journal, April 1920; Dominian, The Frontiers of Language and Nationality £n Europe, 1917; and British General Staff map, Railways in Asiatic Turkey, No. 2246, 1911. 1: 7,500,000. a privileged class and passed under foreign control in 1864. Upon declaring war in 1914, Turkey abolished the capitulations, but the powers refused to recognize her action. It should not be thought, however, that the capitulations sprang from a purely selfish desire on the part of foreign powers to control Turkish affairs. It was found that foreigners were ill treated, given unfair trials in the courts, and unnecessarily delayed in their legiti- mate business by Turkish officials. The case was parallel to that of China (page 514). . - Each nation which has in the past secured business concessions in Turkey wishes to retain and develop to its own advantage all the property that it formerly held, and these rights are now to be con- firmed by treaty. It is difficult to see how this can be done and at the same time the natural growth of Turkey be assured. By the terms of the treaty of Sèvres (1920) consular courts would hereafter have supervision over all infringements of the laws by their nationals within the area of the neutral zone of Constantinople and the Straits. Furthermore, until such time as Turkish judicial procedure becomes better regulated, the Turkish courts will relegate jurisdiction over their Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 437 Own nationals in the neutralized area to courts of the Allied powers. Outside of Constantinople — that is, in Anatolia — there is to be put into effect a plan of judicial reform, to be drafted by the principal Allied powers with the help of technical experts of other powers for- merly related to the scheme of capitulations. This plan is to replace the former capitulatory system as far as that system related to judi- cial matters. Political life had never been anything but corrupt in the whole history of Turkey; but with the capitulations went increasing cor- ruption. Officials sought bribes at every opportunity, withheld the proceeds of a vicious and discriminatory tax system, ruined every struggling industry by graft, and fought with massacre every show of independence on the part of Turkey's many subject peoples. To these difficulties were added pressure from without and revolu- tion within. The Russians persistently sought access to the Mediter- ranean through the Bosporus and the Dardanelles; the Bulgarians and Serbs secured large autonomy and, later, complete independence; Macedonia was perpetually in disorder; the Greek people of Smyrna sought union with Greece. THE OTTOMAN PUBLIC DEBT The question of debt was politically important to Turkey even before the World War. Should the treaty of Sèvres be ratified, it will be fundamental and vital; for with the control of her public debt are related still larger schemes of political control, through which the commercial interests of the world will seek to gain advantages that may not be to Turkey's interest. The total pre-war debt of Turkey originally amounted to $716,000,000. France, the chief creditor, had 60 per cent of the total, Germany came next with 20 per cent, and Great Britain next with 15 per cent. The debt was administered by a Council of Administration of the Ottoman Public Debt, which consisted of one representative each for France, Great Britain, Holland, Ger- many, Austria-Hungary, Italy, and Turkey, and one representa- tive of the Imperial Ottoman Bank. The president of the Council was a Frenchman or a Britisher in alternate years. - Now let us see how the debt affected the political and economic life of Turkey. In the first place, the Council controlled many of the important revenues of the empire. If there was a loan to be raised, it was the Council that administered the service of the loan. If money had to be found to pay the interest or the principal, the Council col- Political corruption Adminis- tration of Turkey’s pre-war debt Importance of foreign financial , control 438 The New World Need for abolition of special privileges French and British rivalry Present adminis- tration of the debt lected a certain amount of the ordinary revenues. The Council had reached into almost every corner of Turkish financial affairs. Its control even went so far as to affect the tax on live stock in certain districts. On the other hand, it introduced modern methods in cer- tain industries, and was the principal influence in establishing the silk industry. Its staff of trained employees totaled nearly 9000 in 1912. Students of the Turkish problem have long held that if Turkish affairs are to be improved, the exclusive privileges involved in the public debt and in the concessions must be modified or abolished. They assert further that it would be greatly to Turkey's interest if all the revenues of the state were controlled by a central treasury, instead of by many collecting and disbursing agencies, as in the past. So complicated are these financial affairs as they now stand, so poor is Turkey since the World War (she had already lost one tenth of her revenue and one sixth of her population in the Balkan Wars of 1912–1913), so great is the rivalry of the powers, that it was impos- sible to make Turkey pay a war indemnity comparable to that which has been demanded of the other defeated powers. The principle of reparations was set aside by the Peace Conference of Paris, and in its place full validity was given to the pre-war Ottoman Public Debt. Owing to the importance of the Ottoman debt in the political de- velopment and administration of the Turkish Empire, France and Great Britain naturally were jealous of each other in this field. French sentiment was opposed to a British mandate for Constantinople, and England objected to French occupation. Moreover, there will be an inevitable conflict between the obligations of the old debt, chiefly held by France, and the obligations of the new debt that must be incurred to provide a financial basis for government — for the engineering works that are required to provide sanitation in the cities, and railway facilities and irrigation works for potentially rich but undeveloped regions. Under the treaty of Sèvres signed between Turkey and the Allied powers, the Ottoman Public Debt is to be administered as before. It will be in charge of a council composed of British, French, and Italian representatives, and the Council is to levy all revenues intrusted to its management before 1 November 1914. In order to regulate the income of Turkey and provide for the interest and sinking fund necessary for the debt, there will be appointed a Director General of Customs. It is further arranged that all de- tached states — that is, Mesopotamia, Armenia, etc. — are to assume a share of the Ottoman Public Debt as it stood before 1 November Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 439 1914, the amount they assume being proportional to the amount of their average revenue and the ratio between the latter and the average revenue of the whole of Turkey. The Council is to operate until the Ottoman Public Debt has been liquidated. When this result has been achieved, Turkey is to con- sult the Council of the League of Nations to decide whether further advice and administrative and financial assistance are necessary, and if so, in what form. * The administration of the Ottoman Public Debt will be facilitated by a financial commission, for which the Allies have arranged, to con- serve and increase the resources of Turkey. When we consider that there will also be an Interallied commission of control and organiza- tion to supervise the execution of the military clauses of the treaty of Sèvres, it is clear that the new government of Turkey will be for all practical purposes in the hands of the principal Allied powers. Added to the control delegated to these organizations is the provision that all concessions prior to 1914 are conserved and confirmed; this also means that the influence of outside powers upon Turkish internal affairs is confirmed and increased. The control of outside powers is not limited to military and financial matters alone, but applies also to import and export duties, to the reorganization of the electoral system, and to the proportional representation of the races within Turkish frontiers. other TERMS OF THE TREATY OF SEVRES Allied control over Turkish financial matters extends even to the approval or supervision of the national budget, financial laws and regulations, and the improvement of the Turkish currency. Neither the tax system, nor the customs system, nor internal or external loans, nor new concessions, may be arranged without the consent of the financial commission of the Allied powers. To provide against the economic penetration of Turkish territory by Germany, Austria, Hungary, or Bulgaria, the Allies may liquidate the property of citi- zens of those countries in Turkish territories. If the liquidation affects government property, the proceeds are to be turned over to the Reparations Commission set up by the earlier treaties of peace with Germany, Austria, and Bulgaria. Turkish property rights in certain railway companies pass out of German control. Finally, Turkey is required to grant freedom of transit to persons, goods, vessels, etc., passing through her territory, and such goods The treaty practically an Allied receivership Financial details Freedom of transit in transit are to be free of all customs duties. Rates of transport 440 The New World Outlets for Trans- caucasia Indemnity but not full reparation Rise of a Turkish Nationalist Imovement are to be reasonable, regardless of the ownership or nature of the means of transport. To insure the carrying out of these provisions in commercially strategic places, certain ports are declared to be of international interest. In these ports all states that are members of the League of Nations are to enjoy complete freedom and equality of treatment, particularly in the matter of charges and facilities. In all of them there are to be “free zones.” The ports are: Constanti- nople from St. Stefano to Dolma Bagtohi, Haidar-Pasha, Smyrna, Alexandretta, Haifa, Basra, Trebizond, and Batum. Though Georgia, Azerbaijan, Persia, and Russian Armenia lie outside the Turkish frontier, the treaty provides for free access on the part of these four states to the Black Sea by the port of Batum. To Armenia are granted special facilities in the use of the port of Trebi- zond, where she obtains a lease of an area for her own use. In view of the loss of territory which Turkey incurs as a result of the treaty of peace, she is not required to pay a general reparation bill; but she is required to pay indemnities due on account of the claims of the Allied powers for reparation for damages suffered by non- Turkish people. These claims are to cover losses or damages suffered by civilian nationals (as distinct from losses to military forces) of the Allied powers during the war and up to the time that the treaty of peace goes into effect. In addition, Turkey must pay the expenses of the military forces of occupation since 30 October 1918. THE NEW NATIONALIST PARTY With the collapse of Turkish military power in 1918, the occupa- tion of Constantinople and adjacent waters by an Allied army and fleet, and the threat of dismemberment, Turkish sentiment for the integrity of the Turkish Empire crystallized in the form of a Nation- alist party. Organized in October 1919, the new party soon carried .Adrianople and Brusa. It had the whole interior of Anatolia in which to develop, for only the coastal regions were held by the Allies. The French were attacked and defeated at Marash late in February 1920; and their retreat was accompanied by a fresh massacre of Armenians in the Cilician region. The British were harassed on the borders of Kurdistan by tribesmen who were instigated by Turkish officials. The Greek forces that held the demarcation line at Smyrna were hard pressed. The Allied armies had largely disbanded, and the greater part of the world was stricken with disorganization and laden with debt. - Seeing these influences at work, and seeing also their own country Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 441 disintegrating, the Turkish leaders revived the national sentiment and spurred their people to new efforts to defeat the scattered bat- talions of the Allies and regain the empire. In the hope of arrest- ing Nationalist ambitions, the suggestion was made in a number of quarters, particularly in France, that there should be Allied super- vision of Turkish officials, without actual replacement. - It is of course a serious question whether Turkey will ratify in good faith the treaty of Sèvres with the Allied powers. If the Nationalist movement becomes stronger, and if at the same time there should be a growing reluctance on the part of the strong western powers to spend money in maintaining order in Turkey, few of the provisions of the treaty will have any force. If the provisions are accepted in good faith, the government of Turkey will be but a shadow. The Turk- ish army is limited to 50,000 men, of whom 35,000 are to be a gen- darmerie organized and maintained for the purpose of keeping internal order. Turkey will have no fortresses left under her exclusive con- trol. She merely flies a flag over one of the outer forts of Smyrna, while the forts in the Straits region are to be demolished within three months of the signing of the treaty. THE QUESTION OF THE CALIPHATE A question of importance to Turkey is that of the caliphate, or headship of the Moslem church. The Turkish Caliph's claim of descent from the Prophet is not recognized as authentic by important elements both without and within the Turkish Empire. The Sultan of Morocco, the Mahdists of the Egyptian Sudan, the Senussi in the Libyan Desert, the Wahabis in central Arabia, have never made acknowledgment of the Turkish Caliph. Nor has such recognition been given by the Arabs of the Hedjaz, Palestine, and Syria, which contain the holy places of Mecca, Medina, and Jerusalem. Today, throughout the country from Mecca to Aleppo, the Sultan's name has been replaced in the Friday liturgy by that of Sherif Hussein, the hereditary guardian of the holy cities of the Hedjaz, who is referred to as “The Commander of the Faithful,” though he has himself not assumed the title of Caliph. On the other hand the Moslems of India and of Anatolia have always supported the Turkish caliphate (page 415). In spite of these divergent views as to the caliphate, the fact remains that it is the Caliph at Constantinople who is the center of the Otto- man Empire and the concrete force that stands for the Islamic cause in the world, and it is a matter of import whether he shall retain his Will Turkish ratification have any validity? Division of opinion and of religious authority Religious significance of Constan- tinople confirmed 442 The New World Natural limits of Anatolia Treaty agreements respecting lost prop- erty and protection of minori- ties re- maining in the new Turkey residence in Constantinople, the seat of authority for many genera. tions. The Turks feared that if this seat were transferred to inner Anatolia, Moslem faith and Moslem political power would diminish throughout the world and lose ground in the struggle with Chris- tianity and other religions. It was the pressure of the Moslems of India upon British leaders and French desire to prevent British com- mercial control of a possible free state at Constantinople that turned the scale in favor of the Turk and left h m at least a shadow of au- thority in his capital. Moslem faith is still dominated from Con- stantinople, though as a military center its power has disappeared. ETHNIC AND ECONOMIC BASIS OF THE NEW STATE From a huge empire Turkey has shrunk to a small state. The natural eastern boundary of Anatolia is formed by the Taurus and Anti-Taurus mountains (Fig. 213). The Black and Mediterranean seas limit it on the north and south. On the west it is terminated by the Smyrna district (now occupied by Greece) and by the Sea of Marmara. This gives Anatolia an area a little larger than that of California and a population of more than 8,000,000, of which only a small part is nomadic. * The population of the new Turkey is broken up into self-con- tained, isolated groups, ignorant of the outside world, with primitive . carts and plows, very poor roads, no modern towns, houses built of adobe (rarely of wood). There are large areas of unoccupied country and extensive pasture lands. Brigandage is common. . In 1915 Turkey passed a law which practically confiscated the prop- erties abandoned by people who had been exiled on account of her severe persecutions, and this law Turkey is required to void by the treaty of Sèvres. She is also to facilitate the search for lost people (Armenians, Syrians, and others driven into the desert and mountain districts during the war) and the restoration of their property, though of course the internal administration of this measure will be exceed- ingly difficult, if not impossible. Turkish minorities are to receive protection at the hands of the Armenians, the Greeks, the British, etc., in the areas under their respective control, and on her part Turkey is to protect minorities within her new frontiers. The treaty requires Turkey to permit minorities to participate in the use of charitable and educational funds. Quite different from the Turkish peasantry of Anatolia are the Turk- ish rulers, who form an official caste. Also a class apart from the peas- ants are the Turkish nomads who have come into the Anatolian steppes Anatolia: Last Remnant of the Turkish Empire 443 since the conquest. The differences between the three Turkish ele- ments – officials, peasants, nomads — extend to the fields of thought and social custom, and it will take time and experiment to demon- strate the capacity of the three elements to become welded into a single nation. The possession of Smyrna by Greece cuts off the Anatolian hinter- land from its natural outlets on the Mediterranean. Its commerce will flow through alien hands – a distinct handicap. The new Turkey will consist essentially of a mountain-rimmed plateau with a desert interior, though well-watered near the border, where it is capable of high development. If the new government will turn its attention to internal improvements rather than to external conquest and the rule of non-Turkish peoples in remote regions, Turkey may in time become a strong state. Otherwise it must become a liability, an expensive dependency of the great powers. Turkey was heavily laden with debt before 1914, and her system of taxation was notoriously bad. As a result, her productive and commercial power had steadily declined. An aspect of her commer- cial life suggestive in this connection is the purchasing power of the people; in 1912 the imports averaged only $9 per capita, as compared with $40 for France and $127 for Belgium. It is to trade that Turkey must look for her chief sources of revenue, and she is so poor that her commerce will long be required to sustain a very heavy burden of taxation. Her exports for a good many years to come must consist of special articles not produced in agricultural communities near by. Rumania and Russia can produce large quan- tities of grain much cheaper than Turkey, but Turkey is better suited for the production of dried fruits, tobacco, opium, and fine skins. Turkey’s undeveloped wealth will gain in importance because of for- eign need for new raw materials to feed the industries of the world. While half of Anatolia is desert, steppe, and mountain, there are locally fertile areas upon which silk, cotton, tobacco, fine wool, and subtropical fruits can be produced. Improved irrigation works will greatly increase the production and will make cotton growing pos- sible even on the central plain of Konia, where now much of the land is desert, for lack of a proper application of the available water Supply. Best ports of Anatolia now in foreign hands Turkey a debt- ridden country Necessity for com— mercial growth Irrigation possibilities CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN THE MOUNTAIN HOME OF THE KURDs IN the Organized world of today there are but few groups of peo- ple that may lead a wholly isolated and unruly life. If a quarrel- some folk raid neighboring settled peoples, or interfere with the The moun- tain home- land of the semi- nomadic Kurds The Kurd a tool of the Turk security of railways — as do the robber bands of Manchuria, for instance — foreign interference is bound to come. To other reasons why the Kurds of eastern Turkey will not be allowed to pursue their disorderly way without restraint, there is added the powerful reason that they are near vital British interests in Mesopotamia; part of the completed Bagdad line passes close to Kurdish territory. Are the Kurds a powerful people 9 Has the war left them in control of their former territory 9 What will be their disposition in the settlement of the territorial problems involved in the partition of Turkey 9 SETTLED AND NOMADIC POPULATIONS There are about 2,500,000 Kurds in Turkey, of whom the greater part live in eastern Asia Minor in the mountain region called Kurdis- tan (Fig. 216). They are related to the Persians in race and language, but most of them belong to a different Mohammedan sect (the Sunni). Because a part of their territory lies in Persia there is created a problem somewhat similar to that in Armenia where, be- fore the World War, the Armenian people were divided between two powers, Turkey and Russia. * > The Kurds are a semi-nomadic people, going up into the high valley pastures in summer to return in winter to the warmer valleys and lowlands. This seasonal migration brings them into conflict with the settled Armenians of the high valleys round about Wan, Mosul, Kirkuk, Bitlis, and Kharput, and with the Persian villages of Ker- manshah, Isfahan, and Seistan. In some respects the Kurds are to the Mesopotamian and Armenian plains what the Afghans are to northern India or the nomadic Arabs to the oasis dwellers of Syria. The fiercer spirit and wilder mode of life of the Kurds have been the cause of their forcible settlement in many of the Armenian val- leys, where it was designed by the Turkish government that they should make a Mohammedan majority among the people. Downright law- lessness was practiced whenever it suited the Turkish government to make an occasion for it. The Kurd could always be counted upon 444 The Mountain Home of the Kurds 445 #. ºmº sºme 27. # º º 4. */ 2% % }% KURD | STAN [T] Kurds (main areas) a 2 El . (scattered and É usually sparsely settled areas) Other nationalities ,- % º & .* iº FIG. 216. The home of the Kurds about the headwaters of the Tigris. Key to numbers: 1, Turkish-speaking peoples; 2, Armenians; 3, Chaldeans; 4, Assyrians (Nestorians); 5, Jacobites; 6, Persians; 7, Lurs; 8, Arabs. The heavy dot-and-dash line is the old Turko- Persian boundary; the dashed line is part of the temporary southern boundary of Turkey and Armenia; the heavy solid line divides Syria and Mesopotamia (page 103). Note the difficulties in establishing a state that embraces most of the Kurds. It would require revision of parts of two treaties (Sèvres and the Franco-British agreement of 23 December 1920), and difficult negotiations with Armenia and Persia. From British General Staff, Map of Eastern Turkey in Asia, etc., No. 2901, 1: 2,000,000, 1910. S4 40 to assist in the massacre of the non-Moslem populations, and in re- turn he received partial autonomy, having only to pay moderate taxes and to furnish auxiliary troops in time of war. - To hold the Armenians in subjection at the time when they threat- ened revolt, to follow the policy of persecuting the Christians, and at . the same time to content the Kurds, the Turks created a Kurdish cavalry, supplied it with uniforms and arms, and permitted it to raid Armenian and other Christian elements. At the present time the Kurds are more numerous and better armed than the Armenians and may create trouble for the new republic of Armenia. They have persecuted the Nestorian Christians of 446 The New World Nomad and sedentary Kurds Fig. 217. Kurdish village in Upper Mesopotamia. Urmia as systematically and plundered them as regularly as they have the Armenians. - The semi-nomadic tribes of southern Kurdistan are the most intelligent and industrious of the Kurds. In winter they dwell in villages on the plains east of the Tigris; in summer they migrate with their flocks to the Persian border, where they make temporary shelters or bowers of green wood. The wilder tribes farther north live principally in the rugged mountain districts near the Persian frontier; some of them are settled on the land and have terraced and irrigated farms, others are nomadic. While the different Kurd- ish tribes vary in a minor way in their habits, all have two rather distinct types of settlements — those in the upper zone of pasture and those in the lower zone of valley farms. The Kurds were known to Marco Polo and yet earlier travelers as “an evil generation whose delight it is to murder merchants.” While the settled people tend to be hospitable, the treacherous nomads rob passing caravans. Some of the Kurd migrations from the mountains to the plains carry the nomads through villages of their own race, which they systematically plunder of everything that can The Mountain Home of the Kurds 447 be carried away, since they hold their sedentary kinsmen in contempt. In return the farmers, when they are strong enough, demand a toll of the nomad Kurd who wishes to cross their cultivated land or ford a stream whose passage they control. In addition the Kurds happen to live in mountain valleys which lie athwart both ancient and modern trade routes (Figs. 42 and 216). Yet travel among them is hardly safe. They control the mountain passes —the eastern Anatolian gateways—and exact heavy tolls from pass- ing caravans. Indeed, this is one of their chief sources of revenue. The difficulties confronting the administration of Kurdistan lie partly in the fact that the Kurdish tribes claim rights in Christian villages, due to the survival of an old arrangement which allowed the nomadic tribes to winter in any Armenian village. Something will have to be done with the tribes that have raided the Armenians, Nestorians, and sedentary Kurds. Self-government among the Kurds seems out of the question, owing to their deterioration under the Turkish régime, their habit of plundering, and their general in- ability to read and write, as well as their tribal mode of life. With the Turk eliminated, at least some groups of Kurds may choose to set- tle down and become peaceful neighbors, as they have done in certain places in Mesopotamia and Persia. As a result of invasions by both Russians and Turks during the war, some of the settled communities within the range of the Kurds have been extinguished and others reduced to a state of such poverty that it is no longer profitable to FIG. 218. Kurds and Arabs in typical costume. Traffic preyed on by the lawless Kurd The im- possibility of Kurd- ish self- government 448 The New World raid them. In spite of themselves, therefore, some of the Kurdish tribes already have had to give up their predatory habits and settle down to agricultural pursuits in order to live. Tribal or— Permanent settlement is also in line with their tendency during *...* the past twenty years and with the policy of the Turkish govern- Kurds ment, which aimed to split up tribal organizations through fear that the Kurds might combine in large units to fight Turkish troops. But whether settled or nomadic, the Kurd has persisted in maintaining his tribal organization. Each tribe rules and owns the district in which it is settled, and is under the power of the tribal chief in case of war. The Kurds are devotedly attached to their sheikhs, who are responsible for occasional outbursts of fanaticism. TREATY ARBANGEMENTS AFFECTING FOURDISTAN In the treaty of 1920 between Turkey and the Allied and Asso- ciated Powers, the provisions that apply to Kurdistan are as follows: (1) A commission composed of French, British, and Italian repre- sentatives is to frame an autonomous government for pre- dominantly Kurdish areas east of the Euphrates, south of the future boundary of Armenia and north of the Syria- Mesopotamia boundary, provided the Kurds shall some time in 1921 express to the League of Nations a desire to be inde- pendent of Turkey (Fig. 216). * (2) The Kurds of the Mosul vilayet may voluntarily join the in- dependent Kurdish state. (3) Safeguards are to be provided for the Assyro-Chaldeans and other non-Kurdish populations. (4) A commission composed of British, French, Italian, Persian, and Kurdish representatives is to rectify the frontier between Kurdistan and Persia. Present By mid-October of 1919, the British had completed their pacifica- i.”* tion of a large section of Kurdistan. British troops visited many of the enemy villages as well as the valley frontiers delimited by the armistice of November 1918, overcoming all opposition and establish- ing temporary peace. British columns occupied the valleys of offend- ing tribesmen and inflicted punishments for numerous hostile acts. British political officers with small detachments of troops occupied many of the widely scattered villages of Kurdistan, and were able to do this by arming local authorities and turning them into police to administer the country. * The Mountain Home of the Kurds 449 During 1920 there were risings among the Kurds as well as the Arabs of northern Mesopotamia and renewed fighting, with the result that the British forces were withdrawn over a wide area. Accused by opposition elements at home of extravagant plans for conquest, the British government was obliged to curtail its program of pacification. Having a mandatary for Mesopotamia, Great Britain naturally sought to control the headwater region of the Tigris and Euphrates upon which depends the water supply for the irrigation of Mesopo- tamia. The question of ultimate control of Kurdistan remains unsettled, nor can it be settled until the Turkish treaty is ratified and Turkish affairs are entirely reorganized. Weakness of the new States Internal rivalries of Trans- caucasia CHAPTER TWENTY_EIGHT THE TRANSCAUCASIAN PEOPLES TRANSCAUCASIA is one of three narrow connections between East and West. The Suez Canal forms a second; the Bosporus and Darda- nelles sever Europe and Asia at the third. It is a fair inference that much history is made or is in the way of making wherever an isthmus connects two great populated land masses or a strait connects two great seas whose shores are peopled by settled folk and traders. The Transcaucasian land bridge is broadly divided into three parts: Georgia, Armenia, and Azerbaijan (Fig. 220). It has been an historical battleground of rival interests. In its later phases, the struggle for possession has been between Russia and Turkey. At present the struggle is between three new republics, no one of which has sufficient Vitality to stand alone. In any event the three will be the pawns of their neighbors unless protected by one of the western powers. THE NEW GOVERNMENTS AND THE GREAT POWERS Shortly after the Russian revolution of March 1917, an autonomous government was organized in Transcaucasia. It took the form of a federal republic, the members of which — Georgia, Armenia, and Azerbaijan or the country of the Tatars—were governed by separate national councils. But the Federal Republic of Transcaucasia failed to harmonize the discordant aims of its three constituent members; nor could it offer effective resistance to Turkish aggression in the spring of 1918. The Mohammedan Tatars could not be counted on to oppose the Turks and thus assist the Armenians; the Georgians were chiefly interested in their own national security, and even looked to Germany as a protector; the Armenians would not join their two neighbors, because elements among them favored an understand- ing with Soviet Russia. Consequently the federal arrangement was discarded and Transcaucasia as a political organization fell apart. The former Turkish provinces of Kars, Ardahan, and Batum (Fig. 219), which had been taken by Russia in 1878, were renounced by the Soviet government under the Brest-Litovsk treaty of 3 March 1918 and occupied by Turkey. Under Turkish auspices a plebiscite was held, resulting in a forced decision in favor of annexation by Turkey. Turkey acquired an additional strip of territory in Trans- caucasia by the separate treaties which she concluded with the three * 450 The Transcaucasian Peoples 451 zig– Transcaucasian repub- lics in May 1918. The extent of this second annexation was not precisely defined, and e ... f. • * * * ****, ... • * * * * * ***"... a • its validity disappeared º e §§ with the final collapse Russian gains 763-795 § &geroe of Turkish power in Bº! . . talSOLéº; A October 1918. 2 to º §§ In January 1919, lé toº eºs § :, N tº ºft France and Great Brit- • * **) ain appear to have & agreed to divide south- Fig. 219. Successive advances of Russia in Transcaucasia. ern Russia between them as spheres of influence. France was to have the western Ukraine, and Britain was to have the whole Caucasus and Kuban region. At the same time that the British occupied Transcaucasia, a French expedition was sent to Odessa to supervise Ukrainian affairs and direct military operations against the Bolshevists. But the expedition was withdrawn after the refusal of the Ukrainians to yield to the demands of the French leaders for complete military, economic, and political control. The failure of the French at Odessa dangerously weakened the British in Transcaucasia and ultimately led to a change of policy. The almost exclusive control of the unsettled Transcaucasian region remained in the hands of the British only until July–August 1919, when their troops were withdrawn from Armenia and Georgia, except for a few officers at each of the main towns and especially at the city of Batum. The withdrawal was due in small part to the charge made against Great Britain that she was seeking to gain control over additional territory rich in oil, and in larger part to the expense of maintaining alone, in so remote a region, costly military forces and works—an expense that drew vigorous criticisms against the government in the House of Commons. For a time it appeared probable that Italy would succeed Great Britain in the military occupation of the region, since a certain amount of Italian capital is invested there, especially near Batum, and Italy is extremely poor in fuel. Moreover, Italy theretofore had not been assigned any important rôle in maintaining order in the disturbed sections of the Near East. - - The plan for Italian participation came to nothing, however, and after the British withdrawal (1919) almost no military men were French and British agreements Withdrawal of British troops 452 The New World ... (p.98%) Railroads ſo cº Oil 3. % Manganese Soale of miles d 59 1 & FIG. 220. Transcaucasia and the indeterminate boundaries of its three political divisions. The western boundary of Armenia is tentative; it was agreed to leave the final settlement to Presi- dent Wilson. Many parts of the other boundaries represent merely paper agreements and have as yet no actuality in boundary posts and administrative control. Relief work left in the region. A small force of officers and women assistants carried on after the attached to the Interallied relief organization went to Kars and withdrawal Erivan. No relief work was undertaken on the Turkish border and Intermix- ture of TäCeS towards Azerbaijan, because the Kurds and the Tatars had taken possession of the region in the belief that the Armenians had been deserted by the Allies. mº, RACIAL DIFFERENCES AND THEIR POLITICAL RESULTS Transcaucasia has remnants of almost all the races which for ages past have crossed and recrossed its frontiers and sought refuge within its bounds. Five main groups are divided into forty odd subdivisions, of which from twenty to twenty-five are indigenous. It results that in starting their national life the three Transcau- casian states are confronted by extremely difficult boundary questions, because no one race inhabits a given region exclusively, all being intermingled throughout a wide zone. This is especially the case on The Transcaucasian Peoples 453 so *****THE CAUCASUS REGION Rough land % º 2% Z º º ºr tº: * º % º SCALE OF MILES §* ſº º S º sºº 2% 2% Nºw i ~ 9), ºfte i. ſº N PIA NS Nº ==Pºž). % * ſº | W % º % °/2 º Ø s % § 900 23.9 º % § sº º L-IN- Cº % Fº FIG. 221. Note the Small extent of smooth land in Georgia and Armenia and the isolated char- acter of the Armenian basins. The boundaries between rough and smooth lands are generalized from various relief maps. The outlines of the Snowfields along the crest of the Caucasus Moun- tains follow Stieler's Hand-Atlas, 1916. º º the eastern frontier of Russian Armenia, where Armenians and Tatars are hopelessly mixed. In the Turkish treaty of 1920 it is provided that Armenia, Azerbaijan, and Georgia are to agree mutually upon their frontiers. All of them are to have special privileges at the in- ternational port of Batum. The Georgians number 1,600,000, the Armenians about 1,000,000 (not counting refugees from Turkey), the Azerbaijan Tatars about 3,000,000. - There is great diversity in the character of the people. In Georgia the inhabitants have a settled way of life, whereas the Tatars of the mountain region on the southeast live in a primitive fashion and depend chiefly upon herds and flocks, though they have control of the oil wells at Baku. In Georgia there is a small feudal aristocracy and a large farming peasantry. The northern mountain border of Georgia is inhabited by unruly mountaineers. The Tatars are Mohammedans, disposed to be friendly to Turkey, Number and character of the population 454. The New World Differ- ences and misunder- standings Argument for federa- tion under a single mandatary Trans- caucasia backward but rich in resourcéS while the Georgians and Armenians are Christians and seek release from Turkish control. The Armenians of Transcaucasia, dwelling in a highland region broken by many valleys, are farmers and herdsmen. To their other causes of weakness are added their inland position and the penetra- tion of their villages and pastures by Kurds on the South and Tatars on the east. If allowed to perpetuate their quarrels, these three unlike peoples cannot do otherwise, in the unsettled state of the world, than fall into complete financial and political ruin. The religious differences accentuate the racial differences. Men go armed almost everywhere. Murder is common. Robber bands make travel dangerous. The Tatars and Kurds hate the Armenians and massacre them at every opportunity, being massacred themselves in turn. Such a region is peculiarly adapted for international intrigue unless held in control by a strong European power. e It has been argued that though each Transcaucasian group might be kept distinct, the whole region should be placed under the League of Nations or a single mandatory power, because of the geographical position of the country at one of the crossroads of Eurasia. It is thought that if placed under separate mandataries, the three constit- uent peoples would intrigue against each other and quarrel endlessly over boundaries, customs, the migrations of nomadic villagers, water rights, irrigation privileges, mines, and all the other conditions and resources whose development is necessary if the lot of the people is to be bettered and orderly governments are to be maintained. Some sort of outside supervision seems absolutely essential to peace. INTERNAL ECONOMIC CONDITION The problems of Transcaucasia at the present time are chiefly: (1) To maintain order. (2) To develop the country's resources. (3) To build wagon roads and railways. (4) To develop an organized community life under the protec- tion of one or more of the great powers. The three nations occupying Transcaucasia are young, inexpe- rienced, and in the main disorderly and poor. The leaders are corrupt and incompetent. The government of Georgia has nationalized the land without compensation to the original owners, and for a time flew the red flag of Bolshevism above the Georgian national flag. Only The . Transcaucasian Peoples 455 with the help of British troops of occupation was order established and railway and telegraph service improved, at least for a time. The people of Azerbaijan are ignorant, lazy, and superstitious, occupying a country shut off from the western world. But within its frontiers there are rich oil deposits, centering at Baku, and a pipe line con- veys the crude petroleum to Batum on the Black Sea coast of Georgia. The life of Azerbaijan can be stabilized only if political and general education go hand in hand with economic development. Russian Armenia (as distinct from Turkish Armenia) is in a worse condition than either Georgia or Azerbaijan. For several winters its people have been on the verge of starvation. Many have died of famine and of the diseases that come in its train. Such roads as it had are falling into ruin. There is stagnation of business, with ris- ing freight rates, increased poverty, and community wars at every turn. Finally, the country has been invaded by Russian Soviet forces and a Bolshevist government set up. The condition of Turkish Armenia is even worse. Only a remnant of the area formerly occupied by Armenians can be put under Ar- menian administration. Half the Armenians in Turkey were killed or died of disease or starvation. Less than a million are scattered through a district that once held two or three times that number. And few Armenians living abroad will care to return to a land where life offers primitive and even dangerous conditions. LoCAL TREATIES Pending the final settlement of the affairs of the three countries of Transcaucasia, provisional settlements were arranged; but the general insecurity of the region and the political and social in- stability of the world give little hope that these local settlements will bring peace. The Armenians of Karabagh made an agreement with the Republic of Azerbaijan whereby both Armenians and Tatars were to be represented in the civil administration of the district: this is because the populations are so thoroughly intermingled that it is impossible to draw a dividing line between them. The Republic of Georgia and the Republic of Azerbaijan likewise concluded a treaty, whose main provisions are as follows: (1) Neither side can start a war with an outside government with- out previous agreement with the other. (2) Each state agrees to join its neighbor in case a war is brought on by another state. Plight of Russian and Turkish Armenia Agreement between the Ar- menians of Karabagh and the Tatars Treaty between Georgia and Azer- baijan 456 The New World - The Georgian Republic (3) The treaty is to last three years. (4) The two states mutually agree to safeguard each other's in- dependence. The provisions of such treaties between politically unstable peoples have little significance beyond indicating the aspirations of the moment. Out of the wreck of successive agreements something is always salvaged that comes at last to be incorporated in the permanent treaties of stable governments. SPECIAL FEATURES OF GEORGIA Georgia declared itself an independent republic in 1918. Govern- ment is by an elected national council, or assembly, with a responsible ministry. The new state at first accepted German protection and Germany sent troops to Tiflis and probably restrained the Turks from occupying Georgia. By the Russo-German treaty of 27 August 1918 (supplementary to the treaty of Brest-Litovsk), Russia acquiesced in Germany's right to recognize the independence of Georgia. In 1920 Georgia concluded a treaty with Soviet Russia in which the - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - ºn " - - - - Fig. 222. Tiflis, capital and chief city of the Republic of Georgia. The Transcaucasian Peoples 457 Fig. 223. The harbor of Batum, principal port of Transcaucasia on the Black Sea. independence of Georgia was recognized within the following territory: the provinces of Tiflis, Kutais, and Batum, the districts of Zakataly and Sukhum, and a part of the Black Sea government. But the military conditions imposed gave the Bolshevists practical control of the republic. The treaty has theoretical force only so long as the Soviet government exists, and no practical force whatever so long as organized military forces under anti-Bolshevist leaders control the Kuban and the Don country. The Georgian Republic has an area of 35,000 square miles and a population of 2,000,000. The region is well located as a thoroughfare for the trade that flows westward from territory east of the Caspian Sea and from Persia, whence arailway runs north across Armenia to join the Georgian system. It has some oil fields and copper deposits. It has also the greatest manganese deposits in the world, which were the source of 44 per cent of the world's supply in 1913; in 1918 and 1919 production had dropped practically to nothing. It has fertile valley lands and an excellent climate for cereals and subtropical prod- ucts, like tobacco, cotton, dried fruits, raw silk, etc. The borders of the Armenian highland on the south and the snow-capped Caucasus on the north form excellent natural frontiers. Within this territory the population is three fourths Georgian. 458 - The New World People of Armenia DIFFICULTY OF THE AR- MENIAN MANDATARY Armenia proclaimed its independence early in 1918 at Garine, a # place located in the cen- º n º ter of the high plateau of Armenia. The claims heavy solid line enclosing the stippled area, maximum limits of of the new republic aI’6” Armenia as now established by custom in Transcaucasia and ge i by treaty (Sèvres, 1920) between the Allied powers and Turkey. shown on Figure 224, It was arranged that the final boundary on the west should but within these fron- FIG. 224. The broken lines represent Armenia's claim; the be based on the recommendation of President Wilson. tº - -- tiers only a small part of the people are Armenian; the rest are principally Kurds, Turks, and Syrians. With these facts in mind, the leaders of the Allied powers required Turkey to relinquish sovereignty over but four Vila- yets — Wan, Bitlis, Erzerum, and Trebizond (Fig. 225) — with an area of 75,000 square miles, 50 per cent more than that of the state of New York. The Armenian population has been so much reduced that probably only 300,000 at the most live in these four districts. Turkey, Armenia, and the Allied powers have mutually agreed to leave the exact location of the Armenian-Turkish frontier on the south and southwest to the recommendation" of President Wilson. While the decisions of the Turkish treaty of 1920 (treaty of Sèvres) cut Armenia off from access to the sea at the Gulf of Alexandretta, there is provided an outlet at Trebizond. In addition, Armenia will have an outlet at Batum, which may become a free international port with outlet facilities on terms of equality to all the Trans- caucasian peoples. In Transcaucasia, Armenia claims about 25,000 square miles of territory; but the number of people in the region can hardly be estimated, even, owing to the losses by war and star- vation and the flight thither of refugees from Turkish Armenia. Before the war it had a total population of all elements of about 2,000,000, of which half were Armenians. It is an agricultural coun- try with a small urban population. The principal towns are Kars and Erivan. There are extensive alpine meadows, but no forests. A few rich irrigated valleys, a type of which is Aras, export fruit and wine. Erivan produces cotton and Karabagh exports raw silk. - The Armenian nation had an independent existence in the past, but lost this position when the Turk extended his rule over Asia | Submitted near the close of the Wilson administration but not yet announced by the Allied powers, owing to chaotic political conditions. The Transcaucasian Peoples 459 Minor in the 13th and 14th centuries. Thereafter the Armenians Deporta- were persistently persecuted. For example, in 1894–1895 the Mos- . lem Turks attacked the Christian Armenians and put to death from of the Ar- . 100,000 to 200,000 of them. These atrocities were repeated in 1909, ...” in the Adana region especially. Syrians Taking advantage of the World War, the Turks “deported ” thou- sands of Armenians and Syrians, young and old; that is, the “exiles” were driven into the wilder parts of the mountains and the Syrian desert and left to die. Only to mention a directly calculable result, more than 800,000 Armenians were assassinated, burned alive, or starved by the Turks between 1914 and 1918. The Christian nations of the West, therefore, sought not only to end the rule of the Turk in Europe (except for nominal sovereignty over a mere patch of land northwest of Constantinople), but also to free his subject peoples at Smyrna and in Mesopotamia, Syria, Palestine, and the Armenian districts bordering Russia. Americans have long had great interest in the missionary schools and colleges, the hospitals, and the social development of Turkey. Z 0 t her nationalities 0 20 40 60 80 !CO M. - 35 3 £2. º: [] Armenians B: 3% sº 4% % - § .22. *2a: YS- & º % º % º & & § * % %% £% £2. %26º FIG. 225. Ethnography and boundaries in the Armenian country. All boundaries are provi- sional, including the one with Persia (page 448). The western boundary as shown here repre- sents the units of the four Turkish vilayets renounced by Turkey. A more detailed boundary was recommended by President Wilson. Key to numerals: 1, Turkish-speaking peoples; 2, Kurds; 3, Greeks; 4, Assyrians (Nestorians); 5, Chaldeans; 6, Jacobites; 7, Persians; 8, Arabs. 460 The New World Armenians a minority in the historically Armenian #Tea Depend- ence upon Allied support Tatars of Azer- baijan Successive British and Bolshevist occupation There is a missionary college at Beirut in Syria, one at Kharput in Armenia, and one at Constantinople. On this account the European powers were unanimous in desiring America as the mandatary of Ar- menia; but it is unlikely that the United States will accept so remote and costly an obligation, in view of the acute problems nearer home, especially in the Caribbean and the Philippines. Though the massacres, historical and recent, have left but a fraction of the race, in modern times Armenians never have formed more than a minority in any large administrative district. There could not be established a new Armenia similar to the Armenia of a given period of the past, without putting into it populations of different race and speech, far more numerous than the Armenians themselves – a case similar to that of the Jews of Palestine. The Armenians could not police or develop the whole region that some of their leaders claim. At least, they could do so only with loans from the Allies and with the support of Allied officials and possibly Allied troops. These forms of assistance would be expensive and cannot be lent at this time. Moreover, such a plan would be a great encouragement to other minorities to seek Allied aid in holding coun- try for the maintenance of which they have neither the moral nor the financial strength. Such a proceeding would create nations of artificial character without real stability. These are practical considerations which must be faced as squarely as the sentimental considerations that spring from a desire to achieve historical justice. AZERBAIJAN - A TATAR BOLSHEWIST REPUBLIC The Azerbaijan Tatars are of totally different race and speech from either Armenians or Georgians. Part of them live just across the frontier of Persia (Fig. 220). They number about 3,000,000 in Russia, and live in an area of 40,000 square miles. - - The Tatars of Transcaucasia, after establishing the Azerbaijan Tatar Republic, with a national assembly and council of ministers, altered the form of the government, which is now similar to that of Bolshevist Russia. The republic is reported to include the former governments of Baku and Elisavetpol, and to be aiming at union with Persian Azer- baijan and Daghestan, a province of Russia north of the Caucasus. Baku, with its valuable oil wells, fell under Bolshevist control at first; but subsequently a more moderate government, friendly to the Allies, seized power, and a British expeditionary force occupied the city late in 1918. When the British force was withdrawn, the city The Transcaucasian Peoples 461 was captured by the Turko-Tatars and annexed to the Azerbaijan Tatar Republic. Wº. In May and June 1920, Bolshevist forces invaded Azerbaijan, captured the British war vessels at Enzeli on the southern coast of the Caspian Sea, and invaded Persian territory. This campaign was carried out in spite of a prior agreement with Persia to abrogate the understandings of the Czar's government respecting concessions and a sphere of influence in Persia. Embarrassed in the west by Polish resistance and on the south by Ukrainian forces under Wrangel and others, the Bolshevist leaders curtailed their Transcaucasian program and withdrew from Persia. CONCLUSION The political situation in the Transcaucasian region is thoroughly confused and will remain so until the larger forces are resolved which affect these weak and poor communities. The Armenians sought peace with Turkey only to be presented with impossible terms. A Bolshevist invasion followed, and an unrepresentative Soviet- Armenian government was established. Georgia was next attacked and its capital, Tiflis, besieged, but it had neither the strength nor the unity and experience to withstand the Bolshevist forces without and within. Azerbaijan has offered no real resistance to Bolshevist con- trol. Under these circumstances there can be no independence and reorganization until there has been established a definite policy toward the Bolshevist government of Russia by the western powers. Should no such policy be forthcoming, Russian Soviet control is designed to extend to its old frontiers in Transcaucasia; for it was not so much against the Transcaucasian governments themselves as against Turkey that the Bolshevist attack was aimed as an answer to the effort of the Turkish Nationalists to exterminate Armenia and expand to the Georgian frontier. It is a mark of the ever-changing character of the politics of the Near East that the Nationalists of Turkey and the Bolshevists of Russia should have followed this difference with a reconcilement and even a treaty. By May 1921 military supplies were shipped in some quantity from Southern Russia to Turkey. CHAPTER TWENTY-NINE - PERSIA IN RELATION TO BRITISH INTERESTS Persia EACH of the ancient nations of Europe and Asia was in its time a :* center from which there radiated a host of civilizing influences. The state Roman and Greek civilizations are the better known because of their military exploits and their high culture, with its profound influence on western civilization. A more remote but appreciable influence has been exerted by the civilizations of the “transit” lands of the Near East. Persia, the outpost on the east, has always been of interest to the western world. In the middle of the 6th century B. C., Cyrus created a powerful empire stretching from the AEgean to the Oxus and the Indus. The brilliant recrudescence under the Sassanian kings (3d to 7th centuries A. D.) shared the common fate of the transit lands, Arab conquest being followed by Turkish and Mongol invasions. The Iranian oases lie open to the steppes and deserts of Central Asia. As Omar Khayyam depicted the sophisticated civilization of the oasis, so the great epic poet Firdousi immortalized the struggle between the sedentary Iranian population and the nomad Turanians and Tatars. The situation has not lost its significance today; Persia remains a transit land on the road to the east, open on the north to the power that controls the steppe. FIG. 226. One of the gates of Teheran, the capital of Persia. 462 Persia in Relation to British Interests 463 sº º AQ § G ºy ...'....'...'s - §3% ( %\\ º Fº Å;& Scale of miles § tº 2sº º-l ºšº Tº 100 0 100 300 500; KZ % Q-J-23% FIG. 227. Persia's present boundaries are shown by a heavy line. Additional territory which was part of the Persian Empire at the time of its greatest extent (500 B.C.) is shown by stippling; according to Shepherd, Atlas of Ancient History, 1913, Pl. 8. LAND AND PEOPLE Only in the central and eastern parts of Persia, between the Cas- pian Sea and the Persian Gulf and eastward to the Afghan frontier, does there survive a considerable block of population of rather pure Persian type, who still speak the Persian language. In the west (the provinces of Tabriz, Kermanshah, and Khuzistan) the population includes Kurds, Armenians, and Arabs, rebellious in temper, remote from authority, living in broken country difficiilt to conquer or to police. In the northeastern part of Persia the people are Turkish in origin and speech; for example, Turkomans from Russian Turkestan. Along the shores of the Persian Gulf there are Arab and negroid elements. These ethnic variations are due to Tatar, Arab, and Turkish conquests, which were carried out frequently between the 10th and 18th centuries. Persia is one fifth as large as the United States, and consists of country about as extensive and twice as populous as that portion of the American West between the Rockies and the Pacific, south of Idaho and Oregon. All told, the population numbers less than 10,000,000 (Fig. 228). A large part of the country is mountainous and desert, difficult to cross, and almost without inhabitants. The Persian mountain and desert people hard to govern Persian , people a mixture of Iſa CeS population is distributed in widely scattered irrigated spots; each part tends to live to itself, and there is no national cohesion. To gov- ern so large and varied a country under primitive conditions of travel, away from the few railways and automobile roads that run between 464 - The New World 5IO 55 % sº § sº- * cº, Y- Cſ). Yº. Y-A 30 *.*.*.*.* > . POPULATIONDENSITſ per sq.mi. per sq.km. under 16 [] under 6 16 – 32 É 6 – 12: 32 – 64 12 – 25 Over 64 Over 25 100 50 0 100 200 MILES FIG. 228. Persia is made up in part of almost uninhabited desert (southeast) and in part of densely inhabited irrigated valley lands (northwest). In modern times it has not been able to develop its own resources, lacking capital and initiative; and its rich stores of petroleum have brought rival powers (Russia and Great Britain) into the field of domestic as well as inter- national politics. Modified from Philips, Comparative Wall Map of Asia, 1: 12,000,000, 1912. the chief towns, would be a big task for a strong central government. The Mohammedan elements in the country do not want this kind of government; they thrive on graft and disorder. Even if left to itself, the decent element would find it exceedingly difficult to put down brigandage and make life, property, and travel safe. PERSIAN AZERBAIJAN We have seen that Persia's border people have always given trouble to the central government. One of these border elements is Persian Azerbaijan, a region peopled by Tatars related by ties of religion and language to the Tatars of Russian Transcaucasia, just across the Persia in Relation to British Interests 465 international boundary line. The disposal of Russian Azerbaijan is still in doubt. If it should not become independent, it would be natural for Persia to get it, because part of it was formerly Persian, being ceded to Russia by treaties in 1813 and 1828. It should not be turned over to Persia unless the natives desire it, however, and even then only if Persia gives conspicuous evidence of a capacity for Orderly self-government. - If the Persian and the Russian portions of Azerbaijan remain sepa- rate as before, Russian Azerbaijan will be a field of intrigue for Bol- shevist influence within the Persian border so long as the present Russian government continues. A. FIELD OF FOREIGN RIVALRY In addition to her internal difficulties, Persia has had to face the interference of three European powers, especially in the past twenty-five years. Russia and England have both tried to push their control of Persian affairs to the greatest lengths. Just before the World War and also during the early stages of it, Germany was courting the Persians and corrupting them, hoping to have their aid when German and Turkish armies should march through Persia to begin their conquest of India. Railways have been the focus of Russian and British rivalry. Russia has wished to secure a trans-Caucasus line to the head of the Persian Gulf (Fig. 230), as one of her possible warm water outlets. Great Britain, on the other hand, has been quite as eager to complete a railway to India across southern Persia and Baluchistan. In addi- tion to this, British statesmen have always kept a very jealous eye on all incursions by foreign powers into the Near Eastern realm whereby Britain's road to India might be threatened in even the slightest degree. The chief differences between Russia and England were settled in 1907 by an agreement which gave Russia a sphere of influence in northern Persia that was more than 300,000 square miles in area. It extended from Afghanistan to Kurdistan and included the capital, Teheran. The British sphere included southern Persia on the borders of Baluchistan, an area scarcely half as large as that assigned to Russia. The British thus got control over the outlet of the Per- sian Gulf, which would enable their navy to prevent the landing or the embarkation of an enemy expeditionary force at the head of the gulf. It was intended to leave central Persia either independent or neutral ground; but it was inevitable that Russian and British European interfer- ence in Persia Important railways that will some day cross Per- sia For Russia a huge northern and for Great Britain a southern sphere of influence 466 The New World Great Britain's interests both political and conti- mercial - * * * **** Fig. 229. General landscape view in the vicinity of Teheran, Persia. interests should extend their sway farther into the interior until they controlled the whole country. With Russia diverted by civil disorder, her influence is for the moment withdrawn from Persia, while that of Great Britain has become more powerful. The Bolshevists have denounced the 1907 Anglo-Russian agreement as being unjust to Persia. In addition, the present Russian government has informed Persia that it is ready to surrender all the concessions in Persia obtained under the régime of the Czar and to forego interference in Persian affairs, though the value of this promise by the Bolshevists can amount to little in view of their oft-expressed contempt for treaties, even those bearing their own signatures. On its side the British government steadily with- stood the Persian request for recognition by the Peace Conference of Paris and for a status of independence and self-government, free from foreign control. BRITISH OIL INTERESTS Great Britain's desire to guide Persian affairs is due not only to one of the lessons of the war — that British India in time of general disturb- ance has some very rebellious elements (there are more than 66,000,000 Mohammedans in India) — but also to the British policy of securing as great a share as possible of the world's oil supply. That this is not the policy of British commercial interests alone is shown by the Persia in Relation to British Interests 467 *, * 0. - •. 5 ~, º . Krashovodsk §: §§o jºš. -- ** ** ~ * Yºzº”f”%kākhī:::::::::A §§23:39Ng㺠#; C-K- 4% 5 .5 6 TIG. 230. British progress in Persia. The former Russian sphere has no basis in reality on account of the present disordered state of Russian political life; the former British sphere is for practical purposes replaced by the concession of the Anglo–Persian Oil Company, Ltd. (in which the British government owns a controlling interest), and by the terms of the Anglo–Persian treaty of 1919. Based on data in Redwood, A Treatise on Petroleum, Vol. I, 1913; Schweer, Die tür- kischpersischen Erdölvorkommen, 1919.; Morgan, Mission Scientifique en Persie, 1895; Stahl, Hand- buch der regionalen Geologie, 1907; Geographische Zeitschrift, Vol. XXI, 1915, pp. 483–499; Geo- graphical Journal, Vol. IX, 1897, pp. 528–532; Stieler's Hand-Atlas; and other sources. . fact that the British government itself is the chief stockholder in one of the great Persian oil fields. One of the largest operators is the Anglo-Persian Oil Company, Ltd., which was formed in 1909 and in which the British government purchased control in 1914, increasing its holding in 1917 to $25,000,000, with enormous annual profits. British government investment in Persian oil cannot fail to influence British policy in Persia, quite apart from the position of that country as a buffer state. All British imports for development, as well as ex- t 468 The New World Great oil TeSOU1rCeS of Persia British de- pendence upon fuel oil ports, are tax-free. The oil concession covers nearly 500,000 square miles, or more than three fourths of the area of all Persia, and with it go guarantees of police protection by the Persian government and the privilege of purchasing cultivated land belonging to the state. For . her rights, Persia was to obtain 16 per cent of the annual net profits; but the company has withheld this profit and thereby has caused very bitter feeling in Persia. Oil is probably the chief undeveloped asset of Persia for which there is a keen demand. The oil fields of Persia alone would make her important in international affairs; she is comparable in this respect with Mexico, in whose oil lands a large amount of foreign capital is invested under constitutional guarantees that have been broken or set aside. Persian oil is at present coming from Maidan-i-Naphtun, about two hundred miles north-northeast of the head of the Persian Gulf. Thence it flows through a ten-inch pipe line to Abadan on the Shatt-el-Arab, the common outlet of the Tigris and Euphrates rivers at the head of the Persian Gulf. There are many other localities where oil may be obtained, but development awaits stable political conditions. England's interest in Persian oil is due not only to the general concern for fuel which all industrial nations feel, but also to the dependence of her commercial fleet upon the protection of the navy. The use of oil as fuel is especially favored for battleships, because it is economical in space and labor. The growth of great oil companies that control the world's output of oil might some day make the price excessive to the British government and thus have grave political consequences that would threaten her national security. The fact that the oil from the Persian fields will also enable the Indian government to substitute oil for coal on the Western Indian Railways increases Great Britain's interest in maintaining her hold on Persia. - One of the problems of the future is to make the British adminis- tration in Persia square with Persian right to independence. If the oil merchant controls Persian affairs, the future state of the country will be no better than the past. And it goes without saying that the people of Persia must themselves benefit by the use of the oil. It is a part of their natural inheritance which should not be taken by either force or intrigue. They are entitled to a fair share of the profits, and this has been denied them in the past. ANGLO-PERSIAN TREATY PROVISIONS On 9 August 1919, Great Britain and Persia signed the Anglo- Persian treaty, which has as its chief provisions: Persia in Relation to British Interests 469 (1) Great Britain respects, the independence of Persia. (This is, however, a purely nominal independence in view of the provi- sions that follow.) (2) The British government will supply expert advisers to the Persian government at the latter's expense. (Naturally Persia will be pressed to follow their advice whether she wishes to or not.) (3) The British government will supply the Persian government with officers, munitions, and modern military equipment for a military force designed to preserve order in the country and on its frontiers. (And thus secure order on the frontiers of British India.) (4) The British government will make a loan to Persia which will be guaranteed by the revenues from customs or other sources. (5) Great Britain will build railroads and other means of trans- port to extend trade and prevent famine. (With British capital and to the profit of British investors as well as for the benefit of Persia.) (6) Persia and Great Britain agree to appoint a joint committee of experts to revise the existing customs tariff. As one of the Allies who have been consulted in the matter, the United States will not give approval of the treaty of Great Britain with Persia until the people of Persia support it, for it was due to British influence that Persia was prevented from presenting her case at the Peace Conference of Paris. The influence of British interests is seen in the fact that the treaty itself was negotiated in secret. ALTERNATIVE POLICY If the government of Persia could be given complete freedom from outside or foreign interference, there would undoubtedly follow for a time a period of internal disorder. Were disorder confined to the neutral central area where it would interfere least with investments held by foreigners, it would do the world no immediate harm. It might even lead to the development of strong men who could at last set Persia free from reactionary and paralyzing Mohammedan influences, from her superstitions, and indolences, and create an inde- pendent state, capable of managing its own affairs, of carrying out internal reforms in every branch of the government, and of restor- ing some of the glories of the past. United States op- posed to a treaty not sanctioned by the people of Persia Need of a stronger govern- ment An arid continental interior Belted arrange- ment of soils and vegetation CHAPTER THIRTY INNER ASIA : THE UNSETTLED LAND OF THE NOMAD IN the vast interior of Asia are small groups of peoples of importance to the whole circle of countries roundabout them. Thus Tibet, long nominally a province of China, has recently become independent (under British protection); former Russian penetration of Inner and Outer Mongolia involved China in constant difficulties; at intervals Afghanistan has threatened the peace of India and, more recently, of Persia: Turkestan has a variety of unstable Mohammedan peoples. THE GEOGRAPHICAL ENVIRONMENT Inner Asia is in general a land of interior drainage, with mountain streams descending to the desert borders, where at greater or less distances from the base of the mountains they are lost in salt lakes or desert sands. Much of the region is wholly uncultivable because of the aridity. Part of it is composed of sand and gravel desert, part is covered with heavy incrustations of salt, part consists of high, cold mountain country, and part of rich valley floors capable of irrigation. - The sand and gravel deserts have very little vegetation, and are covered in part with shifting sand dunes called barkhans, as for example in the desert of Takla-Makan (in Eastern Turkestan). The sand deserts with the accompanying salt deposits and brackish lakes occupy portions of the central desert floors. The border of each basin is composed of gravelly waste deposited in a broad belt at the foot of the mountains, and supports a thin vegetation useful to the nomads in their wanderings from summer pastures in the mountains to winter pastures on the borders of the oases. Large tracts of Inner Asia, especially Mongolia and the northern part of Russian Turkestan, are covered with loam formed upon heavy deposits of wind-blown loess. Upon the loamy soil grass grows in relative abundance during the rainy season of spring, and supplies pasture to the tent-dwelling nomads that inhabit the region. - While each desert basin has its belts of soil and corresponding helts of vegetation and of population, as in Eastern Turkestan, the whole of Inner Asia may be described as having its chief salt and sand districts in a broad belt extending from the Caspian Sea eastward through Eastern Turkestan, Tibet, and western Mon- golia, and principally from the Aral Sea to Lop Nor (Fig. 232). * 470 Inner Asia: The Unsettled Land of the Nomad 471 -*- i20 1. ** ---. * 8b. –H– # NeSamara ſº º T 9 a. % âterinburg Sºs A. * . 1. º ** ** - tº « o *s-, ..." "A jº'ºZ. º {Tobolsk ---.S.’ s ) - S º º, sº N - | & 㺠**** ," $. 3. & * º, * • & º * , º % 3.º > * % sº tºº f % º #22 * Lºº... ºf sº & 㺠º % }% & gº §sº §. º ºº Orº a* %2. B ğ. º sº 3–Š %. % T. % gºp-2-3-2S: 㺠# an ſº **:: N N º ſk º 2. 2. *zº. Ø *...*** 23 3.4% 22 º % sº -3%%% - º º º sº *E*@ gº º %$2 º ; aiderabat 4. Q ãº;. sº º, s º % - ©3 * iº % ſº l > : - § - & i. º Zºº 3 * o 3 º * * == ~~~ * N lºss. Sº Y.Y. Scale 1:10 OOOOOO . Şsº Vy , *-*=*—“” | the ceºs. Review º #. B to karaſcº /*ailroad's: existing-, proposed.----. FIG. 239. Outline map showing in detail the proposed connections between the Russian and the Indian railway systems through Afghanistan. The question of the independence of disorderly peoples deserves a moment's further consideration, for to a marked degree it affects international policy in critical places. For example, in 1862 France got by treaty the right to support the independence of the Sultan of Maskat. This has enabled unscrupulous merchants to raise the French flag on Arab and Indian sailing vessels, and thus to get guns and ammunition into Afghanistan, by way of Djibouti (in French Somaliland) to Maskat and thence to the coast of Persian Balu-º 486 The New World Evil ef- fects of il- legal trade in arms with un- ruly border peoples chistan, thereby furnishing the means of raising those perpetual border revolts against British rule that may some day lead to a Mo- hammedan rebellion in India. It was in the same way that a great deal of trouble was given the United States by shipments of German arms into Mexico when the United States was in armed dispute with that country in 1916. In the past English merchants have carried arms to Morocco for the Moors to use against the French and Spanish, and to Madagascar for the use of the Hovas against the French. Some of the small turbu- lent states would probably have been taken over long ago by the great powers if it were not, as all the world knows, that the powers are jealous of each other and hitherto have expected to profit by dis- order. A great deal of the turbulence is caused by merchants of these same big powers who find their trade in arms profitable in spite of all the risks of capture and confiscation. THE TIBETAN HIGHLAND The area of Tibet is a little less than 500,000 square miles, or nearly twice that of the state of Texas. It is a land of exceedingly lofty mountains and high desert tablelands and valleys. Some parts of Inner Asia: The Unsettled Land of the Nomad 487 - - - º - -- - | - º º Fig. 241. Near the border between Afghanistan and Baluchistan. the region were not known until recently, one great section, including a mountain range theretofore unknown, having been explored by Sven Hedin as late as 1906–1908. Until recent years only Chinese representatives were permitted to enter Lhasa, the capital of the country. In all there are about 2,000,000 Tibetans, living in semi-inde- pendent tribes, each with its religious leader, called a Lama. The chief religious ruler, called the Dalai Lama, has hitherto lived at Lhasa in the royal monastery. In recent years British interests in Tibet have become more im- portant because of the British government's desire to protect its northern Indian frontier, to establish trade relations between the people of India and Tibet, and to gain access to southern China by way of the more populous eastern and southeastern sections of Tibet. The Tibetans have always opposed political and commercial penetra- tion on the part of Great Britain and China. Though agreeing in 1893 to the establishment of a trade market at Yatung, situated in Tibet just outside the Sikkim frontier in northern India, the Tibetan government later authorized the tearing down of the boundary pillars between these two provinces, and the building of a wall across the way. Fearing that the continued hostility of the Tibetans was inspired by Russia, Great Britain sent a military expedition into Tibet in 1903–1904, under command of General McDonald and Colonel Young- husband. The latter entered Lhasa on 7 August 1904. The Dalai British interests in Tibet British military expedition to Lhasa 488 The New World Activities of the Dalai Lama Conflict of Chinese and British interests FIG. 242. Camel transport in Inner Asia. Tibetans carrying merchandise, Shansi, China. Lama fled, but a treaty was signed with Tibetan representatives which opened three places in Tibet to Indian trade: Yatung, Gyangtse, and Gartok. Trade was to be free. This proposal was agreed to by China, Tibet then being nominally under her control, and in 1906 she signed a treaty approving the Tibetan treaty and promised not to let any other power interfere in the affairs of Tibet. England, on her side, promised not to annex Tibet or interfere with her adminis- tration, and in 1907 confirmed this position by the Anglo-Russian treaty. When the Dalai Lama fled from Tibet in 1904, he first took refuge in Mongolia. From there he went to Peking, where he was told by the Chinese government that his land was really Chinese territory and that he must subject himself to the Chinese authorities. He was given an annual pension and sent back to Lhasa in 1909. Dis- orders occurring in his country just before and directly after his re- turn, the Chinese government sent a column of soldiers to Lhasa and the Dalai Lama fled to India in 1910. Then came the Chinese revolution in 1911 and the establishment of the Chinese Republic. In 1912, Mongolia and Tibet were de- clared to be integral parts of China. These activities of the Chinese government called for a protest from the British government, because Inner Asia: The Unsettled Land of the Nomad 489 of the fact that England had independent treaty relations with Tibet in which she did not recognize Chinese sovereignty. China stopped the advances of her troops and declared she had no intention of making Tibet a Chinese province. In 1913 the Tibetan authorities declared the independence of Tibet, and Chinese officials withdrew from the country in October 1913. Thereupon delegates from Eng- land, China, and Tibet met at Simla and in April 1914 arranged Tibetan affairs. These representatives came to an agreement, but the Chinese government would not subsequently accept it. It divided Tibetan territory into two parts: . (1) Outer Tibet was to be a separate province. It was to include the province of Chiando and was to have an autonomous gov- ernment, only nominally under Chinese authority. Neither England nor China was to interfere with internal affairs, but their agents could visit Lhasa. - (2) Inner Tibet was to include Litang and Batang, and was to be under the direct control of China. Outer Tibet has therefore become practically an independent state under the guarantee of Great Britain and as a dependency of hers, on the ground that the Chinese government, though it repeatedly sent military expeditions into the country, was unable to stop disorders that in turn created trouble on the Indian frontier, a source of danger to Great Britain. To avoid those minor conflicts out of which larger issues grow, the frontiers of Tibet should be definitely established as soon as possible, with the assistance and agreement of the local native governors. Neither those in the direction of India nor those that separate Outer from Inner Tibet have been fixed. Tibet now under British protection Need for definite frontiers in Tibet European commercial penetration Great Britain's interest in the raw materials of the Far East CHAPTER THIRTY-ONE THE FAR EAST IN reaching for the commerce of the Far East, European powers found themselves confronted by two established nations, China and Japan, whom they could not reduce to the status of dependencies. Japan has maintained her sovereignty intact and has taken her place among the great powers; China, far stronger and richer potentially, but actually weak and now disorderly as to internal government, has not been able to ward off the repeated encroachments of the Euro- pean powers. In the islands of the Pacific, on the contrary, there was little diffi- culty in achieving complete ownership, for the primitive inhabitants were easily subdued or won over by the Europeans. Objects of rivalry at first for their raw materials, many of the islands came to be considered important for their strategic value also. They were regarded as an approach to the mainland of Asia, and their possession was thought to be essential to the control of the trade of eastern Asia. Thus, through trade, Europe was brought across the Pacific and Indian oceans to the doors of the Far East. Relations were at first sporadic, as at Macao, near Hongkong (Portuguese), Deshima, at Nagasaki (Dutch), and Formosa (both Portuguese and Dutch). Later they were persistent and even aggressive, as when the English got Hongkong (1842) and the French by successive steps (1863, 1864, 1867, 1884, 1896) established themselves in Indo-China. Each ac- quisition furnished local subtropical products and a market for Euro- pean goods, and became also a base for trade conquests farther afield. THE CONTROL OF RAW MATERIALS IN THE FAR EAST When it is realized how large a part tropical and subtropical prod- ucts play in modern industrial and commercial life, it seems natural that it should be the policy of Great Britain, the largest trading empire in the world, to get as great a share as possible of the raw materials and trade resources of the Far East, and she has pursued this policy with marked singleness of purpose ever since she acquired the Suez Canal. To take a single instance, — through her control of the free ports of Hongkong and Singapore she has made London one of the chief world markets for rubber, tea, spices, jute, gums, and hides. With her huge war debt, trade control and development are matters 490 The Far East 491 20-sº ſº- Tºs- TV.7F- *..." 2–~ * i * !.' _---4---- \l t A \º ~~ * ukd En f Fº 4t ! - # g? j ---" 40 - ׺f €P ºf *… . º § 3á’” ECONOMIC RESOURCES #: Coal Tea Ø Cotton WN Silk '. *A) Industrial districts 7 ~ * -º-º-º-º-º- Main railroads Scale of miles - "- p 100 300 400 120 ſluž0 FIG. 243. Some of the economic elements in the political geography of the Far East. of vital importance. She has the banking facilities and also the commercial experience of the past to increase production in new lands. In recent years the trade motive has also become a more active factor in Japan's foreign policy, especially in relation to eastern Asia. These two powers, as well as France, will seek to improve their financial and ocean transportation facilities in the Far East. In the past the United States has bought the products of the Far Manila as East chiefly through Great Britain, Japan, and Germany. Her ...i. annual purchases of Oriental products just before the World War can trade exceeded $200,000,000, and her exports were more than $100,000,000. * Orient The largest single source of American trade in the Orient is Japan 492 The New World Racial questions in the Far East Tendency of Jap- anese emi- grants to go to southern climates (total of nearly $150,000,000 in 1913). The Straits Settlements come next, Singapore being a great port for the raw materials from the East Indian region – tin, hides, spices, rice, fish, tungsten, and rubber. Great Britain and Japan have maintained their trade ad- vantages in the Far East, because they have their own ports there. Americans have been operating chiefly from Manila, which is not a free port. It now has large modern piers and extensive warehouses, and were it to become a free port, it would have an enormous influence in developing the wealth of the Far East and the Philippines. In the past twenty years American trade with the Philippines, chiefly in hemp, sugar, vegetable oils, and tobacco, has risen to $50,000,000 yearly. RACIAL FACTORS In the Far East and the Pacific the world's racial problems reach their present climax of intensity; here the white race comes into con- tact with the yellow race, a part of which — the Japanese — is striv- ing to win assent to the principle of race equality. The differences between the two races in mode of life and ideals, and even in religion, are very great, and there is no tendency among them toward inter- marriage. In Canada, Australia, and the United States there are special laws restricting immigration of Chinese and Japanese. The immigration question has become acute in British Columbia and California, where the Japanese birth rate is rather high and where, even without immigration, there is danger that the Japanese problem may have a serious outcome, owing to the rapid growth of bitter feeling among the labor unions, the unorganized laboring men, and the landowners. - A number of colonies of Japanese rice farmers live on the coast of Brazil and there is a colony in Lower California, Mexico. In São Paulo, Brazil, where laborers on the coffee plantations grew scarce during the World War, there was increased Japanese immigration, encouraged by subsidies from Japan and the welcome of the Brazilian government. There are now 20,000 Japanese laborers in São Paulo alone, of whom 4000 own coffee plantations. In Europe, where comparatively crowded lands do not tempt immigration from the Far East, the problem of the yellow race scarcely exists. The harsh climate of northern Europe, as con- trasted with the relatively mild climate of Japan, also has a deter- rent effect. The tendency of the Japanese is to move into the warmer belts, like California, Hawaii, and the Philippines (Fig. 257). This tendency causes some of the people of Australia to be apprehensive The Far East 493 lest large numbers of Japanese may settle in the East Indies and Polynesia and become their unwelcome neighbors (Fig. 257 and related text, page 526). It is argued that the Japanese multiply so rapidly and live so cheaply that they drive out the white workman wherever they compete with him on equal terms. At the Peace Conference of Paris in 1919, the Japanese plenipo- tentiaries long insisted that restrictions of immigration based on race should be finally removed the world over, but to this proposi- tion the other powers would not give their consent. (A) THE RISE OF JAPAN TO THE RANK OF A WoRLD Power When Japan was still a kind of hermit kingdom, both her foreign and her internal problems were simple. By centuries of experiment, life had become adjusted to resources. Her people lived apart from the rest of the world. For more than two centuries before Com- modore Perry's visit to Japan, her sole point of contact with western nations was a single trading station on the island of Deshima opposite Nagasaki, where there was a limited commerce with the Dutch. EMERGENCE OF JAPAN It was in 1853 that the United States government sent Commo- dore Perry with an American fleet, demanding Japanese protection for American sailors and property wrecked on the coast, and per- mission for American ships to use Japanese ports as a base for food or for trade. The Perry expedition forced Japan into the current of modern international life. - After 1868 Japan modified her political and social institutions in what is probably the most complete and radical change of its kind that has ever occurred in the world’s history. The basis of Japanese social and military organization had been feudalism. In 1868 the sys- tem was abolished by revolution, and a national spirit sprang up that was to be used as a powerful instrument in empire-building. The first railroad was begun in 1870; today there are nearly eight thou- sand miles of rail. In 1872, military service became universal and obligatory. A constitution was granted in 1889, and Parliament met for the first time in 1890. - It was just in the midst of this process of modernization that Japan consolidated her island possessions. In 1875 she got from Russia the Kurile Islands, thus rounding out her domain on the north. In exchange she relinquished her claim to the island of Sakhalin, the southern half of which was again recovered in 1905; the northern Failure of Japanese attempt to SeCure equality Japan until recently a hermit kingdom Radical changes in the so- cial and po- litical life of Japan 494 The New World SAK'HALIN" W mold . lievik a e s: S o 50 © % 50 Sº, * Y. RS * § {{\ | | § * 140 Yº #. Aſ r-- - - --~~... º adiº º, % Yº, --~~}^ *::. t \ 2–ſ º;; ,--.” * - - } :::: 4 t ſº §§ 33° - - \\ .* JA PAM S’ t ul" -> zº: &A :::::: weihaiwei f €OUI * sº *:::::::::::: - A : - §: 3 * - º: - %2; WTsingtau, . * OtC fºr-h §º: YELLOW SEA . - ag - (OIlan **4-4- & sº *: ū. * . 2. ; Q Nagisaki” &m Q’ *\: º - k 6.53 o C hai pſ, Cº. º S^3\ §. & g 0 º \ G H / H L I : © Tengchow. . . o Weihaiwei SSYº-C & W X. § \ Coal dº Cº | Ton Chief agricultural - districts 2 - 0 50 100 MILES EEEEEEEEEEq ºs N_1 FIG. 246. The province of Shantung, home of 40,000,000 Chinese, recently placed under Japanese sovereignty for an indefinite period. Until 1914 Germany held the territory inclosed by the broken line about Kiaochow in lease from the Chinese government. of Chinese civilization,” “the Holy Land of the Chinese people.” So great was the feeling aroused in China by the award of Shan- tung to Japan that a popular boycott against Japanese goods rapidly spread. It is estimated that at one time Japan's trade with China was reduced 80 per cent. Japan in Shantung holds the economic key to the country — the railways. At Tsingtau she has possession of an economic gateway. In holding both she stands in the very midst of the Chinese commercial realm, and is feared the more because she has an organized and powerful government and a highly developed industrial system. Strategically her position is no less important. Japan has agreed to exercise no political rights in the peninsula and to retire from it at the end of an unspecified term. The great powers have the opportunity of proving their sincerity in seeking to win China's assent to the treaty of Versailles (which put Japan into Shantung) by making no further invasions of China's sovereign rights, by developing her resources on terms that will give the Chinese a share of their own natural riches, and by demanding for the foreigner no unwarranted special privileges. Japan has further agreed neither to make exclusive economic use of Japan's promises 502 The New World Japan's important economic “rights” in China Prospect : that Japan will fulfill her obli- gations Unequal population densities one of the . ultimate causes of war the port of Tsingtau, nor to give herself or her nationals the benefit of lower rates or other special privileges over the railways. Japan secures, however, the right of maintaining a Japanese settlement at Tsingtau; the ownership of the Tsingtau-Chinan railway is to be a joint Sino-Japanese enterprise, and Japan is to own the coal mines tributary to the railway and to have rights in several other railways which may be built: this much is legally hers, on the basis that these are economic rights once held by Germany and now forfeited by her to Japan. Doubt has been expressed as to whether Japan can successfully withstand the very grave temptation to make her economic rights the basis of a quarrel with China from which she would issue with increased political rights in Shantung. The famous “twenty-one demands” of May 1915, made upon China by Japan under the threat of war, have not been forgotten. But for the misgivings aroused by them, faith in Japanese policy in the Far East would be stronger. - THE PRESSURE OF POPULATION One of the oldest and most powerful basic causes of war is an un- equal birth rate on opposite sides of a boundary line. From the great migrations of history down to the recent World War, men have always looked across their international line-fences and envied the wealth of their neighbors. Germany, for instance, before 1914 had more than 65,000,000 people and France had less than 40,000,000, and their areas were but little different. Japan is today in the situation of a country that must overflow its boundaries. Only about one sixth of her total area of 176,000 square miles (including Formosa, but not Korea) is under cultivation, because so much of it at the north is cold — too cold, that is, for typical Japan- ese agriculture — and a large part of the rest is mountainous. Her poets sing the praises of Fujiyama, but the mountain cannot grow rice. Sixty-one million people are crowded together on an area only a little larger than that of California. The average size of a farm is two and a half acres. Japan’s needs for colonial outlets * As originally presented to China on 18 January 1915, the Japanese demands were twenty-one in number. By them Japan was to acquire former German rights in China, and China was not to lease any part of the province of Shantung to a third power. Japan obtained also valuable railroad concessions, the opening of important cities and towns in Shantung as commercial ports, a lease of the southern Manchurian and other railways, special trading privileges in eastern Mongolia, and mining rights in southern Manchuria and eastern Inner Mongolia, as well as other valuable concessions in mines, railways, and harbor works. ..China agreed to employ influential Japanese advisers in political, financial, military, and police departments. The demands involved the virtual surrender of China to Japan. The Far East - 503 DENSITY OF POPULATION DECEMBER 31–1913 LEGEND Population persqu.mile. . Over /000 500 250 / 4. /25 25 *.. SN. 4. N E==P 38 --AFE=#~~ #EA 36 _-_1... —T | 34. 138 l |140 142 FIG. 247. Sketch map of the population density of Japan and Korea on 31 December 1913, according to data supplied by N. Yamasaki of the Geographical Institute of the University of Tokyo. Scale, 1: 16,000,000. From Jefferson, the Geographical Review, Vol. 2, 1916. - Before Japan was opened to European trade her people had by long experience learned to be self-sustaining. They cultivated every available spot and lived frugally. When a whole people has practiced thrift and industry for many generations, it acquires a stability that gives it relatively great commercial power. With the growth of foreign trade the Japanese were able to export some of their products and import food, with an immediate improvement in standards of living, To extend these advantages requires still more trade, and this invites both territorial expansion and the stimulation of industry. Social and economic experimentation are the natural consequences of these conditions among the Japanese people, responsive as they are to the progressive thought of advanced western nations. In the past few years there has been a marked drift of the rural population to the cities, where it becomes part of a restless industrial class. This -* 504 The New World FIG. 248. Japanese village and adjacent farms — a typical scene. - creates a lack of tenants for the landed proprietors. Where rural population declines one may see, side by side with the untilled fields of the well-to-do, the tiny garden of the poor farmer. The inevitable result is rural discontent, such as in Europe has led to the division of the large landed estates (page 394). Some farmers have emigrated to Hokkaido, one of the large and relatively cold northern islands of the Japanese archipelago, where they have adopted modern agricul- tural practice. Wishing to become self-supporting in the matter of wool, Japan grants annual subsidies to farmers who keep sheep. The eastern Siberian realm and adjoining parts of Manchuria and Mon- golia are the natural fields of expansion for stock farming. With these virgin empires in her hands, Japan will let go of strategic points in Siberia only with great reluctance. She is still in possession of them, though at one time (1919) she had agreed to evacuate her troops. The Far East 505 Like Germany, Japan has seen her colonists go out and swell the populations of other lands. She desires to keep them together under her own flag, and she can do this only if she provides the land and the business opportunities. Therefore she has looked westward across the sea, where she beholds fair lands thinly populated. Manchuria and Mongolia are empires in geographical extent, far larger than Japan, and in parts of them are fertile plains that could support a dense population. There are vast pastures for the production of meat and wool, two products that in the past fifteen years have become increasingly and alarmingly scarcer in the world. There are oil and coal and iron, and her supply of these things Japan, with rapidly growing industries, desires to augment. To aid production and industry, Japan has recently created a Department of Agriculture and Commerce, which plans to assist manufacturers in the solution of industrial problems and problems of the export trade. The department is authorized to grant liberal sub- sidies. Japanese shipping subsidies are among the largest in the world. Great shipyards have been built recently. On raw materials im- ported into Japan there are rebates, and these enable the Japanese manufacturers to compete successfully with European countries and with America in many lines of trade in China. In some cases the government actually guarantees a certain percentage of profit on home manufactures. e - FUTURE POLICY OF JAPAN In forecasting their future relations with Japan, the great powers (particularly the United States) find themselves confronted by these questions: (1) Will Japan push her assertion of race equality to the point of demanding equal treatment of Japanese and Americans in California, and of Japanese and British in Australia, New Zealand, and British Columbia; and if she does demand this, will she be able and willing to go to war for it? - (2) Is her “mainland” policy in eastern Asia designed to carry the Japanese frontier far into that continent, and especially into China, with the object of gaining special privileges for Japanese trade to the exclusion of white traders? (3) Will, she abandon Shantung at the end of an indefinite period, as she has agreed to do? And, if she does abandon it, will her merchants not have so strong a hold on the political The main- land of Asia as an outlet for emigrating Japanese Domestic encourage- ment of industry Problems affecting future re- lations with Japan 506 The New World The test of Japanese idealism to come in the near future life of the province that they will inevitably be brought into conflict with the Chinese government when it resumes the exercise of its sovereign rights 9 (Germany promised in 1864 to hold a plebiscite in Sleswig-Holstein, and Chile promised to hold a plebiscite in Tacna-Arica after the war with Peru in 1879–1884; both failed to keep these solemn promises.) (4) Will she exercise her mandatary in the Marshall and Caroline Islands in such a way that she will win the approval of the other great powers, or will she make every effort to remain there without supervision or even under the criticism or dis- approval of the other interested powers 9 (5) Will she develop local self-government in Korea or will she continue her present policy of repression and persecution? It is easy to reply that criticisms similar to those made of Japan might be made of the other great powers and that nowhere else in the world have these powers themselves given exhibitions of more selfish ambitions than in the Far East, at Japan's very door. But on the other hand it must be remembered that all of Japan's moderniza- tion dates from the past fifty years. She has the forms of western civilization, but has she also its idealism? For side by side with the old selfish deplorable policies of the great powers there grew up in the modern western states another set of ideas. Thoughtful men saw special trade privileges and imperialistic national policies and the oppression of weak peoples give rise to war, and they have said: “War is a fine and a noble thing when men fight to kill ignoble ambi- tions and to defeat selfish and cruel oppressors; but is it a fine thing when men kill each other for dollars and the pride of kings and the sport of persecuting a ‘racial’ minority 9” We are not sure that Japan is of this mood. There is a powerful militaristic element in high places but little affected by the lesson of Germany's defeat; there is a sense of pride and ambition characteristic of the young rather than the mature nation. Furthermore, there is a racial ambi- tion mixed with that pride and tinged by a sense of the humiliations of the past, when the great powers gained privileges in the Far East which they denied to Japan. Finally, the Peace Conference of Paris, to Japan's chagrin, decided not to adopt the principle of race equality. The convergence of European and American political and economic interests upon the Far East will probably bring Japan's political program and the ideals of her people into great prominence. The real test of her diplomatic power and her idealism is yet to come. The Far East 507 (B) CHINA’s IMMEDIATE PROBLEMs China would not sign the treaty of Versailles, feeling that her rights had been ignored in the Shantung settlement. She therefore confronts five major problems: " (1) She has yet to make peace with Germany and to complete international or diplomatic arrangements with the Allied and Associated Powers. (However, she became a member of the League of Nations by signing the Austrian and other peace treaties which have incorporated in them the League of Nations Covenant.) - (2) She has Japan as a neighbor on the mainland, a thing she has dreaded ever since 1894 because of the economic stranglehold which she fears that progressive and ambitious Japan may secure, in pursuance of her “mainland” policy in eastern Asia. (3) She has not yet ceased to fear aggression by the western powers, who have taken treaty ports, concessions, and territory in the past. (For example, Great Britain was ceded the island of Hongkong in 1842 after the Opium War; Germany took Kiaochow in 1897; Russia took Port Arthur in 1898.) (4) She must make with foreign capitalists financial arrangements that will enable her to develop her resources in a manner favor- able to her own interests. (5) She is in the midst of an internal political and military struggle, the end of which is still in doubt. How came China to her present unfortunate pass 9 The Chinese were a highly civilized nation when the Europeans were still in the Bronze Age. With her external commerce dependent upon sailing vessels, cut off by high mountains and deserts from western civiliza- tion, China developed a culture much higher than that of surrounding countries. She was a civilized nation in contrast to the barbarians on her frontiers. Japan borrowed much from her. But the Chinese were isolated and, following Confucius, their greatest philosopher, extremely pacifistic. The Chinese despised the “foreign devils”; they desired to be left alone. All of this might be sound philosophy if the rest of the world would leave them alone in return. China’s five major unsettled problems * Besides these five, China still has her opium problem. By the treaty which closed the Opium War with England (1842) the opium trade was restricted and later abolished, but the illicit introduction of opium and morphia continues, to the great harm of the people. For example, at Macao the Portuguese permit trade in opium and the use of opium. By the Opium Convention of 1912 the powers were to put further and more stringent re- strictions upon the opium trade, and the Third International Opium Conference of 1914 sought means of putting the Convention in operation. The war interrupted the termina- tion of effective arrangements, but the treaty of Versailles, if signed by China, provides promising guarantees. How China became weak 508 The New World China’s potential TeSO111CeS and com- mercial power ECONOMIC PENETRATION OF CHINA BY 7 —I- —I I T -V w 100 50 *50 *30 & ºShar ghai A Monfreº/ 2 A/frsburgh 3 Co/vmbos 4 Java/7/7a/? 5 Julurh . ** 6 720°ka. 7 7./cson Scale of miles 4 of China. FOREIGN POWERS The economic ad- vances of outside na- tions have penetrated the whole economic life With strong navies and a determined policy these nations de- mand and get “rights,” concessions, exemp- tions, franchises, almost innumerable. They have established open ports (page 511), super- 8 Sam /ræncasco CP *=% ===#” 100 f ſº f 1– —l ex- vised the use of bor- - ... . . . | rowed money, sought FIG. 249. The area of China compared with the United tº te States. Note the length of the Great Wall. The key in the administrative control lower left-hand corner will serve to locate a few American of territory adj aCent, cities for comparison. to the railways over which they have practically sovereign control, secured exclusive exploitation privileges, exempted themselves from Chinese taxes on imported material, and even maintained separate post offices. It is the great wealth of China that attracts foreign countries to her. She is the world's largest producer of antimony; she has large lead, tin, and oil deposits. She has the largest undeveloped iron and coal deposits of all the nations in the world. The anthracite coal deposits of Shansi and the regions adjacent are equal to those of Pennsylvania, and the quantity of bituminous coal is at least as great as that in the United States. The iron deposits of the Hankow dis- trict are in control of the Japanese. Those of Manchuria will almost certainly fall into the same hands, for the Japanese are specially anxious to increase their iron and steel production. Of value to Japanese plans is the opposition of the Chinese government to granting further concessions to foreign capitalists. The Chinese buy the concessions; then the Japanese buy out the Chinese owners. In 1915 Japan ob- tained exclusive mining rights in eastern Mongolia and in Shantung, to mention two of the most important acquisitions. Between 1894 and 1898 the struggle for concessions reached its climax and each one of the big European powers got its sphere of influence in China. The Far East ºtte w ſwoup aqq uqqaſ w \snț spuøns Kºſo Joſuoſ; quæſous sſq L "euſųO ‘ſsuaqs ºnguſių X '0gz ºbrī 510 The New World Chinese seclusion and the opening of treaty ports Status of the treaty ports It was as if the Russians and the English had just seized rival reservations on Long Island and the Jersey coast, commanding New York City; as if the English had wrenched away Charleston; the Germans, Philadelphia; the French, New Orleans; and Cossacks were garrisoned in strategic points throughout New England. It was as if the New York, New Haven and Hartford Railway were manned and guarded by Slavs, the New York Central by Belgians, the Pennsylvania by Prussians; as if the Pittsburg mines were handed over en bloc to an English corporation, and the Russians had exclusive mining rights to the gold of Alaska's Yukon region. BATES. By 1899 the process had gone so far that it looked as if the princi- ple of the equality of commercial advantage in weak and powerless China would be entirely set aside, and therefore the United States attempted to establish the principle of the Open Door (page 497). The Treaty Ports At the opening of the 19th century Canton was the only port open to European trade. By the treaty of Nanking, which closed the Opium War (1840–1842), the Chinese opened five treaty ports to European powers, Japan, and the United States, for foreign residence and trade, and ceded Hongkong to the British. Since then China has opened, or has been compelled to open, a large number of other ports. In Manchuria, since 1900, she has opened a number of treaty ports under pressure from Japan; since 1898 she has voluntarily opened a number of desirable ports, with a view to keeping them under Chinese control. Of this class are the towns of Chinwangtao, the winter port of Tientsin, and Tsingtau, the capital of Shantung. There are no foreign concessions in the voluntarily opened ports; in them the international settlement, or “trade quarter” where foreigners reside, is under Chinese administration. At present China has 56 regular treaty ports and 8 voluntarily opened ports, 25 ports of call, and 16 frontier caravan stations, or marts. In agreement with the twenty-one demands presented by Japan to China in 1915, China promised to open additional ports in Shantung and in eastern Inner Mongolia (Fig. 251). Great Britain has concessions at a number of places; for example, Amoy, Canton, Hankow, Tientsin, and Shanghai (Fig. 251). Japan has concessions at Amoy, Foochow, Hangchow, Hankow, Newchwang, and Tientsin. Russia had concessions at Hankow, Newchwang and Tientsin; France at Canton, Hankow, Shanghai, and Tientsin. The United States has given up practically all its concessions. Belgium and Italy have concessions at Tientsin; and Germany and Austria- : #. "--- * * & Wºº, Y % º \-> -y * § Lir. 'Mºſºft”. gº •.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*...* * *ść MAP OF ſºft THE CHINESE REPUBLIC I00 50 0 !00 200 300 400 500 MILES * EEEºcºmº-º-º-º-º-º-º: t —TE |{5 \ ºf ſºakhta Lºmaſ-cheng Z2. /72 e -> º M O N G | O L | in uſé * 1805 apai g C º brew ºlºgº Wi - artyryeº nºhsi p3 W N wº i. * Gluhsie" 22 & ... ig05 a $#&#fff; - \- \ 2% ſ 15 f Ché 4. 905 § §§ _-_ſ^ O ºffſ., N.Jºngº; Kf ºğ | oiſſºs kamelº Fehling!” NA O yº #9/ º § 1914. o § 365- § Joſo Jºe Ž. S hiſ:{{ o f O - 2-> * /9/4 § #4% º •Neº. º * * * n º R • 19131 ſºlº ºkoW - (*ggiº º #: ("Tungkwan Raiſeñí \,...ºf *H O N AN f SHOWING Scale 1:30,000,000 of ſessee or sovereign Aower Peking Orher rowas of ſmaorrance Fig. 251. The immense concentration of population in the broad coastal belt of China, the very low railway mileage of the country, and the impor- tance of river transportation, all furnish a background for an understanding of the significant hold which European nations have on Chinese trade as a result of their control of 2000 miles of Chinese coast. - - - 512 • The New World Foreign privileges Foreigners in the treaty ports Chinese tariffs and transit dues Hungary also had concessions there which were surrendered by the terms of the treaties of Versailles (Germany) and St. Germain-en- Laye (Austria). At each treaty port is a tract called a “concession,” where for- eigners reside and manage their own affairs. They levy taxes and special charges, build churches, and own warehouses, paying a land tax to the government. Foreigners enjoy equal rights, no matter what nation operates a given treaty port. Foreigners can also be tried in courts of their own at the treaty ports; that is, there is extra- territorial jurisdiction. Cases between foreigners and Chinese are judged under the law of the defendant, who has freedom as to counsel and supervision. In Manchuria the foreigners live in so- called New Towns, built around the railway stations and subject to either Japanese or Russian administration. The ports of call differ from treaty ports in that foreigners cannot reside there or have business there, and all goods to and from ports of call must pass through a treaty port. - The treaty ports present interesting features in respect of the dis- tribution of shipping and the relation between foreign and native population. We take for illustration the port of Tientsin, which ranks third among Qhinese custom stations and is growing in im- portance. Of the trade in 1916, 39 per cent was under the Japanese flag, 33 per cent under the Chinese, 26 per cent under the British. Before the war Germany had 9 per cent. Of the total population of 800,000, the Chinese numbered .750,000 in 1914, Japanese 1772, British 1530, Germans 753, Americans 542, French 294, Italians 93, Swiss 85, Danes 74, Austro-Hungarians 54, Norwegians 15, Portu- guese 6, Spanish 4. There was also a floating population of about 60,000 coolies. Unfortunately, China had in vogue a system of municipal tariff and other transit exactions which subjected trade in China, whether foreign or domestic, to great embarrassment. But in 1842 it was arranged that a certain percentage added to the regular tariff of the treaty port would exempt goods from all other dues, no matter to what place in China they were sent. Many ports should be opened up if the vast interior spaces and the mineral and other resources are to be effectively developed. With the opening up of the interior should come a revision of the Chinese tariff and transit dues, now in a very complicated state. Some provinces allow goods to enter duty free (Mongolia); some have local rebates (Manchuria). The treaty port arrangements are, in general, restrictions upon The Far East 513 Chinese sovereignty, and there has been a growing desire on the part of the Chinese to discontinue these concessions or to modify them. Unless the Chinese carry through the reform projects already begun and give honest and reasonable administration, they will long con- tinue to suffer from the servitudes that are now imposed upon them in the use by foreigners of Chinese ports and other trading centers. The seizure of ports by rival powers was accompanied by the ac- quisition of tributary spheres of influence which in practice became commercial zones parceled out among British, German, French, Bel- gian, and Japanese merchants. Not having free ports or a sphere of influence, the United States carried on its Chinese trade under every form of handicap. This condition, coupled with the rivalries of the powers already established, was dangerous for all; but the vested interests had grown so enormous that for some years American in- sistence upon the Open Door policy had little effect. - A promising measure is the New Consortium, organized in 1919. It is composed of a group of banks and bankers from the United States, Great Britain, France, and Japan, formed as an international partnership and at the request of their governments. Its object is to finance the development of transportation systems, highways, and other basic enterprises by loans to the Chinese government. By these means, it is hoped to preserve the independence and terri- torial integrity of China and diminish international commercial rival- ries in the Far East. Future concessions by China and concessions already given upon which substantial progress has not yet been made, are to be pooled with the consortium so that the four banking groups already named may have an equal chance of participation. Japan sought to reserve parts of Manchuria and Mongolia from the scope of the consortium, but was finally induced to relinquish these demands except with respect to certain branch-line railway projects in southern Manchuria, the political significance of which cannot be overesti- mated. The full importance of the consortium can only be realized if and when a sound constitutional government is formed in China. Such a thing does not at present exist. The northern and southern factions are still at war. The military governments of the provinces prefer disorder, and this calls for heavy financial outlays. - INTERNAL ADMINISTRATION In 1912 China became a republic, with a president instead of an emperor, but she is not yet in a settled state. Her interior regions, like Yünnan and Mongolia, always unruly because more remote China’s ob- jection to . . the invasion of her sovereignty Plan for equality of financial privileges 514 The Nev World Civil war in China Courts of foreign or extra- territorial jurisdiction from the central government and composed of far more independent people, have not yet accepted the new order of things; and between the democratic south and the more monarchically inclined north there has been taking place a struggle fateful to the welfare of China. It is nominally a civil War, but really a contest between four factions for control of the Chinese people, their tax system, and their foreign policy. The group in control of Peking is recognized abroad as the de facto government. The present state of disorder recalls an earlier period of revolution: the Taiping Rebellion of 1852–1864, in which 1most of eastern China was devastated, with the loss by war and famine of twenty millions of people. Though China abolished the feudal system several hundred years before the Christian era and concentrated her government at Peking, it was not an effective con- centration. Local self-government continued, and on the whole has been beneficial. But it has led also to local, not national, patriotism, owing to the ignorance of the mass of the people and the lack of modern means of communication. Such conditions favor the sepa- ratist policies of local leaders in periods of general disorder. Until a network of railways, wagon roads, and telegraph lines is built in China, there will not be developed that public spirit upon which national solidarity depends. - In view of the bad state of the government of China, it is not sur- prising that its judicial system is both antiquated and corrupt, two qualities which have marked Chinese administration for hundreds of years. Therefore the powers, as soon as they had secured vested in- terests in China, obtained extraterritorial jurisdiction which enabled them to try criminal charges against their own citizens in special courts of their own appointment. To restore China to full sovereignty requires the abolition of these rights; but the special courts can be dispensed with only if the Chinese codes of law and judicial pro- cedure are revised and simplified and honest judges are appointed. By the terms of the commercial treaty between the United States and China (1903) the United States undertook to assist China in revision of the legal code and agreed to relinquish extraterritorial rights when satisfied that a real change for the better had been made. China thereupon began such revision in 1904. Cruel and unjust punishments were abolished in 1905. Trained judges were appointed. In the past decade bureaus have been created in the fields of agriculture and commerce, postal service and education, police and constabulary, in an effort to centralize the authority of the gov- ernment and improve its civil service. The army has been drilled The Far East - 515 2 º SI g §S § •o "Zºº” * & …trº::/22 %$N Sº sº º aochow 2 * § NS SN fiifºrêS º :* tº º% º - % POPULATION DENSITY per sq.mi. per sq.km. under 25 D under 10 25 – 125 & 10 – 50 125–300 ZZZZ, 50 — 120 over 300 N over 120 20 iſ 0 20 40 60 80 100 M and Korea and compare with Figure 244. Based, for China, on statistics in the Statesman's Year-Book. by foreign instructors, and the government has bought back some of the foreign railroad and mining concessions. In proportion to her supply of important raw materials, China has the smallest railway system and the largest labor supply of all the nations Should she ever become industrialized, her industrial and commercial power would be incalculable. Like the United States, she has lands spread from the subtropical south to the temperate north, and in spite of her great population, in places dense, China has undeveloped territories capable of settlement, as in Mongolia and Manchuria. At least two thirds of her population of 400,000,000 live in a narrow belt relatively near the sea. Great rivers, valuable alike for irrigation and for commerce, cross her fertile plains. She has ample natural harborage. The rivalry of the European powers in the field of Chinese trade is likely to continue unless it is arranged that all the commercial agreements between China and other countries shall be discussed openly Possible commercial power Revision of tariff laws needed 516 The New World Russia for a time unable to defend her own inter- ests Railways as instru– ments of penetration and agreed to by all. In the past each power has pressed China for special customs privileges, as in the tariff on overland trade between China on the one hand and Russia, Great Britain, France, and Japan on the other. It is the judgment of leading statesmen that China's tariff should be revised, and that its regulation should be in Chinese hands and under the supervision, not of one power, but of all the powers. There was held in 1918 at Shanghai an inter- national conference which had for its object the standardizing of the customs rates, in order that a 5 per cent ad valorem duty might be charged, as provided by the treaties of 1902 between China and Great Britain and of 1903 between China and Japan and the United States, with the possibility of a higher rate to increase the national TeV6IlluléSe THE STRUGGLE FOR MANCHURIA : In eastern Asia the disposition of the former rights and privileges. of Russia raises questions of large importance. She had gained rail- way privileges in Manchuria, and was fast developing her Amur prov- ince. In the struggle with Japan for possession of the indefinite zone between China and Russia, her people invested capital and made settlements. Until Russia finds herself again, the Allies are unwill- ing that her property should be turned over either to Japan or to China. The present administration of the region is divided between Japan and the Republic of Eastern Siberia (page 406). A problem fraught with danger to the peace of the Far East is the disposal and control of the railways of Manchuria, which have been powerful political as well as economic instruments. They serve a region of great extent which has some of the best agricultural land in eastern Asia, besides iron mines and timbered tracts. The Chinese Eastern Railway, more than a thousand miles long, was under Rus- sian police authority until 1917, and Russia also had the right to exploit certain resources — for example, coal — along the line of railroad and in some districts outside the railroad strip as well. Rus- sia's claim to the exercise of police authority was based on the fact that the region is infested with armed robbers, and that her line and equipment could not be safeguarded by Chinese police. Russia also built part of her trans-Siberian line across Manchuria, linking it with the Chinese Eastern Railway; she thus extended her influence throughout northern Manchuria. She had planned to build southward, to Port Arthur and Dairen (formerly Dalny); thus Dairen would become the real ice-free port of eastern Siberia and The Far East 517 Vladivostok would become a naval base. By 1903, just before the outbreak of the Russo-Japanese War, Manchuria was practically under Russian control. Then came the war with Japan, and the Japanese entered southern Manchuria to the exclusion of the Rus- sians, at the same time adding Korea to their sphere of influence. This forced Russia to build her all-Russian line north of the Amur. During the period of active Russian expansion in northern Man- churia, the Chinese Eastern Railway was nominally a private Russo- Japanese corporation, although in reality it was a political instrument of Russia. Russia made Harbin the administrative center for the railroad. Harbin is naturally the economic center of northern Manchuria, and lies in the midst of the great wheat and soya bean region. Russian railroad officials have ruled Harbin and the railroad strip as sovereigns, and the Japanese have copied every Russian invasion of Chinese rights in southern Manchuria on the South Manchuria Railway; over which Japan has control. Through her agreement with China, Japan has been able to exclude other foreigners from railway enterprise in southern Manchuria. She has secured control of blocks of territory along the line and also of the naval base at Port Arthur and the commercial port of Dairen. The railway officials refuse cars to Chinese shippers and supply them to Japanese; carry Japanese mail and refuse Chinese mail; and give Japanese shippers rebates to guarantee successful competition. As the railway is policed by the Japanese, the Chinese cannot prevent trade privileges. Finally, the Japanese have used physical force in getting control of valuable properties, especially coal and timber land. They have increased their financial and political power in Manchuria by depreciating the value of Chinese copper money and by demoralizing the silver and paper currency market (Chinese currency is still on the silver basis). Japan has also obtained railway conces- sions elsewhere in China in regions of great economic value. In all this, Japan has been allowed by western powers to have a free hand. In 1910 Russia and China signed an agreement, ostensibly to re- store the sovereignty of northern Manchuria to China. But the agree- ment really left the railroad administration sovereign, at least in the cities and on the railroad line itself. The open door in Manchuria is therefore non-existent. Japan is growing stronger commercially throughout both the northern and the southern districts by the exer- cise of privileges wrested from China. The matter is the more serious because the region is an agricultural one capable of rapid and high de- velopment; it is needed by China as an outlet for her dense popula- The Chinese Eastern Railway the most im– portant How Japan con- trols Man- churia 518 The New World Problems of navigable rivers The German sphere French sphere of influence in the south rights. tion, and she has repeatedly but ineffectually tried to safeguard her The Manchurian question is further complicated by the drainage lines. The middle Amur and Ussuri are boundary rivers, and the lower Amur is exclusively in Russian territory, while the Sungari is in Manchurian territory (Fig. 251). In 1910 China agreed to give Russia a privileged position on the Sungari for traffic between that river and ports on the Amur within the free zone of the boundary (50 versts, or 33.15 miles). Thus Chinese and Russian vessels have in actual practice exclusive trading privileges on the Sungari. GERMANY IN SHANTUNG Like the other European powers, Germany sought a share in the land and trade of China. 496). We have seen how she got a foothold (page Her control of the leased territory of Kiaochow was complete. The railway was protected by German guards and a German postal service was established. It appeared that Germany was bent upon a policy similar to that which Russia was pursuing in Manchuria or the French in Yünnan. Germans also undertook a system of afforestation, controlled floods, and built macadamized roads, forts, —ºn {-, }. *-> Dº . . . à-w B E L G I º N º § ;: * * º 6 $ 2. FIG. 263. The shaded areas represent districts with an elevation above or near 5000 feet and with relatively cool climate. They are the “white man's lands” of central Africa. However, white settlement on the uplands will depend not only upon altitude but also upon accessibility to railroads and the sea, the nervous effects of living at abnormally high elevations, and seasonal distribution of rainfall, and the quality and amount of native labor. 5000 feet elevation the country is still possible for whites for prolonged periods. upland becomes available for white occupation, as in most the amount From 3000 to Below 3000 feet white men cannot long retain normal vigor and are subject to serious tropical ailments. Toward the south increasing latitude makes the upland country of Rhodesia habitable for whites at lower elevations. Compiled from the British General Staff sheets, scale 1: 2,000,000, 1919. of Rho- desia, where Salisbury is located — a modern town, the center of an - extensive grazing and mining region. It is not, however, the region of cooler climate but rather the trop ical lowland portions of Africa that furnish the kinds of goods that the countries of the temperate zone most require for their industries, particularly the European countries which lie much farther north than the United States. It was in Africa that Germany wished to secure large areas suitable for the production of coffee, cotton, cacao, rubber, palm oil, cane sugar, bananas, tobacco, besides minerals of which she had little, such as petroleum, tin, gold, and copper. The United States grows cotton at home, in the southern states and many other subtropical products she gets close by – in the West Indies, Central America, and northern South America. European countries must get these materials from abroad, and of course they would prefer to get them from their own colonies, where they can make trade Valuable products of tropical Africa 538 The New World Control of germ dis- eases and insect pests arrangements favorable to themselves. This explains why they were all eager to share in the partition of Africa. In spite of the fact that scarcely any one of the tropical colonies has paid its own way, it was hoped that in time they would become profitable, and until then, at least they furnished commodities that were vital to many industries. The most serious environmental problems of the future colonists of tropical Africa are the germ diseases and the insect pests. Figure 265 shows the areas affected by sleeping sickness, which is perhaps one of the greatest restrictions upon development. This disease, which is transmitted by the tsetse fly, has its worst aspects in jungle- covered areas about the borders of rivers, lakes, and swamps. Only better drainage and the clearing away of native bushy or jungle . f35 DENSITY OF & POPULATION Nº.: 4. pers".mi. [T] less than 5 5 – 20 | 20 – 45 N 45 – 100 % over |00 * º gº- sº ſº %$ * Z, a # e. Scale of miles V z c z o. 7 z a. 0 20 40 60 80 100 & [[30 2 4. 2 Z 3|8 % C.KRSCH Fig. 264. The Uganda region of central Africa. Note the importance of a dense native popu- lation near a large lake and a belt of “white man's lands” still undeveloped. Based on Sir Harry Johnston, The Uganda Protectorate, Vol. II, 1904, 2d ed. - African Colonies of the European Power? 539 ||O () l 20 - 3. gº 5\ſ º fimb Nºt ºr \,-\}– .7bhad: É. SUDAN * FREği ſãINEA e • *____ - tº \ iO - * ſ © •IVORY sº # &: # % sº ~~ sºlºs loºd. * Fº : º Señº. , , O ! §& | ºff “QRGERIA! Zº Q l, ; ABYSSINI sº% y (ER).j Vº "COAST ſ º i z’ſ ** A ~2. SS oMOſtrovia. {& it...! I 4. A S N - / $/\ . isº \ *Lomé 2 ” \ ºf e e Sº ./ r Yy •esi - & N. & . &º. sº !--- _2^ wº - s): S^* trº- ޺ſſ, \e, * : \ SQR . f & “S. 0 Sz, SPANSHGUE L --...sº * / º KENYA|} \ 0 "A~~ £º Hºw-ev, º, - sº i wº, º ””.s.º. 1.-- * sº COLONY Y-> <3. BELGIAN CO GO : Še SS- * . . . º N |Mombasa. C CŞ. gº º ºr © . =º TANGANYIKA *ē, ” ºn Y |S º, TERRITORYºjaam Y2. * © mesºss | º § IO AºA J à. ſ § HME & : | ſt Scale of mile 8 © ~~"ſº. 0 100 300 500 1000 - d § ".. ſº-º-º-º-º-; e e | - wº \ 20 ſ - 0 ----- ºl. 4. - lo AMGOLA, FIG. 265. Distribution of known sleeping sickness districts and localities in Central Africa. Compare with map of belts of vegetation, Figure 270. After map from Sleeping Sickness Bu- reau, London, 1909. growth will enable the white man to live safely or to keep cattle. Rinderpest further limits the grazing industry. Cholera and the bubonic plague recur in the low, hot, dirty, and humid coast ports. Tropical Africa is rich, and it can be won by the white man; but it will be won only after a long struggle by white settlers in coöperation with physicians trained in tropical medicine, and by governments intelligent enough to help the pioneer. - THE PENETRATION OF AFRICA In its modern aspects the problem of land division in Africa, and particularly in the cooler uplands, involves European nations in many complex questions that cannot be really understood unless they are placed in their historical setting. This setting we shall now attempt to supply. The first period of European control of Africa was in the second half of the 15th century, when traders, chiefly Portuguese, sailed along the west coast. Before America was discovered they had reached the southwestern extremity of the continent. Another Portuguese expedition at this time explored the Red Sea and reached India; in 1498 Vasco da Gama sailed up the east coast and also reached India; the Far East was next brought within the field of European trade, and a Portuguese settlement, still in existence, was founded at Macao, in China. The English and Dutch followed quickly. Africa itself was then of less commercial interest than the Orient. The rival nations were content with mere footholds that served as way stations Early period of white ex- pansion 540 & " The New World Beginnings of colonial rivalry Explora- tion of central Africa for ship repair and revictualing. The British had St. Helena, and later a part of the Gold Coast; the Dutch, Table Bay (Cape Town); and the Portuguese, Zanzibar. In fact, down to the period of the exploring expeditions and missionary journeys of Livingstone (1840– 1873), Africa had not been penetrated at all effectively, as the maps of sixty years ago clearly demonstrate; and as a colonizing field it was thought expeasive, unhealthful, and of little value. In a general way the native brought his wares to the coast (e.g. Cape Town, Dar es Salaam, Sofala, Table Bay, Loanda) or to a few commercially strategic inland centers (e.g. Lake Ngami). But when European industrialization had developed a need for raw materials that yearly grew more active, when vacant spaces in the Pacific, the Far East, and southern and western Asia had been allocated, with South America a politically closed world on account of the Monroe Doctrine, Africa was the only large free realm in which political power and colonial trade could yet be won together. France annexed Algeria between 1830 and 1847; the English occupied a few places at the southern end of the continent, from which they had crowded the Boers, who thereupon established their settlements inland beyond the Orange River; Morocco was independent; the Turkish Empire nominally extended along the whole northern coast, but effectively was limited to Egypt and Libya. For the rest only scattered settlements and trading posts on the coast had been estab- lished by the European nations, including Holland (until 1871), Spain, Denmark (until 1850), and Portugal — but not Germany; the be- ginning of German colonial policy was a thing of much later growth. The memorable explorations of Stanley at last effectively awoke Africa. He crossed the continent from 1874 to 1878, explored the great Congo River system, and untangled some of the long-discussed complexities of the equatorial lakes. By 1880 the whole civilized world was interested in the exploration story of Africa. The more enlightened nations of Europe were determined to stamp out slave trading, which was still carried on extensively in the interior, though the exportation of slaves from Africa had practically ceased by 1850. No other continent had such large unappropriated spaces, so many unattached peoples. There followed a general European rush for territory desirable chiefly because of its commercial value rather than as a home for colonists. The period of exploration of the interior therefore became the period of partition and of appropriation by big trading companies and concessionaires. France assumed a pro- tectorate over Tunis in 1881; England occupied Egypt in 1882; African Colonies of the European Powers 541 Portugal put forth claims to much of the Congo, as well as the hinter- land of Mozambique, where English traders and missionaries had penetrated. Belgium called a conference of the powers in 1876 whose outcome was an International African Association, and in 1885 Leopold II, King of the Belgians, declared himself sovereign of the Congo Free State. In less than half a century the interior of Africa had been transformed from an unknown wilderness to the colonial frontier of Europe. From that time to this, there has never been a moment when the colonial policies of the European nations, have not been profoundly affected by the African situation. Germany was at first more in- terested in her African colonies than she was in her Pacific possessions or the Near East. Only as late as 1904 were the long-standing differ- ences between France and Great Britain that had once threatened War (the Fashoda incident, page 558) at last composed by a division of spheres of influence. In 1911 the Agadir crisis (page 107) almost precipitated war between Germany and France. FORMER GERMAN COLONIES IN AFRICA The chief effect of the war upon the political geography of Africa was the transfer of the four German colonies of Togoland, the Cam- eroons, German Southwest Africa, and German East Africa to France, Great Britain, Belgium, and Portugal. By skillful diplomatic work at Berlin and by remarkable activity in the field, Germany had won these four territories in the face of active British, French, and Portu- guese opposition, laid claim to a part of the Sudan bordering Lake Tchad, elbowed France down to the Congo, pushed the northeastern corner of German Southwest Africa over to the Zambesi River (the Caprivi salient, Fig. 14), and as a result was in position to plan still broader African conquests. The addresses of her statesmen leave no room for doubt that had she won the World War a Central African realm under German control would have been created out of Portu- guese and Belgian territory and German domination would have been assured in the African politics of the future. - Every year Germany was losing nearly 250,000 of her population, who went to foreign lands, and it was her hope that parts of these African colonies might provide homes for some of her numerous emigrants, though her chief interest lay in the development of the plantation system and use of native labor for the production of tropi- cal raw materials, supplies of which she also hoped to command. Great Britain and America control 90 per cent of the world's cotton Africa a threat to the peace of the world Colonial homes for emigrants and a source of Tà W Ila- terial for German mills 542 - The New World The large native population The cool interior tableland, capable of develop- ment by white men supply, and for about three fourths of her cotton Germany had to rely on the United States, for about one fourth on Egypt and India. Of special value to German industry was the production in her African possessions of oils, particularly palm oil. While production was not high, it was in the way of rapid development. Germany's increasing importation of food had also turned her attention to the possibilities of food production in her African colonies. - The territories and resources that Germany lost and that France, Belgium, and Great Britain gained will be briefly described in the succeeding sections. - Tanganyika Territory (former German East Africa) More was heard about German East Africa, now Tanganyika Territory, than any other German colony because it is relatively more thickly populated and was the most valuable of all Germany's African possessions. It has a total area of 384,000 square miles, or nearly twice that of the whole former German Empire. The native population numbers nearly 8,000,000 and is of excellent stock, trained to agriculture. In addition there are about 15,000 people from India and Arabia, and a population of 5300 whites. - The least favorable portion of Tanganyika Territory is the coastal strip from 10 to 30 miles wide in the north and broader in the south. This is a fever-infested region of heavy rainfall and poor drainage. Farther west is the interior tableland, marked at its eastern margin by broken country with steep streams. There is a well-marked dry season, and the natural vegetation of the interior is savana, grass steppe, or scrub. Variation of relief gives opportunity for great variety in cultivated products. At present the most important plantation crops are sisal hemp or rubber (Ceará). There are con- siderable possibilities for coffee and cotton production and for cattle raising in districts free from tsetse fly. On the slopes of Kilimanjaro and the Usambara Highlands products of more temperate latitudes can be grown. Though limited in area, these districts should be valuable as a “white man's country.” - Two railways now connect the upland with the coast, one south of Kilimanjaro Mountain, near the frontier of Kenya Colony (British East Africa), and another from the port of Dar es Salaam. Ruanda constitutes the densely populated, northwestern part of Ger- man East Africa. It has now been detached from former German East Africa, which (as Kenya Colony) passed under British man- date and has been added to the Belgian Congo (Figs. 5 and 66). African Colonies of the European Powers 543 &ze °Iringa v/Mºjº #ºngº tra PH º Rºž 2 2. M. FIG. 266. Map of Tanganyika Territory, formerly German East Africa; at present adminis- tered by Great Britain as the mandatary of the League of Nations, except for the northwest- ern corner, ceded to Belgium. German Southwest Africa German Southwest Africa is important, not because of the number of inhabitants, but for its extent and its relation to the protection of the Union of South Africa, with which it is continuous. It is a huge desert region with an area of 325,000 square miles, a native Z% º A desert country thinly in- habited population of 250,000, and a white population that numbered 15,000 in 1914. It has been turned over to the Union of South Africa, with which it has connection by rail and by sea. The coastal desert is from fifteen to eighty-five miles wide. It is marked by great sand ridges p led up by the southwesterly winds to heights that in places reach several hundred feet. The rainfall is, for the most part, less than one inch a year. Fogs are characteristic, 544 The New World A fog- bound coast, with sand dunes and off- shore guano islands Grazing the prin- cipal oc- cupation British and French division of the Came- TOOIlS Products and their export due to the cold longshore current from the south. There are guano deposits on the offshore islands. The whole region resembles the Atacama-Tarapacá desert coast of western South America. Farther inland the rainfall increases on account of higher elevation and better exposure to the winds, and there are grazing lands of value. Still farther east is the Desert of Kalahari, with an interior drainage ending in salt pans, and with belts of dunes and scattered vegetation. There will never be a large population — the aridity is too intense. The grass is scattered, and the amount of stock that can be supported is small. It is estimated that the whole of German Southwest Africa cannot maintain more than five thousand farms. There are diamond washings of considerable value, and in 1913 ivory and copper ex- ports constituted 95 per cent of the total. But the principal occupa- tion is the grazing of cattle, of which there are 200,000 head, besides 1,000 000 sheep and goats. The Cameroons In February 1916 the British government accepted the French proposal for the administrative division of the Cameroons by France and Great Britain. It was arranged also that in case the question of the cession of the region to a third power should be raised, Great Britan was to have the first refusal of the port of Duala. This was during the World War. But in the peace treaty with Germany it was arranged to have the former German colonies governed under the mandate system, and France and Great Britain became the mandatory powers. France controls the Cameroons, save that the Small portion west of the main mountain range but including Cam- eroon Mountain (Fig. 267) is now joined to British Nigeria. The boundary between Nigeria and the Cameroons was an arbitrary one and therefore disturbing to native life. In the final settlement of the affairs of the colony there was made a rectification of this frontier, and the new boundary runs in such a way as least to disturb local tribal arrangements. The products of the Cameroons are mahogany, rubber, palm oil, cacao, and small quantities of tobacco and cotton. It has valuable grasslands in the interior, though these are difficult of access. The rubber resources might have led to the great development of the colony, had it not been for the competition of East India rubber, which began to be produced on a great scale in 1913, and which so reduced the price that the gathering of rubber from wild sources by primitive methods was no longer profitable. African Colonies of the European Powers The colony has an area of lessthan 200,000 square miles and a total population of more than 2,500,000. Be- sides unhealthfulness in the lowlands, the chief physical difficulty in its development is F the large number of falls which break the courses of the streams H..... and thus prevent trans- portation of theinterior products by cheap methods. Commerce would be almost at a º : standstill were it not }* for two small railroads which have been ex- tended inland beyond the belt of falls. Togoland By agreement made between France and Great Britain in 1919, , the latter assumed the administration of the western strip of Togo- land (Fig. 268); the former took over the higher and cooler east- ern districts. ຠ% º Sºmºs % º erº R ºA -0 \ 6- :::::::: CAMERööNs º Z 600-3200ft —- –Present boundary Wºº Ş Highland 3200-4900ft. —---- Former " 'º" " ":" º Ø IO > 4900 º; *º-º-º-º: gº Railrºads $8 FIG. 267. French Equatorial Africa now includes the whole of the large region called the Cameroons, except for a narrow strip on the northwest which has been added to British Nigeria. That part north and west of the heavy solid line is mandated territory; that part south and east of this line is ceded to France unconditionally according to Article 125 of the treaty of Versailles, thereby restoring the boundary of 1911, modified in Germany's favor at the time of the Agadir incident (foot- note, page 107). Note the northern limit of the equatorial forest, which suggests the grazing lands that lie between the forest and the desert Sahara beyond Lake Tchad. The Geographical Review, Vol. 5, 1918. & France and Great Britain have agreed to make a joint recommenda- tron to the League of Nations regarding the fate of Togoland. It was the smallest of Germany's African colonies, and the most densely in- habited, with at least 1,000,000 native population. unhealthful near the coast, but the highlands are capable of great agri- The country is cultural development (Fig. 268). This is one of the colonies from which Germany hoped to get an increasing quantity of cotton for her home British and French di- vision of the country Future of Togoland The New World Resources and diffi- culties in exploitation New rules of the . game NS), N = ſlē Ş. §3. § §§§ TOGOLAND Highland 800–1600ft Z 1600–7500f C sº § § wboundary N >N), P. §§ º H NBºS . 0 Scale of miles O 1O 20 3. Wel. &zz. ecº º º º f S32 º º § { {} Bºrº ‘A. *A * M. assamº º FIG. 268. Old and new boundaries in Togoland, one of Germany's four African colonies before 1914. The western portion is now a British mandata mandatary. manufactures. There are also valuable cacao and tobacco plantations, but they are small in ex- tent. As a source of palm oil the region, like º &N º the rest of West Africa, is of constantly increas- ing importance. The § colony has no good port. The most serious con- dition to be overcome is the spread of sleeping sickness by the tsetse fly, which infests the un- derbrush near the coast and along the rivers. § From Figure 265, it will be seen that Togoland is particularly affected by this disease. THE PRINCIPLE OF THE MANDATE The new arrangements | of the Peace Conference of Paris regarding Africa + have grown out of the old problems. The Allies' have disciplined Ger- many, it is true; but they have also made § rules for themselves. The purpose was not merely to take away rom Germany some colonial possessions, but to provide against the ry, the eastern a French kind of evils that she had practiced as well as the evils that the European nations saw in each other's policies and plans. African Colonies of the European Powers 547 In estimating the probable success of the new scheme for the control of former German territory in Africa under the mandate system of the League of Nations, we should not lose sight of the hitherto universal failure of schemes for joint control. The condominium was a failure in Samoa and led to the division of the island group between Great Britain, Germany, and the United States. Joint control has been sadly deficient in the New Hebrides. In Tangier, it has been a dis- grace to Europe. France and Great Britain gave up joint control of Egypt after a short trial. The Berlin Conference of 1884–1885 was designed to establish international rules for the expansion of European national claims to African territory, and although the effect as to the trade in arms, liquors, and slaves was beneficial, it increased rather than diminished the intensity of the scramble for territory. The new plan, however, has two promising features: (1) it takes control out of the hands of one power and places it in the hands of the several powers associated in the League of Nations, thus inviting review and correction of official acts; (2) it leaves actual administration to a single power, thus providing against the delays and abuses of joint re- sponsibility. TRADE POLICIES AND INATIVE CONTROL In spite of eagerness for territory in Africa, none of the European powers were able to make their tropical colonies a commercial success, except Germany in Togoland and Great Britain in Nigeria. All had preferential trade agreements which favored their own commerce. The colonies were reserved for the benefit of the traders of the home country. This was the policy of the French, for instance, in northern Africa, in Senegal, French Guinea, and Madagascar. For example, in the colonies of French West Africa there is a 7 per cent ad valorem surtax upon all goods coming from countries other than France, and there are restrictions upon the export of vegetable oil products to all countries except France. The natural result of French policy was the virtual extinction of British and German trade in the French Congo and Madagascar. There is scarcely such a thing as free commerce in Tunis. Privileges of great value, known as concessions, are also part of the plan of aiding French commerce. The only exceptions, in fact, were Dahomey, the Ivory Coast, and French Somaliland. To foster her wine business France has permitted and even pushed the sale of brandy and absinthe throughout Tunis, Algeria, and French West Africa, just as England permits a profitable gin trade with southern Nigeria. The mandatory system yet untried African colonies a financial burden French preferential trade 548 . The New World Welfare of the native Native rule not always possible Slave and liquor traffic These things are secondary, however, to the question of relations with the natives, whose welfare must be the chief thought of the European powers if the risks of bitterness and racial war are to be reduced. In the ill-treatment of the African native, Germany was easily first; though at one time or another every European power, and especially: Portugal, had treated the native cruelly. In 1904 Germany pushed her punishment of the Herero tribes of German Southwest Africa to the point where these people were reduced in number from 60,000 to 18,000. Millions of Moslem Berbers and Arabs in French North Africa dislike the French (because they are Christian, not because they are French) as much as the Moslem Egyptians dislike the English. . The peace treaties of 1919 provide relief for some of the causes of dissatisfaction on the part of the native, short of granting him po- litical control. The European nations cannot leave large sections of the world's low-grade populations to their fate. Zeal for the happiness and welfare of the native cannot always be carried to the point of permitting him to do as he wishes; had the United States left the Filipinos to themselves, their islands would soon have been in a state of anarchy and probably would thereafter have be- longed to Japan. Firmly as this principle has become embedded in foreign-office policies and justifiable as it seems from the general point of view, it must not be forgotten that it is, except in a few instances, outside the thought of the people to whom it is applied. Some of them would indeed prefer anarchy to foreign rule. If France were to withdraw from northern Africa, it would be a dis- aster to civilization there as great as that which followed the fall of the Roman Empire, when the Roman settlements of the same land One dy one were abandoned and fields long cultivated reverted to the desert. Equally dark would be the prospect if England withdrew unconditionally from Egypt. INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS RESPECTING LIQUOR TRAFFIC, LAVE TRADE, AND PROTECTION OF WILD ANIMALS After Stanley's return from the exploration of the Congo, the European rivalry for territorial gains in Africa became still more intense. This led to a number of international projects and agree- ments, to which at least brief reference must be made. These were foreshadowed by the Brussels Conference of 1876, called by the King of the Belgians while Stanley was yet in Africa. Its object was the opening up of the continent through an International African As- African Colonies of the European Powers 549 sociation. At first international in character, this soon became an almost purely Belgian organization, and by various steps, too detailed to record here, led to the acquisition of the Congo by King Leopold of Belgium. The Berlin Conference of 1884–1885 established the Congo Free State, provided for traffic regulation of the Congo River, laid down a free-trade zone in central Africa, and fixed the condi- tions of ownership by rival European powers. A second Brussels Conference, in 1890, delimited a slave-trade zone and a zone in which trade in arms and spirituous liquors was to be regulated. The slave trade is an old question in African administration. Early in the 19th century slave trading was prohibited by the more en- lightened European powers. Slavery itself was abolished by nearly all the powers by about the middle of the 19th century. But slave trading continued to be active in the interior of Africa. For years before the defeat of the Mahdist forces at Omdurman in 1898, slave- raiding Arabs under Mahdist control terrorized the natives of the Sudan. Even now slave trading has not been wholly discontinued. Until the Italian occupation of Tripoli in 1912 the Senussi (page 57) sent slaves through Benghazi and, with the help of the Turks, received arms and ammunitions. Today the traffic is under the ban of law, and international coöperation is chiefly responsible for its lessening practice. The regulation of the liquor traffic was of peculiar importance to the development of the African native. It is bad morality as well as bad business to debauch the native. His temper is more ardent, his impulses less subject to control, than in the case of the white. Unless the civilized world is prepared to back up by force, if necessary, and especially by strict police regulation, the control of the sale of liquor to the natives of Africa, they might better be left to run their own affairs. The world was shocked by the extent and cruelty of the slave trade; in the 19th century it was one of the chief pretexts of the European colonizing nations that they were bent on controlling territory so as to control the slave trade; it gave a pious turn to their acts which peculiarly fitted the spirit of the age. But it were far better to continue the slave trade under purely native responsibility than to substitute for it the unlicensed use of liquor. - Between the heavy lines of Figure 269 there was defined by the Brussels Conference of 1890 a zone for the preservation of wild ani- mals, and this was confirmed by the Convention of London, May 1900. It is a matter of very great importance to the continent of Suppression of slave traffic Police regula- tion for control of liquor traffic Protec- tion of wild game 550 - The New World AMAZ»As ſº • * /S. cAAAAYJ.S. .*.*, * 0 ), SENEGAL GAMBIA ; * CAAA*/AM LAGOS Ú/ VICTORIAzº RFAWA % D AR//wcas/ - S7: 7A/OMAs e Gu Z f o º Awwobow? | w | S/ave frao'e zo/7e Conventiona/6as/7 of rhe Congo Aſa'sfer/7/77ar/?//776 zo/7é &ouma'ary of zone for rego/afron t of traffic ſo arms ano'sør- /foods //q/wors Auropean aossessions Br///s/? ------------- LAGOS : :..." Arench ----------SENEGAL - *t à::::::::::::::::::::sº German --------- CAMEROONS d - O Aortuguese-------- A/VGOZA 30 Spanish---------CANARY IS * CAP E | e * /fa/fan ---------------ASSAB C O L O N Y Q sºcº, of ºleis 1000 2 *— \ - - t 3. 4% & FIG. 269. The black areas represent European possessions in 1884 before the Berlin Conference of that year. The upper half of the legend represents international regulations adopted at the Berlin Conference and the Brussels Conference of 1890. After Keltie, The Partition of Africa, 1895. There was added by the London Convention of 1900 a zone of protection of wild animals extending from the Zambesi and the northern limit of German Southwest Africa up to the twen- tieth parallel of north latitude. Africa, which has the largest and most varied assortment of big game animals in the world. On the grasslands bordering the central tropi- cal forest area, on the south and east, there are still many zebras, gazelles, hippos, rhinos, and waterbuck. They are in localities where they do not interfere with present settlements and should be protected on huge reserves regulated by law. They have been exterminated in some places in order to prevent destruction of the crops of settlers; but the process of extermination serves no useful purpose elsewhere, ~ African Colonies of the European Powers 551 especially when carried on by irresponsible hunters intent on making a record of killings. EENEFITS OF COLONIAL DEVELOPMENT We gain some idea of the possible benefits of colonial development by looking at what France has already accomplished in northern Africa. The farms that the Romans had made with such care the French found a desert, and they immediately set to work to reclaim them by making hundreds of artesian wells, by damming up the streams that had been allowed to waste their precious waters in the sand, by fighting the swarms of locusts. Lion, hyena, and leopard had ravaged the flocks and herds; the French set to work to exterminate them in the neighborhood of settlements. They built several thou- sands of miles of roads and constructed hundreds of miles of railways. The fine cedars of the Atlas Mountains were in the way of extinction, and the French forest service came just in time to save them. By many different means France has placed under cultivation at least 100,000 square miles of land (or about twice the area of Colorado or Alabama) that was formerly desert waste. In 1894 Timbuktu was captured and the indigenous population released from the tyranny of its Tuareg masters. Since then east- ward penetration has progressed apace. Before and during the World War, Tilho explored a vast area northeast and east of Lake Tchad, including the fastnesses of Tibesti. With small detachments, chiefly of native troops, he sought out and dispersed those tribesmen who, under Senussi influence (page 57), sought to consolidate Moslem power in one of the least accessible places in the French Sahara. The isolated territories on the southern edge of the Sahara thus brought under the French peace are susceptible of economic development, provided they can be made more accessible. Plans for a trans-Saharan railroad to this end include a line across the Sahara, connecting the coast of Algiers with the Niger and Lake Tchad, which shall even- tually connect with the British system that reaches north from Cape Town (Figs. 15 and 49). Best of all, France has done these things with little disturbance to native political and social organization; she has taken no land away from native holders; she has put money and effort into the improve- ment of the life of the people. Her work has extended into Mada- gascar, where the Hovas, a tyrannical Malayo-Polynesian people who settled in the island in the 16th century, had long practiced slavery, thus depopulating large tracts in the south and southwest. Work of the French in northern Africa French re- spect for native rights 552 The New World Portuguese policies in Africa Heligo– land and Zanzibar British Uganda Protecto- rate MINOR COLONIAL PROBLEMS AND TRADE INTERESTS IN AFRICA 1 The possessions of the smaller powers in Africa are bound to give trouble in the future. The Portuguese, for example, have carried the policy of differential duties on colonial commerce to such an ex- treme as practically to shut out all trade except with Portugal. If they had money and men with which to develop their own coun- try, matters might not be so bad. But Portugal itself is poor and feeble, with a population under 6,000,000. It has lower railway mileage than any other country of its size in Europe. Its colonial governors follow no fixed policy except one of weakness and immoral toleration of the sale of liquor to the native. The home government has been so unstable during the past ten years that it has completely demoralized colonial administration. In southern Angola there has been fairly rapid development, with the help of British capital and enterprise. Spanish Guinea belongs to the same class of feebly devel- oped colonies; Spain has long ceased to be a capable colonizing nation. Perhaps no other part of the British Empire seems to us as re- mote as Zanzibar, yet were any other power to try to get possession of it, a political storm would be aroused in England. The Zanzibar Arabs have favored the British in trade and politics; British strategy in relation to India and South Africa requires possession of the re- gion; cables have been laid to it. It is a British protectorate with Zanzibar Town as a free port. England's position there, long con- tested by Germany, was finally confirmed and strengthened by the Anglo-German treaty of 1890, when she ceded Heligoland to Ger- many in exchange for additional rights in Zanzibar and Pemba. The cession of Heligoland was felt at the time to be of doubtful advantage, and it became a matter of great regret to Great Britain in the World War, when that island became a base of operations for the German High Seas Fleet. It was in 1890 also that, by the terms of an agreement with Ger- many, Great Britain assumed a protectorate over Uganda. Egypt, the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, Uganda, and British East Africa, thus connected, form a broad strip, of imperial extent, that looks out upon the Mediterranean at one end and upon the Indian Ocean at the other. It flanks the route to India. Possession of it put the Cape- to-Cairo project a step nearer realization. 1 The major colonial interests of the great powers are described in the separate chapters on these powers; e.g., Egypt and South Africa, in Chapter Two, Imperial Problems of Great Britain. - African Colonies of the European Powers 553 Germany was well satisfied with these changes, because with them went substantial advantages for herself. Besides Heligoland she obtained the Caprivi salient, a long arm of territory extending from German Southwest Africa eastward to the Zambesi (Fig. 15); she extended the northern boundary of Cameroons to Lake Tchad; she became established in the Victoria Nyanza region inland as far as the Belgian Congo. France was equally fortunate. By the Anglo-French agreement of 1890 she established a protectorate over Madagascar (it became a French colony in 1896) and became the recognized power of the western Sahara. In 1904 she had her favored position in Morocco recognized by Great Britain. Recognition by Germany came only in 1911 after the Agadir incident, as explained previously (page 107). France then bought German recognition of her Moroccan position by ceding to Germany a large section of French Equatorial Africa (strip to the Congo, Fig. 267). There remained a dispute between France and Spain which ex- plains the odd disposition of territory south of the Straits of Gibral- tar. Naturally, Spain has always been interested in the African coast opposite her. In 1912 she confirmed France's special position in Morocco and herself obtained a narrow strip along the coast, now called the Spanish Zone, and in addition an enclave on the south- western coast of Morocco at Ifni. Two hundred and fifty square miles at Tangier became an “international zone” (Figs. 80 and 81). weST AFRICA West Africa includes a belt of territory nearly 3000 miles long, ex- tending from Mauretania at the western end of the Sahara south and east as far as the Portuguese possessions in the Congo region (Fig. 82). It comprises a score of organized states belonging to Great Britain, France, Belgium, Spain, and Portugal. Including the Belgian Congo (pages 125 to 128), the region has nearly a half-billion dollars’ worth of trade, carried on at more than forty ports. Great Britain has most of the trade; Germany ranked second before 1914. West Africa in- cludes Togoland and the Cameroons, former German possessions now divided between Great Britain and France as mandatory powers of the League of Nations (Figs. 267 and 268). Great Britain owns the richest territory and the largest number of trade agencies. Her posi- tion and interests, to which we now turn, illustrate the value of West Africa in the commercial world. Increased German power in Africa French protection of Morocco 554 The New World Com- mercial rivalry in West Africa 30 20 2: ºr ºf - 3. Sºsº.º. . - : - 'w) 3t N *: § § : ;: §§ - i. sº § Š. . ::$ºSºº-ºº:. ſ” § - # OF 2. | • º Sºść...º.o. º: *. § ; - g • * * * - - - ; wº ºr. ASW 10 z - *_- - -- §§§ § §§§º - - I -º-º-º- . i*J. º §32. Sºś º `-2% QITROYi Žº A Ll o º º T. * : - ./ • ? Sy’ LA OIIlê § § sº vº, AE) §§§'. \e spanishguº& % Nyº 0 > * — fº º: 0 YZx - - }, © Nº ** C. 2. Cº *, |- -2^ lſ) •St.Helena BELTS OF VEGETATION arivo 20. Z /ores?s § Cereaſs, ground nurs, sugar, § fobacco ana' fru/fs Paſm oil, shea buffer, and sºl of her vege/ab/27&#s Aasfure /ana's Scale of miles 00 300 500 1000 FIG. 270. West Africa, from the Congo to Senegal, has been the field of keenest commercial rivalry in respect of raw materials. Note the variety and concentration of vegetation belts there. A small white population controls the commercial system of a large native population in West Africa. The map is diagrammatic in part, as in the Nile Valley and in the interior of the Sahara and of Arabia. After Sir Harry Johnston, the Geographical Journal, Vol. 45, 1915. Among Great Britain's possessions, British West Africa, next to India, is the most important from the standpoint of raw materials. It includes (without the recent British portions of the mandated areas of Togoland and Cameroons) Sierra Leone, the Gold Coast, Nigeria, and Gambia, and contains 20,000,000 native people in an area of 450,000 square miles. Ocean transportation being the cheapest there is in the world, and the distance from West Africa to the English Channel being but three thousand miles, the rich resources of the African Colonies of the European Powers 555 region became the object of strong commercial rivalry between Ger- many and Great Britain. As a result of the World War and the peace settlement, Germany is now out of this market; her agencies are gone, she has lost her former prestige among the natives, she has no ships for the carrying trade. West Africa is rich in cacao and palm oil particularly, although it has important tin, coal, and gold deposits, as well as an increas- ing production of timber, nuts, rubber, fiber, and cotton. Among these the richest in immediate possibilities is palm oil. With the rapid development of machine industry, lubricating oil is in great demand; the world's consumption of soap is also steadily growing; substitutes for butter are now in favor. All these things and more the palm tree will supply. From the seed an oil is obtained that has the greatest variety of uses. From Nigeria alone, in 1917, there were $20,000,000 of palm oil exports, or almost one half the total in value. Southern Nigeria has the further advantage of having a dense popu- lation of more than 100 to the square mile, and here there is the greatest degree of prosperity, owing to large quantities of raw material that may be gathered or produced upon the hot and wet coastal lowlands and to geographical position, or accessibility. Before the war Germany took most of the palm-nut exports, em- ploying even the meal of the nut for cattle feed. This trade has now been diverted entirely to British firms, who are about to open additional motor roads and railways in order to tap several thousand square miles of palm territory, native transportation methods being primitive. Hand in hand with such development will go the stimula- tion of other lines of production, especially cotton and cacao. •In 1916 the cacao produced on the Gold Coast alone was valued at $18,000,000. - ADEN In connection with the minor European colonies in the horn of Africa mention must be made of the adjacent Arabian territory per- taining to the port of Aden. Though the British territory at Aden has only 50,000 people, who live on very poor land totaling about 80 square miles, the British protectorate covers some 9000 square miles. The place is important because of its strategic value in the defense of India and the Suez Canal, and because it is the focus of the Red Sea trade as well as that of Abyssinia and all that eastern portion of Africa known as French, British, and Italian Somaliland. All told, the population of the region of which Aden is the commercial focus is above Valuable resources to feed industry Diversion of trade to Great Britain an effect of the war Aden as the com- mercial focus of a large region. 556 The New World Nomadic peoples of Somaliland sº TAJI) Eð - cº A tº owah !--- ſº.” $ f 2-1 SOKOTRA {} ABY S S IN I.A. 0 100 200 4. O. / FIG. 271. The Aden region and the Strait of Bab el Mandeb, a focal point of eastern trade with Europe. The British own Perim Island, between which and the French possession of Sheikh Said lies the principal ship channel. Each power is therefore anxious to get control of the other's position. - 12,000,000, and the region includes 850,000 square miles of territory, in places capable of early development. THE THREE SOMALILANDS AND ERITREA British, French, and Italian Somaliland are alike in possessing an arid or semi-arid lowland that rises in the interior to hills and table- lands with a somewhat moister climate, particularly in British Somali- land. The people are everywhere nomadic, moving from one water hole to another with their flocks and herds according to the seasons. They are all Moslems, practically without education, and all are in a measure difficult to govern. Except for the seaports there are no towns and hardly any permanent villages. No newspapers or other periodicals are published in Somaliland. AREA AND POPULATION OF SOMALILAND BY PoliticAL DIVISIONS º Pºº- PRODUCTs ExPORTED British Somaliland 68,000 || 300,000 | Hides and skins, gum arabic, - cattle, ghee butter French Somaliland 5,800 | 208,000 | Hides and skins, coffee, ivory, beeswax Italian Somaliland 139,000 | 400,000 | Hides and skins, butter, durra - - (a kind of millet) Statistics of area and population for the three Somalilands vary greatly according to the point of view. For example, the most recent French figures, in the Annuaire Statistique, 1917, give 46,000 square African Colonies of the European Powers 557 miles as the area of French Somaliland, the Statesman's Year-Book gives 5800, and the Encyclopædia Britannica gives 12,000. Through French Somaliland via the Franco-Ethiopian railway to the port of Djibouti and through British Somaliland via camel cara- van routes to the port of Berbera (the capital) comes the principal part of the overland transit trade of Abyssinia. This fact and the grazing possibilities of the grasslands of the region explain the conflict of claims in the hinterland for the ill-defined eastern part of Abyssinia. Besides Italian Somaliland and Libya, Italy holds also the small colony of Eritrea on the coast of the Red Sea. The coastal belt is barren and sandy, but inland there is a fertile central plateau with a cool climate and a better water supply. There has been little de- velopment of the region up to the present time. Its 45,800 square miles are inhabited by 330,000 people, divided between settled vil- lagers on the plateau and pastoral tribes in the lowlands. Life is so primitive that there is very little commerce, and the colony has no real commercial importance at the present time, except as a transit land for Abyssinian trade and as a focus (at the port of Massowah) for a part of the Red Sea coast of Arabia. The colony stands out in industrial development principally by reason of the low grade of development of the regions adjacent. Besides stock raising there is pearl fishing and potash mining and, in recent years, even meat packing. An Italian government mission has just surveyed the resources of the colony, in view of Italy's acute need for additional raw materials. THE INDEPENDENT STATES OF ABYSSINIA AND LIBERIA Abyssinia is one of two independent states in Africa. It has an area estimated at 400,000 square miles and is largely isolated from surrounding lands by its mountainous character and the deep canyons that nick the outer borders of its plateaus. There is a limited amount of barren lowland, especially on the east and south, but the plateau and mountain sections have a cool and moist climate. The popula- tion numbers between 8,000,000 and 10,000,000. While the state of development of these people is low and their standard of living simple, they are so numerous as to furnish the basis for a considerable trade. Ivory, beeswax, and gums have been the standard exports, and re- cently potash has been worked on a commercial scale. There are also undeveloped coal and oil resources. - The eastern frontier of Abyssinia has never been accurately de- fined, and here there has been rivalry between France, Great Britain Italian colony of Eritrea Unique position of Abyssinia and its interna- tional re- lations 558 The New World and Italy for possession of the land. The Fashoda incident of 1898 brought Great Britain and France to the verge of armed conflict." The negro republic of Liberia is situated on the west African coast between Sierra Leone (British) and the Ivory Coast (French). Its total area is about 40,000 square miles (a little less than that of Penn- sylvania) and the population has been variously estimated, the figures ranging from 700,000 to about 2,000,000, of whom all but about 50,000 on the coast are quite uncivilized. Liberians of American origin number some 12,000. - The foundation of the republic was the result of efforts made by the American Colonization Society, founded in 1816 to settle free American negroes on African soil. In 1820 actual settlement began, and in 1847 the colonists promulgated a declaration of independence and drew up a constitution. Even today the government does not effectively control the interior regions, and this has led to the pro- gressive diminution of Liberia's territory by French encroachment. Should this or similar absorption by Europeans threaten Liberia with real danger of extinction, the United States would doubtless play a guardian's part. w The political influence of the United States has been carried directly into Africa by treaty with Liberia, so that the United States has now assumed obligations that cover a stretch of 15,000 miles, or three fifths of the circumference of the earth, from Liberia to the Philippines. The United States loaned Liberia $5,000,000 in 1918 for the construction of roads, etc., and has assumed the position of chief financial adviser to the republic, a position which was pre- viously held by a joint commission of representatives of Great Britain, the United States, and Germany. The development of the resources of the region is hindered some- what by the constitutional provision that none but Liberian citizens may hold real estate, except for colonization, missionary, educational, or other benevolent purposes. The present head of the government of Liberia holds broader views of the country's future than his predeces- sors held and is seeking to provide better commercial opportunities for whites, upon whom the economic progress of the country must depend. 1. With the intention of linking her possessions in east and west Africa across the terri- tory of the Upper Nile, France penetrated to Fashoda, a fortress on the Upper Nile, in 1898, at just the time that Kitchener, after defeating the Dervishes at Omdurman, was proceeding up river to complete the conquest of the Sudan. Extreme diplomatic tension was created by the meeting of the rival military forces, and actual hostilities were averted Origin and character of Liberia Interests of the United States in Liberia only with great difficulty. The outcome was the withdrawal of the French and hence a British victory. CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR LATIN-AMERICAN TRADE AND BOUNDARY DISPUTES : RELATIONS TO THE UNITED STATES THE great problems of our time are not confined to European fields, They occur in almost every occupied part of the world from Spits- bergen to South Georgia. With the use of airplane and submarine for commercial and strategic purposes, even remote islets have a new importance. The natural pastures of the moss-covered tundras of Siberia, Lapland, and northern North America are now thinly inhabited and of low value, but they may some day be the scene of World- wide dis- tribution of problem area.S strong rivalry as a source of meat supply. At some future time even the sea may be marked out politically in zones of economic development, if the food value of its hordes of now unused but useful marine organisms should ever be developed. The Amazon valley, hot, forested, unhealthful, and thinly inhabited, seems now of small importance; but it may yet be a source of incalculable energy when medical science conquers the tropical germ diseases and when the resources of the temperate zones are taxed to capacity by rapidly growing populations. Therefore in a realm so vast as that stretching from the Rio Grande to Tierra del Fuego, the home of 20,000,000 people of white blood, of nearly 20,000,000 Indians and negroes, and of 35,000,000 more of mixed blood, it should not surprise us to find problems of practical interest to the whole world and of paramount interest to the United States. THE UNITED STATES AND LATIN AMERICA To every thoughtful person in the United States, Latin-American relations and problems appear the more important because of past diplomatic and commercial neglect. Though the people of the northern republic call their Latin neighbors “Americans,” make much of the protective value of the Monroe Doctrine, and lay par- ticular stress on the good effects of closer commercial ties, the United States must face the cold fact, whether agreeable or not, that satisfactory relations have not yet been established. The ties appear to be artificial. There is lacking the bond that is in general the strongest in the world — a common language. Then there are differ- ences of race which are even more nearly fundamental. They mani- fest themselves in manners and dress, in literature and ethics, in sports, and in social and political ideals. - - 559 Need for a basis of good under- standing FIG. 272. American penetration in the Caribbean. Consult table on page 561. Note Panama inset in upper right-hand corner. Several small islands of the Virgin group are in British possession. * = 'o Gr 90 8||5 *. —f 2: 75 0 O T8 CŞ 3. *llerto Běhº Q-> 5 &Miami C C. - TNas * Hºlſti +H:º §§ {g* M E X C O Key West g '', *S §. * § -- F - º Y. e g Lake § º - \, O Havana ... S- º -9 º *NNX- 9 F *_* is º º N : tſ 1, * N.-- \\ y- *%, . - ZANGUILLA(Br) S- ºf TTT ##eli, e-> & Cº, & anto S- e. º #sº QS - i Ś8% 6 e ingston. Jomungo Once CRUZ 'ssrcialsToPHER (Br) tº: & y ge - {O8 9. * ... eanTIOUA (Br) QS # 3 º' lº 3arrº Sz 0 S y"---Fes ºr ; ~ * ~ *kWO <> 15 A - - -* S .* a Cob al P- N D . - gº. ºº " " " R A s G * > S .** SS. Tegucigalpa racias allios . *sº Aº’ San S SAIyabó, O % -4 AV AS' A.' A. Osrhºe S. arl Saiv - • % \ STVEN % © - - (Br)3, BARBA598 º % º I,ITTLE (Neth)A sº § (Br.) eſ" - M; % % #: CORNIS C§: 3.09. º GGRENADA (Br.) ſts alla. *NZK2 lutefields - $ ºAYRE.8. On" . Ri SS A.** º (Neth) • *- 3. Sabanilla /* TORTUGA cºmARGARTIA of Sīā $0 °63. Greytown Barranqui º Santa Márta. Ü ib Caracas T Pg RINIDAD Sq radena f R\MāTaCalDO • (Br) 10 . ſº * ſ oValencial ń. * * >> Colon # / Q. ÖA & we & zº $, * & ź. § A 25 º: & &\ - - o € o Jö. 2 e& Dàºi tº Vºž) * N. VEN E Z UE LA 2.5% - cº . Péar % ad J iudad Bolivar :*** colom BIA Q 90 Ila- S-> t 65 Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 561 Finally, there is the instinctive and world-wide antagonism spring- ing from the fear and dislike of the weak for the strong. In the case of Latin America this fear rests upon a foundation of fact as well as upon a measure of instinctive antagonism due to unlike race and lesser commercial and military power. The steady growth of the United States in territory and influence, mainly among former Latin-American possessions, naturally arouses anxiety as to future advances. The following table reveals the surprising fact that the United States has extended its influence and control more rapidly since its annexation of Hawaii (not to mention the earlier acquisition of territory originally Latin-American in the southwest) than any other great power, even imperialist Russia. NAME DATE RELATIONSHIP º PopULATION Hawaii. tº º º 1898 || Annexed 6,450 250,000 Cuba . . . . . 1898 || Virtual protectorate 44,150 2,900,000 Porto Rico . . . 1898 || Annexed after war with Spain 3,600 1,250,000 Philippine Islands. 1898 || Annexed after war with Spain 115,025 | 8,500,000 Guam . . . . . . 1898 || Annexed after war with Spain 210 14,500 Tutuila (Samoa) . . 1899 || Annexed by treaty with Great Britain and Germany 77 7,250 Panama . . . . . 1903 || General supervision 32,400 450,000 Santo Domingo. . . 1907 || Supervision of finances 18,500 955,000 - 1916 || Military administration Haiti . . . . . . . . 1915 | Supervision of finances 11,000 2,500,000 Nicaragua . . . . 1913 || Virtual protectorate 49,500 746,000 1916 || Grant of canal rights and naval bases to U. S. Virgin Islands . . 1917 | Ownership by purchase 132 26,000 Totals 281,044 17,598,750 The United States is classified as a democracy, and it has in recent years disavowed imperialist designs and even protested against such designs on the part of European powers; yet the fact is that the tendency to expansion has been shown in an emphatic manner from the beginnings of settlement in colonial days, through the period of the Louisiana Purchase and the annexation of Florida, during the period immediately before and after the Mexican War, down to the present. The protectorate over Haiti assumed in 1915, the treaty with Nicaragua in 1916, whereby the United States obtained for 99 years the right to construct a canal through Nicaraguan territory, and the purchase of the Virgin Islands in 1917, are merely the latest in a long series of advances. - The events referred to above are facts that impress the Latin-Amer- ican countries more powerfully than expressions of good will and devo- American expansion in practice Basis of expansion 562 The New World Opposition to expan- sion a new experience for the United States Coöpera- tion an aspiration rather than a reality way. tion to democratic ideals. In part the expansion of the United States is a manifestation of the almost universal land-hunger of the peoples of the world; in part it is an expression of that pioneering instinct which has ever driven the people of the United States beyond their territorial frontiers; in part it is a conviction of the superiority of American institutions over those they displace in some Latin-Amer- ican countries that are too weak and backward to manage themselves; and in part it is a recognition of the Commercial advantages that are naturally associated with a higher degree of political control. Whatever European nations might have preferred to do, they have in practice — at times under direct compulsion — recognized the Mon- roe Doctrine and left the United States free to pursue its southward advance; but such expansion has in recent years evoked a certain hostility among the Latin-American states, a hostility based on the assumption that their economic and political liberties were at stake; and the United States is therefore confronted with direct and powerful political opposition for the first time since it embarked upon its policy of expansion overseas. Here we have a problem of the first rank. For the people of the United States are as unknown to themselves as they are to the rest of the world. They do not know how they will take interference with their policy of expansion, for in that expansion they have not had, so far, a single misadventure. While such an experi- ence has left them in an amiable attitude toward others and has given them a generous appreciation of the point of view of others, there is danger in that they do not know what fires of passion may be lighted by active opposition. The eagerness of the United States to coöperate with Latin-American republics has shown itself in the organization of the Pan American Union, in friendly interest in the once active Central American Court of Justice, and in acceptance of the offers of the A B C powers — Argentina, Brazil, and Chile — in the Mexican trouble of 1916; but it is not certain that coöperation is equally acceptable to the Latin Americans, who have a quite different character and a markedly different social order, and whose governments, though patterned after that of the United States, are actually run in a quite different Moreover, they cannot help seeing that the history of the last twenty-five years shows the United States as an expansionist power of rapidly growing strength, with a population that now numbers 105,000,000, or more than the population of the entire group of twenty Latin-American nations. They realize that in any coöperative enter- prise the United States would play the dominant part. Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 563 Fig. 273. The city and harbor of Charlotte Amelie, Virgin Islands, now an American possession. Then, too, there are marked differences of opinion between the people of the United States and those of Latin-American countries as to the social and political problems of the day. To take a single instance, there are great differences with respect to colored popula- tions. The tendency to intermarry with the native races is a marked characteristic of the Latin Americans. In Chile whole sections of the former Indian population have become mixed with the whites, and though the Indian element is strongly marked, there is no longer any recognition of the existence of the Indian in those particular sections, the population calling itself Chilean. Similarly, a large mixed class exists in Peru and Bolivia, to cite two more illustrations out of many. In short, the barriers of race are far less marked in Latin America than in the United States. There can be recognized in parts of Latin America a considerable decline in the quality of the population. Our common thought is that the world is improving; but as a matter of fact portions of it have actually lost ground. This is particularly true in Haiti and Santo Domingo, in parts of Central America, in Venezuela, and in Mexico. In actual practice democratic principles have been left far Differences with respect to the color line Decline of population and politi- cal ideals 564 The New World Anxiety respecting encroach- ments of rival powers IDevelop- ment in tropical lands a task for progressive peoples behind. There are a few countries in which military dictators are in actual control, instead of truly representative governments. Pro- fessing the same general political principles, they show the utmost divergence of political practice. Should there be increasing weakness on the part of small and politi- cally disintegrating states, the possibilities of encroachment by powers with imperialist designs would require consideration. It is feared by the neighbors of the United States that the impulse to dominate the Caribbean and the Pacific will grow stronger, and may lead even- tually to sovereign control. One argument always stands ready for effective use: that only in growth can guarantees be found that colonies and naval stations of other powers will not be established near the shores of the United States to threaten its security as well as its peace. This consideration explains the purchase of the Danish West Indies during the World War, the protectorate over Haiti, the special arrangements with Cuba (the Platt Amendment), with Santo Domingo (a receivership amounting to a protectorate), with Panama (direct ownership of the Canal Zone and special treaty arrangements with the Republic of Panama), and with Nicaragua (the purchase of canal rights and the regulation of her financial affairs). If the United States allows financial operations to be carried on and obligations to be incurred in Latin America by its commercial rivals, protectorates and naval stations of its own will be the natural outcome; for these rivals look to the United States to guarantee the integrity of Latin-American states included under the general protection of the Monroe Doctrine. The United States is also impelled to expand commercially in the part of Latin America nearest to it by the necessities of modern civilization, which require tropical products in increasing quantities. Were tropical America occupied by more progressive peoples than those which race, history, and climate have conspired to develop there, economic relations might be built upon a basis of ordinary exchange, as between France and America. Instead there is a population locally incapable of protecting itself or of managing its affairs, and in a few places in a state of political and economic decline. Only under the stimulus of necessity and through the influx of the agents and capital of temperate lands are the tropical products of weak countries made available. With the importation of aggressive men and capital into the tropics goes the importation first of economic and then of political Systems. e The only serious fear connected with such an importation is that it may lead to the exploitation of unwilling peoples by unfair means. Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 565 Political discontent and even war have sprung again and again from this imposition of ideas and power upon other peoples. Such im- position is not restricted to tropical America, but is world-wide; it is associated with the extraordinary expansion of the political and economic systems of the densely populated industrial nations of the north temperate zone into the tropical lands of America, Africa, and the East and West Indies. - COMPETITION FOR SOUTH AMERICAN TRADE Though serious efforts have been made to turn the tide of Latin American students and travelers toward the United States, it must be said that it still flows far more strongly toward Europe, and par- ticularly to France. For the Latin Americans find that the older cultures of Europe more nearly meet their taste in manners and accord better with their point of view, their philosophy, and their ideals. This congeniality of mind and the keener needs of the European merchants for raw materials (as compared with the United States) have conspired with the extensive type of South American production to put the commerce of Latin America very much into the hands of the commercial and financial interests of western Europe. To this end also has contributed powerfully the better shipping service to South America from England and France. A prominent Briton wrote in 1913 that one of the eleven main probable causes of future wars in which Great Britain might take part would be “. . . any attempt of the United States to exercise peculiar polit- ical or commercial privileges in South America, east of the Panama Canal Zone, and in general any attempt on the part of an outside power to interfere with the independence of the South American republics; or a disposition on the part of any South American state to confer peculiar privileges in commerce on the subjects of any for- eign power to the detriment of the free-trade principle.” It is important to note that the writer does not include Central America and Mexico in his list, and it is equally important to note that he speaks as a representative of a free-trade nation. He has given us, therefore, both a broad political statement related to the independence of the South American states and a narrower statement relating to trade arrangements that shall give the British merchant the same chance as the American. - Great Britain is by far the largest investor in South American Dangers of impos- ing alien ideas upon tropical peoples Tides of travel and business toward Europe British and American competi- tion for Latin- American trade 566 The New World British commercial interests in South America American business interests in Latin America Business combina- tions for foreign trade enterprises: her citizens own large concessions in the Mexican oil fields and in Colombia; her railway financiers built the Argentine railways; and for a time she was the largest owner among foreign nitrate companies in northern Chile. The Peruvian Corporation (British), which has almost sovereign rights in Peru, temporarily holds the rich guano concessions of the Chinchas Islands and owns the Southern Railway, from Mollendo and Arequipa to Lake Titicaca and Cuzco. The chief advances made in the trade of South America have not yet brought the United States into acute conflict with British in- terests, but they are likely to do so in the near future unless there is agreement with Great Britain on a common policy. American capitalists have very largely increased their railway holdings and will tend in the future to have a stronger hold upon land transport, which will greatly stimulate American industrial enterprises. Large American export houses have established themselves in the main coast ports. A chain of banking houses has been founded to offer banking facilities to the American merchant and investor. At Chu- quicamata, in northern Chile, American interests have acquired the largest deposit of commercial copper known in South America. An American firm owns the rich copper and silver mines of Cerro de Pasco in Peru, and those of Braden in Chile. During the World War many manufactured goods formerly obtained from Europe were imported from the United States, and some of that war-time trade the United States has held, owing to improved knowledge of the needs of South American people and their peculiar desires and to the better freight rates that the new cargo carriers in the South American trade were able to offer for a time. Of great influence in future world trade, and especially in United States trade with Latin America, is the Webb Law, passed by Con- gress on 10 April 1918, which permits a combination of business firms engaged in export trade. Formerly such combination was forbidden by the Sherman and other anti-trust laws. Under the Webb law it may be expected that American export trade will be promoted. Al- ready some of the large manufacturing, banking, and exporting firms have laid plans for the pooling of their business and the development of American export trade on a great scale, in order that through coöpera- tion rather than competition they may hold and develop a larger share of the world's trade. The growth of Spanish interests in Latin America was very rapid from 1914 to 1919, partly for sentimental and political reasons and Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 567 partly for business reasons, seeing that Spain, by engaging in trade as a neutral country during the war period, greatly increased her bank reserves. After the war she appointed a committee of engineers at Madrid to investigate the possibilities of commercial expansion with the Spanish-speaking republics of Latin America, with the object of promoting closer business and political relations. There is to be a permanent exhibit of Latin-American products at Madrid. But in spite of the growth of Spanish, Italian, and French trade in Latin America, the interests of the United States clash with those of no European power save Great Britain. Let us follow this fact into Central America and see some of its consequences there. In 1850 the United States signed a treaty with Great Britain, called the Clayton-Bulwer treaty, by which the United States agreed not to construct an isthmian canal save as a joint enterprise with Great Britain. But the growth of Caribbean interests led to the abrogation of that treaty in 1901 (by the terms of the Hay-Paunce- fote treaty) and left the United States free to construct a canal by itself, provided that the canal be open to the ships of all nations on the same terms. In fact, European countries have looked to the gov- ernment of the United States to maintain order and guarantee the security of their loans in Central American states, and this the United States cannot do unless it occupies a privileged position and holds the main strategic points. During the past fifteen years the United States has frequently landed and even maintained marines in Honduras and Nicaragua, and has taken over indefinitely the functions of the default- ing government in Santo Domingo. In September 1915 an agreement with Haiti provided that the United States may take such steps as may be necessary to maintain an adequate government. The United States also undertook to supervise the financial and military affairs of Haiti. Pershing's military expedition into Mexico in 1916 was in line with the American custom of maintaining order, or at least taking the lead in quelling disorder, in the parts of Latin America that lie nearby. * Opposed to this supervisory policy of the United States are large and influential sections of South America, and these sections have followed their big neighbor's behavior with the closest attention. Chile has been watchful and suspicious, because the United States befriended her rival, Peru, in the bitter war of 1879–1883. The man- ner in which the Panama Canal Zone was acquired offended Colombia deeply, and it will be long before that country is in truth the friend of the United States. Though belated, American action in recognizing Spanish interests in Latin America American influence in Central American affairs Attitude of Latin- American nations toward the United States not always friendly 568 - The New World Results of disorder in Mexico the neglect of Colombia's interests in 1903 by the agreement of 1921 to pay her $25,000,000 and grant special transportation privileges in the Canal Zone is at least a necessary first step in the direction of better relations. The United States and Colombia are naturally closely allied through the large trade, and especially the large fruit business, which is conducted in the Caribbean coast region. THE MEXICAN PROBLEM The unsettled state of Mexico offers the problem of most direct and keen interest to the United States today. Border populations must not be in constant danger of raids by bandits from the southern side of the Rio Grande. Investments in mines, oil fields, and cattle ranches, if these have been honestly acquired and administered, should have security. In Mexico thousands of people have been killed by revolution and banditry, thousands of others impoverished, political opponents imprisoned, and foreign debts neglected. The total number of Americans killed on the border or in Mexico in recent years runs into the hundreds. The number of Americans in Mexico was reduced, chiefly by emigration to escape death or avoid the con- fiscation of property, from 75,000 in 1910 or 1911 to 12,000 by Sep- tember 1919. American losses in Mexico of all kinds during the past few years have a total value of nearly half a billion of dollars. It remains to be seen whether Mexican elements can restore Mexico to the honorable position that she so long held. To employ force would be a painful alternative for the United States and would pro- duce a fresh crop of suspicions among those Latin Americans who heretofore have not relinquished the hope that America desires to avoid the absorption of small and weak states even when they are dishonest and provocative in international conduct. These are problems which cannot be solved by saying that capi- talists, large landowners, and corrupt government officials once held the mass of the Mexican people in economic bondage. Unless the whole structure of the organized world is to be destroyed and the worship of chaos to begin, with such suffering as mankind has not yet known, a change of government cannot be made the excuse for repudiating debts and disclaiming all moral obligations. - THE WEST INDIES At the entrance to the Gulf of Mexico, there begins a chain of islands that runs to the east until it makes a sharp turn and curves southward to the coast of Venezuela. The larger islands in this are Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 569 — Cuba, Jamaica, Haiti, and Porto Rico — lie nearest Mexico and the United States. On the outer side of the arc, and near Florida, lie the Bahama Islands, almost parallel with Cuba and Haiti. Next to the Bahama Islands come the Leeward Islands, which are on the turn of the curve downward toward South America. Next, running almost directly south, comes the chain of small islands, the Windward Islands, that ends with Trinidad near the mouth of the Orinoco. The largest and most valuable islands of the entire group of the West Indies were in Spanish possession from the Age of Discovery. Some of the smaller islands, particularly those farthest east, were transferred from power to power in the days of the struggle, first between Dutch and English, later between English and French, for colonial and naval supremacy. Up to 1898 possession of the islands had remained settled for some time: Cuba and Porto Rico were Spanish; the Bahamas and Jamaica were English ; on the island of Haiti two republics had been established, Haiti and the Dominican Republic; of the Leeward Islands one small group — the Virgin Islands — was Danish, and the others were divided about equally between France and Great Britain, while the Windward Islands were entirely Eng- Foreign control of the West Indian Islands lish. The Dutch also held a smaller group, one of which is Curaçao, to the west of the Windward Islands near the Gulf of Venezuela. Since 1898 there have been several changes in the ownership of these islands. Cuba is now a republic practically under United States pro- tection, as are also the republics of Haiti and Santo Domingo. Porto Rico has become a part of United States territory. The latest change is the purchase from Denmark in 1917 of the Virgin Islands, the group immediately to the east of Porto Rico, by the United States. The purchase of the Virgin Islands from Denmark, like the Panama Canal transaction in 1903, notified the world that America regarded herself as having special and rightful interests in the Caribbean and along its shores. In a similar case, the general recognition of the British protectorate in Egypt in 1919 acknowledged Great Britain's special and rightful interest in the route to India and especially the Suez Canal. Experience with Spain in Cuba before 1898 justified the United States in undertaking to maintain order since that time in the whole of the American Mediterranean. - In the days of sailing vessels the presence of European powers in the island groups to the southeast, while sometimes noted as a disadvantage, was not felt by the United States to be a source of great danger. Swifter means of communication increased the fear that a Special interests of the United States The Carib- bean a region of special interest to Americans foreign power might use the islands as a base of attack on the United 570 The New World Boundary disputes due to ignorance as well as to ambition Chile- Argentina dispute of Igoo Bolivian disputes with Peru and Brazil States. With the acquisition of the Panama Canal, the presence of , other powers in the chain of islands separating the Atlantic Ocean from the Caribbean Sea became troublesome, a possible menace to the safety of the canal. The use that was made of the submarine by Germany during the late war and the powerful strides in aerial navigation and radio com- munication have greatly increased the width of those border protective zones that all commercial nations seek to control. FRONTIER ZONES OF FERICTION IN LATIN AMERICA Every boundary dispute is a possible cause of war, and boundary disputes grow out of ignorance as well as ambition. “Frontiers are indeed the razor's edge on which hang suspended the modern issues of war or peace, of life or death for nations.” The unsettled bound- aries of the Latin-American nations are therefore matters of general concern. If the frontiers of the Latin-American states were well- known through exploratory surveys, and if their history were care- fully worked out, an impartial tribunal could very soon make a de- cision that would commend itself to the world, if not to the nations in the dispute. One of the prime functions of an international court of justice will be the settlement of boundary disputes by peaceful means, making use of the resources of geographical research and exploration. The proof of this argument is found in the settlement of Latin- American boundary disputes in the past. In 1900 Chile and Argen- tina were on the verge of war over the interpretation of the treaty of 1881, which defined the boundary in Patagonia as “the crest and watershed” of the high cordillera, though the divide between the Atlan- tic and Pacific drainages in places lies not on the crest of the Andes but east of them. As neither side knew the country thoroughly, they agreed to send a party of surveyors under Colonel Sir Thomas Holdich, and within a year an award was made, on the basis of topo- graphic surveys, that has satisfied both sides. - The Peruvian-Bolivian boundary north of Lake Titicaca has had a similar history. In 1910 the newspapers of La Paz and Lima were full of war talk. In 1911 a party of English surveyors was in the field to establish a line that has since proved satisfactory. The boundary between Bolivia and Brazil in the heavily wooded country of the southwestern Amazon plains was settled and surveyed after armed forces had faced each other across the Acre River for months. What unsettled boundaries remain to be surveyed? Where are the frontier zones of friction? What are the chief differences of Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 571 x-rººz 8ſt *C2 7t sº 50 20 -- §§º5-º-º-º-º: º cº, & <2* ‘...: * sº *.* & § & *} .* ( , • ? : § s" * ; * * * . , , & Ş. - 6" ( ël Č & fºLTrinidad - & # Ol C Că. Jº ORE 3L arº. 10 S. º gºt LA 23, georgetown § ^ --> ºf §§§ ſº-cºapamaribo Bºgſtão º A.Ş. * = * ** re; ºr: gayenne yº º * § Číž O C -2", >S-2 a se” e ū. Nº 0 ~~ u_ ºft. É% % *ºgº sº £e 0 O %3% } % C-Q &r O /* 20 $º. f Jºão Pauloc.g & - --~~ takºorpepcion 2-& Rio de Janeiro ºbASU’m gign antos Ž'Falklandſs. FIG. 274. The zones of friction in South America: 1, the Gran Chaco; 2, Tacna-Arica, Tara- pacá, and Antofagasta; 3, the junction of Ecuador, Colombia, and Peru; 4, 5, 6, minor disputed areas in the Colombia-Venezuela frontier. There is also the dispute over the boundary in the La Plata estuary (Fig. 280). 572 The New World Value of the almost uninhabited desert of northern Chile FIG. 275. Production areas in the nitrate fields of northern Chile. º º . º § ºAVäIl N, N. g” º © 70 3 J s tºº. º A 0 10 C Pozo Almonte oPica. inazos R * zado º āş 20 30 40 50 SD 70 80 M. 619 R A P A C & *) & *Calama. T A C A M A. A l (. Z 20 2] \ \ t \ 5 From Economic Geology, April–May 1920. opinion as to land titles and resources? In the succeeding pages are dis- cussed those boundary disputes that have seri- ously threatened or at this moment are threat- ening the peace of Latin America. Some of them involve vast wealth; others affect few people and small tracts of terri- tory. The Tacna-Arica Bound- ary Dispute The greatest terri- torial dispute pending in Latin America, the one most interesting in its history and its economic bearings, and most likely to lead to war, is that between Chile and Peru in the Tacna-Arica district. Before 1879 the southern frontier of Peru included the province of Tara- pacá, and Bolivia held the province of Anto- fagasta on the south. Within Tarapacá lay much of the exceedingly rich nitrate deposit that, until the discovery of the process for the re- covery of nitrogen from the air a few years ago, produced 99 per cent of the world's supply. Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 573 For three hundred years the frontiers of . r Peru, Bolivia, and Chile remained ill-defined because almost no people lived in the region; c. indeed, most of it is utterly desert. It is - | partly owing to the extreme aridity that nitrate , | salts have accumulated there. By 1850 these s | salts had become commercially useful and, with the marked advances of industrial chemistry (1860–1880), they had become so valuable that they formed a great natural endowment to the country owning them. Naturally this state / of affairs led to dispute, and, in 1879, to war. Chile had a powerful fleet, Peru had / inferior ships of war, and the sea is the l % L_* ; / i A.6 great highway along the west coast of South sº; 1910-14' America, where a stretch of desert sixteen Fig. 276. The production of e nitrate in Chile by five-year hundred miles long makes land travel arduous ..."F. f. isº and costly. Within a year the Chilean army are from Pºº Sºldán, gººdſº e del Perú, for 1840–1894 from had captured Lima, all the coast ports of Peru ortázar, chie of To-day; for e & 1895–1914 from F. López were destroyed or in Chilean hands, and the Loayza, La Provincia de Tara- Chilean government was in possession of the pacá, and from current numbers nitrate fields, which Chile has held ever since. of the South American Journal. Bolivia offered very little resistance and until recently accepted exclusion from the sea with only nominal protest. By the treaty of Ancon, signed in 1883, Chile agreed to hold a plebiscite and thus let the inhabitants of Tacna-Arica — the part of the captured territory that is unquestionably Peruvian – decide whether Chile or Peru should own the region. Once in possession, however, Chile could not let go her hold. The plebiscite, for one reason after another, has never been held. In the meantime diplo- matic relations between the two countries have been suspended again and again, there have been frequent local mobilizations and strategic disposals of naval units, and, worst of all, serious perse- cutions of Peruvians. Thousands of persons have been mobbed and robbed and driven into Peru. In 1910 Chile expelled all Peruvian priests and closed their churches. The latest of these persecutions took place in 1919, when Chilean mobs closed Peruvian stores in the towns of Arica and Tacna and Chilean authorities expelled influen- tial Peruvian residents. By way of retaliation, Peruvian workmen go on strike frequently, refusing to unload Chilean steamers. The two countries have remained in a warlike state, and but for the War Of the Pacific, 1879–1883 Promised plebiscite not held by Chile The New World Claim of Bolivia to a highway to the sea terrible expense of war and the in- fluence of business men and foreign diplomats they would long since have reopened the struggle. Into the conflict between Chile and Peru for the possession of the Tacna- Arica territory there has been intro- duced a third element — landlocked Bolivia's claim for a commercial outlet at the port of Arica. Bolivia (with Chilean coöperation) has built a rail- road from La Paz direct to the sea, across lofty mountains and barren desert to Arica, and now claims the right to have an outlet to the sea and to a strip of land on either side, so as to take control of the railroad out of foreign hands. That much seems to be needed to give this landlocked state, the only interior country of South FIG. 277. Location and railway connec- tions of the Tacna-Arica, Tarapacá, and Antofagasta districts. The focus of the present difficulty is Tacna-Arica, where Bolivia seeks a territorial outlet, or “win- dow on the sea,” and where Peru insists on complete ownership in view of Chile's broken promise to hold a plebiscite accord- ing to the treaty of Ancon, 1883. Before the war of 1879 between Chile on the one hand and Peru and Bolivia on the other, Antofagasta was a Bolivian province and Tarapacá and Tacna-Arica were Peruvian territory. America, except Paraguay, undisputed access to the sea roads of the Pacific. If the land north of the protecting strip were returned to Peru and Peruvian citizens were once more repatriated, the matter would be finally settled. This solution would give Chile sovereignty over the greater part of the territory captured in 1879–1880 and would es- tablish her frontier 200 miles south of its present position. The population of Tacna-Arica is about 38,000, of whom two thirds live in Tacna and one third lives in Arica. The rumor that Bolivia had agreed with Chile to give up Bolivian claims to Antofagasta in return for Chilean assistance in gaining Arica aroused Peru to vehement protest that culminated in an exchange of sharp notes in March 1920, in which both reviewed their claims. Bolivia insists that her right to Arica goes back to colonial days and also to the early years of her independence, specifically 1826. Peru also asserts an historical claim and declares she will not have peace until the dispute is settled by arbitration or through the instru- mentality of the international court of justice of the League of Nations. § Fig. 278. La Paz, capital of Bolivia, with Mt. Illimani in the background. This city has its most direct connection with the sea at Arica and desires complete control of the railroad thither and of a small strip of adjacent territory. 576 The New World Fig. 279. The Morro de Arica, on the summit of which in 1880 was fought one of the decisive battles of the war between Chile and Peru. The La Plata Estuary A dispute still unsettled between Argentina and Uruguay involves an artificial channel 120 miles long and extending from a point northeast of Buenos Aires to English Bank at the mouth of the La Plata estuary. This is the main outlet of Argentine commerce. In 1828 Argentina and Uruguay agreed that the natural channel of the Uruguay and the northeastern bank of the Rio de la Plata should be the frontier of Uruguay. Uruguay now claims the median line of the estuary, which would give her control of the channel built, lighted, and buoyed by Argentina and maintained at Argentina's expense. The estuary is so shallow, with a depth varying from 8 to 18 feet, and the shoals are so extensive, that navigation is limited to an artificial channel. Paraguay, Bolivia, and Brazil also are interested in the matter, because an increasing portion of their interior commerce must pass by this route. Questions of law and of inter- national policy as to problems of this class remain to be determined before the dispute can be settled. Particularly important in the settlement is the question of the proper present-day limits of so-called territorial waters, in past practice a three-mile zone. The Bolivia-Paraguay Boundary Bolivia and Paraguay have a dispute in the Gran Chaco region, which lies between the Pilcomayo River on the south and the Paraguay Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 577 River on the east. The disputed zone is virgin grassland in part and will have high commercial value in a short time. Bolivia has occupied the right bank of the Paraguay River in the Gran Chaco, establishing a fort and telegraph station and maintaining troops there. She has effectively occupied the country for many years, one of her main streams of commerce passing across the Gran Chaco to the Paraguay River. On the other hand, Paraguay claims territory west of the Paraguay River to the limits of her old colonial boundaries. She has also granted or sold foreign concessions on the west side of the Paraguay River for the establishment of sawmills (for quebracho wood) and cattle ranches. At a few places she has penetrated at least a hundred miles west of the river. In 1913 the two nations agreed to annul all former arrangements and to try to settle affairs directly between themselves; if they failed, they were to submit the matter to arbitration. The boundary is still in dispute, The Peru-Bolivia Boundary The boundary dispute between Peru and Bolivia appears now to be happily disposed of. It concerned the region north of Lake Titicaca, over the eastern Andes and into the lowland forests at the edge of the Amazon basin, the cordilleran section including the valu- able alpaca pastures of Apolobamba. In 1910 the trouble was so serious that both governments mobilized forces at the frontier. The boundary survey was begun in 1911 and concluded in 1913 by English surveyors. The two countries agreed that any dispute be- tween the commissions of their respective governments should be submitted, without the right of an appeal, to the President of the Royal Geographical Society of London. The reports were published in 1918. - The Colombia-Venezuela Boundary The dispute between Colombia and Venezuela concerns an almost uninhabited country near the headwaters of the Orinoco. It has arisen because of the indefinite texts of the various treaties, the changing fortunes of the frontier towns, and the overlapping juris- diction of the local or district governments. In the course of the attempts made by the national governments concerned to settle their disputes, technical commissions have studied and partly demarcated the position of the line in the field. The dispute has been reduced to three small areas in which the population is so limited and the resources at present are so unimportant, that there would be little 578 The New World 57 - 56 34. Ó RIO DE LA PLATA AP SCALE OF MI LES Ö O i0 20 30 :=E, Ǻ- ~3. º: Buenos Aires A R G E N T I N A 58 FIG. 280. The disputed entrance to Buenos Aires. Uruguay wishes to establish the median line of the La Plata as a boundary with Argentina. This would give her possession of the ship channel near Montevideo and above Colonia. The channel was dredged and buoyed and is ... maintained by Argentina at great expense, owing to the large amount of river silt constantly being deposited in the estuary. Hitherto the boundary has run close to the northeastern bank of La Plata. The broken lines represent ship channels. difficulty in settling the matter were it not for the fact that in one or two places a good deal of traffic crosses the boundary. There are no foreign concessions guaranteed by either government in the disputed territory. - - The Colombia-Ecuador-Peru Boundary The area in dispute between Peru and Colombia is shown in Figure 274. If one or the other party should secure its full claim, or if a com- promise should be arranged on a common line of division, Ecuador would be reduced to a mere coastal strip. A large part of the disputed region, while densely forested country with a scant Indian popula- tion, has become important recently because of its rubber resources. At one time or another Peruvian, Ecuadorian, or Colombian officials have nominally controlled the same region. * In 1900 a Peruvian navigation office was established on the Napo, and from that time Peru took active steps to extend her authority over this river, as well as over the Putumayo and Caqueta rivers, establishing custom houses and military posts, and offering armed resistance to the Colombians who attempted to navigate them. In 1910 there was a quarrel amounting practically to a battle between Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 579 the armed forces of the two republics. In 1911 the two agreed to make no further attacks upon their respective settlements, since which time neither country could enforce the law without armed opposition from the citizens of the other. In 1916 (Treaty of Bogotá) Ecuador and Colombia came to an agreement on their common boundary, and this agreement has sub- sequently been confirmed (1920) and the boundary demarcated. The eastern extremity of the line, however, cannot be regarded as settled until confirmed by Peru, since her claims overlap those of both Co- lombia and Ecuador. - The Guatemala-Honduras Boundary The boundary between Guatemala and Honduras was never de- termined by surveyors except over a short distance, and the admin- istration of the frontier zone was left to chance or tradition. Some towns had been under Guatemaltecan, others under Honduranean governors for many years. The ecclesiastical districts did not always conform to these arrangements, nor was the political boundary always a line separating citizens of Honduras and Guatemala. Some of the frontier land was mountainous, with swift encanyoned streams; some of it was low, hot, swampy, and unhealthful. Government by tradition might have gone on for many years if the low country had not become valuable to banana-growers. The United Fruit Company, an American corporation with property at various points between northern Colombia and Guatemala, has established a line of steamers to many ports that are the outlet for the banana lands of the Caribbean. The company desired concessions, that is, the right to own and cultivate plantations and erect port works. Suddenly the lowlands on the frontier became valuable. Each government was eager to draw the boundary to its own advantage. In earlier times war would surely have ensued, and it seemed indeed very difficult to avoid. Both governments were persuaded a few years ago to submit their claims to the Secretary or State of the United States for recommendation. The first necessity was a survey to clear away ignorance and establish the facts of history and of actual administration during past years as well as the nature and value of the economic resources involved. The work was placed in the hands of a scientific party administered by the American Geo- graphical Society of New York. A definitive settlement is yet to be made. Govern- ment by tradition leading to the threat of war Arbitra- tion of the Guatemala- Honduras boundary 580 The New World Two arbitral decisions Responsi- bilities of the United States The Panama-Costa Rica Boundary The governments of Colombia and Costa Rica, wishing to settle an old frontier dispute, agreed to submit their rival claims to Presi- dent Loubet of France for arbitration (1900). The application of President Loubet's decision proved difficult, owing to lack of detailed knowledge of the wooded and partly swampy terrain and the different interpretations that might be placed upon the language of the award. After Panama gained its independence (1903) by secession from Colombia, the old boundary dispute became an issue between itself and Costa Rica. In 1905 there was concluded a treaty between. Costa Rica and Panama which sought to amend, in the interest of both parties, the award of 1900; but unexpected difficulties arose, and it was agreed that the question should be submitted to Chief Justice White of the United States Supreme Court for arbitration. The disputed points related to that part of the boundary between the central watershed and the Atlantic coast, and of that part little was known. Once again a territorial dispute depended in large part upon ignorance of local geography. Unfortunately the contest- ants could not more readily agree to accept the decision of Chief Justice White in 1913 than that of President Loubet in 1900, or their own partial agreement respecting the southwestern end of the bound- ary in 1910. Long negotiation having failed to compose the differ- ences, resort was made in late February 1921 to threats and warlike preparations, in spite of the fact that both countries are members of the League of Nations, whose covenant provides the means of peaceful settlement in such cases. The problem is complicated by the responsibilities of the United States to maintain order in Panama and to guarantee its independ- ence in accordance with the Canal Zone purchase agreement of 1904. At that time the government of Panama, needing protection in view of its obvious weakness and its recent secession from Colombia, was willing to assent to restrictions which it was later to repent. Re- peated attempts have been made to secure freedom from full Amer- ican control, but without success. The United States is therefore confronted with the possibility of direct interference not only with Panama, but also with Costa Rica should the latter attempt aggres- sive acts against Panama. On the other hand, to resist such acts is to invite the criticism of Latin-American countries. After hostil- ities between Panama and Costa Rica had actually begun, though on a very Small scale, the American government pressed the issue of Latin-American Trade and Boundary Disputes 581 peace March (1921) and the trouble subsided at least temporarily. The problem illustrates anew the delicate position of the United States as a consequence of its advance into the Caribbean and the grave issues that are linked with the ownership and protection of the Panama Canal, in every way vital to its commerce and defense. The quarrel of these two states illustrates the difficulties in the way of confederating the Central-American countries, as proposed in 1907 and again in 1920. Interstate trade between the small countries of Central America is greatly hampered by frontier regulations, espe- cially irksome on account of rapidly changing national policies and governments and the inexperienced character of the officials. The first attempt was made on the initiative of Mexico and the United States; the second attempt was in response to a circular telegram from Salvador to the other republics of Central America, suggesting a con- ference for the purpose of unifying their constitutions, of equalizing customs and moneys, and of adopting one national shield and flag. While the idea of the conference was accepted in principle, disagree- ments as to the precise nature and limits of the program of the con- ference and the repeated disturbances growing out of boundary dis- putes have prevented the consummation of the plan, though the tend- ency appears to be steadily in favor of confederation. Attempts at confedera- tion of Central- American states BIBLIOGRAPHY (Acknowledgments and references) CHAPTER I. GENERAL H. R. MILL, The International Geography (New York, 1909), and the articles on the various countries in the Encyclopædia Britannica, 12th ed. (1911), present the primary geographic facts with respect to all parts of the world. E. A. FREEMAN, Historical Geog- raphy of Europe, 2 vols., incl. atlas, 3d ed. (London, 1903); a classic on the history of political boundaries. W. Z. RIPLEY, The Races of Europe (New York, 1900); a standard reference on the anthropology of European peoples, illustrated with many photographs of ethnic types and a series of clear and valuable distributional maps. SIR H. J. MACKINDER, Democratic Ideals and Reality (New York, 1919), is a striking philosophical essay by a distinguished English geographer; it puts into high relief two contrasting aspects of world conquest — routes and methods of warfare upon the land and upon the sea — and thus supplies a broad geographic and political basis for understanding the World War and the probable tendencies of the future. H. J. FLEURE, Human Geography in Western Europe, 2d ed. (London, 1919), and JEAN BRUNHES, Human Geography, Engl. ed. (Chicago, 1920), will be found especially valuable in supplying a geographic framework for European studies. SIR THOMAS H. HoldrcH, Boundaries in Europe and the Near East (London, 1918), with the same author's Political Frontiers and Boundary Making (London, 1916), upholds the idea of the value of barriers as boundaries. A. P. BRIGHAM, “Principles in the Determination of Boundaries,” Geogr. Rev., Vol. 7, 1919, pp. 201–219, discusses the rôle of boundaries as zones of assimilation. L. W. LYDE, Some Frontiers of Tomorrow: An Aspiration for Europe (London, 1915), presents the argument for assimilative rather than defensive frontiers. LEON DominiaN, The Frontiers of Language and Nationality in Europe (New York, 1917), and A. J. To YNBEE, Nationality and the War (London, 1915), deal with ethnic and politi- cal problems; but they were written before the present boundaries were established. The Cambridge Modern History, 14 vols., incl. atlas (1902–1912), is a large standard work of importance to the student of history and political geography; it contains especially useful bibliographies, but its articles vary greatly in value. SIR EDwARD HERTSLET, The Map of Europe by Treaty, 4 vols., with maps (London, 1875 and 1891), contains the basic treaties and agreements for the period 1814 to 1891. CARLTON J. H. HAYES, A Political and Social History of Modern Europe, 2 vols. (New York, 1917), is a readable work that supplies a good historical basis for the study of current political problems; the second volume covers the period between 1815 and 1914. C. D. HAZEN, Europe since 1815 (New York, 1910), is also useful for this period. J. H. Rose, The Development of Modern Europe, 5th ed., 2 vols. in one (New York, 1916), deals with the period from 1870 to 1914 in con- siderable detail. CHARLEs SEYMOUR, The Diplomatic Background of the War (New Haven, 1916), has become a standard work in its field. See also F. M. ANDERSON and A. S. HERSHEY, Handbook for the Diplomatic History of Europe, Asia, and Africa, 1870–1914 (Washington, 1918), and the bibliographical notes therein contained. (For further refer- ence to this work see the introductory note to the Appendix). SIR HARRY JOHNSTON, Com- mon Sense in Foreign Policy (New York, 1913), is an able statement of many of the lead- ing international problems as they stood just before the opening of the World War. C. H. HASHINs and R. H. LoRD, Some Problems of the Peace Conference (Cambridge, 1920), is the best available treatise on the historical bases of European territorial disputes that were affected by the peace treaties of 1919–1920. H. W. TEMPERLEY, editor, A History of the Peace Conference of Paris (London, 1920), to be published in 5 volumes, 3 of which have appeared, under the auspices of the Institute of International Affairs, contains much documentary material bearing on the peace conference, together with interpretive chap- ters. The British Foreign Office is publishing as Peace Handbooks the material prepared 583 584 The New World for the British delegation at the Peace Conference of Paris. The geographical commis- sion of the French Service Géographique de l'Armée publishes a valuable series of military handbooks on various parts of the world; they are illustrated with maps, and describe in some detail the regions with which they deal. KARL ANDREE, Geographie des Welthandels, 3 vols. (Frankfort, 1910–1913), is a very satisfactory general treatment of its subject. F. LANGE, Landwirtschaftlich Statistischer Atlas (Berlin, 1917), contains a valuable series of production maps. FINCH and BAKER, Geography of the World's Agriculture (Washington, 1917), is a useful study of the sources of the world's supply of food and other agricultural products. E. GRUNER and G. BousquET, Atlas Général des Houillères (Paris, 1909), consists of an atlas with accompanying text, and contains large-scale maps of the various European coal areas. World Atlas of Commercial Geology, Part I, Distribution of Mineral Production, by the United States Geological Survey (Washington, 1921), is one of the most useful government publications ever printed; it is a world survey (text and maps) of the chief commercial minerals and will be followed in time by a second atlas on mineral reserves. The International Instituté of Agriculture, which has its central office at Rome, publishes a valuable annual that contains statistics respecting the production, consumption, and international exchange of the principal foodstuffs. SIR BoveFTON REDwooD, A Treatise on Petroleum, 3 vols., 3d ed. (London, 1913), is both comprehensive and conveniently arranged for reference; it contains a number of maps and diagrams. W. M. FULLERTON, Problems of Power (London, 1913), discusses pointedly some of the critical disputes that ultimately led to the World War. ALBERT DEMANGEON, Le Declin de l'Europe (Paris, 1920), pictures the changes in world trade that the war has caused; Engl. ed. (New York, 1921) entitled America and the Race for World Dominion. G. G. CHISHOLM, Handbook of Commercial Geography (London, 1908), is still the best single reference in its field. M. DUBOIs, J. G. KERGOMARD, and I. LAFITTE, Précis de Géographie Economique, 2d ed. (Paris, 1903), and J. G. BARTHOLOMEw, Atlas of the World's Commerce (London, 1906), are impor- tant general references. ABRAHAM BERGLUND, “The War and the World's Mercantile Marine,” Amer. Econ. Rev., Wol. 10, 1920, pp. 227–258, contains an authoritative statement of the after-war shipping situation and of the probable commercial policy of the various nations. - The publications of the Institut Colonial International include eleven series of mono- graphs (Brussels, 1894–1914) on subjects relating to colonies and colonial life. The fol- lowing books are especially recommended for the subjects indicated in their titles: P. M. OGILVIE, International Waterways (New York, 1920); G. KAECKENBEECK, International Rivers, Publications of the Grotius Society, No. 1 (London, 1918); SARAH WAMBAUGH, Monograph on Plebiscites (New York, 1920); A. G. KELLER, Colonization (Boston, 1908). The following volumes appear annually, and will frequently be found useful: The Annual Register, a summary of political happenings devoted chiefly, but not entirely, to the British Empire; The Statesman's Year-Book, especially valuable for its statistical material and its bibliographies; The New International Year Book, an annual supplement to the New International Encyclopedia. Among geographical periodicals the following publish many valuable articles in the field of political geography, and are indispensable to the scholar: The Geographical Review, the American Geographical Society of New York; The Geographical Journal, the Royal Geographical Society of London; La Géographie, la Société de Géographie de Paris; Annales de Géographie, published by Armand Colin, Paris; Petermanns Mitteilungen, published by Justus Perthes, Gotha. The following periodicals contain a certain amount of material of exceptional value in the fields of economic and political geography: The Ameri- can Economic Review; The American Historical Review; The American Journal of Inter- national Law; The American Political Science Review; Political Science Quarterly (issues an annual record of political events); The Economic Review review of the foreign press); L'Afrique Française; L'Asie Française; The Near East; The New Europe (discontinued in 1920); The Round Table (devoted chiefly to the British Empire and its problems); Bibliography & 585 Current History Magazine (published by the New York Times). Valuable material will sometimes be found in the United States Commerce Reports, in the British Diplomatic and Consular Reports, and the annual Colonial Reports of the various British colonies. CHAPTER II. BRITISH EMPIRE The Oaford Survey of the British Empire, edited by A. J. HERBERTSON and O. J. R. HowARTH, 6 vols. (Oxford, 1914), is the best general survey of the empire and its parts. In addition there may be noted a series of volumes edited by SIR CHARLEs LUCAs under the title, A Historical Geography of the British Colonies (Oxford, 1887– ). Among shorter treatments of the same subject are the following: LIONEL CURTIs, The Commonwealth of Nations (London, 1918); its subtitle, “an inquiry into the nature of citizenship in the British Empire, and into the mutual relations of the several communities thereof,” explains its purpose; admirable in treatment are its maps and diagrams (some in color), which attempt a critical display of the facts of distribution and area by comparative values; ED- wARD JENKS, The Government of the British Empire (Boston, 1918); SIR CHARLEs LUCAS, The British Empire (London, 1915); A. F. Poll,ARD, The British Empire: Its Past, Its Present, and Its Future (London, 1909); W. H. Woodward, The Expansion of the British Empire, 1500–1911 (Cambridge, 1911). On the government of England, see the standard work on that subject, The Government of England, 2 vols. (New York, 1912), by A. LAw- RENCE Lowell. W. A. DUNNING, The British Empire and the United States (New York, 1914), surveys Anglo-American relations in the century from 1814 to 1914. A. B. KEITH, Responsible Government in the Dominions, 3 vols. (Oxford, 1912), has a detailed and well- documented account of dominion government. SIR H. J. MACKINDER, Britain and the Brit- ish Seas (Oxford, 1906), is a geographical treatment of the British Isles. A. J. SARGENT, Seaways of the Empire (London, 1918), gives a clear picture of the geography of transport between the various parts of the great British trade realm; it contains good semi-diagram- matic maps and recent statistics. MARK JEFFERSON, “The Distribution of British Cities, and the Empire,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 4, 1917, pp. 387–394. For an authoritative survey of the natural resources, trade, and food and raw material requirements of the British dominions, see the Final Report of the Dominions Royal Commission (London, 1918). H. STANLEY JEvoNs' monograph on The British Coal Trade (London, 1915) is excellent; it contains a chapter on the world's coal resources. A. W. KIRKALDY, British Shipping: Its History, Organization, and Importance (London, 1914), may be mentioned. Official yearbooks are issued by most of the British colonies and dominions, and they form most valuable reference works. The Colonial Office List, issued yearly by the Crown, is informative; it contains short descriptions and historical sketches of each of the British colonies, and a list of the Crown officers. H. J. ROBINSON, Colonial Chronology (London, 1892), will still be found useful. On the history of Canada see SIR John G. BouriNot, Canada under British Rule, 1760–1905, in Cambridge Historical Series (1909), or A. G. BRADLEY, Canada, in the Home University Library (London and New York, 1912). A. E. AsPINALL, The British West Indies (Boston, 1912), and Pocket Guide to the West Indies (Chicago, 1914). For South Africa, in addition to the official yearbook, reference should be made to LAITE's Commercial Blue Book for South Africa (Cape Town), The South African Year-Book (London), and The Guide to South and East Africa, published annually by the Union-Castle Steamship Company, the latter covering the region from the Cape to Tan- ganyika Territory. ERNEST BARKER, Ireland in the Last Fifty Years (1866–1918), 2d ed. (Oxford, 1919), is a short but illuminating and rational survey of the Irish problem. SIR HORACE PLUNKETT, Ireland in the New Century (London, 1904), is an indispensable ref- erence written by a scholar with practical experience in Irish affairs. W. O'C. MORRIs, Ireland: 1494–1905, in Cambridge Historical Series, 2d ed. (1909), is a review of the entire Irish question. On the Moslem confraternities see G. F. ANDREws, “Islam and the Confraternities in 586 The New World French North Africa,” Geogr. Journ., Vol. 47, 1916, pp. 116–130, and the titles listed in the accompanying bibliography. For the present condition of agriculture in Egypt and an outline of the controversy between the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and the Egyptian adminis- tration respecting the control of the Nile waters, see the two principal papers in the con- troversy: (1) SIR WILLIAM WILLCOCKs, The Nile Projects (Cairo, 1919); (2) SIR MURDock MAcDonald, Nile Control Works (Cairo, 1919). SIR WILLIAM WILLCocks and J. I. CRAIG, Egyptian Irrigation, 2 vols. (New York, 1913), is both technical and general. LORD CROMER, Modern Egypt, 2 vols. (London, 1908), is a masterly survey of British rule in Egypt. - The Imperial Gazetteer of India, 3d ed., 26 vols. (Oxford, 1907–1909), includes a com- plete survey of India, as a whole and by parts, together with an excellent atlas. For a concise historical account consult VINCENT A. SMITH, The Oaford Student’s History of India, 3d ed. (Oxford, 1911). SIR THOMAs H. Holdich, India (London, 1904), presents the coun- try from the geographical standpoint. B. H. BADEN-Powell, The Land Systems of British India, 3 vols. (Oxford, 1892), and The Indian Village Community (London, 1896), are stan- dard works on the subject. The student should also consult JoHN MATTHAI, Village Gov- ernment in British India (London, 1915). LAJPAT RAI, England's Debt to India (New York, 1917) presents an Indian view of the English occupation of India. A. LovEDAY, The His- tory and Economics of Indian Famines (London, 1914), is a convenient study; it contains a history and tabulation of Indian famines from early times to the present, with a discussion of relief organization and protective measures. For accounts of India's problems on her northwestern frontier see SIR JAMEs DouTE, The Panjab, North-west Frontier Province, and Kashmir (Cambridge, 1916), and SIR THOMAs H. Holdich, The Gates of India (London, 1910). J. C. JACK, The Economic Life of a Bengal District (Oxford, 1916), is an interesting study of the income and expenditure of persons living in Faridpur district, Bengal. C. W. HARRISON, editor, An Illustrated Guide to the Federated Malay States (London, 1919?), has valuable material, including maps, not easily found elsewhere. W. E. GIBBs, “British Malaya: A Story of Empire,” Journ. Manchester Geogr. Soc., Vol. 35, 1919, pp. 8–18, is a short historical, social, and economic survey of the Malay States. SIR J. S. SCOTT, Burma: A Handbook of Practical Information (London, 1911), is useful and excellently illustrated. Miss G. L. BELL has prepared a British official report entitled Review of the Civil Admin- istration of Mesopotamia (London, 1920), which presents the views of the chief Arab sheikhs of Mesopotamia toward British administration of the region. CHAPTER III. FRANCE G. HANOTAUx, editor, Histoire de la Nation Française, to be completed in 15 volumes, has been announced, and the first of two volumes by JEAN BRUNHEs on the human geography of France has appeared (Paris, 1920); it will cover all phases of French history. VIDAL LABLANCHE, La France (Paris, 1908), is the standard work on the regional geography of France; it is exceptionally well illustrated. ONESIME RECLUs, Atlas de la Plus Grande France (Paris, 1913–1915), contains maps of the various French departments and colonies, together with descriptive and interpretive text. For a useful graphic presentation of the results of the census of 1901, see Album Graphique de la Statistique Générale de la France (Paris, 1907). RAYMOND POINCARf, How France Is Governed (New York, 1914), and E. A. VIZETELLY, Republican France, 1870–1912 (Boston, 1913), contain respectively a description of French political institutions and a history of France since the Franco-Prussian War. W. M. DAvis, A Handbook of Northern France (Cambridge, 1918), will be found especially valuable for its sketches and block diagrams of the region covered and for its compact physiographic descriptions. A. H. BRooks and MORRIs F. LA CROIx, The Iron and Asso- ciated Industries of Lorraine, the Sarre District, Luaremburg and Belgium, Bull. 703, U. S. Geol. Surv. (Washington, 1920), is a thoroughly scientific piece of work of great present interest in view of the close interweaving, in the Franco-German frontier zone, of political Bibliography 587 and economic forces. The authoritative presentation of the French position with respect to Alsace-Lorraine, the Saar valley, Luxemburg, and the Rhineland is to be found in L’Alsace-Lorraine, et la Frontière du Nord-est (Paris, 1918); it constitutes Vol. 1 of the Travaux du Comité d'Études, a series of handbooks and monographs for the work of the Peace Conference of Paris, 1919. P. VIDAL LABLACHE, “Evolution de la population en Alsace-Lorraine et dans les départements limitrophes,” Ann. de Géogr., Vol. 25, 1916, pp. 97–115, 161–180, has maps showing density and movement of population. The following works contain presentations of the problem of Alsace-Lorraine from various points of view: BARRY CERF, Alsace-Lorraine since 1870 (New York, 1919); C. D. HAZEN, Alsace-Lorraine under German Rule (New York, 1917); Col.FMAN PHILLIPSON, Alsace-Lorraine: Past, Pres- ent, and Future (London, 1918), advocates a plebiscite and contains an extensive bibliog- raphy; LUCIEN GALLOIs, “Alsace-Lorraine and Europe,” Geogr. Rev., Vol. 6, 1918, pp. 89– 115, is chiefly concerned with the economic resources in relation to the political geography. For three valuable articles on the Saar basin, presenting respectively its historic, economic, and demographic characteristics, see Ann. de Géogr., Vol. 28, 1919, pp. 249–292. For an abstract of the third of these articles and a reproduction of the map showing density of population in the Saar basin on the scale of 1: 1,430,000, see Geogr. Rev., Vol. 10, 1920, pp. 42–43. RUTH PUTNAM, Luzemburg and Her Neighbors (New York, 1918), recounts the history of the grand duchy and outlines its international position before the war. Useful yearbooks are issued by most of the French colonies. In addition the following bibliographies will be found of value in the further study of France's African colonies: GEORGES BRUEL, Bibliographie de l'Afrique Equatoriale Française (Paris, 1914); EDMOND JoucLA, Bibliographie de l'Afrique Occidentale Française (Paris, 1912). E. Roua RD DE CARD, Traités de Délimitation concernant l'Afrique Française (Paris, 1910), contains texts of treaties and illustrative maps for the period up to date of publication. R. GODFERNAUx, Les Chemins de Fer Coloniaua, Français (Paris, 1911), is quite detailed and complete (to date of publication). The following works on Morocco should be consulted by the student desiring further information: J. Goulven, Le Maroc: Les Ressources de ses Régions; Sa Mise en Valeur (Paris, 1919); E. D. MoREL, Morocco in Diplomacy (London, 1912); VICTOR PIQUET, Le Maroc: Géographie; Histoire; Mise en Valeur (Paris, 1920); ALFRED DE TARDE, “The Work of France in Morocco,” Geogr. Rev., Vol. 8, 1919, pp. 1–30. See also pp. 56–58 of the last-named volume for a note on the progress of French occupation. E. F. GAUTIER, L'Algérie et la Métropole (Paris, 1920), offers a good brief outline of Algerian life and problems. HENRI LE PoſNTE, La Colonisation Française au Pays des Somalis (Paris, 1917 P), explains the value of Somaliland’s position on the Red Sea and as a point of exit for the Abyssinian hinterland. A convenient guide to the literature of Syria is to be found in a large work by PAUL MAsson, Éléments d'une Bibliographie Française de la Syrie, 2 vols. (Marseilles, 1919). CHAPTER IV. BELGIUM La Belgique, published for the Liége Exposition of 1905 by the Belgian government, contains a survey of the country's resources and its industrial situation. H. GEHRIG and H. WAUTIG, Belgiens Volkswirtschaft (Berlin, 1918), covers the economic situation in the light of the German occupation. W. BIERKENs, “Le Port d’Anvers: Son Avenir, son Im- portance Economique pour la Suisse,” Bull. Soc. Neuchâteloise de Géogr., Vol. 28, 1919, pp. 5-208, describes the port and its relations to Swiss trade. For a brief history of Belgium consult R. C. K. ENSOR, Belgium, in Home University Library (London and New York, 1915); a short bibliography is given. RAOUL BLANCHARD, La Flandre (Paris, 1906), is a regional geographical study of the Flemish plain in France, Belgium, and Holland. The books by E. D. MoREL on the Congo have had great influence in the reorganization of that region. A. B. KEITH, The Belgian Congo and the Berlin Act (London, 1919), is a historical study. 588 The New World CHAPTER W. ITALY Among volumes on the political and economic situation before the outbreak of the World War may be mentioned: F. M. UNDERwooD, United Italy (London, 1912); W. K. WALLACE, Greater Italy (New York, 1917). E. M. JAMISON, C. M. ADY, K. D. VERNON, C. S. TERRY, Italy, Mediaeval and Modern (Oxford, 1917), is a convenient presentation of the essential facts of Italian history. OLINTo MARINELLI, “The Regions of Mixed Popu- lations in Northern Italy,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 7, 1919, pp. 129–148, deals with the mixed language zones on Italy's frontier, in former Austria, Switzerland, and France. It repre- sents the Italian scientific viewpoint and is conservative in form. CESARE BATTISTI, Il Trentino, 2d ed. (Novara, 1917), contains 19 maps, and outlines the Italian claims in the Tyrol. ATTILIO TAMARO, La Vénétie Julienne et la Dalmatie: Histoire de la nation italienne sur ses frontières orientales, 3 vols. (Rome, 1918), is the most comprehensive work on the subject, with abundant references to sources, and, although Italian in point of view, it is a basic reference. (See also references under Jugo-Slavia on the subject of Italy's claims in Istria and Dalmatia.) ATTILIO BRUNIALT1, Trento e Trieste dal Brennero alle Rive dell’ Adriatico (Turin, 1916), is profusely illustrated, has many maps, and covers all the Italian claims from the Trentino to Dalmatia. GUIDO ASSERETo, L’Italia e le sue Colonie (Novara, 1913), contains many maps and diagrams illustrating the economic and political conditions of both Italy and her colonies. G. BEVIONE, L'Asie Minore e l’Italia (Turin, 1914), sets forth the Italian view of the Turkish situation and the claims of Italy, espe- cially in the Adalia region. The Annnario Statistico Italiano publishes each year a series of demographic maps and charts. CHAPTER VI. SPAIN C. E. CHAPMAN, A History of Spain (New York, 1918), is a brief history of Spain based largely upon the comprehensive work of the Spanish historian, Altamira. EDUARDo REYES PRóSPER, Las Estepas de España y su Vegetación (Madrid, 1915), describes the physical character of the drier portions of Spain. J. DANTíN CERECEDA, Resumen fisio- gráfica de la peninsula ibérica (Madrid, 1912), supplies the best available general view of the physiographic conditions in the natural regions of the Spanish peninsula. DON ALFONSO MERRY DEL VAL, “The Spanish Zones in Morocco,” Geogr. Journ., Vol. 55, 1920, pp. 319– 349, 409–422, discusses Spanish interests in Morocco at the present time. JULIUS KLEIN, The Mesta (Cambridge, 1920), is a thorough study of the institution of that name, which was developed by the grazing interests and dominated the economic life of portions of Spain for several centuries. For general references on subjects indicated in the respect- ive titles, see: I. M. Colm EIRO, La Historia de la Economía Politica en España (Madrid, 1863); MARTIN HUME, Spain, 1479–1788 (Cambridge, 1913); R. B. MERRIMAN, The Rise of the Spanish Empire in the Old World and in the New, 4 vols., of which 2 are published (New York, 1918). CHAPTER VII. PORTUGAL GEORGE: YoUNG, Portugal Old and Young: An Historical Study (Oxford, 1917), deals with the history and the present problems of Portugal. W. H. KOEBEL, Portugal: Its Land and People (London, 1909), and A. F. G. BELL, Portugal of the Portuguese (New York, 1915), are general references. ANGEL MARVAUD, Le Portugal et ses colonies (Paris, 1912), is a political and economic study. LUIS SCHWALBACH, Emigração e colonização (Lisbon, 1914), deals with the problems of colonization from the Portuguese standpoint. CHAPTER VIII. SCANDINAVIA AND HOLLAND For a summary presentation of the history of the Scandinavian countries see R. N. BAIN, Scandinavia: A Political History of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden, 1515–1900 (Cambridge, Bibliography 589 1905). PAUL DRACHMANN, The Industrial Development and Commercial Policies of the Three Scandinavian Countries (Oxford, 1915), reviews the interesting economic history of these lands. Among books on Denmark the following should be consulted: H. RIDER HAGGARD, Rural Denmark and Its Lessons (New York, 1913); W. J. HARVEY and CHRIS- TIAN REPPIEN, Denmark and the Danes: A Survey of Danish Life, Institutions and Culture (London, 1915). Norway (Kristiania, 1900), a work prepared for the Paris Exposition, contains an interesting survey of the country. KNUT G.JERSET, History of the Norwegian People, 2 vols. (New York, 1915), is concerned chiefly with history prior to the 19th cen- tury. J. GUINCHARD, editor, Sweden: Historical and Statistical Handbook, 2d ed., 2 vols. (Stockholm, 1914), is issued under the direction of the government; it contains excellent articles on the present life of Sweden and is well illustrated with photographs and maps. STEN DE GEER, Befolkingens Fördelning i Sverige (Stockholm, 1919), is accompanied by a large map (1:500,000) showing by a dot and shaded circle method the exact distribution of population, as well as the distribution of forests, industrial enterprises, etc., - a model treatment. HELMER KEY, La Vie Economique de la Suede (Paris, 1913), is a competent analysis of Sweden's economic life. The following references treat of Spitsbergen: R. N. RUDMose BRowN, Spitsbergen (London, 1920); R. N. RUDMosF BROWN, “Spits- bergen, Terra Nullius,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 7, 1919, pp. 311–321; CHARLEs RABOT, “The Norwegians in Spitsbergen,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 8, 1919, pp. 209–226. R. SCHUILING, Neder- land: Handboek der Aardrijkskunde, 5th ed. (Zwolle, 1915), is the standard geographical work on Holland; it is amply supplied with statistical tables and extremely valuable maps and plans, many of them in color. K. ZEEMAN, Moderne Geographie van Nederland, 3d ed. (Amsterdam, 1917), relates the physiography to the economic and industrial geography. A. A. BEERMAN, Nederland als Polderland, 2d ed. (Zutphen, 1915), is an excellent detailed treatise on Holland's reclaimed areas. Yearbook of the Netherlands East Indies, English ed. (Batavia, 1920), is a well illustrated survey of the region. The following works will also be found useful, the first-named being the standard reference on the subject: CLIVE DAY, The Policy and Administration of the Dutch in Java (New York, 1904); A. CABATON, Java and the Dutch East Indies (New York, 1911). * CHAPTER IX. SWITZERLAND Dictionnaire Géographique de la Suisse, 6 vols. and atlas (Neuchâtel, 1902–1910), published under the auspices of La Société Neuchâteloise de Géographie, is the standard treatment of the subject. Atlas Graphique et Statistique de la Suisse (Berne, 1914), is published by the Bureau of Statistics of the Swiss Department of the Interior, and contains a series of beautifully printed and authoritative maps. R. C. BRooks, Government and Politics of Switzerland (Yonkers, 1918), is a well-ordered treatment of its subject. HENRI HAUSER, “La Position Géographique de la Suisse: Étude de Géographie Politique,” Ann. de Géogr., 15 Nov. 1911, pp. 413–429, deals with Switzerland’s relations to Europe's navi- gable waterways. See also E. J. CLAPP, The Navigable Rhine (New York, 1911). HEKTOR AMMANN, Die Italiener in der Schweiz (Basle, 1917), studies the problems arising from the increase of Italian population in Switzerland. CHAPTER X. GERMANY Joseph PARTSCH, Central Europe (New York, 1903), is a scientific geographical survey of Germany, Austria-Hungary, Belgium, the Netherlands, Serbia, Rumania, and Bulgaria. FRIEDRICH NAUMANN, Central Europe, trans. by C. M. MEREDITH (London, 1916), deals with the political and economic phases of the German imperial project from the German point of view and was especially influential during the war period. J. A. R. MARRIOTT and C. G. Robertson, The Evolution of Prussia: The Making of an Empire (Oxford, 1917), traces 590 º The New World the growth of the German Empire. JEAN BRUNHEs and CAMILLE WALLAUx, “German Colonization in Eastern Europe,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 6, pp. 465–480, contains valuable historical and statistical information; it gives the number of Ukrainians in the various governments of southern Russia. For Germany after the revolution of 1918 and the treaty of Versailles, see GEORGE YOUNG, The New Germany (London, 1920). L. GAL- LOIs, “La Paix de Versailles: Les nouvelles frontières de l’Allemagne,” Ann. de Géogr., Vol. 28, 1919, pp. 241–248. Das Deutsche Kolonialreich, 2 vols. (Leipzig and Vienna, 1909), by Hans Meyers and others, is the standard reference on former German colonies; it is elaborately illustrated with photographs and colored maps. On the same subject see Eva NS LEWIN, The Germans and Africa (New York, 1915), and WILLIAM EvelEIGH, South- west Africa (London, 1915); the latter discusses the suitability of the colony for white settlement. On Germany’s former colonies in the Pacific see WILLIAM CHURCHILL, “Ger– many's Lost Pacific Empire,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 10, 1920, pp. 84–90. Handbuch des Wirt- schaftskunde Deutschlands, 4 vols. (Leipzig, 1901–1904), published by the Deutschen Ver- bandes für das Kaufmannische Unterrichtswesen, is valuable, though based on the census of 1895. Joseph PARTsch, Schlesien, Eine Landeskunde für das deutsche Volk, 2 vols. (Breslau, 1896), is a detailed regional geographical study of German Silesia. It is accom- panied by colored maps and sketches, and though now somewhat out of date, it is still one of the best regional studies in the field of modern geography. CHAPTER XI. AUSTRIA Die Österreichisch-Ungarnische Monarchie in Wort und Bild, 24 vols. (Vienna, 1886– 1902), contains a detailed survey of the former empire by provinces. The following contain studies of the national and other problems of Austria before the World War: VIRGINIO GAYDA, Modern Austria : Her Racial and Social Problems (London, 1915); H. W. STEED, The Hapsburg Monarchy, 3d ed. (London, 1914); the various books of R. W. SETON-WATson; B. C. WALLIS, “The Peoples of Austria,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 6, 1918, pp. 52–65. E. DE MARTONNE, “Le traité de Saint-Germain et le démembrement de l'Autriche,” Ann. de Géogr., Vol. 29, 1920, pp. 1–11, pictures the present situation. CHAPTER XII. HUNGARY L. EISENMANN, “La Nouvelle Hongrie,” Ann. de Géogr., Sept. 1920, pp. 321–333, discusses Hungary within its new boundaries; valuable especially for its statistical material and its outline of geographical conditions. For discussions of former Hungary’s national problems see: A. HEvesy, Nationalities in Hungary (London, 1919); B. C. WALLIS, “The Peoples of Hungary,” Geogr. Rev., Vol. 4, 1917, pp. 465–481; and by the same author, “Central Hungary: Magyars and Germans,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 6, 1918, pp. 421–435. Magyarország Gazdasági Térképekben (The Economics of Hungary in Maps), edited by GUSTAvus DE EMICH, prepared by ALADAR DE E. ILLÉs and ALBERT HALĀsz (Budapest, 1920), contains 74 maps, 6 diagrams, and in the preface a list of references to sources; the several maps give a complete picture of the economic elements of Hungary before the World War; almost every map is accompanied by a transparency of present and former boundaries, thus making it possible to see at a glance just what Hungary has lost as a consequence of the war. - CHAPTER XIII. CZECHO-SLOVAKIA E. BENEŠ, Bohemia's Case for Independence (London, 1916), and VLADIMIR NoSEK, Independent Bohemia: An Account of the Czecho-Slovak Struggle for Liberty (London, 1918), outline the arguments for the formation of the Czecho-Slovak state. Manuel statistique de la République tehéco-slovaque (Prague, 1920) gives the latest available statistics on the area, population, size of farm holdings, and resources of the various main political divisions Bibliography 591 of the state. B. C. WALLIS, “The Slavs of Northern Hungary,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 6, 1918, pp. 268–281, presents the demographic facts and the national and economic problems connected with the Slovaks and Ruthenians of Hungary. E. DE MARTONNE, “L’État Tchécoslovaque,” Ann. de Géogr., May, 1920, pp. 161–181, discusses the territorial limits and economic situation of the state as determined at Paris in 1919–1920. CHAPTER XIV. JUGO—SLAVIA 1 JovaN CVIJIó, La Peninsule Balkanique (Paris, 1918), is a thorough geographical- treatment of the Balkan region and especially of the territory inhabited by the Jugo-Slavs. M. I. NEwBIGIN, Geographical Aspects of Balkan Problems in their Relation to the Great European War (London, 1915), deals in an exceptionally clear manner with the political geography of the region. M. I. NEwBIGIN, “The Geographical Factor in Balkan Ques- tions,” Scientia, Jan. 1921, pp. 41-50, is a short but competent treatment of the subject. The Commission de Géographie of the Service Géographique de l'Armée has published a number of geographical booklets on various parts of the Balkans, illustrated with maps and diagrams. R. W. SETON-WATson, The Rise of Nationality in the Balkans (London, 1917), is a survey of the nationality problem in the Balkans. J. A. R. MARRIOTT, The Eastern Question : An Historical Study in European Diplomacy (Oxford, 1917), presents briefly the recent history of the Balkans. J. G. SCHURMAN, The Balkan Wars, 3d ed. (Princeton, 1916), is a short but useful presentation of the subject. R. W. SETON-WATson, The Southern Slav Question and the Hapsburg Monarchy (London, 1911), and A. H. E. TAY- LOR, The Future of the Southern Slavs (New York, 1917), are excellent treatises. B. C. WALLIS, “The Slavs of Southern Hungary,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 6, 1918, pp. 341–353, is useful for its maps and statistical analyses. CLIVE DAY, “The Pre-war Commerce and the Commercial Approaches of the Balkan Peninsula,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 9, 1920, pp. 277–298, describes the backward economic conditions of the Balkans and the pre-war commercial pathways. H. W. V. TEMPERLEY, History of Serbia (London, 1917), presents essential facts. F. S. STEVENSON, A History of Montenegro (London, no date), is convenient. For a presentation of recent events by a partisan of the late ex-King Nicholas see A. DEVINE, Montenegro in History, Politics, and War (London, 1918). Report of the International Commission to Inquire into the Causes and Conduct of the Balkan Wars (Washington, 1914), is a valuable impartial account on the basis of field investigations. ATTILIO TAMARO, La Vénétie Julienne et la Dalmatie: Histoire de la nation italienne sur ses frontières orientales, 3 vols. (Rome, 1918–1919); see comment on this work in the section of this bibliography dealing with Italy. GIOTTo DAINELL1, La Dalmazia: Cenni Geografici e Statistici (Novara, 1918), consists of an atlas with accompanying text, and presents the Italian claim to Dal- matia, with full cartographic treatment of the demographic facts. A. G. OGILVIE, “A Contribution to the Geography of Macedonia,” Geogr. Journ., Vol. 55, 1920, pp. 1–34, explains the physiographic character of the region and the chief aspects of the human geography as well. The following books deal with the Macedonian problem: H. N. BRAILS- Ford, Macedonia: Its Races and Their Future (London, 1906); D. M. BRANCOFF, La Macédoine et sa Population Chrétienne (Paris, 1905), a statistical study from the Bulgarian point of view; T. R. GEORGEVITCH, Macedonia (New York, 1918), from the Serbian stand- point. WACE and THOMPson, The Nomads of the Balkans (London, 1914), is concerned with the Vlach settlements in the Balkans. R. J. KERNER, Slavic Europe: A Selected Bibliography in the Western European Languages (Cambridge, 1918), is a scientific bibliography, brought down to the beginning of the World War; the works cited deal with the Russians, Poles, Czecho-Slovaks, Jugo- Slavs, and Bulgarians. 1Including general references to the Balkans. 592 The New World CHAPTER XV. RUMANIA For a discussion of the Rumanian national problem see R. W. SETON-WATSON, Rou- mania and the Great War (London, 1915), and EUGENE PITTARD, La Roumanie (Paris, 1917). N. P. CoMMENE, La Dobrogea : Essai Historique, Economique, Ethnographique et Politique (Paris, 1918), is a treatment of the Dobrudja problem from the Rumanian point of view. E. DE MARTONNE, La Valachie: Essai de Monographie Géographique (Paris, 1902), is a thorough geographical treatment with excellent maps and illustrations. See also the same author’s “Essai de carte ethnographique des pays roumains,” Ann. de Géogr., Vol. 29, 1920, pp. 81–98, which combines upon one colored map the density of population and the ethnic composition; and “La Nouvelle Roumanie,” Ann. de Géogr., Vol. 30, 1921, pp. 1–31, con- taining a description of the natural regions and the economic life. CHAPTER XVI. BUL.GARIA Bulgaria of Today (London, 1907), by the Bulgarian Ministry of Commerce and Agriculture, describes the country, and is still useful in many particulars, though it was compiled before the Balkan wars. For presentations of the -claims of Bulgaria see the following: BALKANICUs, The Aspirations of Bulgaria (London, 1915); A. ISHIRKOFF, Bulgarien: Land und Leute (Leipzig, 1917). For presentations of Jugo-Slav claims, see other references above. J. IvanoFF, Les Bulgares devant le Congrès de la Paiz, 2d ed. (Berne, 1919), outlines the Bulgarian position in relation to the peace settlement. CHAPTER XVII. ALBANIA Miss EDITH DURHAM, High Albania (London, 1909), and The Struggle for Scutari (London, 1914), give vivid and intimate pictures of Albanian life and problems. G. Louis- JARAY, L’Albanie Inconnue (Paris, 1913), is a more scientific survey of the country. Among other works may be mentioned WADHAM PEACOCK, Albania: The Foundling State of Europe (London, 1914); C. A. CHEKREZI, Albania, Past and Present (New York, 1919); C. A. DAko, Albania: The Master Key to the Near East (Boston, 1919). The last two are by Albanians. CHAPTER XVIII. GREECE H. LEFEUVRE-MEAULLE, La Grèce économique et financière (Paris, 1916), outlines Greece's position in the eastern Mediterranean. J. P. MAHAFFY, Rambles and Studies in Greece, 7th ed. (New York, 1913), is a well-tried volume by a noted classical scholar. See also W. MILLER, Greek Life in Town and Country (London, 1905). A. G. KELLER, Homeric Society (New York, 1906), presents not only a picture of early Greek life but also the begin- nings of colonization. OTTO MAULL, “Kultur- und Politischgeographische Entwicklung und Aufgaben des Heutigen Griechenlands,” Mitteilungen der Geographischen Gesellschaft in München, Vol. 2, Dec. 1915, pp. 91–171, is a comprehensive paper on the political and economic geography of the southwestern Balkans and is illustrated by a map representing the commercial routes, the chief belts of production and trade, the main climatic elements, the ecclesiastical boundaries, etc. CHAPTER XIX. POLAND º º Eugeniusz RoMER, Atlas Géographique et Statistique de la Pologne (Warsaw, 1916), is indispensable for a thorough understanding of Polish problems. It contains 32 colored plates with explanatory text in French, Polish, and German. The same author has a Bibliography 593 brilliant article entitled “Poland: The Land and the State” in the Geogr. Rev., Wol. 4, 1917, pp. 6-25. Vol. 1 of the Polish Encyclopædia (Warsaw, 1912) contains a treatment of the physical geography of the Polish region and the physical characteristics of its in- habitants. E. WUNDERLICH, editor, Handbuch von Polen (Kongress-Polen): Beiträge zu einer Allgemeinen Landeskunde, 2d ed. (Berlin, 1918), is a broad geographical survey prepared under the direction of the German governor-general of Warsaw after the occupation of Russian Poland during the World War. Handbuch des Oberschlesischen In- dustriebezirks, Vol. 2 of Festschrift zum XII. Allgemeinen Deutschen Bergmannstage in Breslau, 1913, is accompanied by a number of large-scale maps of the Silesian industrial region. For the history of Poland see H. E. LEwinsKI-KoRw1N, The Political History of Poland (New York, 1917). R. H. LoRD, The Second Partition of Poland, a Study in Diplo- matic History (Cambridge, 1915), is a thorough piece of historical research and is funda- mental to a study of Polish national character and problems in the period of decline that ended with the fall of the Republic. E. RomER, “Statistics of the Languages of the Prov- inces being under the Polish Civil Administration of the Eastern Lands (December 1919),” (Warsaw, 1920), gives the statistical results and an analysis of them, of a census taken in the governments of Minsk, Vilna, and Brest-Litovsk; the data relate to the disputed zone about Minsk, where the Soviet government made concessions to the Poles in the final treaty of peace signed early in 1921, and the disputed zone about Vilna, where Polish troops are in occupation pending the final settlement; the title given above is taken ver- batim from the title page of the publication, which is printed in Polish and English in parallel columns. CHAPTERS XX, XXI. BALTIC STATES L. M. LARson, “Territorial Problems of the Baltic Basin,” Univ. of Illinois Bull., Vol. 16, No. 18, 1918, deals with Slesvig, Finland, the Baltic Provinces, and Danzig. In Meereskunde, No. 152, 1919, RICHARD PoHLE sketches the growth of Riga; his paper is illustrated by several interesting maps. M. MARTNA, L’Esthonie; Les Esthoniens et la Question Esthonienne (Paris, 1920), covers the problems of Esthomia from the national point of view. A concise article on “The Peoples of the Baltic Provinces and Lithuania” is to be found in the Round Table, March 1918, pp. 293–307. OTTO KESSLER, Die Ballen- länder und Litauen (Berlin, 1916), contains statistical material of value. See also K. A. JUSAITIs, The History of the Lithuanian Nation and its Present National Aspirations (Phila- delphia, 1918). - . CHAPTER XXII. FINLAND Atlas de Finlande, 1910, atlas and 2 vols. of text (Helsingfors, 1911), together with the earlier Atlas de Statistique Sociale sur les Communes Hurates de Finlande en 1901 (Helsingfors, 1908), were published by the Finnish Geographical Society, and constitute the best exist- ing survey, along the lines of scientific geography, of the social and political conditions of the country. Finnland im Anfang des XX. Jahrhunderts (Helsingfors, 1920), published by the Finnish Ministry for Foreign Affairs, despite its title has been brought down to 1919; it contains many maps. For descriptions of the country and the people consult: ARTHUR READE, Finland and the Finns (London, 1914); WERNER SöDERJHELM, editor, Finlande et Finlandais (Paris, 1913); ERNEST YouNG, Finland: The Land of a Thousand Lakes (London, 1912); ERLAND NORDENSEIOLD, “Finland: The Land and the People,” Geogr. Rev., Vol. 7, 1919, pp. 361-379. CHAPTER XXIII. RUSSIA GREGOR ALExINSKY, Modern Russia (London, 1913), is a general treatment of the historical and economic development of Russia, the constitutional situation before the 594 The New World World War, Russia’s literature, and the problems of nationality and religion. The follow- ing works on the history of Russia may be recommended: R. BEAZLEY, N. FortBEs, and G. A. BIRKETT, Russia from the Varangians to the Bolsheviks (Oxford, 1918); F. H. SKRINE, The Earpansion of Russia, 1815–1900 (Cambridge, 1904). The Russian Almanac (annual, London) continues the Russian Year Book and contains much statistical and other informa- tion. M. J. OLGIN, The Soul of the Russian Revolution (New York, 1917), is an intimate and detailed view, chiefly social and political, but containing also valuable sections on land tenure and local village or community government. J. M. CRAWFORD, editor, The Indus- tries of Russia, 5 vols. (St. Petersburg, 1893), prepared by the Russian government for the World’s Fair at Chicago, and W. DE KovaLEvsKY, editor, La Russie à la Fin du 19° Siècle (Paris, 1900), published for the Paris Exposition, contain many useful maps and much statistical material, and will be found especially useful in comparative studies. For a statistical treatment of the Russian population by nationalities, see RUDOLF CLAUS, “Die Zusammensetzung der Bevölkerung Russlands nach Nationalitäten,” Zeitschrift des König- lich Preussischen Statistischen Landesamts, Vol. 55, 1915, pp. 1–12. The same number of this publication, pp. 13–22, contains a valuable article ith statistical material on agri- cultural and industrial production, “Die russische landwirtschaftliche und industrielle Produktion,” by C. BALLOD. T. H. ENGELBRECHT, Landwirtschaftlicher Atlas des Rus- sischen Reiches in Europa und Asien (Berlin, 1916), contains an excellent series of maps displaying the economic resources of the Russian Empire. WALTHER TUCKERMANN, Ver- kehrsgeographie der Eisenbahnen des Europäischen Russland (Essen, 1916), includes a history of Russian railroads and a survey of their present economic and strategic importance. The two following works treat of the commercial importance of Russia: W. H. BEABLE, Commercial Russia (New York, 1919); ARTHUR RAFFALovich, editor, Russia: Its Trade and Commerce (London, 1918). Among other important works on Russia in the last few years see: E. ANTONELLI, Bolshevist Russia (London, 1920); T. G. MASARYK, The Spirit of Russia, 2 vols. (London, 1919); E. A. Ross, Russia in Upheaval (New York, 1919); CHARLEs SAROLEA, Great Russia: Her Achievement and Promise (New York, 1916); H. W. WILLIAMs, Russia of the Russians (New York, 1915). STEPHEN RUDNITSKY, Ukraine: The Land and Its People (New York, 1918), is published by the Ukrainian Alliance of America; it had previously appeared in German under the title Ukraina — Land und Volk: Eine Gemeinfassliche Landeskunde (Vienna, 1916). Foremost among works on Siberia is the Atlas of Asiatic Russia, published in Russian in 1914 by the Colonization Bureau; it contains an excellent series of maps and is accompanied by descriptive text in three volumes. The following additional volumes may be noted: M. A. CzAPLICKA, Aboriginal Siberia (Oxford, 1914); FRIDTJoF NANSEN, Through Siberia (New York, 1914); M. P. PRICE, Siberia (London, 1912). CHAPTER XXIV. CONSTANTINOPLE PAUL MAssoN, “Constantinople et les détroits,” Ann. de Géogr., Vol. 28, 1919, pp. 121- 142, is a thorough statistical study of the commerce of the Straits. C. PHILLIPSON and N. BUxTON, The Question of the Bosphorus and the Dardanelles (London, 1917), contains a well-rounded and scholarly treatment of the problem. The handbook on the Dardanelles and the Bosporus, published by the French Commission de Géographie of the Service Géographique de l'Armée (Paris, 1915), should also be consulted; it contains a relief map and a plan of the city of Constantinople. For the relation of the Hellespont to the Greek world, and especially its place in Greek commerce and politics, see G. NEILSON, “The Hellespont in Retrospect,” Proc. Royal Philos. Soc. (Glasgow), Vol. 47, 1915–16, pp. 1-24. H. C. Dwight, Constantinople, Old and New (London, 1915), treats of the life of the city and to some degree of its recent history. Bibliography 595 CHAPTER XXV. PALESTINE G. A. SMITH, The Historical Geography of the Holy Land, 13th ed. (London, 1907), is a classic work, and is now admirably supplemented by the same author's Atlas of the His- torical Geography of the Holy Land (London, 1915). ELLsworth HUNTINGTON, Palestine and Its Transformation (Boston, 1911), is a suggestive treatment of the influence of climatic factors in the Holy Land. See also “The Future of Palestine” by the same author, Geogr. Rev., Wol. 7, 1919, pp. 24–35. ISIDORE SINGER, editor, The Jewish Encyclopedia, 12 vols. (New York, 1901–1906), should be consulted upon problems connected with the Jews which had taken shape before its publication. Among recent works on the Jewish people may be cited: ARTHUR RUPPIN, The Jews of Today (New York, 1913); NoHMAN BENTwick, Palestine of the Jews, Past, Present, and Future (London, 1919). ALBERT T. CLAY, “Polit- ical Zionism,” Atlantic Monthly, Feb. 1921, discusses the political phases of the Zionist movement and of the Palestinian mandate. Mention may be made of Palestine, a small weekly published at London which chronicles events in Palestine from the Zionist stand- point. CHAPTER XXVI. ANATOLIA D. G. HogARTH, The Nearer East (New York, 1902), covers the region at the eastern end of the Mediterranean and beyond to Persia and Arabia, and contains many maps and diagrams. VITAL CUINET, La Turquie d'Asie, 4 vols. (Paris, 1900), has been the standard work on Asiatic Turkey, though it is now unreliable because of the great shifting of popula- tion due to war and forced migration; it discusses each vilayet systematically. Among other geographical works which may be mentioned are: EwALD BANSE, Die Türkei: Eine Moderne Geographie (Brunswick, 1915); ALFRED PHILIPPSON, Das Türkische Reich (Weimar, 1916). WILLIAM MILLER, The Ottoman Empire, 1801–1913 (Cambridge, 1913), is a useful volume with extensive bibliographies, but it does not carry the story through the Balkan wars. Other historical works of note are: W. E. D. ALLEN, The Turks in Europe: A Sketch Study (London, 1919); LoBD EveRSLEY, The Turkish Empire: Its Growth and Decay (London, 1917). M. A. CzAPLICKA, The Turks of Central Asia in History and at the Present Day (London, 1918), is “an ethnological inquiry into the Pan-Turanian problem.” The Handbook on the Bagdad Railway published by the Commission de Géographie of the Service Géographique de l'Armée (Paris, 1916), describes in detail the route traversed by this important line. CHAPTERS XXVII, XXVIII. TRANSCAUCASIA NoFL and HAROLD BUxTON, Travel and Politics in Armenia (London, 1914), is note- worthy. H. F. B. LYNCH, Armenia: Travels and Studies, 2 vols. (London, 1901); Vol. 1 deals with the Russian provinces and Vol. 2 with the Turkish provinces. D. GHAMBASH- IDzE, Mineral Resources of Georgia and Caucasia (London, 1919), though brief, is a useful treatise. A valuable reference is Conditions in the Near East, the report of the American Military Mission to Armenia, MAJOR GENERAL J. G. HARBORD, 1919, published as Senate Document No. 266. RICHARD COTTHEIL, “Armenia and the Armenians. A List of Ref- erences in the New York Public Library,” Bell. N. Y. Publ. Lib., Vol. 23, 1919, pp. 123– 143, 251–277, 303–336. W. L. WILLIAMs, Armenia: Past and Present (London, 1916), is almost wholly concerned with Turkish Armenia. J. D. HENRY, Baku: An Eventful History (London, 1906), gives an account of the oil region, CHAPTER XXIX. PERSIA P. M. SYKEs, A History of Persia, 2 vols. (London, 1915), carries the story of Persian history down to 1906. W. MoRGAN SHUSTER, The Strangling of Persia (New York, 1912), 596 The New World is an account of the author's experiences as Treasurer-General of Persia. J. DEMoRGAN, Mission Scientifique en Perse, 5 vols. (Paris, 1894–1905), is the basis of a large part of our geographical knowledge of Persia. A. W. W. JACKson, Persia Past and Present: A Book, of Travel and Research (New York, 1906), contains useful material. G. N. CURZON (Lord CURZON), Persia and the Persian Question (London, 1892), is a general treatise with the emphasis chiefly upon political questions; there is an abundance of geographical data; the point of view is frankly British and imperial. CHAPTER XXX. INNER ASIA H. H. Howorth, History of the Mongols, 4 vols. (London, 1876–1888), is a standard work on the Mongol invasions. It covers the period from the 9th century. ELLSWORTH HUNTINGTON, The Pulse of Asia (Boston, 1907), is a study in geographic environment and the influence of climate on history; the claim is made that the drier phases of climatic cycles account for the Mongol invasions of Europe. ARVED SCHULTz, Die Natürlichen Land- schaften von Russisch-Turkestan (Hamburg, 1920), is a geographical work on Russian Inner Asia. Other works on the same region are: W. E. CURTIs, Turkestan : The Heart of Asia (New York, 1911); A. WoFIKOF, Le Turkestan Russe (Paris, 1914). E. N. FELL, Russian and Nomad : Tales of the Kirghiz Steppes (New York, 1916), gives an interesting account of travel and life in central Siberia about Lake Balkash. Standard references on geograph- ical and archaeological subjects are the recent articles or books, published variously, by SvFN HEDIN, SIR AUREL STEIN, HOLDICH, and YoUNGHUSBAND. CHAPTER XXXI. THE FAR EAST A. LITTLE, The Far East (Oxford, 1905), is a geographic treatment by a scholar long resident in China. SIR ROBERT K. Douglas, Europe and the Far East, 1506–1912 (New York, 1913), deals with the interaction of Orient and Occident. S. K. HoRNBECK, Con- temporary Politics in the Far East (New York, 1916), covers events leading up to the presen- tation of the Twenty-One Demands by Japan. See also K. S. LATOURETTE, The Develop- ment of China (New York, 1918). HoseA BALLOU MoRSE, The International Relations of the Chinese Empire, 3 vols. (London, 1910–1918), surveys comprehensively the period from 1834 to 1911. See also the same author's The Trade and Administration of China (London, 1913). SAMUEL Couling, editor, The Encyclopedia Sinica (London, 1918), is a general reference. E. J. DINGLE, editor, The New Atlas and Commercial Gazetteer of China (Shang- hai, 1918); the text contains a comprehensive treatment of the economic resources, means of transportation, principal cities, etc., of the various provinces of China. G. MASPERO, La Chine (Paris, 1918), has a useful account of the geography, history, and political and social structure of China, together with the history of Chino-Japanese relations and the various treaties that affect the present political situation. The China Year Book, 5th ed. (London, 1920) and The Japan Year Book (published annually at Tokio) are useful as gen- eral references. Japan: Trade During the War, United States Tariff Commission Report (Washington, 1921), is a study of Japanese trade from 1913 to 1917 with special reference to the trade of Japan with the United States. The following works should also be con- sulted upon the subjects indicated by their titles: T. W. OverLACH, Foreign Financial Control in China (New York, 1919); MongtoN CHIH Hsu, Railway Problems in China (New York, 1915); E. T. WILLIAMs, “The Open Ports of China,” Geogr. Rev., Vol. 9, 1920, pp. 306–334. E. A. Ross, The Changing Chinese (New York, 1911), describes China as seen by a sociologist. The three following works are recommended for a survey of contemporary Japanese history (the last two are by Japanese): K. S. LATOURETTE, The Development of Japan, (New York, 1918); Count S. OKUMA, Fifty Years of New Japan, 2 vols. (New York, 1909); G. E. UYEHARA, The Political Development of Japan, 1867–1909 (London, 1910). For a Bibliography 597 study of Japanese emigration statistics see ERNST SCHULTZE, “Die Japanische Auswan- derung,” Peter. Mitt., Wol. 61, 1915, pp. 129-133, 175—179, 270–276, 301–308, and the note by R. BIASUTTI, “L’Emigrazione Giapponese,” Rivista Geogr. Italiana, Vol. 61, 1916, pp. 210–216. K. K. KAwakAMI, Asia at the Door: A Study of the Japanese Question in Continental United States, Hawaii, and Canada (New York, 1914), is written by an assimi- lated (Americanized) Japanese. R. MALCOLM. KEIR, “Modern Korea,” Bull. Amer. Geogr. Soc., Vol. 46, 1914, pp. 756–769, 817–830, discusses the resources and problems of the region. ALLEYNE IRELAND, The Far Eastern Tropics (Boston, 1905), consists of a group of studies of the administration of Hongkong, Malay States, French Indo-China, Java, the Philippine Islands, etc. - CHAPTER XXXII. AUSTRALIA Among a number of important works by GRIFFITH TAYLOR may be mentioned the following: A Geography of Australasia (Oxford, 1914); The Australian Environment (Mel- bourne, 1918); “The Settlement of Tropical Australia,” Geogr. Rev., Wol. 8, 1919, pp. 84– 115. G. H. SCHOLEFIELD, The Pacific : Its Past and Future (London, 1919), is an excellent general work. Among others may be mentioned: H. H. BANCROFT, The New Pacific (New York, 1912; first publ. 1899); JAMES Colwell, editor, A Century in the Pacific (London, 1914), “a review of the developments in the South Pacific during the past hundred years”; it has an extensive bibliography. On the history of Australia see: A. WYATT TILBY, Australasia, 1688–1911 (London, 1912); T. A. CoGHLAN, Labour and Industry in Australia from the First Settlement in 1788 to the Establishment of the Commonwealth in 1901, 4 vols. (London, 1918), a somewhat encyclopedic industrial history of Australia. The Commonwealth of Australia publishes an exceptionally valuable Yearbook compiled under the direction of the Commonwealth Statistician, G. H. KNIBBs. CHAPTER XXXIII. AFRICA Acquaintance with the work done by SIR HARRY JOHNSTON is absolutely necessary for any one interested in African problems. Among his many published works may be men- tioned the following: The Opening Up of Africa (1911); A History of the Colonization of Africa by Alien Races (Cambridge, 1913); British Central Africa (London, 1897); George Grenfell and the Congo, 2 vols. (1908); Liberia, 2 vols. (1906); The Uganda Protectorate, 2 vols. (1902). J. S. KELTIE, The Partition of Africa, 2d ed. (London, 1895), gives an ex- cellent statement of the problems of political geography as they presented themselves in Africa during the nineteenth century. N. D. HARRIs, Intervention and Colonization in Africa (New York, 1914), contains a history of the continent since the beginning of white exploitation. The treaty documents for the period up to the end of 1908 are to be found in SIR Edward HERTSLET, The Map of Africa by Treaty, 3 vols., with a portfolio of maps, 3d ed. (London, 1909). C. H. STIGAND, Administration in Tropical Africa (London, 1914), outlines the problems connected with the government of African tropical dependencies. SIR PATRICK MANSON, Tropical Diseases: A Manual of the Diseases of Warm Climates, 5th ed. (London, 1914). For a brief but detailed description of the resources, trade routes, and future value of eastern tropical Africa, with special reference to white settle- ment, see G. F. Scott-ELLIOT, Journ. Royal Soc. of Arts, Vol. 68, 1920, pp. 315–329. SIR CHARLES METCALFE, “Railway Development of Africa, Present and Future,” Geogr. Journ., Vol. 47, 1916, pp. 3–21, contains a history of early railroad projects and a record of achievements to date. CHAPTER XXXIV. LATIN AMERICA - WILHELM SIEveRs, Süd- und Mittelamerika, 3d ed. (Leipzig and Vienna, 1914), is the best general geographical reference work on the subject. For a historical background the 598 The New World best reference is E. G. Bourne, Spain in America, 1450–1580 (New York, 1904); it also contains an exceptionally valuable critical essay on authorities. F. GARCíA CALDERóN, Latin America: Its Rise and Progress (New York, 1913), is written by a Peruvian diplomat; it discusses “the German, North American, and Japanese perils,” and other problems of Latin America. WISCOUNT BRYCE, Observations and Impressions (New York, 1912), presents a closely interwoven account of the historical setting of the Latin-American peoples and present economic, social, and political conditions. E. A. Ross, South of Panama (New York, 1915), is a survey of the peoples of Latin America by an observant sociologist. The volume on Colombia by EDER, in Scribner's South American Series, is an authoritative work. W. R. SHEPHERD, Latin America (New York, 1914), is a concise treatment of the essential historical facts and contains a useful bibliography. A. B. HART, The Monroe Doctrine: An Interpretation (Boston, 1916), traces the historical development of the doctrine since its proclamation. PIERRE BERNE, L’Immigration Européenne en Argentine (Paris, 1915), is an account. of the European settlements. Among works on Argentina the following are noteworthy: PIERRE DENIS, La République Argentine: La Mise en Valeur du Pays (Paris, 1920); JULES HURET, En Argentine, 2 vols. (Paris, 1912– 1913). W. S. ToweR, “The Pampa of Argentina,” Geogr. Rev., Vol. 5, 1918, pp. 293–315, is an informing article with maps. The Boundary between Bolivia and Peru (London, 1918), treats of the newly surveyed zone north of Titicaca long in dispute between these two republics; it contains recent and valuable maps. SIR THOMAS H. Holdich, The Countries of the King's Award (London, 1904), describes the Andes of Argentina and Chile, and the boundary settlement made there by the award of the King of England after a field study under the auspices of the Royal Geographical Society. PIERRE DENIS, Brazil in the Twentieth Century (New York, 1910), is one of the best books yet published on any South American subject. B. L. MILLER and J. T. SINGEwALD, The Mineral Deposits of South America (New York, 1919), is one of the most recent and comprehensive works of its kind. The South American Year Book (London), deals especially with the railroads of the continent. The Argentine Year Book (Buenos Aires), though dealing primarily with Argentina, also contains chapters on Uruguay, Paraguay, and Chile. APPENDIX PRINCIPAL TREATIES AND AGREEMENTS, 1814–1920 THE list includes chiefly those treaties and agreements that are mentioned in the text. For detailed lists of treaties and agreements, with texts and maps, see SIR EDwARD HERTSLET, The Map of Europe by Treaty, in four volumes, of which volumes 1–3 were published in 1875, volume 4 in 1891. See also the same author's The Map of Africa by Treaty, in three volumes, with port- folio of maps (1909). An indispensable reference for the student of political geography is ANDERSON and HERSHEY, Handbook for the Diplomatic History of Europe, Asia and Africa, 1870–1914 (1918); in one hundred and sixty main sections with several subdivisions each, are listed practically all the inter- national acts essential to a knowledge of territorial problems. The introduc- tion, the running text-comment, and the convenient and logical arrangement of the whole make it unusually valuable in spite of the absence of an index. DATE NAME SIGNATORIES TERMS OF IMPORTANCE IN THIS BOOK 1814 || First Treaty of Paris || Austria, France, Great | Provided for calling of Vienna (following depor- Britain, Portugal, Congress tation of Napoleon Prussia, Russia, Spain, to Elba) Sweden 1814– | Congress of Vienna | As above Determined the main lines of 1815 the map of Europe as they stood in the 19th century 1815 | Second Treaty of As above France ceded certain bits of .* Paris (following territory on her eastern Waterloo) frontier and paid an in- demnity 1839 Treaty of London Austria, Belgium, Belgium's neutrality (the “scrap of France, Great Britain, guaranteed paper”) Netherlands, Prussia, Russia º 1856 | Treaty of Paris Austria, France, Great |Independence and integrity of (close of Crimean Britain, Prussia, Rus- Turkey guaranteed. War) sia, Sardinia, Turkey Danube internationalized. Bessarabia annexed to Russia. Rumania under Turkish suzerainty. Serbia given a large degree of autonomy. Aland Islands to be unfortified. 1859 || Zurich Austria, France, Sardinia || Beginning of unification of Italy 1864 || Vienna Austria, Denmark, Cession of Sleswig-Holstein, * Prussia to Prussia and Austria 1866 | Prague Austria, Prussia German Confederation dis- solved. Austria renounced rights to Slesvig-Holstein, and consented to union of Lombardy and Venetia with Italian kingdom 599 600 The New World DATE NAME SIGNATORIES TERMS 1871 | Frankfort (close of France, Germany Cession of Alsace-Lorraine to Franco-Prussian Germany. Indemnity of War) 5,000,000,000 francs paid by France 1878 || San Stefano Russia, Turkey Serbia, Montenegro, and ë Bulgaria enlarged. Russia obtained Bessarabia and Transcaucasian territory. The opposition of the powers led to the Congress of Berlin and the modifica- tion of the treaty of San & Stefano 1878 Congress of Berlin || Austria-Hungary, Eastern Rumelia formed. France, Germany, Austro-Hungarian occupa- Great Britain, Italy, tion of Bosnia and Herze- Russia, Turkey govina authorized. Inde- pendence of Montenegro and of Serbia recognized under enlarged boundaries. Rumanian independence recognized. Districts of Ardahan, Kars, and Batum ceded to Russia. Turkey promised reforms in Armenia 1879 - || Formation of Dual Germany and Austria Alliance *- 1882 || Formation of Triple ] Germany, Austria, Alliance Italy 1885 Berlin Act Austria-Hungary, Spheres of influence in Africa Belgium, Denmark, laid down. Formation of France, Germany, neutral Congo Free State. Great Britain, Italy, Free trade area in Africa Netherlands, Portugal, defined. Declaration pro- Russia, Spain, Sweden, hibiting the slave trade Turkey, United States 1898 || Paris (close of Spain, United States Independence of Cuba Spanish-American recognized. Porto Rico, War) Guam, and the Philippines ceded to the United States 1904 || Anglo-French Basis of the Entente Convention Cordiale 1905 || London Alliance between Great Britain and Japan 1907 || The Hague Delegates of 44 countries | Second Hague Conference for the peaceful settlement of international disputes 1912 || Lausanne Italy, Turkey Annexation of Tripoli (Libya) by Italy. Occupation of Dodecanese by Italy 1 The first Hague Conference (1899) had a similar though more restricted program. Appendia: 601 DATE NAME SIGNATORIES TERMS 1913 | London Bulgaria, Greece, Mon- Cession by Turkey to the ºr tenegro, Serbia, Balkan allies of all terri- Turkey tory (except Albania) west of the Enos-Midia line. Autonomous Albania to be created. 1913 | Bucarest As above, with Rumania | Frontiers as shown in Fig. 150 added, and without Turkey 1915 | Secret Treaty of France, Great Britain, Italy to enter the war, and London Italy, Russia to receive the Trentino, Istria, a large part of Dal- matia and the Adriatic islands, Valona in Albania, a sphere of influence in Turkey, and territory in Africa if the other signa- tories made gains there 1916 || Sykes–Picot Agree- || France, Great Britain Provided for spheres of in- ment fluence in Turkey. Later a new agreement included Italy, and provision was made for Russia (Fig. 47) 1918 || Treaty of Brest- Central Powers, Russia | Russia withdrew from the war Litovsk and renounced her right to Baltic Provinces, Poland, and certain districts in the Caucasus 1918 || Bucarest Central Powers, Rumania| Rumania to withdraw from the war, and to cede certain districts to Austria-Hun- gary. Treaty was never ratified 1919 | Versailles Allied and Associated See chapter on Germany Powers, Germany 1919 | St. Germain-en- Allied and Associated See chapter on Austria Laye Powers, Austria 1919 || Neuilly Allied and Associated See chapter on Bulgaria Powers, Bulgaria 1920 | Trianon Allied and Associated See chapter on Hungary Powers, Hungary 1920 | Sèvres Allied Powers, Turkey | See chapter on Turkey 1920 | Tripartite Agree- France, Great Britain, Determined spheres of in- ment Italy fluence in Turkey (Fig. 48) 1920 Agreement among Allied Powers whereby Rumania receives Bessarabia, subject to later discussion by Russia 1920 | Riga Poland, Russia Eastern boundary of Poland and Polish control of East- ern Galicia 1920 || Rapallo Italy Jugo-Slavia Settlement of Adriatic ques- tion. See chapter on Jugo- Slavia 1920 | Franco-British France, Great Britain Division of mandated terri- Agreement tory in Syria. See chapter on Palestine 602 The New World The Russian Soviet (Bolshevist) government has concluded, among others, the following treaties of peace with former parts of the Russian Empire:1 PLACE COUNTRY DATE Esthonia 2 February 1920 Dorpat Lithuania 12 July 1920 Moscow Latvia 11 August 1920 Moscow Poland 12 October 1920 Riga Finland 14 October 1920 Dorpat Each treaty recognizes the territorial limits of the state in question or provides for future settlement. * For details see the chapters on the respective countries in the list. INDEX INDEX Abadan, 74, 468 A B C powers, 562 Abdul Hamid II, 432 Åbo, 373 Abyssinia, 532, 555, 557; Italy and, 140; unique position, 557 Acknowledgments, ii Acre River, 570 Ada-Kalessi, 287 Adalia, 140, 321,434 Adana, 434; massacres, 433 Adde (ill.), 170 Aden, 29, 72, 160, 555; region (map), 556 Adowa, 140 Adrianople, 221, 251, 296, 298, 318, 320, 327, 440; treaty of, 278, 314 Adriatic Sea, Austria and, 207, 215; dif- ferences between the two sides, 263; in Pact of Corfu, 258; Italy's claim, 259, 261; Italy's control, 270 e Adriatic Sea, east coast, ethnic elements (map), 260; final settlement of disputed territory, 269; harbors, character, 266; Italian culture, 262; Italy and, 131; rival claims, 259 AEgean coast, 304 AEgean Islands, 417 AEgean Sea, Greeks and, 313, 321 Afghanistan, 465, 470, 483; British policy in, 484; independence movement, 484; Kabul wall (ill.), 486; near Baluchistan border (ill.), 487; Russian and Indian railways, proposed connections (map), 485 Africa, Belgium's gains by the war, 124; bibliography, 597; British possessions (map), 42; colonial expansion and struggle for raw materials, 532; colonies loyal in the war, 532–533; early colonial rivalry, 540; former German colonies, 541, 199 (map); French inter- ests in northern, 105, 551; French possessions (map), 106; germ diseases and insects, 538; German ambitions, 199–200; German colonial expansion, 198; international regulations, 548, 550 (map); Islamism in, 534; Islamism versus Christianity in northern, 535; Africa (continued) Italian colonies, 140; mandate principle in settlement of problems, 546; minor interests and problems, 552; native welfare and control, 548; negroes, 533; negroes, conversion to Islam, 54, 56; partition by great powers, 540; popula- tion density in central (map), 538; Portuguese colonies, 159, 160 (map); races and cultures, 533; slave and liquor traffic, 548; sleeping sickness localities (map), 539; Spanish possessions (map), 153; Stanley's explorations, 540; threat to peace of the world, 541; trade poli- cies, 547; tropical products, 537; Turkey and northern, 113; Uganda ſº region (map), 538; white control, effect on natives, 535; white penetration, history, 539; white man's lands in central, 536, 537 (map) Africa, West, 553, 554 (map); British in, 553, 554; commercial rivalry, 554; resources, 555 Africans, growing self-consciousness, 532 Agadir, 107, 541, 545, 553 Agram, 257 Agriculture, nomads’ idea of, 474 Al Hasa, 68 Aland Islands, 173, 374, 375 Alaska, 520 Albania, 132, 249, 317; Austrian and Ser- bian rivalry, 308; bibliography, 592, boundaries, various proposed (map), 307; brigandage, 311; centers of inter- est, 310; character of country, 306; division proposed, 308, 309 (map); ethnography, religions, and boundaries (map), 310; feuds, 306; foreign control; 309; Italy's interest, 144, 306, 309, Jugo-Slavia and, 257; mountaineers, 306; people, distribution, 310; union, plan of, 311 Albania, southern. See Epirus, northern Albanians, Serbs and, 257; view of Greek control, 325 Albert, Bishop, 362 Albertville, 128 Aleppo, 70, 102, 412,429 605 606 The New World Aleutian Islands, 404, 522 Alexander the Great, 313, 316 Alexander II, 384 Alexandretta, 398, 412, 440 Alexandrovsk, 370, 373, 398, 412 Alföld, 226, 227 (map) Alfonso XIII, 145, 153 Algeciras, 106, 110 Algeria, 532, 535, 540; desert interior (ill.), 117; European population, 114; exports, 114; French control, 113; oasis in the gorge of Kantara (ill.), 116; physio- graphic zones, 111; relief belt (map), 113 Algiers, 551 Alhambra (ill.), 151 Ali Dinar, 65 Alien rule, 59 Allenby, Sir Edmund, 100 Allenstein, 194, 332, 339, 345 Allied and Associated Powers, minorities treaties, 276; Russian policy, 390, 391 Alsace, 81 Alsace-Lorraine, 196; mineral resources and water communications (map), 82; re- ligious leaning, 81; returz: to France, 80 Amazon valley, 559 Ambassadors, Council of, 347 American Colonization Society, 558 American Geographical Society, ii; Guate- mala-Honduras boundary, 579 American quadrilateral, 522, 523 (map) American Revolution, 29; Irish immigrants and, 33 Amritsar, 44 Amu Daria district, 474 Amur River, 404, 517, 518 Anatolia, 320, 321, 425, 429; bibliography, 595; commercial prospects, 443; in terms of American locations (map), 65; irrigation, 443; Italy and, 102, 103, 132, 144; natural limits, 442; ports, 443; relief (map), 428; Smyrna and, 322 Turkish elements, 443. See also Turkey Ancon, trèaty of, 573 Andalusia, 145 Andermatt (ill.), 183 Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, 29, 535; compara- tive distances (map), 64; extent and boundaries (map), 63; law and people, 62; Mohammedanism, 57 Anglo-French convention, 1904, 600 Anglo-Japanese alliance, 26, 496 Anglo-Persian Oil Co., 467 Anglo-Persian treaty, chief provisions, 468– 469 Angola, 158, 160, 162, 164 Angra Pequeña, 199 Annam, 518 Ansarirebs, 92 Antimony, 508 Antofagasta, 572, 574 (map) Antwerp, 123, 124 Arabi Pasha, 60 Arabia, British influence, 71; British inter- ests, 65; in terms of American locations (map), 65; intolerance and exclusive- ness, 66; isolation, 65, 66; population, 66, 67; Turkey and, 426; unity, 68, 69 Arabs, 429; Anezeh tribe in Syrian desert (ill.), 430; desert, 104; in Anglo-Egyp- tian Sudan, 62; in Libya, 142; in Spain, 150; migration into Africa and Spain, 533; Portuguese and, 160; Syria and, 103, 104; typical costume (ill.), 447 Arad, 284 Aral Sea, 470, 472 Aras, 458 Arbitration of boundary disputes in Latin America, 579, 580 Archangel, 370 Arco (ill.), 133 Ardahan, 450 Argentina, British interests, 566; Chilean boundary, 570; Uruguay and La Plata estuary, 576 Argyrocastro, 310 Arica, Morro de (ill.), 576 Arid regions, German Southwest Africa, 544; Inner Asia, 470; nitrate fields in Chile, 573; Spain (map), 149 Armageddon, 1 Armenia, 397, 411, 417, 429, 434, 450; America and, 459–460; boundary, claims and limits (with map), 458, 460; ethnog- raphy and boundaries (map), 459; man- datary difficulty, 458; plight, 455 Armenians, 379, 429, 453; as element of Turkey (map), 426; dependence on outside support, 460; deportations and massacres, 459; France and, 102; Kurds and, 444; Tatar treaty, 455 Arms, trade with small osturbulent nations, 486 Artesian areas in Australia (with map), 528 Asia, railway lines in western (map), 377; Russian extension into, 398 Indea: 607 Asia, Inner, aridity, 470; bibliography, 596; camel transportation (ill.), 488; heart, 477; nomadic movements, 471; rainfall (map), 472; relief (map), 471; Russian advance into, 474; typical transporta- tion (ill.), 481 Asia, southeastern, focus of American, British, French, Dutch, and Japanese interests (map), 25, 520 Asia Minor. See Anatolia; Turkey Asiatic Turkey, classification of peoples, 427 Asiatics, Australia and, 525, 528, 530 Asiatics Trading and Land Act, 39 Asir, 68, 71 Assab, 140 Assam, 49 Astrakhan, 393 Athens, cosmopolitan character, 409 Atlas Mountains, 551 Attica, 314 Attila, 433 Aussig (ill.), 237 Australia, 29, 520; artesian areas and rain- fall (with map), 528; Asiatic labor, 525, 528, 530; bibliography, 597; fears of Japan, 492—493; Japanese advance toward, 526; Japanese question, 525; Japanese trade, 498; physical conditions, 526; population, 528; population den- sity (map), 530; race problem (with map), 525; wheat harvest (ill.), 527 Australian Commonwealth, 528 Austria, 191; bibliography, 590; boundary (new) and cities (map), 207; Czech oppression, 235; economic weakness, 212; emigration, 210–211; ethnic dif- ferences, 210; food and fuel problems, 212; fragmentation, 208; German co- operation, 187; Hungary boundary, 215; Italy and, 130–131, 136; national exis- tence, 206; population density and shape (map), 209; population, nation- ality and religions (table), 210; present territory, 208; St. Germain treaty terms, 214–215; Slesvig and, 175; Swit– zerland and, 185; union with Germany forbidden, 192; union with Germany, possibilities, 214; western provinces and Switzerland (map), 185 Austria-Hungary, 206, 216; division and allotment of territory (map), 206 Austrian Poland. See under Poland Autocracy, 203; Russia, 385 Avignon, Papacy at, 236 Avlona. See Walona Azerbaijan, 380, 397, 434, 440, 450, 453, 455, 461; Persian, 464; Republic, 460 Bab el Mandeb, 71, 556 * Bačka, 273; ethnography (map), 272 Bagdad, 252 Bagdad railway, 411, 412,444 Bahama Islands, 569 Bahrein Island, 71 Baikal, Lake, 404 Baku, 380, 385, 397, 398, 453 455, 460 Balkan countries, 249; bibliography, 591; changes of territory as result of Balkan Wars (map), 297; economic features, 252; Germano-Austrian interests and, 252; hatreds, 298, 305; nationalism, 251, 252 Balkan peninsula, natural regions (map), 254 Balkan War, First, 250, 296 Balkan War, Second, 251, 298 Balkan Wars, 433–434; Bulgaria and, 296, 298; Greece and, 315 Baltchik, 302 Baltic and White Sea Conference, 165 Baltic Confederation, 165; Lithuania and, 361 Baltic Port, 369 Baltic Sea, 165; Britain and, 369; Polish corridor to, 336 Baltic States, 362; bibliography, 593; boundaries (map), 363; German delay in evacuating, 365; German penetra- tion, 188 (map), 189, 382; Germaniza- tion, 364, 368; international position, 369; self-government, 362. See also Courland; Esthonia; Latvia Balts, 189, 365, 368 Baluchistan, 465, 484, 485–486; Afghan border (ill.), 487 Banana lands, 579 Banat, 216, 219, 221, 255, 287; ethnography (map), 272; Serbia's claim, 272, 273, 290 Bantus, 533 Barbados, white control, 535 Barcelona, 145, 146, 147, 153 Barkhans, 470 Basques, 150, 151 Basra, 72, 412, 440 Basutoland, 39, 43 Inear 608 The New World Basutos, 38 Batang, 489 Batum, 440, 451, 453, 455, 458; harbor (ill.), 457 Batum, province of, 450 Bazaa rat. Faizabad (ill.), 478–479 Bear Island, 171, 172 Bechuanaland, 39, 43 Beira, 161 Beirut, 100 Belgian Congo, 125, #26, 532, 542, 553; rail and water transportation (map), 127; value, 127 Belgium, as center of field of conflict— French and German defenses (map), 121; as European focus, 119; bibliog- raphy, 587; claims to adjacent terri- tory, 123; Holland and, 178; indepen- dence, 1.19; industrial power, 120; language problem, 122; recovery from the war, 120, 122; territorial gains from the war, 124 Belgrade, 258, 272 Beneš, Edward, 240 Benghazi, 142, 143, 549 Benguela, 161 Berbera, 557 Berbers, 113, 150, 533; in Libya, 142 Bering Sea, 404 Berlin, Congress of, 1878, signatories and terms, 600 Berlin Act, 1885, signatories and terms, 600 Berlin-Bagdad route, 73 Berlin Conference of 1884–85, 549, 550 Berlin General Act of 1880, 201 Bessarabia, 279, 280, 287; agreement about, among Allied Powers, 1920, 601; Jews, 381; people, 288 Bethlehem, 421 Bibliography, general list of works, 583 Big game in Africa, protection, 550 Bilbao, 153 Birth rate in France and Germany, 87 Bismarck Archipelago, 201 Bitlis, 458 Black race, 533. See also Africa; Negroes Black Sea federation, 398 Boers, 35, 36, 540 Bogotá, treaty of, 579 Bohemia, 191, 208, 209; Austrian oppres- sion, 238; literary revival, 238; religious wars, 235. See also Czecho-Slovakia Bohemian basin, 242-243 Bohemian language, 236, 238 Bokhara, 474, 475, 476 Bolivia, boundary disputes with Peru and Brazil, 570; boundary with Paraguay, 576; boundary with Peru, 577; claim for seaport, 574; race mixture, 563 Bolshevism, 7, 376, 387; fight against, 339; Hungary, 224; program, 390; Rumania, 292, 294; Transcaucasia, 455 Bolshevists, Baltic States and, 365; block- ade of the Allies, 390; Eastern Turkes- tan and, 480; German, 202; Germany and, 189; Persia and, 466; Transcau- casia and, 460, 461; Turkey and, 461 Boma, 128 Bombay, 49 Bonin Islands, 524 Bora, 266 Border states of Russia, separation, 395 Bosilegrad, 255, 302, 304 Bosnia, 187, 207, 252, 425, 434; land prob- lem, 275 Bosporus, 409, 414, 415 Botha, General Louis, 36, 37 Boundaries, ii; Albania, 307 (map), 308; central Europe, changes (map), 6; cen— tral Europe, conflicting claims (map), 4; changeableness, 5; Greece, 313; ethnic basis, 261; Jugo-Slavia, 253, 270 (map); length of old and new, 3; Po- land, 332; Rumania, 281, 284; conces- sions in China, 510; South American friction, 570, 571 (map) Boyana River, 271 Braden, 566 Brahmins, 54 Braila, 294 Brazil, Japanese in, 492; Portugal and, 158, 159 Bremen, 198 Brenner Pass, 134; region (ill.), 135 Breslau, 193 Brest-Litovsk, 351 Brest-Litovsk, treaty of 1818, 189, 204, 364, 395; Signatories and terms, 601 Britain and British Empire, Afghan policy, 484; African possessions, loyalty, 533; Arabian interests, 65; Baltic policy, 369; bibliography, 585; dominions, 29; Egypt and, 58; Egypt, new policy, 61; Empire building, process, 22; Empire in relation to its parts, 28; expansion, Indea: 609 Britain and British Empire (continued) two theories of, 75; Far East and raw materials, 490; fate of lost possessions, 35; gains from the war, 14, 16; growth of the Empire, 13 (map), 14, 22, 24; Government of India Bill, 53; imperial idea, 29, 30; imperial policy, 28; In- dian problems, 43; Japanese alliance, 26; Mesopotamia and, 72, 75; Mo- hammedanism and, 54, 55, 57; Near East trade, 416; oil fuel, dependence on, 468; Pacific realm, 521; Palestine and, 418; Persian interests, 462; Polish interests, 356; principle of native rights, 41; problems of the Empire, 12, 28; raw materials in 1914, 14, 15; Reforms Bill, 53; road to India, 55, 58, 70, 71, 72, 429–430, 465, 520; sea-borne coal trade, 23 (map), 24; sea power and Em- pire growth, 22; South American inter- ests, 565–566; territorial inflation, 12; territorial protection on landward side, 14; three groups outside British Isles, 29; Tibetan interests, 487; trade or— ganization, 16; trade policy basis, 26; tripartite agreement in Near East in 1920 (map), 103; Turkish-sphere of influence, 434; war debt, and how it can be paid, 27 British Columbia, Japanese question, 492 British East Africa, 42, 533, 542 British Empire. See Britain British Isles, dependence upon coal, 16, 18 (map). See also United Kingdom British South Africa Co., 41, 42 British West Africa, 554 Bromberg, 191 Bromberg canal, 342 Brothers of the Sword, 362 Brusa, 440 Brussels Conference of 1876, 548 Brussels Conference of 1890, 549, 550 Bubonic plague, 539 Bucarest, French influence, 280 Bucarest, treaty of, 1913, 204, 251, 280, 281; signatories and terms, 601 Buccari, 266 Budapest, 218, 225, 480; occupation by Rumanian troops in 1919, 291; view (ill.), 220–221 Buenos Aires, (map), 578 576; disputed entrance Buffer states, Luxemburg, 84; Persia, 467; Poland, 189; Rhineland, 81 (map), 82; Siam (with map), 518; Switzerland, 181 Buga (ill.), 171 Bukovina, 208, 224, 287; people, 288 Buldur, 144 Bulgaria, 249, 434; ambitions, 295; Bal- kan Wars and, 251; boundaries, new, 303 (map), 304; church, 317; debt, 302; First Balkan War, 296; future problem, 300; Greece and, 205, 315; Macedonia and, 316; Neuilly, treaty of, and, 300, 303, 304; Second Balkan War, 298; Serbia and, 302; territorial develop- ment, 1878–1919 (maps), 299; territorial losses in the World War (map), 303; Thrace and, 320; World War and, 298 Bulgars, 249 Burma, 53 Bushire, 68 Byzantine Empire, 414 Cabinda, 162, 163 (ill.) Cabral, P. A. de, 158 Calcutta, 49 California, Japanese question, 492, 505 Caliphate, Turkish, 441 Camels, in Mongolian caravans, 482; trans- portation in Inner Asia (ill.), 488 Cameroons, 199, 200, 533, 541, 545 (map), 553; British and French division, 544; France and, 91; products, 544 Canada, 29 Canton, 510 Cape-to-Cairo railway, 42 (map), 125, 552 Cape Town, 39, 540, 551 Cape Verde Islands, 158 Capitulations, Turkish policy of, 417, 436 Caprivi salient, 541, 553 Caqueta River, 578 Caravans, 473, 479; camel caravan march- ing toward Smyrna (ill.), 325; Kurds and, 446, 447; Mongolia, 482; Pales- time, 422; Smyrna, 322 Caribbean Sea, United States interests, 569; United States penetration (map), 560 Carniola, 259, 264, 269 Caroline Islands, 202, 497, 506, 522, 523 Carpathian Mountains, 278, 281 Casablanca, 110; airplane photograph (ill.), III p Caspian Sea, 397, 470, 475 Caste in India, 45 (map), 46, 47 610 The New World Castelnuovo, 266 Castelorizzo, 132, 141 Castilian, 151 Catalan, 151 Catalonia, 145 Catherine Harbor, 370 Cattaro, 257, 266, 271, 272 Caucasus, 385, 397, 431, 451, 453 (map); Germans, 382 Central America, attempts at confedera- tion, 581; United States influence, 567 Central American Court of Justice, 562 Central Asia. See Asia, Inner Central Europe, Allied help to new states, 239; conflicting territorial claims (map), 4; socialistic background of democratic and individualistic movements, 394; territorial changes due to the war (map), 6 Centralization, France, 89; Jugo-Slavia, 259 Cerro de Pasco, 566 Chafarinas, 155 Chaihia, 116 Changes, 5 Charles, ex-Emperor, 206, 225 Charles X, 119 Charlotte Amelie, city and harbor (ill.), 563 Chatalja, 251, 296 Cherso, 269 Chile, Argentine boundary, 570; nitrate fields and boundary dispute (with map), 572; nitrate production, 573; persecu- tion of Peruvians, 573; Peru boundary, 572, 573; race mixture, 563; United States relations, 566, 567 China, 490; as prey of western nations, 496; bibliography, 596; British interests, 488; cause of present weakness, 507; com- mercial power, possible, 515; compared with the United States (map), 508; concessions, 508, 510, 512, 513; Con- sortium, 513; disorder, 514; Eastern Turkestan and, 477, 480; five major problems, 507; foreign powers' pene- tration, 508; foreigners' concessions and privileges, 512; foreign spheres of in- fluence, 508, 510; four factions, 514; French in, 518; German losses, 196, 197; internal administration, 513; invasion of her sovereignty, 513; Japanese pene- tration, 497; Japanese war in 1894–95, 495; judicial system, 514; Mongolia China (continued) and, 480; open ports and marts (map), 511; population density by provinces (map), 515; railways, 516, 519; repub- lic, 488, 513; resources, 508; revolution of 1911, 483, 488, 514; Russian conflict, 478; tariff and transit dues, 512; tariff revision needed, 515–516; Tibet and, 488; trade, European nations and, 510, 511 (map), 512; trade with Russia, 482; treaty ports, 510; United States as- sistance, 514; United States rôle with, 497; United States trade, 513. See also Shantung Chinchas Islands, 566 Chinese Eastern Railway, 498, 516, 517 Chinese Republic, 488, 513 Chinese Revolution, 483, 488, 514 Chinwangtau, 510 Cholera, 539 Christian IX, 175 Christian religion, 420 Chuquicamata, 566 Cities of international character, 409 City-state, 314 Clayton-Bulwer treaty, 567 Coal, British coaling stations, 24; British dependence on, 16, 18 (map); German coal and French iron ore, 89; German losses, 193; Hungary, 226; Italy, 136; Jugo-Slavia, 272, 273; Russia, 401; Saar region, 84; sea-borne trade of the world (map), 23; Silesia and Teschen (with map), 346; Spitsbergen, 171; Westphalia, 89; world production and consumption in 1913 (cartogram), 10 Coimbra, 156 Colombia, boundary with Ecuador-Peru, 578; boundary with Venezuela, 577; British interests, 566; United States relations, 567–568 Colonia, Uruguay, 578 Colonial organizers, 12 Colonies, Africa and raw materials, 532; British, free trade and, 19; British, objects in the war, 29; essence of prob- lem of rule, 29; France, 91; French and Dutch distribution (map), 93; German, in Africa, 541; German expansion, 198 German losses by the war, 197, 198; Italian, 140, 141 (map); self-govern- ment of Portuguese, 164 Indea: 611 Colonization, Baltic Provinces, 364; France in northern Africa, 551; Russians in Kirghiz Steppe, 473 Commerce. See Trade Commission of Inquiry, ii Commodities, industrial, 8, 10. Minerals; Raw materials Commonwealth of nations, 29 Communism in Russia, 387 Competition, 11 Condominium, 529, 547 Confederations, plans, America, 581 Confucius, 507 Congo, 541, 549 Congo Free State, 541, 549 Congo River, 540 Congress Poland, 192, 351, 353 Consortium, 513 Constantine, Algeria (ill.), 115 Constantine, King of Greece, 315, 325, 327 Constantinople, 295, 305, 398, 440; Allied control, 417; as a thoroughfare, 409; bibliography, 594; British and French rivalry, 415; ethnic conditions in the region (map), 413; free use of Straits desired, 412; general view (ill.), 410– 411; Greek claims, 314, 318; Greek interests in, 412, 414; historic setting, 409; latest struggle for, 412; new status, 416; Pan-German scheme for, 41.1; population changes, 414; religious sig- nificance, 441; Russian desire for, 410; trade, 415, 416; Turks and, 414, 415 Cook Islands, 531 Coolgardie, 528 Coöperation of United States and Latin America, 562 Coöperative plans, 11, 28; Central America, 581 Coöperative societies in Russia, 384, 397 Copenhagen, 173 Copper, Katanga, 127; South America, 566 Cordova, 150 Corfu, Pact of, 257, 259; principal items, 258 Cossacks, 380, 473 Cossacks of the Don, 390, 402; organiza- tion, 402; Turks and, 403 Costa Rica, relations with Panama, 580 Costanza, 294 Cotton, Belgian Congo, 127; Fiji and Sa- moa, 200; Germany and, 541–542 See also 11, 28; Central Council of Ambassadors, 347 Courland, 362, 365, 368 Covilham, J. P. da, 520 Cracow, 351 Crimea, 390 Croatia, 249, 257; republic, 258 Croats, 258, 260 Crusades, 420; France and, 94 Cuba, 564; United States and, 569 Curaçao, 569 Cyprus, 144, 326 Cyrenaica, 57, 143 Czar, 382, 383 Czech language, 232 Czecho-Slovakia, 191, 218, 226; agricul- ture, 246; Allied help, and vitality of the state, 239; bibliography, 590; boun- daries—linguistic and political (map), 233; dangers to the new state, 238; domain, 231; ethnography and coal and iron resources (map), 247; France and, 87; future power, 245; Germans in, 192; historic struggle for independence, 232; international relations, treaties, etc., 231; land reform, 248; language, 232; militarism, 240; minorities, 232; National Assembly, 242; political prob- lems, 241; railways, 246; regional divi- sion—Czechs and Slovaks, 242, 243 (map); Russian relations, 239; social reform, 241; Teschen and, 346; treaties, 246 Czecho-Slovaks, 207; in Russia in the war, 235 Czechs, literary revival, 238; Moravians and, 243; Poles and, 240 Dacia, 282 Daghestan, 460 Dahomey, 547 Dairen (Port Dalny), 410, 516, 517 Dakar, 155 Dalai Lama, 487; activities, 488 Dalmatia, 207, 208, 259, 261, 263, 264; centers of Italian culture (map), 268; Jugo-Slavs and Italians in, 266; ple- biscite in 1919, 268 Dalmatian coast, 132 Dalmatian Islands, 135 Dalny, Port. See Dairen Damão, 158, 160 Damascus, 69, 70, 97; view (ill.), 101 importance, 94; 612 The New World Damascus program, 97, 98 Danish West Indies, 564. See also Virgin Islands D'Annunzio, Gabriele, 129, 138; Fiume and, 268, 269 Danube River, 207, 214, 253; Ada-Kalessi island in, 287; as outlet for Czecho- Slovakia, 244, 245 (map), 246; inter- nationalization, 215; Jugo-Slavia and, 272, 273 Danubian Confederation, 241 Danzig, 166, 192, 194; British interests, 356; early and present status as free port, 337; future of the port, 338; new firms, trade, etc., 340; new Free City government, 338; Poland and, provi- sions of economic agreement, 343; Polish corridor and, 337; port and Free 342 Dar es Salaam, 125, 540, 542 Dar Hamar, 64 Dardanelles, 409 Darfur, 63, 65 Dead Sea, 422 Dedeagatch, 327 Dekka, 46 (ill.) Delagoa Bay, 161 Delgado, Cape, 160 Democracy, 314; central and eastern Europe, socialistic background, 394; Germany, 192, 204; Germany, rise, 191; Portugal, 156; Spain, 145 Demobilization in France, 80 Denikin, General, 333, 389, 390, 403 Denmark, 165; colonial enterprise, 165, 167; commerce and colonies, 173, 174 Deserts, Chile, northern (with map), 572; Inner Asia, 470; Russian Turkestan, 475 Deshima, 490, 493 Dinaric Alps, 263 Disarmament in Italy, 139 Disease in Africa, tropical, 538 Diu, 158, 160 Djebel Hauran, 97 Djebel Tuwaik, 66 Djibuti, 485, 557 Dnieper River, 357, 393; plain at Kiev (ill.), 386 Dobrudja, 251, 280, 281, 287, 298, 302; possibility of trouble, 290 Dodecanese, 132, 144, 263, 314,434; Greeks and, 435; Italian occupation, 320 City (map), 341; waterfront, part (ill.), Dominions of the British Empire, 29 Don, the (region), 398, 401, 402; Germans, 382 Don Cossacks. See Cossacks of the Don Don River, 393, 402 Donetz basin, 401 Dorpat, treaty of, 366; Finland and, 370 Drid, 116 Drin, outlet, 255 Drin-Scutari outlet, 266, 271 Drin valley, 271 Droughts in Wolga region, 387. See also Arid regions Druses, 92, 100 Dual Alliance, 1879, signatories, 600 Duma, Russian, 385 Dunes, Inner Asia, 470; Sahara, 117 (ill.), 118 Dutch, 119. See also Holland Dutch colonies, distribution (map), 93 Dutch East Indies, 176; American trade, 498; Japanese in, 495 Dutch Harbor, 522 Dvina River, 393 Dyer, General, 44 East. See Far East; Near East East Africa, Italy and, 140; Portuguese and, 159 East India Company, 43 East Indies, Dutch in, 520 East Prussia, 194, 359, 360 Eastern Europe. See Europe; Russia Eastern Galicia. See Galicia, Eastern Eastern Turkestan. See Turkestan, Eastern Ecuador, boundary with Colombia-Peru, 578 Egypt, 30, 532, 540, 547; British rule, 58, 59, 60, 548; disorders, 58; Dual Control, 60; nationalist movement, 61, 535; new British policy, 61; population, 61; religious motive underlying disorders, 58; Senussi influence, 57; towns, deserts, and cataracts (map), 59 Ekaterinoslav, 40 El Kantara, 412 El Obeid, 64 Elbe River, 244, 245, 246 Elsenborn, 125 Emanuel, King of Portugal, 158 Emigration, Austria, 210–211; Hungary, 223; Italy, 136, 137 (map); Portugal, 157 . Indea: 613 Empires, causes of decay, 28 Empty Quarter, 66 English-speaking peoples, 12 Enos-Midia line, 296,297, 308 Epirus, northern, 324 Eritrea, 140, 557 Erivan, 452, 458 Erzerum, 458 Esthonia, 189, 362; area, population and internal affairs, 368; basis of new state, 365; international position, 369; treaty of Dorpat, with Russia, 366; treaty with Latvia, 366 Esthonian National Council, 362, 365 Esthonians, 378 Eupen, 124, 125 (map), 193 Euphrates River, 76, 313; lake and swamp areas of the valley (map), 73 Eurasia, railway lines (map), 377 Europe, belts of densest population con- verging on Belgium (map), 120; com— parison of theaters of war—Napoleonic and World Wars (map), 121; eastern, Germanization, 189; eastern, socialistic background of democratic and nation- alistic movements, 394; German- speaking people, distribution, 186, 187 (map); land seizure and division, 394; religions (map), 7; Slavs outside of Russia (map), 234. See also Central Europe Exarchist church, 317 Extraterritoriality, 512, 514 Fairs, 473; Russia, 391 Faizabad bazaar (ill.), 478-479 Famines, Finland, 371—372; India, 49, 50; India, area (map), 51; India, danger, 45; Russia, 384 Far East, American trade, 498; bibliogra- phy, 596; economic resources (map), 491; European relations, 490; Japanese ownership and influence (map), 494; racial factors, 492; raw materials, British interests, 490 Far-Eastern Democratic Republic of Si- beria, 395 Fashoda, 541, 558 Fear, as cause of war, 348 Feisal, Emir, 98; French opposition, 103 Ferdinand of Bulgaria, 434 Ferghana, 474 Ferrer, Francisco, 146 Fertile Crescent, 67 Feudalism, India, 47; Japan, 493 Fez, 154 Figs in Palestine, 422 Fiji, 200; labor problem, 531 Tinland, 173; Allies’ protection, 374; bibli- ography, 593; history, 374; outlook, 375; people, literature and folklore, 373; population, 371; population densities, 371; resources, 370; Swedish coloniza- tion (map), 375; territorial problem, 370; treaty of Dorpat, 370; water re- sources (with map), 372; Whites and Reds, 375 Finno-Ugrians, 249, 373 Finns, 371, 373, 378 Firdousi, 462 Fiume, 129, 132, 138, 255, 261; character of port (map), 264; D’Annunzio and, 268, 269; field of trade rivalry with Trieste (map), 265; Free State of (map), 270; Italian program and, 268; new boundaries in the region, between Italy and Jugo-Slavia (map), 270; water- front (ill.), 267 Fjord, Norwegian (ill.), 170 Flanders, waste of life, 119–120 Flemish-Walloon problem, 122 Flensburg, 176, 177 (ill.) Formosa, 490, 495, 522 France, African policy, 547, 548; Algeria and, 111; bibliography, 586; birth rate, 87; China and, 518; coal and iron problem, 89; colonial aims, 77; colonial relations, 91; colonies, distribution (map), 93; decentralization, 89; demo- bilization, 80; eastern border prob– lems, 80; economic problems, 87, 88; industries and mineral resources (map), 90; Italy and, 136; Luxemburg inter- ests, 89; Morocco and, 91, 105; move— ment of population 1901–1911 (map), 88; needs, 87; new states of Central Europe and, 87; Poland and, 87, 355; political aims, 77; ports, regulation, 88; readjustment and reorganization, 77; relief map, 79; shipping problem, 87; Syria and, 92; tripartite agreement in Near East in 1920 (map), 103; Tunis and, 114; value in Near East, 97; war costs, 78 Franco-British Agreement, 1920, terms, 601 614 The New World Frankfort, treaty of, 1871, signatories and terms, 600 Fredrikshamn, treaty of, 374 Free trade, 18; colonial opposition, 19 Freedom, 191; Hungary and her border states, 230. See also Independence; Nationalism; Self-government Freedom of the seas, 10; Holland and, 178; Norway and, 169 French Equatorial Africa, 535, 545, 553 French Guinea, 547 French Somaliland, 547 French West Africa, 547 Friction, 11; zones lengthened, 3 Frisians, 174 Frontiers. See Boundaries Fujiyama, 502 Fundāo, 156 Gabes, 118 Galatz, 294 Galicia, 206, 208, 209, 344, 353; Eastern and Western, 344; oil deposits, distri- bution (map), 345 Galicia, Eastern, 224, 240, 353; oil deposits, distribution (map), 345; oil interests, 344; Poles and Ukrainians, 343; Pol- ish dominance, 344; Polish tradi- tions, 343; treaty with Poland and final status, 345 Galilee, 422 Gallipoli, 412, 416 Gama, Wasco da, 158, 520, 539 Gambia, 533, 554 Game, African, wild, 550 Ganges valley, 48 Garine, 458 Gartok, 488 Gaza, 412 Gellivare, 168 Genghis Khan, 433, 477, 480 Genoa, 135 Geographical Review, ii Georgia, Republic of, 397, 398, 417, 434, 440, 450, 461; area, population, re- sources, 457; Azerbaijan treaty, 455; special features, 456; treaty with Soviet Russia, 457 Georgians, 378, 379, 453 German Confederation, possible revival, 203 German East Africa, 37, 199, 200, 532, 533, 541, 542, 543 (map); parts ceded to German East Africa (continued) • Belgium, 124, 125, 126 (map). See also Tanganyika Territory German New Guinea, 497 German Poland. See under Poland German Samoa, 201, 497 German Southwest Africa, 37, 198, 200, 541, 548; character, 543 Germanization, Baltic Provinces, 364, 368; Lithuania, 359; Poland, 336–337 Germans, Baltic Provinces, exploitation, 362, 364, 365, 382; distribution of German-speaking people, 186, 187 (nmap); eastern European centers, 187; exclusion from Germany, 191; in Czecho-Slovakia, 192; in Hungary, 222; in Poland, 192; in Russia, 382; in the Tyrol, 192; in the Ukraine, 382 Germany, African colonies, 541; African natives, ill-treatment, 548; Allied occu- pation, 205; Austrian coöperation, 187; bibliography, 589; birth rate, 87; broken spirit, 203; burdens of the new state, 202; colonies lost by the war, 197, 198; contests against Slavs about 1400, 190 (map), 191; culture, 203; democracy, 192, 204; democracy and liberation of subject people, 191; European losses in consequence of the war, list, 193; Euro- pean territory lost, summary, 196; former commerce, 186; former unity, basis, 203; inability to pay costs of war, 78; indemnity, 204–205; land division, 394; losses by districts, generalized view (map), 195; losses in China, 196, 197; Morocco and, 107, 108, 110; new con- stitution, 204; new orientation, 186; Pacific realm, 521; Pan-Germanism, 41.1; Persia and, 465; population distribution in 1895 (map), 197; Scandinavia and, 165; Shantung policy, 496, 518; trade limitations, 205; union with Austria forbidden, 192; union with Austria, possibilities, 214 Ghat, 106 Ghent, 122 Ghizin, 71 Gibraltar, 29, 147, 553 Gilead, 97,424 Goa, 158, 160, 520 Gobi Desert, 481 Godeffroy, J. C., 200 Gold Coast, 533, 540, 554, 555 Indea: 615 Golder, F. A., quoted on Poles, Lithuanians and Russians, 361 Goltz, Kolmar von der, 365 Gordon, General C. G., 60 Goritzia, 263, 264 Gouraud, General H. J. E., 100 Government, alien, 59 Government of India Bill, 53 Gradisca, 263 Gran Chaco, 576 Granada, 533 Gravosa, 266 Great Atlas Mountains, III Great Britain. See Britain Great Moguls, 480 Great powers, responsibilities, 2 Great Wall of China, 478, 480, 508 (map); at Nankow Pass (ill.), 483 Greece, 249; Allies and, 327; bibliography, 592; Bulgaria and, 305; claims at end of World War, 316; Constantinople and, 412, 414; Dodecanese and, 435; Greek world (map), 314; historical periods and rise to power, 313; Italy and, 144; Mace- donia and, 316; northern, typical land- scape (ill.), 319; outlook, 326 Greek history, 313 Greek Orthodox Church, 249, 282, 286, 382, 433 Greeks, as element of Turkey (map), 426; change in ethnic character, 314; quali- ties, 315 Greely, A. W., 174 Green Harbor, Spitsbergen, 171 Greenland, 174 Grenada, 150, 151 (ill.) Guam, 522, 523 Guano, 544, 566 Guatemala, boundary with Honduras, 579 Gustavus Adolphus, 167, 363 Gyangtse, 488 Hague Conference of 1907, 600 Haidar-Pasha, 440 Haiderabad, 47; tanks, 51, 52 (map) Haifa, 419, 429, 440 Haiti, 561, 564, 567, 569 Hama, 70, 102 Hamburg, 198, 200, 244 Hankow, 197 Hannorbar, 481 Hapsburgs, 221, 235; Belgium, 119 Harbin, 517 Harbors. See Ports Hatred, 236; Balkan peoples, 298, 305 Hauran, 422 Hawaii, 522,561; Japanese in, 524 Hay-Pauncefote treaty, 567 Hebron, 421 Hedin, Sven, 487 Hedjaz, 67, 103, 104, 441; importance, 70; King, 68 Heligoland, 552 Helsingfors, 371, 373 Henry III, of France, 356 Heraclea, 103, 434 Herero war, 200, 548 Herzegovina, 187, 207, 252, 425, 434; land problems, 274, 275 Hindenburg Colonization Plan, 365 Hindus, 47; in India (map), 45 Hodeidah, 71 Hokkaido, 504 Holdich, Sir Thomas H., 570 Holland, 119; Belgium and, 122, 123 (map); bibliography, 588; colonial power and policy, 176; disputes with Belgium, 178; districts wanted by Belgium (map), 123; foreign policy, 178; freedom of the seas and, 178; independence, 169; land reclamation, 178 (map), 179; World War and, 178. See also Dutch colonies Holstein, 174, 175 Holy Land. See Palestine Holy War, 54 Homs, 70, 102 Honduras, 567; boundary with Guatemala, 579 Hongkong, 490, 510 Hormuz, 68 Horthy, Admiral, 225 Household industries in Russia, 391, 393 (maps) Hovas, 486, 551 Hungarians. See Magyars Hungary, 189, 191, 206, 432; agriculture and industry, 226; Austria boundary, 215; bibliography, 590; Bolshevism, 224; boundaries and nationalities (map), 217; causes of distress, 219; cereal production in 1900 (map), 228; emigra- tion, 223; farm animals in 1910 (map), 229; German element, 222; Jugo- Slavian alliance, 230; new state, 216, 218; occupations by border states, 225; population densities (map), 218; pop- 616 The New World Hungary (continued) ulation growth (diagr.), 222; population growth in Rumanian (diagr.), 285; population movement in northern (map), 239; population movement in Rumanian (map), 284; population movement in southern (map), 252; population move- ment in west-central (map), 223; pro- ductions, 228; relief map, 219; Ruman- ian element, 222; Rumanian invasion in 1919, 291; Ruthenians, 224; subject races, 221; survival question, 219; war losses, 229 Huss, John, 235, 236 Hussein, Sherif, 68, 69, 103, 441 Ibn Saud, 67, 69 Iceland, 174 Idealism, 8; Japan's, 506 Idria, 137, 262 Ifni, 553 Illimani, Mt. (ill.), 575 Illiteracy, Italy, 138, 139 (map); Portugal, 156–157 Illyria, 262 Imbros, 321 * Imperialism, British, 28, 29, 30; Italy, 130; United States, and its effect on Latin Americans, 561 Independence, 29; Afghanistan, 484; Afri- can peoples, 532; Balkan States, 249; Belgium, 119; Bessarabia, 288; Bo- hemia, 238; Bulgaria, 295; Czecho- Slovakia, 232; Egypt, 61; Finland, 173; German subject peoples, 191; Greeks, 315; Holland, 169; India, northwestern frontier, 484; non-Magyar peoples in Hungary, 216; question of disorderly peoples, 484, 485; Syria, 97,98; Tibet, 489. See also Nationalism; Self-govern- ment India, 29, 30; administration (map), 49; Afghan raids on border, 484; anarchy and disorder, 44, 45; British rule, 44, 46, 47, 51; British rule, complaints of, 52, 53; caste, 47; establishment of English power, 43; famine area (map), 51; famines, 49, 50; feudatory states, 47; financial policy, 53; franchise, 53; Government of India Bill, 53; historical relations, 43; importance to British Empire (map), 20; independence move- ment on northwestern frontier, 484; India (continued) international problems, 43; irrigation, 50, 51; Japanese in, 495; Japanese trade, 498; justice, delays, 52; land tax, 52, 53; monsoon rains, 48, 50; population density (map), 48; Portuguese and, 158, 159, 160; racial and religious diver- sities, 46; rainfall area (map), 51; religions, 45 (map), 46; revised govern- ment, 53; rice and wheat distribution (map), 50; self-government, 48, 52, 53; South African relations, 39; taxation, 52, 53; village organization, 48; wheat and rice distribution (map), 50 India, road to, 55, 58, 70, 71, 72, 429–430, 465; Red Sea route and sea route, 520 Indian Ocean and Britain, 12, 24 Individualism, 8 Indo-China, 521 Indo-Scythian invasion, 477 Industrial revolution, 16 Inner Asia. See Asia, Inner Innsbruck, 211, 213 (ill.) Inquiry, Commission of, ii Insects in Africa, control, 538 Interlaken, view (ill.), 184 International African Assn., 541, 548–549 International agreements, value, 11 International problems, i Irak, 72 Iranians, 472, 479. See also Persia Ireland, 30; difficulties in settling the problem, 34; English attitude toward the question, 34; geographical situation in reference to England, 31; oppression, 30, 32; political development in reference to England, 31; population distribu- tion in 1911 (map), 32; regulation of trade and industry in England's in- terest, 32–33 Irish in America, 33 Irish Parliament, 33 Iron, French ore and German coal, 89; Lor- raine, 81, 82 (map); Luxemburg, 84; Siberia and Teschen (with map), 346; Sweden (map), 168; world production and consumption in 1913 (cartogram), 10 Iron Gate, 280 Irredentism, 134, 305; minorities as a source, 287; Transylvania, 283, 285 Irrigation, India, 50, 51; Mesopotamia possibilities, 72, 76; Moors in Spain, 148, 152; Punjab system, 51 Indea: 617 Islam. See Mohammedanism Ismail, 59 Isthmian canal, 567 Istria, 208, 259, 261, 263, 264, 269; eth- nography and boundaries (map), 262 Istrian peninsula, 259 Italians and Senussi, 57 Italy, 129; Batum and, 451; bibliography, 588; Britain and, 131; colonial, gains (map), 141; colonial interests, 140; emigration, 136, 137 (map); finances, 138; France and, 131, 136; fuel shortage, 136; illiteracy, 138, 139 (map); imperi- alistic program, 130; internal political and industrial problems, 136; Jugo- Slavia dispute, 259, 262; Libya (Tripoli) and, 142; mineral resources, 137; minor- ity Germans, 192; new boundaries in Fiume region (map), 270; peasants and land, 394; political indifference, 138; population density (map), 129; pro- gram and historical basis, 130, 135; promises made to, in 1915, 130; strikes, 137–138; terms on which she entered the war (London, 1915, treaty), 263; trade, 141; tripartite agreement in Near East in 1920 (map), 103; Turkish sphere of influence, 434; union of Italian peoples, 136; Adriatic, claim to, 261; Adriatic control, 270; Adriatic, east coast, claims, 259; Adriatic, east coast, settlement, 269; African territories, 106; Albania and, 144; ambitions for expansion in Europe, 130; armaments, 139; Asia Minor and, 144; Austria and, 130–131, 136 Ivory Coast, 547 Jade, 479 Jaluit, 526 Jamaica, 569; white control, 535 Jameson raid, 36 Japan, 490; Asiatic mainland and, 495; Australia and, 526; bibliography, 596; Britain and, 491; Britain's alliance with, 26; China, concessions in, 510; China, rights in, 497; Chinese Con- sortium and, 513; colonial outlets, need for, 502; former German Pacific col- onies, 202; future policy and relations, 505; gains from the Russo-Japanese War, 496; idealism, 506; Manchuria, control of, 517; manufactures, 505; Japan (continued) modernization, 493, 506; Pacific pos- sessions, 521, 522; Pacific realm and, 522; population density (map), 503; population pressure, 502; power in the Pacific and new relations to the West, 522; promises, 505–506; promises as to Shantung, 501, 502; Russian alliance in 1916, 496–497; Shantung, 498; shipping, 505; social and economic con- ditions, 503; territory and influence in the Far East (map), 494; trade ex- pansion in Asia, the Far East, and the Pacific, 495, 498; two modern wars, 495; United States and, 491; village and farms—typical scene (ill.), 504; World War gains, 497 Japanese, 492; as colonizers, 524; as tropical colonizers, 524; emigrating tendency, 492; failure at Peace Conference to secure racial equality, 493; in America and British Empire, 26, 27 Java, 176 Jerusalem, 412, 421; cosmopolitan charac- ter, 409 Jewish Pale, 360, 380, 381 (map), 420 Jews, characteristics, 381; devotion to trade, 421; Hungary, 220; isolation of colonies, 420; Lebanon, 100; Lithuania, 360; Palestine, 418; peculiar position, 420; Poland, 354; Rumania, 286; Russia, 380, 381 (map); Spain, 148; Syria, 98 Jiddah (ill.), 69 Jihad, 54 Joint control, 547 Judea, 97, 419, 421, 429 Jugo-Slavia, 218, 249, 318; Albanian trou- bles, 257; bibliography, 591; bounda- ries in Fiume region (map), 270; boun- dary problem, 253; centralization strug- gle, 259; commercial treaties, 274; ethnic elements on the boundary (map), 260; Hungarian alliance, 230; internal problems, 273; loans to, 275; mercury mines, 137; Montenegro differences, 256; official name, 249; political unity, 257; population density and boundaries (map), 250; railways (map), 266; re- gional differences, 258; Scutari interests (with maps), 270, 271; separatist ten- dencies, 258; settlement of dispute with 618 The New World Jugo-Slavia (continued) - Italy (with maps), 269, 270; Serbian dominance, 272; unity, 251 Jugo-Slavs, 130, 132, 207, 209; occupation of Hungary, 225–226 Jungfrau (ill.), 184 Justice in India, delays, 52 Kabul, outer wall (ill.), 486 Kaiser Wilhelm's Land, 201 Kalahari Desert, 544 Kalambaka (ill.), 319 Kalevala, 373 Kalgan, 481,482 Kalgoorlie, 528 Kantara, gorge of (ill.), 116 Karabagh, 455, 458 Karageorgevichs, 258 Karelia, 370 Karelians, 373 Karluk Mountains, 304 Karolyi, Michael, 225 Kars, 452, 458 Kars, province of, 450 Karst, 263 Kashgar, 477, 478, 482 Kasr-al-Kabir, 107 Katanga, copper, 127 Katar peninsula, 68 Kavala, port (ill.), 301 Kehl, 84 Kenitra, 110 Kenya Colony, 42, 141, 533, 542 Kerensky, Alexander, 387, 402 Kermanshah, 463 Khartum, 60, 62, 64, 65 Khedive, 59, 60 Kherson, 385 Khiva, 472, 474, 476 Khotan, 477 Khroumer, 116 Khuzistan, 463 Kiakta, 482, 483 Kiaochow, 197, 495, 497, 498, 501 (map), 518 Kiel canal, 174 Kiev, 334, 385, 390; Dnieper plain (ill.), 386 Kigoma, 125 Kilimanjaro, 542 Kilo, 128 Kindu, 128 Kionga triangle, 157 Kirghiz, 380, 472, 476, 478; military ser- vice, 473; Russian invasion, 473; steppe realm, 473 Kirk Kilisse, 296, 318, 327 Kitchener, General H. H., 60, 62, 558 Kivu, Lake, 125 Klagenfurt, 206, 226; plebiscite, plebiscite area (map), 211 Kokand, 474, 478 Kola, 373 Kolchak, Alexander, 403, 406 Kollár, Jan, 238 Kolozvār, 284 Konia, 429, 443 Kordofan, 62, 64 Korea, 517; control, 498, 500; Japan and, 495, 496, 498, 500, 506; population density (map), 503; terraced fields (ill.), 499 Koreans, 500 Koritsa, 310; part of town (ill.), 311 Kovno, 357 Koweit, 67 Kramer, Mr. (Czech leader), 240 Krasnovodsk, 475 Krassó-Szörény, 290 Kremlin, 383 (ill.) Kronstadt, 222 Kuban, the (region), 398, 451 Kublai Khan, 480 Kufra, 57 Kun, Bela, 225 Kurdistan, 74, 104, 440, 444, 445 (map), 465; British control, 448; treaty ar- rangements, 448 Kurds, 429; Christians and, 445; mountain homeland, 444; nomad and sedentary, 446; plundering habit, 446, 447; tribal organization, 448; Turkish government and, 444; typical costume (ill.), 447; village (ill.), 446 Kuria Muria Islands, 71 Kurile Islands, 404, 493, 522 Kutzo-Vlachs, 282 209; Labor, Australia, 529; Fiji, 531; new de- mands, 7; New Zealand, 531 Lagosta, 268, 269,271 Lama, 487 Land, Baltic Provinces, tenure, 362; Czecho- Slovakia, 248; India, taxation, 52, 53; Jugo-Slavia, 274; Poland, 353, 394; Rumania, 292; Russia, present tenure, Indea: 619 Land (continued) 394; Russian peasant and, 384; seizure in Russia, Poland, and other parts of Europe, 394 Landownership in Rhodesia, 41, 42 Lansing—Ishii agreement, 497, ii La Paz, 570, 574, 575 (ill.) La Plata estuary, 576, 578 (map) Lapps, 373 - ~- Latifundia, 138 Latin America, bibliography, 597; British and American interests, conflict, 26; British hold on trade (map), 20; decline, 563, 564; economic development a need of the United States, 564; Europe, tides of business and travel toward, 565; European trade, 565; opinions social and political, 563; opposition to United States policy of expansion, 561, 562; Spanish interests, 566–567; unfriendli- ness toward the United States, 567; United States and, 559; United States anxiety as to encroachments of rival powers, 564 Latvia, 189, 362; area, population, and in- ternal affairs, 368; basis of new state, 365; international position, 369; treaty with Esthonia, 366 Lausanne, treaty of, 1912, signatories and terms, 600 º League of Nations, 11; Africa and, 547; dominions and, 30; Japan and, 27 Lebanon, the, 100, 435 Leeward Islands, 569 Left Bank of the Rhine, 82, 83 Lemberg, 343 Lenci, 270 Lenin, Nikolai, 388, 389 Lens, 193 Leopold II, 541, 548, 549 Lepanto, 431 Lettish National Council, 362, 365 Lettland, 362, 363 Letts, 362, 378 Lhasa, 487, 488, 489 Liao-tung peninsula, 495, 496 Libau, 189, 369 Liberia, 532; American interests, 558; origin and character, 558 Libya, 57, 63, 106, 132, 434, 532; boundary, 131, 141; Italian interests, 142; trade, I43 Liechtenstein, 185 Lima, 570 Limburg, 123, 178 Liquor traffic in Africa, 549 Lisbon, 162, 164 Litani River, 422 Lithuania, 189, 194; anomalous political situation, 357; books and language, 359; character and interests of the people, 361; disputed boundaries, 360; eco- nomic basis, 359; ethnography and boundaries (map), 363; national senti- ment and educational movement, 358; Poland and, 328, 335; Polish union, 357, 358 (map); possible Baltic Con- federation, 361; Russian rule, 359; Teutonic Knights and, 357; unsettled status, 361 Lithuanians, 378 Little Atlas Mountains, lll Little Entente, 241 Liukiu Islands, 495 Livingstone, David, 160, 540 Livonia, 362 Livonian Knights, 362 Loanda, 161, 162, 540 Locusts, 64 Lodz, 349; British interests, 356 Loess, 470 London, treaty of, 1839, signatories and terms, 599 London, treaty of 1905, between Britain and Japan, 600. See also Anglo-Japan- ese alliance London, treaty of, 1913, 296, 307, 308; sig- natories and terms, 601 London, treaty of, 1915 (secret), 102, 103, 106, 129; Adriatic line and Italy, 131; Albania (with map), 308, 309; Italian terms, 263; line (maps), 260, 268; signatories and terms, 601 London Conference of March, 1921, 417 Lönnrot, Elias, 373 Lop Nor, 470, 478 Lopliks, 478 Lorraine, 80; mineral resources, 81. also Alsace-Lorraine Loubet, Émile, 580 Lourenzo Marquez, 38, 161, 164 Lower California, Japanese in, 492 Lübeck, 198 Lule Burgas, 296, 298 Lussin, 261, 269 Lutzelburg, Marne-Rhine canal at (ill.), 85 See 620 The New World Luxemburg, Belgian relations, 124; France and, 89; status, 84 Macao, 158, 490, 520, 539 Macdonald, General Sir J. R. L., 487 Macedonia, 433; boundaries, 316, 317 (map); ethnography—views of Ischerkoff and Cvijić (map), 317; present state of the question, 318; propaganda, region of, 316; Second Balkan War and, 317; transition region, 316 Madagascar, 547, 551, 553; trade in arms, 486 Madrid, 145, 147 Magellan, Fernando, 520 Magyars, 206, 210; in Transylvania, 283; oppression of other peoples, 216, 220, 222, 230; relations with subject races, 220; Turks and, 221 Mahdi, 60, 62; Golden Sword, 62 Mahomet, 474. See Mohammedanism Mahsuds, 44 Maidan-i-Naphtun, 468 Maimachen, 482 Makalla Sultanate, 72 Malay Archipelago, Dutch and, 176 Malay States, Japanese in, 495 Malaysia, 521 Malmédy, 124, 125 (map), 193 Malta, 29, 431 Manchuria, 496; Japan and, 505; Japan- ese control, 517; navigable river prob- lems, 518; New Towns, 512; railways, 516; Russia and China in, 517; strug- gle for, 516 Mandatary system, America, 458; France, 91; Palestine, 418; principle, 546–547; Transcaucasian peoples, 454; two theo- ries of British control of protected areas, 75 - Manganese, 385, 397, 398, 457 Manila, 492, 524 Mannheim Convention (1868), 84 Maps, changing with history, 5; value, ii Marash, 440 Marco Polo, 446 Mariannes, 202 Marienwerder, 194, 332, 339 Maritsa River, 304, 320 Marmara, 144 Marmara, Sea of, 320, 417 Marne-Rhine canal at Lutzelburg (ill.), 85 Maronites, 92, 100 Marseilles, 94 Marshall Islands, 202, 497, 506, 522, 523; Japanese and, 526 Martel, Charles, 149 Masaryk, T. G., 234 Maskat, 70, 485 Massowah, 140, 557 Mazuria, 345, 346 Mazurian lakes, 342 Mazurians, 194 Mecca, 54, 68, 415; pilgrimages, 70 Medina, 70 Mediterranean region, British shipping, 416. See also Near East Mehemet Ali, 59 Memel, 166, 189, 192, 194, 357 Menado, 524 Menelik II of Abyssinia, 140 Merchant marine. See Shipping Mercury, 137 Merv, 475 Mesopotamia, 67, 70, 71, 429, 434, 449; boundary with Syria (map), 424; drain- age, population, and boundaries (map), 73; irrigation possibilities, 72, 76; Kur- dish village (ill.), 446; Kurds and, 444; oil resources, 72, 74 Mesopotamian piedmont (map), 95 Mesta, 152 Metkovic, 266 Mexico, disorder and effect on the United States, 568; German arms in, 486; Per- shing's expedition, 567 Mickiewicz, Adam, 356; quoted on the Niemen River, 360 Midia, 296 Militarism, Czecho-Slovakia, 240; Japan, 506; Poland, 348 Military autocracy, 203 Military service, Japan, 493; Kirghiz, 473 Milner mission to Egypt, 61 Minerals, production of 30 commodities in 1913 (map), 9; world distribution of iron, coal, and oil in 1913 (cartogram), 10 Minorities, Jugo-Slavia, 275; Turkey, 442 Minorities treaties, 275, 305; Rumania and the Jews, 287 Minority rights, 193 Mixed zones, 5 Moab, 97,424 Mogador, 110 Moguls, 480 Mohammed W, 433 Indea: 621 Mohammedanism, Afghanistan, 483; Africa, 534; Albania, 309; Arabia, 67; Brit- ain and, 54, 55, 57; confraternities, origin and aims, 56; Constantinople and, 414–415, 441–442; Eastern Turkestan, 478; Egypt, 58; holy cities, 70; India, 43, 44, 45 (map), 47; Italians and, 144; negroes and, 54, 56, 534; opposition to Zionism, 98, 100; political force, 6, 54; Russia and, 378–379; Spain, 149; Tur- kestan peoples, 476; world of (map), 55 Moldavia, 278, 280 Mongolia, 470, 477; caravan routes, 482; China and, 480; extent, 481; Japan and, 505; population, 481; trade with Russia, 482; transportation, 481 (ill.), 482 Mongols, 404, 476; basis of conquest, 472; Eastern Turkestan and, 479; plunder- ing, 480 Monroe Doctrine, 26, 559, 562, 564 Monsoons in India, 48, 50 Montenegro, 226, 249, 250, 251, 255, 284, 298; Jugo-Slav differences, 256; land- scape, typical (ill.), 256 Montevideo, 578 Moors, 107, 145, 146, 534; composition, 150; expulsion from Spain, 148; Spanish reconquests from (map) 150 Moravia, 243, 244, 245, 246 Moravians and Czechs, 243 Moresnet, 124, 125 (map), 193 Morocco, 532, 535, 540, 553; agriculture, 110, 112 (ills.); France and, 91, 105; French progress in administration, etc., 110; French progress in occupation (map), 108; French status at present, 107; new international agreements, 108; sketch map, 109; Spain and, 152; Span- ish defeat in, 146; Spanish Zone (map), 155; Spanish Zone, value, 154; Sul- tans, 107, 110; three districts, 105; trade in arms, 486 Morro de Arica (ill.), 576 Moscow, 480; heart of city, with Kremlin (ill.), 383 Moslems. See Mohammedans Mosul, 72, 102, 103, 104, 429 Mozambique, 158, 160, 161, 164, 533, 541 Mulai Hafid, 106 Murman coast, 172, 398, 410 Murman railway, 370 Nagasaki, 490, 493 Nagy Várad, 284 Nanking, treaty of, 510 Nankow Pass, Great Wall at (ill.), 483 Nansen, Fridtjof, 405 Napo River, 578 Napoleon and Poland, 356 Napoleonic Wars, regions fought over compared with those of World War (map), 121 Narova River, 367 Natal, 39, 40 t Nationalism, Africans, 532; Balkans, 251, 252; central and eastern Europe, so- cialistic background, 394; Bulgaria, 295; Egypt, 58; Hungary, 216; Ire- land, 32, 33; Jews, 354, 355; Lithuania, 358; South Africa, 40, 43; Spain, 151; Turkey, 69, 440, 461 Native rights, British treatment, 41 Nauru, 202, 521; phosphates, 530 Naval strength, 12, 14 Nazareth (ill.), 423 Near East, 58; Britain and, 55; Britain's growth in, 12; British and French policies, 415; British trade in, 415, 416; France, 97; Germany and, 411; in- fluence on civilization, 462; Soviet Russia and Turkey, 461; territorial changes due to the war (map), 6; tri- partite agreement of 1920 (map), 103 Neffet, II8 Nefzaoua, 118 Negeb, 421 Negroes, Africa, 533; Mohammedanism and, 54, 56, 534; settlement of American negroes in Africa, 558 Nejd, 66; Southern (map), 67 Netherlands, Kingdom of, 119 Neufahrwasser, 338 Neuilly, treaty of, 1919, Bulgaria, 300, 303, 304; signatories and terms, 601 New Britain Archipelago, 201 New Caledonia, 529 New Guinea, German occupation, 201 New Hebrides, 529, 547 New world, character, 1; major problems, 1; problems enumerated, 2 New Zealand, 29, 201, 520; immigration question, 531; Japanese in, 495; Japan- ese trade, 498; Samoan mandate, 530 Newfoundland, 29 622 The New World Nicaragua, 561, 564, 567 Niemen River, 194, 357, 359; as Lithuanian frontier, 360 Nigeria, 41, 42, 533, 544, 545, 547, 554; palm oil, 555 Nijni Novgorod, 391, 392 (ill.), 480 Nile River and Delta (map), 61 Nilotic peoples, 533 Nish, 304 Nisibin, 412 Nitrate, Chile production, 573; Chilean fields and boundary dispute (with map), 572 Nomads, Arabia, 66, 67; Arabs of the des- ert, 104; Inner Asia, 470; Kirghiz, 473; Kurds, 444; Libya, 142; Mongols, 480; movements in Asia, 471; Ru- mania, 282; Syrian desert, 97; Tunis, 116, 118 Northmen, 167 Norway, 165; maritime interests, 169; separation from Sweden, 169; Spitz- bergen and, 170, 172 (map) Nova Zembla, Samoyeds (ill.), 408 Novi Bazar, 298 Nuba tribes, 62, 64, 65 Nyasaland, 533 Oases, Algerian, gorge of Kantara (ill.), 116; Eastern Turkestan, 478; Libya, 142 e Odessa, 385, 480; French at, 451; part of harbor (ill.), 401 Oil (petroleum), Alsace, 81, 82; Baku, 385, 397, 398; Eastern Galicia, 344; France's need, 103, 104; Italy and, 136; Mesopotamia resources, 72, 74; Persia, 464; Persia, and British interests, 466, 467, 468; world production and con- sumption in 1913 (cartogram), 10 Oil, lubricating, 555 Oil, vegetable, 542 Okhrida, 298, 310 Olives in Palestine, 422 Olonetz, 370 Oman, 67, 70 Omar Khayyam, 462 Omdurman, 60, 62, 549, 558 Omsk, 472 “Open Door,” 497, 510, 513; Manchuria and, 517 Opium in China, 507 Opium War, 510 Oporto, 156 Oppression, 191; Czechs in Austria, 235; Magyar rule in Hungary, 216, 220, 222, 230; Magyars and Rumanians in Transylvania, 283, 284 (map); oppressed as oppressors (Rumania), 291; Slovaks, 244; tropical peoples, by progressive, 564–565; Turkish policy, 430 Orawa, 206, 347, 349 (map) Orient, American trade interests, 491. See also Far East Orlando, Vittorio, 268 Ottoman Empire. See Turkey Ottoman Public Debt, 417, 437 Ottoman Turks, 431 Ouerten, 116 Overghemma, 118 Pacific, War of the, 1879–84, 573 Pacific cable, 524 Pacific realm, 520; America and Japan in, 522; Britain's power, 521; former Ger- man interests, 200; Germany and France in, 521; islands and European influ- ence, 490; Japanese and American trade expansion, 498; political geography, changes, 520; political map in 1914, 521; strategic importance, 524; trade value, 524 Paderewski, I.J., 331, 332 Pagopago, 201, 522 Palacky, F., 238 Palestine, 70, 71,418, 434; agricultural pos- sibilities, 421; bibliography, 595; British control, 418; French interests, 94; Jew- ish colonies in, 4.19; Jews few, 418; spir- itual influence, 420; Syria and, 98; water supply, 422; world relations, 419 Palm oil, 542; West Africa, 555 Pan American Union, 562 Pan-Germanism, 411 Pan-Islamism, 432, 433,474 Pan-Turanian movement, 474, 476 Panama, boundary with Costa Rica, 580; Costa Rica treaty in 1905, 580 Panama Canal, 581 Panama Canal Zone, 523, 564, 567; United States and, 580 Panther (ship), 107 Paper money, 79 Paraguay, 576; boundary with Bolivia, 576 Paris, relation to France, 90 Indea: 623 Paris, first treaty of, 1814, signatories and terms, 599 Paris, second treaty of, 1815, signatories and terms, 599 Paris, treaty of, 1856, signatories and terms, 599 Paris, treaty of, 1898, signatories and terms, 600 Peace treaties, confusion as to objects, 10 Peary, R. E., 174 º Peasant industries in Russia, 391,393 (maps) Peasants as steadying force in eastern and central Europe, 394–395 Pechelbronn, 81, 82 Pechenga region, 370, 371, 373 Pécs, 225, 226 Peipus, Lake, 367 Peking, 197, 482, 495, 514; Japan and, 498 Pelagosa Islands, 269, 271 Pelew Islands, 202 Pemba, 552 Perim, 72, 556 Peroffsky, General B. A., 474 Perry, Commodore M. C., 493 Pershing, General J. J., 567 Persia, 12, 24, 72, 74, 440; American posi- tion in regard to, 469; bibliography, 595; Bolshevists and, 461, 466; boundaries at present (map), 463; British interests and, 462; British progress (map), 467; European interference, 465; Kurds and, 444; land and people, 462; mixture of races, 463; oil interests, 466, 467, 468; population, 463; population density (map), 464; railways as focus of rivalry, 465; Russian and British spheres as settled in 1907, 465, 466; stronger gov- ernment needed, 469 Persian Azerbaijan, 464 Persian Empire in 500 B. C. (map), 463 Persian Gulf, 71, 72, 252; German designs on, 411; Russian designs on, 398, 465; transit lands from the Mediterranean (map), 95 Peru, boundary with Bolivia, 577; boun- dary with Chile, 572, 573; boundary with Colombia-Ecuador, 578; British interests, 566; race mixture, 563; United States interests and relations, 566, 567 Peruvian Corporation, 566 Pescadores Islands, 495 Peshawar, treaty of, 484 Pest. See Budapest Petlura, Simon, 389, 402 Petroleum. See Oil Philippines, 520, 522, 523; Japanese in, 524; Japanese trade, 498; United States con- trol, 548; United States trade, 492, 498 Philippopolis, 295 Phoenicians, 313 Phosphate, 524; Mauru, 530 Pilcomayo River, 576 Pilsudski, Joseph, 331, 332 Pinsk, 351 Pinto, F. M., 520 Piracy, Dutch East Indies, 178; Gulf, 72 Pirate Coast, 68 Pirates, Barbary, 113 Plata. See Rio de la Plata Platinum, 385 Platt Amendment, 564 Plebiscites, Dalmatia in 1919, 268; Klagen- furt, 209, 211 (map); Polish areas, 345; Saar district, 193; Silesia, 345, 346; Slesvig, 175, 176 Pogroms, 420 Pola, 207, 261 Poland, 328; ambitious program, 331; anti-Russian feeling, 336; area, 353; army, 348; as buffer state, 189; Aus- trian Poland, 351, 353; bibliography, 592; boundary complications (map), 350; Britain and, 356; British and French interests antagonistic, 356; com- plex problems, 329; Congress Poland, 192, 351, 353; corridor, 336; corridor, ethnography (map), 339; corridor, rail- ways (map), 340; credit, need of, 349; Czecho-Slovakia and, 346; Danzig and, provisions of economic agreement, 343; decline and partition, 328; devastation, 350; eastern boundary, 334, 335, 350 (map); ethnography and border zones (map), 332; extent, early, 328; extent in 1648 (map), 329; extent in 1740 (map), 330; France and, 87, 355; Ger- man losses in, 194; German officials, proportion (map), 338; German Poland, 351, 353; Germanization, 336–337; industries, 349, 352 (map); Jewish pop- ulation, 354; Jugo-Slavia and, 274; land situation, 353, 394; Lithuania and, 335, 357, 358 (map); militarism and frontier problems, 348; minorities treaty with Allied and Associated Persian 624 The New World Poland (continued) Powers, 355; new republic, organization, 331; new State, and Germans in it, 192; partitions, and evil results, 328; par- titions (map), 330; peasants and land, 394; plebiscite areas, 345; population, annual increase (map), 353; population density (map), 333; population dis- placement, 350; pro-Russian policy and its basis, 336; Russia and, 333; Russian Poland, 351; Russian Poland, Jews, 381; Russian Poland, production and emi- gration, 352; Soviet attack, 1920, 334; Teschen and, 346; three unlike sections, 351; wealth, 348, 349 Poles, 192; attitude toward Russia, 378; Czechs and, 240 Polish books, collections, 356 Political conditions, i Pomaks, 250 Population, pressure of unequal densities, 502; world (map), 525 Port Arthur, 495, 496, 498, 500, 516, 517 Port Jackson, N. S. W., harbor (ill.), 529 Port Said, Suez Canal entrance at (ill.), 60 Porto Re, 266 Porto Rico, 569 Ports, Czecho-Slovakia, 244, 245; Copen- hagen, 173; Danzig, 166, 194, 337, 341 (map), 342 (ill.); Finland, 370; Fiume (map), 264; France, control, 88; Greek, 304; international, 440; Kavala (ill.), 301; Riga, 366 (ill.), 369; Smyrna, 322; Sydney, N. S. W. (ill.), 529; treaty ports, China, 510; Trieste (ill.), 130–131 Portsmouth, treaty of, 496 Portugal, 107, 147, 552; African policies, 552; bibliography, 588; colonial poli- cies, 156, 161; “colonial self-govern- ment,” 164; colonization, history, 158; democratic tendencies and problems, 156; emigration, 157; expansion, present possessions, 157–158; India and, 158, 159, 160; World War and, 157 Portuguese, African exploration, 539 Portuguese East Africa, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 532 Portuguese Guinea, 158 Portuguese West Africa, 158, 160, 162 Posen, 194, 351, 353 Potash, 557 Prague, 236, 245, 246 Prague, treaty of, 1866, signatories and terms, 599 Preface, i Preferential tariffs, 18 Pressburg, 245 Princes (Principe) Island, 158, 162 Prizren, 257, 310 Problems, local, 7; major, 1; present form, 7; wide extent, 559 Proletariat, 388 Prussia, 203; Slesvig and, 175 Prussia, East, 194, 359, 360 Przemysl, 351 Pskov, 367 Pskov, Lake, 367 Punjab, 484; system of irrigation, 51 Purcell, Miss M. A., ii Putumayo River, 578 Pyrenees, 149, 150 Queensland sugar plantation (ill.), 527 Race, Australian problem (with map), 525; equality, 493,506; Far Eastern problems, 492; Latin American mixture, 563; South African problem, 525; yellow race in tropics (map), 526 Radicalism, German Spartacists, 202, 203; Spain, 145 Ragusa, 266 Rainfall, Australia (with map), 528; India, area (map), 51; Inner Asia (map), 472 Rapallo, treaty of, 1920, 129, 257, 269, 270; signatories and terms, 601 Raw materials, British Empire in 1914, 14, 15; struggle for, 532. See also Com- modities; Minerals Red Sea, 520, 555, 557 Religion, Balkans, 249; European religions (map), 7; in Irish question, 31; Jugo- Slavia, 258; Magyars and Rumanians, 285; political force, 5 Religious wars, Bohemia, 235 Reparations, German, 204–205 Reservoirs in India, 50, 51, 52 (map) Responsibilities, 2 Reval, 367 Revenge, 236 Rheims cathedral, 3 Rhine River, Left Bank as a buffer state, 82; navigation control, 84; Switzerland and navigation, 181, 183; traffic, 196 Rhineland, 82, 83; Allied occupation, 83, 84 Indea: 625 Rhodes, 132, 141, 144, 321,417,435; Cyprus and, 326 Rhodesia, 41, 537; Northern, 533 Rice in India, distribution (map), 50 Rieka Valley (ill.), 256 Riga, I66, 189; harbor, part (ill.), 366; importance as port, 369 Riga, treaty of, 1920, 335, 390; Esthonia and Latvia, 366; signatories and terms, 601 Rights, minority, 193; principle, 41 Rinderpest, 539 Rio de Janeiro, 159 Rio de la Plata, 576; estuary (map), 578 Rio de Oro, 152, 154 Rio Salado, battle of, 150 Riyadh, 66 Roads in Inner Asia, 482 Roman Catholic Church in Syria, 100 Rome, cosmopolitan character, 409 Roosevelt, Theodore, 496 Rotterdam, 123, 179 (with ill.) Ruanda, 124, 125, 126 (map), 542 Rubber in Cameroons, 544 Rubesi, 270 Ruman language, 282 Rumania, 204, 218, 249; Banat of Temesvár, 273, 290; bibliography, 592; Bolshe- vism, 292,294; border regions, 287; boun- daries, 281 (map), 284; Bulgaria and,280; economic assets, 293; ethnography of the region (map), 279; France and, 87; French and Russian influence, 280; inva- sion of Hungary in 1919, 291; Jews, 286; land problems, 292; Macedonia and, 316; occupation of Hungary, 225; origin of the state, 278; people, racial elements, 282; people of the homeland, 278; population density and boundaries (map), 293; present conditions, 292; Turks and, 278 Rumanian Hungary, population growth (diagr.), 285; population movement (map), 284 Rumanians, 206, 216, 221, 282; in Hungary, 222; in Transylvania, 283 Rumelia, 295 Russia, agriculture, low state, 386; Allied policy, 390, 391; Asia, advance into, 474; Asiatic designs, 398; autocratic government, 385; background of present disorder, 384; Baltic ports, 370; Baltic natives, British Russia (continued) Provinces exploitation, 362, 363, 364; bibliography, 593; blockage, 390; Bol- shevist régime, 387; borderland peoples, attitude, 378; break-up, 376; Britain and, 55, 56; cereal supply (4 grains) in 1913 (map), 400; China, trade with, 482; Chinese conflict, 478; coal and iron, 401; concessions in China, 510; coöperative Societies, 397; Czecho-Slovakia and, 239; danger of absorbing other peoples and lands, 376; disorganization, 431; Duma, 385; Eastern Turkestan and, 480; economic resources of the Empire as of 1914 (map), 407; economic situa- tion, 391; Esthonia and, treaty of Dorpat, 366; ethnic groups, 378, 379 (table); ethnography and larger natural regions (map), 380; exploration period, 404; fairs, 391; famines, 384; Finland and, 374; German colonies, 382; Ger- man penetration, 187, 188 (map); Germany and, 204; government, present name, 387; groups that have broken away—table of statistics, 395; indus- trial development, 391; industrial mid- dle class, 385–386; internationalist movement, 7; Japanese alliance in 1916, 496–497; Japanese war in 1904–05, 495; Jews, 380, 381 (map); Korea and, 500; land tenure, 384; land tenure, present phases, 394; Lithuania and, 359; natural regions (larger) and ethnography (map), 380; nobility, 382; old régime, 382, 387; peasant and land, 387; peasant charac- ter, 388; peasant class, 382; peasant in- dustries, 391, 393 (maps); Persia and, 465; Poland and, 333; population density (map), 396; railways, 385, 393; reconstruction, 384; revolution of 1905, 384; rights in eastern Asia, 516; serfs, 384; Soviet industrial régime, 388; Soviet treaties (1920) with former parts of the Empire, list, 602; Sweden and, 173; threefold war in 1919–20, 389; Transcaucasia and, 451; transportation, 392; Turkish sphere of influence, 434; waterways, 392; wheat and rye, culti- vated and arable lands in 1910 (map), 399 Russian Poland. See under Poland Russian Socialist Federal Soviet Republic, 387 626 The New World , Ruthenians, 221, 240; Russian Turkestan, 474; Eastern Turkestan and, 479; ethnography (with map), 476; land classification (map), 475; physical features, 475; population - densities (map), 474 * Russians, adaptability, 403; Kirghiz and, 473 Russification, Baltic Provinces, 364; Fin- land, 374 g Russo-Japanese War, 495, 496, 497 in Eastern Galicia, 343, 344; in Hungary, 224; in Poland, 351 Saar district, 81, 193; future plebiscite, 86; in the treaty of Versailles (map), 86; international status, 84; map, 83; tem- porary control, 86 Safarik, P. J., 238 Sahara, Algerian, 111; Arabs, 533; dis- orders, 535; French, sand dune belt (ill.), 117; French development, 551, 553; Libyan, 143; Mohammedanism in, 56 Saima canal, 372 St. Germain-en-Laye, treaty of, 1919, 134, 181, 207; principal terms, 214–215; signatories and terms, 601 St. Gotthard railway system, 183 St. Helena, 540 St. Thomas (São Thomé) Island, 158, 162 Sakhalin, 493, 494 (map), 496 Salamanca, 145 Salisbury, Rhodesia, 537 Saloniki, 251, 256, 257, 296, 298, 327 Salt in Inner Asia, 470 Salvador, 581 Samaria, 419 Samarkand, 474, 475, 476 Samoa, 521, 522, 523, 547; condominium, 201; international rivalries, 200; New Zealand mandate, 530 Samoyeds in Nova Zembla (ill.), 408 San Francisco, Japanese steamers, 495 San Stefano, treaty of, 1878, signatories and terms, 600 Sanaa, 71 Sand in Inner Asia, 470 Sand dunes. See Dunes Sanders, General Liman von, 412 Santa Cruz, 201 Santo Domingo, 564, 567, 569 São Paulo, Japanese in, 492 Saragossa, 145 Sarts, 476 Saseno, 144 Savaii, 201, 530 Scala Nuova, 132, 144 Scandinavia, bibliography, 588; commercial importance, 167; geographical position, 167; German reconstruction and, 174; inhabitants (map), 166; neutrality, 165; present problems, 169; traditions of power, 165, 167. See also Denmark; Norway; Sweden Scheldt River, 123, 124, 178, 179 Schneidemühl, 191, 194 Scutari, 311; Jugo-Slavia's interest in the region (map), 271; problem of the re- gion, 270 Scutari, Lake, 255, 257, 310; drainage relations in the region (map), 271; problem area, 306; rival claims about (map), 271 Sea, 559 Sea power, British, 24 Seattle, Japanese steamers, 495 Sebenico, 266 Self-determination, 10; Africans, 532 Self-government, 28; Baltic Provinces, 362; India, 48, 52, 53; Kurds, 447; Russia, 382; Siberia, 406 Selim I, 431 Seljuk Turks, 431 Senegal, 547 Senussi, 55, 534, 549, 551; Libya, 142–143; political force, stronghold, 57 Sepoy Rebellion, 43 Serbia, 249, 317, 318; Austria and, 308; Banat of Temesvár, 272, 273, 290; Bulgaria and, 302; Jugo-Slav state and, 251, 272; Macedonia and, 316; race, 249; special problems, 276 Serbs, 216, 221; Albanians and, 257 Serbs, Croats, and Slovenes, Kingdom of. See Jugo-Slavia Serfs in Russia, 384 Seville, 150 Sèvres, treaty of, 1920, ii, 61, 113, 144, 416, 435, 436, 437, 438, 439, 441; Pales- time, 418; regulation of Straits, 417; signatories and terms, 601 Shanghai, customs conference, 516 Shantung, 197, 498, 501 (map); Chinese and Japanese interests, conflict, 500; Germany and, 496; German policy in, Indea: 627 Shantung (continued) 518; Japan and, 505; Japanese control, 498 Shari River, 65 Shat, 111 Shatt el Arab, 74, 468 Sheikh Said, 71, 72, 556 Sheikhs in Tunis, 114 Shimonoseki, treaty of, 495 Shipping, British, 16; British losses in the war, 24, 25; French, 87; German losses by the Versailles treaty, 196; routes of the world (map), 17 Siam, French and British spheres of influ- ence (map), 518; Japanese in, 495 Siberia, 382, 471, 473; Arctic route to, 405; area and difficulty of control, 408; colonists, exiles, and prisoners, 404; early Russian conquests, 403; Far- Eastern Democratic Republic, 395; Japanese trade, 498; Japan's hold, 504; local self-government, 406; political break-up in 1917, 405; republic in, 406, 516; Russian colonists emigrating to (ill.), 405; Russian settlements in, 404, 406 (map); transportation, 404; tribes, 378; widely separated communities, 397 Sicily, 137, 138 Sierra Leone, 533, 554 Sikkim, 487 Silesia, 193, 231, 332; British and French interests, clash, 356; coal and iron de- posits and railways (map), 346; na- tionalities (map), 347; plebiscite, 345, 346 Silk industry in Syria, 94, 97 Simla, Tibetan affairs arranged in 1914, 489 Singapore, 490, 492; importance to Bri- tain, 24, 25 (map) Siwa, 57 Slave trade, 161; Africa, 549; northern Africa, 142 Slavic language, 249 Slavs, 210; European, outside of Russia (map), 234; German contests against, about 1400, 190 (map), 191; Northern Slavs, 243; peninsula of Czecho-Slovak- ia, 231; Southern Slavs, 249; union of, 251. See also Jugo-Slavia; Jugo-Slavs Sieeping sickness, 538, 539 (map), 546 Slesvig, 174, 187, 194; Germanization, 175; language boundaries (map), 175 Slovakia, 242; land and people, 244; Mag- yarization (map), 239; products, 246 Slovaks, 221, 242; oppression, 244 Slovenes, 209, 216, 258, 260, 264 Smuts, J. C., 29; party and principles, 40 Smyrna, 144, 327,435, 440; as a port, 322; British and French policies, 415; Greek and Italian clashes, 321–322; Greek claims in the region (maps), 314, 322; Greek control, terms, 324; Greeks of, 321; new boundaries (map), 322; region, 442; trade, 415, 416; view from Mt. Pagos (ill.), 323 Sobieski, John, 221,425 Socialism, basis of democratic and nation- alistic movements in central and eastern Europe, 394; Switzerland, 184 Sofala, 159, 540 Sofia, 300, 304 Sokotra Island, 72 Solomon Islands, 201, 530 Somaliland, 72, 555, 556; Italian, 140; three political divisions, 556 Sonnino, Baron Sidney, 268 Souassi, 116 South Africa, 29, 30; Boers, 35, 36; de- velopment of resources, 40; English beginnings, 35; nationalism, 532; ob- jects of present government, 40; poli- tical divisions and plant regions (map), 37; problem of the Asiatics, 39; prob- lems of government, 35; problems of race, 38, 525; rivalries of unlike peo- ples, 535; separatist tendencies, 37 South Africa, Union of, 543 South America, British and United States trade competition, 565; frontier zones of friction, 570, 571 (map); United States business interests, growth, 566. See also Latin America South Manchuria Railway, 517 Soviet Russia. See Russia Spain, African possessions (map), 153; Arab invasion, 533; arid and humid regions (map), 149; bibliography, 588; Catholic Syndicates, 154; church and state, 147; decline in character and loss of empire, 152; democratic drift, 145; disorders, 145; France and, 154; labor and the government, 153; language boundaries, 151, 152 (map); Latin American interests, 566–567; Moorish expulsion, 148; Morocco and, 105, 108, 628 The New World Spain (continued) 146, 154; natural divisions, 148; poli- tical and economic situation, 152; pro- French Spaniards, 154; radicalism, 145; separatist tendencies, 147; small states, 153; trade and prosperity, 155; United States relations, 155; World War and, 147, 153–154 Spalato, 264, 266, 268 Spanish America, 155 Spanish-American War, 152 Spanish Guinea, 152 Spanish Zone, 553 Spartacists, 202, 203 Spits, 206, 347, 349 (map) Spitsbergen, Norway and, 170, 172 (map); status, 172 - Stanley, H. M., 540, 548 Stanleyville, 128 Stassfurt, 81 Steppes, 471, 473 Storck, John, ii Straits, Zone of the, 409, 413 (map), 417; treaty provisions, 417 Strasbourg, 84, 196 Strumitsa, 255, 298, 302, 304; salient, 318 Submarines, 24, 196, 202, 525, 570 Sudan, 60, 61; Arabs, 533, 549; Islamism, 534. See also Anglo-Egyptian Sudan Suez, Isthmus of, 520 Suez Canal, 55, 58, 59, 60, 61, 409, 430, 555; entrance at Port Said (ill.), 60 Sufjord (ill.), 170 Sugar plantation in North Queensland (ill.), 527 Suleiman, 431 Sulphur in Italy, 137 Sultan, 414, 415, 425, 441 Sungari River, 518 Sunni, 444 Sušak, 26.1, 264 (map), 265, 270 Suva, 531 Suvla Bay, 416 Suwalki region, 336, 360 Swaziland, 43 Sweden, 165; Baltic Provinces and, 363; foreign problems, 173; greatest extent (map), 167; Russia and, 173; separa- tion from Norway, 169; water power, iron ore, and forests (maps), 168 Swedes, colonization in Finland (map), 375; Finland and, 374. Switzerland, as refuge and international country, 184; Austrian western pro- vinces and (map), 185; bibliography, 589; frontier questions, 185; German and Italian pressure, 181; landscape, typical (ill.), 184; languages, 181, 182 (map); political tendencies, 184; popu- lation density (map), 182; railway, and territorial problems, 181; railways (map), 182; resources, 181 Sydney, N. S. W., harbor (ill.), 529 Sykes–Picot Agreement, 1916, 100, 102, 103; signatories and terms, 601 Sykes–Picot line, 70 Syria, 67, 69, 70, 71, 419, 429; as transit land (map), 95; boundary with Meso- potamia (map), 424; British troops in, 100, 102; desert and Arabs (ill.), 430; France and, 91; French' position, 102– 103; French principalities after the Crusades (map), 97; historical impor- tance, 92; independence, 97, 98; King, 98; population density (map), 96; racial mixtures, 92; relief map, 99; united, possibilities, 104 Syrian Saddle (map), 95 Syrians, 429; deportations and massacres, 459 Szeged, 227 Szeklers, 218, 222, 250, 292 Table Bay, 540 Tabriz, 463, 480 Tacna-Arica boundary dispute (with map) 572 Tacna-Arica district (map), 574 Taigă, 405 Taiping Rebellion, 514 Takla-Makan, 470 Tamerlane, 477, 480 Tanganyika, Lake, 125, 126 Tanganyika Territory, 125, 126 (map), 532, 543 (map); country and people, 542 Tangier, 154,547, 553; status, 105 Tanks in India, 50, 51, 52 (map) Tarapacá, 572, 574 (map) Tariffs, preferential, 18 Tarim River, 477 Tarvis, 269 Tashkent, 474, 478 Tatars, 380 Tatars of Azerbaijan, 380, 397, 434, 450, Indea: 629 Tatars of Azerbaijan (continued) 453; Armenian and Georgian treaties, 455; republic, 460 Taurus Mountains, 412, 442 Taxation, France, 80; India, land, 52, 53; Spain, 151 - Tchad, Lake, 143, 541, 551, 553 Tea, 404, 482 Teheran, 465; gate (ill.), 462; landscape near (ill.), 466 Telavio, 419 Tell, the, in Algeria, 111, 115 Temes, 290 Temesvár, 255, 272, 273, 284. Banat Tenedos, 321 Terraces in Korea (ill.), 499 Territory, changes due to the war (map), 6; conflicting claims in central Europe (map), 4; modern importance of dis- tant, 135 Teschen, 206, 231, 239, 243; coal and iron deposits and railroads (map), 346; nationalities (map), 347; region (map), 348; territorial division (map), 349 Teutonic Knights, 362; Lithuania and, 357 Thessalian plain (ill.), 319 Thorn, 392 Thrace, 416; ethnic conditions in eastern (map), 413; Greek acquisition, 320; Greeks in, 318; restrictions and obliga- tions of Greece, 320 Tibesti, 551; region, 57 Tibet, 470; area, 486; British interests; expedition to Lhasa, 487; British pro- tection, 489; frontier, definite, needed, 489; Outer and Inner, 489; treaty, 488 Tibetans, carrying merchandise (ill.), 488; hostility, 487 Ticino, 185 Tientsin, 197, 510; trade and population, 512 Tiflis, 456 (ill.), 461, 480 Tigris River, 76, 104 Tilho, Jean, 57, 551 Timbuktu, 551 Timok valley, 304 Timor, Eastern, 158 Tisza River, 226, 227 (map) Togoland, 199, 200, 533, 541, 547, 553; France and, 91; future, 545; old and new boundaries (map), 546 Toledo, general view (ill.), 146 See also Tondern, 176 Tonga, 201 Tonkin, 518 Tordesillas, treaty of, 158 Torontál, 290 Tours, battle of, 149 Trade, Asiatic, key to, 520; British ex- pansion, two theories, 75; British or— ganization, 16; British policy, basis, 26; conflicting principles, 18; Far East and Europe, 490; German colonial, difficul- ties of revival, 202; Germany before the war, 186; Germany, limitations, 205; Italy and, 135, 141; Japanese expansion, 495, 498; Lisbon, 162; Spain, 155; United Kingdom export trade in 1913 (map), 20; United Kingdom import trade in 1913 (map), 21; United States and Latin America, 26, 559 Trans-Caspian railway, 475 Transcaucasia, bibliography, 595; Bolshe- vism, 455, 461; British and French agreements, 451; British withdrawal, 451; confederation, 434; differences and misunderstandings, 454; Federal Republic of, 450; internal rivalries, 450; local treaties, 455; new states, 450; new states and boundaries (map), 452; peoples, 396; race intermixture, 452; relief work, 452; resources and problems, 454; Russian successive advances (map), 451; single outside control desirable, 454 Trans-Saharan railway, 551 Trans-Siberian railway, 404, 473, 483, 516 Transportation in Inner Asia, typical (ill.), 481 Transvaal, 36, 39; Portugal and, 161, 164 Transylvania, 216, 218, 221, 222, 278; difficult terrain, 284; land problems, 292; Rumanians and Magyars in, 283; Sax- ons in, 189; timbered zone in Alps (ill.), 286 Treaties, principle treaties and agreements, 1814–1920, list, 599 Treaty ports in China, 510, 512 Trebizond, 326, 440, 458; trade, 415, 416 Trees, water storage in, 64 Trentino, 132, 133, 134 Trianon, treaty of, 1920, signatories and terms, 601 * Trieste, 138, 207, 249, 259, 261, 263, 264; field of trade rivalry with Fiume (map), 265; harbor (ill.), 130–131 630 The New World Tripartite Agreement, 1920, signatories and terms, 601 Triple Alliance, 1879, 136; signatories, 600 Tripoli, 57, 142, 434, 549 Tropics, imposition of alien ideas on peoples in, 564–565; yellow race in (map), 526 Trotsky, Leon, 388, 389 Trucial League, 68 Tsaribrod, 255, 302, 304 Tsetse fly, 538, 542, 546 Tsingtau, 501, 502, 510 Tsingtau-Chinan railway, 498, 502 Tuaregs, 142, 551 Tundras, 559 Tunis, 532, 535, 540, 547; French occupa- tion, 116, 118; relief belt (map), 113; tribes, 116; Turkish rule, 114 Turanian stock, 474, 479 Turkestan, 405, 470; peoples, 476. See also Russian Turkestan Turkestan, Eastern, 477; control, Chinese, etc., 477; Russia's interest, 480; trade and commodities, 479 Turkey, Albania and, 306, 307; Allied re- ceivership, 439; army and forts, 441; Balkan countries and, 249; Bolshevists and, 461; Britain and, 55; Bulgaria and, 295; business in foreign hands, 435; caliphate question, 441; “capitulations” policy, 435; causes of historic weakness, 431; classification of peoples of Asiatic Turkey, 427; commerce of chief ports, 416; compromises possible, 417; de- cline of the empire (map), 425; dis- organization, 431; division in 1915 and 1916 (map), 102; Egypt, and, 61; eth- nography, 426; European penetration, 425; European possessions lost, 416; extent, 426; finances, 437, 443; First Balkan War, 296; foreigners in, and their privileges, 435; free zones, 440; geo- graphical environment and difficulties of administration, 426; glorification of national heroes, 433; German trade in competition with British and French, 412; Greece and, 315, 320, 324; his- torical development, 431; indemnities and reparations, 440; international ports, 440; Italy and, 132, 138; Kurds and, 444; last remnant, 425; military expeditions and trade routes across, 429; Nationalist movement, 69, 440; navi- gation and harbor rights and concessions Turkey (continued) in 1914 (map), 436; new state, ethnic and economic basis, 442: northern Africa and, 113; policy of oppression, 430; political corruption, 437; political rivalry, 436; population—especially Greek and Armenian (map), 426; pop- ulation densities (map), 428; public debt, 437; revolution of 1908, 432; spheres of influence of the great powers, 434; Syria and, 92; territorial losses, 432: transit, freedom of, 439; treaty agree- ments as to lost property and as to minor- ities, 442; Young Turk movement, 432 Turki, 478 Turkomans, 463,476 Turko-Mongols, 476 Turks, 305, deportations and massacres of Armenians and Syrians, 459; Eastern Turkestan and, 479; Egypt and, 59; Magyars' contest with, 221; two branches, 431 Tutuila, 201 “Twenty-one demands,” 502, 510 Twilight zones, 5 Tyranny. See Oppression Tyrol, 131, 134, 185, 208, 212, 263; disputed territory (map), 134; Germans in, 192 Ucciali, treaty of, 140 Uganda, 125, 533; British protectorate, 552; region (map), 538 Ukraine, 335, 398; approximate limits (map), 350; as a political entity, 402; crops, coal and iron, etc., 400, 401; fertility, 398; German penetration, 188 (map), 189, 382; interdependence of Russia and, 401 Ukrainia, 224 Ukrainians, 224, 378; 343 Ulster, 31, 32 Unie, 261, 269 Union of South Africa, 36, 37, 200, 543; white inhabitants, 38 United Fruit Company, 579 United Kingdom, export trade in 1913, (map), 20; import trade in 1913 (map), 21. See also Britain, British Isles United States, Central America and, 567; expansion since 1898 (with table and map), 560, 561; export trade combina- tions, 566; Japan and, 27; Latin Amer- in Eastern Galicia, Indea: 631 United States (continued) ica, encroachments of rival powers in, 564; Latin American trade, 26, 559; Mexico and, 568; opposition met in expansion, 562; Pacific islands, 52.1– 522; Pacific, naval protection (with map), 522–523; pro-Irish sentiment, 33; Webb Law, 566; West Indies and, 569; world relations, i Upolu, 201, 530 Upper Silesia. See Silesia Ural Mountains, 385, 473 Ural River, 473 Urga, 481 Urmia, 446 Uruguay, Argentina and la Plata estuary, 576 Urundi, 124, 125, 126 (map) Usambara Highlands, 542 Úsküb, 257, 310 Ussuri River, 5.18 Uzbegs, 476 Valencia, 147, 150, 153 Valenciennes, 193 Valona, 144, 263, 308, 309, 310, 311 Wan, 458 Wan, Lake, 429 Varna, 300 Vasai basin, 128 Vatican and France, 81 Venezuela, boundary with Colombia, 577 Venice, 135 Venizelos, Eleutherios, 315 Verdun, treaty of (843), 81 (map) Versailles, treaty of, 1919, Germany's losses by, list, 193; signatories and terms, 601 Vienna, 206; sieges, 431; special problem, 211 Vienna, Congress of, 1814–15, 82; signa- tories and terms, 599 Vienna, treaty of, 1864, signatories and terms, 599 Victoria Nyanza, 553 Villages in India, 48 Vilna, 189, 355, 360, 363; Polish occupation, 335 Virgin Islands, 167, 174, 561, 569; Char- lotte Amelie (ill.), 563 Vistula River, 194, 339, 393; improvement, 342; Poles and Germans facing each other across, 341; Polish cities and (map), 337; Polish claims, 336 Vlachs, 282, 317; in Balkan lands (map), 283 Vladivostok, 398, 406, 410, 500, 517 Vlore. See Valoma Volga region, droughts, 387 Volga River, 393 Vorarlberg, 181, 185, 212 Wadai, 63, 65 Wadi Halfa, 64 Wahabis, 66, 67, 69 Wallachia, 278, 280 Wallachians, 282 Walloons, 122 Walvis Bay, 198 War, 1, 506 Warsaw, 328, 334, 342, 349, 351, 393 Warsaw, Duchy of, 356 Water supply, storage in trees, 64 Wazirs, 44, 484 Webb Law, 566 Wei-hai-wei, 496 Weimar, 204 Welle, 128 Wesenberg, 367 West Africa, 553, 554 (map), 555 West Indies, foreign control and United States interests, 569 Westphalia, coal, 89 Whale oil, 172 Whaling, 171 Wheat, Australia, harvest India, distribution (map), 50 White, Chief Justice E. D., 580 White Mountain, battle of, 236 White race, African penetration, 534, 535, 536, 537 (map); in South Africa, 39, 43 White Sea, 370, 373 Wied, William of, 308 Wild animals in Africa, protection, 550 William I, of the Netherlands, 119 William of Wied, 308 (ill.), 527; Wilson, Woodrow, and the Armenian boundary, 458, 459 Windau, 369 Windward Islands, 569 Witte, Count, railway and other policies, 385 Wittelsheim, 81 World, population (map), 525 World War, basic cause, 532; Belgium in, 1.19; British debts, 27; causes, 8; con- fusion as to objects, 10; issues, changed aspect, 8; purpose, 131; region fought 632 The New World World War (continued) over compared with Napoleonic Wars (map), 121; reparations, 78 Wrangel, General Peter, 389, 390, 403 Wrigley, Gladys M., ii Yamasaki, N., 503 Yap, 521, 524 Yarkand, 477 Yatung, 487, 488 Yellow race, tropics (map), 526; race and, 492 Yemen, 67, 68, 104; geography of, 71 Yenisei River, 404 Yermak, 403 Young Turks, 432 Younghusband, Sir Francis, 487 white Yülinfu (ill.), 509 Yünnan, 513, 518, 519 Zafarin Islands, 155 Zambesi River, 534, 541, 550, 553; basin, 160, 162 Zanzibar, 55, 160, 199, 533, 540, 552; German cities and, 198 Zara, 255, 261, 264, 266, 268, 269 Zemstvos, 384, 406 Zengg, 266 Zionist movement, 98, 418; Moslem oppo- sition, 98 Zuider Zee, 179 Zungarian gates, 475 Zurich, treaty of, 1859, signatories and terms, 599 r ; * * * * * * ~ * : * * * : * * --- . . . . . " - - wº . . . . f : ; ; ; ; ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * * * * * * * * * * : * * * ſº III Uſ § | [] r # # É # R É Eº £141 tisu sº, tº ". ſº - *-* Attº-----º-º-º-º: 2:...'" -º-º-º: .. º U.N.R.R.I. JºJº RIAJ.J.Cº. LXII cº- §º 5t # º fº º * º ſº º º: 1 " * * -d º: ** V. - ==-crº-rz-rºx--------~~~~~~...~...~, ºr - --- -- - ----- ------ - - - - Esº-ººººººººººººººººººººººººººº-ººrººs -º-º-º-º-º- *** - " sº - º º- E- * -- a-ºº-ºw." * * - ** --- --- isº--> - - - - gºº-ºº: ºº::-º-º-º-º- - - -- ºr -- - º - - - º º º **º-ºº: ex fººtºrs: º -- º sº º - sº - Sºsiº - &º hººz.: º º Sºº - w sº-º-º-º-º-º-º: ºº: ' tº sº ***ś º §º. tºº º : *º-ºr-º-º: º - § º §: ś -º-º: Fºgº º : Sºś º: tº: ::::::::: º ºº: º- tºº-º-º-º-º-º: º: Fº º º ºº:: ºq"g -- º:º §º º Sºº-º-º-º-º-º-º: º, ºr ºrº-ºººººººººº-ºº-ºººººººººº-º-º-º: tºº º º ºº: º ºxºsº- *** º ºº: tº: º: * º - º - - Fººtº: §º: º -- --- *-º-º-º: º ** - - sº : -- § :3#º: Eº º ºº::sº - ºr *gs=== ºrrºss-ººººººººº. º - - ** *::::: - 㺠$º --- º: sº º =º **** -- - -º-º-º: cº-º-º: - C- tº: º -º-º: fºssierº a º: §:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::$º sººººººººººººººººº-ºº: ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: zºº ºs-seºk-ºiºsº ºº:: º --- º ºw- ºrs ºx-º-º-º: º::::::::::::::: zººsººººººººººººº-ºº: - º: §:ºriºgº sº º ºis tº ººzºº.º.º. ººr. ºrºgºe sº ºº: sº º fºre - § º ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ſº º: ;: zº: º :* V- gºal º º - º º º: º º-º-º: º º *:::::::::::::::::::::: - sºººººººººººº- ::::::::::::::::::::::: º º :::::::::::::: º:-ººrººººº-ºº:::::::::::sº * * * ºs gº-ºº: *****-º,---- Sºººººººººººººº: º jº: ::::::::::::: Esº º::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: - º º º º º: º - º ºº:: Rººs-rººrºº ºº: xº-º-º-º-º: -º-º- E-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - º ºrs saxº-rºyº º - - - - º º Kaº: sº-ºº: º - lº tº: - sº - - º º::=:::::::::::::::: º º $º - º º - B - - - &º: - º - º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: sº cº-ºrº-3-º- ºeºesºrºrº : §::::::::::::::::::$º ſº º: º ºº:: º: i:::::::::::::::: ºfºº §::::::::::::::::::§:::::::::::::- º: º: :: ºeºsº E- º º - tº-ºº-ºº: º º º - º ºº:::::::::: - - º - - sº-ºº-ºº: º - ºeºsº - - iº - sº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ºº: sºvº * º ----- sº ***** º º - º: §: º - sº ºº: ºº:: º: Sºrºrº £º º ºº:: sº - :ºº-ºº-ºº: - ºº: ººººººººººº-ºº: sº-sºº §§>;-->= Fº *----- º - - gº - -º-º-º: .." " ----, -º-º-º-º: re-esº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ---- - - - - ºº:::::::::::::::ºº-ºº: 2-4 * fºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºººººººººººººººº. *** sº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - x+-r'. - * - rºº Kºś - - spot-nºr's ex-ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºrrºr-wra-ºesºeºſºraeswºrrºrst-ºº-ººs”-we-ºr-ºtºcºqº-º; :* :::::::::::\ººtº::::::::::::::::::::::::::: jº: ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º- zº-º-º: - - ***********-****** * *:::::::::: *********** - **kºs-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-en-º-º-º-ºººººwºw **u-º-º-ºrfº.º. ººr.” tº-º-º-ºxyxº~... sº **-wº-ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-erº” ºr ******.*.*.*.*.* *...*.*.*.xfºr-º-º-º-ºw-tºº-ººººººººº-º-º-º- - $ºw. - - - - - - - **********-**-**** *:::::::::::::::: : **********:::: *********rrºr-º-º-º-º-ºwº-ºº-ºººº- º º::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ************-****ers - - ****-retrº-º-º-º-º-rºre-ºr **.*.*, * :----...sº . <-----------> -->+. ,----...-----. = , •e-er-ºxºse-º-º-º: servaºyºser-sºrrºsºrºrºszº-sº-trºcºrrºwrººs'º *r-ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - - º::cºº:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: **** *º-ºº-ºº-ººººººººº…~ºperºvºº-ºº-º-º-º-º-º-ºxee" rºrºwºcºmºrrºwsiºxºtrº-ººººººººººº-ººrºººººººººº-ºº:** - ** *- - - --- - º -º-º-º: ******-*.*.*.*.*. º - sº-wrº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-aa…º-º-º-º-º: **- 2-& -- *- - - --- - s:- &z--> : - - : sº- :::::::::::::::::::::::::::~5-2-2. : *** **-e-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºrrºr--ºrrºwer-rrºr--ºr-ree-s3:::::::::::::::::: - §:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: - - *:::= -º-º-º-º-c-ººººººº-ºº-ºº-ºººººººº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- - - *******r---ºrvººr ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ºr: sº-º-º- **** . :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: -- rº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºrwe’ºrº. vs “w-wºr-º-exº~ ******* ::::::::: - : ***** . - - -- - - - -- ºxº-ºººººº-ºº-ººrººº-ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - - ******** g-rººrºpºr-ºw º ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ------- riº. ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: º: 3º sear- :****************** ************---º-º-º-º:**-*****-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-er-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: &-rºtº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-recºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º:----º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºwº-ºº-º-º-ºwer-rºrcºrvº.º. }***********-*********-*.*.*.*.*.*-*-ra-as-ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ººrººº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - - - - - * , * - - - * ********-*--------------------------------------º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - - º :------~~~~~~~~~~ - --~~~~~~~~~<>~~~-swº-º-º-º-ºxº~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ** **º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-Sº --ºr-º-º-º-º: -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- > -sº *************************-*********-*********-º-º-º-º-º-º->. - - - - - - - - ºrces - ...-----º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: --Tºº ãº-º: - - **- +-------->;--tº-e-- **-º-º-º-º-º-º-º,”---ºr-º- - ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: -º-, -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: **** -º-º-º-º- *** * **.*. ********* - * **.*.*.*.*.*-º-º-º-º-º-, *.*...*-*** *-*.*.*.*.*.*.*-* 's ^ --- ~4.” “vº, - *********-*-*-*: ~~~~~ * -********** Gº"…rewºrks- ************ºtºrºve:*****-º-º-ºr :************* • - ** - ~y--wºr"ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-rºw-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºws----------º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º----------------~~~~~~~~~~~; :---- ~~~~ ******* **************-******** Cº- - ******* - - tºº-------> <----------------ºrvºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º: ºrrºw-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-a---sº-º-º-º-º-ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: rºº-ººººººººººººººººº-ººººººººººººººººººººººººº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-Fºx-- * *-i-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-----------º-º-º-º-º-º-ºw-----4----------sº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º--...-------- : **--------º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: -4-ºxº~& ºtº-º-º-º-, ****************** *-a-we-º-º-º: - - ********-****~~º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *~ *-*-*-** **-*- : *-***-*-***-*…********* --rºyº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-rº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- -º-º-ºr- ~-tº- - -*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: Sºº-ºº-ºº:::::::::::::::::::::::::: *** ****** -*-*-e-º-º-º-º-º-º-e-ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- *.*, * > -ºº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: 2-3 *-*w--~~~~~~...~------º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºw-º-º-º-º-º-, --- - *****-er-era-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º **********~~~~~~~º-º-º-º-º-º: - 3. ** **--~~~~~~~--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - - - - Sºº-ºº::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: r-ºw. -- - - - - - - - ------------------~~~~<> - ~~~~<---------~~~~~~~ -: **** - --- ***** -***-ºs-º-º-º-º-º-º-, --- :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: *-º-º-º-tº ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: **** ,” . . . . - **-***************-********* -***** ****-*.*.*.*.*.*.*-*. º:::::::::::-º-º-º-º-º: *: **************-*-* - - º, * * *…** -** ***** * *****rre- *****. . *** **** **** * *-*.*.*.*.*wrºvº ºn , - º *::::::::::::: - .*** "...~ºr ***** ES-º-º-º-º: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ******** - **.**********-******** .*-ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: - sºrºrºkº-º-º-º-º-º: ºs---------e. ~~~3-…--º-º-º-º-º-º-ºººººº. -***-********~~~~~~~~~~ *- : ***** --~~~~ *****-*************-*-vs-º-º-º-º-º-º: :* *********** - - r - - - - - - - --~~~~~ - - - º - ---, --~~~~~~~~~~~~~...~~~~…~~~~~~~ 4. ~~~~~~~~~ **** tº ~ ****-*... :::: - - º º ****---ri-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- ***-*-********- --- - * * *** --------4-------e--- *-* --> ~~~~ - :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: **** -->e-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- -ºº -----------> --- - ºº:: * *-i-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *****---> - - …~-tº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º:-e-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º---- º:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: **=es-ºu - - -----> - --~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~<-----------~~~~~~t-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º--------------->~~~~~~es-------------------~~~~rº --~~~~~~~~~~~~s------------ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: º: *tº ––––––. - --e-r-º- == – *-**-*-**-***** - - *º-º-º-º-º: *********rº-ºº-º-ºxº - # * - --~~~~…~~~~~~~: ~~~~s------->~~~~ *-ºxº-aºº-º-º:* : gº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- :- -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- ****** :----> --> -º-º-º-º-º-º-º--------->|->|-ºº-ºº-º-º:----º-º-º-º::i-º-º-º: -- *.*.*.*.*-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º:*.*-ºsº.-->~~~~~~~~ *-r :::::::::::::cº::::::::::::::tº:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: -**rº...arºº-º-º-, -º, * : *t :::::::::::::::::::::: ...-e-ºº-º-º-º-, *.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*. -:::::::::::: º: *:::::::::::::::::::::::::::: I. *. ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ſ - - - - - - - - - '*-*-*-*---------~~º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- cº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- 2- : - -º--~~~~~~~-º-º-tre++ - --~~~~~~~~~~~~ **** *** -. s. 2.-----|3: -*. :-------e-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: ****-*-4----- re-ºr-º-º-ºr º-º-º: w- *:::-- 's-e-w- : - ~ Ǻ-*-*-** ******xº~...~x << *-***********-*. **~~~ - - - - - - - - -- , - - - *** **** *>~~~3:2-ºxº~~~~> * ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: *******************~~~~~3-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºxº-4----, -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºr-º-º-º: ****** -*-->e------ --~~~~~~~~~~ - *-*s --~~~~-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *~~~~~ *-i-rº-º-º: -º-,------~~~}º- -**** - - - -*-**********-*.*.*- ------º-º-º-r-----.”------ --~~~~~…~...~~~~~~~<: 3--º-º-º-3 ********~~~~~~~~~-º-º-º-º: - - ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~<-- ****** -- - - - - :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: fººtº-ºº::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: * Prº. - º:-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: *****----------~~~~------º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º- -- > *** - - -***** **-*************** §::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: **************** -- - - º-ººººº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: -**************~~3 ********-*.-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º:* *.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.********, *-**-xº~. *-*******-xx--º-º-º-º-º- ºr º: '.….~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~" -**º-º-º- tº-4 is ºw-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º:: *-*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*. --2,+ ******º-º-e-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-erºtº-º-º-º: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::c:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::rº-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *…*- **************** **** -º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-ºº-ºººººººººººººººººw'-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: --~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ *...*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*-ºw-º-º-º-º-º: *** *****ºtºr - - - - - --~~~~<-ºº-ºº::::::::::::::::::::-->“pººr. ºr ºr rºtº-ºver-tºº-ºº: - T -- - - - - - -- – -- - - "…~~~ -----------------...-----~~~~ * * --" - -- ~~<- x